Volume II
Surveys in Differential Geometry Proceedings of the conference on geometry and topology held at Harvard University, April 23-25, 1993, sponsored by Lehigh University's Journal of Differential Geometry.
i?
International Press
JOURNAL OF DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY Editors-in-Chief C.C.HSIUNG Lehigh University Bethlehem, PA 18015
S.T.YAU Harvard University Cambridge, MA 02138
Editors H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR. State University of New York Stony Brook, NY 11794
JEFF CHEEGER New York University New York, NY 10012
SIMON K.DONALDSON University of Oxford Oxford OXI 3LB, ENGLAND
RICHARD M. SCHOEN Stanford University Stanford, CA 94305
Associate Editors MICHAEL H. FREEDMAN
SHIGEFUMI MORI
University of California La Jolla, CA 92093
Faculty of Sciences Nagoya University Nagoya 464, JAPAN
NIGEL HITCHIN
Mathematics Institute University of Warwick Coventry CV4 7AL, ENGLAND
ALAN WEINSTEIN
University of California Berkeley, CA 94720
Surveys in Differential Geometry: Proceedings of the Conference on Geometry and Topology held at Harvard University, April 23-25, 1993, sponsored by the Journal of Differential Geometry, C. C. Hsiung and S.-T. Yau, Editorsin-Chief. ISBN 1-57146-027-6 Library of Congress Card Catalog
Number~
95-079518
International Press Incorporated, Boston P.O. Box 2872 Cambridge, MA All rights are reserved. No part of this work can be reproduced in any form, electronic or mechanical, recording, or by any information storage and data retrieval system, without specific authorization from the publisher. Reproduction for classroom or personal use will, in most cases, be granted without charge. Copyright ©1995 International Press. Printed in the United States of America. The paper used in this issue is acid-free and falls within the guidelines established to ensure permanence and durability.
International Press Publications Mathematical Physics Quantum Groups: From Coalgebras to Drinfeld Algebras Steven Schnider and Shlomo Sternberg 75 Years of Radon Transform edited by Simon Gindikin and Peter Michor Perspectives in Mathematical Physics edited by Robert Penner and S.-T. Yau Essays On Mirror Manifolds edited by S. T. Yau Mirror Symmetry II edited by Brian Greene XIth International Congress on Mathematical Physics edited by D. Iagolnitzer
Number Theory Elliptic Curves, Modular Forms, and Fermat's Last Theorem edited by John Coates and Shing Tung Yau
Geometry and Topology L2 Moduli Spaces with 4-Manifolds with Cylindrical Ends by Clifford Henry Taubes The L2 Moduli Space and a Vanishing Theorem for Donaldson Polynomial Invariants by J. Morgan, T. Mrowka, and D. Ruberman Algebraic Geometry and Related Topics edited by J.-H. Yang, Y. Namikawa, and K. Veno Lectures on Harmonic Maps by R. Schoen and S.-T. Yau Lectures on Differential Geometry by R. Schoen and S.-T. Yau Geometry, Topology and Physics for Raoul Bott edited by S.-T. Yau Lectures on Low-Dimensional Topology edited by K. Johannson Chern, A Great Geometer edited by S.-T. Yau Surveys in Differential Geometry edited by C.C. Hsiung and S.-T. Yau
Analysis Proceedings of the Conference on Complex Analysis edited by Lo Yang Integrals of Cauchy Type on the Ball by S. Gong Advances in Geometric Analysis and Continuum Mechanics edited by P. Concus and K. Lancaster Lectures on Nonlinear Wave Equations by C. D. Sogge
Physics Physics of the Electron Solid edited by S.-T. Chui Proceedings of the International Conference on Computational Physics edited by D.H. Feng and T.-Y. Zhang Chen Ning Yang, A Great Physicist of the Twentieth Century edited by S.-T. Yau Yukawa Couplings and the Origins of Mass edited by Pierre Ramond
Current Developments in Mathematics, 1995 Collected and Selected Works The Collected Works of Freeman Dyson The Collected Works of C. B. Morrey The Collected Works of P. Griffiths V. S. Varadarajan
Journals Communications in Analysis and Geometry Mathematical Research Letters Methods and Applications of Analyis
Preface
In 1993, the Journal of Differential Geometry sponsored another conference on differential geometry. The first conference of this type was held in 1990. The proceedings were published in 1991 in Surveys in Differential Geometry, 1991 There is still significant interest in this volume and there continues to be developments in the subject. For this reason, we intend on sponsoring this conference and the accompanying publication once every three years. The conference was held at Harvard University, coinciding with a a celebration of Raoul Bott's 70th birthday. We are very grateful to the speakers, who attracted a large audience, and to the more than three hundred participants, whose participation made this conference a success. We wish to thank Harvard University Mathematics department for supporting the conference, especially WiIfried Schmid who was then the Department Chair, Ruby Aguirre, the department administrator, and to the editors of the Journal of Differential Geometry, whose continued support of the journal make it the successful publication that it is.
C.C. Hsiung Lehigh University S.-T. Yau Harvard University
Table of Contents Reflections on Geometry and Physics MICHAEL ATIYAH •..•..••...•.....••••..•.•...••.•...................• 1
The Formation of Singularities in the Ricci Flow RICHARD S. HAMILTON ........•.....•...•...•••.••.....•.....•..•..•.
7
Spaces of Algebraic Cycles H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR .•••.•..........•••..••..•••.•..............
137
Problems on rational points and rational curves on algebraic varieties Yu.1. MANIN .•...•............•....••.....••....•...............••. 214 Rectifiability of the singular sets of multiplicity 1 minimal surfaces and energy minimizing maps LEON SIMON ••.......•.........•••.••.............•..•....•..•....•. 246 Homology cobordism and the simplest perturbative Chern-Simons 3-manifold invariant CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES .......................................... 306 Metabolic cobordism and the simplest perturbative Chern-Simons 3-manifold invariant CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES .......................................... 414
SURVEYS IN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY, 1995 Vol. 2 ©1995, International Press
Reflections on Geometry and Physics MICHAEL ATIYAH
1 Philosophical reflection. In this lecture I will discuss in general terms what has been happening to the theoretical physics/mathematics frontier over the past 15 years. Specifically I refer to the geometric and topological aspects of quantum field theory which have now spread in a variety of directions. New terms such as quantum groups, quantum geometry, quantum cohomology are appearing. These indicate the scope and significance of the interaction, but it is premature in my view to try to force everything into a particular mould. Time will tell what the significant aspects really are and then the right title to adopt will be clearer. However, there has been unease expressed in certain quarters, most recently by Jaffe and Quinn, about the doubtful mixture that is emerging. Not tied closely to experimental physics nor to rigorous mathematics, standards are endangered and warning signs should be erected! Like a ship exploring unchartered seas, with inadequate maps and faulty compasses, catching glimpses of beautiful tropical islands: mirages or reality? We can distinguish perhaps four different types of reaction by mathematicians towards these developments (A) Take the heuristic results "discovered" by physicists and try to give rigorous proofs by other methods. Here the emphasis is on ignoring the physics background and only paying attention to mathematical results that emerge from physics. Like Ramanujan who intuited marvelous formulae that defied mathematical proof so physicists are viewed in the same light. The task of the mathematician is to start from scratch and aim to prove these marvelous "intuited truths". This is, of course, the minimalist reaction: the mathematician reacting in his own terms to an externally posed problem. We cannot ignore such challenges and we would all agree that a rigorous proof is a desirable objective. (B) The second approach is try to understand the physics involved and enter into a dialogue with physicists concerned. This has great potential benefits since we mathematicians can get behind the scenes and see something of the stage machinery. This may provide clues for possible proofs, it may enable us to generalize the story and it may help us to see unexpected links with other areas. We may also be able to assist the physicists in their task, by pointing out relevant bits of mathematics or suggesting new points of view. This dialogue has, in fact, been developing widely in recent years, so that a whole new generation of mathematicians and physicists have begun to speak a common language. The worry of Jaffe and others is that this is a kind of pidgin
2
MICHAEL ATIYAH
English, with little grammar and no literary merit. But in its own terms it has been a remarkable success. The "results" keep growing in scope and depth and inevitably attract the incoming generation. The question is: where is it all leading? (C) Following on from (B), one natural road for mathematicians to take is to try to develop the physics on a rigorous basis so as to give formal justification to the conclusions. This is the traditional role of the "mathematical physicist" , of whom Jaffe is a fine exponent, and who have made rich contributions in the past. While undeniably the "right" approach for a respectable mathematician, it is sometimes too slow to keep up with the action. Depending on the maturity of the physical theory and the technical difficulties involved, the gap between what is mathematically provable and what is of current interest to theoretical physicists can be immense. Moreover, proofs are not always constructed from the bottom up. They may start from the top, or from the side, and only emerge after many hesitant steps and experimentation. Moreover, the right framework has to be established before rigorous work can begin, just as an architectural plan is necessary before the builders move in. (D) Finally, and most ambitions of all, we may try to understand the deeper meaning of the physics-mathematics connection. Rather than view mathematics as a tool to establish physical theories, or physics as" a way of pointing to mathematical truths, we can try to dig more deeply into the relation between them. This may lead us into the perennial problem of deciding whether mathematical results are invented or discovered. This investigation may only have philosophical or theoretical interest but it could lead to better understanding and even to new insights and genuine progress. These four approaches are not, of course, mutually exclusive but many people will only dip their toes into this whole area and are happy to stick with (A). A sizeable community goes as far as (B), while (C) and (D) are definitely minority tastes. I do not disguise my attraction to (D) and this lecture will try to develop my ideas in that direction. 2 A Survey. Having set the philosophical scene, and raised ~ome questions, I want to spend some time surveying briefly some of the new ideas and results in mathematics that have emerged from the interaction with theoretical physics. 2.1 Index Theory. The index theorem for the Dirac operator on compact lliemannean manifolds has turned out to be of great interest and relevance in gauge theories, since it measures the difference between left-handed and right-handed spinors or other physical entities. Various new proofs emerged naturally from the physicist's viewpoint. In particular, supersymmetry, an algebraic formalism that is increasingly used to bring fermions and bosons onto an equal footing, has led to useful simplifications. Moreover, a whole range of generalizations, including the study of the dependence of the Dirac operator on background gauge potentials, have been suggested by the physics. These have subsequently been given rigorous proofs by Bismut and others.
REFLACTIONS ON GEOMETRY AND PHYSICS
3
2.2 Elliptic Genera. Quantum field theory (for one space dimension) led Witten to introduce an appropriate Dirac operator on loop spaces. This has shed light on elliptic genera: these are generating functions for an appropriate sequence of Dirac operators coupled to bundles associated to the tangent bundle. It turns out that they are modular forms and the physics gives a natural interpretation of modularity as a consequence of (2-dimensional) relativistic invariance. Moreover a conjectured rigidity theorem (for compact group actions) also followed naturally from the physics and was eventually given rigorous proofs by Bott and Taubes. 2.3 Topological Quantum Field Theories. A number of extremely interesting topological theories, including Jones' work on knot invariants and Donaldson's work on 4-manifolds, have been given quantum field theory formulations by Witten. This has provided a unifying framework and has also led to generalizations of the original work. Thus the Jones invariants of knots in S3 have now been extended to knots in general closed 3-manifolds. Theories of this type, in dimension 2, have led to very precise and new information about the moduli space of flat unitary bundles on Riemann surfaces. 2.4 Conformal Field Theory. The representation theory of certain infinitedimensional algebras, related to the circle, has a globalization over Riemann surfaces. The original circle here appears as the boundary of a "puncture" on the surface. Such "conformal field theories" are reasonably precise algebraic objects which connect representation theory to topology, via the topological Jones theory of (2.3). 2.5. Quantum Cohomology. Quantum field theory leads to a natural deformation of the ordinary cohomology ring of a manifold. This may briefly be referred to as "quantum cohomology". For example, for the complex projective line PI the ordinary cohomology is generated by x E H 2 (P1 ) with x 2 = 0, while the quantum cohomology has x 2 = {3, where {3 is a real number ( a parameter of the theory so that (3 -+ 0 is the classical limit). These "quantum cohomologies" are of considerable mathematical interest. For projective spaces and more generally Grassmannians they are related to the "Verlinde algebra" which plays a key role in conformal field theory and related topics. For 3-dimensional Calabi-Yau manifolds it contains information about the numbers of rational curves. This information is consistent with known results but does not yet have a rigorous mathematical proof. The physicist's "proof' involves the intriguing notion of dual or mirror manifolds, a pair of Calabi-Yau manifolds which are supposed to yield the same quantum field theory, but in dual ways. 2.6 2-dimensional gravity. The examples so far all fall within the class of gauge theories for forces other than gravity. However, there have been interesting developments related to gravity in 2-dimensions. These are closely involved with the moduli spaces of Riemann surfaces. In particular, triangulations of these moduli spaces link up with the combinatorial techniques of Feynman diagrams. The most exciting developments in this direction are due to Kontsevich and they also link up with the topology of 3-manifolds.
4
MICHAEL ATIYAH
2.7 "Twisted" theories. Witten has shown how many physical quantum field theories can be "twisted" to yield topological theories. The twisting involves changing the spin of various fields. Certain correlation functions of the physical theory can be identified with some of the correlation functions of the twisted topological theory. This link has potentially important consequences. For example, Witten has suggested that the presence of a mass gap for N = 2 supersymmetric Yang-Mills theory in 4-dimensions may be related to conjectural properties of the Donaldson polynomials (which are derived from the topological Yang-Mills theory).
3 Interpretation. All these examples of fruitful interaction between quantum field theory and topology indicate that something substantial and widespread is involved. How should we interpret all this, what does it imply for "real" physics, and how are we to deal with its mathematical aspects? Perhaps it is helpful if we recall the role of symmetry (and group theory) in physics. Over the years symmetry has come to be recognized as a crucial guiding principle in large parts of fundamental physics. Starting with finite symmetries (as in crystals) and then moving on to continuous symmetries of compact groups, quantum physicists eventually introduced Hilbert space representations of non-compact Lie groups. This introduces extra analytical difficulties and, at first, there was no systematic mathematical theory to build on. However, mathematicians such as Gelfand and Harish-Chandra soon moved in to establish a base and develop an elaborate theory. Infinite-dimensional representations are now regarded as a vital part of many branches of mathematics including those like Number Theory, which are far removed from Physics. I suggest that we are now seeing a similar, but more elaborate story involving the impact of Topology on Quantum Theory. Early topological ideas go back to Dirac (and even to Maxwell) but have only played a major part in the past decade or two. Again we are essentially dealing with infinite-dimensional phenomena (quantum fields) and it is the topology of these infinite-dimensions that is making itself felt. Topology and Symmetry have close analogies and relations, but Topology is inherently broader and more complex. For this reason we should not be surprised if Quantum Topology is a difficult subject which will take many years to mature. Topology and Group Theory have something in common in their relation to Physics. Both interact, in principle, via Analysis but for many purposes the Analysis can be by-passed and replaced by Algebra. This is why so much of the Physics literature is filled with formulae. In the absence of a fully-fledged theory able to handle all the difficult analysis, physicists work formally and heuristically with algebraic formulae. It is clear that the presence of symmetry in a physical situation imposes strong constraints and these can be exploited algebraically. What is the corresponding impact of topology? As Witten has explained, topology tends to provide information about low-energy states. For example, Hodge's theory of harmonic forms shows that the zero-energy states (for differential forms) corre-
REFLACTIONS ON GEOMETRY AND PHYSICS
5
spond to the cohomology. It is worth noting that no significant topology enters for scalar fields, but in the super-symmetric version, when differential forms are brought in, the topological consequences become very significant. Corresponding statements can be made when we pass from quantum mechanics to quantum field theory. Interesting topology usually requires many nonscalar fields and frequently involves super-symmetry. Symmetry and topology can play complementary roles with topology helping to determine the ground-states and symmetry then telling us how to build up higher states. Now let me return to the general question of the "meaning" of all this "quantum topology". It would be hard to deny, in the face of all accumulated evidence, that the physicists who dabble with topology and quantum field theory are really on to something. How should we mathematicians respond, giving that a great deal rests on heuristic calculations and physical insight? Physicists will say that they are trying to develop quantum field theories which will explain all elementary particles and, if they are ambitious, also gravity. They are experimenting with a wide variety of models, many of which are "toy" models in the sense that they are grossly over-simplified in order to make them tractable. Given the extreme difficulty of the "real" physical theories, it is not unreasonable to focus on easier ones where one can make progress and gain insight science always progresses in this way, although the mark of good scientists is to play with the right toys. A simplified model may be one in lower dimensions or having additional symmetries which lead perhaps to exact solutions. What the physicists typically extract is a lot of algebraic information (they like formulae!) and a toy model usually bristles with formal algebra. This is the conventional, and acceptable, explanation of the physicists. What should be the reaction of the mathematician? Here we find a marked contrast, depending on the mathematician's background. Analysts, particularly those who have been trying to provide a rigorous basis for quantum field theory, dislike the algebraic superstructure which they think skirts the issue and hides the analytical difficulties. They would prefer to concentrate on the simplest possible theory algebraically so as to face up to analytical difficulties. Other mathematicians, coming from algebra, geometry or topology, are attracted by the superstructure and recognize there numerous features linked to their own experience. They are more than happy to follow the physicists in postponing any consideration of real analysis and concentrating on the formal structure. The hope, and ultimate justification, is that the formal apparatus may in the end lead the way to producing a rigorous theory. Perhaps the analysis will prove more tractable when approached the right way. It is already clear that a more formally complicated theory may turn out to be essentially simpler and better behaved than an apparently elementary theory, For example, in 4-dimensions, it is now recognized that Yang-Mills theory is better behaved than a scalar fjJ4 theory. Now let me turn to a more difficult question. What are to make of the striking results in 3 and 4-dimensional geometry that have emerged from field theory ideas? Specifically I have in mind the Jones invariants of knots and Donaldson's
6
MICHAEL ATIYAH
profound results on 4-manifolds. Is the relation with physics an accident which will in due course be eliminated, and replaced by more conventional mathematical techniques, or is the physics here to stay? My own view is that the quantum standpoint is essential and that we are dealing with aspects of geometry or topology which are best understood in terms of quantum physics. For example, the fact that the 4-dimensional phenomena unearthed by Donaldson do not occur in other dimensions is surely an indication of their depth, and an indication that other conventional mathematical techniques will be inadequate to explain them. In 3-dimensions the work of Vassiliev, based on conventional homology (of a function space), has cast new light on the Jones invariants but it has not yet displaced the quantum approach. It provides an alternative avenue with different merits. My conclusion is that, as in earlier episodes, mathematicians will absorb and abstract the essential quantum theory ideas, and develop an appropriate branch of mathematics. Because of the complexity and depth of the theories, especially if gravity is to be included, this may take time and may develop into an imposing edifice. REFERENCES
[1]
A. Jaffe and F. Quinn, "Theoretical Mathematics": Toward a cultural synthesis of mathematics and theoretical physics, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 29 (1993) 1-13. TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE CB2 ENGLAND
1TQ
SURVEYS
Vol.
IN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY, 1995 2 ©1995, International Press
The Formation of Singularities in the Ricci Flow RICHARD
S.
HAMILTON
1 The Equation. We have many cases now where some geometrical object can be improved by evolving it with a parabolic partial differential equation. In the Ricci Flow we try to improve a Riemannian metric g(x, y) by evolving it by its Ricci curvature Rc(x, y) under the equation
ata g(X, Y) = -2Rc(X, Y). In local geodesic coordinates {xi} at a point P where the metric is
ds 2
= g'JdXidxj
we find that the ordinary Laplacian of the metric is "6," gij
82 == gpq 8 x P ax 9 g'j
= -2Rc(X, Y)
so the Ricci flow is really the heat equation for a Riemannian metric
at8 g =
"6."g.
In this paper we will survey some of the basic geometrical properties of the Ricci Flow with a view to considering what kind of singularities might form. This has proven to be a useful technique even where we want to prove convergence; sometimes if we know enough about the singularities we can see there aren't any. It is also the first step toward continuing the flow through essential singularities where the topology of the manifold may change, and hopefully simplify.
2 Exact Solutions. In order to get a feel for the equation we present some examples of specific solutions. (a) Einstein Metrics If the initial metric is Ricci flat, so that Rc - 0, then clearly the metric remains stationary. This happens, for example, on a flat torus Tm = SI X ..• X SI, or on a K3 Kahler surface with a Calabi-Yau metric. If the initial metric is Einstein with positive scalar curvature, the metric will shrink under the flow by a time-dependent factor. For example, on a sphere S;
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
8
of radius r and dimension n, the sectional curvatures are all1/r 2 and the Ricci curvatures are all (n -1)/r2. This gives the ordinary differential equation
dr
dt
n-1 =--r
with the solution r2 = 1 - 2(n - l)t which starts as a unit sphere r
= 1 at t = 0 and shrinks to a point as
t --+ T = 1/2(n - 1). Any Einstein metric of positive scalar curvature behaves the same way, and shrinks to a point homothetically as t approaches some finite time T, while the curvature becomes infinite like 1/(T - t). By contrast, if we start with an Einstein metric of negative scalar curvature, the metric will expand homothetically for all time, and the curvature will fall back to zero like -l/t. For example, on a hyperbolic manifold of constant curvature -1/ r2 we get the ordinary differential equation
which has the solution r
dr
n-l
dt
r
= 1 + 2(n -
l)t,
with K = -1 at t = O. Note that now the solution only goes back in time to T = -!(n - 1), when the metric explodes out of a single point in a big bang. (b) Product Metrics IT we take a product metric on a product manifold M x N to start, the metric will remain a product metric under the Ricci Flow, and the metric on each factor evolves by the Ricci Flow there independently of the other factor. Thus on 8 2 x 8 1 the 8 2 shrinks to a point in a finite time while the 8 1 stays fixed; hence the manifold collapses to a circle. On a product 8 2 x 8 2 with different radii, the sphere of sma.ller radius collapses faster, and shrinks to a point while the other metric is still non-degenerate, and the limit manifold is 8 2. IT the radii start the same, they remain the same, and the whole product . shrinks to a point in finite time. (c) Quotient Metrics IT the Riemannian manifold N = M /r is a quotient of a Riemannian manifold M by a group of isometries r at the start, it will remain so under the Ricci Flow. This is because the Ricci Flow on M preserves the isometry group. For example, a projective space Rpn = 8 n / Z2 of constant curvature shrinks to a point the same as its cover 8 n . The 8 2 bundle over 8 1 where the gluing map reverses orientation can be written as a quotient W2 8 1 = 8 2 X 8 1 / Z2 where Z2 flips 8 2 antipodally and rotates 8 1 by 180 0 • The product metric on 8 2 X 8 1 induces a quotient metric on 8 2 X8 1 which evolves under the Ricci Flow to collapse to 8 1 • (d) Homogeneous Metrics
x
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
9
Since the Ricci Flow is invariant under the full diffeomorphism group, any isometries in the initial metric will persist as isometries in each subsequent metric. A metric is homogeneous when the isometry group is preserved; hence if we start with a homogeneous metric the metric will stay homogeneous. For a given isometry group there is only a finite dimensional space of homogeneous metrics, and the Ricci Flow can be written for these metrics as a system of a finite number of ordinary differential equations. In three dimensions there are eight distinct homogeneous geometries; in [8] the Ricci Flow has been worked out on each. We give two examples typical of the phenomena that occur. The Berger spheres are homogeneous metrics on 8 3 which respect the Hopf fibration over 8 2 with fibre 8 1 • Under the Ricci Flow the metrics on 8 2 and on 8 1 shrink to points in a finite time, but in such a way that the ratio of their radii goes to 1. There is a torus bundle over the circle which is made with a Dehn twist in the fibre. This manifold admits a nilpotent homogeneous metric. It evolves under the Ricci Flow by stretching some ways and shrinking others, but so as to reduce the total twisting. As t -+ 00 the curvature falls off to zero like lIt. (e) Solitons ~ solution to an evolution equation which moves under a one-parameter subgroup of the symmetry group of the equation is called a soliton. The symmetry group of the Ricci Flow contains the full diffeomorphism group. A solution to the Ricci Flow which moves by a one-parameter group of diffeomorphisms is called a Ricci soliton. The equation for a metric to move by a diffeomorphism in the direction of a vector field V is that the Ricc~ term Rc is the Lie derivative £ v 9 ofthe metric 9 in the direction of the vector field V; thus Rc
= £V9
or Rij
= 9ikDiVk + 9jkDiVk
is the Ricci soliton equation. If the vector field V is the gradient of a function f we say the soliton is a gradient Ricci soliton; thus
is the gradient Ricci soliton equation. In two dimensions [22] the complete metric on the xy plane given by ds2 = _d_x_2...,+,....--dY;:...2...". 1 +x 2 +y2 is a gradient Ricci soliton of positive curvature with the metric flowing in along the conformal vector field V
= 818r = x818x + y 818y.
This metric is asymptotic to a cylinder of finite circumference 211" at 00, while R falls off like e- S • Robert Bryant [3] has found a complete. gradient Ricci soliton metric on R3 with positive curvature operator by solving an ordinary differential equation up to quadrature. The metric now opens like a paraboloid
10
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
so that the sphere at radius 8 has diameter like 0, while R falls off only like 1/8. (Presumably the same is true for n > 3.) On a Kahler manifold the equation for a gradient Ricci soliton splits into two parts: Ra{j = DaD{jf and DaD/3f = O. The first equation says f is a potential function for the Chern class; the second says that the gradient of f is a holomorphic vector field, so that the flow along the vector field preserves the complex structure. The gradient Ricci soliton on R2 = C1 given above is a gradient Ricci-Kahler soliton in the usual complex structure, and the conformal vector field is of course holomorphic. Cao [5] has found similar gradient Ricci-Kahler solitons on en with positive holomorphic bisectional curvature. The sphere 8 2n - 1 at radius s looks like an 8 1 bundle over cpn-l where the cpn-l has diameter on the order of 0 while the 8 1 fibre has diameter on the order of 1 (it remains finite as s -t 00). He has also found a gradient Ricci-Kahler soliton on the tangent bundle T8 2 to the sphere 8 2 = Cpl where the metrics on the R2 = C1 fibres also are asymptotic to a cylinder of finite circumference. Again these are found by quadrature of an ODE. More generally, we can look for a solution to the Ricci Flow which moves by a diffeomorphism and also shrinks or expands by a factor at the same time. Such a solution is called a homothetic Ricci soliton. The equation for a homothetic Ricci soliton is
where p is the homothetic constant. For p > 0 the soliton is shrinking, for p < 0 it is expanding. The case p = 0 is a steady soliton discussed before; the case V = 0 is an Einstein metric discussed before. We only have a few examples, but there should be more. Koiso [33] has found a shrinking gradient Ricci-Kahler soliton on a compact Kahler surface. H we enlarge the category of solutions from manifolds to orbitfolds, we can find shrinking gradient RicciKahler solitons on the teardrop and football surface orbitfolds (see [22] and [45]), which are quotients of 8 3 by and 8 1 action with one or two exceptional orbits.
3 Intuitive Solutions. It is always good to keep in mind what we expect,
as well as what we know (provided we keep the distinction clear). In this section we will show the sort of behavior which is likely for the Ricci Flow in some general settings where exact solutions are not available, based on drawing pictures, using computer models, and making analogies with other equations (particularly the Mean Curvature Flow). Beware that these results here are conjectures, not theorems. First consider a metric on the two-sphere 8 2 shaped like a dumbell. (We draw it in R 3 , but the Ricci Flow is for the intrinsic metric and has no relation
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
11
to the embedding.)
At the ends of the dumbell the curvature is positive and the metric will contract, while in the neck in the middle, which looks like 8 1 x B1 and has slightly negative curvature, the metric will expand slightly. Thus we expect the sphere 8 2 to round itself out. (Note that in the Mean Curvature Flow the neck would shrink because 8 1 has extrinsic curvature, but in the Ricci Flow it doesn't because 8 1 has no intrinsic curvature.) By contrast, if we take a dumbell metric on 8 3 with a neck like 8 2 x B1, we expect the neck will shrink because the positive curvature in the 8 2 direction will dominate the slightly negative curvature in the B1 direction. In some finite time we expect the neck will pinch off. There may be a weak solution extending past the pinching moment when the sphere splits into two spheres. (Weak solutions are known to exist for the Mean Curvature Flow, but have not even been defined for the Ricci Flow.) The movie would look like this.
~
cP ro2b nd
The picture above is symmetric; we could however pinch off a little sphere from a big one. If we let the size of the little sphere go to zero, we expect to get a degenerate singularity where there is nothing on the other side. The movie
12
would now look like this.
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
(tJ
83
eCk
, ,
(}-Pmch CP
round
We could also imagine a three-manifold with a toroidal neck T2 x B1 formed by joining two complete hyperbolic manifolds of finite volume where each has a single toroidal end. Since T2 has no intrinsic curvature the neck is flat or has slightly negative curvature and should expand slowly, while each hyperbolic piece should expand more rapidly. The solution should exist as t -+ 00 with the negative curvature falling back to zero like -1ft. Thus no collapse should happen, unless we rescale the solution to see the geometry better. If we rescale to keep the volume constant and the curvature about -1 in each hyperbolic piece, then the toroidal neck should become very long and thin as in this movie.
long and thin
We can summarize these observations with the remark that a neck NP x Bq in a manifold Mm (with m = p + q) will only pinch if the BP has some positive intrinsic curvature to shrink it. Thus in two dimensions we can do surgery
8 2 x B1 -+ B3
X
8°
because 8 2 has intrinsic curvature, but not the surgery 8 1 x B2 -+ B2
X
81
because 8 1 is intrinsically flat. When surgeries only occur in one direction the topology of the manifold must get simpler each time.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
13
We can ask about similar neck pinches in higher dimensions. In dimension 4 we expect the Ricci Flow could perform surgeries
but not the reverse; this gives hope the Ricci Flow may provide topological information on 4-manifolds also. But already in dimension 5 we expect the Ricci Flow to perform the surgery
8 2 x B3 -+ B3
X
82
which is its own inverse; this destroys any hope of getting purely topological results. Now it is exceedingly fortunate that this is just the dimension where the h-cobordism theory kicks in, so the Ricci Flow can only work where the topology doesn't! 4 Evolution of Curvature. Whenever a Riemannian metric evolves so does its curvature. It is best to study the evolution of the representative of the tensor in an orthonormal frame F. Since the metric evolves, we must evolve the frame also to keep it orthonormal. IT the frame F consisting of an orthonormal basis of vectors F = {F1, ... ,Fa, ... ,Fn } given in local coordinates by
evolves by the formula
~ at
Fi -
a - 9
ijR· Fk :J k
a
it will remain orthonormal in the Ricci Flow. We will use indices a, b, .•. on a tensor to denote its components in an evolving frame, and D t to denote the change of the components with respect to time in the evolving frame. The Riemannian curvature tensor has components
in a frame which evolve by the formula ([24]) DtRabcd
= LlRabed + 2(Babed + Bacbd -
Babde - Badbe)
where Babed
This is a is related curvature curvature
= RaebfReedf·
diffusion-reaction equation. The problem of singularity formation to the competition between the diffusion, which tries to spread the evenly over the manifold, and the reaction, which concentrates the causing it to blow up in finite time.
14
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
We can understand the geometry of this equation better if we think of the curvature tensor Rabed as a symmetric bilinear form on the two-forms A2 given by the formula Rm(cp, ¢) = R abedCPab1/Jed' A form in A2 can be regarded as an element of the Lie algebra so(n), in which case it is an infinitesimal rotation; or as an infinitesimal loop, in which case it is a sum of primitive two-forms each of which is a little loop in a place where enclosed area is the coefficient of the primitive two-form, and the sum of the primitive two-form is the composition of the loops, modulo an obvious equivalence. Then the curvature tensor is the infinitesimal generator of the local holonomy group; going around an infinitesimal loop represented by cp E A2 gives rise under parallel translation to an infinitesimal rotation Rm(cp) E A2 where Rm(cp, ¢)
= (Rm(cp) , ¢}
turns the bilinear form into a symmetric operator. In order to treat the curvature tensor as a bilinear form on A2 , we choose an orthonormal basis c)
= {cp1, .. . ,cpa, • .. ,cpn(n-1)/2}
where in the frame F we have
and write the matrix Ma/3 of the curvature operator in this basis, so that a /3 R abed -M a/3CPabCPed'
Let ca/3"Y be the structure constants of the Lie algebra so(n) in this basis, so that Ca/3"Y = ([cpa,cp/3] ,cp"Y). Then the evolution of the curvature operator M is given by
= tl. M a/3 + M~/3 + M!/3
D t M a/3
where M~/3 is the operator square
M~/3
= Ma"YM/3"Y
and M!/3 is the Lie algebra square M!/3
= ca"Y,c/36~M"Y6M,~.
As an example, on a surface the curvature is all given by the scalar curvature R, which evolves by
15
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
On a three-manifold the sectional curvatures are given by a 3 x 3 matrix MaP' Since the Lie structure constants are always given by e123 = 1, the matrix M# is just the adjoint matrix of determinants of 2 x 2 cofactors. We can now use this representation of the curvature to derive the following result.
THEOREM 4.1. If the initial metric has its local holonomy group restricted to a subgroup G of SO(n), it remains so under the Ricci Flow.
Proof. We refer the reader to [21] for details. The idea is that the local holonomy is restricted to G if and only if the image of the curvature operator M at each point is restricted to the Lie algebra 9 of G. In this case since M is self-adjoint, the orthogonal complement gl. is contained in the kernel of M. Then the same properties hold for both M2 and M#, and hence are preserved by the Ricci Flow by the maximum principle. 0
As an example, the local holonomy of a lliemannian manifold of even dimension reduces from SO(2n) to U(n) if and only if there is a complex structure with respect to which the metric is Kahler. Also, the local holonomy reduces from SO(n) to SO(P) x SO(q) with p + q = n if and only if the metric is locally a product. (It need not be a product globally, as we see from S2 S1 .)
x
5 Preserving Curvature Conditions. A number of curvature pinching inequalities, mostly representing some form of positive curvature, are preserved by the llicci Flow. It always happens that if we start with a metric satisfying a weak inequality, either for all t > 0 it immediately becomes a strict inequality or else the curvature is restricted everywhere; this is a consequence of the strong maximum principle. (The reader will find the details in [21].) The proof that a weak inequality is preserved is always by the maximum principle, usually for a system. IT a tensor F evolves by a diffusion-reaction equation 8F =!l.F <.L>(F) 8t + and if Z is a closed subset of the tensor bundle which is invariant under parallel translation and such that its intersection with each fibre is convex, and if Z is preserved by the system of ordinary differential equations in each fibre given by the reaction. dF = <.L>(F) dt then Z is also preserved by the diffusion-reaction equation, in the sense that if the tensor lies in Z at each point at the start, then it continues to lie in Z subsequently. For preserving curvature inequalities in the Ricci Flow we take Z to be a subset of the bundle of curvature operators M which is convex in each
16
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
fibre, and check that Z is preserved by the curvature reaction
(a) Positive Scalar Curvature The Ricci Flow preserves positive scalar curvature R ~ 0 on a manifold in any dimension. This follows from the evolution of the scalar curvature
and the observation that IRcl 2 ~ O. Note that the scalar curvature immediately becomes strictly positive R > 0 everywhere unless the manifold is Ricci flat everywhere. (b) Negative Scalar Curvature on a Surface In dimensions n > 2 negative scalar curvature is not preserved; however on a surface n = 2 it is, since Rc(X, Y)
1 = 2Rg(X, Y)
gives
In this case the scalar curvature immediately becomes strictly negative unless R 0 and the metric is flat. This is the only case we know where negative curvature is preserved by the Ricci Flow.
=
(c) Positive Sectional Curvature on a Three-Manifold In dimension n = 3 (but no higher) positive sectional curvature is preserved. Indeed since every two-form is primitive in this dimension, positive sectional curvature is the same as positive curvature operator. In an orthonormal frame where M is diagonal
the square M2 and the adjoint M# are also both diagonal
and the reaction equation for M (in the space of 3 x 3 matrices) descends to
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
17
the reaction on the diagonal terms (a, [3, ,) E R3 given by 2 -da = a + [3, dt
d[3
= [32 + a, .
d,
=,2 + a[3
dt dt
Clearly the set of positive matrices a ~ 0, [3 ~ 0" ~ 0 is preserved by this reaction. If the sectional curvature starts weakly positive, it immediately becomes strictly positive unless the manifold is flat, or locally a product of a surface of positive curvature with a line. (d) Positive rucci Curvature on a Three-Manifold In dimension n = 3 positive rucci curvature is equivalent to 2-positive curvature operator; in terms of the eigenvalues a, [3" of the curvature operator this gives the inequalities
which are clearly preserved by the reaction. Again if the rucci curvature starts weakly positive, it immediately becomes strictly positive unless the manifold is flat, or locally a product of a surface of positive curvature with a line. (e) Positive Curvature Operator In every dimension positive curvature operator M ~ 0 is preserved by the Ricci Flow. To see this we must check the reaction
dM --M2 + M# .
dt
Choose an orthonormal frame where Ma/3 is diagonal with
MOt:Ot:
= Aa
and
MOt:{3
=0
for
a
I:- [3
with eigenvalues A1 ~ A2 ~ ... ~ An (n-1)/2. Now A1 is Lipschitz-continuous as a function of M, but may not be differentiable; however we have an inequality
dA1> d M dt - dt 11 in the sense of the lim sup offorward difference quotients (as explained in [21]). Now
dd Mu t
= Mf1 + M~ = A~ + L C~/3..,A/3A.., /3..,
so if 0 ~ A1 ~ A2 ::::; ... then dAt/dt ~ 0 and the result is true. If the curvature operator is weakly positive to start, it becomes strictly positive immediately unless the holonomy group reduces to a proper subgroup (again the details are in [21]).
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
18
(f) Two-Positive Curvature Operator A symmetric bilinear form is called. 2-positive if the sum of its two smallest eigenvalues is positive. Chen ([12]) has observed that two-positive curvature operator is also preserved by the Ricci Flow. To see this, we must show the reaction preserves Now as before and
!
(Mu + M 22 )
= A~ + A~ + ~)c~pq + ~pq)ApAq. pq
Now we do not know if >'1 is positive, but surely A2, •.. , An are. Hence we only need to worry about terms ApAq with p or q equal to 1, and then Cl pq = 0 so we only have to worry about the terms C~lqAIAq
=
where p 1 (or actually twice this because we could switch p and q). Then q ~ 3 and we also have a positive term when p 1 coming from Clpq of the
=
form C~2qA2..\q.
Recall that for the Lie structure constants C2lq
!
(Mu + M 22 )
= -CI2q.
= A~ +..\~ + 2 L C~2q(..\1 + ..\2)..\q + q~3
Grouping these we get
L (c~pq + ~pq)..\p..\q ~q~3
and since Al +..\2 ~ 0 we see d(..\l + A2)/dt ~ 0 which proves the result. (g) Positive Holomorphic Bisectional Curvature A Kahler metric has positive holomorphic bisectional curvature if R(Z,Z, w, W) ~ 0
for all complex vectors Z and W. Mok [38] has shown that positive holomorphic bisectional curvature is preserved by the Ricci Flow. To check this result it is only necessary to check that d -dtR(Z, Z, w, W) ~ 0
when R(Z, Z, W, W) = O. Now for all vectors U and V R(Z + U, Z
+ U, W + V, W + V) 2: 0
and it follows that the part quadratic in U and V R(Z, Z, V, V)
+ R(Z, U, W, V) + R(Z, U, V, W) + R(U, Z, w, V) + R(U, Z, V, W) + R(U, V, W, W) 2: 0
19
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
for all U and V. Replace U by iU and V by -iV and average; then R(Z, Z, V, V)
+ R(Z, U, V, W) + R(U, Z, W, V) + R(U, V, W, W)
~ 0
for all U and V. Let us write
= R(X, Y, Z, Z) M(X, Y) = R(X, Z, W, Y) N(X, Y) = R(X, Y, W, W). L(X, Y)
Note that L =t
L and N L(V, V)
=t N are Hermitian. Then the above says
+ M(U, V) + M(U, V) + N(U, U)
or in matrix form
~
0
(t~~ ~O
as we see by applying the matrix to the vector of V and V. Conjugate the above matrix by
to see that we also have
<0 N _tM) (-M L -
and taking conjugates
N ( -M
-tM\
L ) ~ O.
Now if two Hermitian matrices are positive, the trace of their product is also positive; so tr
(N -tM\ > ( MLM\ N) -M L ) - 0 t
and the trace has two equal parts because the trace of a matrix equals the trace of its transpose, making tr(LN - M M) ~O. This makes L(U, V)N(V, U) - M(U, V)M(V, U)
~ 0
where we adopt the summation convention that whenever a complex vector and its conjugate appear together in an expression we sum over the vector in a Hermitian basis. Writing this in terms of the curvature tensor gives R(U, V, Z, Z)R(V, U, W, W) - R(Z, U, V, W)R(V, Z, W, U)
~
o.
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
20
We also have R(U, V, W, Z)R(V, U, Z, W) ~ 0
since it is a sum of products of numbers with their conjugates. Now the reaction equation for the curvature tensor in the Kahler case simplifies using the Kahler identities to d
--
----
dtR(Z,Z, W, W) = 2[R(U, V,Z,Z)R(V,U, W, W) - R(Z, U, V, W)R(V, Z, W, U)
+ R(U, V, W, Z)R(V, U, Z, W)]
and we have seen this is a sum of two positive terms. This completes the proof.
6 Short-Tine Existence and Uniqueness. Short-time existence for solutions to the Ricci Flow on a compact manifold was first shown in [20] using the Nash-Moser Theorem. This sophisticated machinery was employed because the Ricci Flow itself is only weakly parabolic, since it is invariant under the whole diffeomorphism group. Shortly thereafter De 'IUrck [16] showed that by modifying the How by a reparametrization using a fixed background metric to break the symmetry the equation could be replaced by-an equivalent one which is strictly parabolic, and the classical inverse function theorem suffices. Here we present a version of De 'IUrck's Trick by combining the Ricci Flow with the Harmonic Map Flow. Eells and Sampson [17] evolve a map F : M -+ N from a Riemannian manifold M of dimension m with coordinates {xi}, 1 ~ i ~ m, and metric 9ij to a Riemannian manifold N of dimension n with coordinates {yll<}, 1 ~ a ~ n, and metric hll<{3 by the formula of
ot
= tlF
where tlF is the harmonic map Laplacian, defined as follows. The tangent bundle T M of M has the Levi-Civita connection r~j of the metric 9ij, the tangent bundle TN of N has the Levi-Civita connection tl~{3 of the metric hll<{3 and the pull-back bundle F*T N of TN by F is a bundle over M with the pull-back connection All< oy7 F * All< U-{3l = U-{37 oxl · The derivative DF given locally by D.Fll< = oyll< , oxi is a section of the bundle L(TM,F*TN) of linear maps of TM into F*TN. The second derivative D2 F is the covariant derivative of D F using the induced connection in the bundle L(T M, F*T N) coming from the connections on M and F*TN, and is given locally by D2 Fll< _ ij
-
{Pyll< oxioxj -
k oyll< * ll< oy/3 oy7 oxk + F tl/3-y oxi ox j •
I'ij
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
21
The harmonic map Laplacian tl.F is the trace if D2 Fj locally
tl.F Ol
= gij D~.'1 F Ol .
The Harmonic Map Flow is strictly parabolic, so solutions with any initial data exist for a short time. When the target manifold N has weakly negative sectional curvature Eells and Sampon prove the solution exists for all time and converges to a harmonic map, one with tl.F = 0, homotopic to the initial map. Now we want to combine the Ricci Flow on M with the Harmonic Map Flow for the map F from M to N, keeping the metric on the target N fixed. This gives the system of equations
{
:'.
~ -2Rc,
at F
= tl.g,h F
where we write RCg to denote the Ricci curvature of g, and tl.g,h to denote the Laplacian using the metrics 9 on M and h on N. The first equation is independent of the second. There is at least one interesting advantage; now if we look at the evolution of the energy density
e = gij h Ol /3D i F Ol DjF/3 we find that the usual term involving the Ricci curvature of 9 is cancelled by the Ricci Flow, and we just get
~; = tl.e -
21D2 FI2
+ 2Rm(DF, DF, DF, DF)
where and
Rm(DF, DF, DF, DF) = gikgjl ROl/3'Y6DiFOl D j F/3 DkF'Y DlF6. Consequently if N has weakly negative sectional curvature the maximum of the energy density e is weakly monotone decreasing in time regardless of the sign of the Ricci curvature on M. (In the classical case where the metric on M is fixed we would need weakly positive Ricci curvature on M for this to hold.) Consider now the case where M and N have the same dimension and the initial map F is a diffeomorphism. Then F will stay a diffeomorphism at least for a short time. Let us write fJ = F.g for the push-forward of the metric 9 from M to N; then locally fJ = {fJOl/3} where
ayOl ay/3 9ij = 90:/3 -a. -a., x' X1 We can now ask how fJ evolves under the dual Ricci-Harmonic Map Flow. The answer is a .c ~ - g= vg- 2Rc at A
A
A
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
22
where V is the vector field V
= &(1' -~)
V'Y
= gAo:/3 (r'Y0:/3 _ ~'0:/3 Y )
formed by training the tensor which is the difference between the Levi-Civita connections l' of g and ~ of h with the inverse go:/3 of the metric go:/3, .cvg is the Lie derivative of g in the direction V and where Rc is the Ricci tensor of g. In local coordinates
where D is the Levi-Civita connection of g. Note this flow now only talks of the manifold N, not M, and only uses the metric g, not g, and the background connection ~, which need not have come from the Levi-Civita connection of a metric h. However since it does use ~, it is no longer invariant under the diffeomorphism group. Now a straightforward computation in local coordinates shows we can write the Ricci-De Threk Flow as
where jj is the covariant derivative using the connection covariant derivative in the background connection ~ and the metric g; locally 8 A'Y6D~ D 8t go:/3 - 9 'Y 6go:/3· A
_
l' of 9 and
D is the
& is the trace using
A
This is a quasilinear equation because D is independent of 9 and jj only involves first derivatives of g. Its symbol O'(~) in the direction of a covector is
e
where I is the identity on tensors g. It follows that the Ricci-De Thrck flow is strictly parabolic. IT the initial metric is smooth, then there exists a unique smooth solution for at least a short time. We can recover the solution 9 for the original Ricci Flow on M from the solution 9 for the Ricci-De 'JUrek flow on N as follows. The vector field Von N pulls back to the vector field of motion aFj at in F*T N i thus 8Fjat=VoF
or locally
8 y O:
at = VO:(y, t). Now once we know yo: on N, this is just a system of ordinary differential equations on the domain M. Hence there is no problem with the existence of a solution. IT the initial metric for 9 is Coo smooth, the initial metric for 9
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
23
will be Coo smoothj then the solution for 9 will be smooth, and the map F constructed by solving the ODE system will be smooth. We can then recover 9 as the pull-back 9 = F*gj locally A
9i;
= 9a/3
8y Ol 8y/3 8xi 8x;
and 9 will be a smooth solution of the Ricci Flow as desired. Now we claim the solution with given smooth initial conditions on a compact manifold is unique. For suppose 91 and 92 are two solutions which agree at t = O. We can solve the Ricci-Harmonic Map Flow for maps F~ and F2 with the metrics 91 and 92 on M into the same target N with the same fixed h, and starting at the same map, as there is no problem with existence for the Harmonic Map Flow even with a time-varying metric on M as long as this metric is known. This gives two solutions 91 and 92 to the Ricci-De Turck flow on N with the same initial metric. By the standard uniqueness result for strictly parabolic equations 91 = 92. Then the corresponding vector fields VI = V2 • Thus the two ODE systems and with the same initial values must have the same solutions, and hence the induced metrics must agree also. There is one case where it would clearly be desirable to have weak solutions to the Ricci Flow. It is possible to construct geometrically metrics on triangulated manifolds which are constant on each simplex, continuous on the interfaces, and satisfy certain curvature conditions in terms of angle defects. It would be nice to smooth out these metrics to smooth metrics by running the Ricci Flow for a short time, and convert the angle defect curvature condition to some Riemannian curvature condition. Of course the initial curvature is now concentrated as 8-functions on subvarieties and zero almost everywhere, so the initial curvature is not even in LP for any p.
7 Derivative Estimates. Whenever we have a bound on the curvature, the smoothing property of the parabolic equation gives us a bound on the derivatives of the curvature at any time t ). O.
THEOREM
7.1. There exist constants Ck for R
~
1 such that if the curvature
is bounded
IRml:::;M up to time t with 0 < t :::; 11M then the covariant derivative of the curvature is bounded
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
24
and the kth covariant derivative of the curvature is bounded
Proof. We need to apply the maximum principle to the right quantity. We denote by A * B any tensor product of two tensors A and B when we do not need the precise expression. We have a formula DtRm
= fl.Rm+Rm*Rm
which gives a formula
for some constant C. Taking the covariant space derivative of the first formula yields DtDRm = fl.DRm + Rm * DRm which leads to a formula
Now let F be the function
where A is a constant we shall choose in a minute. Then discarding ID2 Rml2 ~ 0 we find that
for some constant C. Now we assume
IRml
$ M and tM $ 1; then if we take
A~Cweget
for some constant C. Also
F$CM 2 at t
= 0 (since tlDRml2 = O!)
and hence by the maximum principle
F $ CM 2
+ CtM3.
Now as long as tM $ 1 this gives F $ CM 2 for some constant C, and
yields for some constant C 1 •
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
25
The general ca-se follows in the same way. Differentiating k times gives a formula
where the sum extends over p
~
2 with
with
it + h + ... + jp
=k +4-
2p.
IT we have bounds
IDk Rml ~ CkM/tk/2 ~
1)
and another estimate (using tM
~
we get an estimate (using tM
DdDk+1 Rml2
1)
~ ~IDk+1 Rml2
_ 21Dk+2 Rml2
+ CMID k+1 Rml2
+ C M2 ID k+1 Rml/t(k+l)/2 + CM 3 /tk+l. Now we can bound
M2IDk+1 Rml/t(k+ 1)/2 ~ MIDk+1 Rml2 + CM 3 /tk+l and discard IDk+2 Rml2 ~ 0 to get
Dt IDk+ 1 Rml2 ~ ~IDk+l Rml2 + CMID k+1 Rml2 + CM 3 /tk+ 1 • Now we let
Fk
= tlDk+1 Rml2 + Akl Dk Rml2
where Ak is a constant we shall choose soon. Then
and if we take tM
~
1 and Ak
for some constant C. Also at t
~
C then
=0
so by the maximum principle for t ;;::: 0
26
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
Now since tM ~ 1 we just get Fie ~ CM 2It'" and then tlDlc+l Rml2 ~ Fie ~ CM21t le
gives IDlc+l Rml ~ CRMlt(lc+l)/2
which is the induction step we need. This completes the proof of the Theorem. 0
COROLLARY 7.2. There exist constants Cj,1e such that if the cUnJature is bounded IRml ~ M then the space-time derivatives are bounded
ID{ Die Rml ~ Cj,IeM Iti+(1e/2) . .Proof. We can express DtRm in terms of tl.Rm = tr D2 Rm and Rm * Rm. Likewise we can differentiate this equation to express any space-time derivative D{ Die Rm just in terms of space derivatives, and-recover the bound above. 0
8 Long Time Existence. We now get the following result on the maximal existence time for a solution.
THEOREM 8.1. For any smooth initial metric on a compact manifold there exists a maximal time T on which there is a unique smooth solution to the Ricci flow for 0 ~ t < T. Either T = 00 or else the cUnJature is unbounded as t -+ T.
Proof. Any two smooth solutions agree, so there is a unique smootli solution on a maximal time interval 0 ~ t < T for T ~ 00. Suppose T < 00 and IRml remains bounded as t -+ T. Then so do all the space-time derivatives DtD k Rm. We claim that the metric 9 and all its derivatives, i.e. ordinary derivatives in a local coordinate chart, also remain bounded, and 9 remains bounded away from zero below. Then the metric 9t at time t converges to a smooth limit metric 9 T as t -+ T. Once we know this, we can continue the solution past T, and so T was not maximal after all. To see that 9 remains bounded above and below, consider the evolution of the length of a vector from 1V12 = g(V, V). By the equation
8
8t g (V, V)
=
-2Rc(V, V)
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
and if
IRml
~
27
M then
IRc(V, V)I
~
CMg(V, V)
for some constant C depending on the dimension only. Thus
l:tg(V, V)I
~ CMg(V, V)
and it follows that
and the metrics gt are uniformly bounded above anti below for 0 ~ t < T. As a result, it does not matter what metric we use to measure the length of a vector or tensor from now on in the argument. Fix a background connection f (Le. the zero connection in a local chart) and let D be the covariant derivative in f (Le., an ordinary derivative). Then the difference r - f is a tensor, and in fact -I.
(r - r)ij
lA:l= 2"g (Digjle + Djgile -
-
Dlegij ).
We can then compute its evolution
a at
(r - -)1. r ij = YA:l (DleRij = -DiRjle -
-)
DjRile .
Since there is a formula
DRc = DRc + (r - f)
* Rc
we get a formula
I:t (r Bounds on
f)1 ~ CIDRcl + CIRcllr -fl·
IRel and IDRcl give I:t (r-f)1
~ C+CW-fl
from which we get at most exponential growth in r - f. In finite time we bound r - f. Hence from now on in the argument all covariant derivatives are equivalent. Bounds on Dg can be recovered from -
DiYjle
= YA:l(r -
-I.
r)ij
+ gjl.(r -
-I.
r)ile·
We can now recover the second derivatives D2 9 from a formula for their time evolution a-2
-2
-D g=-2D Rc
at
28
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
and a formula D2 Rc = D2 Rc + D2 9 * Rc + Dg * Dg * Rc contracting tensors with g, to see that
1-21 ata 1-2 Dg 1 ~C+CDg and again we get at worst exponential growth, giving bounds on D2 g. Higher derivatives of 9 are the same. This proves the Theorem. 0
9 Convergence. In a number of cases the solution to the Ricci Flow converges, often after rescaling, to an Einstein metric. This is the most important application of the Ricci Flow to geometry. Here we discuss the known results and likely conjectures. (a) Dimension Two IT a compact surface has Euler class X = 0, then with any initial metric the solution to the Ricci Flow exists for all time, and converges (without rescaling) to a flat metric. This applies on the torus or the Klein bottle. IT a compact surface has Euler class X > 0, then with any initial metric the solution to the Ricci Flow exists up to a finite time T when the metric shrinks to a point, and the metrics can be rescaled to converge to a metric of constant positive curvature. This applies on the sphere or the projective plane. IT a compact surface has Euler class X < 0, then with any initial metric the solution to the Ricci Flow exists for all time. As t -t 00 the diameter goes to 00 and the curvature R falls off like lit, and the metrics can be rescaled to converge to a metric of constant negative scalar curvature. This applies on surfaces of higher genus. In each case above the limiting constant curvature metric is conformal to the initial metric, so this reproves the classification of surfaces and the Uniformization Theorem. The results for X ~ 0 and X > 0 with R > 0 are in [22], and the final case of X> 0 with any R is due to Chow [14]. (b) Dimension Three IT the initial metric on a compact three-manifold has strictly positive Ricci curvature, then the solution to the Ricci Flow exists up to a finite time T when the metric shrinks to a point, and the metrics can be rescaled to converge to a metric of constant positive curvature. It follows that the manifold is diffeomorphic to the sphere 8 3 or a quotient by a finite linear group 8 3 /r. This result is in [20]]. (c) Dimension Four IT the initial metric on a compact four-manifold has positive curvature operator ([21]) or even 2-positive curvature operator ([12]), the solution to the Ricci Flow exists up to a finite time T when the metric shrinks to a point, and the metrics can be rescaled to converge to a metric of constant positive curvature.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
29
It follows that the manifold is diffeomorphic to the sphere or the projective space of dimension four. (d) Positive Curvature Operator We know that positive curvature operator is preserved in all dimensions. It is reasonable to conjecture that the solution shrinks to a point, and can be rescaled to converge to constant positive curvature. A proof similar to the three and four dimensional cases may suffice. This would involve showing that any given compact subset of the set of positive curvature operators M is contained in a convex subset Z of positive curvature operators such that Z is invariant under the reaction and such that if a matrix M in Z is large enough then it is pinched as close to constant positive curvature as we wish. It would be necessary to find the right invariants of M using the Lie algebra structure of so(n). It might even be true that the Ricci Flow converges, after rescaling, for 2positive curvature operator? (e) Positive d-Pinched Curvature Huisken [29] has shown that if the initial metric has positive sectional curvatures which are sufficiently pinched pointwise, in the sense that for any two planes PI and P2 at the same point X the sectional curvatures satisfy 1- d $ K(x,Pt}IK(x,P2 ) $ 1 + d
for d sufficiently small depending only on the dimension, then the solution to the Ricci Flow exists for a finite time T when the metric shrinks to a point, and the metrics can be rescaled to converge to a metric of constant positive curvature. Hence the manifold is diffeomorphic to a sphere 8 n or to a quotient 8 n Ir by a finite linear group. This improves on the d-pinching theorem from classical geometry (see [9]) because the pinching hypothesis is only pointwise, and does not compare sectional curvatures at different points.
10 Kahler Metrics. H.-D. Cao[4] has studied the Ricci Flow on Kahler manifolds. He introduces the hypothesis that the Chern cohomology class is a multiple of the Kahler cohomology class in HI,l, so that
[Rc] = p[g]. This condition is preserved by the Ricci Flow, and must hold if the flow can be rescaled to converge to an Einstein metric. Hence for studying convergence it is appropriate to assume it holds for the initial metric. We can understand the importance of this condition by considering product metrics g = gl X g2 on 8 2 x 8 2 where each factor is a sphere. Then the cohomology splits as a direct sum H 1 ,l(8 2 x 8 2 ) = H 1 ,l(8 2 ) EB H 1 ,l(82 )
30
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
and so do the Ka.hl.er and Chern classes [g] = [gl] ffi [g2] and [Rc] = [Rei] ffi [Rc2]' On 8 2 the Kahler class [g] is just the area, while the Chern class [Rc] is a fixed element 271"[1] by Gauss-Bonnet. Hence the condition on 8 2 x 8 2 that
is just that gl and g2 have the same areas. Now the Ricci Flow on the product 8 2 x 8 2 is just the Ricci Flow on each factor, as we observed before, and the area of each sphere shrinks at a fixed rate
dA
dt
= - f R da = -471".
So the spheres have the same area if and only if they shrink to points at the same time. Now if each 8 2 is round, the product metric is Einstein if and only if the radii are the same. Even though 8 2 x 8 2 has an Einstein metric, the Ricci Flow even after rescaling will not approach it for a product metric unless the two spheres start with the same area. Under the condition [Rc] = p[g], Cao has proven the following results. IT p = 0 the solution to the Ricci Flow exists for all time and converges to a Ricci flat metric (for example on a K2 surface). IT p < 0 the solution to the Ricci flow exists for all time, the diameter goes to 00 and the curvature Rm falls off like lit. We can rescale the metrics to converge to a limit metric which is Ka.hl.er-Einstein. (The existence of these Ka.hl.er-Einstein metrics in the case p ~ 0 was known from previous work of Yau on the complex Monge-Ampere equation.) IT p > 0, the solution to the Ricci Flow exists up to some finite time T. As t -t T the volume goes to zero. (This is much stronger than the usual assertion that the curvature is unbounded.) Not much else is known in the case p > O. The Koiso soliton [33] shows that it may be impossible to rescale the metrics to converge to an Einstein metric; indeed Koiso's manifold has p > 0 but no Einstein metric exists. We hope that in many cases the rescaled metrics will converge to a compact Ricci soliton. There is a useful normalization of the Ricci Flow to study convergence on Kahler manifolds. IT [Rc] = p[g] we consider the normalized Ricci-Kahler flow {)
{)tg(X, Y)
= 2pg(X, Y) -
Rc(X, Y).
Now the volume remains constant and the scaling factor p remains constant also. The solution to the normalized flow differs from the usual one only by a change in the space and time scales. Whenever Rc = p[g] Cao's result shows that the normalized flow has a solution for all time, and if p ~ 0 it converges to a Kahler-Einstein metric. There is a further modification that is useful for studying approach to solitons other than Kahler-Einstein metrics. We can choose a potential function f so that D20I.{j - f = R 01.", ,.- = pg 01.", ,. by the cohomology condition [Rc - pgl = 0, and f is unique up to a constant at each time. IT we choose the constant right, the potential f varies' by the
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
equation
81 8t
31
= ill + pI.
II the metric is a Ricci-Kahler soliton then it moves along the holomorphic vector field which is the gradient of I. Since I is determined up to a constant, its gradient V I is determined uniquely. The way to best see approach to a soliton metric is to modify the Ricci-Kahler flow by also flowing by the diffeomorphism generated by the gradient vector field V I, as in De Turck's trick. In real coordinates this gives the modified Ricci Flow {)
8t g(X, Y)
= 2pg(X, Y) -
2Rc(X, Y) - 2D 2 /(X, Y).
However, unless we are on a soliton already, the gradient vector field V I will not be holomorphic, so the complex structure will change, although only by a diffeomorphism. In complex coordinates the components of the metric tensor and the Ricci tensor
satisfy gor.{3 == 0 for a Kahler metric and Ror.{3 == 0 also, so the normalized Ricci Flow takes the form
;tgor.~ = -2D!~1
and
;t
gor.{3
= o.
Now for the modified Ricci Flow we get
Thus for the normalized flow the complex structure is preserved and the symplectic structure changes, while for the modified flow the symplectic structure is preserved and the complex structure changes. It is well known that if we give the Teichmiiller space of equivalence classes of complex structures (under conjugation by diffeomorphism) its quotient topology may not be Hansdorff, particularly at a complex structure which has a nontrivial holomorphic vector field. Thus if the modified Ricci-Kahler flow does converge to a soliton, it may be one with a complex structure not equivalent to the original one by any diffeomorphism. The only case where we know the modified Ricci-Kahler flow converges is in one complex dimension, not on a smooth surface but on the teardrop and football orbifolds, by work of Lang-Fang Wu[45]. When p > 0, the only case where we always expect to have the rescaled flow converge to a Kahler-Einstein metric is when we start with positive holomorphic bisectional curvature. Mok [38] showed this is preserved by the Ricci Flow as we mentioned earlier, and we already know from the Frankel conjecture, proved by Siu and Yau, that the manifold is biholomorphic to c'pn. There is however
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
32
a problem with trying to prove this in the usual way. There is a solution to the reaction ODE dM =M2+M# dt which emerges unstably at t = -00 from the curvature operator matrix of cp2 and approaches the curvature operator matrix of S2 x R2 as t -+ +00. To see this, consider the three-parameter family of curvature operator matrices in dimension four, decomposed by splitting A2 into self-dual and anti-self-dual forms A2 = A~ EB A~, in the form 0
0 0
0
2x+y
M=
u
x x y
These matrices have image in su(2) and so are compatible with a Kahler struc·ture, and satisfy the first Bianchi identity. We get CP2 with x = 1, Y = 1, u = 0 and S2 X R2 with x = 0, y = 1, u = 1. The reaction ODE system shows the matrix remains in this form and reduces to the system . dx
2
dt = x +2xy
dy = 2X2
dt
du
dt
+ y2 + u2
= 2xu+ 2yu
as we can easily compute from the formulas in [21]. This is a 3 x 3 system homogeneous of degree 2. The way to study the solution curves of a homogeneous system dV = ~(V) dt is to consider an associated system
c:;; = ~(V) -
'\(V)V
where A(V) is a scalar function of Vj the solution curves of the original system and the associated system are projectively equivalent (i.e., define the same curve in projective space). This is enough if we only wish to study the ratios of the components of V. H we take .\ = 2x + 2y the associates system keeps u constantj if we then take u = 1 we get the system dx 2 -=x {
dt
dy
dt
= 2X2 _
u=l
2xy _ y2
+1
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
33
whose solutions are projectively equivalent to those of the original system. Starting with x ~ y near 1 and u small but positive is equivalent to starting with x ~ y large and u = 1. The associated system clearly has solutions where x -+ 0 from the first equation and then y -+ 1 from the second. This implies that the original system has solutions with x/u -+ 0 and y/u -+ 1, so we emerge from cp2 and approach 8 2 x R2 in the reaction system. By no means does this imply the same for the Ricci Flow, but we must hope to have cp2 become attractive under the effect of the diffusion on the curvature because the reaction above is unstable. Notice that Cao's hypothesis that [Rc] = peg) prevents the solution from forming a singularity looking like 8 2 x R2, because the 8 2 carries a non-zero element in the Chern class [Rc] and hence an analytic 8 2 in the manifold can only shrink proportional to the total volume of the manifold. However the reaction ODE just happens pointwise and knows nothing about this cohomology condition.
11 Metrics with Symmetry. Any symmetries present in the initial metric will be preserved by the Ricci Flow. This fact can sometimes be used to simplify the equations and prove convergence in the special class of metrics with a given symmetry. We will give a very simple example to illustrate the idea, but there are many potential applications to finding new Einstein metrics (or Ricci soliton metrics), particularly on manifolds where the orbit space of some group action is one dimensional. Even though the Einstein equations reduce in this case to a system of non-linear ordinary differential equations, a parabolic flow can be a useful approach to prove the existence of a solution. This is the case, for example, in the Kervaire spheres studied by W.-Y. Hsiang and A. Back [2]. For our simple example, consider a 3-manifold M3 where the torus group T2 = 8 1 X 8 1 acts freely. Then M3 is a T2 bundle over the circle 8 1 • There is a larger group G which is the isometry group of the square flat torus R2 / Z2 , containing T2 as a subgroup. For any point P in the square torus the stabilizer G p is a copy of the group D4 of isometries of the square. Consider metrics on M3 which have G as their isometry group with the subgroup T2 acting freely. We call these metrics square torus bundles over the circle. For any point P in the bundle, the stabilizer Gp is again a copy of D 4 , and the fixed point set of G p defines a global section of the bundle M3 which must be totally geodesic and hence horizontal (because Gp contains an element which acts as -Ion the normal bundle to the fixed point set). Therefore the bundle is trivial, and the connection on the bundle is trivial. Topologically M3 is T 3 , whose universal cover is R3. Choosing coordinates (x, y, z) on R3 so that x is a coordinate on the orbit space 8 1 and, for each fixed x, y and z are coordinates on the fibre so that each section where y and z are constant is horizontal, and translation in y and z is an isometry, we get coordinates which are unique up to a diffeomorphism in x and a translation in y and z (x, y, z) -+ (a(x), y
+ b(x), z + c(x».
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
34
In such a coordinate system the metric on a square torus bundle takes the form ds 2
= f(x)2dx 2 + g(x)2[dy2 + dz 2].
Note that ds = f(x)dx is the arc length for the quotient metric on the orbit space Sl, and g(x) is the length of the side of the square fibre over x. IT the initial metric has this form, it must continue to have this form under the Ricci Flow because the symmetry group G is preserved. We can see this directly by computing the Ricci tensor. Just as the metric 9 defines a quadratic form ds 2 :::;: gijdxidx j
the Ricci tensor Rc defines a quadratic form ' dO' 2 = Rijdxidx3 .
For a square torus bundle over the circle we compute
where
2 of og 2 o2g 2 + fg AX AX P = -g ox { 9 o2g 9 of og 1 (Og)2 q = - P ox2 + f3 ax ax - p ax
It follows that the Ricci Flow on M3 reduces to the system of evolution equations of 2 o2g 2 of og 2 { at = fg ox - pg ax ax og 1 0 29 1 of og 1 ( Og) 2 at = p ox 2 - j3 ax ax + p 9 ax
for two functions f(x, t) and g(x, t) periodic in x with initial conditions at t = O. Note the equation for 9 is parabolic, but the second derivative of f does not even enter the equations because f is just the arc length on the orbit space and has no intrinsic geometric meaning up to diffeomorphism, while 9 is the size of an orbit so 9 does. We can simplify these equations by introducing the unit vector field on the orbit space 1 = as f au whose evolution is given by the commutator
a
[%t'
a
:s] = -} ~{ :s'
Then the Ricci Flow takes the form of the parabolic equation 8g 8t
= 8 2g +!. 8s 2
9
(8 9 8s
)2
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
35
on a circle whose unit vector field 8/8s varies by the commutator
Now we make some interesting geometrical observations before proving convergence.
LEMMA
11.1. The length L of the orbit circle always increases.
Proof. The arc length ds on the orbit circle varies by 8 2 82 g - ds=- -ds 8t 9 8s 2
and the length
varies by dL dt
=
g ds
=
f 8
= 9~
2
lIdS
L
8s 2
21 ~ (8
9)
8s
g2
2
ds
> O. -
o LEMMA
11.2. The total volume V of the bundle always decreases.
Proof. Since
we compute
o LEMMA 11.3. The size of the largest square torus fibre decreases, and the size of the smallest one increases.
Proof. At the maximum of 9 8 2g
8g __ 0
8s so 8g / 8t
~
and
8s 2 ~ 0
0 and the maximum decreases. Likewise at the minimum 8g = 0
8s
and
82g
88 2
> -
0
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
36
so 8g/8t
~
o
0 and the minimum increases.
COROLLARY
11.4. The length of the orbit circle remains bounded above.
Proof. Since V is bounded above and 9 is bounded below, L must be bounded
0
~~.
THEOREM 11.5. The Ricci Flow on a square torus bundle over a circle has a solution which exists for all time and converges as t -+ 00 to a fiat metric.
Proof. Using the commutator relation
~ 8g _ 8 2 8g _ ~ (89 ) 8t 8s - 8s 2 8s
g2
3
8s
which shows that the maximum of 8g / 8s decreases. Since 9 is bounded above, the maximum principle shows that the maximum value
satisfies an ordinary differential equation dw 3 -<-cw dt -
for some constant c> 0, and hence satisfies an estimate
I~!I ~ c/Vi for some constant C
o
< 00.
Differentiating the equation once more gives 8 8 2g 8 2 8 2g 2 (8 29 ) 8t 8s 2 = 8s 2 8s 2 - 9 8s 2
2
6 (8 9 )
- g2
8s
2
8 2g 4 (88 gs ) 4 8s 2 + g3
Since 9 is bounded above by a constant C and 8g / 8s is bounded above by C / v't we find that 8 8 2g 8 2 8 2g (8 2g ) C 8t 8s2 ~ 8s2 8s 2 - C 8s2 + t2 for some constants c > 0 and C the maximum value
< 00. Again the maximum principle shows that
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
37
satisfies an ordinary differential equation
from which we get an estimate
-
for some constant C. In terms of the arc length the sectional curvature has components
Kv
= _~ (8 9 )2 g2 8s
where K H is the sectional curvature of a horizontal plane and K v that of a vertical one. Note that K v must be negative in general but zero somewhere while KH must have both signs. Now the estimate above shows that the curvature remains bounded, so the solution exists for all time t < 00. Moreover since the maximum value gMAX of 9 decreases while the minimum value gMIN of 9 increases, and since
we see that 9 must converge to some constant value 9 as t -+
IKvl ~ Cit and
00.
Moreover
IKHI ~ Cit
so the curvature goes to zero. We can do even better. We can compute
d dt
J
(88s9 )2 ds
=-
J
2g {(8 5 (88s9 )4} ds 2 8s )2 + g2
and use Wirtenger's inequality
J(~:;)
2
ds
~ (i)
2
J(~!)
2
ds
and even throwaway the term with (8g/8s)4 and get
9 dJ(88s9 )2 ds ~ - 871"2J(8 dt £2 8s )2 ds. Since L is bounded above, it follows that
J(~!r
ds
~ Ce- ct
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
38
for some constants C
< 00 and c> O.
Then
shows that 9 approaches the constant 9 exponentially. A little more work along these lines would show all the derivatives of g, and hence the curvature and its derivatives, go to zero exponentially as well.
12 Geodesic Loops and Minimal Surfaces. Consider a loop 'Y oflength L in a manifold. If T is the unit tangent vector to the loop and ds is the arc length along the loop, the length L evolves by the formula
8L 8t
=-
1 'Y
Rc(T, T)ds
under the Ricci Flow if we keep the loop fixed. If the loop 'Y varies in space with a velocity V and if the loop has curvature k in the unit normal direction N then the length L varies at a rate
dL dt
= 8L 8t
-l
KN ' V ds.
'Y
When the loop varies so as to remain a geodesic loop the curvature k = 0 and the last term drops out, so dL/dt = 8L/8t. Now fix the time and consider a one-parameter family ofloops with parameter r starting at the given loop 'Y at t = 0 with a point P on the loop moving with velocity '8P -=V. 8r We can always parametrize the loops so V is normal. If 'Y is a geodesic loop the first variation 8L/8r = 0 and the second variation is given by the ~tandard formula
88r2L= / {(8V)2 "'iii - Rm(T, V, T, V) }ds. 2
Consider first the case where the geodesic loop lies on a surface. If the loop is orientation preserving, we can choose V to be the unit normal vector N. Then
aN = 0 as
and
Rm(T,N,T,N)
where K is the Gauss curvature. This gives
=K
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
39
Thus L satisfies a kind of heat equation! IT "( is weakly stable then 8 2 L / 8r2 ~ 0 and 8L/8t ~ O. IT we vary the loop "( to keep it a stable geodesic then dL/dt ~ 0 also. IT the maximum curvature on the manifold is M, then any loop with L ~ 211'/.,fM is stable. This gives the following result. THEOREM 12.1. On a surface evolving by the Ricci Flow a weakly stable geodesic loop which preserves orientation has it length increase. (Of course if the loop is not strictly stable it may disappear.)
COROLLARY 12.2. For a solution of the Ricci Flow on a compact surface we can find a constant Po depending only on the initial metric such that if the solution subsequently has sectional curvatures bounded above by M then the injectivity radius p is bounded below by
p ~ min{po,1I'/2VM}.
Proof. Any loop of length L < 211'/.,fM is strictly stable, so there is a smooth I-parameter family of loops varying over time that contains it. Their length L is not decreasing if they preserve orientation. Hence it was never longer at an earlier time, and there must have been a stable geodesic loop that short in the initial metric. But we can bound its length by 2po for Po small. IT the loop does not preserve orientation, at least its double cover does, and if L < 1I'/.,fM the previous argument applies. Now the injectivity radius can be bounded by the smaller of 1I'/.,fM and half the length of the shortest geodesic loop. Note our result is precise on p2. 0
The argument extends to three dimensions but the result is not as nice. We can choose an orthonormal frame VI and V2 for the normal bundle to an orientation-preserving loop ,,(, and consider two one-parameter families of loops with parameters rl and r2 where
For the best result, choose the frame {VI, V2} to rotate at a constant rate that dVI = TTT2 dV2 ds y~ and ds = -TVI •
T
so
The rotation rate T is related to the holonomy angle of rotation around the loop by 1] = T L. Then we can compute
1]
~L
and get the formula
8 L 8 L 1]2 = -8 2 + -8 2 = 2L rl r2 2
2
1
Rc(T,T)ds
"y
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
40
If the geodesic loop 'Y is weakly stable then t:l.L 2: O. This gives the following result. THEOREM 12.3. A weakly stable orientation-preserving geodesic loop in a three-manifold has its length L shrink at a rate
dL > dt -
_21]2
L
where 1] is the holonomy angle of rotation around the loop. (Of course if the loop is not strictly stable it may disappear.)
Finally consider a surface E2 in a three-manifold M3. Under the rucci Flow the area A of the fixed surface E2 changes at a rate
f
oA = - E {2Rm(T) + Rc(N)}da at where Rm(T) is the sectional curvature of the tangent plane T and Rc(N) is the rucci curvature in the normal direction N. If we move the surface over time with a velocity V, the area A changes at a rate
dA dt
= oA ot
-fE
=HN·V da
where H is the mean curvature. If E is a minimal surface, H = 0 and the latter term drops out. So if we move E 50 as to keep it a minimal surface then dAjdt = oAjot. Assume E has an orientable normal bundle, and consider at a fixed time a one-parameter family of surfaces with parameter r starting at the given surface Eat r = 0 and moving in the normal direction N (choose one side) with velocity 1. If E is minimal then oAf or = 0, and the second variation is given by the standard formula
o2A or2
=
IfE
{2 det B - Rc(N)} da
where B is the second fundamental form of E. The Gauss curvature K of E in the induced metric is given by
K = detB
+ Rm(P)
and by the Gauss-Bonnet theorem
JEK
da
= 27rX
where X is the Euler class of E. This gives the formula
aA
At =
a2 A Ar2 - 47rX
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
41
which is also a heat equation! If E is a weakly stable minimal surface then rj2 AI 8r 2 ~ O. This gives the following result.
12.4. On a three-manifold a weakly stable minimal surface with orientable normal bundle has its area A vary by THEOREM
dA
-dt > -4nx where X is the Euler class of the surface. If X ~ 0 the area of the surface increases. (Of course if the surface is only weakly stable it may disappear.) Suppose for example that the three-manifold contains an incompressible torus (so that its fundamental group injects). Then there will always be a minimal surface of least area A representing the incompressible torus, and it will always have Euler class X = O. The surface may not be unique or vary continuously, but its area must. It now follows that the least area A must increase. This shows that a toroidal neck cannot pinch off (except by rescaling). A spherical neck can pinch since X > 0, but only at a controlled rate. 13 Local Derivative Estimates. It is often useful to be able to estimate the derivatives of curvature just from a local bound M on the curvature, without requiring the curvature to be bounded by M everywhere. Such estimates were given by W.-X. Shi ([43]). We give the estimate for the first derivative, higher derivative are similar.
THEOREM 13.1. There exists a constant C < 00, depending only on the dimension, with the following property. Suppose we have a smooth solution to the Ricci Flow in an open neighborhood U of a point P in a manifold for times o ~ t ~ T. Assume that the curvature is bounded
IRml~M
with some constant M everywhere on U x [0, T], and assume that the closed ball of some radius r at time t = 0 is a compact set continued in U. Then at the point P at time T we can estimate the covariant derivatives of the curvature by
Proof. Without losing any generality, for any constant c > 0 depending only on the dimension we can assume r :5 c/..{M by reducing the radius r, and T :5 c/M by starting the argument later and translating in time; in each case we would only increase the constant C in the Theorem by a fixed amount depending on c. Moreover we can assume that the exponential map at P at tilDe t =
0 is injective on the ball of radius r, by passing to a local cover if
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
42
necessary, pulling back the local solution of the Ricci Flow to the ball of radius r in the tangent space at P at time t = O. D LEMMA 13.1. We can choose constants b > 0 and B on the dimension, such that the function
< 00,
depending only
satisfies the estimate
at <- tl.F _ F2 + M2
aF on the set U
x [0, T]
where
IRml ~ M.
Proof. We have equations
DtRm = tl.Rm + Rm * Rm DtDRm = tl.DRm + Rm * DRm
where
* denotes some tensor product.
From this we find that the function
satisfies an inequality DtS ~ tl.S - 2BM21D2 Rml2 - 21DRml4 + CMIDRml21D2 Rml
+ CBM 3 1DRml 2
for some constants C depending only on the dimension. Using the inequality 2xy ~ x 2
+ y2
if we choose B large enough compared to C, B ~ C2 / 4 to be exact, we can bound first the term CMIDRml21D2 Rml
~ 2BM21D2 Rml2 + ~IDRmI4
and then the term
This gives DtS ~ tl.S -IDRmI4
+ CB 2M6
for the appropriate B. Now
and this yields DS t
A S2 26 $uS- (B+l)2M4 +CB M.
43
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
If we take F
= bS/M4 we get F2 DtF :::; tl.F - b(B + 1)2
+ CbB
2
2
M .
Taking b :::; l/(B + 1)2 and b:::; 1/cB2 leads to DtF :::; tl.F - F2
+ M2
o
as desired.
LEMMA 13.2. There exists a constant A < 00 depending only on the dimension such that we can construct a smooth function IP with compact support in the ball of radius r around P at time t = 0 such that
IP(P)
=r
and
Proof. Introduce harmonic coordinates (see [32]) and take IP to be a suitable function of the radius in these coordinates. A bound on the curvature in C 1 gives a bound on the curvature in LP for p < 00. In harmonic coordinates the Euclidean Laplacian of the metric is minus twice the Ricci curvature, so the metric has two derivatives bounded in V for p < 00 from the Co bound M on Rm. This gives C 1 bounds on the metric, and hence Co bounds on the connection, and the second covariant derivatives of the harmonic coordinate functions are given by the components of the connection. This yields bounds on the second covariant derivatives of IP in terms of M and r. For r :::; c/.,fM the precise form follows from the case r = 1, M :::; r by a scaling argument. 0 Now extend IP to U x [0, T] by letting IP be independent of time. Choose a constant >. = 12 + 4y'n and introduce the barrier function >'A2 1 H=-+-+M IP2
t
which is defined and smooth on the set where IP > 0 and t > O. Let V denote the open set in U where IP > o. Then V is contained in the ball of radius r around P at t = 0, and H is defined and smooth on V x (0, T]. As the metric evolves, we will still have 0 :::; IP :::; Ar; but IDIPI2 and IPID2IPI may increase. By continuity it will be a while before they double.
LEMMA
13.3. As long as
IDIPI2 $
2A2
and IPID2
44
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
we have the reverse strict inequality
Proof. Since none of the terms is zero
Now
~ (~)
= 61D
2
and so the hypothesized bounds on ID
61D
'A2. Then
and so
H2
aH
1
at
t2
> ~H _
aH
at
+ M2 D
which is equivalent to the conclusion of the Lemma. Since H -t
00
as t -t 0 or as
o < t < 6 for some positive time 6.
~
H at least for
LEMMA 13.4. If the constant e > 0 is small enough compared to b, B, A, >. and the dimension n, it will have the following property. As long as r ~ e/VM and t ~ elM and F ~ H we will have
ID
and
Proof. In the frame {Fa} which evolves so as to stay orthonormal under the Ricci Flow we have DtDa
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
45
and for IDCPI:5A 2 at t = 0 we get
IDIt'12
~ A 2 eCMt
for t ~ o. Now ift ~ elM with e ~ (ln2)IC then We also have the formula
IDcpl2
~
2A2.
DtDoDbCP = DoDbDtcp + RocDbDcCP + RbcDaDcCP + (DcRob - DaRbc - DbRac)Dclt' with the terms in Re coming from the motion of the frame and the terms in DRe coming from the motion of the connection. This formula gives a bound
We can use the bound F ~ H. In particular
gives a bound (for t
~
IRml
~
M as before, but we get a bound on IDRml from
11M at least) IDRml
~ CM (~+ ~)
with a constant C depending on b, B, A and A. This yields the estimate
We can estimate
IDcpl2 ~ 2A2 from before.
Since cP is fixed in time and It' ~ Ar,
Now viewing this as an ordinary differential inequality at a fixed point, we see that It'ID21t'1 ~ 2A2 if cpID2cpI ~ A2 at t = 0 and t ~ elM for a suitably small constant e> O. To see this, consider the ordinary differential equation
for u
= cpID2tpi at a fixed point.
Then
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
46
Since e- CMt
:::;
1 we get
Sin~e u :::; A2 at t
= 0, we have
The latter improper integral is finite and gives
and if r :::; sired.
LEMMA
elVM and
t :::;
elM
for a suitably small e then
u :::;
2A2 as de-
0
13.5. We have F :::; H for 0
< t :::; T
on the set V where cp
> o.
Proof. Since H --t 00 for t --t 0 or cp --t 0, the set where F ~ H is a compact subset of V x (0, T]. Unless it is empty, the continuous function t assumes its minimum t* > 0 on this set at some point P*. Then F :::; H on all of V for t :::; t*, while F = H at P* at time t. This forces
at P* at time t*. But since 2 2 -aF at <- 6.F-F +M
and
we have a contradiction. Thus the set F where.
~
H is empty, and F
<
H every-
0
We conclude that
on V X (0, T] for some constant C depending only on the dimension. Since cp = r at P we are done.
47
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
14 The Harnack Inequality. There is an interesting differential Harnack inequality for the rucci Flow (see [24]). In addition to the curvature tensor Rabcd we consider the tensors
and Mab
= ~Rab -
1
2DaDbR + 2RacbdRcd - RacRbc.
For any two-form Uab and one-form Wa we form the quadratic Z
= ( Mab + ;t Rab) Wa Wb + 2Pabc Uab We + RabcdUabUcd·
THEOREM 14.1. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci Flow for t > 0 which is either compact or complete with bounded curvature, and suppose the curvature operator is weakly positive. Then the Harnack quadratic Z is also weakly positive for all two-forms Uab and one-forms Wa for all t > o.
The proof is given in the reference quoted, and uses the maximum principle. The Harnack quadratic is found by the fact that it vanishes identically on a homothetically expanding soliton, which shows it is a delicate and precise estimate. Now there probably exists a homothetically expanding soliton which is rotationally symmetric and can be found by solving an ordinary differential equation, but no one has bothered to do this yet as far as we know. It would represent a solution emerging from a cone. There may also be non-rotationally symmetric ones, which would be more interesting. In the proof, assume for simplicity the manifold is compact. Then there will be a first time the quadratic is zero, and a point where this happens, and a choice of U and W giving the null eigenvector. We can extend U and W any way we like in space and time and still have Z ~ 0, up to the critical time and we can profit by extending them with DaUbe
1
= "2 (RabWe -
RaeWb)
1
= + 4t (gabWe -
gaeWb)
and DaWb
at the critical point where Z We also take
= O.
=0
This is an optimal choice for the following.
at the critical point. We then compute (D t - ~)Z =(PabcWe + RabedUed) (Pabe We
+ 2RaebdMcdWaWb -
+ Rabe/Ue/)
2PaedPbdcWaWb
+ 8RadcePabeUabWc + 4Raec/Rbed/UabUcd
48
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
and indeed this computation is most of the work in the proof. We then check algebraically that if Z ~ 0 then (D t - ~)Z ~ 0 and apply the maximum principle. Because of the factor lit in Z we have Z positive for small t, and then it must stay positive. There is an interesting interpretation of this formula which follows from a remark by Nolan Wallach. Suppose we have a Lie algebra 9 with Lie bracket [,] and with an inner product <, >. We can then define a system of ordinary differential equations for an element M in the symmetric tensor product 9 ®. 9 as follows. Choose any basis {¢O} for g. The Lie bracket is given by the Lie structure constants
[¢O,q,-B]
= c~{3¢-y
and the inner product is given by a matrix
while the element MEg ®. 9 is given by
for some matrix Mo{3. Then the ODE is given (independently of the choice of a basis) by d M o{3 = 9-yOMat-y M {3o + Co -y( c{3or,M-yo M(r,. dt This is the reaction system in the Ricci Flow for the evolution of the curvature operator M when we compute (D t - ~)M and drop the Laplacian and replace D t - ~ by dl dt. Here the Lie algebra is the two-forms A2 which can be identified as the Lie algebra of the rigid rotations So(n), regarding M = Rabcd as an element of A2 ®. A2. The inner product used on A2 is the standard one. Now the Harnack quadratic can be regarded as an element of
and A2 EB AI, the space of pairs of a two-form and a one-form, is the Lie algebra of the group of rigid motions, which is a natural extension of the group of rigid rotations, with the group of translations as kernel. The Lie bracket on A2 = EBAI is given by
[U EB W, V EB X]
= [U, V] EB (UJX -
VJWl:
We can also introduce a degenerate inner product on A2 EB AI by letting (U EB W, V EB X) = (U, V)
ignoring the Al factor. Now if we form the ODE on the Lie algebra A2 EB Al according to the rules above for a quadratic Z, we get exactly the reaction system for (D t - ~)Z as given above! The geometry would seem to suggest that the Harnack inequality is some sort of jet extension of positive curvature operator on some bundle including translation as well as rotation, and this 'is
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
49
somehow all related to solitons where the solution moves by translation. It would be very helpful to have a proper understanding of this suggestion. At any rate, we can see why the Harnack expression stays positive. Write the Harnack quadratic Z as a sum of squares of linear functions (eigenvalues) weighed by constants (eigenvectors) Z
= LAM «(VM,U) + (XM' W})2. M
Then the previous formula yields
(Dt -
~)Z = ILAM «(VM,U) + (XM' W})VMr + LAMAN«[VM,VN],U) MN
+ (VMJXN -
VNJXM, W})2 .
This gives the identification of (D t - ~)Z in terms of the Lie algebra. Now if all AM ~ 0 then clearly (D t - ~)Z ~ 0, which is all we need to prove the Theorem. H.D. Cao([6]) has shown that the same conclusion holds if instead of a Riemannian metric with weakly positive curvature operator we have a Kahler metric with weakly positive holomorphic bisectional curvature (a weaker hypothesis in the Kahler case). This suggests trying to prove a Harnack inequality with other curvature hypotheses. For example, does there exist a Harnack inequality on three-manifolds with positive Ricci curvature? In two dimensions we can rewrite the Harnack inequality using the identification of two-forms with scalars and the rotation by 90° on the tangent space using a local orientation.
THEOREM 14.2. If we have a solution for t > 0 to the Ricci Flow on a surface which is compact, or complete with bounded curvature, and if the curvature R is weakly positive, and if we let
and define the quadratic
then Z
~
0 for all vectors Xa and all scalars V for all t
Proof. We substitute
> O.
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
50
in the original formula where J.l.ab is the volume 2-form in a local orientation. Note the choice of orientation disappears when we square. 0 In all cases we can trace the Harnack inequality by writing U = V A W and summing over an orthonormal basis of W to get the trace Harnack inequality
aR
1
at + tR+2DaR. Va + Rab Va Vb for all vectors Va for all t
~0
> O. This has the consequence, letting V
aR
= 0, that
1
-+-R>O at t or :t(tR)
~0
which implies that tR is increasing at each point! This is very useful if we combine it with the local derivative estimate of Shi.
COROLLARY 14.3. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci Flow for t > 0 which is compact or complete with bounded curvature, and has weakly positive curvature operator or is Kahler with weakly positive holomorphic bisectional curvature. Suppose moreover that at some time t > 0 we have the scalar curvature R ~ M for some constant M in the ball of radius r around some point P. Then the derivatives of the curvature at P at time t satisfy a bound
IDRm(P,tW
~ CM 2 C~ + ~ + M)
for some constant C depending only on the dimension. Proof. Since tR increases, we get a bound R ~ 2M in the given region for times between t/2 and t. The positive curvature hypotheses each imply a bound on all the curvatures IRml from a bound on the trace R. The result'il,ow follows from the standard estimate. Likewise we get bounds on higher derivatives. Such instantaneous derivative estimates are more like what we expect for solutions of elliptic equations. We will use them subsequently in a variety of ways. 0
15 The Little Loop LeInIna. The following result gives a bound on the injectivity radius at a point in terms of a local bound on the curvature. LITTLE Loop LEMMA 15.1. There exists a constant f3 > 0 such that for any initial metric go on a compact manifold which either has positive curvature operator or is Kahler with positive holomorphic bisectional curvature, we can find a constant 'Y > 0 depending on go with the following property. If 9t is the
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
51
subsequent solution of the Ricci Flow with initial value 90 and if P is a point where
R:5 f3/W 2 in the ball around P of mdius W at time t, then the injectivity mdius of the metric gt at P at time t satisfies inj(P, t) ?
,/W.
Proof. Since the injectivity radius at P can be estimated in terms of the maximum curvature in a ball around P and the length of the shortest closed geodesic loop starting and ending at P, it suffices to get a lower bound on the length of the loop. The Lemma then follows from the following statement, which is what we actually prove. 0
THEOREM 15.2. There exists a constant f3 > 0 such that for an'll initial metric go on a compact manifold which either has positive curvature opemtor or is Kahler with positive biholomorphic sectional curvature, we can find a constant B < 00 with the following property. If gt is the subsequent solution of the Ricci flow and if P is a point where
R :5 f3/(W - s)2 in the ball of mdius W around P at time t where s is the distance of a point in the ball from P, then an'll geodesic loop starting and ending at P at time t has length L with W/L:5 B. Proof. H go has either positive curvature operator or is Kiihler with positive holomorphic bisectional curvature, then the subsequent solution gt does also, and hence gt has positive Ricci curvature. Moreover from [24] or from [6] we know that g satisfies a trace Harnack inequality oR R at + t + 2DR(V) + Rc(V, V) ?
0
for all vectors V at any time t > O. Any solution of the Ricci flow satisfying the trace Harnack inequality will also satisfy the Little Loop Lemma, as this is all we use in the proof. Since the Ricci curvature is always positive, distances always shrink as time increases. This makes it easier to control the geometry. Moreover since all the Ricci curvatures are positive, we have all the Ricci curvatures bounded by the scalar curvature, so
0:5 Rc(V, V) :5 Rg(V, V), and we can control the rate at which any distance shrinks by controlling R from above.
0
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
52
The first step is to check that we can find a constant Bl which works in the Theorem up to some time T > O. The reason is that the control on R from the Harnack estimate is not so good for small t.
LEMMA 15.3. For any f3 > 0 and any initial metric go as above, we can find T > 0 and a constant Bl with the following property. If at some subsequent time t with 0 ~ t ~ T we have
R ~ f3/(W - 8)2 in the ball of radius W around some point P, then any geodesic loop at P at time t has length L with
Proof. Let Mo be the maximum curvature at t maximum curvature up to time t. Since
=
0, and let M t be the
it follows from the maximum principle that
for some constant C (in the ·sense of the lim sup of forward difference quotients) and hence if we take T = c/Mo for some small constant c > 0 then ~
Mt
Since R > 0, we can let mo the maximum principle
2Mo
for 0
~ t ~ T.
> 0 be the minimum value of R at
t = OJ then by
R~mo'
everywhere for all t
~
O. Since at the center point P at time t
we see that gives an upper bound on W. Suppose now that there is a short loop at P of length L with
Then
o
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
53
and if Bl is large enough we can make
for any e
> 0 we like. Now as long as
for an appropriately small constant c > 0, the standard existence theory for geodesics tells us that in any nearby metric there will exist a geodesic loop starting and ending at P close to the original one; this is just an application of the inverse function theorem together with the observation that for L2 Mo :5 c there are no nonvanishing Jacobi fields on the loop which vanish at the end points. Thus we get a family of geodesic loops parametrized by t and varying smoothly, at least for some time backward. Under the Ricci flow the length of the loop varies by dL dt
=-
/ Rc(V, V)ds
where we integrate the Ricci curvature in the tangent direction V with respect to the arc length over the loop. (Since the loop is kept geodesic, the first variation in L from the motion of the loop is zero, and we only get the contribution from the change in the metric.) This gives an estimate dL
-dt > -CMoL showing the loop does not shrink too fast. In fact the length L t at t is related to the length L9 at () for () :5 t by
and hence in time 0 :5 t :5 T with T = c/Mo for a suitably small c, if the loop ends with length L :5 e /../MO it is never more than twice as large for as far back in time as we can continue it as a perturbation. But then we can do this all the way to t = 0 taking e > 0 small. Hence then must have been a geodesic loop at t = 0 oflength at most 2e/../MO. Now for any go we can take e so small this is false. Then making Bl large compared to e gives us a contradiction if W/L ~ B 1 • Thus W/L:5 B l , and we have established the Lemma. This Lemma has one very useful consequence. It is a Corollary of the trace Harnack inequality that for a solution of the Ricci Flow for t ~ 0 the quantity tR is pointwise increasing in t. Now we only have to worry for t ~ T with T > o. Moreover we can find a time T depending on go (in fact r = C /mo for some constant C, since by the maximum principle the minimum mt of R at time t grows by a rate
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
54
for some constant c > 0) such that the solution cannot exist longer than time T. Then for any time tl and t2 with
o < T ~ tl
~ t2 ~
T
and any point X we have
for the constant C = TIT. The next step is to find a constant B2 which works if W is not too small. THEOREM 15.4. For any f3 > 0 and any initial metric go as above and any Wo > 0 we can find a constant B2 with the following property. If at some subsequent time t ~ 0 we have
R ~ f31(W - 8)2 in the ball of radius W around some point P with W loop at P at time t has length L with WI L ~ B2. Proof. If we take B2 ~ Bl, we can assume t ~ if B2 is large we can make
T.
~
W o, then any geodesic
Suppose WIL ~ B 2 ; then
L~eW
for any e > 0 we like. Since distances shrink, if a point X has distance 8 at most WI2 from P at some earlier time 0 ~ t, it also has distance 8 at most WI2 from P at the later time t. By assumption R ~ f31(W - 8)2
and hence R(X, t) S, 4f3IW2.
Now for
T ~
0
~ t ~
T we have R(X, 0) ~ 4f3TITW 2
Putting C = 4{3TIT we get R(X, 0) ~ CIW 2
on the ball of radius W /2 around P at times 0 in
T
S, 9 S,
t.
o
Now from the existence of a short loop at P at time t we can deduce the existence of a short loop at earlier times 9, just as before. As long as the loop at P has length L S, W, it must stay in the ball ofradius W/2 around P where we have a curvature estimate R ~ C /W 2 • Then again the loop shrinks at a rate dL = dt Rc(V, V)ds ~ -CL/W 2
J
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
55
and for T ~ (J ~ t the length L t of the loop at time t is related to the length of the loop L(J at time (J by for the constant since t - (J ~ T - T and W ~ Wo. H c ~ 1/A and L t ~ cW then L9 ~ W and we can continue backward all the way to time T. Now at time T we have LT ~ cAW and we still have R ~ C/W 2 in the ball around P of radius W /2. Letting W = aW for an appropriate a > 0 gives
R ~ (3/(W - S)2 in the ball of radius W around P at time (J. Let L = LT be the length of the loop at P at time continuation.. Then
w/L
~ aW/cAW = a/cA
T
we constructed by
> Bl
if c < a/ABI' This contradicts our first estimate, which proves W/L is chosen small compared to B 2 •
~
B2 if c
COROLLARY 15.5. For any (3 > 0 and for any initial metric 90 as above and any 0: > 0 there exists a constant B3 with the following property. If R ~ (3/(W - s)2 in a ball of radius W around some point P at some time t with W2 ~ o:t, then any geodesic loop at P at time t has length L with W/L ~ B 3 .
Proof. Choose T > 0 from Lemma 15.3 and let wg = O:T in Theorem 15.4. Then take B3 to be the larger of Bl or B 2. H t ~ T then 15.3 gives the result; while if t ~ T and W 2 ~ o:t then W ~ Wo and 15.4 gives the result. 0 Now we come to the important case where W2 ~ o:t.
LEMMA 15.6. For any constant B ~ B 3 , if there exists a loop of length L at the center of a ball of radius W with R ~ (3/(W - S)2 and W/L ~ B, then there exists a first such time t. > 0, and at t. there is a point p. with a loop of length L. and a ball at p. of radius S. as above with W./ L. = B. Moreover
W~ ~ o:t.
Proof. Pick a decreasing sequence of times tj, and points Pj with loops of length L j at Pj and balls of radius Wj with R ~ (3/(Wj - 8j)2 on the ball, where Sj is the distance to Pj at time tj, such that tj converges to the greatest lower bound t. of all such t. For a subsequence, Pj -+ p. and 8j -+ S., the distance from p. at time t •. Since B ~ B 3 , we know tj ~ T > 0 so t. ~ T > O. Also Wj ::; Wo so a subsequence Wj -+ W. with W. ::; W 0 Now for t ::; tl 0
56
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
there is some 6> 0 such that every geodesic loop has length L ~ 6; so Lj ~ 6. This makes Wj ~ oB > 0, so W .. > o. If Sj/ Lj = Bj with Bi ~ B, we have Bj ~ w/6, and a subsequence Bj -+ B .. with B. ~ B. Thus Lj -+ L. where L. = W./B",. 0 Choose a subsequence so that the initial unit velocity vectors V; of the loop at Xi at time tj of length Lj converge to a vector V. ; then V. is the initial unit velocity vector of a loop at X. at time t. of length L •. Moreover in the ball of radius W. at X. at time t. we have R ~ {3/(W. _s.)2 by continuity. This gives a loop of length L. in a ball of radius W. at time t. with W./ L. = B •. Since B. is large enough, there is still a loop of almost the same length at X. at a slightly earlier time in a ball of radius almost as large where R ~ (3/(W - s). This would contradict the minimality of t. unless B. = B. Finally W~ ~ at. follows from Corollary 15.5. Now in reality we always have W/L < B above. To see this, we suppose not, pick the first time t. when W. / L. = B, and get a contradiction. The contradiction will come from demonstrating a loop and a ball as above at p. just a little before t. with W / L ~ B. First we show there will be a loop L at P", at earlier times which is not much longer. Since R ~ (3/(W. - s .. )2 in the ball of radius W. around p. at time t. where s. is the distance to p. at time t .. , we can bound R near p. at earlier times t ~ t. using the Harnack inequality. Recall that tR is pointwise increasing, so that tR(X, t) ~ t.R(X, t .. ) for t ~ t •. Now if seX, Y, t) denotes the distance from X to Y at time t, since lengths shrink we have
s = seX, P., t)
~
sex, p .. , t .. ) = s.
and W. - s ~ W. - s. and
This makes
t· {3 - t (W.. - s)2 in the ball of radius W. around X. at times t ~ t ... R<-·=-~
Thus R stays small compared to L~ in a ball of radius large compared to L. at times a little earlier than t .. , so by the theory of geodesics there will exist unique loop at X. near the original one for times t a little less than t •. Moreover the length L of this loop varies by dL dt
=-
f
Rc(V, V)ds
integrating over the loop. As long as L ~ W. the loop will stay in the ball of radius W./2, and as long as t ~ t .. /2 we have t .. /t :::; 2. Then on the loop
Rc(V, V) ~ R ~ 8{3 /W~
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
57
and
dL/dt ~ -8/3L/W~ from estimating the integral. IT L does not shrink fast and ends at L., it was not much larger than L. a little before t.. In fact d
dt log L ~ -8/3 /W~ and
L
< - L
.
e8{3(t.-t)/w~
for t a little earlier than t •. Finally, we want to show that at a time t a little before t. the curvature is small enough in a ball of radius W around p. with W appreciably larger than W., so that W / L > B. This will finish the proof.
LEMMA 15.7. At each time t ~ t. there is a largest W such that if s is the distance to p. then R(W - S)2 ~ f3
on the ball of radius W around p. at time t. Moreover there is at least one point X where the equality is attained with 0 =< s < W. Proof. Since the manifold is compact, the function s + J/3/R attains its infinimum W at some point X. (Even if it were not compact but complete, this would hold since s -+ 00 as X -+ 00.) Clearly W > 0 and s < W. Since s is conelike at p. but R is smooth, the minimum is not at P., so s > o. Now W is a function of t. D Choose a minimal geodesic 'Y from P. to X at time t, and let Y be its unit tangent vector at X pointing away from p.. The distance function s along the geodesic 'Y is realized by the arc length, so Ds(Y) = 1.
Now on 'Y R(W - s)2 ~ /3
and equality is attained at the end X, so DR(Y)::::
:~s.
The Harnack Estimate [24] in section 14 tells us that for all V 8R
R
7ft + t + 2DR(V) + Rc(V, V)::::
0
58
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
and since Rc(V, V)
~
RIV12 we have oR
R
at + T + 2DR(V) + RIV12
~
o.
Choose V = >.Y where Y is the unit tangent vector at the end of the geodesic above. Then oR + R + >.~ + >.2 R > 0 at t W-8 for all >.. Choose>. = -2/(W - 8); then
aR
R>
at+T -
4R (W-S)2
Now (W - s)2 ~ W 2, and we can choose a so that if W; ~ at. and t is near t. and W near W. then W 2 ~ 2t (as long as a < 2). This gives
oR
2R
-ot > ==::--~;:- (W-s)2. This inequality holds at any time t a little before t. at any point X where R(W - 8)2 = {J, and there is at least one such point. Now the distance 8 from X. must decrease as t increases. Then W must decrease fast enough to keep R(W - 8)2 ~ {J at the point X above. The function W may not be differentiable, so we proceed carefully. We know
W~8+J{J/R at each point and time with equality at X at time t, and W depends only on t while 8 decreases. Then at X at time t . . f W (t + h) - W (t) 1 1ImlD <-h.j.O h -W holds for all t a little before t •. Since we end up with W. at
t., the usual argument gives us that
W2 ~ W;
+ 2(t. -
t)
for all t a little before t.. Combining this with our previous estimate
L ~ L.e8{3(t.-t)/w~ shows that for small {J we get W / L series to get
W ~ W.
+
> W. / L.. To see this, expand in power
t - t
~. +O(t. _t)2
and
L < L + 8{J(t. - t)L. + OCt _ t)2
_.
and
W;
*
t - t WI L 2: W./ L. + (1 - 8{J) ;. W. + OCt. - t)2
showing we need {J
< 1/8. This completes the proof.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
59
16 Limits of Solutions to the Ricci Flow. Given a sequence of manifolds Xj with origin OJ, frames :Fj at OJ and Riemannian metrics gj, we say that the sequence (Xj,Oj,:Fj,gj) converges to the limit (X,O,:F,g) if there exists a sequence of compact set K j exhausting X and a sequence of diffeomorphisms 'Pj of K j in X to Xj such that 'Pj takes 0 to OJ and :F to :Fj, and the pull-back metrics 'Pjgj converge to 9 uniformly on compact sets together with all their derivatives. This is the topology of Coo convergence on compact sets. If the limit exists, it is unique up to a unique isometry preserving the origin and frame. If (Xj, OJ,:Fj,gj) converges to (X, O,:F, g), then we clearly have the following properties: (a) for every radius s and every integer k there exists a constant B(s, k) independent of j such that the kth covariant derivative of the curvature Rmj of the metric gj satisfies a bound IDk Rmjl ~ B(s, k)
on the ball ofradius s around OJ in Xj in the metric gj; and (b) there exists a constant b > 0 independent of j such that the injectivity radii Pj of Xj at OJ in the metric gj satisfy the bound Pj ~ b.
Conversely we have the following existence result.
THEOREM 16.1. Given any sequence of manifolds (Xj , OJ,:Fj, gj) satisfying the bounds that IDk Rmjl ~ B(s, k) on balls of radi'US sand Pj ~ b> 0, there exists a subsequence which converges in the Coo topology on compact sets to a manifold (X,O,:F,g).
Proof. This is slightly more general even than what we did in [26], but follows again from an easy modification of the argument in Greene and Wu[19]. The only essential new feature is to bound the injectivity radius below at points at a large distance s from OJ in terms of the bounds on the curvature in a slightly larger ball. A lot of the subtlety of getting convergence using only bounds on curvature Rm and not its derivatives DRm is entirely unnecessary for solutions to parabolic equations which are automatically smoothing, such as the Ricci Flow. We have already seen how estimates on Rm give estimates on
Wm.
0
Now if we have a sequence of solutions to the Ricci Flow on some time interval, we can take a limit (if we have the appropriate bounds) and get another solution to the Ricci Flow. At each time t the metric in the limit solution is the limit of the metrics at the same time in each solution in the sequence. To extract the limit we only need bounds on the curvature at each point at each time, and bounds on the injectivity radius at the origins at time 0 (see [26]).
RICHARD
60
S.
HAMILTON
Consider a maximal solution g to the Ricci Flow on a manifold X for 0 :$
t < T, where either X is compact or at each time t the metric g is complete with bounded curvature, and either T = 00 or IRml is unbounded as t We let M(t) denote the maximum curvature at time t, i.e.,
M(t)
-4
T.
= sup{IRm(P, t)I}.
We need to assume a bound on the injectivity radius in terms of the maximum curvature. Let p(t) denote the infimum of the injectivity radii at all points at time t. DEFINITION 16.2. The solution satisfies an injectivity radius bound if there exists a constant c > 0 such that
p(t) ~ c/VM(t) at every time t. We classify maximal solutions into three types; every maximal solution is clearly of one and only one of the following three types: Type I: T < 00 and sup(T - t)M(t) < 00. Type II(a): T < 00 but sup(T - t)M(t) = 00. Type II(b): T = 00 but suptM(t) = 00. Type III: T = 00 and suptM(t) < 00. For each type of solution we get a different type of limit singularity model.
DEFINITION 16.3. A solution to the Ricci Flow, where either the manifold is compact or at each time t the metric g is complete with bounded curvature, is called a singularity model if it is not flat and of one of the following three types: Type I: The solution exists for -00 < t < 0 for some 0 with 0< 0 < +00 and
IRml :$ 0/(0 - t) Type II: Type III:
everywhere with equality somewhere at t = O. The solution exists for -00 < t < +00 and IRml :$ 1 everywhere with equality somewhere at t = O. The solution exists for -A < t < 00 for some constant A with 0 < A < 00 and
IRml :$ A/(A + t) with equality somewhere at t = O. We always take the equality to hold at some origin 0 at time O.
THEOREM 16.4. For any maximal solution to the Ricci Flow which sati~fies an injectivity radius estimate of the type above, of Type I, II, or III, there exists a
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
61
sequence of dilations of the solution which converges in the limit to a singularity model of the corresponding type. Proof. For Type I, let
There is some e
°
0= limsup{T - t)M{t)
> such that we always have 0
< 00. ~ cj
for M{t) satisfies an ODE
dM
For each of these solutions, let Pj be the origin 0, translate in time so that tj becomes 0, dilate in space by a factor oX so that R{Pj, tj) becomes 1 at the origin at t = 0, and dilate in time by oX 2 so it is still a solution to the Ricci Flow. The dilated solutions exist on a time interval
where and
Aj
= tjOj/{T -
tj) -t
00.
Moreover, they satisfy curvature bounds. For any e < T such that for T ~ t < T we have
>
°
we can find a time
T
IRml
~
(O + e)/(T - t)
by assumption, before dilation. After dilation this becomes a curvature bound
IRml for times -OJ
~
(O + e)/(o.j
~
-
t)
t < OJ where OJ
= (tj -
T)o.j/(T - tj) -t
Consequently the limit exists on the time interval
IRml
~
00.
-00
< t < 0. and satisfies
0./(0 - t)
everywhere, while IRm(O, 0)1 = 1. For Type II(a), we have to be a little more subtle. We start by picking a sequence Tj < T < 00 with Tj -t T. If the manifold is compact we can pick points Pj and tj where (Tj
-
tj)IRm(Pj , tj)1 =
sup (Tj - t)IRm(P, t)1 P,t
62
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
as the latter goes to zero as t /" Tj. If the manifold is not compact, we can take 'Yj /" 1 and find Pj and tj so that at least
(Tj - tj)IRm(Pj , tj)1 ~ 'Yj sup (Tj - t)IRm(P, t)l. P,t$,.T;
Now pick Pj to be the origin OJ, translate in time so tj becomes zero, dilate in space by a factor .x so R(Pj, tj) becomes 1 at the origin at t 0, and dilate time by .x2 so that we still have a solution to the Ricci Flow. The dilated solution exists for Aj ~ t < OJ where
=
= (Tj -
OJ and
A·3
tj)IRm(Pj , tj)1 ~
t· = Tj _'_0· _ tj 3 = t·IRm(P· 3 "
also. To see OJ --+ 00 for Type II(a) where T are chosen maximally and
00
t')I--+ 3
00
< 00, note that Tj /" T, Pj and tj
limsup(T - t)IRm(P, t)1
= 00.
To see Aj ~ 00 for Type II(a), use the fact that OJ ~ 00 forces tj ~ T and IRm(Pj , tj)1 --+ 00. We also get a bound on curvature. We have for 0 ~ t ~ Tj (Tj - t)IRm(P, t)1 ~ rj(Tj - tj)IRm(Pj, tj)1 where rj = l/'Yj -Aj ~ t ~ OJ
~
1 also, before dilation. After dilation this becomes for
(OJ - t)IRm(P, t)1
~
rjOj .
Write this as IRm(P, t)1 ~ rjOj/(Oj - t). As j ~ 00, rj --+ 1 and OJ/(Oj - t) --+ 1 for any fixed t. Hence the limit exists and satisfies IRm(P, t)1 ~ 1
=
everywhere for -00 < t < +00, while IRm(O, 0)1 1. For type II(b), we again choose a sequence Tj /" T Pj and tj so that tj(Tj - tj)IRm(Pj , tj)1 ~ 'Yj
sup
= 00, but now we pick
t(Tj - t)IRm(P, t)1
P,t$,.T;
where again 'Yj /,,1. Pick Pj to be the origin OJ, translate in time so tj becomes zero, dilate in space by a factor .x so that R(Pj, tj) becomes 1 at the origin at t = 0, and dilate time by ,X2 so it is still a solution of the Ricci Flow. Suppose T j dilates to OJ and 0 dilates to -A j • The solution now exists after dilation on a time interval -Aj < t < OJ where by dilation invariance AjOj
_ tj(Tj - tj)
--'<.......:.- -
Aj
+ OJ
Tj
IRm(Pj, tj)1
~ 00
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
63
since by assumption lim sup tIRm(P, t) I = 00. This forces Aj --t
00
and OJ --t
00
as well since
xy 1 = x+y l/x + l/y' ~-----,,-
Before dilation we have an estimate for 0
where again
rj =
~ t ~
Tj
l/'yj --t 1. After dilation this becomes for -Aj ~ t ~ OJ
Write this as
IRm (P,t)1 < -
rjAjO j (t+Aj)(Oj-t),
As j --t 00, rj --t 1 and AjOj/(t + Aj)(Oj - t) --t 1 also for any fixed t. Hence the limit exists and satisfies IRm(P, t)1 ~ 1
everywhere for -00 < t < 00 while IRm(O, 0) I = 1. Finally we come to Type III, where T = 00 and A = lim sup tM(t)
< 00.
First we claim A > O. Indeed if tIRm(P, t)1 ~ e for large t then the diameter L satisfies an estimate dL < GeL dt for a constant G independent of e and L. This makes L grow at most like tC~ while IRml falls off at least like l/t. If Ge < 1/2 we see that L2 M --t 0, which means that after rescaling the curvature collapses with bounded diameter. By a well-known result of Gromov the manifold is nilpotent; more to the point the injectivity radius bound we assumed would fail. Thus A > O. Now pick a sequence of points Pj and times tj so that tj --t 00 and
Choose Pj to be the origin OJ, translate in time so tj becomes OJ, dilate in space by a factor .x so that IRm(Pj , tj)1 becomes 1 at the origin at time t = 0, and dilate in time by a factor .x 2 so we still have a solution of the Ricci Flow. After dilation the solution will exist for times -Aj $ t < 00 where time 0 dilates to
64
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
Moreover for any
g
°
> we can find a time T < 00 such that for t tIRm(P, t)1 ~ A
~ T
+g
by hypothesis, before dilation. After dilation this becomes a bound
(t + A)IRm(P, t)1 for time t
since tj satisfies
~
~
A
+g
OJ = (tj - T)Aj/tj
-t
A
-OJ where
-t 00
and Aj
-t
A
°
> while T is fixed. Hence we get a limit which IRm(P, t)1 ~ A/(t + A)
on -A
< t < 00 while IRm(O,O)1
= 1. This completes the proof of the Theo-
0
~.
In the case of manifolds with positive curvature operator, or Kahler metries with positive holomorphie bisectional curvature, there is a small modification which is quite useful for Type II and Type III. Because we have positive curvature, we can bound the Riemannian curvature tensor just by the scalar curvature, with a bound IRml~CR
for a constant C depending only on the dimension. Then if we repeat the previous argument we get the following result. Note that we do not need to assume an injectivity radius bound this time; if the solution is compact the injectivity radius bound follows from the Little Loop Lemma in section 15, while if the manifold is complete but not compact and has positive sectional curvature the injectivity radius bound follows from the argument of Gronmoll + Meyer (see [9]) in the real case. THEOREM 16.5. For any maximal solution to the Ricci Flow with strictly positive sectional curvature on a compact manifold, or with a metric which is complete with bounded curvature at each time with strictly positive sectional curvature, or on a compact K iihler manifold with strictly positive holomorphic bisectional curvature, there exists a sequence of dilations which converges to a singularity model. For Type I solutions the limit exists for -00 < t < 0 and has R(P, t) ~ 0/(0 - t) with R(O,O) = 1, for Type II the limit exists for -00 < t < 00 with R ~ 1 and R(O,O) = 1, and for Type III the limit exists for -A < t < 00 with R ~ A/(t + A) and R(O, 0) = 1. These limits will have weakly positive curvature operator, or weakly positive holomorphic bisectional curvature.
COROLLARY
16.6.
In the real case such a Type II limit must be a Ricci
soliton with Rc= D2f.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
65
Proof. This follows from the result in [25] on eternal solutions have weakly positive curvature operator and where the scalar curvature assumes its maximum, which happens by our construction at the origin at time zero. The proof is by applying the strong maximum principle to the Harnack inequality. D CONJECTURE 16.7. In the Kahler case such a Type II limit must be a Ricci-Kahler soliton with Rc = 8af and 88f = o. Proof. Try to use the strong maximum principle on Cao's Harnack inequal-
D
~
CONJECTURE 16.8 . In the real case such a Type III singularity must be a homothetically expanding Ricci soliton with Rc = D2 f + pg for some constant p> O. In the Kahler case such a Type III singularity must also be an expanding Ricci-Kahler soliton with Rc = 8af + pg and 88f = o. Proof. Apply the strong maximum principle to the Harnack inequality for solutions on t > 0 with the extra term (1/2t)Rc. We haven't checked the details, but it must work. D
Unfortunately we don't have injectivity radius bounds available in many cases; in fact in many cases we expect them to fail, particularly as t -+ 00 for example on a nilmanifold or two hyperbolic manifolds of finite volume joined along their cusps. However, recent work of Cheeger, Gromov and Futake ([11]) suggests that we should be able to get some kind of limit anyway. The manifolds will collapse to a lower dimensional manifold (or orbifold). However the solution to the rucci Flow on the limiting manifolds may not converge to a solution to the rucci Flow on the lower dimensional limit manifold (or orbifold). Rather there will be some extra information in the fibres that collapse, which should be represented by some information in a bundle over the lower dimensional limit manifold (or orbifold), and there should be a system for the joint evolution of the metric on the base and the information in the fibre reflecting the rucci Flow in the limiting manifolds.
17 Bounds on Changing Distances. It is useful to see how the actual geometry changes under the rucci Flow. For this purpose we need to control the change in the distance d(P, Q, t) between two points P and Q at time t when P and Q are fixed but t increases. The basic obvious estimate is the following. THEOREM 17.1. There exists a constant C depending only on the dimension, such that if the curvature Rm is bounded by a constant M
IRml~M
then for any points P and Q and any times tl and t2. There is a more subtle bound on how fast distances can shrink which is much better when the distance is large compared to the curvature.
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
66
THEOREM
17.2. There exists a constant C depending only on the dimension
such that if IRml~M
then d(P, Q, t2) ~ d(P, Q, tt} - C../M(t2 - tt} for any points P and Q and any times tl
~
t 2.
The second estimate says that the rate at which a distance shrinks can be bounded independently of how large it is. It is due to the fact that on a long minimal geodesic there cannot be too much positive curvature along its middle or it would be unstable. Both theorems are proved by the following observation. For any path 'Y its length L changes at a rate dL dt
1
= - -r Rc(T, T)ds
where T is the unit tangent vector to the path 'Y and we integrate along the path with respect to the arc length s. The function d(P, Q, t) is the least length L of all paths. In general it will not be smooth in t for fixed P and Q, but at least it will be Lipschitz continuous. Hence we can estimate its derivative above and below, in the sense of giving an upper bound on the lim sup of all forward difference quotients and a lower bound on the lim inf of all forward difference quotients.
LEMMA
17.3. The distance d(P, Q, t) satisfies the estimate
1
- sup Rc(T, T)ds -rEr -r
~
dd d(P, Q, t) t
~ 0 inf
rRc(T, T)ds
-rEr J-r
where the sup and inf are taken over the compact set r of all geodesics 'Y from P to Q realizing the distance as a minimal length. Proof. We can restrict our attention to the compact set of geodesics of some large but finite length and apply the argument in [21]. 0 For the first theorem we apply the bound -CMd(P,Q,t) to conclude
~
i
Rc(T,T)ds
~ CMd(P,Q,t)
d
-CM $ dt logd(P, Q, t) ~ CM and integrate and exponentiate to get the result. For the second theorem w~ apply the following result, which is an integral version of Meyer's Theorem.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
67
THEOREM 17.4. On a Riemannian manifold suppose we have a geodesic from P to Q of length L with arc length s and unit tangent vector T. For 0< 0' '5 L/2 (a) if Rc(T, T) ~ 0 along 'Y then
l
L
-
u
Re(T, T)ds '5 2(n - 1)
u
0'
(b) if Rc(T, T) ~ (n - l)p2 then
l
L
u
-
u
Rc(T, T)ds '5 2(n - l)p tan po'
(c) if Re(T, T) ~ -en - l)p2 then
l
L
u
-
u
Rc(T, T)ds '5 2(n - l)p tan hpu
We give the proof shortly for convenience, but first we finish the proof of Theorem 17.2. We can bound the integral over the whole path 'Y in three pieces
fL
10 Rc(T, T)ds '5
10r Re(T, T)ds +
l
u
L- u
Rc(T, T)ds
+ l~u Rc(T, T)ds. We bound the first and third piece using the maximum of the curvature
1 u
Rc(T, T)ds '5 eMu
fL Rc(T,T)ds'5 eMu.
and
1L - u
We bound the middle piece using Theorem 17.4
fL Re(T, T)ds <
1L-u IT we take
0'
-
ev'M
tan h( v'M0')
= 1/ v'M both bounds are the same and we get
lL
Rc(T, T)ds '5
ev'M.
Using this bound in Lemma 17.3 gives the result in Theorem 17.2. Now we prove Theorem 17.4. Consider a geodesic from P to Q of length L with arc length s and unit tangent vector T. Choose an orthonormal frame F o, F I , ••. , F n - l at P with Fo = T, and extend it along the geodesic by parallel translation so that d
- Fa = 0 ds
for
0 ~ a ~ n - 1.
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
68
Then Fo continues to be T and the frame continues to be orthonormal. Jacobi's equation for a normal vector field V to the geodesic representing an infinitesimal geodesic perturbation is
(:2 w) + V,
R(T, V, T, W)
for all normal vectors W. Choose a basis Vl vanishing at P by choosing
Va
=0
and
d
ds Va
= Fa
at
=0
, ..• , Vn - l
P
for
for the Jacobi's fields
1 ~ a ~ n - 1.
In terms of the parallel frame we can write
Va
= V! F{3
for
1 ~ a, /3 ~ n - 1.
Then Jacobi's equation becomes ~
..,
fa.., ds 2 V{3
.., + Roao.., V{3 = 0
for the functions V;(s) for 0 ~ s ~ L, with initial conditions
where
Roao..,
= R(Fo, Fa, Fo, F..,)
so that Roaoa is the sectional curvature of the plane spanned by the tangent to the geodesic and the a th normal frame vector. Of course Roao.., is symmetric in a and 'Y.
LEMMA.
The matrix
is symmetric. Proof. We compute dS _ 1 d V'" d v: 8 ds a{3 - ..,8 ds a ' ds {3
-
8 Ro..,08 V..,v: a {3
using Jacobi's equation. This shows the derivative of Sa{3 is symmetric. But Sa{3 = 0 at s = 0, so Sa{3 is always symmetric. 0 Now by definition if the geodesic has no conjugate points to P before Q, then any Jacobi field vanishing at P does not vanish again before Q. Consequently
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
the matrix the matrix
69
VJ is invertible on 0 < s < L with an inverse we call W;. Define
Since ZQI3
= WJWgS'Y6
we see that ZQI3 is symmetric also. The formula for the derivative of the inverse of a matrix is
and we can easily compute
using Jacobi's equation. The trace
Z
d = [ 13 ZOllO"= -log det V 13 ds 01
01
represents the rate of growth of the transversal area along the geodesic. The function Z is defined and smooth on the interior 0 < s < L, while Z -+ +00 as s -+ 0, and Z -+ -00 as s -+ L also if and only if Q is a conjugate point to P. The usual inequality gives
with equality when ZQI3 is a multiple of the identity. Taking the trace of the equation above gives the inequality d
-d Z s
1
+ --lZ2 + Rc(T,T):::; 0 n-
where [ 01 13 RoQol3 = Rc(T, T) is the Ricci curvature in the direction T tangent to the geodesic. The only fact we use for the following estimate is that there is some smooth function Z finite on 0 < s < L for which this inequality holds. Since Z2 ~ 0 we always have dZ
ds
and hence
for any a in 0
+ Rc(T, T)
:::; 0
lL-tT Rc(T, T)ds :::; Z(a) - Z(L - a) < a :::; L/2.
If Rc(T, T) ~ 0 along the geodesic then
d _Z+ _1_ Z2 <0
ds
n-l
-
70
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
and we find that
n-l Z(O') ~ - 0' so we get
l
L
-
CT
CT
and
n-l Z(L - 0') ~ - - 0'
Rc(T, T)ds $ 2(n - 1) . 0'
If Rc(T, T) ~ (n - l)p2 then
~Z + _1_Z2 + (n - l)p2 ds
n-l
$ 0
and we find that
Z(O') $ (n - l)p tan pO' so we get
l
L
-
CT
CT
and
Z(L _ 0') ~ _ (n - l)p tan pO'
Rc(T, T)ds $ 2(n - l)p. tan pO'
Finally if Rc(T, T) ~ -(n - l)p2 then
~Z + _1_Z2 ds
n-l
(n - l)p2 $ 0
and we find that
Z(O') < (n - l)p - tanh pO' so we get
l
L
CT
-
CT
and
Z(L _ 0') > _ (n - l)p tanh pO'
Rc(T, T)ds $ 2(n - l)p. tanh pO'
This completes the proof. 18 Geometry of Complete Manifolds at Infinity. Given a complete Riemannian manifold, we define its aperture in the following way. Pick an origin 0, and let 8(s) be the sphere if radius s around the origin, the set of points whose distance to the origin 0 is exactly s. Its diameter diam 8. is the maximum distance between two points in the sphere. The aperture a of the manifold is defined as a = lim sup diam 8./2s . • -+00
Clearly a is invariant under dilation. We note that the aperture is independent of the choice of the origin. To see this, suppose 0 and 0' are two origins. Choose points P and Q on the sphere 8 8 around 0 with s very large compared to the distance r between 0 and 0', and so that d(P, Q) is nearly as where a is the
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
71
aperture at O. Then P and Q are nearly at distance as from 0', and by making one shorter we can make the distances equal, and at least s - r. For s large we can make as/(s - r) as close to a as we like. Then the aperture a' at 0' is at least the aperture a at O. By symmetry a = a'. Note the aperture of the paraboloid is 0, the aperture of a convex cone is between 0 and 1, the aperture of Euclidean space is 1, and the aperture of hyperbolic space is 00. In much the same way we can prove the following result. For a solution to the Ricci Flow the aperture a = a(t) is defined for each t.
THEOREM 18.1. For a complete solution to the Ricci flow with bounded curvature and weakly positive Ricci curvature the aperture a is constant.
Proof. Suppose Rc ~ 0 and IRml ~ M. In time ~t ~ 0 the distance between two points shrinks but not by more than e.JM~t. Let a be the aperture at time t. For any a < a and any (j < 00 we can find s ~ (j and two points P and Q such that d(O,P, t) = s
Then s-
d(O,Q,t)
=s
d(P, Q, t) ~
and
e../M~t ~ d(O, P, t ± ~t)
~ s + e.JM~t
s - e../M~t ~ d(O,Q,t ± ~t) ~ s
and
as.
+ e../M~t
as - e../M~t ~ d(P, Q, t + ~t) ~ as + e../M~t.
Now depending on which is further from 0, we can more P or Q back toward and Q from 0 equal again, without reducing the distance between P and Q by more than e.JM~t. Since
o by no more than e../M~t and make the distances of P
as- e../M~t . r>:I
s+evM~t
we see that the aperture at time t ± is constant.
_
---+ a ~t
as
s -+
00
is at least a also. Hence the aperture
0
THEOREM 18.2. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci Flow on a complete manifold with bounded curvature. If IRml -+ 0 as s -+ 00 at t = 0, this remains true for t ~ O.
Proof. Suppose IRml ::; M for some constant M. For every e > 0 we can find (j < 00 such that IRml ::; e for s ~ (j. The curvature tensor evolves by a formula DtRm = ~Rm+Rm*Rm
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
72
which gives a formula
and an estimate
Zt IRml2 ~ AIRml
2
+ CI Rm l3
for some constant C depending only on the dimension. For any ,5
> 0 choose
and choose the continuous function 8 ~
a,
a::; 8 8 ~
~
p,
p.
where s is the distance from some origin at t = o. Then 1/; is Lipschitz continuous since s is, and since IDsl ~ 1 almost everywhere we also have ID1/;1 ~ ~ almost everywhere. Now we can smooth 'IjJ locally and patch together with a partition of unity to get a function ;p which is smooth and has _E;2
~
;p ~ M2 + E;2
ID;PI $
and
and
;p ~ M2 - E;2 for Lastly take cp = 'IjJ + 2E;2. Then E;2
~ cp $
M2
s~
+ 3E;2
(1
2~
and
;p ~ E;2
IDcpl
~ 2~
and
everywhere if
8
~ p.
everywhere
and
cp ~
M2
Now define cp for t
~
if s ~
(1
and
cp ~
3E;2
if s ~ p.
0 by solving the scalar heat equation
in the Laplacian of the metric evolving by the Ricci Flow. By the maximum principle we still have E;2 $ cp $ M2 everywhere for t ~ o. The derivative DaCP evolves in an evolving orthonormal frame by the formula
and hence
:t
IDcpl2 = AIDcpl2 - 21D2cp12.
Note this formula does not involve the curvature. Hence IDcpl $ 28 everywhere for t ~ 0 by the maximum principle.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
73
The second derivative DaDb'() evolves by the formula
and hence
which gives an estimate
for some constant 0 depending only on the dimension. Let us put
and compute
a;; : ; ~F
- (1- OMt)ID2cpI2.
Then if t ::; e/M where e = 1/0 depends only on the dimension, we have
0/ <~F
ot -
and the maximum of F decreases. But
at t
= 0, and hence for t ~ 0 also.
Thus
Since l~cpl2 ::; nlD2cpl2 and cp solves the heat equation,
I~~ I::; 08Vt
for
0 < t ::; e/M
where this constant 0 = 2v1n depends only on the dimension n. Now an improper integral which is 20 which is finite, so for all P
Icp(P, t) - cp(P, 0) I ::; 208Vt for
1/0 has
0 < t ::; e/ M.
Since 8 > 0 is arbitrarily small, we can take
so that 2080 :S c 2 for t :S elM. Then cp :S 4c 2 at times t ~ elM on the set where s ~ p at t = O. Now distances can expand, but only at an exponential
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
74
=
rate governed by M. In particular if s s(P, 0, t) is the distance between a point P and the origin 0 at time t, we have
as < CMs at and
s(t) ~ s(O)eCMt . This gives us a constant C depending only on the dimension such that if s ~ C P at P at time t ~ clM then s ~ p at P at t = 0, and cp ~ 4€2 at P at time t. Now at t = 0 we have
and IRml2 ~ so IRml2 ~ cp everywhere at t
= O.
E2 ~
cp if s ~
0-
Since
we have
while
a
at (eCMtcp)
= ~ (eCMtcp) + CM (eCMtcp)
so IRml2 ~ eCMtcp by the maximum principle. For t ~ clM this gives IRml2 ~ Ccp for some other constant C depending only on the dimension. Hence at time t we have IRml2 ~ CE 2 for s ~ Cp where these constants C depend only on the dimension and are independent of Thus IRml -+ 0 for t ~ elM also as s -+ 00. Since the time interVal can always be advanced by clM as long as IRml ~ M, we get the result untillRml becomes unbounded or t -+ 00. 0
E.
Next we define the asymptotic volume ratio. Again let s denote the distance to an origin 0 in a complete manifold of dimension n, let BB denote the ball of radius s around the origin, and let V(Bs) be its volume. If the manifold has weakly positive Ricci curvature, then the standard volume comparison theorem tells us that V(Bs)/sn is monotone decreasing in s. We define the asymptotic volume ratio In Euclidean space II is the volume JJ of the unit ball, otherwise II ~ JJ. For all s, V(Bs) ~ vs n . In the same way as for a before, the value of II is independent
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
75
of the choice of the origin. (We omit the details.) Hence the lower bound holds on any ball around any point P
Often a volume bound can substitute for an injectivity radius bound. Of course we also have
THEOREM 18.3. Suppose we have a complete solution to the Ricci Flow with bounded curvature and weakly positive Ricci curvature, where IRml -+ 0 as s -+ 00 (a condition preserved by the flow). Then the asymptotic volume ratio 11 is constant.
Proof. Let 'Y be a small constant we shall choose soon, and consider the annulus
Since we have
V(Nu ) = V(Bu) - V(B-yu).
IT the asymptotic curvature ratio is at least
When "{ is small, the annulus.
11 - "(nil
is nearly
11
11,
then
and most of the volume of the ball is in
0
The volume of the annulus changes at a rate
For every e and every 'Y we can find This makes
IT Vi (Nu ) is the volume at time
t1
0"0
so that if 0"
~
0"0
then
IRml ~ e on N u •
and V:!(Nu ) is the volume at time t2 we have
V:!(Nu ) ~ e-~lt2-tlIVi(Nu). Let 111 be the asymptotic volume ratio at time t1 and Then
Vi (Nu ) for all
0"
and all "( >
o.
112
the ratio at time
~ (111 - "{nll)O"n
If V2 (Bo-) is the volume of Bu at time t2 then
t2.
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
76
Together these make
V2 (B u ) ~ e-f:lt2-ttl(Vi - ,..ni/)an . Fix,..
> 0 and let a ~ O. V2
Since this is true for all,.. and V is constant.
Then c ~ 0 and = lim V2 (B u )/a 2 ~ u-+oo
> 0, V2
~ Vi.
Vi -
,..ni/.
But we can switch
ti
and
t2,
so
Vi
= V2
19 Ancient Solutions. There is one other geometric invariant we shall consider. Let 0 be an origin, s the distance to the origin, and R the scalar curvature. We define the asymptotic scalar curvature ratio A
= lim sup RS2. 8-+00
Again the definition is independent of the choice of an origin and invariant under dilation. This is particularly useful on manifolds of positive curvature where R bounds IRml. On Euclidean space A = 0, on a manifold which opens like a cone 0 < A < 00, and on a manifold which opens like a paraboloid A = 00. Eschenberg, Shrader and Strake ([18]) have shown that on a complete odd-dimensional manifold of strictly positive sectional curvature A > OJ it is unknown whether this is true in even dimensions.
THEOREM 19.1. For a complete solution to the Ricci Flow with bounded curvature which is ancient (defined for -00 < t < T), and either with weakly positive curvature operator or Kiihler with weakly positive holomorphic bisectional curvature, the asymptotic scalar curvature ratio A is constant.
Proof. In either positive curvature case the Harnack estimate holds, and we conclude that the scalar curvature R is pointwise increasing. If the asymptotic curvature ratio is A at time t then for any finite A < A and any 8 we can find a point P at distance s ~ 8 from 0 at time t where RS2 ~ A. At a later time t + 6.t with 6.t ~ 0 the scalar curvature R at P is at least as big, while if M is a bound on the curvature everywhere the distance s of P from 0 will not have shrunk by more than CVM6.t. Since s - CVM6.t ~ 1 as s
s~oo
we see that the asymptotic scalar curvature ratio is at least A still at time t+6.t. Hence A does not decrease. To see A does not increase either, first suppose at some time t that A is finite. Then for any A> A we can find 8 ~ l/VM so that Rs2 ~ A for s ~ 8
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
77
at time t. Moreover for any 8 and any A < A we can again pick a point P at time t with R8 2 ~ A and s ~ 28. Consider any point Q at distance
d(P, Q, T) ~ s/2 for any
T ~
t. Since Rc
~
0, distances shrink and
d(P, Q, t) ~ 8/2 also. Then ~
d(Q,O,t) and by our choice of s
8/2 ~ S
R(Q, t) ~ 4A/8 2
and since R increases pointwise
also. Our interior derivative estimates allow us to bound DR and also D2 R, and hence oR/at. Recall from section 13 that if IRml :S M at all points at distance at most r from P for all times between T - r2 and T with M r2 :S I then
with a constant C depending only on the dimension. We can bound and take M = Ci/8 2 • When A :S I/C we can take r = 8/2; when s/2. In the first case we find that
oR
A~ ~
Ft(P,T) :S CA/s
I/C we can take r
IRml by R
= 1/2VM :S
4
and in the second case we find
for some constant C depending only on n, at all case. Pick Llt ~ 0. Then
T
:S t. Use
R(P, t - Llt) ~ R(P, t) - C(A + .A2)Llt/84 •
Also ~
d(P, 0, t - Llt)
Taking
8
very big compared to At and R(P, t) ~ A/8 2 ~
d(P, 0, t)
= 8.
A and A so that C(A + ~)At/s4
A + A2
for either
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
78
we have
R(P, t as
~t)S(P, 0, t - ~t)2 ~ S2 [ ~-
..... _ C(A ~4AA2 )~t
1-+ A
S -+ 00. Hence lim sup Rs2 ~ A at time t - ~t as well. In the case where A = 00 at time t, so that
limsupR(Q,t)d(Q,0,t)2
= 00
8-+00
we have to be more careful. For any
A < 00 choose the largest s so that
sup{R(Q, t)d(Q, 0, t)2 : d(Q, 0, t) :5 s} :5
A.
That a largest s exists is clear since if Q is any point at distance s we can find Qj at distance Sj with Sj /' sand Qj -+ Q. Moreover since the sphere ofradius 8 is compact, there must exist a Q with
d(Q,O,t)
=8
and or else 8 would not be maximal. Now choose P so that
d(P,O,t) and
R(P, t)
~
8
~ ~ sup {R(Q, t) : d(Q, 0, t) ~ s}
which is possible since R is bounded. Since
R(P, t)
Q is a
possible choice
~ ~R(Q, t)
and then 2
1-
R(P, t) d(P, 0, t) ~ 2" A. IT Q is any point with 1
d(P, Q, r) :5 2"d(P, 0, t) at some time r :5 t, then since distances shrink 1
d(P, Q, t) :5 2d(P, 0, t) as well, and 1 3 2d(P, 0, t) ::; d(Q, 0, t) ::; 2d(P, 0, t).
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
79
Either d(Q,O,t)$s
in which case R(Q, t)d(Q, 0, t)2 $ A
by our choice of s, and R(Q,t) $ 2A/d(P,0,t)2 $ 4R(P,t)j
or else d(Q,O,t) ~ s
in which case R(Q, t) $ 2R(P, t)
by our choice of Pj and so in either case R(Q, t) $ 4R(P, t).
Since R increases pointwise, R(Q,r) $ 4R(P,t)
for r $ t whenever
1 d(P, Q, r) $ 2d(P, 0, t).
Now we can use the interior derivative estimate again, for
A ~ 1 we get
and as before 1R(P, 0, t - Llt)d(P, 0, t - Llt)2 ~ 2A - CA 2Llt/d(P, 0, t)2
where d(P, 0, t) is large compared to Llt and lim sup RS2
A.
As d(P, 0, t)
-t 00
we see that
= 00
a time t - Llt as well. This finishes the proof of the Theorem.
o
Now we prove several results that show an ancient solution with positive curvature operator whose scalar curvature R falls off rapidly in space and time behaves like a cone at infinity.
THEOREM 19.2. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci Flow on an ancient time interval-oo < t < T, complete with bounded curvature and strictly positive curvature operator. Assume
lim sup(T - t)R < t-+-oo
00
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
80
(as happens in Type I) and assume the asymptotic scalar curvature ratio (which we saw is constant in time) is finite
A
= lim sup Rs2 < 00. 8-+00
Then we get the following results: (a) The asymptotic volume ratio (which we saw is constant in time) is strictly positive v = lim V(Bs)/sn > OJ and 8-+00
(b) for any origin 0 and any time t there exists a constant ¢(O, t) that at all points at the time t
>0
such
RS2 ~ ¢(O, t).
Proof. We begin with a good estimate giving an upper bound on the curvature at all pairs of points and all time. D
LEMMA. There exists a constant C such that for all points P and Q at all times t ::; 0 we have
min[R(P, t), R(Q, t)]d(P, Q, t)2 ::; C
where d(P, Q, t) is the distance from P to Q at time t. Proof. Since A
< 00, some constant Co
works at t
= 0, so
min[R(P,0),R(Q,0)]d(P,Q,0)2::; Co
for all P and Q. Since R increases pointwise, R(P, t) ::; R(P, 0)
and
R( Q, t) ::; R( Q, 0)
for t ::; O. Since R::; C/(T - t), we can use Theorem 1.72 to get d(P, Q, t) ::; d(P, Q, 0)
+ C../T -
t .
This makes d(P, Q, t)2 ::; 2d(P, Q, 0)2
+ C(T -
t).
Thus min[R(P, t), R(Q, t)]d(P, Q, t)2 ~ 2min[R(P,0),R(Q,O)]d(P,Q,O)2
+Cmin[R(P,t),R(Q,t)](T-t) ~ C
for some constant C using the bound on the first term at t = 0 and the bound R ~ C/(T - t) everywhere. 0
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
LEMMA. There exists a constant c > 0 such that for every t a point Pt where R(Pt , t) ~ c/(T - t).
81
~
0 we can find
Proof. The maximum Rmax of R satisfies the ordinary differential inequality d 2 dt Rmax ~ C Rmax
for some constant C, by applying the maximum principle to the evolution of R. If Rmax(t) were even smaller than c/(T - t) for c small, it could not make it up to Rmax(O) in time. 0 Now fix an origin 0 and let s = d(P, t) = d(P, 0, t) be the distance of P to the origin at time t.
LEMMA.
There exists a constant C· so that
RS2
~ C· for all t ~
O.
Proof. Since R(Pt , 0) ~ R(Pt , t) ~ c/(T - t)
while min[R(Pt , 0), R(O, O)]d(Pt, 0, 0)2 ~ Co
we get an estimate d(Pt , 0, 0) ~ C../T - t
(where the case R(Pt , 0) ~ R(O,O) can be handled separately because R(O, 0) C /T anyway while T - t ~ T). Then using our distance shrinking bound d(Pt , 0, t) ~ C";T - t
for a larger constant C. For any P d(P, 0, t) ~ d(P, Pt , t)
+ d(Pt , 0, t)
by the triangle inequality. We already have min[R(P, t), R(Pt , t)]d(P, Pt , t)2 ~ C
for some constant C independent of t. If R(P, t) ~ R(Pt , t) ~ c/(T - t)
then the same argument that worked for P t proves that d(P, 0, t) ~ C";T - t
~
82
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
and since R :::; C I(T - t), Rs2 :::; C* for some C*. The other case when
R(P, t) :::; R(Pt , t) gives
R(P, t)d(P, Pt , t)2 :::; C in the estimate above, and since
d(P, 0, t) :::; d(P, Pt , t)
+ cv'T -
t
and R(P,t) :::; C/v'T - t, we get
R(P, t)d(P, 0, t)2 :::; C*
D
also for some C*. This proves this Lemma. Now we turn to the volume estimate. It is useful first to look at annuli.
LEMMA.
There exists a constant c
NiT
> 0 such that the annulus at t
=0
= {O' :::; 8 :::; 30'}
has volume
Proof. Let e
> 0 be a small constant we can choose later. Look at time
at the annulus
NiT
= {20':::; S :::; 30'}.
Since distances shrink as t increases from r to 0, the outer sphere of NiT surely lies inside the outer sphere of NiT' But we have seen
d(P, 0, r) ~ d(P, 0, 0) - Cv'T - r and so if 0' is large (which is our only concern), in particular 0' ~ T - r :::; 21rl :::; 2€,0'2 and
d(P, 0, r) ~ d(P, 0, 0) Choose
€'
vTle,
then
cv'2i 0'.
so small that c.,f2e :::; 1. Then
d(P, 0, r)
~
d(P, 0, 0) - 0'
so no distance from the origin shrinks by more than 0'. Hence the inner sphere of NiT lies outside the inner sphere of NiT, and NiT ~ N u • (Of course we don't need these to be topological annuli, we only estimate distances.) 0
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
83
Next we claim we can find d > 0 (depending on the e we choose) so that has volume V(Na) ~ dan at time
T
= -ca 2 • Since the curvature (for a ~
R~
G/ITI
Na
JT /c again) satisfies a bound
~ G/ca 2 ,
this remark follows from the following result by dilation, with d = (c/G)n/2. LEMMA. For every p > 0 there exists a ( > 0 so that if a complete manifold with positive sectional curvature has 0 < R ~ 1, then the annulus
Np = {2p ~ 8
~ 3p}
has volume
Proof. Since the manifold is complete with positive curvature but not compact, we can bound the injectivity radius by some apriori constant c> 0 below. The annulus contains a minimal geodesic of length p, as we see by intersecting it with a ray to infinity. IT p ~ c/2 the result is easy using geodesic coordinates at the origin, while if p > c/2 we can put a ball of radius c/2 inside the annulus. (In fact for large p we see the area is at least a constant times p. This is the best we can do if the manifold opens like a cylinder.) 0
Now we want to see that V(Na) still has a large area at t = o. At each time ~ t ~ 0 we still have all of Na outside the ball ofradius a, where R ~ G* /a 2 • Therefore we can estimate the rate at which the volume shrinks by
T
This makes Since
T
= ca 2 we get V(Na)
It=o ~ cV(Na)lt=r ~ cda
n.
But at t = 0, V(Ba) ~ V(Na) ~ V(Na) so 19.2(a) is done. Next we look at 19.2(b). Given a point P at distance a = d(P, 0, 0) from the origin at time t = 0, we let T = _ca 2 as before and find Pr where
R(Pn T) ;::: c/(T - T)
and d(Pn 0, T) ~ cv'T - T.
The Harnack inequality on a manifold with positive curvature operator in its integrated form (see [29]) gives R(P,O) ;::: R(Pr •T)e-Cd(p... P.r)2/lrl
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
84
for some constant C. The triangle inequality gives
d(PTlP,r) ~ d(PTlO,r)
+ d(P,O,r)
and
d(P, 0, r) ~ d(P, 0, 0)
= u.
Then
d(PTlP,r) ~ u + C"';T - r. Again if u ~ v'T/e we have T - r ~
21rl
and
d(PTlP,r) ~ Cu for some constant C, making
for some other constant C depending on e. This yields R(P, 0) ~ c/u 2 as desired. For u ~ v'T/e some constant c > works because R > O. Hence the Lemma is proved. A similar bound can be derived at any time.
°
20 Ricci Solitons. We will now examine the structure of a steady Ricci soliton of the sort we frequently get as a limit.
THEOREM 20.1. curvature, so that
Suppose we have a complete Ricci soliton with bounded
D2f = Rc for some function
f. Assume the Ricci curvature is weakly positive Rc~O
and assume the scalar curvature attains its maximum M at an origin. Then the function f i$ weakly convex and attains its minimum at the origin, and furthermore
IDfI2+R=M everywhere on the soliton. The soliton is not compact unless Rc = O. Proof. We show the equality first. Since
we have and
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
85
and so DiRik - Di~k = ~iklDd· Taking a trace on j and k, and using the contracted second Bianchi identity DiRii
1
= '2Di R
we get that Then Di(ID 112 + R) = 2Dil(DiDil - ~i) = 0 so ID 112 + R is constant. Call it M*. If M* = M, then DI = 0 at the origin. Since DiDil = Rij ~ 0, along any geodesic through the origin xi = xi(s) parameterized by arc length s we have dl dx i dB =Dd· ds
and
~I
= DiD I . dx i dxi > 0 ds 2 3 dB dB so I is convex and hence least at the origin. Since any point can be joined to the origin by a geodesic, we are done in this case. If M* > M, consider a gradient path of I through the origin xi = xi(n) parametrized by the parameter u with xi at the origin at u = 0 and 0
dx i _ iiDol du - 9 J .
Now ID 112 = M* - R so ID 112 ~ M* - M smallest at the origin. But we compute :UID112
> 0 everywhere, while ID 112 is
= 2gikgilRiiDdDd ~ 0
since Rii ~ 0 and ID 112 ~ o. Then ID 112 isn't smaller at the origin, and we have a contradiction. If the solution is compact then
AI = R ~ 0 implies I is constant, so Rc = D2 I = o.
o
THEOREM 20.2. For a complete Ricci soliton with bounded cUnJature and strictly positive sectional curvature 01 dimension n ~ 3 where the scalar cUnJature assumes its maximum at an origin, the asymtotic scalar curvature ratio is infinite; A = limsupRs2 = 00 0
8-+00
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
86
where
8
is the distance to the origin.
Proof. Suppose RS2 ~ C. The solution to the Ricci Flow corresponding to the soliton exists for -00 < t < 00 and is obtained by flowing along the gradient of I. We will show that the limit 9iJ'(X)
=
lim gij(X,t)
t~-oo
exists for x '" 0 on the manifold X and is a flat metric on X - {OJ which is complete. Since X has positive curvature operator it is diffeomorphic to R n , and X - {OJ to sn-l X Rl. For n ~ 3 there is no flat metric on this space, and this will finish the proof. 0 To see the limit metric exists, note that unless RS2 -+ 00 as S -+ 00, surely R -+ 0 as X -+ 00 so ID 112 -+ M as X -+ 00, at least at t = O. The function 1 itself can be taken to evolve with time, using the definition al at
= -ID112 = 6.1 -
M
which pulls 1 back by the flow along the gradient of I. Then we continue to have DiDjl = ~j for all time, and IDI12 -+ Mass -+ oo-for each time. When we go backwards in time, this is equivalent to flowing outwards along the gradient of I, and our speed approaches v'lJ. If 8 is the distance from 0, then s / It I -+ v'lJ. Since RS2 :::; C for some constant C, R :::; C /8 2, and starting outside of any neighborhood of 0 we have R:::; C/Mlt1 2 and hence
~g > -2RgIJ.. at 'J.. = -2R-· I, gives
If V
a
2C
o ~ atgij ~ - Mltl 2 gij' is a tangent vector and Wit denotes its length at time t, so
then
o~
d
I 12t
dt V
so
~
-
d
2C I 12 Mltl 2 V t 2
2C
o :::; dltl log Wit :::; Mltl 2 with t
< 0 decreasing and It I increasing. This makes d dltl
(
2
log IVlt +
so that log
2C ) Mltl :::; 0
IVI~ + !~I
WI~
increasing in
It I with
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
87
is actually decreasing. This shows Wit has a limit as t -+ -00. Since the metrics are all essentially the same, it always takes an infinite length to get out to 00. On the other hand, any point X other than 0 will eventually be arbitrarily far from 0, so the metric in the limit is also complete away from oin X - {OJ. Using the derivative estimates of W.-X. Shi [43] on the curvature it is straightforward to see that the 9ij(X, t) converge in Coo to a smooth limit metric 9ij(X) as t -+ -00. Since R ~ C/S2 and s ~ VMt we have the result that the limit metric is flat. This proves the theorem. 21 Bumps of Curvature. We shall show an interesting fact in this section about the influence of a bump of strictly positive curvature in a complete manifold of weakly positive curvature. Namely, minimal geodesic paths that go past the bump have to avoid it. As a consequence we get a bound on the number of bumps of curvature. This principle will be important for studying the behavior of singularity models at infinity when we do a dimension reduction argument. We begin by reviewing Toponogov's Theorem as given in Cheeger and Ebin [9]. Let M be a complete Riemannian manifold with all sectional curvatures K bounded below by a constant H. Suppose we have a geodesic triangle /:). in M with sides of lengths a, b, and c, and let 0: be the angle opposite the side of length a.
M
~ c anJ(~H
We make the following assumptions (1) the geodesics of lengths a and b are minimal (2) c ~ a + b (surely true if the geodesic of length c is also minimal) and (3) c ~ 7r/..fH if H > O. THEOREM 21.1. There exists a traingle /:). in the space M with constant curvature H whose sides hatle length a, band c, such that the angle Ii in /:). opposite the side of length a satisfies Ii ~ 0:. THEOREM
and angle
0:,
21.2. There exists a unique triangle /:). in M with sides band c such that the length a of the side opposite 0: satisfies a ~ a.
REMARK. . It
is not necessary to have sectional curvatures
K,
~
H in all of
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
88
M; it suffices to have this hold in the ball of radius a + b around any point in the triangle; because the construction only uses It on minimal geodesics joining two points on ~, and these all lie in such a ball. To see this, consider a geodesic triangle with sides a, b, and c $ a + b. If we join a point on the side a to a point on the side b with a minimal geodesic of length l, clearly l $ a + b. If we join a point on the side a to a point on the side c with a minimal geodesic of length i, and if the first point divides the side a into pieces a = al a2, and likewise the second point divides the side c into pieces c = Cl + C2, then
i
$ al
+ Cl
c
and l $ a2
+ b + C2
and by averaging
1 l$ 2(a+b+c) $a+b
as claimed. LEMMA 21.3. For every c > 0 there exist A < 00 and 15 > 0 such that if M is complete with K ~ 0, P is a point in M and K ~ c/r 2 everywhere in B 2r (P), if d(P, P') = r and if d(P, Q) ~ Ar, if P P', PQ and P' Q are minimal geodesics and if LP'PQ < ~ +15 - 2 then d(P', Q) < d(P, Q).
Proof. Pick a point Q' on the geodesic PQ at distance r from P, and choose a minimal geodesic from P' to Q'. 0 P'
Q
ct Let h = IP'Q'I,u LPQ' P' and /3' = 11' -
= IP'QI
and v = IQQ'I and let Q = LP'PQ and /3 = /3. We make three applications of Toponogov's Theorems.
89
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
(1) First note for every e > 0 we can find 5 > 0 and TJ > 0 such that if + 5 then h ~ (v'2 - 'I) r. This is because K ~ e/r 2 in B2r(P) and we can compare the triangle pI PQ' to the triangle with two sides equal to r and angle a in the sphere of curvature H = e/r2 using T2. All the sides are minimal, and we only need to check that
a ~ ~
h ~ 2r ~ Tr/m if e < 1 < {Tr/2)2. Hence the comparison can be made. Now on the sphere of radius 1, take an isosceles triangle of equal sides l ~ 1 with angle a ~ ~ + 5 between them and call the length of the third side k. In an isosceles right triangle k is strictly less than the Euclidean value of v'2 l, and hence depending on l we can find 5 > 0 and 'I > 0 such that if a ~ ~ + 5 then still k ~ (v'2 - TJ )l. If we scale the result to a sphere of radius r /.,fi with curvature H = e/r 2 , then taking l = .,fi gives the desired result. (2) Now we just use K ~ O. We compare the triangle P'Q' P with two sides equal to r and one equal to h ~ (v'2 - TJ)r to the Euclidean triangle with the same three sides using Tl. again all the sides are minimal, and we can do the comparison. We find that there exists a () > 0 depending on 'I only so that {3 ~ ~ + (). By scaling it suffices to observe that an isosceles Euclidean triangle with two equal sides 1 and the third side less than v'2 - TJ has the equal angles at least ~ + 6. (3) Finally we use T2 again to compare the triangle P'Q'Q to the Euclidean triangle with sides h and v and angle {3' ~ Again all the sides are minimal, and we find
3; - ().
Now h ~ v'2r while 1 +( cos{3, > - -
-
v'2
for some ( > 0 depending only on () > O. Therefore u 2 ~ (v + r)2 + r[r - 2V2(v] and for every (
> 0 we can choose A < 00 so that if
IPQI ~ Ar Thus IP'QI = u < v + r
v +r =
then v ~ (A - l)r and 2v'2(v > r. Now we prove an important repulsion principle.
=
IPQI
as desired.
THEOREM 21.4. For every e > 0 we can find A < 00 such that if M is a complete Riemannian manifold with K 2: 0, if P is a point i;'l M such that K 2: e/r 2 everywhere in B 3r (P), if S 2: rand Q1 and Q2 lie outside B)..B(P) and'Y is a minimal geodesic from Q1 to Q2, then'Y stays outside B.(P).
Proof. Let X be the closest point on QIQ2 to P. Draw a minimal geodesic from X to P and let its length be 0'. Extend the geodesic X P an equal length
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
90
beyond P, ending at a point Y. Draw minimal geodesics Q1Y and Q2Y. We claim IQ1 Y I < IQ1 X I and IQ2YI < IQ2XI
0'
which will show Q1Q2 is not minimal, provided
0'
:5 s.
y
x Since both halves of the argument are the same, we drop the subscripts 1 and 2. Consider the geodesic triangle QXY with P the midpoint of XY, where QX and QY and PX are minimal and LQXP = 7r/2.
Y
Q
x Choose the point Z at distance r from P towards X, and draw minimal geodesics QP and QZ. Let a = LQZX and a' = 7r-a, while "1 = LQPY and "1' = 7r-'Y. Again we make several applications of Toponogov's Theorems. First note that IQPI ~ >.s and IPXI:5 8 so
IQZI
~
IQPI-IPZI
~
(>. -1)8
and
IQXI :5 IQPI + IPXI :5 (>. + l)s . . Therefore comparing the triangle QZX to the Euclidean one with the same three sides, we find by T2 that for every 8 > 0 there exists a >. < 00 such that a ~ ~ - 8, as is easily seen by first comparing the Euclidean triangle to one of sides proportional to >. + 1, >. - 1, and 1 with a more extreme angle a, and observing a -+ 7r/2 as >. -+ 00. Consequently a' :5 ~ + lS. Now choosing 8 small and >'large compared to e, and noting that if K ~ e/r 2 in B 3r (P) then B 3r (P) ~ B 2r (Z), we see that Lemma 1 implies IQPI < IQZI. Now if we also had "1' :5 ~ + 8 we would also have QZ < QP by Lemma 3, and we cannot have both .. Hence 'Y' 2: ~ + lS and this gives 'Y' :5 ~ - lS.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
91
Now we apply Toponogov's Theorem 21.2 to the triangle QPY to compare it to the Euclidean triangle of sides IQPI and IPYI and angle 'Y. We do not know if PY is minimal, but QP and QY are by construction, and
IPYI = u ~ 8 while IQPI
~ A8
and hence IPYI ~ IQPI + IQYI, which is all we need. Then by the law of cosines
IQYI 2 ~ IQPI 2 + IPYI 2
-
2IQPI·IPYI· cOS'Y.
But we also have
IQPI 2 ~
IQXI 2 + IPXI 2
by Tl on the triangle of sides QX and PX and angle 7r/2. Then
IQYI 2 ~ Use
IQXI 2 + IPXI 2 + IPYI 2 - 2IQPI·IPYI· cos'y.
IPXI = IPYI = u ~ 8 IQYI 2 ~
and
IQPI
~ A8 and 'Y ~ ~ - &to get
IQXI 2 + 2u 2 [1- Acos
(i - &)] .
Picking A large compared to &, we get Acos and IQYI
(i - 8) = Asin& > 1
< IQXI as desired. This proves the theorem.
D
We apply the previous repulsion theorem to prove a result on remote curvature bumps in complete manifolds of positive curvature. DEFINITION 21.5 . A ball Br(P) of radius r around P is a cUnJature {3-bump if K ~ (3/r 2 at all points in the ball. The ball is A-remote from the origin 0 if d(P, 0) ~ Ar.
°
THEOREM 21.6. For every {3 > there exists A < 00 such that in any complete manifold of positive cUnJature there are at most a finite number of disjoint balls which are A-remote cUnJature (3-bumps.
Proof. If the ball Br(P) is a A-remote curvature {3-bump, and if Q is any point such that d(O, Q} ~ 2d(0, P}
then if we take minimal geodesics OP and OQ. we claim that for any {3 can find A < 00 and (J > 0 such that LPOQ
> 0 we
~ (J.
To see this, let X be the point on OQ with OX = OP. Since K ~ 0 everywhere and !:l.OPQ has minimal sides, if the angle LPOQ is < 9,then for every>. < 00
92
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
we can find () theorem.
> 0 such that PX < OP/>... But this contradicts the repulsion ~,
"
.. --- ....... , p
I
,
'.
I
I
o
Q
x Note there is a curvature ,B-bump at P,OP> >"P X and PQ
~
OQ - OP
~
OP
so the theorem applies (with c = ,B/9 to get K ~ c/ p2 on the ball of radius p = r/3). Now pick any sequence Pi of curvature ,B-bumps with
and we find for j
< k the angle
for a fixed () > O. This is impossible. Hence there cannot be an infinite sequence of >"-remote disjoint curvature ,B-bumpsj for since K is bounded on any compact set and r ~ ..;c / K on each bump, we can only get a finite number of disjoint bumps into any compact set, and this lets us find PiH with d(PiH' 0) ~ 2d(Pi , 0). Thus the theorem is proved. 0
22 DiInension Reduction. There is a general principle of dimension reduction which has proved useful in minimal surface theory and also the theory of Harmonic maps. The idea is that having first taken a limit of a sequence of dilations to model a singularity, we should study this limit by next taking a sequence of origins going out to infinity and shrinking back down to get a new limit of lower dimension. On a complete manifold the idea is that in dimension at least three, as we go out to infinity the radial curvatures will fall off faster than the meridian curvature, so the new limit of the contractions will be flat in the radial direction. We will illustrate this idea by proving a result on solutions with positive curvature operator, where the Little Loop Lemma gives injectivity radius controlj but the same idea will work in any other case where we can control the injectivity radius. THEOREM 22.1. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci Flow on a compact manifold Mm of dimension m with weakly positive curvature operator for a
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
93
maximal time interval 0 :::; t < T. Then we can find a sequence of dilations which converge to a complete solution of the Ricci Flow with curvature bounded at each time on an ancient time interval -00 < t < 0 with scalar curvature R bounded by R:::; 0/(0 - t) everywhere and R = 1 at some origin 0 at time t = 0, which again has weakly positive curvature operator. Moreover the limit splits as a quotient of a product NR x Rk with m = n + k flat in the directions Rk with k ~ 0, and where the interesting factor Nn either is compact or has finite asymptotic curvature ratio lim Rs2 8-+00
= A < 00.
Moreover the limit factor NR will still satisfy a local injectivity radius estimate.
sn
Of course we conjecture the only possible limit is the round sphere or a quotient of it shrinking to a point. In dimension 3 or 4 we have pinching estimates that keep the curvature operator strictly positive if it starts strictly positive, that prevent limits NR x Rk with k > o. We do not know any examples of complete non compact ancient solutions of positive curvature operator with RS2 < 00 and Rltl < 00, and we conjecture none exist, since the curvature has had plenty of space and time to dissipate. Proof. The Little Loop Lemma gives us a bound on the injectivity radius in terms of the local maximum of the curvature; if R :::; 1/r2 in the ball ofradius r around a point P, then the injectivity radius at P is at least fJr for some fJ > O. This allows us to take limits by dilating to make the maximum curvature 1. From the results in section 16 we get a limit solution of Type I or Type II . Any such limit will split as a product NR x Rk with k ~ 0 as large as possible, and where N R has strictly positive sectional curvature; for any zero sectional curvature is a zero eigenvector of the curvature operator, producing a reduction of the holonomy to the nilgroup O(n) ~ O(m). Among all possible Type I or II limits choose one where k is maximal. We shall then get a contradiction unless NR has finite asymptotic scalar curvature ratio A < 00. We have seen in Corollary 16.6 that a Type II limit with weakly positive curvature operator must be a Ricci soliton, and in Theorem 19.2 we have seen that in dimension n ~ 3 such a Ricci soliton must have A = 00. In dimension n = 2 the only Ricci soliton is the cigar 2: 2 (see [22]) which does not satisfy the local injectivity radius bound, since R goes to zero exponentially in the distance s from the origin, while the circumference of the circle at distance 8 approaches 1 as it opens like a cylinder. Thus if we prove NR is compact or has A < 00, it must be Type I. Suppose therefore that N R is not compact and A = 00, and we shall contradict k maximal. We shall pick a sequence of dilations of NR which converges to a limit with a flat factor. We need the following result. LEMMA 22.2. Given a complete noncompact solution to the Ricci Flow on an ancient time interval - 00 < t < T with T > 0 with curvature bounded at
94
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
each time and with asymptotic scalar cUnJature ratio
A = limsupRs2 =
00
8-+00
we can find a sequence of points Pj -+ 00 at time t = 0, a sequence of radii and a sequence of numbers 8j -+ such that (a) R(P, 0) ~ (1 + 8j )R(Pj, 0) for all P in the ball Br(Pj , 0) of radius r j around Pj at time t = (b) rJR(Pj,O) -+ 00 (c) if Sj = d(Pj,O,O) is the distance of Pj from some origin at time t = 0, then Aj = SjlTj -+ 00 (d) the balls Brj (Pj, 0) are disjoint.
°
rj
°
°
Proof. Pick a sequence ej -+ 0, then choose Aj -+ 00 so that AjeJ -+ well. As in Theorem 18.2, let Uj be the largest number such that sup{R(Q,0)d(Q,0,0)2: d(Q,O,O) ~
Uj}
00
as
~ Aj .
Then
R(P,0)d(Q,0,0)2 ~ Aj if d(P,O,O) ~
Uj
while there exists some Qj with
R(Qj,0)d(Q,0,0)2
= Aj
and d(Q,O,O)
= Uj
( or else U j would not be maximal). Now pick Pj so that d(Pj, 0, 0) ~
Uj
and
1
R(Pj,O) ~ 1 +e. sup{R(Q,O): d(Q,O,O) ~
Uj}
J
which is possible since even on a noncom pact set we can come as close to the sup as we wish. Finally pick rj = ejuj. First we check (a). IT P is in the ball of radius rj around Pj at time t = 0, either d(P, 0,0) ~ Uj or d(P, 0,0) ~ Uj. In the first case we have from the choice of Pj R(P,O) ~ (1 +ej)R(Pj,O) which satisfies condition (a) with OJ = ej. In the second case, we have from the . choice of U j R(P,O) ~ Aj/d(P,0,O)2 and
d(P, 0, 0) ~ d(Pj, 0, 0) - d(P, Pj, 0) ~ so
Uj -
1 A· R(P,O) ~ (1-e;)2' uJ'
On the other hand, from the choice of Q; ARCQ;, 0) = u~ J
rj
= (1 -
ej)uj
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
95
and from the choice of Pj 1 R(Pj,O) ~ -1-R(Qj,O) +Cj
since Qj is a possible choice of Q, then R(P· 0) 3'
and
1
AO'J
> - - . ---1...
-l+cj
1 +Cj R(P, 0) ~ (1_cj)2R(Pj,0)
which satisfies condition (a) with
and in either case 8j -+ 0 as Cj -+ O. Next we check condition (b). We have from our previous estimate 2
2 Cj
rjR(Pj,O) ~ -l--Aj -+
00
+Cj
by our choice of Aj . To check condition (c) note Sj ~ O'j so that Aj ~ 1/Cj -+ 00. Finally note that (a), (b) and (c) continue to hold if we pass to a subsequence. Any point Pin Br;(Pj,O) has distance from the origin at time 0 d(P,O, 0) ~ d(Pj , 0, 0) - d(P, Pj, 0) ~ (1 -
Cj)O'j
and since Aj -+ 00 we must have O'j -+ 00. Thus any fixed compact set does not meet the balls Brj (Pj, 0) for large enough j. IT we pass to a subsequence, the balls will all avoid each other. This proves the Lemma. 0 The next step is to take a sequence of dilations of the limit factor Nn around a sequence of points Pj which we take as our new origins OJ, only now we shrink down instead of expanding to make R(Pj , 0) dilate to R(Oj, 0) = 1. The points Pj are chosen at time t = 0 according to the previous Lemma. The balls Br; (Pj, 0) dilate to balls of radius fj -+ 00 by condition 4(b). Condition (a) gives good bounds on the curvature in these balls at time t = 0, while the same bounds for t ~ 0 follow from the Harnack inequality, which has as a Corollary that R is pointwise increasing on an ancient solution with weakly positive curvature operator. The Little Loop Lemma provides a bound on the injectivity radius at a point in terms of the maximum curvature in a ball around the point, in a form invariant under dilation. Hence this local injectivity radius estimate survives into the limit Nn, and gives an injectivity radius estimate at each Pj from the estimate on R in the ball of radius r j. We now have everything we need to take a limit of the dilations of the Ricci Flow around the (Pj,O), dilating time like distance squared and keeping t = 0 in N n as t = 0 in the
96
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
new limit, which we call "'if". This new limit will be a complete solution to the Ricci Flow on an ancient time interval -00 < t ~ with bounded curvature and weakly positive curvature operator. (Note our bounds on R do not hold for t> 0. Once we have "'if" we could extend it for t > by Shi's existence result [42].) Moreover "'if" has an origin 0 and R(O,O) = 1, while R ~ 1 everywhere for t ~ since OJ -+ 00. We claim a cover of "'if" splits as a product with a flat factor. To show this, it suffices to show that "'if" has a zero sectional curvature at (0,0). Suppose it does not. Then we have some lower bound 'Y > on the sectional curvatures at (0,0). This means that there will be a uniform lower bound 'Y' (say'Y' = 'Y /2) so that we have a lower bound K ~ 'Y'R(Pj , 0) on the sectional curvatures at the (Pj , 0) for all large enough j. The bounds on R in the balls Brj(Pj , 0) give bounds on R backwards in time by the Harnack inequality (as we mentioned), and now since R bounds IRml the interior derivative estimates give bounds on the first derivatives IDRml in smaller balls. Since these bounds are dilation invariant, we find that the sectional curvatures all have a uniform lower bound 'Y" (say 'Y' /2) so that we have a lower bound K ~ 'Y" R{Pj , 0) in balls around the Pj at time t = of radii
° °
°
°
°
Pj = c/VR(Pj,O)
for some constant c > 0 depending only on the dimension. Thus there exists a f3 > 0 such that for large j every Pj at t = 0 is the center of a f3-bump, and these bumps are all disjoint. Moreover since PJR(Pj , 0) = c2
and rJR(Pj , 0) -+
00
we see rj/pj -+ 00; and also sj/rj -+ 00 where Sj is the distance of Pj from the origin 0 in Nn at time t = 0, so for any A < 00 the f3-bumps at Pj are A-remote for large j. But this contradicts Theorem 21.6. Hence a cover of "'if" splits as a product and with p + q = n and q > 0, and r is a group of isometries. (Is r = O?) The limit factor NP may not be yet of Type I or II because we did not choose it in the usual way. What we can do is to take a further limit of dilations of . NP, also by shrinking, to get yet another limit 4 NP which will be of Type I or II. We get a Type I limit when the backwards limit is
n=
lim sup It IsupR(P, t) t~-oo
P
< 00
and Type II when this limit is infinite. To extract the Type I limit we choose a sequence of points Pj tj -+ -00 so that the lim sup is attained
= and times
and then make P j the new origin OJ, translate in time so tj becomes 0, dilate in space so R(Pj, tj) becomes 1 and dilate time like distance squared. To extract
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
97
the Type II limit we choose a sequence nj -+ 00, pick Tj with ITj I as large as possible so that sup{ltIR(P, t) : Tj ~ t ~ O} ~ nj and pick
Pj
and
tj ~ Tj
so that
where ej -+ 0, and dilate the same way. In both cases we have an injectivity radius estimate coming originally from the Little Loop Lemma on Mm and surviving all the dilating and limiting procedures. The rest of this argument proceeds as before. Now a sequence of dilations of Mm converges to N' x Rio, and a sequence of dilations of N' converges to NP x Rq, and a sequence of dilations of NP converges to .4 NP which is Type I or II. Thus a sequence of dilations of N' x Rio converges to NP x Rq+k, and a sequence of dilations of NP x R9+k converges to .4 NP x Rq+k. Now a dilation of a dilation is a dilation, and a limit of limits is a limit by picking an appropriate subsequence. Thus a limit of dilations of Mm converges to .4 NP x Rq+k where q + k > k. This contradicts the hypothesis that k is maximal, which proves the Theorem. 0 There is another case where the blow-down argument can be used.
THEOREM
22.3. Suppose we have a complete Ricci soliton solution
in odd dimension 2n + 1 with bounded curvature and strictly positive curvature operator. Then there exists a sequence of dilations around origins Pj at time o which converges to a limit which splits as a product of Rl with a solution of even dimension 2n which is ancient and complete with bounded curvature and weakly positive curvature operator. Proof. In section 19 we say that ID 112 approaches the maximum curvature M as 8 -+ 00 where 8 is the distance from some origin. Thus for every 8 > 0 we can find (J' < 00 so that for 8 ~ (J'
(VM which makes 1 comparable to
8.
8)8 ~
Hence on the level set
S.., the distance
8
1 ~ (VM + 8)8
= {/ = cp}
is nearly cp / YM for large r, in particular. Hence on the level set SI'={/=J.t}
98
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
the distance s is nearly J.L/ VM, in particular
IJ./(Vii + 6)
$ s $ J.L/(VM - 6)
o
for large 11:.
Now choose the point P j and radii rj as before and let R; = R(P;,O) and = I(Pj,O). Then the CUrvature R at any point P on any sphere 8/A at time = 0 with
J.Li
satisfies an estimate for large j, where again
Rjr] -+
00
and
ej
-+ O.
We can argue as before if we can control the injectivity radii Pj at (Pj, 0) with an estimate Pj ~ e/..jifj. We get this estimate in odd dimensions as follows. Each level set 8/A for large IJ. is a smooth submanifold which is strictly convex since I is convex. The second fundamental form II of 8/A is given by
II(X, Y) = D2 I(X, Y)/ID/I on vectors X and Y where
DI(X)
= DI(Y) = 0
makes them tangent to 8/A' Since IDII -+ .JM and D2 I = Re, we can control the second fundamental form on 8/A by the maximum of Re on 8/A' hence by R j • Thus
IIII $ CRj/Vii r;j.JM. Each 8/A has positive sectional curvature in the
on all 8/, with 1J.L-J.Ljl $ induced metric by the Gauss curvature equation, and each 8/, is orientable since the whole soliton is diffeomorphic to R 2n +l and the normal bundle is oriented by D I > O. H the dimension 2n + 1 of the soliton is odd, the dimension 2n of 8/A is even. Then by a theorem in [9] the injectivity radius of 8/A in the induced metric can be bounded ~ c/.jlfj. This gives a similar bound on the injectivity radius of the soliton at P; in the following way. Since the curvature is positive it is bounded below, and it suffice to show that a ball around Pj in the soliton of radius o/.jlfj has
J
volume ~ c/ R~n+l for some 0 > 0 and c > 0 independent of j. We do this by taking a coordinate chart inside the ball and estimating its volume. First go a distance of VJfj from P; in the direction of ±DI. This moves us out and back some comparable distance. Then take the exponential map of radius of VJfj
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
99
out from each point on this curve in the spheres S,.. in their induced metric. Start with a frame on the tangent space at Pj and parallelly translate it along the curve in the direction D f to get a frame at each point on this curve, and use it to refer the exponential map on a standard ball in R 2n into S,.. for each p.. Then this gives a coordinate chart in a neighborhood of Pj on the soliton. Since each curvature in the soliton and each second fundamental form on the hypersurfaces S,.. can be controlled by Rj, for a suitable small a the coordinate chart will inject with derivative close to an isometry. This shows the image
J
has volume ~ cl RJn+l. The rest of the proof proceeds just as before, up to taking the first limit. Unfortunately we cannot do the backward limit in time without more injectivity radius control. 23 An Isoperimetric Ratio Bound in Dimension Three. In this section we ·shall prove an isoperimetric ratio bound for solutions to the Ricci Flow in dimension three in the special case of a Type I singularity where we have a solution for 0 ~ t < T < 00 with
IRml(T - t) ~
n
for some constant n < 00, and where we also assume a bound below on the total volume Vet) of the form
v ~ aCT -
t)3/2
for some constant a > O. The first assumption is special; but the second is not so important, since if IRml(T - t) ~ n < 00 but V I(T - t)3/2 -+ 0 (at least for a subsequence of times) then IRmIV 2 / 3 -+ 0, and since IRml controls all the curvatures, the curvature collapes with bounded volume; and it follows from the work of Cheeger and Gromov [10] the manifold has an F-structure, and hence its topology is understood already. .
THEOREM 23.1. For every (3 > 0, p < 00, T < 00, n < 00 and a > 0 we can find a constant'Y = 'Y((3, p, T, 0, a) with the following property. If an initial metric 90 has the property that every surface which bounds a volume at least V on each side has area A ~ (3V 2/ 3, and the initial metric has scalar curvature R ~ -p, and if the subsequent solution if the Ricci Flow exists for 0 ~ t < T with IRml(T - t) ~ 0 and V ~ aCT - t)3/2,
then at any time t any surface which bounds a volume at least V on each side has area A ~ 'Ymin(T - t, V 2/ 3). Proof. Let G(V, t) be the function defined for 0 :5 t < T and 0 :5 V :5 Vet) which for 0 < V < Vet) is the infimum of the areas of surfaces of any type
100
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
=
which divide the manifold into regions of volumes V and V - V, with G 0 if V = 0 or V = V. Then so much is known about the theory of minimal surfaces (see Almgren [1]) that we know G is continuous in V and t, and for any t in o :5 t < T and any V in 0 < V < V the infimum is attained on a smooth surface of constant mean curvature H. Moreover if f3 < f3E where f3E is its Euclidean value f3E = (3611")1/3 then for any metric on a compact manifold we can find ~ > 0 depending on the metric so that any surface bounding a volume V :5 8 has area A ~ f3V 2 / 3 • This 0 means we do not need to concern ourselves with very small volumes. We shall prove a lower bound of the form G function F(V, t) is chosen of the form 1 F
2pt
= ea
> F for 0 < V < V where the
{Q B B} T _ t + V2/3 + [Vet) - Vj2/3
for some suitably large constants Q and B which we are free to choose later. Since ept :5 epT we can find 'Y > 0 in terms of epT , A and B, which will prove the Theorem. IT B is large enough, then by the previous remark we do not have to worry when V or V - V is very small. IT this estimate fails, there will be a first time t* and a volume V* with o < V* < [aCT - t)]3/2 when G = F, and G(V*, t*) will be attained by the area of a smooth surface E* of constant mean curvature H. Consider a oneparameter family of smooth surfaces E(r) for r near 0 by taking the parallel surface to E* at distance'lr, with E(r) inside the part with volume V* for r < 0 and outside for r > o. Note that E(O) = E*. Define the smooth functions A(r, t) and VCr, t) for r near 0 and t near t* by letting A(r, t) be the area of E(r) at time t, and letting VCr, t) be the volume enclosed by E(r) at time t on the side of the part with volume V*. Note that A(O, t*) is the area of E* which is G(V*,t*), while V(O,t*) = V*. It is clear we have the inequality A(r,t*)
~
G(V(r,t*),t*)
since G is the least area among all surfaces enclosing the given volume at the given time. But G ~ F up to time t*, so A(r, t*)
~
F(V(r, t*), t*)
for all r near 0, and equality is attained at r = 0 where G A and F are both smooth, at r = 0 and t = t* we get 8A
8r
8F8V
= 8V&
and 8 2 A > 8 2F (8V)2 8r2 - 8V2 8r
8F8 2 V.
+ 8V 8r2
=F
at time t*. Since
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
In addition, it is also clear that we have the inequality
A(O, t) ;::: G(V(O, t), t) for t $ t*, and since G ;::: F up to time t* we get
A(O, t) ;::: F(V(O, t), t) for t $ t*, with equality at t
= t*,
Thus at r
8A 8F at $ at Now at r
= 0 and t = t* ,
= 0 and t = t* ,
8F8V
+ 8Vat'
8V -=A=F 8r
aqd
8 2V 8r2
= 8A = H A = H F 8r
where H is the constant mean curvature, Then the equality
8A 8F8V =-8r 8V 8r makes
8F 8V=H,
From this we get
8 2V 8r2
8F
= F 8V'
Now our inequality on 8 2 A/8r 2 becomes
The volume V shrinks at a rate
8V= 8t
!
Rdv
(since the inequality R ;::: -p, which we assume at t = 0, is preserved by the Ricci Flow), Since both F and G are symmetric in V -t V(t) - V, it is no loss to assume V* $ V(t)/2; and this makes 8F/8V = H ~ 0 at r = 0 and t = t*, Then our inequality on aA/8t becomes
aA < aF vaF at - at +p av' These are the inequalities we need,
101
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
102
The remaining fact we use comes from section 12, where we showed that for a family of parallel surfaces I:;(r) we have
8A
82 A
at = 8r2
-471"X
where X is the Euler class of I:; * . We claim that for a suitably large constant Q in the definition of F, which makes F ~ (T - t)/Q,
we can make X ~ 0, so that I:;* is not a sphere or a projective plane. What is required for this? We have 271"X = [ [Rm(P)
lEo
+ K]da
where Rm(P) is the ambient curvature of the tangent plane P to I:; * , and K is the determinant of the second fundamental form. We have Rm(P) ~ CO/(T - t)
for some constant C. Then
Lo Rm(P)da ~ CO/Q which is as small as we like for Q large. Also K ~ H 2/4 and H [
lEO
K da
= 8F/8V so
< !F (8F) 2
-
4
8V
Now we claim that by making B large we can make F(8F/8V)2 as small as we like. Recall 1 F
=e
£pt S
{Q B B} T _ t + V2/3 + [Vet) - V]2/3 .
Differentiate implicitly to get 8F _ ~ fpt 2 8V - 3 Be F
Since we have assumed V
~
{_1_ _[Vet) _1 } V5/3
V(t)/2,
o <- av 8F < ~BefPt F 2 /v 5 / 3 - 3 and This makes
V]5/3
.
103
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
which is indeed as small as we like when B is large. Thus X < 1, and since it is an integer we must have X ~ O. This makes
8A> 8 2 A 8t - 8r 2 '
Now we can combine our inequalities to include that
at V = V* and t = t*. However, we claim if Q and B are large enough the opposite inequality holds everywhere. This contradiction implies G > F for all t < T, which will prove the Theorem. 0
LEMMA
23.2. If Q and B are large enough then the function F defined by
.!.. _
F - e
fpt
{-.!L + ~ + T- t
V2/3
B } [V(t) - V]2/3
satisfies 8F
28 2F
8F
~ F 8V2 + F
(8F)2 8V
Proof. We look for a function F in the form F
= I/H.
at + pV 8V for 0 ~ t
and 0
~
V(t)/2.
Then we need
IT H takes the form then K must satisfy e
fPtK3 [8K 8t
V 8K )] 3 (8K)2 > K8 2K + p (~K 3 + 8V + 8V - 8V2 .
Our K has the form K
= T Q_ t + B
[1
V2/3
+ (V _
1] V)2/3
.
We compute
8K 8t
(2
8K)
+ '32 B
2 pQ
Q
+ p '3 K + V 8V = (T 1
. (V _ V)5/3
t)2
(
+ '3 T
pV -
- t
8V) at .
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
104
Since R
~
-
p makes
8V
<
V
8t - p
we have 8K
at + P
(2a
K
+V
8K) 8V
Q ~ (T - t)2'
Since e~pt ~ 1 it is sufficient to verify Q K3 (T _ t)2
+3
(8K)2 8V
~
and now we can forget about p. We consider two cases. The first is where V constant g we shall choose shortly. We have 8K 8V
~
2[1
= -a B
and
8 2K K 8V2
gV for some small absolute
1]
V5/3 - (V - V)5/3
10 [V8/31 + (V - 1] V)8/3 .
82 K
= 9'B
8V2
Then 3 (8K)2 > 12 B2 [1- 5/3]2. _1_ 8V - 9 g VlO/3
and
82 K
10 [ 8/3] 8V2 ~ 9'B 1 + g
•
1 V8/3'
Also 1 Q B . V2/3 ~ K ~ T _ t
+ B [1 + g 2/3]
Therefore our inequality will hold if we choose 12 9'
g
•
1 V2/3'
> 0 so small that
[1 - g5/3 ] 2 ~ 9' 10 [1 + g8/3 ]
+ '19
and if in addition we have 3 1 B Q. (T _ t)2V6/3
Since
g
1 2
+ '9 B
1 10 Q [ 8/3] . VlO/3 ~ 9'B 1+g
•
1 1 T - t . V8/3'
is small we can take
and then this inequality holds if B3 ~ 3Q. Thus we have the estimate for V:::; g(V - V) by making B large compared to Q.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
Consider the other case where V compare everything to V and
~
105
c(V - V). This is easier because we can
V 2 / 3 ~ a(T - t)
for some a > 0 by our hypothesis. With various constants C < 00 and c > 0 independent of B, Q, and a (but depending on c > 0 which is fixed) we have
82 K
1
8V2 ~ CB . V8/3
and
1 K ~ cB· V2/3.
Our estimate holds if Q 8 2 K
which holds if V ~ a(T - t)3/2 and BQ ~ C/a 4 / 3
for some constant C as above. This is easily arranged also, and the Theorem is established. 0 COROLLARY 23.3. If IRml ~ O(T - t) and V ~ a(T - t)2/3 as before then the injectivity radius r satisfies an estimate
for some
(J
>0
depending on {3, p, T, 0, a as before.
Proof. IT the injectivity radius is very small compared to the maximum curvature then the isoperimetric ratio A/V2 !3 will also be very small for a torus of area A enclosing a volume V very small compared to the maximum curvature. 0
24 Curvature Pinching in Three Dimensions. In three dimensions we can extract more information from the explicit form of the curvature reaction. Recall from 5(c) that when the curvature operator matrix M is diagonal
where M(X, Y)
= Rg(X, Y) -
2Rc(X, Y)
106
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
and the trace of M is the scalar curvature R the reaction ODE system becomes
Any closed convex set of curvature operator matrices M which is SO(3) invariant (and hence invariant under parallel translation) and preserved by the reaction ODE is also preserved by the Ricci Flow. Since the system of ODEs is homogeneous, it is natural to first study the radial motion, and then examine the solution curves projectivly. The radius p is given by and we compute
which shows the radius p increases for positive scalar curvature R = A+J.&+V > 0, and decreases for negative scalar curvature R = A+J.&+V < O. Next note that if a vector VERn evolves by a system of ODE 8
~
=F(V)
then this system and the associated system
~ = a(V)F(V) -
b(V)V
have the same oriented family of solution curves in the projective sphere sn-1 = Rn - {O}/R+, for any scalar valued functions a(V) and beY). We take V = (A,J.&, v) and a = (A2 + J.&2 + v 2 ) b = A3 + J.&3 + v 3 + 3AJ.&V • Then the associated system keeps A2 + J.& 2 v 2 constant, so we can restrict our attention to the unit sphere p = 1. It has the explicit form dA dt = A2( J.& - v) 2 - J.& 3( A - v ) - v 3(A - J.& ) •
Clearly it has fixed points A = J.& = v and A = J.& = 0, A = v = 0, J.& = v = 0. This gives eight fixed points on the sphere p = 1. It is easiest to display the flow on the front of the sphere R > and on the back R < 0. We denote the circles A = 0, J.& = 0, v = with solid lines, and the circles >. + J.& = 0, >. + v = 0, J.& + v = with dotted lines. In the hemisphere
°
°
°
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
107
R > 0 the region of positive sectional curvature lies inside the solid triangle, the region of positive Ricci curvature inside the dotted one; similarly for negative sectional and Ricci curvature on the other. RO
The center point A = J1. = II > 0 represents the sphere 8 3 , and the center point A = J1. = II < 0 represents the hyperbolic space H3. Note 8 3 is attractive while H3 is repulsive. The three vertices A > 0, J1. = II = 0 and J1. > 0, A = II = 0 and II > 0, A = J1. = 0 represent the cylinder 8 2 x Rl, while the three vertices A < 0, J1. = II = 0 and J1. < 0, A = II = 0 and II < 0, A = J1. = 0 represent H2 x Rl. These are degenerate fixed points which all attract in one direction from one side, and repel in the opposite direction on the other side. Of course the picture on the back R < 0 is the reverse of the picture on the front. We can examine the degenerate fixed point at the cylinder 8 2 x Rl where A = J1. = 0 more precisely by taking instead the associated system with a=
and b =
II
112
+ AJ1.
which preserves the planes where II is constant. Restricting to associated system dA = J1. - A + A2 - A2 J1. { dt dJ1. = A - J1. + J1.2 - AJ1.2
dt
with a degenerate fixed point at >.
= J1. = O.
II
= 1 gives the
IT we substitute J1.=X-Y
A=X+Y
we get the system dx { dt
= X2 + y2 _
~~ = -
x(x2 _ y2)
[2(1 - x)
+ x2 _
When we are close to the origin x increases and y2 +3x
=0
y2] y.
IYI
decreases. On the parabola
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
108
we have
d
dt (y2
+ 3x) = 3x (1 + x 2) ~ 0
so if we start inside this parabola we must stay inside, and if we start close to the origin we must appraoch the origin. But on the parabola y2 +4x -e
we have
=0
d dt (y2+4x-c) =4x 2(I+x)+2c(c-4x-x 2) ~o
when -1 ~ x ~ 0, so if we start outside this parabola but close to the origin with x < 0 we must stay outside until x > 0, after which x becomes large before y reaches o. The envelope of all the solution curves attracted to the origin will again be a solution curve between the parabolas y2 + 3x = 0 and y2 + 4x = 0, so this separatrix has a vertical tangent near the orgin. On the other hand, near the origin dx 2 - ~ x + y2 dt
to a good approximation. If x dx dt which gives solution curves
~
~
x
and
0 and 0 2
and
~
dy - ~ -2y dt y « Ixl then
dy dt
~
-2y
which keep y « Ixl and approach the x-axis very fast. We expect the solution curves inside the separatrix to look like these. In fact we expect the solution curves of the original system and the simple approximation are conjugate by a diffeomorphism. This gives the following picture for the solution curves near S2 x R where A = 0, I' = 0, II = 1, projected radially onto the plane II = 1. (Recall x and yare rotated 90 0 from A and 1'.)
:;,--------:, , , ,," , , " , " , ,,"
Note that a sizable region in A, 1', II space is attracted into the fixed radial line
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
109
A = I-' = 0 while the rest flows past it, on towards 8 3 along the fixed radial line A=I-'=v. Tom Ivey has used a computer to produce a picture of the solution curves for the associated system obtained by projecting radially on the plane A+I-' + v = 1. The picture looks like this
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
110
Hopefully some geometric insight into the following pinching results.
THEOREM
24.1.
For any
g
in 0
~ g ~
1/3, the pinching condition R
~
0
and Rc(x,y)
~
gRg(x,y)
is preserved by the Ricci Flow in dimension three. Proof. H the curvature operator M has eigenvalues A ~ IJ conditions become IJ + II ~ 0 and
~ II,
the pinching
=
with 6 2g / (1 - 2g). Since A is a convex function of M while J.I. + II is a concave function, the inequalities define a convex set of matrices, so we only have to check that this set is preserved by the ODE system. So we must check
or
JL2
+ All + 112 + AJL ~ 6 (A2 + JLII)
on the boundary where
JL + II
= 6A ~ o.
This is equivalent (solving for 6) to
A (JL2
+ All + 112 + AJL)
~ (JL + II) (A2
+ JLII)
which reduces to
A2(JL + II) ~ JLII(JL + II) which clearly holds if JL
+ II ~ 0 and
A ~ JL
~
o
II.
THEOREM 24.2. For any {J > 0, B < 00, and'Y > 0 we can find a constant C < 00 depending on {J, Band 'Y with the following property. If a solution to the Ricci Flow in dimension three has
{Jg(x,y) ~ Rc(x,y) ~ Bg(x,y) at the beginning t
= 0,
then for all subsequent times t
~
0 we have
IRC - ~Rgi ~ 'YR + C as a bound on the trace-free part of the Ricci tensor. Proof. Depending on {J and B we can choose d > 0 so that
_£ • . ,
rUKMATION OF SINGULARITIES
111
at t = 0, and hence for t ;:: 0 by the proof of the previous theorem. Choose the constant A so that the inequality
A - v :5 A(JL + v)I-6 holds at t
= 0, which is possible since
at t = O. We claim this inequality is also preserved by the rucci Flow. Clearly it defines a convex set of matrices M with eigenvalues A ;:: I' ;:: v and I' + v ;:: o. So we only must check that the inequality is preserved by the ODE system. Now so
d
-In(A - v) dt while
d
dt (I'
+ v)
= 1'2
so
= A - I' + v
+ AV + v 2 + AI' ;:: A(JL + v)
d
dt In(JL + v) ;:: A. Then
d dt In [(A - v)/(JL + v)I-6] :5 <SA - (I' + v) :5 0
so the ratio (A-II)/(JL+II)1-6 decreases. Hit is less than A to start, it remains so. We can estimate
for some constant C, and I'
+ v:5 CR
for some the constant C. For any ( > 0 we can find yet another constant C (() with R I - 6 :5 (R + C(() for all R ;:: O. Then we get IRe -
~Rgl :5 C(R + C(()
and we only need to take ( :5 'Y / C to finish the proof.
o
COROLLARY 24.3. For any (3 > 0, B < 00 and (J > 0 we can find a constant C < 00 with the following property. If a solution to the Ricci Flow in dimension three has (3g(x, y) :5 Rc(x, y) :5 Bg(x, y)
112
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
at the beginning t
= 0,
then for any subsequent T
~
0
max maxIDRm(P, t)1 ~ (}max maxIRm(P, t)1 3 / 2 t~T
t~T
P
P
+ C.
Proof. We can recover this result by a limiting procedure; an explicit estimate using the maximum principle is given in [20]. Suppose the estimate fails for all C. Pick a sequence Cj -+ 00, and pick points Pj and times Tj such that IDRm(Pj , Tj)1 ~ (}max max IRm(P, t)13/2 t~T;
P
+ Cj .
Choose the Pj to be the origin, and pull the metric back to a small ball of radius r j proportional to the reciprocal of the square root of the maximum curvature
up to time metrics so
T.
Clearly these go to infinity by our derivative bounds. Dilate the max max IRm(P, t) I t~T;
P
becomes 1 and translate so time Tj becomes time O. Then Cj dilates to zero, but in the limit metric IDRm(O, 0)1 ~
e.
However the limit metric has 1
RC-'3 Rg =O by the previous theorem. But then it has constant curvature, which is a contradiction. This proves the corollary. 0 We can now see that the solution to the Ricci Flow on a compact threemanifold with positive Ricci curvature becomes round. Since ~IN > 0, ~AX goes to infinity in a finite time. Pick a sequence of points Pj and times Tj where the curvature at Pj is as large as it has been anywhere for 0 ~ t ~ Tj. Since IDRml is very small conpared to R(Pj , tj) and IRc - ~Rgi is also, the curvature is nearly constant and positive in a large ball around Pj • But then Myer's Theorem tells us this is the whole manifold. Our next result is even more interesting, because it applies to any threemanifold regardless of the sign of the curvature tensor. It was also observed independently by Ivey [30]. Consider the function y=J(x) =xlogx-x
for 1 ~ x < 00, where it is increasing and convex with range -1 ~ y < 00. We let f- 1 (y) = x be the inverse function, which is also increasing but concave and satisfies lim J-1(y)/y = O. y-+oo
THEOREM
24.4. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci flow
a at gij = - 2Rij
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
113
on a compact three-manifold which satisfies the inequalities R
at t
= O.
Then it will continue to satisfy them for t
~
~
-1 and
O.
Note that since f-l(y) ~ +1 always, any matrix with eigenvalues at least -1 and trace at least -1 satisfies the inequalities. For any metric we can achieve this by dilation. Then the inequalities will continue to hold under the Ricci flow. Then if the curvatures go to infinity, the most negative will be small compared to the most positive.
LEMMA.
The set P of matrices
P: {
Mab
defined by the inequalities
..\ + J.' + v ~ -1 v+I- 1 (..\+J,t+v) ~ 0
is closed, convex and preserved by the ODE.
Proof. P is closed because 1-1 is continuous. The function ..\+ J.'+v is just the trace, which is a linear function. Therefore the first inequality defines a linear half-space, which is convex. The function v is concave, and 1-1 is concave and increasing, so the second inequality defines a convex set as well. 0 Under the ODE d
.~+J.'+0=~+~+~+~+~+~ and this quadratic can be written as
so it is clearly non-negative. Thus the first inequality is preserved. The second inequality can be written as
which becomes
..\ + J.' ~ (-v) log( -v). It is easier to keep track of the signs if we let n
= -v, and write it as
..\ + J.' ~ nlogn.
,-1 (. \
_,-1 (. \
To show the inequality is preserved we only need to look at points on the boundary of the set. If v + + J.' + v) = 0 then v = + J.' + v) ::; -1 since ,-I(y) ~ 1 for all y. This makes n ~ 1, so nlogn ~ 0 and ..\ + J.' ~ O. Since ..\ ~ IJ we must at least have ..\ ~ O. But IJ may have either sign.
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
114
We deal first with the case where 11
~
O. Then we need to verify
dA d~ dn dt + dt ~ (logn + 1) dt when A +
~
= n log n. Solving for A+~
logn= - n and substituting above, we must show
+~ A2 - ~n + ~2 - An ~ (A -n-
+ 1)
(-n 2-
A~ )
which reduces to
and since A, ~ and n are all positive or zero we are done here. In the other case where 11 ~ 0 we again change the sign by letting 11 = -m. Then the inequality becomes A ~ m+nlogn. To show the inequality is preserved we must verify that
dA dm dn + (logn+ 1)dt-dt dt
- >-
when A = m + nlogn. Solving for
A-m logn= - n and substituting above, we must show
when A showing
~
0 and 0
~
m
~
n (and n
A2 n + Am2 which is equivalent to
which must hold because
Hence the proof is complete.
~
1). This simplifies algebraically to
+ m 2 n + n 3 ~ A2m + Amn
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
115
COROLLARY 24.5. For any constants B < 00 and 6 > 0 there exists a constant C < 00 with the following property. If any solution to the Ricci Flow on a complete three-manifold with bounded cUnJature satisfies IRml ~ B at t = 0, then for t ~ 0 it satisfies the estimate
M(X, Y)
~
-(6R + C)g(X, Y)
on the cUnJature operator M. Hence when the cUnJature R is big, any negative cUnJature is very small in comparison. The following refinement of these techniques gives a curvature pinching result useful for classifying Type I singularities on a three-manifold. THEOREM 24.6. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci Flow on a compact three-manifold on a maximal time intenJal 0 ~ t < T which is Type I, so
lim sup(T - t) IMI
< 00
t-+T
and suppose the manifold never acquires positive sectional cUnJature everywhere. Then there exists a () > 0 such that for every T < T and every 6 > 0 we can find a time t in T ~ t < T and a point P where (T - t)IMI 2: () and a frame at P in which 1M - REI ~ 61MI where the scalar cUnJature R = tr M is the trace of the cUnJature operator M and E is the curvature operator matrix of a round cylinder 8 2 X RI given by
E= ( \ ) .
COROLLARY 24.7. The limit of dilations of the solution around these points and times gives an ancient solution with bounded non-negative sectional cUnJature whose holonomy reduces. Consequently it splits as a product of a surface with RI.
Proof. Since the minimum of R increases, we can choose a constant p 2: 0 so that
R+p>O for all t ~ O. The pinching estimates imply that for large IMI any negative eigenvalues M may have are not nearly as great in absolute value as some positive one; and hence there is some constant A < 00 so that
IMI :5 A(R + p) for all t
~
O.
o
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
116
We shall prove the converse of the Theorem. Suppose that for every (J > 0 there exist T < T and 6 > 0 such that at every point and in every frame at any time t with T ~ t < T we always have (T -
t)IMI
~ (J
or else 1M - REI ~
61MI.
We shall then show the manifold shrinks to a point and becomes round. We shall let C < 00 and c > 0 denote various constants which may depend on A and p (as well as the dimension n = 3) but which for now are independent of the parameters (J, T, 6, TI, e which we will choose as follows. We pick (J small enough to start, choose T and 6 depending on (J from the new hypothesis, pick TI depending on 6, and finally choose e depending on ,. The exact choices of (J, T, 6, TI, e will be explained as the proof evolves. Using R + P > 0, consider the function
F = (T -
WI ~ MI2 f(R + p)2-e
where
1
o
-+M=M- -RI 3 is the trace-free part of M when I is the identity matrix in an orthonormal frame. The matrix M evolves by DtM=~M+M'
where if
in an appropriate frame then
M'
= (A2 + P.1I p.2 + All
) . 112
+ Ap.
The trace R evolves by
DtR= ~R+R' where R' is the trace of M', and the trace-free part ~ M evolves by Dt ~ M=~ ~M+ ~ M' where ~ M' is the trace-free part of M'. Using the identity
~
[I ~ MI2 f(R + p)2-e] [I
+(2 - c) [DR/(R + p)] D ~ MI2 /(R + p)2-e] = 2 ...; M· ~ ...; M/(R + p)2-E - (2 - e)1 ...; MI2~R/(R + p)3-E
+ {eID"'; MI2 + (2 - c)
ID"'; M-"'; ~~~12} (R + p)E-2
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
117
and discarding the last term in braces which is clearly positive, we can compute the evolution of F as
DtF = ~F + (2 - e)[DRj(R + p)] . DF + F' where F' is computed from the ODE's as
F'
= 2(T - W ~ M· ~
+ p)2-~ - e(T - t)~-l / ~ M/2 f(R + p)2-e - (2 - e)(T - tY/ M' f(R ~
M/2R'j(R+ p)3-e.
We can regroup this as
F'
= (T -
W[X - 2Y]j(R + p)3-e
where
x = 2p ~ M· ~ M' +e/ and
~ M/2R' -e(R+p)/ ~ M/ 2j(T-t)
= / ~ M/ 2R' -R ~ M· ~ M'. is the only term we would have if e = 0 and p = 0.) y
(Note Y we compute explicitly
Using the ODE's
and note Y = 0 on the symmetric spaces 8 3 , 8 2 X Rl, R 3, H2 X Rl, and H3 where>. = ,." = v or >. = ,." = 0 or >. = v = 0 or ,." = v = 0, while Y > 0 elsewhere. We can estimate X from above as follows. The matrix ~ M has diagonal entries like 1 -[(>' - ,.,,) + (>. - v)] 3 so I ~
MI is comparable to (>. - ,.,,)
+ (>. -
v)
+ (,." -
v)
up to a constant factor above and below. The matrix ~ M' has diagonal entries like 1 3[(>' - ,.,,)(>' + ,." - v) + (>. - v)(>. + v - ,.,,)] so I ~ M'I ~ CIMII ~ first term in X
MI
for some constant C. This gives a bound on the
We also have a bound IM'I~CIMI2
and R' is the trace of M', so we get a bound on the second term in X
118
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
Finally
IMI $
A(R + p) so we get a bound on the third term f:(R + p)1 ~ MI2/(T - t) ~
cclMIl ~ MI2 /(T - t).
This gives a bound
on the quantity X. We can also estimate Y from below.
LEMMA
24.8. For every fJ
> 0 there exists an ( > 0 such that if the matrix
M satisfies 1M - REI ~
fJlMI
in every frame then
Proof. We saw Y > 0 if we avoid the lines where M Hence by homogeneity Y ~ (IMI 4 for some ( > 0 if 1M - REI
~ fJlMI
and
1M -
= RE or M = lRI.
~RII ~ fJIMI·
1M -
If lRII $ fJlMI for fJ small, we surely have all the eigenvalues of the same sign with comparable magnitudes, and
>..2(JJ _11)2 +JJ2(>.. - 11)2 + 112(>.. - JJ)2 ~ (>..2 + JJ2 + 112)[(>.. - JJ)2 + (>.. - 11)2 + (JJ - 11)2] for some ( > O. Hence in either case we are done. Given ( as above, choose f: > 0 so small that Of: S ( for the constant 0 in the bound on X. If 1M - REI ~ fJlMI then
S OplM11 ~ MI2 - (IM121 ~ M12. On the other hand, if (T - t)IMI S (J then neglecting Y ~ 0 we have X - 2Y
X - 2Y $ OplM11
~ MI2 - (~- 0) IMI21 ~ MI2
and if we pick (J > 0 at the beginning with (J S c/(C Since f: is small compared to (, we have
in either case. As a consequence
+ 1)
then c/(J - 0
~ 1-
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
119
Having come this far, since e is now chosen we loose nothing to let our constants C and c depend on e from now on . Then we can write this as
o We summarize our argument so far. LEMMA
24.9. There exist constants p ~ 0, A < 00, C + p > 0 and IMI $ A(R + p), and if
< 00, c > 0 and e > 0
such that R
F
= (T- WI ~ MI 2/(R+ p)2-t:
then DtF
= fl.F + V . D F + F'
where V
= (2 -
e)DR/(R + p)
and
COROLLARY
24.10.
We have F -+ 0 as t -+ T.
Proof. Choose any A > O. When
(T-t)IMI $ A since I ~
MI $
IMI and IMI $ A(R + p) we have
which is as small as we like if A is small enough. But when
(T-t)IMI
~
A
we have IMI quite large for t near T, so
and
F' $ On the other hand, now that
-~cIMI2F/(R+P)'
IMI
R+p $
is large
V3IMI +p $
21M I
120
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
so
Using
IMI ~ >'/(T -
t) we get
F'
~ -~C>'F/(T -
t)
for t near T. Thus when the maximum F MAX of F exceeds ,..!2- e )..E it must decrease at a rate-
where p
= i'c>. > O.
This implies
so if (T - t)-P F MAX = B at some time T close enough to T for the above estimates to hold then subsequently FMAX
~
B(T - t)P
and so when t is even closer to T the second holds. But >. > 0 is arbitrary, so F-t O. Now we can show that the manifold shrinks to a point and becomes round. By assumption
(T-t)IMI ~
n
for some constant n. On the other hand there exists a constant w that at each t we have
>
0 such
(T-t)IMI ~w somewhere, or else
IMI could not go to infinity as t -t T
because
would not allow such rapid growth. Hence the maximum of IMI is always proportional to l/(T - t). The quantity F is dilation-invariant, so when we form the Type I limit (which must exist by our injectivity radius estimate which we proved in Corollary 23.3) we have F = 0 on the l:'mit. Hence the limit metric has ~ M = 0, and hence has M = ~RI. But this implies the curvature is constant, (as we have had occasion to observe before from the contracted second Bianchi identity). Since the curvature is positive, the limit is a sphere 8 3 or a quotient space-form 8 3 /r. This proves the theorem. 0
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
121
25 Limits with Strictly Positive Curvature Operator. Given a sequence of complete solutions to the Ricci Flow with uniformly bounded curvature on some time interval, we can extract a convergent subsequence by the result in [26] provided we can control the injectivity radius at the origin points. In general this may be hard, but there is one important case where we get it for free. This is based on the observation that for a complete non-compact manifold with strictly positive sectional curvature we can bound the injectivity radius by the maximum of the curvature. The situation we consider here is not quite that simple, but with some work it is also possible to estimate the injectivity radius. We have a sequence of solutions to the Ricci flow where the sectional curvatures are bounded, where the lower bound is negative but increases to zero (as we have seen always happens after dilation if n = 3), and where the sectional curvatures at the origin points are uniformly bounded positive away from zero, and where the diameters go to infinity. In this case when we are far out in the sequence the curvature stays positive a long way out, and is never very negative. This is enough to produce a neighborhood of the origin which is convex and contains a ball of enough size to give a good lower bound on the injectivity radius. We now make this precise. THEOREM 25.1. Suppose we have a sequence of solutions to the Ricci Flow given by metrics G j on manifolds M j with origins OJ and frames:Fj for times 0: < t < w (with 0: < 0 < w) which are all complete, and such that for some
p>O (a) all the sectional curvatures of all the metrics G j are at most 1/p2 (b) there is a sequence dj -+ 0 such that all the eigenvalues of the curvature opemtor Rmj of the metric Gj are at least -dj / p2 (c) there is an e > 0 such that all the eigenvalues of the curvature opemtor Rmj of G j at the origin OJ are at least e/ p2 (d) the diameters dj of the metrics G j go to 00. Then there is a subsequence of the metrics such that all the injectivity mdii at the origins are at least this p > O. Hence a subsequence converges to a solution Goo of the Ricci Flow on 0: < t < w. Proof. The first step is to extract a subsequence which would want to converge if we could control the injectivity radii. To do this we introduce the notion of a geodesic tube in a manifold M with origin. Given a frame:F = (F}, F 2 , ••• , Fn) at the origin 0 and a length L, we begin by constructing the geodesic of length L out of 0 in the direction Fl and its opposite. Then we parallelly translate the frame :F along this geodesic, and take the geodesic out of each point in the direction F2 and its opposite of length p. Parallelly translate :F along these also, and take the geodesic out of each of these points in the direction F3 and its opposite of length p, and so on. Notice that only in the first direction do we go a long way L, while in the other directions we don't go farther than p. The curvature satisfies IKI :$ p, so this construction gives a local diffeomorphism of (-L,L) x (-p,p) x··· x (-p,p) ---+ M.
122
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
Consider the pull-back metrics. For the Ricci Flow a bound on the curvature gives a bound on all the derivatives of the curvature. Then by ordinary differential equations we get bounds on the pull-back metric and all its derivatives with respect to the tube coordinates. (Here we omit the details.) H we consider a fixed reference frame :Fj at the origin in each Mj and take an element A of the orthogonal group, then A:Fj is a frame at the origin in M j , and we can take the pull-back metric for the geodesic tube on A:Fj. For a fixed A and a fixed L, we can always find a convergent subsequence of the pull-back metrics. By choosing a countable dense set of A's and a sequence of L's going to infinity, and by a diagonalization argument, we can find a subsequence of metrics so that the pull-back metrics to the tube on the frames A:Fj of length L converge for every A and every L. In this case we say the metrics preconverge along geodesic tubes. (Note any convergent sequence would be preconvergent.) The advantage of preconvergence is that we do not need to control the injectivity radius to get it. Form now on we only deal with such a preconvergent sequence. We can strengthen the notion of preconvergence to compare one tube with another. For any two vectors X and Y in Rn (which we identify with the tangent spaces at the origins OJ in the Mj with the frames :Fj) we can consider the sequence of distances dj
= dj(exPjX,exPj Y)
~ IXI
+ IYI
in Mj i by picking a subsequence we can assume the dj converge. H we do this by diagonalization for a countable dense set of pairs (Xo<, Yo<) then in fact dj will converge for every pair (X, Y). To see this take any c > O. Choose a sequence of pairs with Xo< -+ X and Yo< -+ Y. Since we have preconvergence in geodesic tubes in the directions X and Y, the metrics G j converge to a limit G! in the tube on X, and to a limit G~ in the tube on Y. We can find a constant c > 0 depending only on the dimension so that for any ( > 0 small enough, if IX - XI ~ c(p then in the metric G!
and likewise if Iii' -
Given (
YI
~ c(p then in the metric G~
> 0, choose 0 so large that IXo< -
XI
~ c(p
and
IYo< -
YI
~ c(p.
Then and
d~ (exp~ yo<,exp~ Y) ~ (.p.
Now choose j large enough depending on X, Y, 0, 1], and p so that Idj(exPjXa,exPjX) -d~ (exp!Xo<,exp!X)1 ~ (.p
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
and
123
Idj(exPj Ya,exPj Y) - d! (exp~ Ya,exp~ Y)I ::5 (p.
Finally make j large enough also depending on X, Y, cr, ( and p so that dj(exPj Xa,exPj Ya ) ::5 (p since Xa and Ya are in the countable set for which the sequence is preconvergent in distances. Then dj(exp, X, exPj Y) ::5 S(p. Since , is arbitrary, the sequence is preconvergent in distances for all X and Y as claimed. In fact we can do a little better along the lines of [H]. Using the geodesic tube coordinates at t = 0, we can also consider the pull-back of the metric at earlier or later times, which we can bound using curvature bounds, since we know the metric evolves by the curvature under Ricci Flow. Then we can actually make the pull~backs of the Ricci Flow converge to a solution of the Ricci Flow in every geodesic tube. We can also keep the solutions preconvergent in the distances dj(exPm X, eXPj Y)(t) for all X and Y at every time t. 0 LEMMA 2S.2. For every length L we can find eeL) > 0 and J(L) > 00 such that all eigenvalues of the curvature operator on M j at points within distance L of the origin have It ~ eeL) when j ~ J(L).
Proof. Suppose not. Then we can find a sequence of points Xj = expo(ij V;) at distances ij ::5 L from the origin in some directions V; with IV; I = 1 such that some eigenvalues of the curvature operators at the Xj are not bounded away from 0 on the positive side. Since on Mj we have there eigenvalues ~ -6j / p2 with 6 -t 0, they in fact go to zero. 0
Find a convergent subsequence V; -t V and ij -t i and pick a geodesic tube in each M j starting in the direction V. By preconvergence we get a limit which solves the Ricci Flow in the tube and the limit will have some eigenvalue of the curvature operator equal to zero at the point iV with i ::5 L. But in the limit all the eigenvalues of the curvature operator are ~ 0, so by the strong maximum principle (see[29]j the argument works locally also) there must be a zero eigenvalue of the curvature operator everywhere in the tube at every time, in particular at the origin at t = O. But for the sequence we had the eigenvalues of the curvature operator at OJ ~ e, so this holds in the limit also. Since this is a contradiction, the Lemma is established. In a manifold M with origin 0, we define the function i(V) on unit tangent vectors V at with values in [0,00] to be the distance to the cut locus in the direction V. IT exp is the exponential map at the origin, then
°
i(V)
= max{ljd(explV,O) = l}.
It is well-known (see Cheeger and Ebin [9]) that the distance to the cut locus is a continuous function. Moreover if l = leV) then either the geodesic exp(sv)
124
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
for 0 ::; s ::; l has a non-zero Jacobi field vanishing at the ends, or there exists another W '" V write exp(lW) == exp(lV). The choice of frames Fi at the origins OJ in M j allows us to identify the tangent spaces at the origins with Rn. We define the set V of distinguished directions as those in which we can go off to infinity as j -t 00. To see this is well-defined, let lj (V) for a unit vector V in R n be the distance to the cut locus in M j in the direction V relative to the frame Fj.
LEMMA.
For any sequence Vj
-t
V, the limit loo(V) == .lim lj(Vj) exists J~OO
and depends only on V and is a continuous function of V, when the sequence of manifolds is preconvergent. We can always define Proof. First we show the limit exists. loo(V) ==. -t liminf lj(Vj). Choose a subsequence of j's for which the lim J~OO
inf is attained as a limit. IT lim inf == 00 we are done. Otherwise for each j, either there is a non-zero Jacobi field Jj or an alternate geodesic in the direction Wi' By passing to a subsequence, there is always either one or the other. [] IT there is always a Jacobi field Jj, we can take its derivative dJj/ds at the origin to be a unit tangent vector Xj. By choosing a subsequence we can make Xj converge to some unit tangent vector X. The metrics preconverge in the geodesic tube around V, so the limit metric has a non-zero Jacobi field J vanishing at 0 with dJ/ds = X, and J vanishes again at expoo(sV) with s == loo (V). This means that the index form
I(J, J) ==
f
[lDJI2 - R(T, J, T, J)] ds
on the geodesic expoo(sV) on 0 ::; s ::; loo(V) has a null space, and hence has a strictly negative direction on 0 ::; s ::; loo (V) + e for any e > O. Then it also has a negative direction on 0 ::; s ::; loo (V) + e in any metric G j when j is large enough, and thus lj(V) ::; loo(V) + e. Therefore lj(V) -t loo(V) for all j -t 00, not just for the subsequence. Otherwise we find a subsequence where eXPj(ljWj) == eXPj(ljVj) for some sequence Wj '" Vj with lj == lj(V). By taking a subsequence we can assume Wj -t W. IT W = V, then the limit metric in a geodesic tube in the direction V again has a non-zero Jacobi field on expoo(sV) vanishing at s = loo(V), and we are done. This Jacobi field J can be bound by taking J = 0 a~d dJ/ds = X at the origin 0 where for some subsequence · X = 11m
j~oo
W·-V3 3 IWj - V,I
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
125
Since eXPj(sV) and eXPj(sWj ) are geodesics in the metrics Gj and Gj -+ G in the tube on V = W, we can check that J(s)
= lim j-+oo
exp/sWj) - eXPj(sV;) IWj - V;I
converges for the subsequence chosen above to the desired Jacobi field, with J = 0 again at s = ioo(V). If W # V, we take two geodesic tubes in the directions V and W. Then for our subsequence dj(exPj(ijV;),exPj(ijWj )) -t 0
and since i j on V
-t
i = ioo(V) and V; -t V and Wj -t W we also have in the tube
and in the tube on W
which makes dj(exPj(ijV;),exPj(iW))
-+ 0
for our subsequence. But this sequence is defined for all j, and the limit exists because we have made our metrics preconvergent in distance. Hence this sequence not just the subsequence, goes to zero for all j. Now consider the picture in the geodesic tube in the direction V for each Mj with j large. There is the geodesic out of V from the center, and close to it is the geodesic out of V;. At distance i out the tube there is another geodesic passing through the tube which came out of W, and at a distance i out of W it is close to the point at distance i out of V. The metrics converge in the tube, and the geodesics out of W will converge in the tube to a limit geodesic which we call 'Y. Now 'Y passes through the point P at distance i out along the geodesic 7 down the center which came out of V. But we claim 'Y cannot coincide with 7. For if it did, the corresponding 'Yj out of Wj and 7j out of V; in Mj for the subsequence of j would be close, and hence both in the tube in direction V, and their starting vectors V; and Wj would be as close as we like. But V; -+ V and Wj -+ W with W # V. Hence 'Y and 7 are distinct. Now the argument is a little subtle, because 'Y is only defined in the tube around 7. If we had a limit metric, then 'Y would be a geodesic out of W, and the distance to the crossing point P would be the same along 'Y and 7. In this case it would be a shorter path, once we are beyond P along 7, to go in a perpendicular from 7 over to 'Y and then follow 'Y back to the origin. For short distances beyond P, the savings in distance is on the order of a fraction given by the sine of the angle between 'Y and 7. (This would be exact for the flat metric.) Since we have a uniform curvature bound, for short distances beyond P we still save almost this much. Now if we take j large enough, since the metrics converge in the tube our savings in cutting over from the geodesic 7j out of Vi to the geodesic 7j out of W will still be almost this much. Thus
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
126
for every e > 0 we can find J(g) so that if j ~ J(g) then lj(V;) < loo(V) + g, since the geodesic out of V; does not minimize length at distance much past l = loo(V). This proves the assertion that
loo (V)
= 3-+00 .lim lj (V;)
always exists. It follows easily that loo (V) is independent of the choice of the sequence V; -t V. For if we have two different sequences, we can collate them to get a new sequence by odd and even j and the odd and even subsequences cannot have different limits. It also follows that loo (V) is continuous in V. For let Vie be any sequence which converges to V. For each k choose jle so large that in Mjle we have
Ilj. (Vie) -loo(VIe)1 ~ l/k if loo(Vle) < 00, otherwise we make lj. (Vie) ~ kif loo(VIe) subsequence jle we have
= 00.
Then for the
by the previous argument. Hence
also, and we are done proving the Lemma. Now we let V be the set of directions in which we can go off to infinity without hitting the cut locus in M j as j -t OOi specifically V
= {V E sn-l : loo(V) = 00 } •
Since the diameters of the M j go to infinity, the set V is not empty. To see this, pick a sequence V; with lj (V;) -t 00 and find a subsequence with V;1e -t V; then loo(V) = 00 so V E V. Moreover .lim inf lj (V) = 00. 3-+00 VEV
For if not, pick V; E V with lj (V;) ~ l < 00 for some subsequence j and some l < 00. For another subsequence V; -t V. But loo(V) = .lim loo(V;) since loo 3-+00
is continuous, and loo(V;) = 00 since V; E V, so loo(V) = 00 also and V E V. But lj(V;) -t loo(V) also, which is a contradiction. Now recall that all sectional curvatures on M j have K.j ~ 1/p2 for some p > 0 independent of j. We define the set Nj in Mj in the following way: Nj
=
{exPj(sW):
IWI = 1
and for s:5 lj(W); and for all V E V, s' :5 S and r:5 lj(V) we have dj exPj(s'W),exPj(rV) ~ r - pl.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
127
First note that Nj is closed and not empty; for Nj is defined as an intersection of closed sets, and contains the ball of radius p around the origin OJ in Mj. LEMMA 25.3. There exists an L < 00 such that for all large enough j the set Nj lies in the ball of radius L around the origin OJ in M j •
Proof. If not, we could pass to a subsequence of j's and find a sequence Sj -+ 00 and Wj in the unit sphere with eXPj(sjWj) E N j .
For another subsequence we have Wjh -+ v for some V. Now Sj $lj(Wj ) and Sj -+ 00 so ioo(V) = 00 and V E V. However if we take any s' > p fixed then dj(exPj($'Wj),exPj(s'V)) -+ 0
and we get a contradiction, since we must have
once
Sj ~ S'.
o
Among all geodesic loops starting and ending at the same point and lying entirely in the compact set Nj there will be a shortest one. Call it 'Yj, and suppose j starts and ends at a point we call Pj • If 'Yj has length at least p for all j, we are done. When 'Yj is shorter than p we consider two cases (and rule them both out). The first case is when 'Yj makes an angle 7r with itself at Pj , hence forming a geodesic circle. For any r no matter how large and any V E D we can take j large enough to make ij (V) ~ r. Consider the point Xj = expj(rV), and find the point Y; on 'Yj closest to Xj. Let Y; = expj(sW) with IWI = 1 be an exponential representation of Y; in N j • Then taking s' = s we get d(Xj, Y;) ~ r - p. Now we can find e > 0 depending on L + P so that all sectional curvatures Itj on M j in the ball of radius L + P around the origin OJ have Itj ~ e/ p2 independent of j, by our previous Lemma. Take a shortest geodesic (j from Xj to Y;. Then along (j for a distance p from Y; we have allltj ~ e/r > O. Moreover by taking j large we can make all sectional curvatures Itj ~ -6j / p2 for 6j as small as we like, and we can make r as large as we like. In this case the standard computation shows the second variation of the arc length of the geodesic f]j fixing one endpoint at Xj and the other on 'Yj is strictly negative. Indeed let Zj be the unit tangent vector to 'Yi at Y; and extend Zj to (j by parallel translation. Choose a function cp to be identically 1 within distance p of Y; along f]j and then to drop linearly to zero. The second variation of arc length in the direction cpZj is
128
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
where K.j
= Rm(Tj,Zj,Tj,Zi)
is the sectional curvature of the plane spanned by the unit tangent vector T j to (i and by Zi' Considering the separate contributions from the part OfTJi within p of}j and the past beyond I(cpZi,cpZj) $ -c/p+ 1/r+8i r/p2.
First take r so large that
l/r $ c/3p and then take j so large that
and we still have so the second variation is strictly negative. But now we see }j is not the closest point on Ii to Xj, which is a contradiction. Thus Ij cannot be a geodesic circle. However if Ii makes an angle different from 7r at Pj , we are no better off. For now we can shorten the geodesic loop Ii' Since its length is no more than p, and all sectional curvatures satisfy K.i $ 1/p2, there will be a geodesic loop 7i close to Ii starting and ending at any point Pi close to Pi' If we take Pi to be along Ij itself then the loop 7j is shorter than Ij, since for angle less than 7r the first variation in arc length of this motion is strictly negative. Moreover Pj is still in N j . If the whole loop 7j is in N j then Ij wasn't the shortest. On the other hand if 7j doesn't stay in Nj there must be a point Qj on 7j lying outside of N j • Now if Pj is close to Pj, then Qj cannot lie far from Nj, so in particular its distance from the origin can be kept less than L+p. Let Qj = expj(sjWj) with IWjl = 1 and Sj $lj(Wj) be some exponential representation of Qj and let
OJ
= {exPj(sWj) : 0 $
s $ Sj}
be the corresponding geodesic from OJ to Qj. Since Qj is not in N j , we can find some Vj E V and some Tj $lj(Vj) and some sj $ Sj such that dj(exPj(sjWj),eXpj(TjVj))
< Tj
- p.
In fact we may as well take Tj = lj(Vj) since the inequality gets stronger as Tj increases. Choose g > 0 depending on L+2p so that all the sectional curvatures K.j on M j in the ball of radius L+ 2p around the origin OJ in mj are at least t/ p2 independent of j. The previous argument shows that the closest point on OJ to Xj = exp(TjV}) cannot be an interior point for large j. We only need observe that Tj is as large as we want when j is large by our previous observation.
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
129
Moreover the closest point is not the origin, since there the distance is rj while at exp;(sjWj) it is less than fj - p. Hence the closest point is at the end Qj, so
< fj
dj (Xj , Qj)
while surely dj(Xj,Pj
)
- p
~ fj
since Pj lies in N j • Thus the closest point Qj to Xj on 1; is not its end point Pj. But now the second variation of arc length from Xj to Qj will be negative, giving a contradiction as before. Hence the only possibility is that the shortest 100p'Y in N j has length at least p, and we have our injectivity radius estimate. 26 Singularities in Dimension Two and Three. The Ricci Flow on a compact surface cannot form any singularity except for the sphere or projective plane shrinking to a point and becoming round. One way to prove this now is to examine the possible singularities and see there are no others. We have an injectivity rdius estimate in terms of the maximum of the curvature valid for all 'time. So unless the solution exists for all time with curvature decaying like
/R/5C/t as t -t I first.
00,
we can form a singularity model of Type I or II. We examine Type
THEOREM 26.1. The only solutions to the Ricci Flow on a surface which are complete with bounded curvature on an ancient time interval -00 < t < T and where the curvature R has
limsup(T t-+-oo
t)IRI < 00
are the round sphere 8 2 and the fiat plane R2, and their quotients. Proof. Since IRI :$ C/(T - t) and the minimum of R increases, R ~ O. Moreover by the strong maximum principle R = 0 everywhere and it is fiat, or R > 0 everywhere. If the solution is compact with R > 0, either it is the sphere or it is the projective plane Rp2 = 8 2 / Z2 whose double cover is the sphere. Assume it is the sphere, and we shall see it is round. Then Rp2 must be round also since its cover is. We know from [22] that the sphere shrinks to a point at some future time which we can take to be T, when it becomes round. Its area A shrinks at a constant rate dA = -JR da = -871' dt so A = 87r(T - t). On an even dimensional oriented manifold the injectivity radius can be bounded by the maximum curvature. Since R'5,Cj(T-t)
130
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
by hypothesis, we must have injectivity radius p with
p? cJT - t for some c. Now the diameter L has
L 5, CA/p 5, CJT - t as a bound also. Hence the diameter, the injectivity radius and the maximum curvature all scale proportionally to the time to blow-up. The scaled entropy E =
f
R In[R(T - t)]da
is monotone decreasing in t. Since R(T - t) 5, C
and
f
R da
= 811'
we have an upper bound E 5, 811'lnC
so E- oo
=
lim E t
t~-oo
exists. Pick a sequence of points tj -t -00 and points Pj where the curvature is as big as anywhere at time tj. Then it was never larger anywhere at any earlier time, since an ancient solution with R > 0 has R pointwise increasing by the Harnack inequality. Make Pj the new origin and tj the new time 0 and T the same blow-up time by translation and dilation. We can then take a limit using the curvature and injectivity radius bounds. The backwards limit is still compact by the diameter bound. Moreover the scaled entropy is now constant at the value E- oo • But the only way this happens is on a shrinking soliton, and (except for orbifolds) the only one is the round sphere. Then E has its minimal value at t = -00, so it was constant all along. hence the sphere was round all along. There remains the case where the surface is complete but not compact. Since R > 0, the surface is diffeomorphic to the plane. We proceed to examine such a surface until we learn enough about it to get a contradiction. Recall first that the asymptotic scalar curvature ratio
A
= lim sup Rs2 B~OO
is constant on an ancient solution with weakly positive curvature operator by Theorem 18.3.
LEMMA
26.2. For our solution A
< 00.
Proof. Suppose A = 00. Then as in the dimension reduction argument of Lemma 22.2 and the following, we can choose a sequence of points Pi at t = 0
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
131
and radii rj which give Aj remote .8-bumps for a fixed .8 > 0 and Aj -+ 00. This works in dimension 2 only, because the only curvature is the scalar curvature, so when it is big every curvature is big. But now this contradicts Theorem 21.6. (Once the dimension is 2 we cannot reduce it further, since everything in 0 dimension 1 is intrinsically fiat.) Thus A < 00. From our previous results in the proof of Theorem 18.3 we know that an annulus NO' = {O' ~ S ~ 30'} has an area A (NO' ) ~
CO'2
for some constant c, and the scalar curvature at distance s falls off at most by
for some other constant c. Now we can explain how we get a contradiction. For a complete surface with R> 0 we have
by the Gauss-Bonnet Theorem since the surface is exhausted by discs bounded by convex circles with geodesic curvature k ~ 0 and on a disc
ff
= 411".
R da + 21a k ds
However on our surface we claim
II
Rda=oo.
This is because each annulus NO' makes a contribution
IL" R
da
~ :2 . ~ c 00
2
for some constants c > 0, using R ~ c/s 2 and A(NO') ~ 00 2 • But we can take an infinite sequence of disjoint annuli, and their contributions add up to 00. This finishes the proof of the Theorem. 0 Next we examine Type II limits. Since R assumes it maximum at an origin.
> 0 it must be a soliton which
THEOREM 26.3. The only complete Ricci soliton on a surface with bounded curvature which assumes its maximum 1 at an origin is the "cigar" soliton E2 with metric
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
132
Proof. The soliton moves along a vector field V = D f. Since the Ricci Flow preserves the conformal structure, which gives a complex structure J, the vector field V is holomorphic. Then it turns out that JV is a Killing vector field; this trick works on any Ricci-Kahler soliton. This gives a circle action on the soliton which makes it rotationally symmetric, and the Ricci soliton equation reduces to an ordinary differential equation which we can solve. We refer the reader to [22] for details. 0
In our paper [28] we prove the following isoperimetric estimate, which is similar to our study of minimal geodesic loops on a surface. Suppose a loop 'Y of length L divides the surface into two pieces of areas Al and A 2 • Define the isoperimetric ratio 1('Y) of the loop 'Y by
and let [=
inf [('Y) 'Y
be the infimum over all 'Y of any length or shape. THEOREM
26.4.
On the sphere 8 2 the isoperimetric ratio [ is increasing.
It follows that we cannot form the cigar as a limit on 8 2 , because the cigar opens like a cylinder. IT the surface develops a piece like a long thin cylinder it will have a short curve in the cylinder with a comparably large area on either side, and the ratio I will be close to 0 . IT we approach the cigar as a singularity forms, I must decrease to zero. But on the sphere [increases. The projective plane Rp2 can be treated by looking at its cover 8 2 • Other surfaces have Euler class X ::; 0 and can be treated directly (as in [22]) or as a special case of Kahler manifolds with [Rc] = p[w] with p $ 0 (as in [4]). The rescaled flow converges to a constant curvature metric. It is very interesting to see how much we can say about the formation of singularities in dimension three.
THEOREM 26.5. Suppose we have a solution to the Ricci Flow on a compact three- manifold, and suppose R becomes unbounded in some finite time T. Then there exists a sequence of dilations of the solution which converges to S3 or S2 x Rl or E2 x Rl {where E2 is the "cigar" soliton} or to a quotient of one of these solutions by a finite group of isometries acting freely {these quotients are the space forms S3 h, Rp2 X Rl, and Rp2 x Rl and S2 x S:, Rp2 x S: and E2 x S: for circles S: of any radius r}, except possibly for the case of a Type [ singularity where the injectivity radius times the square root of the maximum cUnJature goes to zero.
Proof. When we get an injectivity radius estimate valid for finite time we can always for a singularity model of Type I or II. First consider Type I. If
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
133
the sectional curvature ever becomes positive everywhere, it becomes round and our limit is 8 3 or 8 3 h. Otherwise in Type I we get a limit which is an ancient solution with bounded non-negative sectional curvature which splits as a product of a surface with Rl. For the surface, if (T - t)R $ C it must be a round sphere or projective plane by Theorem 26.1. Otherwise we can take a backwards limit as t -t -00 to get a Type II limit, which must be the cigar ~2 • Since a limit of a limit is also a limit, we get ~2 x Rl or ~2 X 8 1 as a limit of the three-manifold solution. In order to take this backward limit we need an injectivity radius estimate on the surface in terms of the maximum curvature R at the current time. Since R > 0 this is easy. There are three cases. H the surface is compact and oriented, it is 8 2 and the result follows from a theorem for positive sectional curvature in even dimensions of Klingenberg ([9], 5.9). H it is compact but not oriented, it is Rp2 and the double cover can be handled as before. H it is not compact, it is diffeomorphic to R2 and we can use the estimate for complete noncompact manifolds of positive sectional curvature. H the limit is Type II, it must be a Ricci soliton of weakly positive sectional curvature from our pinching result in Theorem 24.4. H the sectional curvature is not strictly positive, it splits as a product of a surface soliton, which must be ~2, with a flat factor R2 or 8 1 (of any radius). Even if it does not split, we know the asymptotic curvature ratio is infinite
A
= limsupRs2 = 00 8--+00
by Theorem 20.2, and by Theorem 22.3 since the dimension n = 3 is odd, we can do dimension reduction to find a limit of a limit which splits as a product with Rl of an ancient solution with bounded positive curvature on a surface. Again a limit of a limit is a limit, and we can classify the surface as a round 8 2 (not RP2 because it is oriented) or ~2. This finishes the proof of the Theorem. D Of course 8 3 or 8 3 /'Y can actually occur as limits from the homothetically shrinking solutions, and we expect to get 8 2 x Rl from a neck pinch (or a degenerate neck pinch after dimension reduction). We even expect Rp2 x Rl as the limit from doing a neck pinch on 8 3 shaped like a dumb-bell and then quotienting by Z2. Some of the other quotients are harder to picture. For example if 8 2 x 8 1 has a product metric, the 8 2 factor shrinks but the 8 1 factor does not. Hence the limit of its dilations is 8 2 x Rl, not 8 2 x 8 1 • We conjecture 8 2 X 8 1 cannot form. More importantly, we conjecture ~2 x Rl and ~2 x 8 1 cannot form as limits of dilations of a compact solution. Here are the reasons for our belief. First, ~2 cannot form starting from a compact surface. Second, we could rule out ~2 x Rl on a three-manifold the same way we can rule out ~2 occuring as a factor in limits coming from compact manifolds with positive curvature operator, because ~2 violates the local injectivity radius estimate coming from the Little Loop Lemma. Moreover the Little Loop Lemma only depends on having some kind of backwards control on the scalar curvature R locally. This control came from the Harnack estimate, which uses positive curvature operator. But in three
134
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
dimensions 'lur pinching estimates show that we only miss positive curvature by a little bit. This gives hope that we can get an approximate Harnack estimate giving some backwards control on R as desired. Backwards control means that R does not falloff too rapidly. This raises the following interesting problem. If we almost have a degenerate neck pinch, but at the last moment the little bubble on the end of the neck gets pulled through, leaving a little bump, how fast can the curvature of this little bump decay? REFERENCES
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[6] [7]
l81 [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20]
F. Almgren,_ _ A. Bach and W.-Y. Hsiang, Einstein metrics on Kervaire spheres, preprint. Cornell U., 1982. R. Bryant, Local existence of gradient Ricci solitons, preprint. Duke U., 1992. H.-D. Cao, Deformation of Kahler metrics to Kahler-Einstein metrics, Invent. Math. 81(1985), 359-372. _ _, Ricci-Kahler soliton, preprint, Texas A&M, 1992. _ _, The Harnack estimate for the Ricci-Kahler flow, preprint, Texas A&M, 1992. H.-D. Cao and B. Chow, Compact Kahler manifolds with nonnegative curvature operator, Invent. Math. 83(1986), 553-556. M. Carfora, J. Isenberg and M. Jackson, Convergence of the Ricci flow for a class of Riemannian memcs with indefinite Ricci curvature, J. Differential Geom. J. Cheeger and D. Ebin, Comparison theorems in Riemannian geometry. J. Cheeger, M. Gromov, Existence of F -structures. Cheeger and Gromov and Futake, H. Chen, Pointwise quarter-pinched 4 manifolds, Ann. Global Anal. Geom. 9(1991), 161-176. B. Chow, The Ricci flow on the 2-sphere, J. Differential Geom. 33(1991), 325-334. _ _, On the entropy estimate for the Ricci flow on compact 2-orbifolds, J. Differential Geom. 33(1991), 597-. B. Chow and L.-F. Wu, The Ricci flow on compact 2-orbifolds with curvature negative somewhere, Comm. Pure Appl. Math 44(1991), 275-286. D. De Turck, Short time existence for the Ricci flow, J. Differential Geom. J. Eells Jr. and J. Sampson, Harmonic Maps, Amer. J. Math. (1964). Eschenberg, Shrader and Strake, J. Differential Geom. (1989). R. Greene and Wu, Limits of Riemannian manifolds, Pacific J. Math. R. S. Hamilton, Three-manifolds with positive Ricci curvature, J. Differ-
THE FORMATION OF SINGULARITIES
[21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] "[36] [37]
[38] [39] [40]
[41] [42] [43]
135
ential Geom. 17(1982),255-306. _ _ , Four-manifolds with positive curvature operator, J. Differential Geom. 24(1986),153-179. _ _, The Ricci flow on surfaces, Contemp. Math. 71(1988),237-261. _ _, Lecture Notes on Heat Equations in Geometry, Honolulu, Hawaii, 1989. _ _ , The Harnack estimate for the Ricci flow, preprint 1991. _ _, Eternal solutions to the Ricci flow, preprint 1991. _ _, A compactness property for solutions of the Ricci flow, preprint 1991. _ _, A matrix Harnack estimate for the heat equation. _ _ , An isoperimetric estimate for the Ricci flow on surfaces, preprint VCSD,1992. G. Huisken, Ricci deformation of the metric on a riemannian manifold, J. Differential Geom. 21(1985). T. Ivey, Local existence of Ricci solitons in dimension three, preprint. _ _, Local existence of non-gradient Ricci solitons, preprint, Duke V., 1992. J. Jost and H. Karcher, Geom. Meth. zur gewinnung fUr harmonische Abbilding, Manuscripta Math. 40(1982),27-77. Koiso, _ __ P. R. A. Leviton and J. H. Rubinstein, Deforming Riemannian memcs on the 2-sphere, 10(1985). _ _, Deforming Riemannian metrics on Complex projective spaces, Centre for Math Analysis 12(1987), 86-95. C. Margerin, A sharp theorem for weakly pinched .. -manifolds, C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris Serie 117(1986), 303. - ' Pointwise pinched manifolds are space forms, Geometric Measure Theory Conference at Arcata-Proc. of Sympos. in Pure Math. Vol. 44 (1984). N. Mok, _ _ S. Nishikawa, Deformation of Riemannian metrics and manifolds with bounded curvature ratios, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math. 44(1986),343-352. _ _ , On deformation of Riemannian metrics and manifolds with positive curvature operator, Lecture Notes in Math. Vol. 1201, Springer, Berlin, 1986, 201-211. W. X. Shi, Complete noncompact three-manifolds with nonnegative Ricci curvature, J. Differential Geom. 29(1989),353-360. _ _, Deforming the metric on complete Riemannian manifolds, J. Differential Geom. 30(1989), 223-301. _ _ , Ricci deformation of the metric on complete noncompact Rieman-
136
RICHARD S. HAMILTON
[44]
nian manifolds, J. Differential Geom. 30(1989), 303-394. _ _ , Complete Kahler manifolds with positive holomorphic bisectional curvature, preprint 1993.
[45] [46] [47]
L.-F. Wu, The Ricci flow on B-orbifolds with positive curvature, J. Differential Geom. 33(1991),575-596. _ _ , A new result for the porous medium equation derived from the Ricci flow, preprint 1991. _ _, The Ricci flow on complete R2, preprint 1991.
SURVEYS IN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMEI.RY, 1995 Vol. 2 ©1995, International Press
Spaces of Algebraic Cycles H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR. Table of Contents
Chapter O. Introduction Chapter I. Algebraic Cycles 1. Algebraic subsets 2. Algebraic cycles 3. Symmetric products 4. Divisors 5. Curves on a 3-fold 6. The Euler-Poincare series of the Chow monoid 7. Functoriality 8. The homotopy relationship between Cp(X) and Zp(X). 9. Cycles and the Plateau Problem Chapter II. Suspension and Join 1. Algebraic suspension 2. Algebraic join and the cup product 3. The Algebraic Suspension Theorem 4. Some immediate applications 5. The relation to topological cycles 6. The ring 11". Z· (pO) 7. Suspension and symmetry Chapter III. Cycles on pH and Classifying Spaces 1. The total Chern class 2. Algebraic join and the cup product 3. Real cycles and the total Stiefel-Whitney class 4. A conjecture of G. Segal 5. Equivariant theories Chapter IV. The Functor L.H. 1. Definition and basic properties 2. The natural transformation to H.(ejZ) 3. Coefficients in Zm 4. Relative groups 5. Localization 6. Computations 7. A local-to-global spectral sequence 8. Intersection theory 9. Operations and filtrations 10. Mixed Hodge structures 11. Chern classes for higher algebraic K-theory 12. Relation to Bloch's higher Chow groups 13. The theory for varieties defined over fields of positive characteristic 14. New directions
138
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
Chapter V. The Functor L* H* (Morphic Cohomology) 1. Effective algebraic co cycles 2. Morphic cohomology 3. Functorlality 4. Ring structure 5. The natural transformation to H* (e; Z) 6. Operations and filtrations 7. Computations at level 1. 8. Chern classes 9. An existence theorem 10. A Kronecker pairing with L*H* Chapter VI. Duality 1. Definition 2. The duality isomorphism: L* H*
~
L n-*H2n-*
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
139
Introduction
In this article 1 we shall review a recent body of work which is concerned with the structure of the spaces of algebraic cycles on an algebraic variety. Before embarking on this survey we should offer some general motivation for such a study.
The fundamental objects of interest in algebraic geometry are the sets of solutions of polynomial equations in affine or projective space. Any profound understanding of such sets must be at least in part geometric. However, if the field in question is, say finite, in what sense can one speak of geometry? This geometry comes from the network of algebraic subsets. An algebraic variety has not only points, but also a family of "algebraic curves" , algebraic subsets of dimension 1. As in most geometries the distinguished curves give structure to the space. Of course here there are also distinguished algebraic surfaces, 3-folds, etc. It is the interlocking web of these subvarieties which endows an algebraic variety with a rich geometric structure. For an affine variety X c eN this picture translates faithfully into algebraic terms. Irreducible subvarieties of X correspond to prime ideals in the ring O(X) of polynomials restricted to X. The inclusion of subvarieties corresponds to the (reverse) inclusion of ideals. For general X Grothendieck took all this a step further. He taught us to consider the irreducible subvarieties to be "points" of the space. On this enhanced set of points he introduced a topology and a sheaf of rings - classical stuctures of geometry. In this spirit of purely elementary considerations, there is a related construction which also uses subvarieties and in fact predates Grothendieck. Fix a variety X, and for p ~ 0 let X (P) denote the set of "p-dimensional points" of X, i.e., the set of irreducible p-dimensional subvarieties. Then one defines the Chow monoid of X to be simply the free abelian monoid
generated by this set. The points c E Cp(X), which are expressed uniquely as finite formal sums c = E ni Vi with ni E Z + and Vi E X (P), are called effective algebraic p cycles on X. Now the surprizing fact - established by Chow and Van der Waerden in 1937 - is that when X C pN is projective, this monoid itself is an algebraic variety. Specifically, it can be written as a countable disjoint union (0.1)
II
QEH2p(X;Z) 1 Partially
supported by the NSF and I.H.E.S.
140
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
where each Cp,a(X) canonically carries the structure of a projective algebraic set. This gives us a constellation of geometric objects naturally associated to X. They can be thought of as compactifications of the moduli spaces of pdimensional algebraic subsets of X, and have considerable independent interest, particularly when X = lP'n. (For example, for varieties over C, Cp,a(X) has been shown to represent the space of solutions to the Plateau problem in the homology class 0:.) These Cp,a(X) fit together to form a monoid whose addition when restricted to the algebraic pieces is a morphism of varieties. There is of course also the free abelian group
of all algebraic p-cyc1es on X. It is functorially related to X, but appears at first to be just a huge, infinitely generated group. However, it carries a very interesting structure which comes from the Chow monoid
as follows. Note that Zp(X) can be written as a quotient
(0.2) where (a, b) '"" (a', b') <==> a + b' = a' + b. By (0.1) Cp(X) can be written as a monotone union VI C V2 C ... of projective algebraic sets. Therefore, Zp(X) carries an intrinsic filtration
(0.3) where Kl
=
U
Vi x Vi / '"" .
i+i9
Each Kl is the quotient of an algebraic set by a proper algebraic equivalence relation. Note that when X is defined over C, each Kl is a compact Hausdorff space. This induces a topology on Zp(X) in the standard way (by defining C C Zp(X) to be closed iff C n Kl is closed for alIt), making Zp(X) a topological abelian group. Its homotopy groups, as we shall see, constitute an interesting set of invariants. They characterize Zp(X) up to homotopy equivalence and reflect the algebraic structure of X. I have gotten somewhat ahead of myself. Let's return to elementary considerations. As mentioned above, spaces of cycles have considerable geometric interest, particularly when X = lP'n. Consider for example the set Cp,l (lP'n) of effective p-cycles of homology degree 1. This is exactly the Grassmannian of (p + I)-planes in en+! , a space of fundamental importance in geometry. One reason for its importance is that, as n goes to infinity Cp-l,l (lP'n) approximates
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
141
the classifying space BUp for p-dimensional vector bundles; and as both nand p go to infinity, one obtains the classifying space BU for reduced K-theory. Despite the beauty and importance of the Grassmannians, until seven years ago surprizingly little was known about spaces of cycle of higher degree. In fact, the work surveyed here was motivated by a desire to understand these other components of 00
Cp(JP n)
=
II Cp,d(JPn). d=O
(Here Cp,d(JPn) denotes the effective p-cycles of homology degree d.) One could see straightforwardly that Cp,d(JPn) is always connected and simply-connected, and it seemed plausible to conjecture that 7r2Cp,d(JPn) ~ Z. This and much more turned out to be true. The first interesting discovery was that as d -+ 00 the sets Cp,d(lr n) "stabilize" to become classifying spaces for integral cohomology in even degrees. This says much about their structure. It also means that the Chow varieties are in fact fundamental objects in topology. This stablization result can be rigorously expressed by the assertion that there exists a homotopy equivalence
(0.4)
Zp(JP n)
~
K(Z,O) x K(Z,2) x K(Z,4) x··· x K(Z,2(n- p))
for all 0 ~ p ~ n, where K(Z, 2k) denotes the Eilenberg-MacLane space (See I.3 below). Since Zp(JPn) is a group, this is equivalent to the assertion that
Note the simplicity of these homotopy groups. By contrast the homology groups of Zp(JPn) are quite complicated. Note also that
(0.5) This equivalence is induced by an algebraic suspension mapping which is described in Chapter II. Now from the introduction of cycle groups into topology something new emerges. The first surprizing fact is that the simple inclusion Cp,1 (JPn) C Zp (JPn) canonically represents the total Chern class of the tautological (n - p)-plane bundle over the Grassmannian Cp,l (lrn). Furthermore, on projective algebraic cycles there exists an elementary binary operation, called the algebraic join. It is a direct generalization of the direct sum of linear spaces, which gives a pairing on Grassmannians and corresponds to addition in K-theory. It turns out to canonically represent the cup product in cohomology. Using this join
142
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
structure one has been able to answer some old questions in homotopy theory (cf. Chapter III). Now the homotopy groups of Zp(pn) turn out to be simple and to playa central role in certain universal constructions in topology. It seems reasonable to think therefore that the groups 1I"iZp(X) might be important for any projective variety X. 2 They are functorial. FUrthermore there is an Algebraic Suspension Theorem: Zp(X) ~ Zp+lCEX) generalizing (0.5) above, which gives 1I"iZp(X) an unexpected and useful structure. Consider some basic examples. Example 1.
1I"OZp(X)
=
=
Ap(X)
algebraic p-eycles on X modulo algebraic equivalence,
Example 2. By a classical theorem of Dold and Thorn, one has that for all k~O
1I"A:ZO(X) = HA:(Xj Z). This shows that the functor 1I".Z. (X) not only contains the integral homology of X but it also contains the groups A. (X) which are purely algebraic invariants. So this functor represents something new which should be of interest to algebraic geometers. On the other hand the groups 1I".Z.(X) have definite geometric interest since they tell us about the global structure of the Chow varieties Cp,d(X). (See Chapter 1.8.) For these reasons the groups 1I".Z.(X) have been systematically studied over the past few years. They turn out to have a rich internal structure and to be related to many of the standard invariants of algebraic geometry. For example P. Lima-Filho has shown that these groups can be defined for quasi-projective varieties, and they fit into localization exact sequences. This allows complete computations in many cases. He has also extended the definition from quasiprojective to general algebraic varieties. It was Eric Friedlander who laid the foundations for the study of these invariants. He realized the importance of Example 1 above and introduced methods of formal group completion into the theory. He made sense of the groups 1I".Z.(X) for varieties defined over any algebraically closed field and proved the suspension theorem in this context. In his fundamental paper he introduced the notation
2It may seem at first that homotopy groups, which involve continl10us mappings of spheres, are particularly non-algebraic in their construction. However, the homotopy of an abelian topological group Z has a beautiful realization as the homology of the simplicial group Sing.(Z).
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
143
where Lp indicates that the algebraic level is p, i.e., there are p algebraic parameters, and where Hk indicates that the homology degree is k. Friedlander and Mazur have shown that the algebraic join of cycles leads to a natural transformation s : LpHk(X) --+ Lp-1Hk(X) which in turn induces filtrations on the groups H.(XjZ) and A.(X). These filtrations have alternative, purely algebraic interpretations and are subordinate to the filtrations of Grothendieck and of Bloch-Ogus. Grothendieck's standard Conjecture B actually implies that the filtrations coincide. The suspension theorem has been extended Oy Friedlander and Gabber to a general intersection product in Z.(X) which gives a graded ring structure to L.H.(X). There exists a local-to-global spectral sequence with an identifiable E 2 -term as in Bloch-Ogus theory. There are relations to algebraic K-theory and to Bloch's higher Chow groups. All this is discussed in Chapter IV. Now the groups L.H.(X) behave like a homology theory on the category of quasi-projective varieties and proper morphisms, and it is natural to ask whether there is an associated "cohomology" theory. In [FL 1,2] such a theory was introduced, based on a new concept of an effective algebraic co cycle on a variety X. Such a cocycle is defined as an algebraic family of affine subvarieties parameterized by X. The set of all such cocycles in degree-q is roughly speaking the monoid Cq(Xj en) = Mor(X, Cq(en)) with a natural topology. Taking homotopy groups of the group completion gives a contravariant functor L· H· (X) which enjoys a rich structure. There is a "cup product" induced by taking the pointwise join of cocycles, there is a natural transformation of rings
Lq Hk(X) --+ Hk(Xj Z), there are s-maps and filtrations, Chern classes, etc. All this is discussed in Chapter V. Although the functors L.H. and L· H· are quite differently defined, they are surprizingly related. There is for example a Kronecker pairing between them. However, much more interesting is the recently established fact that on smooth projective varieties they satisfy Poincare duality. In fact for any projective variety X of dimension n there is a naturally defined homomorphism
LqHk(X)
..!4 L n- qH2n-k(X)
for all q, k which under the natural transformation to singular theory becomes the Poincare duality map, i.e., there is a commutative diagram
LqHk(X) ~ Ln-qH2n-k(X)
1
Hk(Xj Z) ~
1 H 2n -k.{Xj Z)
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
144
where V(a) = a n [X]. When X is smooth and projective, the map 15 is an isomorphism. This result, discussed in Chapter VI, has a broad range of consequences. I would like to express my sincere thanks to Eric Friedlander, Paulo LimaFilho and Pawel Gajer for having made a number of suggestions which greatly improved the original version of this manuscript.
Chapter I - Algebraic Cycles §1. Algebraic subsets. Let IP'n denote complex projective n-space, the space of all lines through the origin in en+!. Then there is a natural map 11' :
en+! - {O} -+ IP'n
which assigns to v the 1-dimensional subspace it generates. Definition 1.1. A subset V c IP'n is said to be algebraic if there exists a finite collection of homogeneous polynomials PI, ".,PN E C[zo, ZI, ... , zn] such that
An algebraic subset V is said to be irreducible if it cannot be written as a union V = VI U V2 of two algebraic subsets where VI i. V2 and V2 i. VI. Basic results in algebra tell us that every algebraic subset V c IP'n can be written uniquely as a finite union of irreducible ones, and each irreducible one has a well defined dimension (cf. [4], [43]). From a differential geometric point of view, irreducibility is nicely characterized as follows. For V C IP'n, let Reg(V) denote the set of manifold points of V, i.e., the set of points x E V for which there is an open neighborhood U and local holomorphic coordinates «(1,'" , (n) on U such that
From the Weierstrass Preparation Theorem one proves the following. If V is an algebraic subset, then so is Sing(V) ~f V - Reg(V). Furthermore, V is irreducible <==> Reg(V) is connected,
and the algebraic dimension of an irreducible V equals the complex dimension of Reg(V). For a general algebraic subset V, Reg(V) can be written as a finite disjoint union Reg(V) = RI II ... II RN of submanifolds, and the unique decomposition V VI U··· U VN is given by V; R j •
=
=
We now introduce some terminology. An irreducible algebraic subset V C pn is called a projective subvariety. The set theoretic difference V = VI - V2 of two projective subvarieties is called a quasi-projective subvariety. For any
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
145
such V, let n{V) denote the field of rational functions on V (the restrictions of rational functions on pn whose polar divisor does not contain V). Then a morphism between quasi-projective subvarieties is a map f : VI -+- V2 such that rn(~) ~ n(l'I). By a projective or quasi-projective variety we mean an isomorphism class of such subvarieties. Of fundamental importance to us here is the fact that projective subvarieties V C pn determine "topological cycles". This can be seen, for example, from the following. Let EI = V - Reg(V), E2 = EI - Reg (E I ), etc. denote the singular strata of V. Then there exists a semi-algebraic triangulation of V for which the singular strata are subcomplexes. This triangulation is unique up to P L homeomorphism (see [85]). H W c V is also a subvariety, then this triangulation of V can be chosen so that W is a sub complex and the induced triangulation on W is as above. See [44] for an elementary proof. Now fix V with such a triangulation, and suppose p = dim{V). Let [V] be the chain consisting of all 2p-dimensional simplices oriented by the canonical orientation of Reg{V). Then a[V] lies in the 2p - 2 skeleton (since it is supported in V - Reg(V», and so a[V] = o. This is the fundamental cycle of V. It can be seen to generate H 2p {Vj Z) ~ Z. The cycle [V] also determines a class in H 2p (pnj Z) ~ Z PPPI where pp is a p-dimensional linear subspace. The integer d such that [V] is homologous to d [PP] is called the degree of V. One has that # (V n pn-p ) = d for almost all linear subspaces pn-p of co dimension p. Furthermore for almost all pn-p-l we have pn-p-l n V = 0, and the linear projection 11" : pn - pn-p-l -+- pp restricts to a map 11" : V -+- pp of degree d. There is another more intrinsic definition of the cycle [V] in terms of deRhamFederer Theory. Denote by £k{M) the space of smooth differential k-forms on a manifold M equipped with the COO topology (uniform convergence of derivatives on compacta). The topological dual space £k{M) ~f £k(M), is called the space of deRham currents of dimension k on M. Taking the adjoint of exterior differentation gives a complex (£.{M), d) whose homology is isomorphic to H.{Mj JR) (cf. [16]). Let now V C pn be a projective subvariety of dimension p. Then the Hausdorff 2p-measure of V is finite, and so V defines an element [V] E £21' (pn) by [V]( r,o)
{I. 1)
=(
r,o
iReg(V)
for all r,o
E
£2p
(PH). As a current we have that dry] = 0 i.e.,
d[V] (1jJ) ~f [V]( d1jJ) = 0
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
146
for all ,p E £2p-l (lpn). (For proofs of these and of subsequent assertions about currents, see [42]). Of course we have [V] ~ d [PP] also in deRham cohomology. §2. Algebraic cycles. Let Xc pN be an n-dimensional projective subvariety and for each p, 0 ~ p ~ n consider the set X(p) of all p-dimensional subvarieties contained in X. In Grothendieck's picture these are the p-dimensional points . of X • the pth level of the web of points, curves surfaces etc, which encode the rigid algebro-geometric structure of X. It is natural to consider the following. Definition 2.1. The group of p-cycles on X is the free abelian group Zp(X) generated by X(P). The positive (or effective) p-cycles on X are the elements of the free abelian monoid Cp(X) C Zp(X) generated by X(P). We will call Cp(X) the Chow monoid of X. In other words Zp(X) consists of all finite formal sums
where ~ E X(P) and ni E Z for each i There is a group homomorphism
j
and we have
C
E Cp(X) if each ni ~
o.
deg: Zp(X) -+ Z given by deg(c)
= L:ni degree(l-'i).
Letting Cp,d(X) C Zp,d(X) denote the subset of cycles of degree d gives us a graded group and a graded submonoid : 00
(2.1)
Cp(X)
= II Cp,d(X) c d=O
00
Zp(X)
=
EB
Zp,d(X),
d=-oo
Now comes the magic. In 1937 Chow and van der Waerden discovered the following fundamental result (cf. [14], [70], [81]). Theorem 2.2. (Chow [13]) Each of the sets Cp,d(X) for d structure of a projective algebraic subset.
~
0 carnes the
When X = pn Chow's construction goes as follows. Let G n- p - l (pn) ~ G denote the Grassmannian of linear subspaces of co dimension p + 1 on pn. Holomorphic line bundles on G are in one-to-one correspondence with Z via the first Chern class CI. Suppose V C pn is a projective variety of dimension p and degree d. Set Dv = {L E G : L n Vi: OJ. Then Dv can be seen to be an algebraic subset of codimension one in G. Any such set is the divisor of a holomorphic section Uv of a holomorphic line bundle ld of Chern classs d on G. The section Uv is unique up to scalar multiples. Thus V determines a point
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
147
[o"V] in P (HO (Gj 0 (la))). To a general positive cycle c = E ni Vi we associate the section (Fe = O'~: ® ... ® O'~:. This gives an embedding
A careful analysis involving resultants shows the image to be an algebraic subset. Furthermore it is proven that if X c pn is an algebraic subset, then Cp,a(X) C Cp,a (pn) is also an algebraic subset. Notice what this gives us. Our monoid Cp(X) is now equipped with a topology so that each piece Cp,a(X) is a compact Hausdorff space, in fact an algebraic set. The addition map Cp(X) x Cp(X) -t Cp(X) is easily seen to be an algebraic map on these components. Hence, Cp(X) is an algebraic abelian monoid - quite a nice object ! It is natural to wonder about the uniqueness of this canonical algebraic structure on Cp(X). For this we need the following.
Definition 2.3. A continuous algebraic map is a map 'P : V -t W between projective algebraic subsets whose graph is an algebraic subset of the product VxW. IT V is normal (in particular if V is smooth) every such map is a morphism. Note however that the inverse of the map C -t Y = {(z, w) E (!2 : Z2 = w3 } given by t 1-+ (t 3 , t 2 ), is continuous algebraic but not a morphism. We now have the following. Proposition 2.4. The canonical algebraic structure on Cp(X) is uniquely detennined up to algebraic homeomorphism by any projective embedding of X. Proof. (Sketch.) Let j : X ~ pn be the given embedding and suppose j' : X ~ pn' is another. Using the Veronese embedding (Le., the tensor product of homogeneous coordinates) we get an embedding j x j' : X x X ~ pn X pn, C pnn'+ n+' n. Define ~ : X ~ IP'nn ,+n+n, via the diagonal in X x X. The Veronese is linear on each factor, so our original embeddings are recaptured by restriction. Now we see above that if A c B C IP'N are projective varieties, then Cp,a(A) is an algebraic subset of Cp,a(B) for all d. Thus we have three algebraic embeddings
corresponding to j,j' and~. Since ~Cp(X) is the graph of the identity map on Cp(X), and it is also algebraic, we are done. 0 Note. In the above proof it is better to use the intrinsic grading of Cp(X) given by the map (2.2)
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
148
From 2.4 we conclude that the topology on Cp(X) is intrinsically defined, i.e., it depends only on the isomorphism class of X. This makes it natural to pass the topology on to the group completion Zp(X). Note that
(2.3) where (Cl, C2) "" (ci, c~) ¢:::::> Cl classes gives a surjective map
+ c~ = C2 + ci.
Therefore, taking equivalence
(2.4) Now Cp(X) x Cp(X) is a monotone union of compact sets
K; =
(2.5)
II
Cp,d(X) X Cp,d ' (X)
d+dl~i
for i
~
O. The equivalence relation is closed and so the quotients Ki =
1I'K;
are compact Hausdorff spaces topologically embedded in one another: (2.6) with U Ki = Zp(X). Whenever one is in this situation, there is a natural topology induced on the space, called the topology associated to the family {Ki}. It is defined by declaring subset C to be closed if and only if en Ki is closed for all i. With this topology Zp(X) is a topological group. This group is characterized by the universal property that any continuous homomorphism h : Cp(X) -+ G into an abelian topological group G determines a continuous homomorphism h: Zp(X) -+ G so that
commutes. Remark 2.5. In a beautiful paper [54] P. Lima-FiIho recently established several equivalent formulations of the topology on Zp(X). One is engendered by considering flat families of cycles over smooth base spaces and is related to work of Rojtman. With this definition many properties, such as functoriality, are clear. Another definition involves "Chow envelopes" and is useful for establishing the existence of fibration sequences, etc. Lima-Filho shows that these definitions with all their properties extend to arbitrary algebraic varieties (not just quasi-projective ones), and that on this general category they coincide.
149
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
At this point it could be useful to examine a number of examples. §3. Symmetric products. Note that for any projective variety X
CO,d(X)
= p::nixi : Xi E X = X x ... X X/Sd
and ni E Z+ with Eni
= d}
~f Spd(X) (the d-fold symmetric product)
where Sd is the symmetric group acting by permutation of the factors. Hence,
Co(X)
= II Spd(X) d~O
is the free abelian topological monoid generated by the space: its components are evidently varieties. A particularly nice case is that where X = ]pl. Lemma 3.1. As projective varieties we have that Spd (]PI)
Co
(]pI)
= ]pd.
Hence,
II ]pd.
=
d~O
Proof. Define the map ]pd -+ spd (]pI) by assigning to the point with homogeneous coordinates [aD : al : •.. : ad] the zeros of the homogeneous polynomial equation d ~
k d-k
~akZOzl
0 =.
k=O
The inverse to this map is given by expressing the coefficients of a polynomial as elementary symmetric functions of its roots; namely, if [6 : 7]1] , .•• , [~d : 7]d] are d-points in ]pI, then [aD : ... : ad] are the coefficients of the polynomial d
II (~iZI -
p(Zo, zt} =
7]iZO) •
0
i=1
Note that the additive structure in this monoid is given by the maps ]pd
x ]p'" -+
([a], [b]) where
Ck
=
L
aibj
for
]pd+d'
I-t
[c]
k = 0,··· ,d + rI.
i+j=k
The case where X is a non-singular curve of higher genus is even more interesting. Here we must use more sophisticated geometry. By an elementary construction (cf. [64] and §4 below) one associates to every positive O-cycle L niX. on the curve X, a holomorphic line bundle l of degree d = Ln.,
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
150
and a holomorphic section u of l such that E niXi is the zero divisor of u. The pair (l,u) is unique up to scalar multiples of u. Now holomorphic line bundles on X correspond to elements in Hl(X,OX) where Ox is the sheaf of non-vanishing holomorphic functions on X. It sits in an exact sequence 0-+ Z -+ 0 ~ Ox -+ 0 which gives an exact sequence
where Cl is the degree or first Chern class of the bundle. Resolving 0 and using harmonic theory gives an isomorphism Hl(XjO) ~ Hl(X,IR), and (3.1) is of the form 0-+ 1R2g /Z2 g -+ Hl(Xj OX) -+ Z -+ O.
In particular the components of Hl(Xj OX) are all tori of dimension 2g where 9 is the genus of X. The map above gives us a monoid homomorphism (3.2)
The preimage of each point l is the projective space IP (HO (Xj O(l))) of all global holomorphic sections of i. Hence, component by component we get maps
For d sufficiently large, this is surjective. In fact it is a fibre bundle whose fibre is IP d - g (a non-obvious result even topologically). We now observe that for any topological space Y, the symmetric products Spd(y) = Y X •.• X Y/Sd and therefore the topological monoid Co(Y) are well defined. When Y is compact and Hausdorff we can also define the topological group Zo(Y) exactly as in §2 above. The spaces Spd(y) are beautiful and of fundamental importance in topology. This is due to the following classical result originally conjectured by Serre. It was proved by Dold and Thorn and, independently and simultaneously, by loan James.
Theorem 3.2. (Dold and Thorn [17], [18]). Let Y be a connected finite complex with base point Yo. Then under the embeddings Spd(y) <-+ Spd+1(y) given by c t-+ c + Yo, there is an isomorphism (3.3)
~
11'.
(Spd(y)) ~ H.(Yj Z).
d
Furthermore for any finite complex Y, there is an isomorphism (3.4)
1I'.Zo(Y)
~
H.(Yj Z).
The first statement can be rephrased by considering the limiting space SP(Y)
= lli:!l Spd(y) d
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
151
with topology induced by the family of compact sets Ki = Spi(y) as in (2.6)forward. This space, called the infinite symmetric product of Y, has the property that
(3.5)
1I".sP(Y) =:! H.(YjZ).
One nice consequence of 3.2 is MacLane spaces. Recall that for Eilenberg-MacLane space K(r, n) lence in the category of countable
that it gives beautiful models of Eilenbergany finitely generated abelian group r, the is the space, unique up to homotopy equivaCW-complexes, such that if k = n otherwise.
(See [80] for this and what follows). These spaces are classifying spaces for the functor Hn (.j r) in the sense that for any finite complex Y, there is a natural isomorphism Hn(Yj r)
(3.6) where [Y, K(r, n)] = from Y to K(r,n).
11"0
~
[Y, K(r, n)]
Map (Y, K(r, n)) denotes homotopy classes of maps
Theorem 3.2 gives homotopy equivalences
(3.7) for all n. Hence, from (3.6) we see that for a connected finite complex Y, Hn(Yj Z) =:! [Y, SP (sn)] =:! ~d [Y, Spd (sn)]
(3.8)
= ~d 11"0 Map (Y, Spd (sn)) .
This is interesting since maps from Y to Spd (sn) are simply d-valued maps from Y to sn. They correspond, under graphing, to topological cycles in the product Y x sn which project d-to-l onto Y. We will return to this point later when we discuss algebraic cocycles.
s,. y
Equation (3.8) generalizes to higher homotoPY groups. One has that
(3.9) for all k
~
o.
152
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
There is a relative version of Theorem 3.2 which was important in the original proof.
Theorem 3.3. (Dold and Thom [17], [18]). Let A c Y be a pair of finite complexes (i.e., A is a subcomplex of Y). Then there is a natural isomorphism (3.10)
11'.
{Zo(Y)/Zo(A)}
Furthermore, given any integer m
> 0,
~
H.(X,Aj Z).
there is a natural isomorphism
(3.11)
Proving (3.10) involves proving that the homomorphism Zo(X) -t Zo(X)/Zo(Y) is a principal bundle. The long exact sequence for 11'. then results in the long exact sequence in homology for the pair. Note that algebraically we have that
Zo(X)/mZo(X)
= Zo(X) ®z Zm
is just the free Zm-module generated by the points of X. The topology on this is interesting to contemplate. It is an important fact that the results of Dold-Thom completely determine the homotopy type of these spaces. This is due to the following result.
Theorem 3.4 (John Moore [66]). Let A be a connected topological abelian monoid or a topological abelian group. Then A is homotopy equivalent to a product of Eilenberg-MacLane spaces. In other words the Postnikov k-invariants all vanish, and so Y is completely determined by its homotopy groups. Thus Theorem 3.2 implies that for any connected finite complex Y there are homotopy equivalences 00
(3.12)
Z x SP(Y) ~ Zo(Y) ~
II K (Hp(YjZ),p). p=o
There are analogous statements for Zo(Y)/Zo(A) and Zo(Y)/mZo(Y) corresponding to (3.10) and (3.11). Now for a projective variety X we see that Cp(X) and Zp(X) are natural generalizations of Co(X) and Zo(X) to the p-dimensional points of the space. It is certainly intriguing to speculate about the extent to which these gorgeous results can be generalized. §4. Divisors. Let us now examine cycles of codimension one. Suppose X is a non-singular projective variety of dimension n. The fundamental result
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
153
here is that locally every effective cycle of co dimension one on X is the divisor of a holomorphic function, in fact a rational function which is regular in the neighborhood and is unique up to multiplication by non-vanishing functions. Thus given c E Cn-l(X), there is a family {(Ui, li)}~l' where {Ui}~l is an open covering of X, and Ii E 0 (Ui) has the property that
Clu,
= Div (Ii) .
The quotients gij = Io/!; : Ui n Uj ~ C - {O} define transition functions for a line bundle I.e on X for which the 10 determine a global holomorphic crosssection. (See [64] for more details). When X = pn there is exactly one holomorphic line bundle for each integer d, which is denoted Oed). The sections of Oed) for d > 0 are in natural one-to-one correspondence with homogeneous polynomials of degree din (n + I)-variables. This gives the following generalization of Lemma 3.1 above. Lemma 4.1.
Cn- l (pn)
= II p(n!d)_l. d~O
For a general X, the construction above gives a homomorphism (4.1) generalizing (3.2). The preimage of t E HI(Xj OX) under (4.1) is the projective space P (HO(X, OCt))) of holomorphic sections of t. One can prove that there is an exact sequence
o ~ HI(XjJR)/HI(XjZ) ~ HI(XjOX)
~ NS(X) ~ 0
where NS(X) = HI,I(Xj Z) ~ H2(Xj Z) is the set of classes whose image in H2(XjC) is represented by a (1, I)-form. NS(X) is called the Neron-Severi group of X. Thus HI (Xj OX) is a discrete group extended by a torus of dimension bl(X)
= rank(HI(XjJR».
By universality, the homomorphism (4.1) extends to a continuous homomorphism (4.2)
This extension'is explicitly given by extending the construction given at the beginning of this section to general (non-positive) cycles. Every line bundle admits a meromorphic (i.e., rational) section, and the quotient of two sections of the same bundle is a rational function. Hence, (4.2) expands to an exact sequence (4.3)
0 -+ IP (K X (X» ~ Zn_I(X) -+ HI (Xi OX) -+ 0
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
154
where P (K,x (X)) is the projective group of the non-zero rational functions on X under multiplication. In more classical terms there is a tautologically defined exact sequence of groups o -+ p (K,x (X)) -+ Zn-1 (X) -+ Pic(X) -+ 0 where Pic(X) is the Picard group of divisors on X modulo rational equivalence. The above remarks constitute a computation of Pic(X) in terms of sheaf cohomology. What is of interest here is that with our given topology on Zn-l (X) the homomorphism (4.2) is continuous, and in fact (4.3) is a fibration. Setting poo = !i!!lpd we have the following result of E. Friedlander. d
Theorem 4.2 [22] Let X be any non-singular projective variety of dimension n. Then there is a homotopy equivalence
From this we see that certain classical invariants occur as homotopy groups of Zn-l (X) namely
7l'oZn-1(X) 7l'1 Zn-1(X) and also 7l'2Zn-l(X)
~
~
~
NS(X) Hl(XjZ)
~
H 2n - 1 (X,Z)
Z.
§5. Curves on a 3-fold. The next interesting case to examine is when p = 1 and n = 3. Here life can be quite complicated. Consider for example X = p3. Every cycle of degree 1 is linear, so
where {h (~) denotes the Grassmannian of 2-planes in ~. It is not difficult to see that C1,2 (p3) = Sp2(Q) U Q where SP2(Q) corresponds to pairs of lines in p3 and Q consists of plane quadrics, i.e., all quadratic curves lying in hyperplanes in p3. These two subsets of Cl,2 (p3) are algebraically irreducible and of dimension 8. The set S p2 (9) n Q consists of degenerate plane quadrics, i.e., pairs of lines which meet in p3. It has dimension 7. In degree 3 we have the decomposition
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
155
where SP3(Q) consists of triples of lines, 9 + Q = {i + q : i E 9 and q E Q}, C consists of plane cubics, and N consists of "twisted cubics" and their limits. Each of these is irreducible and of dimension 12. The elements in N which do not belong to other components are exactly the images of maps ]pI1 -4 ]pI3 given by a full basis of homogeneous polynomials of degree 3, the so-called rational normal curves in ]pI3. One example is the map
[zo : zd
1-4
[zg : v'3z~zl : v'3zoz~ : z:]
(which has constant curvature 1/3 in the standard metric). All others are obtained from this one by a change of basis in C4, i.e., N is the closure of an orbit of PGL 4 (C) acting on CI ,3 (]pI3). It is interesting to examine the intersections of the various components of Cl,3 (]pI3). For example en N consists of those plane cubics which are rational. It has dimension 11 and generically fibres over (]pI3)·. Clearly as d increases the geometry of Cl,d (]pI3) becomes tremendously complicated. Each map CI,d' (]pI3) X Cl,d" -4 CI,d (]pI3) given by addition, where d' + d" = d, contributes a large number of irreducible components to Cl,d (]pI3). In addition to this there will always be new ones, for example plane curves of degree d. For further discussion see [74] for example. §6. The Euler-Poincare series of the Chow monoid. Despite their complicated structure, it is possible to compute the Euler characteristics of the Chow sets Cp,d (]pin). An intriguing consequence of the calculation is that the generating function associated to these numbers is rational. For fixed p :5 n consider the formal power series in one variable 00
(6.1)
wp,n(t)
= LX (Cp,d (]pin)) t d d=O
where X(Y) denotes the Euler characteristic of Y. Then in collaboration with Steven Yau the following was proved. Theorem 6.1. ([60]) For all 0 :5 p
(6.2)
When p = n - 1, i.e., in the case of divisors, this is a classical Hilbert polynomial calculation. When p = 0, it is a special case of the general MacDonald formula [61]
156
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
which holds for any connected finite complex Y. Nevertheless, the rationality of q,p,n(t) for general p is somewhat surprising. Note that the exponent in (6.2) is just the Euler characteristic of the Grassmannian Cp,l (pn) of p-planes in pn. The result above has been generalized by J. Elizondo to general toric varieties. Note that for any projective variety X and any p < dim(X) we can define q,p
=
L
X (Cp,Q(X)) 0:
QE r 2p
where r 2p = H2p(Xj Z)mod torsion, by convention x(0) = O. Given a basis el,'" ,eN ofr2P we let tl,'" ,tN denote the linear coordinates on H2 p(XjJR) with respect to the dual basis. We then "rewrite" q,p as a formal sum (6.3)
q,p
=
L
X(Cp,n(X))t n .
nEZ N
Theorem 6.2. (J. Elizondo [19], [20]). If X is a non-singular toric variety, then q, p is an intrinsically defined mtional function on H2p (X j JR) which can be explicitly and canonically computed from the combinatorial data (the "fan") of the variety. This result has an elegant formulation in terms of equivariant cohomology suggested by E. Bifet (See [19], [20]). §7. Functoriality. Despite their complicated nature, the Chow monoid and its group completion do behave nicely under algebraic maps. Let f:X~Y
be a morphism of projective varieties and suppose V C X is a irreducible subvariety of co dimension p. Then f(V) C Y is a subvariety of Y, and we define if dim(f(V)) < p f.V = if dim(f(V)) = p
{~f(V)
where k is the degree of the map homomorphisms
f
: V
~
f(V).
This determines group
(7.1)
and (7.2)
Proposition 7.1. (Friedlander [22]) The homomorphisms (7.1) and (7.2) are continuous.
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
157
These homomorphisms clearly have the property that (g
for morphisms
I : X -+ Y
0
I).
= g.
0
I.
and 9 : Y -+ Z.
For nice morphisms there are maps in the opposite direction. Proposition 7.2. (cf. [34], [22]) Suppose I : X -+ Y is a flat morphism of projective varieties with fibre dimension k. Then the flat pull-back of cycles gives continuous homomorphisms
1* : Cp(Y) -+ Cp+k(X) 1* : Zp(Y) -+ Zp+k(X), Examples of flat morphisms are proper submersions and branched coverings. For a rigorous definition of flatness see [43] §8. The homotopy relationship between Cp(X) and Zp(X). In our discussion there are two objects of interest. The first is the Chow monoid Cp(X), a geometric object. The components of Cp(X) are algebraic spaces whose structure we would like to understand and relate to X. The second object is Zp(X), the topological group of all p-cyc1es on X. This is a fundamental algebraic object attached to X. It would also be nice to understand the topological structure of Zp(X). In fact by Theorem 3.4 above we know that the homotopy type of Zp(X) is completely determined by the homotopy groups ?r.Zp(X). Each group ?r.Zp(o) is an interesting functor on the category of projective varieties. Now Zp(X) is simply the naIve topological group completion of Cp(X) and one might hope that the homotopy of Zp(X) is somehow a "completion" of that of Cp(X). In fact we can be quite specific. Let M be an abelian topological monoid, and set r = ?roM. Let
M= liMa aEr
denote the decomposition into connected components, and choose an element E Ma for each ct. Then we can define continuous maps
Xa
fa : M
X
r -+ M
X
r
by setting fa(x,{3) = (x + x a ,{3 + ct). The homotopy class of fa depends only on ct E r. Now r is a directed system (where {3 > ct {::::::} (3 = ct + 'Y for 'Y E r), and f a+{3 is homotopic to fa + f {3 for all ct, {3. Hence, for any covariant homotopy functor h we can define the direct limit lim h(M
X
{ct}).
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
158
Suppose now that M = M x M / '" is the naIve topological group completion, where (x,y) ~(x',y') <==:} 3z E M with x + y' + z = x' + y + z, and where one takes on M the quotient topology in the compactly generated category (cf. [80]). Then one might naIvely hope that
h(M)
(8.1)
-
= lim
h(M x {a}),
o Er
and in particular that
(8.2)
-
7rk(M) = lim
7rk
(Mo)
a Er
for k > O. In fact for general M this is almost certainly not true. There are nice cases, such as
M =Co(X)
M
and
= Zo(X)
where it does hold (cf. Theorem 3.2). However the standard proofs are difficult and quite indirect. In general homotopy theorists ignore this question because there exists a substitute for M which has the good property (8.1). It is the homotopy-theoretic group completion
(8.3) where BM is the classifying space of the monoid obtained from the standard bar construction, and flY denotes the loop space of Y. (See [22] for a detailed discussion.) There is a canonical homotopy class of maps M --+ M+ which is an equivalence when M is a group, and there is a model [52] for M+ which admits a map
(8.4) so that
M commutes. The desired relationship (8.1) (and (8.2)) will hold if 1/J is a homotopy equivalence. The author conjectured several years ago that this should be true when M = Cp(X) for a projective variety X. The conjecture proved to be useful
but quite hard. Friedlander made important progress on it. The first complete proof was given by P. Lima-Filho in a beautiful paper [52] in which several other basic results are established. Following this a somewhat stronger result
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
159
was proved by E. Friedlander and O. Gabber [28]. (This stronger result can also be obtained from methods in [52].) Theorem 8.1. (Lima-Filho [52], Friedlander, Gabber [28]) Let M = Cp(X)
be the Chow monoid in dimension p of a projective variety X. Then the map (8.4) between the homotopy-theoretic and naive group completions of M is a homotopy equivalence. Corollary 8.2. Let Cp(X) be as above. Set r
Cp(X) =
= 11'0 Cp(X)
and let
II Cp,Q(X) QEr
be the decomposition into connected components. Then 1I'0Zp(X) ~
f
(the algebraic group completion of the monoid r), and 1I'kZp(X)
!:::!!!!!} 1I'k Cp,Q(X) Q
for all k
> O. Furthermore, H.Zp(X) ~ H. (Cp(X)) ffiz[r] Z[I1.
The Friedlander-Gabber proof uses the fact that Zp can built out of quotients of varieties by algebraic equivalence relations. (They work in a nice category which contains varieties and is closed under push-out's). Lima-FiIho's arguments are couched in more topological terms, and give also the Dold-Thorn result that Zo(X) !:::! Z x SP(X) for any connected finite complex X. The result above shows that the functors 1T.Z.(X) and H.Z.(X) are related to the homotopy and homology of the Chow varieties of X. In the absence of this theorem one could replace Zp(X) by nBCp(X) (or equivalently just BCp(X)) and obtain interesting functors. In fact. this is important for extending the theory to varieties defined in characteristic p > 0 (See IV. 13.). However, in doing this one loses direct contact with the variety and such theorems as localization, discussed in Chapter IV, are difficult to establish. §9. Cycles and the Plateau problem. For varieties defined over C the components' of Cp(X) have a beautiful geometric interpretation. Fix 'Y E H2p (Xj Z) and let Cp,y(X) denote the set of all c E Cp(X) whose homology class is 'Y. This is a finite union of connected components of Cp(X) and is very possibly empty. However, whenever there exists a cycle C E Cp,y(X), H. Federer [26] proved the following. For any Kahler metric on X, c is a current of least mass (i.e., weighted volume) in its homology class 'Y. That is, (9.1)
Mass(c) ~ Mass(c')
160
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
for all rectifiable cycles c' on X which represent 'Y (cf. [27]). Furthermore, equality occurs in (9.1) if and only if d E Cp,-y(X). (Note: When X is not smooth, a "Kahler metric on X" means a Kahler metric defined on some neighborhood of X in pN.) Hence whenever it is non-empty, Cp,-y(X) is precisely the moduli space of all solutions to the Plateau problem for the homology class 'Y onX.
This says that when it is not empty, Cp,-y(X) embeds into the space 32P,-Y(X) of rectifiable 2p-cycles on X with homology class 'Y, as the set of minimum points of the continuous function Mass: 32P,-Y(X) - 7 IR+. One may wonder whether Cp,-y(X) is connected. This turns out not to hold in general. However, for certain basic spaces, such as projective spaces, Grassmannians, general flag manifolds, etc, this and much more are true. For such spaces the inclusion
becomes a homotopy equivalence as 'Y tends to infinity in the partially ordered monoid 1I'0Cp (X). These results are discussed in Chapter N. In recent years there have been examples of geometric variational problems where "as the degree goes to infinity" the set of absolute minima gives a homotopy approximation to the space. This was seen in the work of G. Segal and others [72], [12], [65] where the space of rational maps of p1 into a good variety (as above) approximates the space of all continuous maps. It also appears in the theory of SU2 gauge fields over 8 4 where as the degree of the bundle increases, the finite-dimensional space of self-dual connections approximates the space of all connections modulo gauge equivalence (cf. [3], [77], [11]). Algebraic cycles provide another example of this phenomenon.
Chapter II - Suspension and Join In this section we introduce two elementary constructions on projective subvarieties and discuss the Algebraic Suspension Theorem which is the key to much of the subsequent material. §1. Algebraic suspension. Fix a hyperplane
]pn C ]pn+1
and a point
]po
E
]pn+1 _]pn.
Definition 1.1. Let V C ]pn be a closed set. By the algebraic suspension of V (or complex cone on V) with vertex ]po we mean the set ~V
= U{l: l
is a projective line through]P° which meets V}.
161
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
~--r---~+-----------~~4
The projection ]p>n+! _lP'0 -t ]p>n is a holomorphic line bundle. It is the normal bundle to lP'n and is equivalent to 0(1). Its fibres are the lines through lP'0 (with lP'0 removed). Thus $V is homeomorphic to the Thom space o/O(l)/v· The construction $V is particularly simple in terms of homogeneous coordinates. Suppose C'+2 is a choice of homogeneous coordinates for lP'n+! with projection 7r : cn+ 2 - {OJ -t lP'n+1. Given any subset S C lP'n+!, let C(S) ~f 7r- 1 (S) U {O},
(1.1)
and suppose the coordinates are chosen so that C(]p>n) C(lP'°) = {OJ x Co Then for any closed set V C lP'n, (1.2)
C(~V)
= C(V)
x C(lP'°)
= cn+1
X {OJ and
= C(V) x c.
From this we see that if lP'P C lP'n is a linear subspace, then
(1.3) is also a linear subspace. Furthermore, we see that if V is a projective subvariety of lP'n, then ~V is a projective subvariety of lP'n+!. In fact if V is defined by homogeneous polynomial equations P1(ZO, ..• ,Zn) = ... = PN(ZO, ... ,zn) = 0, then ~V is defined by exactly the same polynomials, now considered to be functions of an additional "hidden" variable Zn+1. Hence by linearity the algebraic suspension gives a homomorphism (1.4)
which is easily seen to be continuous. Consequently, we have
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
162
Proposition 1.2. For any algebraic subset X gives a continuous monoid homomorphism
c
lP'n, the algebraic suspension
(1.5)
which extends to a continuous group homomorphism (1.6)
for all p, 0 ~ p ~ dim(X). §2. Algebraic join. Fix disjoint linear subspaces lP'n IIlP'm C lP'n+m+!. Definition 2.1. Let V C lP'n and We lP'm be closed subsets. By the algebraic join of V and W we mean the set
V#W
= U{l: l
is a projective line which meets both V and W}.
=
Suppose en+m+2 en+! x en+! is a choice of homogeneous coordinates such that C(lP'n) en+ 1 x {O} and C(Irm) = {O} x en+!. Then we have that
=
(2.1)
C(V#W)
= C(V) x C(W).
From this it is clear that the join takes linear subspaces to linear subspaces, i.e., (2.2)
for 0 $ p $ n and 0 $ q $ m. Furthermore, one has
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
163
(2.3)
~m+1 V ~f ~(~( ••• (~V) ... ))
,
...
,
= v#pm.
m+l-times
Of course, one has symmetrically that pn# W ~ ~n+1 W, and this gives the basic relation
(2.4) that the join pairing is obtained by suspending and then intersecting. Note that this suspension always puts cycles in good position, i.e., so they intersect properly. Note from (2.1) that if V and W are projective subvarieties then so is V#W. In fact if V is defined by homogeneous polynomials Pl(Z) = ... = PN(Z) = 0 and W is defined by ql(() = ... = qM(() = 0, then V#W is defined by the vanishing of all Pi'S and qj'S simultaneously. The join extends to algebraic cycles by bilinearity. Suspension is continuous, and the proper intersection of cycles in pI: is continuous on the subset of pairs which meet properly. (See Fulton [34] or Barlet [6].) Hence, we have the following. Proposition 2.2. Let X C pn and Y C pm be algebraic subsets. Then the algebraic join defines a continuous biadditive pairing (2.5) which extends to a continuous biadditive pairing (2.6) for all 0 ~ P ~ dim(X) and 0 ~ r ~ dim(Y).
In particular, if we choose the notation (2.7) where n
= dim(X), then (2.5) and (2.6) give basic pairings:
(2.8) (2.9)
§3. The Algebraic Suspension Theorem. The importance of algebraic suspension comes from the following result.
164
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
Theorem 3.1. ([47]) For any algebraic subset X C ]pn and any p, 0 $ p S dim(X), the algebraic suspension homomorphism
is a homotopy equivalence.
Idea of Proof. Suppose X = ]pn. (The general case will follow by restricting to cycles in X.) For simplicity set Cp+1 = CP+1 (]pn+1) and Zp+1 = Zp+1 (]pn+l). Consider the subset
of cycles which meet the hyperplane ]pn in proper dimension. Let .JP+1 C be the subgroup generated by .1P+1' The proof breaks into two steps.
Assertion 1. The subset ~(Zp(]pn)) C
Assertion 2. The inclusion
ZP+1
.JP+l is a deformation retract.
.JP+1 C Zp+1
is a homotopy equivalence.
For the first step we recall that ]pn+1 - ]po -+ ]pn is a line bundle. Scalar multiplication by t > 0 in this bundle defines a one-parameter family of automorphisms CPt : ]pn+1 -+ ]pn+1 which fixes ]pn ll]p°. It induces a 1-parameter family of automorphisms
which leaves invariant the submonoid .1p+1 and fixes the submonoid ~(Cp(]pn)). The main point here is that on the subset .1P+1 the map ~t extends continuously to t = 00 where
is the retraction defined by
c . lP'n denoting the intersection of c E .1P+1 with the hyperplane lP'n. The continuity of this process, called "pulling to the normal cone" is established in
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
165
the book of Fulton [34].
t=
t= 1
.Extending q,t, 0 < t $
00,
1000
t=-
to the group completions proves Assertion I.
To prove Assertion 2 it suffices to prove that the homamorphism
(3.1) induced by the inclusion ~+1 C Zp+1 is an isomorphism for all k ~ O. Note that the inclusion map on positive cycles JP+1 C Cp +1 is very far from being a homotopy equivalence. It does induce a bijection of connected components, but the corresponding components have very different dimensions in general. It is in this step that we must use the group completion strongly. For this we erect a superstructure. Fix a linear embedding pn+1 C pn+2 and two points xo, Xl E pn+2 - pn+1. The projections
(3.2) give each set pn+2 - {Xk} the structure of a holomorphic line bundle over pn+1, Consider now a positive divisor D on pn+2 of degree d with Xo ¢ D and ¢ D. One can think of D as a d-valued section of the bundle 11'"0 : pn+2 {xo} -t pn+1. The key observation is that any positive cycle c E Cp +1 (pn+1 ) can be "lifted" to a cycle with support in D. This lifting is defined to be the intersection Xl
of the divisor D with the suspension of c to the point Xo. This gives us a continuous map
166
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
Xo ,',
=
Note that (71'0).0 WD d (multiplication by the integer d in the monoid). However, the composition (71'1).0 WD is very interesting. It gives us a transformation of cycles in IP'n+l which makes most of them "transversal" to IP'n, i.e., which moves most of them into .11'+1' Consider now the family of divisors tD, 0:::; t :::; 1, given by scalar multiplication by t in the bundle 71'0 : IP'n+2 - {xo} -+ IP'n+l. We assume Xl f/:. tD for all such t. (This will be true for all divisors in a neighborhood of d .lP'n+l.) The above construction then gives us a family of transformations
FD,t ~f (7I't). for 0 :::; t :::; 1 such that Fo
0
WtD : Cp+l(lP'n+1) ---+ Cp+l(lP'n+l)
=d (multiplication by d).
Fix c E Cp+l (IP'n+l) and ask which divisors D of degree d have the property that FD,t(C) E .1P+l 1 .. for all t > O. Let Be C Cn+1,d(lP'n+2 ) ~ IP' (n+2+d) d be the subset of dlVlsors for which this fails, i.e., for which there is some t > 0 such that FD,t(C) ¢ .1p+l' Then the main algebro-geometric calculation is that
(3.3) We can now apply these transformations with d = 1 to prove that .1p+l '-t Cp+l induces a bijection on connected components. Hence, (3.1) is an isomorphism for k = O. Suppose now that f : S" -+ CP+l is a continuous map for k > O. We may assume f to be P L up to homotopy. Then for all d sufficiently large, we see
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
that the map d· family
167
f is homotopic to a map Sk ~ .7P+l' Indeed just consider the Ft,D
o :5 t :5 1, where D
0
f : Sk --+ Cp+l
lies outside the union
which is a set of real codimension ~ 2(P+~+l) - (k + 2). Similarly, suppose we are given a map of pairs f : (Dk+ 1, sn) -+ (Cp+1, .7P +l)' Then for all sufficiently large integers d, the map d· f can be deformed through a map of pairs to one with image in .7P+l' From this we deduce that the map
'$ .. : ~ 7rk(Cp,a) --+ ~ a
7rk(Cp+l,a)
a
is an isomorphism for all k > O. Hence the induced map on homotopy group completions is a homotopy equivalence. One then applies Theorem 1.8.2 for the statement concerning naive group completions. 0 Note 3.2. With a little more care the arguments above can be applied to prove directly that ~ : Zp -+ Zp+l is a homotopy equivalence (without using Theorem 1.8.1). See [48] for example. The Algebraic Suspension Theorem can be thought of as a "stability result" . IT we choose notation (3.4)
where n
= dim(X)! then Theorem 3.1 can be restated by saying that
(3.5)
is a homotopy equivalence for all q
:5 dim(X).
§4. SOIne immediate applications. For cycles in projective space one can make a construction which strictly generalizes the Dold-Thorn construction of SP to the "p-dimensional points". Fix a linear subspace fo of dimension p in IP'n, and consider the sequence of embeddings
given by c 1-+
C
+ lo.
Define Cp(lP'n) == ~ Cp.d(lP'n) d
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
168
to be the limiting space with topology generated by this family of compact sets. (A set C is closed iff its intersection with each Cp,d is closed.) Note that Co(lP'n) = SP(lP'n). As in (3.4) we write fq(lP'n) == Cn_q(lP'n) as the connected monoid of codimension-q cycles. Theorem 4.1. ([47]) There are homotopy equivalences
(4.1)
cq(lP'n) ~ K(Z,2) x K(Z,4) x .. · x K(Z,2q)
(4.2)
zq(lP'n)!:!:! K(Z,O) x K(Z,2) x K(Z,4) x .. · x K(Z,2q)
for all n
~
q~
o.
Proof. Apply Theorem 3.1 to see that zq(lP'n) !:!:! zq(lP'q) = Zo(lP'q) and then apply the Dold-Thom Theorem (cf. (1.3.12)). The space cq similarly reduces D down to Co(lP'q) = SP(lP'q). Theorem 4.2. ([47]) Let IP n - 1 C IP'n be a hyperplane, then there are homotopy equivalences
(4.3) for all n
~
q ~ O.
Theorem 4.3 ([47]). Let m > 0 be any positive integer, and let zq(lP'n) ® Zm = zq(lP'n)/mZq(lP'n) be the topological group of codimension-q cycles with coefficients in Zm = Z/mZ. Then there are homotopy equivalences
and (4.5) for all n
zq(lP'n)®Zm/zq-1(lP'n-1)®Zm ~
q~
o.!
K(Zm,2q)
o.
Theorem 4.1 can be applied to give results about the structure of the Chow sets Cp,d(lP'n). We say that a map f : A -+ B between spaces has a right homotopy inverse through dimension k, if there is a finite complex C and a map i : C -+ A so that the composition f 0 i is k-connected. Theorem 4.4 ([47]). The inclusion
Cp,d(pn) <-+ Cp(pn) has a right homotopy inverse through dimension 2d. In particular the induced maps
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
169
are surjective, and the maps
are injective for k
~
2d and for any coefficient ring A.
This establishes the existence of a lot of "stable" cohomology in the classical Chow varieties. If A = 2';2, we pick up much ofthe Steenrod algebra as d, n -t 00.
Note. In this context it is natural to ask how much of the "stable" homology of Cp,d is represented by algebraic cycles. Recently Michelsohn has found such representatives for essentially all possible classes [94]. §5. The relation to topological cycles. Let X be a projective variety of dimension n. Fix a triangulation of X compatible with the smooth stratification and let X <-+ ~N be a linear embedding of this simplicial complex. Then for any k ~ 2n, the Lipschitz singular k-chains in X can be completed to a group of rectifiable k-currents
using the Federer mass norm. (See [26] and [27].) These currents retain certain manifold-like properties, and the spaces have nice compactness properties. The restriction of the de Rham differential d makes (R.(X), d) a complex whose homology is H*(X; Z) ([27]). In particular in each dimension k ~ 2n we have the topological group
of rectifiable k-cycles on X. The group depends only on the P L-structure of X. The topology is the restriction of the standard weak topology of the space of de Rham currents on ~N with support in X. Now there is a beautiful theorem of Fred Almgren which generalizes the Dold-Thom result. Theorem 5.1 (Almgren [1]). For each pair of non-negative integers k,l, there is an isomorphism
There is a natural continuous homomorphism (5.1) for each p, 0
~ p ~
n. Theorem 5.1 above can be restated in the following way.
Theorem 5.2. When X for all p.
= IFn ,
the inclusion (5.1) is a homotopy equivalence
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
170
Thus in projective space the algebraic p-cycles carry the full homotopy-type of the space of all rectifiable 2p-cycles. This strongly generalizes the basic fact that every homology class is represented by an algebraic cycle. We will see that Theorem 5.2 remains true for a large family of varieties including Grassmannians and in fact all generalized flag manifolds. However, such a result is necessarily false (even at the level of connected components) for any variety X for which H2p (XjQ) ct. Hp,p(X). In this case the bigradingof1l'lZp(X) : i,p~ obecomes more interesting than it is in the topological case.
§6. The ring 1I'.Z(PO). Let X C pN be a projective subvariety. Then the algebraic join gives pairings
which, since O#C = 0 and C'#O = 0, descend to the smash product (6.1) Now the Suspension Theorem 3.1 gives a canonical homotopy equivalence Zq+ql (X) ~ Z9+ql (~n+l X), provided that q + q' ~ dirnX. Hence taking homotopy groups in (6.1) gives a pairing
(6.2) introduced by E. Friedlander and B. Mazur [29]. This pairing can be extended somewhat as follows. For any q ~ 0 we have canonical homotopy equivalences zq(:E k X) ~ zq(~n+1 X) e!! ••• for all n such that n + dim (X) ~ q. Let us define
zQ(X)
(6.3)
=~
zQ(~n X)
n
to be this well-defined homotopy type. For example
for any n
~
q. The pairing (5.2) now extends to a pairing
(6.4) defined for all k, k', q, q'
~
O.
TheorelIl 6.1. (Friedlander and Mazur [29]). When X =]pO, the pairing (6.4) gives :FM 'W 11'. Z· (PO) the structure 0/ a commutative bigraded ring. In fact this ring is isomorphic to a polynomial ring Z[s,h] on two generators where
171
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
For any projective subvariety X c pN, the .pairing (6.4) gives 7r.Z·(X) the structure of a bigraded F M -module.
The operation h is related to the Lefschetz map in homology coming from intersection with a hyperplane. The operation s is more subtle and interesting. We will return to this in Chapter IV.
§7. Suspension and symmetry. In all of the discussion above it is natural to ask what happens in the presence of symmetries. Consider, for example, a projective variety X and a finite group G C Aut(X) of automorphisms. There is a naturally induced action of G on Zp(X) for each p, and in analogy with §3 above, one can consider the topological groups
ZG,p(X) ~f Zp(X)G /G . Zp(X) introduced in [58], where Zp(X)G = {c E Zp(X) : g.c = c'l;/g E G} denotes the fixed-point set and GZp(X) = {~9EG g.c : c E Zp(X)} is the subgroup of averaged cycles. These are functors on the category of G-varieties and Gequivariant morphisms, and therefore are the homotopy groups 7rkZG,P(X). If we are given a representation G -t GLN+1 (C) and a G-equivariant embedding, then algebraic suspension defines homomorphisms
Together with M.-L. Michelsohn it was proved that these maps are homotopy equivalences if one localizes away from the order of the group. In particular we have Theorem 7.1. ([58]) The suspension homomorphisms (7.1) and the induced homomorphism (7.2)
'$ : ZG,p(X)
-t
ZG,p+1 ('$X)
induce isomorphisms on the homotopy group 7rk (.) ® A for all k ring A in which the order of the group G is invertible.
~
0 and any
By "ring" we mean a commutative ring with unit. Examples of such rings are A = Z(q) (the integers localized at the prime q) and A = Z/qZ where q is any prime which does not divide the integer IGI. This condition that IGI be invertible is strictly necessary. It is shown by example in [58] that the suspension homomorphism fails to be a homotopy equivalence at primes dividing the order of the group. However, with LimaFilho and Michelsohn it has been proved that the m-fold suspension map is a G-homotopy equivalence, when m exceeds the codimension of the cycles. One can also suspend to a general representation. Here one obtains the delicate
172
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
result that suspension to the regular representation of G is stably a G-homotopy equivalence [93].
Chapter III - Cycles on IPn and Classifying Spaces It is an interesting fact that the algebraic cycles in projective space can be used to construct models of certain universal spaces in topology - spaces that represent such everyday functors as K-theory and cohomology. Elementary constructions with cycles lead to Chern classes, Stiefel-Whitney classes and the cup product at the universal level. Families of cycles correspond to Steenrod operations.
§1. The total Chern class. It is a basic fact presented in most books on characteristic classes and K-theory that the space of linear cycles
(U.) i.e., the Grassmannian of linear subspaces of codimension-q in IPn is a classifying space for vector bundles. Specifically, for any finite complex Y of dimension ~ 2(n - q), there is an equivalence of functors (1.2)
where Vectq(y) denotes the set of equivalence classes of rank-q complex vector bundles on Y. The equivalence is given by associating to f : Y -+ gq (IPn ), the pull-back q ofthe tautological q-plane bundle q over gq (IPn).
re
e
Analogously we see from H.4.1 and (1.3.6) that the space zq (IPn) has the property that for any finite complex Y there is an equivalence of functors q
(1.3)
EBH2k(y;Z)!:!! [Y,zq (IPn)]. k=O
Observe now that we have a very natural map (1.4)
given by considering linear subspaces as cycles of degree 1. By (1.3) this corresponds to a cohomology class c on gq (IPn). In collaboration with M.-L. Michelsohn the following was proved. Theorem 1.1 ([57]). The cohomology class c = 1 + Cl + .,. + cq determined by the cycle inclusion (1.4) is the total Chern class of the tautological bundle over gq (JP'n)
eq
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
173
Under algebraic suspension the maps (1.4) sit in a grid of inclusions:
n
n
gq (pn)
zq (pn)
~
n
~
(1.5)
C
gq
n
(pn+1) C
zq
n
~
~ ~
(pn+1)
n
~
where the vertical maps on the right are all homotopy equivalences. Hence we may pass to the limit BUq ~f ~
(1.6)
gq (pn) .
n
This space has the classifying property (1.2) for all finite complexes. Corollary 1.2 ([57]) Passing to the limit in (1.5) gives a map
(1. 7)
BUq --+
zq (POO)
~
K(Z, 0) x K(Z, 2) x ... x K(Z, 2q)
which represents the total Chern class of the universal q-plane bundle over BUq • Taking the limit as q
-t 00
in (1. 7) gives us map
(1.8) where BU and K (Z, 2*) have the property that K(Y)
= [Y,BU]
and
Heven(YjZ)
= [Y,K(Z,2*)]
for all finite complexes Y. That is BU and K(Z, 2*) are the classifying spaces for reduced K-theory and even cohomology respectively. From 1.2 we immediately have Corollary 1.3. The map (1.8) represents the universal total Chern class from K -theory to cohomology. Note that by Bott Periodicity the homotopy groups of BU and K(Z, 2*) are the same in positive dimensions. In fact Bott's fundamental results show that the homomorphism '1r2kBU
111
Z
~
'1r2k K
(Z,2*)
III
Z
174
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
is multiplication by (k - I)! (See [57]). These results lead to some interesting questions. One can consider the spaces V(d)
(1.9)
= lim
Cp,d
(rn)
p-HXl
n-+oo
(with the compactly generated topology) for all d = 1,2"" ,00. There is a natural sequence of inclusion mappings (1.10)
BU
= V(l)
C V(2) C ... C V(oo)
= K(Z,2*).
Note that V(d) is the space of all positive projective cycles of degree d. There are a number of interesting questions concerning this filtration. A simple one is whether the maps 1I".V(d) ~ 1I".V(00) are injective, and ifso, at which levels d do the factors in the homomorphism 1I"2kV(1) ~ 1I"2kV(00), which is multiplication by (k - I)!, appear ? §2. Algebraic join and the cup product. From 11.2 we know that the algebraic join induces a continuous biadditive pairing (2.1) From Theorem 11.4.1. and its proof we obtain a canonical homotopy equivalence q
(2.2)
q
zq (rn) ~ II ~f II K(Z, 2k) k=O
for all n ~ q. It is natural to ask what the join map becomes when interpreted as a map of Eilenberg-MacLane spaces. Certainly the most basic pairing of such spaces comes from the cup-product in cohomology. This product
on spaces Y can be represented universally, via (1.3.6), by a map (2.3)
K(Z,a) x K(Z,b) ~ K(Z,a+ b),
which is determined up to homotopy by the fact that it classifies the cup product ttl ® t" of the fundamental cohomology classes, where tk E Hk(K(Z, k)j Z) ~ Z is the generator. The map (2.3) can be constructed explicitly by extending the smash product map Stl x S" ~ Stl AS" = Stl+" bilinearly to Zo (Stl) X Zo (S") ~ Zo (Stl+") and using (1.3.7). These basic cup product maps (2.3) assemble naturally to give a mapping (2.4)
175
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
which classifies the cup-product mapping in even-cohomology
In collaboration with M.-L. Michelsohn the following was proved. Theorem 2.1. ([57]) Under the canonical homotopy equivalence (2.2) the algebraic join pairing # is (homotopic to) the cup product mapping (2.4) Observe now that the inclusion of degree-l cycles into mutative diagram
gq (lp>n) (2.5)
X
gq'
(IPln')
zq (1I1In) gives a com-
~
1
The restriction of the join to linear subspaces corresponds to taking the direct sum (cf. (11.2.1)). Passing to the limit as q,q' -+ 00 and applying Theorem 2.1 gives a commutative diagram BUq X BUq , ~ BUq+ q,
(2.6)
exel q
q'
IIxII
Ie II
q+q'
~
where the map ffi classifies the Whitney sum of vector bundles. The commutativity of this diagram corresponds to the Fundmanental Whitney Duality Formula c(E ffi E') = c(E)c(E') for the total Chern class of complex vector bundles E, E' over a space Y. The importance of (2.5) was realized early by E. Friedlander. He pointed out that in conjunction with Theorem 1.1, it can be used to prove Theorem 2.1 over the rationals. §3. Real cycles and the total Stiefel-Whitney class. It was suggested by Deligne that if one worked with cycles modulo 2, some of the results above might carryover to real algebraic geometry. Indeed, with the correct formulation of "reality" this turns out to be true, and the results are surprisingly nice. Both the formulation of the theory and the proofs of the results are due to T.-K. Lam.
176
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
Following Atiyah [2] we define a Real projective variety to be a pair (X, C) where X is a projective variety and C : X -t X is an antiholomorphic map with C2 = I d. A basic example is that of projective space (I(»n, C) where C is defined by complex conjugation in homogeneous coordinates. The fixed-point set of C is real projective n-space
The choice of this real form corresponds to the choice of Real structure on pn. Observe that if V c X is an algebraic subvariety of a Real variety X, then its conjugate C(V) is also a subvariety. Thus C induces an involution C" on the set of subvarieties of X which extends by linearity to cycles. Definition 3.1. Let (X, C) be a Real projective variety. An algebraic p-cycle on X is said to be Real if it is fixed by C". Let Z:(X)
= {c E Zp(X) : C.(c) = c}
denote the topological group of all Real p-cycles on X. Note that any Real cycle can be uniquely written as E ~+ E mi (Wi + C. Wi) where the ~'s are C.-invariant subvarieties. It is enticing (and naturally suggested by Galois theory) to divide by the subgroup
(1 + C.) Zp(X) = {c + C.(c) : c E Zp(X)} of "averaged" cycles. Therefore following [48] we introduce the topological quotient group
(3.1) of reduced Real p-cycles on X. Algebraically RZp(X) is just the Z2-vector space generated by the Real (irreducible) subvarieties of X. However, this group is also furnished with a natural topology, and T.-K. Lam proves the following theorems. Theorem 3.2 ([48]). Let (X, C) ~ (pn, C) be a Real algebraic subvariety. Then C-equivariant algebraic suspension gives a homotopy equivalence ~: RZp(X) ~ RZp+l(~X)
lor all p, 0 :::; p :::; dim(X). As above we set RZq(X) = RZn_q(X) where n = dim(X). Theorem 3.3 ([48]). There are homotopy equivalences
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
for all q
~
177
n.
A given Real structure C on I'" induces a real structure on gil (JIlin) whose fixed-point set is the real Grassmannian
of lR-linear subspaces of codimension-q in IRn+1. Theorem 3.4 ([48]). The natural inclusion (3.3)
gil (pn(IR» '-+ RZ' (pn)
!:!!
K (Z2. 0) X ••• X K (Z2. q)
represents the total Stiefel Whitney class of the tautological q-plane bundle over Therefore passing the limit as q -+ 00 in (3.3) gives a map
g' (pn(IR».
, BO q -+ II K (Z2' k)
(3.4)
01:=0
which represents the total Stiefel- Whitney class of the universal q-plane bundle over BO q = ~ gq (pn(IR)). n
Taking the limit as q -+
00
in (3.4) gives a map 00
BO -+ K (Z2. *) ~f
II K (Z2;k). k=O
Theorem 3.5. ([48]) The algebraic join RZq (P") x RZq' (pn') --+ RZp+q' (pn+n' +1 ) correspond via (3.2) to the map which classifies the cup-product in Z2-cohomology.
From 3.4 and 3.5 one retrives the classical Whitney Duality Formula weE ® E')
= w(E)w(E')
for the total Stiefel-Whitney class. §4. A conjecture of G. Segal. We have seen that the elementary inclusions (1.4) and (3.3) determine maps (4.1) which correspond to the universal total Chern and Stiefel-Whitney classes respectively. The question naturally arises whether these maps extend to transformations of generalized (connective) cohomology theories. In other words.
178
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
can we extend these to maps of spectra where the mappings (4.1) occur at the oth-Ievel? Finding such an extension amounts to finding infinite loop space structures on these spaces such that e and w are infinite loop maps. Now the spaces BU and BO have natural infinite loop space structures coming from Bott periodicity (e.g., BU = fl2 BU). Each K(G, n) is also an infinite loop space since it is an abelian topological group. However these structures are not even compatible at the I-loop level. H they were, then e and w would preserve the loop-product (flY x flY -t flY). However loop product in BU (and BO) is equivalent to Whitney sum, and in K(G, n) it is equivalent to addition. The Whitney Duality Formulas show that e and w are not additive homomorphisms. In fact if we fix Bott's loop space structures on BU, then a compatible loop structure on K (Z, 2*) will yield a quite different "addition" on even cohomology_ This different additive structure was pointed out and used by Grothendieck in 1958 [37]. It is given on H 2 ·(Yj Z) = HO(Yj Z) Ell H>O(Yj Z) by setting (ao, a'l (bo, b' ) = (eo, c') where
+
+
eo=ao+bo
and
(1 +
e/) =
(1 +
a'l u (1 +
b' ).
This is precisely the addition given by the cup product pairing on K (Z, 2*) discussed in §2. In 1975 G. Segal [71] asked the following question:
(4.2)
Do the cup product pairings on K(Z, 2*) and K(Z2' *) enhance to infinite loop space structures such that e and w become infinite loop maps?
Several such structures were proposed and shown not to work (cf.[73] , [75], [82]-[84], [86]. See [7] for a history). Question (4.2) is very complicated in nature. For any proposed structure one must check compatibility on an infinite pyramid of higher associativity relations. Fortunately topologists have found simpler sets of compatibility hypotheses which yield infinite loop space structures and infinite loop maps.' One such machine, due to Peter May, uses the linear isometries operator C. I will spare you the definition and say only that any C-space (a topological space with an action of C) is canonically an infinite loop space, and any C-map between C-spaces is an infinite loop map. Happily for us there is an elementary method for constructing C-spaces and C-maps. It involves the category I. whose objects are finite dimensional inner product spaces and whose morphisms are linear isometric embeddings. Let denote the category of compactly generated, Hausdorff topological spaces with base point. The sets of morphisms in T are given the compact-open topology.
r
Definition 4.1. An I.-functor (T,w) is a continuous functor T : I. -+ T together with a commutative, associative, and continuous natural transformation w : TxT -+ T 0 Ell such that
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
179
H X E TV, and 1 E T{O} is the basepoint, then
a)
w(x,l)
= x E T(V EB {O}) ='TV.
H V = V' EB V", then the map TV' homeomorphism onto a closed subset.
b)
--+ TV given by x
1-+
w(x,l) is a
Theorem 4.2. ([63]) 1fT is an I.-functor, then T (COO)
= Vccao lim
T(V)
where the limit is taken over finite dimensional subspaces of COO, is an C-space. Any natural transformation ~ : T --+ T' of I.-functors induces a mapping ~ : T (COO) -+ T' (COO) of C-spaces. An illuminating example is given by the "Bott functor" TB which associates to each Hermitian V of dimension n the Grassmannian
=
of n-planes in V EB V, with distinguished point 1 V EB {OJ. Given an isometry W define TB(f) : TB(V) --+ TB(W) on a plane U by (TBI) (U) = ((fV)l.. EB {OJ) EB (f EB I)(U). The natural transformation WB is given by
f : V --+
WB(U, U') where T : V EB V EB V' EB V' an I.-functor, and clearly
= T(U EB U')
--+ V EB V' EB V EB V' is the obvious shufHe. This is TB (COO)
= BU.
It is shown in [63, p.16] that the induced infinite loop structure is the standard one of Bott. Now in parallel fashion one may define the Chow monoid functor Te by setting Tc(V) = en (JlD(V EB V» where n = dim(V) with distinguished point 1 = JlD(V EB {O}). In dimension 0 we set T {OJ = N with distinguished element 1. For an isometric embedding f : V -+ W, we define Te (f) : Tc(V) -+ Te (W) on a cycle c by
Te(f)c
= JlD (J(V).L EB {OJ) #(f EB I).(e).
The natural transformation We is given on cycles c, c' by
wc(e,c') = T.(e#c') with
T
as above. One sees that 00
Tc(C"') = V ~f
II V(d) d=O
180
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
where V(d) is the space of all degree d cycles (See (1.9)). One verifies that Te is an I.-functor and concludes the following (due to Boyer, Mann, Lima-Filho, Michelsohn and the author).
Theorem 4.3. ([7]). The stabilized cycle space V is an C-space where the structure maps are defined via the algebraic join pairing # : V(d) x V(d') -+ V(dd'). Furthermore, the infinite loop space structure induced on V(I) = BU agrees with the standard one 0/ Bott. Of course Te has values in abelian topological monoids. From this one can deduce that V is an Eoo-ring space in the sense of P. May [63]. Associated to V is an Eoo-ring spectrum. This quickly leads to a positive answer to (4.2). However in the spirit of the exposition here one can proceed as follows. Again in parallel with the above, we define an I.-functor Tz by setting
Tz(v)
= zn(JI»(V EEl V))
=
=
where n dim(V), and continuing as in the definition of Te. (Here Tc{O} Z with distinguished element 1). Note that Tz(V) is the naIve group completion of Te (V) and the limit 00
Tz (COO)
=Z =
II
Z(d)
d=-oo
is the additive group completion of V.
Theorem 4.4. ([7]). The natural map V -+ Z o/V into its additive group completion is a map 0/ C-spaces. In particular, the infinite loop structure induced by the complex join on Z(I) is such that the total Chern class map V(I) <-+ Z(I) is an infinite loop map. This also carries through for Real cycles and we have the following.
Theorem 4.5. ([7]). The multiplication on K(Z, 2*) and K(Z2, *) induced by the algebraic join enhances to an infinite loop structure with respect to which the maps (4.1) are infinite loop maps. Let MO(-) and MOO(-) denote the functors H 2·(_jZ) and H·(-jZ2) with the Grothendieck addition defined above.
Corollary 4.6. ([7]). The functors MO and MOo enhance to generalized cohomology theories M· and MO· such that the maps (4.1) extend to natural transformations and
w: ko·
-+ MO·.
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
181
This implies for example the existence of transfer· maps in cohomology which commute with c and w. It has been shown by Totaro [79] that the maps c and w cannot extend to natural transformations of multiplicative theories. §5. Equivariant Theories. It is natural to ask what happens in the constructions above if one introduces the action of a finite group. The very pleasant answer is that one finds a new equivariant cohomology theory with some very nice properties. To be more specific let G be a finite group, and to each finite-dimensional complex representation space V of G associate the cycle group
Tc(V)
= zn«IP'(V ® V))
where n
= dim (V)
as in section 4 above. This space has a natural action of G which respects the algebraic join pairing. It thereby gives us a "G-equivariant I.-functor". Now the theory of May has been carried through in this case [59], and we find the following. Let U = Vo EB Yo EB ... be the direct sum of infinitely many copies of the regular representation Yo of G, and consider the limiting G-space
(5.1)
ZG ~f ~ zn (IP'(V EB V)). VCU
Theorem 5.1. ([55], [56]). The cycle space ZG is a G-equivariant Eoo-ring space (in the sense 0/ [59]) and gives rise to an Eoo·ring G-spectrum. In particular it determines an equivariant cohomology theory 1l'G (.) which is ringvalued (and indexed by R(G)). This theory admits a naturol trons/ormation to a canonically associated theory 0/ Borel type
(5.2)
1l'G(.)
-t
where
ll~(~)Borel
ll'G(.)Borel
= II H'tj(·j Z) i~O
and where H'fj denotes the usual Borel equivariant cohomology. The component ZG(l), which is closed under the join #, determines a related equivariant cohomology theory M'G (.) which is only group-valued. It admits a naturol trons/ormation to its canonically associated "Borel counterpart" (5.3)
where M~(.)Borel
= 1 + II Hbi(.jZ) i~l
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
182
is the group
0/ units in llM. )Borel.
Remark 5.2. Given a G-spectrum S, we define the associated Borel Gspectrum to be SBorel = F (EG+, S), where F(X, Y) denotes the space of pointed G-maps from X to Y. This gives the "associated Borel theories" referred to in 5.1. We may now restrict our attention to the subspaces (5.4)
gn(IP'(V €a V))
c zn(IP'(V €a V)),
where n = dim(V),
of linear cycles, (i.e., the Grassmannians, which are contained in the degree-one component), together with the pairing given by the join which is simply the direct sum of subspaces. This is also a G-equivariant I.-functor. Hence the limiting space (5.5)
BUa
=!!!!l
gn(IP'(V €a V))
vcu
is the oth space of a canonically determined G-spectrum. This spectrum classifies reduced equivariant K-theory KG(.). The following theorem establishes, among other things, a solution of the equivariant Segal Problem (cf. (4.2)) for Borel cohomology. Theorem 5.3. ([55], [56]). The inclusion (5.4) determines a naturol trons/ormation 0/ equivariant cohomology theories
Composing with (5.9) gives a naturol trons/ormation to the associated Borel theory, which on the oth -level is the usual total Chern class map
Ka(X) ~ 1 +
II H'2j(X; Z) i~1
into Borel cohomology. This analogue of the results in §4 should have applications, for example, to the computation of Chern classes of induced representations.
a(.)
The ring functor ll is a new equivariant cohomology theory which arises quite naturally and may have some interesting uses. The coefficients of the theory have been computed in basic cases using techniques of degeneration via CZ-actions. (cf. [55], [56]). For example if G is abelian, then 1l~( pt) = JH[* (G)s where JH[* (G) is a ring functor on finite abelian groups such that (i) JHI.O (G) = Z and JH[1 (G) ~ G (ii) lHI* (G 1 Ell G 2 ) = lHI* (Gt) ® lHI* (G 2 ). (iii) If G is cyclic, then lHI* (G) = H2·(Gj Z).
183
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
and where S is the multiplicative system generated by the total Chern classes of the irreducible representations of G. Note. The discussion above provokes the interesting question of what functor is defined by taking the equivariant homotopy groups of Zo(X) for a Gspace X. Is there an equivariant Dold-Thom Theorem? The very nice answer, due to P.Lima-Filho, is that for G-spaces one gets Bredon cohomology with Z-coefficients, and for G-spectra one gets the ROG-graded homology with coefficients in the Burnside ring Mackey functor [92].
Chapter IV - The Functor L.H. The groups 11".Z. (X) constitute a set of interesting invariants attached to any projective variety X. Some work has been done recently in trying to systematically understand these invariants. At least part of this is presented below. Before embarking let me offer some general motivation. As we have seen, for any projective variety X, the p-dimensional subvarieties generate an interesting topological group Zp(X). This group is functorially related to X. Its geometry is a limit of the Chow sets of X. Specifically, we know from 1.8.2 that 1I"kZp(X)
= ~ 1I"kCp,Q(X)
and
HkZp(X)
= ~ HkCp,Q(X) Q
Q
for all k > O. In fact all "stable" topological invariants of the Chow sets of X are carried in this fashion by Zp(X). Now the homotopy type of Zp(X) is completely determined by the groups 1I"kZp(X), Such a statement is false for general spaces. However for an abelian topological group Z, the invariants 1I".Z are special. For example 1I".Z appears as primitive elements in the Hopf algebra H.(Zj Z). It can also be computed as the homology of the simplicial group Sing.(Z). So the groups 1I".Z are simpler than other invariants, like H.(Z), but nevertheless they determine Z up to homotopy equivalence. This makes 1I"kZp(X) natural to consider in studying Zp(X). It is useful to think of Zp(X) as a generalized torus associated to X, much like the intermediate Jacobians. In fact there is a homotopy equivalence Zp ~ Ap
X
(SI)b 1
X
(BS1)b 2
X
(B 2 S1)b 3 x· .. x Tor p
where Ap is the group of p-cycles on X modulo algebraic equivalence, bk = rank (1I"k Zp) , and Torp is a connected space with 1I"kTorp finite for all k. The various tori which are delooped in this picture can in fact be directly related to intermediate jacobians and their generalizations. From another perspective 1I".Z. is the direct analogue of 11".3. where 3.(X) denotes the rectifiable cycles on X. (cf. 11.5). Now by Almgren's theorem 11.5.1
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
184
there is an equivalence: 7r.3.(-)
= H*+.(-jZ).
This indicates that the functor 7r.Z. might behave like a homology theory on the category of projective varieties. In fact the map 7r.Z. -+ 7r.32. constitutes a natural transformation to standard integral homology. Thinking of 11". Z. in this way gives a systematic approach to the study of these invariants. Note however that 11".Z. is far from being a simple topological theory. For example, 7roZp is the group of algebraic p-cyc1es modulo algebraic equivalence. This already shows these groups to be non-trivially related to the algebraic structure of X. We shall see below that the theory in fact emcompasses many new algebraic invariants. §1. Definitions and basic properties. With the motivation above E. Friedlander introduced in [22] the groups (1.1) for k ~ 2p ~ O. Here k denotes the homology dimension, and p the algebraic level (the number of algebraic parameters). From the Algebniic Suspension Theorem 11.3.1 we have canonical isomorphisms (1.2) for all k
~
2p
~
O.
From 1.7.1 we see that L.H. is a functor on the category of projective varieties, i.e., if f : X -+ Y is a morphism, then there are induced homomorphisms (1.3) for all k
~
2p
~
0, and if 9 : Y -+ Z is another morphism, then
(1.4)
(g
0
f).
From 1.7.2 we have Gysin maps. If f are induced homomorphisms
= g. :X
0
f •.
-+ Y is a flat morphism, then there
(1.6) where r (1.7)
= dim X -
dim Y. If 9 : Y -+ Z is also flat, then (g
0
f)* =
r
0
g*.
Note. For those who are simplicially minded we note that the definition in (1.1) could be replaced by Hk_2pZp(X) where Zp(X) = NSing. (Zp(X)) is the normalized chain complex of the simplicial group Sing. (Zp(X)).
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
185
§2. The natural transforlDation to H.(.jZ). The continuous homomorphism
(2.1) defined in II.5 induces a map on homotopy groups which is independent of the choice of smooth triangulation. Applying Almgren's theorem 11.5.1 gives the following. TheorelD 2.1. There is a natuml tmnsfonnation of functors
(2.2) for all 0
~
2p
~
k.
Note that it is integml (not rational or real) homology that appears here. §3. Coefficients in Zm. In the preceeding two sections, one could replace 3. (X)/m3. (X) for a fixed integer m > O. This yields a functor
3.(X) with the quotient group
(3.1) with a natural transformation
(3.2) Most results discussed below will carry through in this case. §4.
R~lative
groups. Let Y
c
X be an algebraic subset of a projective variety
X. For each p, Zp(Y) is a closed subgroup of Zp(X) and we can consider the quotient group Zp(X)/Zp(Y) with the quotient topology. We set
(4.1)
for k ;::: 2p ;::: O. Then we have the following. TheorelD 4.1 ([47], [50], [51]). There is a long exact sequence
which is functorial for morphisms of pairs. This sequence tenninates with
where Ap denotes the group of p-cycles modulo algebmic equivalence.
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
186
§5. Localization. Fundamental results in the theory theorems of P. Lima-Filho.
ar~
the localization
Theorem 5.1 (Lima-Filho [50], [51]). Let X, X' be projective varieties with algebraic subsets Y C X and Y' C X', and suppose f:X-y~X'-Y'
is an isomorphism of quasi-projective varieties. Then there is a naturally induced isomorphism of groups
which is a homeomorphism. In particular there is a naturally induced isomorphism !!!! L.H* ( f. : L.H.(X, Y ) --t X' ,Y')
This theorem enables us to extend the theory to quasi-projective varieties. Definition 5.2. Let U C pN be a quasi-projective variety with closure U. Then we define the topological group of p-cyc1es on U to be the quotient
and we set for all k
~
2p
~
O.
By 5.1, Zp(U) and LpHk(U) are independent of the projective embedding of U. They are, in fact, functors on the category of quasi-projective varieties and proper morphisms. Furthermore, the following holds. Theorem 5.3. (Lima-Filho [50], [51]). Let V CUbe a Zariski open subset of a quasi-projective variety U. Then there is a long exact "localization" sequence:
From this one can inductively build a Zariski open covering and do computations. The proof of Theorem 5.1 uses strongly that one can work with the nai:ve group completion. The idea is as follows. Suppose r.p : X - Y -+ X' - Y' is an isomorphism. By replacing X with the closure of the graph of r.p in X x X' we can assume r.p extends to a morphism on X. One then has a well-defined map r.p. : Zp(X)/ Zp(Y) -+ Zp(X')/ Zp(yl), which a direct technical argument shows to be a homeomorphism.
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
187
The proof of Theorem 5.3 amounts to proving that a short exact sequence of groups is a principal fibration. Theorem 5.3 is quite useful. One can inductively build a space from a suitable open covering and apply the localization sequence step by step. In this way for example one can "untwist" the Suspension Theorem to get the following pretty result. Theorem 5.4. (Friedlander-Gabber [28]). Let U be a quasi-projective variety. Then algebraic suspension induces isomorphisms (5.1)
for all p ~ 2p ~ O. More generally if 11" : E -t U is an algebraic vector bundle of rank rover U, then the flat pull-back of cycles induces isomorphisms (5.2)
for all k
~
2p
~
O.
There is' a related "projective bundle theorem" which we will discuss soon. §6. Computations. With the results discussed thus far one can compute the groups L.H.(X) in a number of interesting cases. We begin with the following. A projective variety X is said to admit a cell-decomposition if there exists a nested family Xo C Xl C ... C XN = X of algebraic subsets with the property that X/c - XIc-1 is isomorphic to en. . for all k (where 0 = no ~ n1 ~ n2 ~ ••• ). Spaces of this type include : Grassmannians and in fact all generalized flag manifolds, hermitian symmetric spaces, and varieties on which a reductive group acts with isolated fixed points. Theorem 6.1. (Lima-Filho [50], [53]). Let X be a projective variety which admits a cell decomposition. Then the inclusion
is a homotopy equivalence and the natural transformation
is an isomorphism for all p
~
2p ~ O.
This represents a vast generalization of the fact that on such spaces every homology class is represented by an algebraic cycle unique up to algebraic equivalence. (This fact corresponds to the isomorphism 1ToZ. (X) ~ 1T032* (X)).
188
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
Of course such a result does not hold for general projective manifolds. It is precisely for this reason that the groups L.H. are interesting. A good example where it fails is a product of elliptic curves, or more generally any abelian variety. This follows directly from Hodge theory, since the homology class of an algebraic cycle is always of type (P,p). Other examples can be constructed from the following result (cf. (I.4.2)). Theorem 6.2 (Friedlander [22], [28]). Let X be a non-singular projective variety of dimension n. Then there are isomorphisms ~
Z, Ln-1H2n-1(X) ~ H 2n- 1(XjZ), Ln-1H2n-2(X) ~ H n-1,n-1(Xj Z) L n- 1H 2n (X)
and Ln-1Hk(X)
= NS(X)
= 0 for k > 2n.
This computes the groups completely for smooth algebraic surfaces. In [28] Friedlander and Gabber extend the Algebraic Suspension Theorem to a refined intersection theorem with divisors (cf. §8). This enabled them to prove the following "projective bundle theorem".
Theorem 6.3 (Friedlander-Gabber [28]). Let E be an algebraic vector bundle of rank r over a quasi- projective variety U. Then for each p ~ r - 1 there is a homotopy equivalence r-1 Zp(JlD(E))) ~ Zp-k(U)
II
k=O
where JlD(E) denotes the projectivization of the bundle E.
A direct consequence of localization and Theorem 6.2 is the following : Theorem 6.4. Let X be a smooth projective 3-fold. Then each of the groups L1Hk(X) for k ~ 6 is a birational invariant of X. It is not unreasonable to conjecture that LpHk(X) = 0 for all p > 2 dimc(X). This would be interesting if true. IT false, then in the first dimension for which it fails one finds non-trivial birational invariants.
§7. A local-to-global spectral sequence. By using the Localization Theorem of Lima-Filho (Theorem 5.3), Friedlander and Gabber are able to construct an analogue of Quillen's local-to-global spectral sequence in algebraic K-Theory [69]. Fix a quasi-projective variety X and, as before, let X(P) denote the set of p-dimensional subvarieties of X. For each x E X (P), set L;ii;.(x) ~f limucz LrHk(U)
189
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
where the limit is taken over all Zariski open subsets U of x. From the localization exact sequence one constructs an exact couple which yields the following. Propostion 7.1 ([28]). Let X be a quasi-projective variety and r ~ 0 an integer. Then there is a spectral sequence of homological type of the form :
E!,q
= E9
L--::H;:q(x) ~ LrHp+q(X).
zEX(p)
Following ideas of Quillen [69] and Bloch-Ogus [8]' one can compute the E2-term of this spectral sequence. Let Crllk denote the Zariski sheaf on X associated to the presheaf
Theorem 7.2 ([28]). Let X be a quasi-projective variety of dimension n, and fix 0::5 2r ::5 k. Then there is an exact sequence of sheaves on X :
0-+ Crllk -+
EBzEX(n) iz EBzEX(n-l) iz
(L,:H;(x») -+
(L~l (x») -+ ... -+
EB zEX (n-k+2r) iz
(£;ii;..(x») -+
0
where iz (:L,:':i'f;(x») denotes the constant sheaf:L,:':i'f;(x) on x extended by zero to all of X, and the spectral sequence of 7.1 has the form E~,q
= Hn-p (X, Crlln+Q)
~ LrHp+q(X).
§8. Intersection Theory. In [28] E. Friedlander and O. Gabber succeed in extending the Algebraic Suspension Theorem to a beautiful intersection pairing defined at the level of the groups Z.. (Recall that intersection theory is conventionally defined in the quotient A.. == Z. / ,..., of cycles modulo rational equivalence (cf. [34])). This pairing enables us to define a graded commutative ring structure on L .. H.(X) for X smooth. To begin suppose ED .:; X is a line bundle associated to a divisor Don X. Let i : X '-t ED be the inclusion as the zero-section. Then composing with the homotopy inverse in (5.2) gives a map (8.1)
This represents "intersection with D". In fact if one lets Cp(X, D) denote the effective p-cycles which meet D in dimension :5 p - 1, then the restriction of (8.1) to the naive group completion of Cp(X, D) is homotopic to the intersection product (8.2)
ct-+c·D
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
190
which is continuously defined as in [34]. It would be a sharper and more useful result to know that the image of the composition (8.1) consisted of cycles in the support IDI of D. In [28] this and much more are accomplished. We recall that an effective Cartier divisor on X is one which is defined by the vanishing of a regular section of a line bundle on X. Theorem 8.1 (Friedlander-Gabber [28]). Let D be an effective Cartier divisor on a quasi-projective variety X. Then for each p ~ 1 there is a canonical homotopy class of maps
which on the subgroup generated by Cp(X, D) is induced by the intersection map (8.2). The composition
( where iD : IDI <-+ X denotes the inclusion) depends only on the isomorphism class of the line bundle L = O(D). If D, D' are two such divisors then
and
Note 8.2. In [28] the authors work in the category of chain complexes localized with respect to quasi isomorphisms (maps of chain complexes inducing isomorphisms in homology). This makes the statements slightly neater and stronger. Note 8.3. Let p : IP'(E) -+ U be the projectivization of a bundle of rank r, and let LE denote the standard line bundle on IP'(E). Then the equivalence in the Projective Bundle Theorem 6.3 is given by r-l
L
k=O
r-l Cl
(L E )"
0
p. :
IT Zp_,,(U) ~ Zp(IP'(E)).
"=0
Note 8.4. The intersection pairing above leads to a general pairing Zp(X) " Div(X)+ -+ Zp-l (X) where, in the case that X is smooth, Div(X)+ £! ZI (X). The induced pairing on homotopy groups yields the operators cl(L) above (corresponding to elements L E 71'0 Div(X)+ ~ NS(X)), and also yields the operator 8 of Theorem 11.6.1 (corresponding to the generator of 71'2 Div(X)+ ~ Z).
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
191
Theorem 8.1 can be generalized from divisors to subvarieties of general codimension. Theorem 8.5. (Friedlander-Gabber [28]). Let X be a quasi-projective variety and iv : V <-t X a regular (closed) embedding of codimension-q. Then for all p ~ q there is a naturally defined homotopy class of mapping
This map has the property that on the subgroup generated by the effective cycles which meet V in proper dimension, it is homotopic to the intersection-theoretic mapping c I-t c . V. These maps behave as expected with respect to composition and flat pull-back of cycles, namely
. .)! (tv 0 lV'
·1 = tv' tv .1
0
and iL 0 g* = y*
v
if g: Y -+ X is flat and IT f
rI
<-t
y: V '!2y Xx V
0
i~
-+ V is the pull-back of 9 via iv.
: X -+ Y is a morphism of varieties where Y is smooth, then the inclusion X x Y of the graph of f into the product is a regular embedding. Theorem
8.5 thereby leads to the following basic result. Theorem 8.6 (The Intersection Pairing, Friedlander-Gabber [28]).
Let
f : X -+ Y be a morphism of quasi-projective varieties where Y is smooth and of dimension n. Then if p + p' ~ n, f determines a natural pairing
In particular when X is smooth and of dimension n, one obtains a pairing (8.3)
which extends, up to homotopy, the usual intersection pairing on cycles which meet in proper dimension. This pairing is homotopy commutative and associative. Corollary 8.7. For any smooth quasi-projective variety X, the pairing L.H.(X) ® L.H.(X) --+ L.H.(X) induced by (8.3) gives L.H.(X) the structure of a bigraded commutative ring. Restricted to
EB LpH2p(X) (= cycles modulo algebraic equivalence), this is p
the standard ring structure given by intersection product.
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
192
§9. Operations and filtrations. Using the complex join and the Suspension Theorem, E. Friedlander and B. Mazur [29] have introduced a ring of operators on L.H.. These operators lead to filtrations [29], [30], [23] which are compatible with, and conjecturally equal to certain standard filtrations. Throughout this section X will denote a projective variety with a fixed embedding X C IP'N. The Algebraic Suspension Theorem gives us canonical isomorphisms
Hence, we can extend our groups LpHk(X) to negative indices by setting (9.1)
for all k ~ 2p. We saw in Chapter 11.5 that L.H.. (X) is a bigraded module over the ring (9.2)
where (9.3)
are the additive generators. These homomorphisms are functorial, i.e., they are natural transformations of L.H. on the category of projective subvarieties and polorization-preserving morphisms. They constitute therefore a ring of "homology operations" which we call Friedlander-Mazur operations. The first operator h is an operator of Lefschetz type. In fact under the natural transformation c) of §2 we have a commutative diagram h
LpHk(X) ---+ Lp- 1 Hk-2(X) c)
.l.
,j,
c)
Hk(XjZ) ~ Hk-2(XjZ) where A is the Lefschetz map given by cap-product with the hyperplane class C1 (Ox (1)) (See [52], [29]). This operator h evidently depends on the projective embedding since A does. We recall that if X is smooth of dimension n, then Ak : Hn+k (X j Q) -t Hn-k (X j Q) is an isomorphism. The second operator s is a special feature of this theory. It preserves homology degree and lowers algebraic level. In fact we have commutative diagrams (cf. [23])
Hk(XjZ)
for all p and k. Note in particular that
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
193
Theorem 9.1. The operation 8 of Friedlander and Mazur is a natural transformation of covariant functors. In particular it is independent of projective embedding and is also compatible with fiat pull-back of cycles and localization.
Work on the operation s developed as follows. It was introduced in [29] where it was proved that s1' : L1'H21'(X) ~ A1'(X) -t H 21' (Xj Z) is the "cycle map" which associates to an algebraic cycle (modulo algebraic equivalence) its homology class. In [52] Lima-Filho generalized this to prove that the map s1' : L1'Hk(X) -t Hk(XjZ), for any k ~ 2p, agrees with Almgren's map ([1]) and, in particular, is independent of the projective embeddings of X. Friedlander and Gabber [28] then proved that every s: L1'Hk(X) -t L1'-1Hk(X) is independent of projective embedding. In [23], Friedlander established a number of interesting properties and interpretations of this operation, some of which involve the intersection theory discussed above. Now the powers of s give rise to very interesting filtrations. Consider the case where k = 2p is even. We have the sequence of homomorphisms
(9.4)
where A1' denotes the group of algebraic p-cycles modulo algebraic equivalence. This gives us two filtrations
(9.5) (9.6)
defined by setting.
(9.7)
and
on A1' and in H21' (Xj Z) respectively. There are of course filtrations induced in the intermediate groups LjH21'(X) as well. However the filtrations above are on classically defined groups and can be compared with well-known filtrations. Note that 9",1' is the Griffiths group of p-cycles homologically equivalent to zero modulo those algebraically equivalent to zero. There is a filtration of this group due to Bloch and Ogus defined by setting
9:'? = {c E A1':
c is hamologous to zero in an algebraic subset of dimension ~ p + 1 + j EX}.
There is an analogus geometric filtration on H21'(Xj Z) defined by setting .rg~j
= span{a E H 21' (Xj Z):
a is the image of a class supported on an algebraic subset of dimension ~ 2p - j EX}.
Over Q this is the dual of Grothendieck's arithmetic filtration: on H2 1' (Xj Q). The following basic results have been proved.
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
194
Theorem 9.2 (Friedlander [23]). For any projective variety X, we have
gp,; ~ g:'7 for all p,j. Theorem 9.3 (Friedlander-Mazur [29], [30]). For any projective variety X, we have
:F2p,; ~ :F2~~; for all p, j. Furthennore, the analogous result holds on odd-degree cohomology groups. Theorems 9.2 and 9.3 are in fact proved in a much stronger form. It is shown that the filtrations gp,. and :F2p,. coincide with certain geometrically defined filtrations. More specifically, in [30] one associates to a morphism f : Y --+ Cp(X) from any projective variety Y, an induced Chow correspondence homomorphism ~I : H .. (Yj Z) --+ H2p+.(Xj Z) which generalizes very classical constructions. Let :Ffp,; C H2p+;(Xj Z) be the subgroup generated by the images of all such maps. Then in [30] it is proved that
:F2p';
= ;Ffp,;.
This shows that Friedlander's functor L .. H .. , which is close to ordinary homology theory, has the property that its homologically and geometrically defined filtrations coincide. There is an analogous story for
g.. ,... In
[23] it is proved that the subgroup where f : Y --+ Cp-k(X) and c is an algebraic p-cycle homologous to zero on the projective variety Y.
gp,; is generated by cycles of the form
~/(c),
It is a classical result that the geometric filtration is subordinate to the Hodge filtration (as strengthened by Grothendieck in [39]). In particular, if X is smooth we can define
:Ft!,; = Pel (
EB
Hr,s(X))
Ir-sl:S2(p-;)
where Pc : H2p (Xj Z) -+ H2p (Xj C) is the coefficient homomorphism, and the decomposition H2p(Xj C)
=
EB
Hr,s(X) is dual to the standard Dolbeault
r+s=2p
decomposition of H 2p(XjC). Define :Fg,5 C :Fg,,; to be the pull-back by pc of a maximal Hodge substructure. (See [49] for a nice discussion.) A special consequence of the above is that
Question 9.4. Does one have equality in 9.2 and 9.3 when X is a !lmooth projective variety?
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
195
It turns out this is not so unreasonable to ask. Theorem 9.5 (Friedlander [23]). If Grothendieck's standard conjecture B holds (cf. [38]) then for a smooth projective variety X, F2Plj
®Q
= .rg,~j ® Q
for all P and j. More modestly one might ask for an example where the filtrations Fp,j and Fp,j, consider a product of elliptic curves X = Tl X ••• x Tn. For each sequence (PI, ... ,Pn) of zeros and ones with Epj = P we have a map
9p ,j are at least non-trivial. For the case
ZPl (Td A ... A Zp" (Tn)
---+ Zp(X)
inducing a map
where E k j = k. This map commutes with the natural transformation «I> giving a diagram
(Sl;=l H"i (Tj; Z) ---+ H" (X; Z) from which one can deduce that in this case the filtrations :F.,. and and coincide with the trancendental Hodge filtration.
.r;:! agree
The non-triviality of the filtration 9. ,• is related to recent work of M. Nori, [67]. For smooth varieties X, Nori introduces a filtration on Ap(X) which he proves to be non-trivial on certain projective hypersurfaces. It is shown in [23] that 9:'j C 9p ,j, in fact 9:'j is generated in the same fashion as 9p ,j, by Chow correspondence homomorphisms associated to maps f : Y ---+ Cp _ j (X) where Y is now assumed to be smooth.
9:'.
For the motivically minded, one should mention that there is an intriguing spectral sequence of homology type defined in [23], which incorporates both filtrations F and 9. Its abutment is the associated graded of H*(X; Z) with respect to the :F-filtration, and there are isomorphisms E~;~1 ~ Ap /9p ,,,. §10. Mixed Hodge Structures. It is a fundamental and useful fact that the groups LpH" (X) ®Q carry mixed Hodge structures. This fact, due to Dick Hain, was exploited for example in the work of Friedlander and Mazur mentioned in the previous section. We recall that a Mixed Hodge Structure over Q is a finite dimensional vector space W over Q provided with an increasing weight filtration
196
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
and a decreasing Hodge filtration of the space We
= W ®Q C
···Fi- 1 ;2 Fi;2 Fi- 1 ;2'"
so that (W. ® C, F. , F.) form a triple of opposing filtrations (cf. [15], (1.2.7) and (1.2.13).). A morphism of mixed Hodge structures is a linear map of rational vector spaces which is filtration preserving. The mixed Hodge structures form an abelian category MHS which is closed under tensor products. One can expand this category to include infinite dimensional vector spaces which are direct limits in MHS, with morphisms which are direct limits of morphisms from MHS. This is again an abelian category called limits of mixed Hodge structures and denoted LMHS (See [40], [41]). Deligne showed that the functor X
I-t
Hk(X; Q) takes values in MHS.
Theorem 10.1 (Dick Hain). The functors LpHk(X)®Q take values in LMHS. In other words each group LpHk (X) ® Q is naturally equipped with a direct limit of mixed Hodge structures, which is respected by the maps induced by mOFphisms of varieties. The idea of the proof, which is given in [29], is that the groups Hi (Zp(X); Q) = ~ Hi (Cp,cr(X); Q) cr
are naturally limits of mixed Hodge structures, and the homotopy groups 7r.Zp (X)® Q can be identified with the primitive elements in the Hopf algebra H. (Zp (X); Q). Since LMHS is an abelian category, the subspace of primitive elements, which the kernel of the morphism
given by a
I-t
A.(a) - a ® 1-1 ® a, is also in LMHS.
Theorem 10.2 (Friedlander-Mazur [29]). The operators 8 and h on L.H. (X)® Q, which are discussed in §9 above, respect the (limits of) mixed Hodge structures. In particular, the natural transformation 4» : LpHk(X) ® Q ~ Hk(X; Q) is a transformation of functors with values in LMHS. §1l. Chern classes for higher algebraic K-theory. Friedlander and Gabber have defined Chern classes for the higher algebraic K-groups of a variety which have values in L.H.. One of the key steps is to replace a projective variety X by an "equivalent" affine variety, i.e., an affine variety with the same K-theory and LH-theory. This affine variety, whose construction is due to Jouanolou, is the total space of an affine em-bundle 7r : Jx ~ X. If X C lPN, then J x is merely the restriction of 7r : JpN ~ lPN defined as follows. Let
JpN
= {A E MN+l,N+l
: A2
=A
and
rankA
= I}
where MN+l,N+l is the space of (N + 1) x (N + 1) complex matrices. This is defined in C(N+l)3 by the vanishing of the 2 x 2 minors and the equation
197
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
=
TrA 1 ; hence it is an affine variety. We set n(A) that the fibres are affine subspaces.
=
Im(A) ErN, and note
Now since Jx is an affine variety, it is of the form Spec R where R is the ring offunctions on Jx. Quillen shows that the map K.(X) -+ K.(Spec R) = n.(BGL(R)+) is an isomorphism. The homotopy property (cf. Theorem 5.4) which comes from the Suspension Theorem and Localization, give an isomorphism L.H.(X) -+ L.H.(Spec R) (with a shift in degrees). The Projective Bundle Theorem (cf. 8.3) and ideas of Grothendieck, lead to the following. Theorem 11.1 (Friedlander-Gabber [28]). Let X be a smooth, n-dimensional quasi-projective variety. Then for all j > 0 and all i with 0 ~ i ~ n, there exist natumlly constructed Chern classes
§12. Relation to Bloch's higher Chow groups. In [5] Spencer Bloch introduced higher Chow groups for a quasi- projective variety as follows. For each k ~ 0 consider the "algebraic simplex" Ie
~[k]
= {Z E CH1
: :LZj
= I}
j=O
with combinatorial structure given as in the real case (Le., "faces" are defined by intersections with coordinate planes). For a quasi-projective variety X, let zq(X, k) denote the free abelian group generated by irreducible subvarieties of codimension-q on X x ~[k] which meet X x F in proper dimension for each face F of ~[k]. Using intersection and pull-back of cycles, one defines face and degeneracy relations in the standard way, making zq(X, *) a simplicial abelian group. Let Izq(X,*)1 denote its geometric realization, and let (:zq(X,*),8) denote the chain complex naturally associated to zq(X, *) using the additive structure of each zq(X, *). Then by definition we have
Theorem 12.1 (Friedlander-Gabber [28]). Let X be a quasi-projective variety of dimension n. Then there exist natuml homomorphisms CHn-P(X, k) ---+ L p H 2p+k(X)
for all 0
~
p :5 n and all k.
This map is induced by a map zn- p -+ Zp in the derived category of chain complexes associated to simplicial abelian groups. When X is smooth and projective they show that Zl(X, *) ® ('Ljm) and Zn-l(X) ® ('Ljm) are quasiisomorphic for any integer m > O.
198
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
§13. The theory for varieties defined over fields of positive characteristic. The discussion in this article has been intentionally restricted to complex varieties. Nevertheless for many results stated above there are analogues which hold for varieties defined over arbitrary algebraically closed fields. This highly non-trivial achievement is due to Eric Friedlander. The reader should see the announcement [21] and the main paper [22] for details. Very roughly the main ideas are these. Suppose X is defined over a field of characteristic p ~ 0 and L is a prime :I p. Then the Chow monoids Cr(X) are well defined, and one can construct group completions OBCr(X)l via etale homotopy theory. Taking 11'. gives L-adic.homology groups which we shall denote by LrHk(X}t. When 2r = k, this is the group of algebraic equivalence classes of r-cycles ; and when r = 0 it is isomorphic to the kth etale l-adic homology group of X. IT X is defined over C, this group is just the tensor product of LrHk(X) with the L-adic integers. It is proved in [22] that the Algebraic Suspension Theorem is valid for L.H.(X)l, and the Friedlander-Mazur operations are defined. The map sp : LpH2p(X)l -+ LoH2p(X)l = limn H2p (Xet , 'L/.en), for p > 0, is just the cycle map. One has filtrations and mixed Hodge structures as in §§9-10 above.
One of the nice features of these groups is that they are Galois modules. Suppose X is defined over a field F and is provided with an embedding X C PW. Let K be the algebraic closure of F. Then Gal(K/F) acts naturally on L.H.(XK)l, and the operations and cycle maps discused above are all Gal(K/ F)-equivariant. So also are the maps f. : L.H.(XK)l -+ L.H.(YK)l induced by a morphism f : X -+ Y of varieties over F. §14. New directions. There have been some recent enhancements of the above LH-constructions which are both algebraically and geometrically more sophisticated but, of course, less manageable than the basic theory. The first is due to Friedlander and Gabber [28] who construct functorial spaces where 11'0 gives algebraic cycles modulo rational equivalence instead of the coarser algebraic equivalence. Their theory is therefore a "rational equivalence analogue" of LH-theory. The basic idea is to consider the simplicial monoid .rp(X) = M or(a[.], Cp(X)) where ark] is the algebraic simplex mentioned in §12 above. In the case p = 0, this becomes the Suslin complex .ro(X) = SUB.(X) of algebraic singular chains of the infinite symmetric product of X. It has recently been shown by Suslin and Voevodsky [76] that for all n,
H.(SU8.(X)j 'L/n)
~
H.(Xj 'L/n),
giving an algebraic computation of the singular homology of the variety. Furthermore the result extends to higher dimensional cycles to prove that
H.(Fp(X)j 'LIn)
~
LpH.(Xj 'LIn),
for all p ~ O. (See [24], [76].) In [24] the groups H.(Fp(X)) are computed for dim(X) - 1.
p =
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
199
The rational theory of Friedlander-Gabber actually has a bivariant formulation in analogy with the constructions of the next section (see [90]). There has also recently been work of P. Gajer aimed at constructing intersection versions of L.H.(X). He has found workable definitions and has succeeded in formulating and proving an intersection homology version of the Dold-Thom Theorem [36]. P.Gajer and C.Flannery have also established the LH-groups [87], [91].
Chapter V - The Functor L· H* (Morphic Cohomology) Recently E. Friedlander and the author [31], [32] introduced the notion of an effective algebraic co cycle on a variety X as a morphism
(1.1) for all i,j ~ 0, where 3j(X) is the group of integral j-cycles on X. Here the doubly indexed family of groups 1Ti3j(X) collapse redundantly to the homology of X. However, if X is a projective variety and we replace 3i(X) by algebraic cycles Zi(X), then the groups 1TiZj(X) pull apart to become the distinct functors examined in the last section. There is a parallel story for cohomology. For any finite complex X, there are natural isomorphisms (1.2) for all 0 ~ i ~ j, giving redundant representations of cohomology. (The case i = 0 is discussed in Chapter I. (See (1.3.6». Now the results in the section above give us algebraic models for Eilenberg-MacLane spaces, namely K(Z, 2j) ~ Zi (C') for any n ~ j. Thus, if X is an algebraic variety, one can replace "Map" in (1.2) with "Mor" , and hope by analogy to find a doubly indexed family of groups with a natural transformation to ordinary integral cohomology. This leads us to the following basic definition. Throughout this section we shall use the term variety to mean a quasi-projective variety. For reasons of
200
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
exposition we shall a8sume our varieties X to be weakly normal. (The general Ca8e follows ea8ily since weak normalization is a functor; cf. [32]). Definition 1.1. An effective algebraic 8-cocycle on a variety X with values in a projective subvariety Y is a morphism
ep : X -+ CB(y). Note that such a morphism represents a family of codimension -8 cycles on Y parametrized by X. These families occur naturally and abundantly in algebraic geometry. They are in fact a8 abundant a8 cycles themselves. The following are examples of cla8sical synthetic constructions that naturally yield cocycles. Example 1.2. Let f : Y -+ X be a Hat morphism. Then the Hat pull-back ep(x) = f-l({x}) of cycles gives a morphism
ep : X -+ CB(y) where 8 = dim(X). As special case considers "Noether normalization"
f : yn -+
pn defined by a generic linear projection of yn C pN onto a linear subspace of the same dimension. This gives an n-cocycle ep : pn -+ Spd(y) where d =
degree (Y). Composing with
f yields a cocycle rep : Y -+ Spd(y).
Example 1.3. Let X C pN be a smooth hypersurface and suppose Y C pN is a subvariety which does not lie in any hyperplane. Then we define
by the intersection-theoretic product
ep(x)
= TzX . Y
of Y with the tangent hyperplanes to X. Interesting cases arise by choosing Y=X. Example 1.4. Let X, y, Z C pN be subvarieties such that for all x EX, the cone "f.zZ on Z with vertex x meets Y in proper dimension. Then we can define
ep(x)
= ("f.zZ) . y.
Example 1.5. Let X C pN be any subvariety of dimension n and define an "Alexander dual" co cycle
by setting
epx(u) =
T-uX.
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
Example 1.6. Let A = YeA, define by cp(a)
201
eN / A be an abelian variety with a-divisor D..
Given
= (a+ D)· Y.
Many similar constructions are clearly possible. An interesting consequence of the theory we are about to describe is that to every algebraic cocycle there is naturally associated an integral cohomology class just as to every algebraic cycle we can associate an integral homology class. §2. Morphic cohomology. Let X and Y be as in 1.1, and denote by
the set of effective algebraic s-cocycles on X with values in Y. We provide this mapping space with the topology of uniform convergence on compact of families of bounded degree (i.e., families mapping into compact subsets of a· (Y)). This makes as (X j Y) an abelian topological monoid.
as
as
Any cocycle cp E (X j Y) can be "graphed" to give a cycle r'P E (X x Y). We let GOS(X x Y) denote the submonoid of cycles in OB(X x Y) which are equidimensional over X, i.e., cycles c such that supp(c) n ({x} x Y) is of pure codimension s for all x EX. Then we have the following. Theorem 2.1. ([32]). If X is locally irreducible (e.g., smooth), then the graphing map is a homeomorphism.
Recall that the homotopy-theoretic group completion of an abelian topological monoid M is defined to be M+ = OBM. (See 1.8 above and [62].) Definition 2.2. For X and Y as above, let ZS(Xj Y) = OB(X, Y)+ and define the morphic cohomology groups of X with values in Y by
LB Hk(Xj Y) for all k
~
= 1l"2s_k 08 (Xj Y)
2s.
Theorem 2.3. (The Algebraic Suspension Theorem for Co cycles [32]) The algebraic suspension map
is a homotopy equivalence.
Note that when X = )po, morphic cohomology reduces to L .. H .. (Y), and Theorem 2.3 is just the Suspension Theorem of Chapter II. The argnment outlined there essentially carries over to the more general case above.
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
202
Here we are interested principally in the case where X is non-trivial and
y
= ~nlP'0 = IP'n.
Definition 2.4. For n ~ slet ZS(Xjen) be the (homotopy) quotient
(cf. [32]) and define the morphic cohomology groups of X by LBHk(X) = 1l"2B_k ZB (Xjen)
for k
~
2s.
Theorem 2.3 gives canonical homotopy equivalences: ZS (Xj en) ~ Z· (Xj en+1)
for all n ~ s, and so the definition of L* H*(X) is independent of n. Note that Z· (X j en) can be roughly thought of as families of affine varieties 01 codimensions pammetrized by X. We note that, as with cycles, it is possible to replace the homotopy-theoretic group completion above with the naive topological group completion. Details of this equivalence appear in [33] and [88]. In the remaining sections we sketch the principal features of morphic cohomology theory established in [32]. §3. Functoriality. Morphic cohomology is a functor on the category of quasiprojective varieties and morphisms. In particular to each morphisms 1 : X --+ X', there is an associated graded group homomorphism (3.1)
r :L* H*(X') -+ L* H*(X)
of bidegree (0,0), given by the obvious pull-back of cocycles. H 9 : X' --+ X" is a morphism on X', then (g 0 f)* = 0 g*.
r
Furthermore if 1 : X -+ X' is a flat proper map of fibre dimension d, then there are induced Gysin "wrong way" maps (3.2)
I! : L* H*(X) -+ L* H*(X')
of bidegree (d,2d). These satisfy the composition law:
§4. Ring structure. There is a natural biadditive pairing ZB (X j en) A Zs' (X j en')
-+ zs+s' (X j en+ n ' +1)
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
203
induced by the pointwise join
(cp#cp')(x)
= cp(x)#cp'(x)
of effective cocycles. Taking homotopy groups gives a pairing LB Hk(X) ® L S ' H k' (X) ~ L B+B'HHk' (X)
which makes the morphic cohomology L* H* (X) of X a bigraded commutative ring. With respect to this the naturally induced maps (3.1) are ring homomorphisms. §5. The natural transformation to H*(.jZ). Passing from morphisms to general continuous maps gives a natural transformation
of functors of all k ~ 2s which carries the join-induced product to the cup product. That is, for each variety X, ~ : L* H*(X) ~ H*(Xj Z) is a homomorphism of rings. For any polarized projective variety Y there is also a natural transformation of functors in X: k
(5.2)
'" "'-' '. LBHk(X', Y)
-----'~
ffi Hi (X j Ll2m-(k-i) IT Y) W i=O
where m
= dime Y
and Hj(Y)
= Hj(Yj Z).
§6. Operations and filtrations. The algebraic join of co cycles induces an exterior product (6.1)
L*H*(XjY) ®L*H*(X'jY') ~ L*H*(X x X'jY#Y')
in morphic cohomology. The Algebraic Suspension Theorem 2.3 gives us canonpO and ical isomorphisms L*H*(Xjy#pn) ~ L*H*(XjY). Thus when X, Y' = pn, the product (6.1) induces an action of the algebra
=
:FM
= L* H* (pOj pO)
~
Z[ h, s]
of Friedlander-Mazur operations (cf. 1.6 and IV.9), where
are the additive generators in these bidegrees. These operations are functorial. For any variety X and polarized variety Y there is a commutative diagram L*H*CXjY)
Tl
~ L*H*(XjY)
lT
H*CXjH*(Y)) ~ H*(XjH*(Y))
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
204
where A denotes cap product with the hyperplane class of Y on the coefficients H*(Y). There is also a commutative diagram L*H*(XjY)
L*H*(XjY)
/~
~'\,
H*(Xj H*(Y))
If we pass to the morphic cohomology groups L* H*(X), the operation h becomes zero. However, we retain the interesting operation L* H*(Xj Y) ~ L* H*(Xj Y)
which with respect to the natural transformation ~ gives commutatives triangles
(6.2) for all 0 ~ k ~ 2s. Thus for any variety X, the morphic cohomology is naturally a module over F Mo == IE [s]. It is shown that the product in L * H* (X) is F Mobilinear, i.e., it has the property that s(a . b) = (sa) . b = a· (sb) for all a, bE L* H*(X). Thus we have
Theorem 6.1 ([32]). For any variety X the morphic cohomology L* H*(X) is a graded commutative F Mo-algebra natural with respect to morphisms
f: X'-+ X.
Observe now that the operator s gives a sequence of homomorphisms (6.3) which commute with the natural transformation ~ to Hk (X j IE). Thus if we set
FB ~f ~ (LB Hk(X)) we obtain from (6.3) a filtration (6.4)
of the integral cohomology of X, where
FQ Theorem 6.2 ([32]).
So
= [(k + 1)/2].
Set
= FB ®Q C Hk(XjQ).
The filtration FQ is subordinate to the refined Hodge
filtration.
The refined Hodge filtration is defined at level s to be the maximal rational subspace of
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
205
which is a sub-Hodge-structure. Both exterior product and cup product in H*(Xj Z) respect the filtration
:Fe. §7. Computations at level!. Recall that for a projective variety X, there is a classically defined Picard group Pic(X) which consists of isomorphism classes of line bundles on X under tensor product. There is a short exact sequence
o -+ PicO(X) -+ Pic(X) -+ N S(X) -+ 0 where Pic°(X) is the identity component and NS(X) is the Neron-Severi group of algebraic equivalence classes of line bundles on X. Theorem 7.1 ([32]). For any projective variety X there is a natural homotopy
equivalence
Zl(X)
~
Pic(X) x lP"X>.
If X is smooth, then: 1) L1 HO(X) ~ Z, 2) If>: L1H1(X).=t H1(XjZ) is an isomorphism, 3) L1 H2(X) ~ NS(X),
4) with respect to 3), the natural transformation
is the first Chem class, and 5) L1Hk(X) = 0 for k > 2. As a consequence of 3) above we have the naturally defined Lefschetz operators L: LB Hk(X) -+ LB+l Hk+2(X) given by multiplication by the class of a fixed, very ample line bundle in L1 H2(X). By 4) above, this map transforms under If> to the standard Lefschetz opertor, given by multiplication by C1 (L). Theorem 7.1 together with the inner and other products, gives the existence of many non-trivial groups L* H*(X). For example, L* H* (IP'n) -+ H* (IP'nj Z) is surjective. This is true also for abelian varieties. Moreover, the :Fe and Hodge filtrations agree for products of elliptic curves. §8. Chern classes. Let X be a variety and denote by Vect~(X) the equivalence classes of rank-q algebraic vector bundles which are generated by their global cross-sections. This space can be identified with 11'0 of the space ~
Mor (X, gq (IP'n»
n
When gq (11m) is the Grassmannian of co dimension -q planes in IP'n. Using results discussed in IlL!, one can define Chern classes for such bundles in morphic cohomology.
206
Theorem 8.1 ([32]). functors
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
For any q
> o there
is a natural transformation of
q
Vec4(X)
~ EBL'H 2,(X) ,=0
with the property that q
Vect~(X)
~ EBH 2'(XjZ) 8=0
is the standard total Chern class.
§9. An existence theorem. Using 8.1 and results of Grothendieck one can prove the following. Theorem 9.1 ([32]). Let X be a smooth projective variety. Then every class in H2* (X j Q) which is Poincare dual to the homology class of a (rational) algebraic cycle is represented by a rational linear combination of effective algebraic cocycles.
In other words at the level of rational cohomology there are at least as many algebraic co cycles as there are algebraic cycles. In the next section we shall discuss an even stronger theorem, namely Poincare duality at the level of L *H* . §10. A Kronecker pairing with L.H*. It is shown in [32] that for any projective variety X there is a pairing
whenever 2p ::; k ::; 2s,
which when p = 0 carries over, under the natural transformation ~, to the standard Kronecker pairing Hk(Xj Z) ® Hk(Xj Z) -+ Z. In the next section we examine an even more striking pairing betwen these theories.
Chapter VI - Duality It is an striking fact the two theories L.H. and L* H· whose definitions are so completely different (one in terms of cycles and other in terms of morphsims) actually admit a Poincare duality map which carries over under the natural transformations cJ> to the standard Poincare duality map. For smooth varieties this map is an isomorphism!
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
207
§1. Definition. The duality map is generated in an deceptively simple fashion. Suppose X and Y are projective varieties. Then for each s, a 5 s 5 dimc(Y), there is a natural inclusion
(1.1) as the submonoid of codimension-s cycles on X x Y which are equidimensional over X. (See V.2.1). This engenders a map
ZS(XjY)
(1.2)
---4
ZS(X x Y)
of group completions. Suppose now that Y
= c,N,
i.e., consider the two cases Y
= IP'N and Y =
IP'N-l and pass to a quotient. Then (1.2) yields a map
(1.3) where n = dimc(X), and the homotopy equivalence on the right comes from the Algebraic Suspension Theorem: Zp(X) 5:!!! ZP+l(X x C). (See 11.1 and IV. 5). Taking 1I"2s-k in (1.3) gives a Duality homomorphism
which is defined in [33], where the following is proved. Theorem 1.1 ([33]). For any projective variety X of dimension n, the natural transformations to singular theory give a commutative diagram
UHk(X) ~ L n- sH2n-k(X)
~l Hk(Xj Z) ~
l~ H 2n -k(Xj Z)
where'D is the standard Poincare duality map (given by cap product with the fundamental class of X.) §2. The duality isomorphism: L* H* ~ L n - .. H 2n above lead to the following conjecture.
••
The considerations
Conjecture 2.1 (Friedlander-Lawson). For X and Y smooth and projective, the map {1.2} is a homotopy equivalence. E. Friedlander and the author verified this in several cases, including the case 8 = 1. Ofer Gabber then suggested that a general proof could be obtained from a good version of the Chow Moving Lemma for Families. Such a Moving Lemma has now been proved by Friedlander and the author [89]. The result has some independent interest. It holds over arbitrary infinite fields, and applies to
208
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
classical questions concerning the Chow ring. More importantly here, it leads to the following result. Theorem 2.2 ([33]). Conjecture 2.1 is true. In particular, for any smooth projective variety X of dimension n, the duality map
is an isomorphism for all k
~
2s.
An analogous duality result holds for quasi-projective varieties. Details of this appear in [88]. This result has a number of non-obvious consequences. Note for example the isomorphism L S H2s(X) ~ L n - s H 2(n-s) (X) = An-s which relates families of affine varieties over X to cycles modulo algebraic equivalence inside X. Note also that this gives a complete computation of morphic cohomology for a number of spaces, including all generalized flag manifolds (pr'ojective spaces, Grassmannians, etc., c.f. IV.6.l.). In particular, for such spaces we have isomorphisms
for all k,8 with 28
~
k, and the transformations
ZS(X;C') --+ Map(X,ZB(C')) are homotopy equivalences for all n
~
s.
Another consequence of duality is that it gives rise to Gysin "wrong way" maps of L· H· and L.H. for general morphisms between smooth varieties. Such maps were constructed in [28]. Here however the maps have additional naturality properties which have importance for applications of the theory. REFERENCES
[1]
Almgren, F.J. Jr.,Homotopy groups of the integral cycle groups, Topology 1 (1962), 257-299. [2] Atiyah, M.F.,K-theory and reality, Quart. J. Math. Oxford (2), 17 (1966), 367-386. [3] Atiyah M F. and Jones J. D., Topological aspects of Yang-Mills theory, Comm. Math. Phy. 61 (1978), 97-118. [4] Atiyah M.F. and MacDonald I., Commutative Algebra, Addison-Wesley, London, 1969. [5] Bloch, S., Algebraic cycles and higher K-theory, Adv. Math. 61 (1986), 267-304.
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
[6]
209
Barlet, D., Espace analytique reduit des cycles analytiques complexes compacts d'un espace analytique complex de dimension finie. pages 1-158 Fonctions de plusieurs variables complexes II. (Seminaire F. Norguet 74/75) Lectures Notes in Math Vol. 482, Springer, Berlin, 1975.
[7] Boyer, C.P., Lawson, Jr H.B., Lima-Filho, P., Mann, B., and Michel-
[8] [9] [10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15] [16] [17]
[18] [19] [20] [21]
[22] [23]
sohn, M.-L .., Algebraic cycless and infinite loop spaces, Invent. Math., 113 (1993), 373-388. Bloch, S and Ogus, A.,Gerten's conjecture and the homology of schemes, Ann. Scient. Ecole Norm. Sup. (4e) 7 (1974), 181-202. Bott, R., The space of loops on a Lie group, Michigan Math. J. 5 (1958), 35-61. _ _ , The stable homotopy of the classical groups, Ann. of Math. 70 (1959), 179-203. Boyer, C.P., Hurtubise, J.C., Mann, B.M., and Milgram, R.J., The Topology of Instanton Moduli Spaces I: The Atiyah-Jones Conjecture, Ann. of Math., 137 (1993), 561-609. Cohen, F.R., Cohen, R.L., Mann, B.M. and Milgram, R.J., The Topology of Rational Functions and Divisors of Surfaces, Acta Math. 166(3) (1991), 163-221. Chow, W.-L., On the equivalence classes of cycles in an algebraic variety, Ann. of Math. 64 (1956),450-479. Chow, W.-L. and van der Waerden B.L., Zur algebraischen geometrie, IX: mer sugerordnete Formen und algebraische Systeme von algebraischen Mannigfaltigkeiten, Math. Ann. 113 (1937), 692-704. Deligne, P. , Theorie de Hodge II and III, Publ. Math. IHES 40 (1971), 5-58 and 44 (1975) 5-77. de Rham G., VarieUs DifJerentiables, Hermann, Paris, 1960. Dold, A. and Thom, R., Une generalisation de la notion d'espace fibre. Applications aux produits symetriques infinis, C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris 242 (1956), 1680-1682. _ _ , Quasifaserungen und unendliche symmetrische produkte, Ann. of Math. (2) 67 (1956), 230-281. Elizondo, J., The Euler-Chow Series for Toric Varieties, PhD. thesis, SUNY Stony Brook, August, 1992. _ _ , The Euler Series of Restricted Chow Varieties, Composito Math. 94 (1994), 279-310. Friedlander, E., Homology using Chow varieties, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 20 (1989), 49-53. _ _ , Algebraic cycles, Chow varieties and Lawson homology, Compositio Math. 77 (1991), 55-93. _ _ , Filtrations on algebraic cycles and homology, to appear in Annales d'Ecole Norm. Sup.
210
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
[24]
_ _, Some computations of algebraic cycle homology, K-Theory, 8 no. 3, (1994), 271-286. [25] Federer, H., Some theorems on integral currents, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 117 (1965), 43-67. [26] _ _, Geometric measure theory, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1969. Federer, H. and Fleming, W., Normal and integral currents currents, Ann. of Math. (2)72 (1960), 458-520. [28] Friedlander, E. and Gabber, 0., Cycle spaces and intersection theory, Topological Methods in Modern Math., Publish or Perish Press, Austin, Texas, 1993, 325-370. [29] Friedlander, E. and Mazur, B., Filtrations on the homology of algebraic varieties, Memoir of the Amer. Math. Soc., no. 529 (1994). [30] _ _, Correspondence homomorphisms for singular varieties, to appear in Ann. Inst. Fourier, Grenoble. [31] Friedlander, E. and Lawson, Jr., H.B., A theory of algebraic cocycles, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 26 (1992),264-267. [32] _ _ , A theory of algebraic cocycles, Ann. of Math. 136 (1992),361-428. [33] _ _, Duality relating spaces of algebraic co cycles and cycles, Preprint, 1994. [34] Fulton, W., Intersection theory, Springer, New York, 1984. [35] Gabber, 0., Letter to Friedlander, Sept., 1992. [361 Gajer P., The intersection Dold-Thorn Theorem, Ph.D. Thesis, S.U.N.Y. Stony Brook, 1993. [37] Grothendieck, A., La theorie des classes de Chern, Bull. Soc. Math. France 86 (1958),137-154. [381 _ _, Standard conjectures on algebraic cycles, Algebraic Geometry (Bombay Colloquium), Oxford Univ. Press 1969, 193-199. [39] _ _ , Hodge's general conjecture is false for trivial reasons, Topology 8 (1969), 299-303. [40] Hain, R., Mixed Hodge Structures on homotopy groups, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 14 (1986), 111-114. [41] _ _, The de Rham homotopy theory of complex algebraic varieties I and II, K-theory I (1987), 171-324, and 481-494. [42] Harvey, R., Holomorphic chains and their boundaries, Several Complex Variables, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math. Vol. 30, Amer. Math. Soc. 1977, 309-382. [431 Hartshorne, R., Algebraic Geometry, Graduate Texts in Math. Springer, Berlin, 1977. [44] Hironaka, H., 7riangulation of algebraic sets, in Algebraic Geometry, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math. 29 (1975), 165-185. [45] Hoyt, W., On the Chow bunches of different projective embeddings of a [27]
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
[46] [47] [48] [49] [50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56] [57]
[58] [59] [60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65]
211
projective variety, Amer. J. Math. 88 (1966),273-278. Lawson, H. B. Jr, The topological structure of the space of algebraic varieties,Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 17, (1987), 326-330. _ _ , Algebraic cycles and homotopy theory, Ann.ofMath. 129 (1989),253291. Lam, T.-K., Spaces of Real Algebraic Cycles and Homotopy Theory, Ph.D. thesis, SUNY,Stony Brook, 1990.
Lewis, J., A Survey of the Hodge Conjecture, Les Publications CRM, Univ. de Montreal, Montreal ,Quebec, 1991. Lima-Filho, P.C., Homotopy groups of cycle spaces, Ph.D. thesis, SUNY, Stony Brook, 1989. _ _ , Lawson homology for quasiprojective varieties, Compositio Math 84 (1992), 1-23. _ _ , Completions and fibrations for topological monoids, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 340 (1993), 127-147. _ _, On the generalized cycle map, J. Diff. Geom. 38 (1993), 105-130. _ _ , On the topological group structure of algebraic cycles, Duke Math. J. 75, no. 2 (1994),467-491. Lawson, H.B. Jr, Lima-FiIho, P.C. and M.-L. Michelsohn, M.-L., Algebraic cycles and equivariant cohomology theories, to appear. _ _, The G-suspension theorem for affine algebraic cycles, preprint, 1995. Lawson, H.B. Jr. and Michelsohn, M.-L., Algebraic cycles, Bott periodicity, and the Chern characteristic map, The Math. Heritage of Hermann Weyl, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, 1988, pp. 241-264. _ _, Algebraic cycles and group actions in Differential Geometry, Longman Press, 1991, 261-278. Lewis, L.G., May, P. and Steinberger, M., Equivariant stable homotopy theory, Lecture in Math., Vol. 1213, Springer, Berlin, 1985. Lawson, H.B. Jr and Yau, S.-T., Holomorphic symmetries, Ann. Sci. Ecole Norm. Sup. (4) 20 (1987), 557-577. MacDonald, I.G., The Poincare polynomial of a symmetric product, Proc. Cambridge. Phil. Soc., 58 (1962) 563-568. McDuff, D. and Segal, G., Homology fibrations and the "group completion" theorem, Invent. Math. 31 (1976), 279-284. May, J.P., Eoo Ring Spaces and Eoo Ring Spectra, Lecture Notes in Math. Vol. 577, Springer, Berlin, 1977. Morrow, J.and Kodaira, K., Complex Manifolds, Holt-Reinhart-Winston, New York, 1971. Mann, B.M. and Milgram, R.J., Some Spaces of Holomorphic Maps to Complex Grassmann Manifolds, J. Diff. Geom. 33 (1991),301-324.
212
H. BLAINE LAWSON, JR.
Moore, J., Semi-simplicial complexes and Postnikov systems, Sympos. Intern. Topologia Algebraica, Univ. Nac. Aut6noma de Mexico and UNESCO, Mexico City, 1958, pp, 232-247. [67] Nori, M., Algebraic cycles and Hodge-theoretic connectivity, Invent. Math. 111 (1993), 349-373 . [68] Roberts, J., Chow's moving Lemma, Algebraic geometry (Oslo 1970, F. Oort Ed.), Wolters-Noordhoff Publ., Groningen, 1972,89-96. [69] Quillen, D., Higher algebraic K-theory I, Lecture Notes in Math. Vol. 341, Springer, (1973), 85-147. [70] Samuel, P., Methodes d'algebre abstrait en geometrie algebrique, Springer, Heidelberg, 1955. [71] Segal, G., The multiplicative group of classical cohomology, Quart. J. Math. Oxford Ser. 26 (1975), 289-293. [72] _ _, The Topology of Rational Functions, Acta Math.143 (1979),39-72. [73] Snaith V.P., The total Chern and Stiefel- Whitney Classes are not infinite loop maps, lllinois J. Math. 21 (1977),300-304. [74] Shafarevich, LR., Basic Algebraic Geometry, Springer, New York, 1974. [75] Steiner, R., Decompositions of groups of units in ordinary cohomology, Quart, J. Math. Oxford 90 (1979),483-494. [76] Suslin A. and Voevodsky, V., Singular homology of abstract algebraic varieties, Harvard Preprint, 1993. [77] Taubes, C.H., The Stable Topology of Self-Dual Moduli Spaces, J. Diff. Geom. 29 (1989), 163-230. [78] Totaro, B., The maps from the Chow variety of cycles of degree 2 to the space of all cycles, MSRI Preprint, 1990. [79] _ _ , The total Chern class is not a map of multiplicative cohomology theories, Univ. of Chicago Preprint, 1991. [80] Whitehead, Elements of Homotopy Theory, Springer, New York, 1974. [81] Gelfand, LM., Krapanov, M.M. and Zelevinsky, A.V., Discriminants, Resultants and Multidimensional Determinants, Birkhauser Press, Boston, 1994. [82] Kraines, D. and Lada, T., A counterexample to the transfer conjecture, In P.Hoffman and V. Snaith (Eds.) Algebraic Topology, Waterloo, L.N.M. no. 741, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1979, pages 588-624. [83] Kozlowski, A., The Evana-Kahn formula for the total Stiefel- Whitney class, Proc. A. M. S. 91 (1984),309-313. [84] _ _, Transfer in the groups of multiplicative units of the classical cohomology rings and Stiefel- Whitney classes, Proc. Res. Inst. Math. Sci. 25 (1989),59-74. [85] Shuota, M. and Yokoi, M., Triangulations of subanalytic sets and locally suanalytic manifolds, Trans A.M.S. 286 (1984),727-750.
[66]
SPACES OF ALGEBRAIC CYCLES
[86] [87] [88] [89] [90] [91] [92] [93] [94]
213
Steiner, R., Infinite loop structures on the algebraic k-theory of spaces, Math. Proc. Camb. Philos. Soc. 1 no. 90, (1981),85-111. Flannery, C., Spaces of algebraic cycles and correspondence homomorphisms, to appear in Advances in Math. Friedlander, E., Algebraic cycles on normal quasi-projective varieties, Preprint, 1994. Friedlander, E. and Lawson H.B., Jr., Moving algebraic cycles of bounded degree, Preprint, 1994. Friedlander, E. and Voevodsky, V., Bivariant cycle cohomology, Preprint, 1994. Gajer, P., Intersection Lawson homology, M.S.R.1. Preprint no. 00-94, 1994. Lima-Filho, P., On the equivariant homotopy of free abelian groups on G-spaces and G-spectra, Preprint, 1994. Lawson, H.B. Jr, Lima-Filho, P. and Michelsohn, M.-L., On equivariant algebraic suspension, Preprint, 1994. Michelsohn, M.-L., Steenrod cycles, Preprint, 1994. STATE UNIVERSITY OF NEW YORK AT STONY BROOK STONY BROOK, NEW YORK
SURVEYS IN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY, 1995 Vol. 2 ©1995, International Press
Problems on rational points and rational curves on algebraic varieties Yu. I.
MANIN
§l. Introduction 0.1. Basic problems. In this report, we review some recent results, conjectures, and techniques related to the following questions. Question 1. Let V be a (quasi)projective algebraic variety defined over a number field k. How large is the set of rational points V(k)? Question 2. Let V be a compact Kahler manifold. How large is the set of rational curves in V, or the space of analytic maps pl -+ V? More precisely, in the arithmetic setting we choose a height function hL : V (k) -+ R, and want to understand the behavior of
Nv(H) := card {x E V(k) ! hL(x) :5 H}
(0.1)
as H -+ 00. In the geometric setting, we replace the (logarithmic) height by the degree of the curve with respect to the Kahler class, coinciding with its volume with respect to the Kahler metric (Wirtinger's theorem). IT the degree is bou\lded by H, the space of rational curves is a finite-dimensional complex space, and we migh~ be interested in the number of its irreducible components, their dimensions, their characteristic numbers, etc. 0.2. A heuristic reasoning. In order to see what geometric properties of V influence the behavior of the two sets, let us start with the following naive reasoning. Let V = V (nj d1 , ••. , dr) be a smooth complete intersection in pn given by the equations Fi(xo, ... ,xn ) = 0, i = 1, ... ,r, where Fi is a form of degree di . 0.2.1. Arithmetic setting. Assuming that Fi have integral coefficients we take Q as the ground field. Every rational point is represented by a primitive (n+ I)-ule of integer-valued coordinates x = (xo, ... , x n ) E znp~~ . A standard (exponential) height function is h(x) = maxi(!Xil). There are about Hn+l primitive (n + I)-pies of height :5 H. A form Fi takes about Hd; values on this set. Assume that the probability of taking the zero value is about H- d ;, and that the conditions Fi = 0 are statistically independent. Then we get a conjectural growth order (?) for the number of points of the height::; H in V(Q).
(0.2)
215
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
0.2.2. Geometric setting. Now we will allow Fi to have complex coefficients, and endow Vee) with the metric induced by the Fubini-Study metric on pn. We normalize it in such a way that a line in pn has degree (volume) 1. Consider a projective line p1 = Proj e[to, t1l. Any map cp : p1 ~ pn can be written as
(to: tt}
1--+
(fo(to, tt) : ... : fn(to, t1»
where Ii are forms of some degree k ~ 0 not vanishing identically and relatively prime. Denote by Mk(pn) the space of all (n + I)-pIes of forms of degree k (except (0, ... ,0» up to a common scalar factor. Obviously, ~ p(n+1)(k+1)-1.
Mk(pn)
The space Mk(pn) C Mk(pn) is Zariski open and dense. Similarly, denote by Mk (V) the space of maps p1 ~ V of degree k. Its closure Mk(V) C Mk(pn) is defined by a system of polynomial equations on the coefficients of /i's derived from
Fi (fo (to, td,··· , fn(to, td)
= OJ i = 1, ••• , r.
(0.3)
Clearly, (0.3) furnishes kdi + 1 homogeneous equations of degree di corresponding to the monomials tgt~dj+1-a. It follows that r
r
dimMk(V) ~ (n+l)(k+l)-I- ~)kdi+l)
= k(n+l- Ldi)+dim V;
i=l
(0.4)
i=l r
deg Mk(V) ~
II d~di+1.
(0.5)
i=l
0.3. Discussion. a). Since the geometric degree of a curve corresponds to the logarithmic height of a point (with respect to the same ample class), the r.h.s. of (0.2) and (0.4) predict the same qualitative behavior of the number of points, resp. of the dimension of the space of maps, depending on the sign of n + 1- E~l~' Now, this last number is essentially the anticanonical class of V: r
-Kv ~ Ov(n+ 1-
Ld
i)
(0.6)
i=1
in the Picard group of V. Boldly extrapolating from the complete intersection case, we may expect many rational curves and points when -Kv is ample (V is a Fano manifold), and few when K v is ample. The intermediate case K v = 0 must be more subtle. For example, if we disregard the difference between Mk(V) and Mk(V) and assume that (0.4) is an exact equality, we expect a dim (V)-dimensional family
216
YU.I.MANIN
of parametrized rational curves on V of any degree k. If in addition dim V = 3 = dim Aut pl, we expect only a finite number nk of rational (unparametrized) curves of degree k belonging to V for all k ~ 1. For quintics in p5, this was conjectured by Clemens (cf. below). b). These expectations are fulfilled when dim V = 1 that is, when V is a smooth compact curve. More precisely, when -Kv is ample, genus of V is zero, V may be a non-trivial form of plover a non-closed field k which has no k points. However, after a quadratic extension of k, V will become pl, and the point count with re$pect to an anticanonical height gives an asymptotic formula agreeing with (0.2). Moreover, the count of maps pl ~ pl is unconstrained. When Kv = 0, one gets Nv(H) '" c(logHy/2 in view of the Mordell-Weil theorem for elliptic curves, so that (0.2) is still valid if one interprets the r.h.s. as "O(H e ) for anye > 0". Moreover, there are no maps pI ~ V of degree k~1.
Finally, when Kv > 0 one gets Nv(H) parametrized rational curve is constant.
= 0(1)
(Faltings' theorem), and any
c). Starting with dimension two, the situation becomes much more complex and problematic. Let us start with geometry. For smooth m-dimensional Fano varieties, Mori proved that through every point passes a rational curve of (-Kv)-degree ~ m + 1). Moreover, any two points can be connected by a chain of rational curves. But a quantitative picture of the space Map (Pl, V) remains unknown. For varieties (Kv ample) of general type, we expect only a finite dimensional family of unparametrized rational curves. However, this was,proved only for varieties with ample cotangent sheaf which is a considerably stronger assumption. Finally, for manifolds with Kv = 0 (and Kahler holonomy group SU), physicists recently suggested a fascinating conjectural framework for the curve count which we will review in the second part of this report. Passing to the arithmetic case, let us notice first that (0.2) can be proved by the circle method over Q, when n + 1 is large in comparison with E di and the necessary local conditions are satisfied (see below). On the other hand, already for n = 3, r = 1, d = 3, (0.2) may fail for the following reason: it predicts the linear growth for Nv(H), but V may contain a projective line defined over Q (there are 27 lines over Q) in which case counting points only on this line we already get Nv(H) ~ cH2. Therefore, if anything like (0.2) may be expected in general, we must at least stabilize the situation by allowing ground field extensions and deleting some proper subvarieties tending to accumulate points. Moreover, in the case K v = 0 we may have to delete infinitely many subvarieties to achieve the predicted O(H~) estimate. We elaborate this program in Section 1 below. Its goal, roughly speaking, lies in establishing a (conjectural) direct relation between the distribution of rational points on V and the geometry of rational curves on V. In addition, there exists a well known analogy between rational curves and rational points. In Arakelov geometry, rational points on V become "horizontal arithmetical curves" on a Z model of V, endowed with an Hermitean metric
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
217
at arithmetical infinity. In the framework of this analogy, the height becomes literally an arithmetical intersection index. We want to draw attention to an unexplored aspect of this analogy: what in arithmetics corresponds to the local deformation theory of embedded curves? Here is a relevant fragment of the geometric deformation theory. In the following V denotes a quasiprojective variety defined over an algebraically closed field k, and Map (pi, V) is the locally closed finite quasiprojective scheme parametrizing morphisms pi -+ V. For simplicity, in the next Proposition we consider only the unobstructed case. 0.4. Proposition. Let cp be a morphism pi -+ V, [cp] E Map (pi, V) the corresponding closed point, and Tv the tangent sheaf to V. If HI (pI, cp* (Tv)) = 0, then [cp] is a smooth point, and the local dimension of Map(pl, V) at [cp] equals dimHO(Pi,cp*(Tv)). For a proof of a more general statement, see Mori [19]. Assume now that cp is an immersion, and V is smooth in a neighbourhood of cp(pl). Then we have the following sequence of locally free sheaves on pI:
(0.7) where N[~l is the normal sheaf. Hence N[~l ~ ffi:~fO(mi)' s = dim(V). Recall also that TPi ~ 0(2). We can now prove that (0.4) becomes exact equality locally on Map (PI, V) if cp(V) is nicely immersed infinitesimally: 0.4.1. Corollary. Assume in addition that mi Then [cp] is smooth, and
~
dim[~l Map(pl, V) = degcp*(-Kv)
-1 for all i
= 1, ... , s-1.
+ dim V
(0.8)
which coincides with the r.h.s. of (0.,.0 in the complete intersection case. Proof. The smoothness of [cp] follows from Prop. 0.4. Put now
= {ilmi == -I}, a = card (A), B == {ilmi ~ O}, b = card (B).
A
We have a+b = s -Ii degcp*(-Kv) == 2+ LA mi + LBmj = 2-a+ LBffli (take the determinant of (0.7», and, again from (0.7), dim[~l Map (Pi, V)
=
dimHo('7ju) + dimH)(N[~l) = 3 + LB(mi + 1) = 3 + b + LBmi
= 3 + b + deg cp* (- K v) - 2 + a
= dim V +
deg cp*(-Kv).
In particular, when dim V = 3 and - K v = 0, every immersed curve with normal sheaf O( -I)ffiO( -1) must be isolated because the local dimension ofthe lllap space equals dim V = 3 and this is accounted for by reparametrizations. The simplest example when this may occur generically is that of a smooth quintic threefold V. In fact, H. Clemens conjectured that a generic smooth
218
YU.I.MANIN
quintic contains only finitely many smooth rational curves of arbitrary degree k, and that all of them have normal sheaf O( -1) ffi O( -1). Sh. Katz proved partial results in this direction: see [13], [14]. 0.5. Problem. Establish an analog of the geometric deformation theory for embedded arithmetical curves. Specifically, we have 0.6. Problem. Find conditions on arithmetical normal sheaf (or higher order infinitesimal neighborhoods) of an arithmetical curve which are necessary for the generic point of this curve to lie on a rational curve. (We want to find an exact expression of the feeling that an arithmetical curve is deformable only if its generic point lies on a rational curve). 0.7. Rational curves in other contexts. Besides algebraic geometry and number theory, the study of rational curves was recently motivated by quantum field theory and symplectic geometry. We will finish this Introduction with a brief discussion of some relevant ideas. 0.7.1. Physics. Physicists start with a space of maps Map (82 , V) where the target space V is endowed with a Riemannian metric 9 and an action functional 8: Map (8 2 , V) ~ R. V can be thought of as a space-time with a possibly non-trivial gravity field and topology. Any r.p: 8 2 ~ V defines a world-sheet of an one-dimensional object, a "string", which replaces the classical image of point-particle. Alternatively, one can think about 8 2 as a two-dimensional space-time in its own right. Then (V, g) in a neighborhood of r.p(8) represents classical fields on 8. Action of a virtual world-sheet r.p: 8 2 ~ V is usually given by a Lagrangian density which must be integrated over 8 2 • Here we will look only at the simplest action functional 8(r.p) = f vol (r.p*(g». (0.9)
ls2
In other words, 8(r.p) is just the surface of the world sheet. Non-trivial stationary points of this action are just minimal surfaces. The path integral quantization of this theory in the stationary phase approximation involves a summation over these minimal surfaces Imagine now that (V, g) is not just a Riemannian manifold, but a complex Kahler one. It is well known that in this case minimal surfaces in V (actually, minimal submanifolds of any dimension) are precisely complex subvarieties (Wirtinger's theorem). A physical context in which V acquires a natural Kahler structure arises in string compactification models where V appears as a Planck size compact chunk of space-time adding missing six real dimensions to the classical fourdimensional space-time. 0.7.2. Symplectic geometry. The basic mathematical structure of the classical mechanics is a triple (V 2 n,w,H) where v 2 n is a smooth manifold, w is a closed non-degenerate 2 form on V 2 n, and H is a function on V called Hamiltonian. Given such a triple, we want to understand the geometry of the flow defined by the vector field X on V such that dH = ix(w). In particular,
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
219
we want to know how a domain of initial positions B C V may change with time. Any Hamiltonian flow preserves the symplectic volume v(B) = w n . On the other hand, certain unstable flows like geodesic flows on hyperbolic manifolds severely distort B: a small ball eventually becomes spread allover V forming a fractal-like structure. Nevertheless, (exp(tX)B,w) remains symplectomorphic to B because Lie x(w) = dix(w) + ixdL.J = O. V.I.Arnold in the sixties suggested that exp(tX)B should satisfy some additional constraints displaying then unknown "symplectic rigidity" properties. M.Gromov's work confirmed these expectations. He proved in particular that the unit ball
IB
2n
(Bl
= {xl L
n
x~ < I}, w =
L dxi AdXi+n)
i=1
is not symplectomorphic to any open subset of n
(V1-e:
= {xl Ixl < 1- e}, w = 'LdXi" dXi+n). i=1
Gromov's argument involves rational curves in the following ingenious way. Notice first that in the example above we envision the two symplectic spaces Bl and V1 -e: not in terms of w but rather in terms of the standard Euclidean metric ds 2 = E(dxi)2. But if we are considering pairs (g,w) consisting of a quadratic and an alternate form, say, on a linear space E, there is a natural subclass of such pairs corresponding to Hermitean forms, which can be characterized by the existence of a complex structure J : E ~ E, J2 = -1 such that w(Jx, y) = g(x, y), g(Jx, y) = -w(x, y). Applying this to tangent spaces of a symplectic manifold (V, w) and shifting attention from (w, g) to (w, J) we come to the following notion due to Gromov. An almost complex structure J on V is tamed by w, if g(x, x) := w(Jx,x) > 0 for any tangent vector x, that is, if 9 + iw defines a Hermitean metric on the tangent bundle to V. Now, even though J may be non-integrable, its restriction on surfaces is integrable, so that it makes perfect sense to speak about holomorphic maps pI ~ (V, J). M.Gromov derives his results from a thorough study of such rational curves, establishing existence of curves of small volume. (In a similar vein, rational curves of small degrees play the crucial role in the Mori theory.) E.Witten used Gromov's construction as a deformation device allowing one to correctly count the number of rational curves on Calabi-Yau manifolds; cf. also [15]. This paper is structured as follows. §1 is devoted to the analytic methods to count rational points on projective varieties, whereas §2 reviews the algebrogeometric approach. In §3 we turn to the curve count, explaining the simplest example of Calabi-Yau mirrors. Finally, §4 is devoted to the explanation of toric mirror constructions. For the most part, proofs are omitted.
YU.I.MANIN
220
SECTION I COUNTING RATIONAL POINTS §1. Analytic methods 1.1. Heights on projective varieties. Let k be an algebraic number field. Denote by M" the set of all places of k; for v E k, let kv be the completion of kat v. Define the local norm 1.lv : k~ -t R* by the following condition: if J.t is a Haar measure on k;;, then J.t(aU) = lalvJ.t(U) for each measurable subset U. Let x E pn(k) be a point in a projective space endowed with a homogeneous coordinate system. H coordinates of x are (xo, ... , x n ), Xi E k, put hex)
II
=
mF(lxil v).
(1.1)
vEMk
The product formula shows that this is well defined. More generally, let V be a projective variety defined over k, and L = (L, s) a pair consisting of a very ample invertible sheaf L and a finite set of sections s = {so, ... sn} C rev, L) generating L. For a point x E V (k) and an arbitrary choi~e of a local section u of L non-vanishing at x we put (1.2)
(1.3) In particular, consider the anticanonical height hw-1 on pn(k) defined by the (n + l)-th tensor power of (0(1); {xo, ... ,Xn}). Then hW-l(X) = h(x)n+1 where hex) is given by (1.1). When s in the definition of L is replaced by another generating set of sections, hL is multiplied by exp(O(l)). The resulting set of height functions consists of Weil's heights. There is a different choice of additional structure allowing one to define height functions directly for not necessarily ample sheaves: the Arakelov heights are obtained by choosing an appropriate set of v-adic metrics 1~.lIv on all L ® kv and putting, for L = (L, {1I.lIv}), hL{x) =
II
Ilu(x)lI;l.
vEM.
These heights are also multiplicative with respect to the obvious tensor product, and up to exp 0(1) are independent on the choice of local metrics and coincide with the respective Weil heights. For a subset U C V(k), put
Nu(Lj H) = card {x
E UlhL{x) ~ H}.
(1.4)
For ample L, this number is always finite. We want to understand its behavior as H -t 00. In this section, we review main situations when an asymptotic
221
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
formula for (1.4) is known. In all cases which I am aware of, such a formula is of the type Nu(L;H) = cH.Bu(L)(logH)tu(L)(I + 0(1)) (1.5) for some constants c > 0, .Bu(L) ~ 0, tu(L) ~ O. The archetypal result is the following theorem due to Schanuel: 1.2. Theorem. Put d = [k: Q]. Then -1
Npn(k)(Ld
;H)
= c(n,k)H + h
c(n, k)
= (k(n + 1)
(
{O(H 1 / 2 10gH) O(H 1-1/d(n+1») 2rl +r2 7rr2 ) n+1
1)1/2
for d = n otherwise;
= 1,
(1.6)
R
-(n + I)r 1 +r 2 -1 tv
.
(1.7)
Here h denotes the class number of k, and (k its Dedekind zeta, r1 (resp. r2) is the number of its real (resp. complex) places, D the absolute value of the discriminant, R the regulator, and tv the number of roots of unity in k. The main feature of (1.6) is that N pn(k)(w- 1 ;H) grows asymptotically linearly in H, whatever the dimension n and the ground field k are. This becomes possible only because we have chosen local norms 1.1 .. as Haar multipliers. Therefore the height function (1.1) is non-invariant with respect to ground field extensions: if we replace k by k' :::> k, hex) becomes h'(x) = h(x)[k':kJ so that pn(k) does not contribute to the main term of the asymptotic formula for Npn(k') (w- 1 ; H) : essentially, we count only "new points". Schanuel proved (1.7) by reducing the problem to that of counting lattice points in a large domain. The volume of the domain furnishes the leading term, and if the boundary is not too bad, we get an asymptotic formula. We will now sketch an alternate approach via zeta functions. 1.3. Zetas. Consider the following abstract setting. Let U be a finite or countable set, and hL : U -+ ~ a counting function (this means that Nu(L; H) defined by (1.4) is finite for all H). Assume moreover that Nu(L; H) = O(He) for some c > O. Put (1.8) xEU
The better we understand the analytical properties of Zu(L; s), the more precise information about Nu(L; H) we can obtain. We will distinguish here four levels of precision. Level 0: Convergence abscisse. Put
.B = .Bu(L)
=
inf {a
I Zu(L; s)
converges for Re(s)
> a}.
(1.9)
This is well defined and invariant if one replaces h by exp(O(I))h. In particular, if hL is a Weil or Arakelov ample height, .B depends only on the isomorphism class of the relevant ample sheaf L. It gives the following information about Nu(L; H):
f3 (L) _ u
-
{-oo
if U is finite; lim sup log Nu{L;H) > 0 otherwise. 10gH
-
(1.10)
YU.I.MANIN
222
In other words, if f3
~
0, we have for all
N (L· H) _ u, -
>0:
g
{O(Hf3+~),
Levell: a Tauberian situation. Assume that {3 t = tu(L) ~ 0 we have Zu(Lj s)
(1.11).
n(Hf3-~).
= (8 -
= {3u(L)
~ 0, and for some
(1.12)
{3)-tG(s),
where G(f3) '" 0, and G(s) is holomorphic in a neighborhood of Re(s) ~ {3. In this case
Nu(LjH) =
~~1 ~ (log
H)t-l(l
+ 0(1)).
(1.13)
In particular, assume that U = U1 X ... X Urn, hL(Ul, ... , Urn) = hLl (Ul) ... {3ui(Li),ti tu,(Li) whenever they are defined, and {i I {3 f3i}. Using the zeta-description of these numbers, one readily sees that
hLm(urn)· Put f3i /3 = maxi (f3i), J
= =
=
f3u(L)
=
= /3,
tu(L)
=L
(1.14)
ti.
iEJ
Formula of the type (1.13) is valid for (U, h L ) if the Tauberian condition is assumed only for Ui, hLi with i E J.
Level 2: analytic continuation to a larger halfplane. Instead ofaxiomatizing the situation, I will only remind the contour deformation technique. Let us start with the formula valid for f3' > f3: Nu(Lj H)
=
l
f3 '+ioo
(3'-ioo
HB -Zu(Lj s)ds.
(1.15)
8
In favorable case, one can integrate instead along a vertical line Re(s) = 7 < {3 adding the contribution of poles Zu(Lj s) for 7 < Re(s) < f3'. This contribution constitutes the leading term of the asymptoticsj it will be of the type cHf3 P(log H) where P is a polynomial if Zu(Lj s) has a pole at s f3 as its only singularity in 7 < Re( s) < f3'. The integral over Re( s) = 7 will grow slower, possibly as O(Hf3-~), if Zu has no more poles in Re(s) > 7, and can be appropriately majorized. To accomplish the necessary estimates, one has sometimes to first replace Nu(Lj s) by an appropriate average, and the r.h.s. of (1.15) by something like f3 '+ioo H' Z ( ) . I (3'-ioo 8(8H) U Lj S whIch converges b etter.
=
Level 3: explicit formulas. IT one has a well-behaved meromorphic continuation of Zu(Lj s) to the whole complex plane, one can sometimes push f3' to -00 in (1.15) and obtain a precise formula for Nu(Lj H) as a series over all poles of Zu(Lj s).
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
223
1.4. A generalization of Schanuel's theorem. The behavior of the height zeta-function (1.8) is well understood only for two classes of projective manifolds: a) Abelian varietiesj b) homogeneous Fano manifolds. If U = V(k), V is an Abelian variety, and L is an ample symmetric sheaf on V, one can use Neron-Tate's height hL to count points. Denote by W the image of V(k) in V(k) ® R, and let t be the order of V(k}tors. Then hL(X) = exp(q(x mod V(k}tors) where q is a positive quadratic form on V(k) ®R so that our zeta is a theta-function:
L exp( -q(y)s).
Zu(Lj s) = t
(1.16)
yEW
Hence, if r := rk V(k)
> 0,
we have (3
NV(k) (Lj H)
> 0, and
= clogr / 2 H(1 + 0(1)).
(1.17)
Notice that the convergence abscisse Re(s) = 0 is also the natural boundary for Zu(Ljs). For abelian varieties, Kv = 0 so that (1.17) matches our naive expectation (0.2). Let us turn now to homogeneous Fano varieties. 1.4.1. Theorem. Every homogeneous Fano variety V is isomorphic to a generalized flag space P \ G where G is a semi-simple linear algebraic group, and P is a k-rational conjugacy class of parabolic subgroups. If V(k) i- 0, we can take P to be a parabolic subgroup defined over k. For a proof, see Demazure [10]. Flag spaces P \ G admit a distinguished class of heights which can be defined in terms of Arakelov metrics invariant with respect to maximal compact subgroups of the adelic group of G. For such heights, the zeta function of V = P \ G becomes essentially one of the Langlands-Eisenstein series. Their deep theory developed by Langlands allows one to use the technique of contour integration of the Level 3 above, and prove the following theorem, generalizing 1.2: 1.4.2. Theorem. If V is a homogeneous Fano variety with V(k) i- 0, then for a distinguished anticanonical height we have
Nv(-Kv;H) == Hp(logH)(1
+ H-
E)
(1.18)
where e > 0, and p is a polynomial of degree rk Pic(V) - 1. For a proof, see [12]. In particular, (3v(-Kv) = 1. This theorem can be extended to the distinguished heights corresponding to other invertible L. It must be stressed however that, even for projective line, there are natural situations when the relevant heights are not distinguished. This happens on accumulating Fano subvarieties, when a height is induced from the ambient space: see the next section. In the homogeneous case,the asymptotic is of the same form. A very interesting question of charactering the coefficient of the leading term directly in terms of the anticanonical height was recently attacked by E. Peyre. The simplest variety for which the analytic properties of Zu beyond the convergence abscisse are unknown is the affine Del Pezzo surface of degree 5 over
224
YU.I.MANIN
Q which can be obtained by blowing up four rational points on p2 and then deleting all 10 exceptional curves. One reason for this may be a wrong choice of the function itself. The mirror conjecture on the curve count on, say, threedimensional quintics, furnishes analytic continuation for a geometric version of the height zeta where the contribution of the curve x is (logh(x))3 l~~(Z)' . rather than our simple-minded h(X)-B. It would be quite important to guess a version of Zu(Lj s) with good analytic properties. 1.5. Circle method. We will now briefly explain a classical approach to counting points which is efficient for Fano hypersurfaces and complete intersections (mostly over Q) with many variables. Let X be a finite set, F: X -+ Z a function, and e(a) = e 2 11"ia. Put 8(a)
= 8(X.F) (a) = L
(1.19)
e(aF(x)).
zeX
Then
I F(x) = O} =
card {x E X
11
8(a)da.
(1.20)
A useful version of this formula refers to the case of a vector function F (F1 , ••• , Fr) : X -+ zr. Then a = (al, ... , a r ) varies in a unit cube, aF(x) E aiFi(x) , 8(a) is again defined by (1.19), and
card {x E X
I F(x) = O} =
11 1
..•
1
8(a)OOI . .. da r .
= =
(1.21)
The circle method, when it works, gives a justification to the following heuristic principle: 1.5.1.
Circle principle. •
finite set of rational points a'
Under favorable circumstances, there exists a a(i)
a(i)
= {:hr, ... , =r-} and small cubes I( i) ql qr
centered at
these points ("major arcs") such that
11 1
1 •.•
o
dal ... dar
=
L! i
0
8(a)dal ... dar
+ {a small remainder term}.
[(I)
To get some feeling of why it might be true, and what it implies, let us look at the case r = 1. First of all, the values of 8(a) at rational points are related to the distribution of values of F(x) modulo integers: 8(0)
=
1 card (X)j8(2) = card {x
L
S(~) = q
p
e27riap/q
I F(x)
card {x
even} - card {x
I F(x) == p
I F(x)
odd};
mod q}.
mod q
= [1, ... , N] with large N, F(x) = x 2 , then S(~) is approximately ~ x {a Gauss sum} decreasing as :Jq for large q « N.
If X
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
225
Hence we may expect that Sea) is relatively small (in comparison with the number N of its summands) outside of a neighborhood of the set of rational points with denominators bounded in terms of N. In the classical additive problems with large number of summands k, the remainder term can be effectively damped as k -t 00, because (1.22) For example, in Waring's problem of degree n with k summands, (X, F)
= ([0, ... , [MI/n]], x? + ... + Xk -
M)
so that k
card {(Xi)
I Lxf = M} =
1 I
[Ml/n) e-27riaM(
0
i=l
L
e 27rOZn )kda.
z=o
Below we review some results of W. Schmidt [24] who applied the circle method to the intersections of hypersurfaces in a projetive space over Q. In fact, he worked with the corresponding affine cone, but this only changes the coefficient in the asymptotic formula. 1.5.2. The setting. Consider a finite system of r-forms in s variables of degrees ~ 2:F = {FI , •• . , Fr }, with integral coefficients. Let V be the variety {Fi = O} in the affine space. Let rd be the number of forms of degree d, and r = Ei rio W. Schmidt proved an asymptottic formula of the type (0.2) in the cases where "the number of variables is large, and the forms are not too degenerate." Both conditions are used as a refined substitute for the classical damping effect (1.22). Let us state them more precisely. A. Many variables. The basic bound is written in terms of the number
v(r2, ... ,rk)
= max {s I for some F and some prime p, F(Qp) = 0}.
In other words, s > v(r2" .. , rk), implies p-adic solvability for all p and all F with a given vector degree. B. Degeneracy. The degeneracy is measured in terms of the tensor rank, well known in the computational complexity theory. Specifically, for one form F put h(F) = min {h
I
there exist non-constant forms AI,BI, ... ,Ah,Bh E Q[XI, ... ,Xs ] such that F = AIBI + ... + AhBh }.
For a system of forms of the same degree F = {Fi }, put
Finally, for a general system of forms put hd 1.5.3. Theorelll. Assume that
= h(degree d part of F).
YU.I.MANIN
226
a). hd ~ 24dd!rdkv(r2, ... ,rk)' b). dim VCR) ~ s - L~=2 rio Then the number of integral points of V in
{Ixil
~ H} is
where the constant J.L > 0 is a product of local densities. 'l\uning to the base of the cone V, we again see the linear growth rate with respect to an anti canonical height, at least when this base is only mildly singular so that the anticanonical sheaf exists and is given by the same formula as for the smooth complete intersections.
§2. Algebro-geometric methods 2.1. Accumulating subvarieties. The analytic methods described in §1 work efficiently only for those Fano varieties which are either homogeneous or complete intersections with many variables (or, more invariantly, oflarge index). Moreover, their success seems to be connected with the fact that the rational points are uniformly distributed with respect to a natural Tamagawa measure. Algebra-geometric data suggest that generally we may not expect such a uniformity, and that rational points tend to concentrate upon proper subvarieties. Below we will discuss several ways to make this idea precise. Let U be a quasiprojective variety over a number field k. a. Zariski topology. Denote by V the closure of U(k) in Zariski topology. H a compactification of U is a curve of genus > 1, then V is a proper subvariety of U. This fancy way to state Faltings' theorem leads to the generalized Mordell conjecture: we expect that V is a proper subvariety of U whenever U is birationally equivalent to a variety of general type. Roughly speaking, this means that the description of U(k) can be divided into two subproblems: to understand the distribution of rational points on varieties with K ~ 0, and to understand the distribution of such subvarieties in varieties of general type. This pattern is characteristic for all definitions of accumulation.
=
b. Hausdorff topology. Let k Q. B. Mazur recently suggested that U(Q) may be Hausdorff dense in the space of R-points of its Zariski closure V. If this is universally true, it implies that Z cannot be a Q-Diophantine subset subset of Q so that not all Q-enumerable subsets are Q-Diophantine. (Recall that E C Qn is Q-Diophantine if it is a projection of U(Q) C Qn+m for some affine U defined over Q).In particular, Matiyasevich's strategy of proving (he algorithmic undecidability of Diophantine equations over Z would not work for Q. c. Measure theory. Again for simplicity working over Q consider the limit
227
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
of the averaged delta-distributions over rational points Xi E U(Q) ordered, say, by increasing height. IT such a limit exists, the support of J.L provides a notion of accumulating subset which may be finer than the topological closure. d. Point count according to the polynomial growth rate. The following notion was suggested in [5]: choose a height function hL on (a projective closure of) U and call a Zariski closed subset V C U accumulating with respect to hL if (3u(L)
= (3v(L) > (3u\V(L),
where the growth order (3 is defined by (1.9) or equivalently (1.10). One easily sees that there exists a unique minimal accumulating subset Vi; putting UI = U \ Vi and applying the same reasoning to UI etc, one gets a sequence of Zariski open subsets (2.1) such that Ui \ Ui+! is the minimal hL-accumulating subset in Ui' A description of (2.1) and the corresponding growth order sequence (2.2)
is the natural first goal in understanding U(k), which can be best attacked by algebro-geometric means. We will now report on the results of [18], [17] concerning mostly Fano varieties, in particular surfaces and threefolds. 2.2. Invariant a and reductions. Let V be a projective manifold (we can also allow mild singularities). Denote by N:/f (resp. N~mple) the closure of the cone generated by effective (resp. ample) classes in NS(V) ® R where NS is the Neron-Severi group. For an invertible sheaf L, put a(L)=inf{p/q
I
P,qEZ,q>O,p[L]+qKvEN:If }·
H V is Fano and L is ample then a(L) > O. The following two results allow us to reduce in certain cases the calculation of (3u (L) to that of {3u ( - K v), if a( L) is considered as a computable geometric invariant. 2.2.1. Theorem on the upper bound. aj. For every e > 0, there e:cists a dense Zanski open subset U(e) C V such that/or aI/V C U(e) we have fJu(L) 5 a(L)fJu(-Kv) +e.
(2.3)
b). Q in addition a(L) is rational (and positive), there e.xtsts a dense open subset U C V such that for all U' C U we have (3u,(L) :5 o:(L){3u(-Kv).
(2.4)
Proof. a). Take p/q very close to a(L) such that p[L] + qKv is effective. Then p/q = a(L) + 11 with small 11 > O. Denote by U(p, q) the complement
YU.I.MANIN
228
to the support of base points and fixed components of IpL + qKvl. For all x E U(p, q)(k) , we have hpL+qK(X) ;:: c' > 0 i.e. hL(x) > ch~k(X), sO that f3U(p,q)(L)
b). IT 0:
~
!!.f3U(p,q) (-Kv) q
= (o:(L) + 11)f3U(p,q) (-Kv).
= p/q, we can put U = U(p, q).
Remark. This Theorem shows that it is important to know whether o:(L) is rational for all ample L on Fano manifolds. This is true for surfaces in view of the Mori polyhedrality theorem and the convex duality of and N~mple' For threefolds, V. V. Batyrev showed that it is a (rather non-trivial) consequence of Mori's technique. In higher dimensions, this is an open problem.
N:"
2.2.2. Theorem on the lower bound. manifold V, assume that o:(L)[L]
Given an ample L on a Fano
+ Kv E aN~mple n aN:!f'
(2.5)
Then o:(L) is rational. Assume in addition that o:(L)[L] + Kv := I belongs to exactly one face of aN~mple of codimension one. Then the contraction morphism associated to this face has a fiber F which is a non-singular Fano variety of dimension;:: 1, and we have for any U ::> V, (2.6)
Condition (2.5) is a strong one. However, if it is not satisfied for L, one can sometimes ameliorate the situation by an appropriate birational modification ofV. Whenever both inequalities (2.4) and (2.6) hold, we can get the best possible result f3u(L) o:(L) in the case where f3u(-K) 1 for appropriate open subsets of subsets of V and F. We have already noticed in §1 that analytic methods when applicable give exactly this result. We will show below that this also seems to be a tendency for surfaces and threefolds, but only after deleting the accumulating subvarieties. The following results heavily depend upon classification theorems. Geometric classification is done over a closed ground field; we generally dispose of subtler problems by passing to a finite extension of the ground field.
=
=
2.3. Del Pezzo surfaces. Fano manifolds of dimension two are called the del Pezzo surfaces. They split into ten deformation families. Two of them are homogeneous (P 2 and pi x pi) so that point count on them reduces to the Schanuel's theorem. Family {Va}, 1 ~ a ~ 8, consists of surfaces that can be obtained by blowing up a points on p2 in a sufficiently general position. We call a surface Va split (over k), if these a points can be chosen k-rational. Every surface Va contains a finite number of exceptional curves ("lines"); they are all k-rational if Va is split. Denote by Ua the complement to these lines, and put Aa = Va \ U a . The following Theorem is proved in [18]: 2.3.1. Theorem. Let Va be split. Then the following hold.
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
229
a). fiA,,(-Kv) = 2. b). We have the/allowing estimates/or{3uA(-Kv) :={3a· For k Q: {31 = {34 = 1; {35 ~ 5/4; {36 ~ 5/3. For general k: {31 = ... = {33 = 1; {34 ~ 6/5; (35 ~ 3/2. The results for a = 5 and a = 6 have especially direct Diophantine interpretation, since V5 is an intersection of two quadrics in p4, and V6 is a cubic in p3. We see that if all lines on these surfaces are rational they are accumulating, and, for k = Q, the remainder term Nu,,(-K,H) is O(H 5/4+t:) (resp. O(H5/3+ E )). A proof of Theorem 2.3.1 given in [18] consists of two parts. The cases a ~ 4 are treated directly, by representing Va as a blow-up of p2, comparing height on Va with height on p2, and using explicit number-theoretical properties of the height. The remaining cases are treated via an inductive reasoning which shows that {3a+l ~ :=:{3a'
=
= ...
2.4. Fano threefolds. This case was treated in [17] where the following linear lower bound was established: 2.4.1. Theorem. For any Fano threefold V over a number field k and any Zariski open dense subset U c V, there exists a finite extension k' of k such that if k" contains k', then NU®kll (K, H) > cH for some c > 0 and large H. In particular, /3U®kll ~ 1. The proof is based upon a description of all 104 deformation families of Fano threefolds obtained by Fano, Iskovskih, Shokurov, Mori, and Mukai. Studying this description, one can derive the following: 2.4.2. Main Lemma. Every Fano threefold over a closure of the ground field becomes isomorphic to a member of at least one of the following families: a}. A generalized flag space P \ G. b}. A Fano threefold covered by rational curves C with (Kv.C) ~ 2. c}. A blow-up of varieties of the previous two groups. Group a) is treated via Eisenstein series. For the group b), it suffices to count points on a single rational curve invoking the Schanuel theorem. Finally, a blowup diminishes the anticanonical height in the complement of the exceptional set and increases the number of such points of bounded height. 2.5. Length of arithmetical stratification. We conjecture that for Fano manifolds, the length of the sequence (2.1) of the complements to accumulating subsets is always finite. However, it can be arbitrarily long. 2.5.1. Proposition. For every n ~ 1, there exists a Fano manifold W of dimension 2n over Q and an ample invertible sheaf L on it such that the sequence (2.1) for (W, L) is of length ~ 27n + 1. Proof. For n = 1, take for W a split del Pezzo surface Vs. Representing it as a blow-up of six rational points on p2, denote by A the inverse image of OP2 (1), and by ll, ... ,127 the exceptional classes, of which h, ... , l6 are represented by inverse images of blown up points. Choose a large positive integer N and small Positive integers Cl, ..• , E."6. Take for L a class approximately proportional to -Kv: L = 3NA-(N -cdh - .. ·-(N -c6)l6. Choose the parameters (N,ci) in such a way that (l.,L) i (lj,L) for all i '" jj 1:::; i,j:::; 27j (1.,L) < ~N. Theorem 2.3.1 then shows that the 27 lines will be consecutive accumulating
230
YU.I.MANIN
subvarieties, with the growth orders (L~';)' and the complement to them will have f3 < 3~' so that the total length is at least 28. For n ~ 2, take n pairs (Vi, L,) of this type. Arrange parameters (Ni , ... ,E~) in such a way that the spectra of the growth orders for various (Vi, L,) do not intersect. Then put W = Vl X ... X Vn,L = pri(Ll) ® .•. ®pr~(Ln). From (1.14) one easily sees that the spectrum of the growth orders will have length at least 27n + 1 (one can even get 28n - 1).
EL
2.5.2. Conjecture. If V is a manifold with K v = 0 on which there exist rational curves of arbitrarily high degree defined over a fixed number field, then the arithmetical stratification with respect to any ample sheaf L is infinite, and the consecutive growth orders tend to zero. The first non-trivial case of this conjecture is furnished by certain quartic surfaces, and more general K3-surfaces. In this case, the accumulating subvarieties must consist of unions of rational curves of consecutive L-degrees. However, the problem of understanding rational curves on K3-surfaces is difficult, in particular because it is "unstable": even the rank of the Picard group depends on the moduli. It is expected that some stabilization occurs starting with tree-dimensional Calabi-Yau manifolds. We will devote the next Section to the highly speculative and fascinating picture whose contours were discovered by physicists.
SECTION II COUNTING RATIONAL CURVES §3. Calabi-Yau manifolds and mirror conjecture 3.1. Classification of manifolds with Kv = O. In this Section, we discuss some conjectural identities involving, on the one hand, characteristic series for the numbers of rational curves of all degrees on certain manifolds V with K v = 0, and on the other hand, hypergeometric functions expressing periods of "mirror dual" manifolds W in appropriate local coordinates. From the physical viewpoint, such identities mean that certain correlation functions of a string propagating on V coincide with other correlation functions of a string propagating on Wj the passage from V to W involves also a Lagrangian change ("A- and B- models" of Witten [25]).
Recent physical literature contains a wealth of generalizations of these identities involving curves of arbitrary genus on varieties with K v ~ O. However, no single case of these conjectures has been rigorously proved. Therefore we have decided to concentrate upon the simplest case, that of Calabi-Yau threefolds. In the framework of Kahler geometry, they can be introduced by means of the following classification theorem. Let us call a Kahler manifold V to be irreducible if no finite unramified cover of V can be represented as a non-trivial direct product.
231
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
3.1.1. Theorem. For any compact Kiihler manifold V with Kv = 0, there exist a finite unramified cover V' and its decomposition into irreducible factors
V' ~
II Ti II Sj x II Ck X
i
j
k
such that following hold: a}. T; are Kiihler tori. b}. Sj are complex symplectic manifolds, (i.e., they admit everywhere nondegenerate closed holomorphic B form), but not tori. c}. Ck are neither tori nor symplectic. Irreducible Kahler manifolds of the type Ck can be called Calabi- Yau manifolds; in the physical literature this name is sometimes applied to any manifold with K v = O. The smallest dimension of a complex torus is 1, of a symplectic manifold 2 (any symplectic surface is a K3 surface); strictly Calabi-Yau manifolds occur first in dimension three. Classification of Calabi-Yau threefolds is a wide open problem; one does not know even whether they belong to a finite number of deformation families. Most of known examples are constructed as anticanonical hypersurfaces of Fano varieties W, or more generally, as "anticanonical complete intersections": V = niDi, Ei Di E 1 - K wi. Every Kahler manifold belongs to the realm of three geometries: Riemannian, symplectic, and complex (or algebraic). Theorem 3.1.1 is basically a Riemannian statement (de Rham theorem on the holonomy groups). The curve count, seemingly a pure complex problem, at present can be properly approached only from the symplectic direction revealing its "quasi-topological" nature. In this report we will concentrate upon algebro-geometric aspects of this vast and complex picture. 3.2. The structure of the mirror conjecture. Consider a Calabi-Yau threefold V and a complete local deformation family W z , Z E Z of CalabiYau threefolds. We will say that V and Wz are mirror related if a certain characteristic function F counting maps
.cw
.cw
YU.I.MANIN
232
3.2.2. Counting curves on V and function F. Given premirror data 3.2.1, we proceed as follows.
The holomorphic tangent sheaf Tu to U(V) is canonically trivialized because U is a domain in the complex vector space Pic (V) ® C = H2 (V, C): Tu = Pic (V) ® Ou. We define the Ou-linear map (3.1)
by
F(H,El ®E2 ® E 3 )
e21ri (O,H)
= (EIE2 E 3) + ~ 1- e21ri(O,H) (C,E1 )(C,E2)(C,E3 ).
(3 2) .
o
Here HE Uj Ei E Pic (V) are interpreted as vector fields on Uj (,) means the intersection index, or cup-productj finally, C runs over rational curves in V. However, the sum on the r.h.s. of (3.2) can be understood literally only if all rational curves in V are isolated and have the normal sheaf O( -1) $ O( -1). Otherwise the local contributions of rational curves can be formally defined by a general position argument involving a deformation of the complex structure of V which makes it non-integrable. More generally, this argument leads to the introduction of the so called Gromov-Witten invariants and quantum cohomology rings. Although these notions belong to the most significant geometric discoveries made by quantum field theorists, we have to omit their discussion because of the lack of mathematically rigorous treatment. 3.2.3. Calculating periods of W and function G. For the local family W. --+ Z, we have denoted by .c the sheaf R1I".n~ /z of holomorphic volume forms on the fibers of 11". We will now define an Oz-linear map
11":
(3.3)
as a symbol map of a Picard-Fuchs operator, or infinitesimal variation of Hodge structure. Specifically, consider the exact sequence
o --+ Tw/z
--+ Tw --+ 11"" (Tz) --+
o.
Its boundary map is the Kodaira-Spencer morphism
Tz --+ R 11l". Tw/z
(3.4)
which is an isomorphism if Z is a versal deformation. The convolution map i: Tw/z x n~/z --+ n~/~ induces a pairing
Rl 11". 'T' R l 11".. (.). t. IW/Z or a Oz-map
"'"
'C>IOz
Rq 11". npw/z
--+ Rq+l 11". Hnp-l W/Z ,
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
233
Iterating this map three times we get
Actually, this map is symmetric because according to Ph. Griffiths it is the symbol map of the Gauss-Manin connection extended to the differential operators of order 3. Using the relative Serre duality, one can identify the r.h.s. of (3.5) with {,-2. Finally, composing (3.5) with the Kodaira-Spencer map S3(Tz) ~ S3(R11r. Tw/z) , we obtain the function G in (3.5).
3.2.4. Definition. The premirror data 3.2.1 are called mirror data if, after the identification of U(V) and Z(W) via q and trivialization of {,-2 via w, F and G coincide. 3.3. Example. For V a generic quintic hypersurface, the relevant mirror data were given in the ground-breaking paper by Ph. Candelas, X. de la Ossa, P. Green, and L. Parkes [9]. In this case, hll(V) = 1, and Z is a neighborhood of zero in C, with complex coordinate z. Evaluating (3.2) on the positive generator H of Pic (V) (hyperplane section) multiplied by t in upper plane, and on El = E2 = E3 = H they get a function F(q), q = e 21fit of the form (3.6)
where nk is the number of rational curves of degree k (with appropriate multiplicities) . The mirror map z t-t q(z) :::: e21fit (z) is calculated to be t(z) =
,,00 fMjlJ A(N)5-5N
-~{lo (5Z-1/5 L.JN=O N! Z 21r~ g )+ ,,00 f5N 5-5N ZN L.JN=O N!
li
A(O)
= 0,
A(N)
=-
5N
L
m=N+l
N }
'
(3.7)
1
m
Put
., ( JO
~ (5N)! -5N N Z) = L.J (N!)5 5 z. N=O
The function G(z) is (3.8)
Finally, the mirror identity states that F(q(z» in a neighborhood of zero.
= G(z)
(3.9)
234
YU.I.MANIN
This identity implies that two cubic differentials F(q)(dq/q)3 and 5
(1 - z)fo(z)2
(dz)3 z
are one and the same differential written in different local coordinates q(z) and z respectively. This reminds one of a Schwarz deritivative related to the linear differential operators of the second order and projective connections. In fact, this analogy can be made quite precise. The relevant differential operator annihilates fo(z): for D
= z:z it can be written as
L = D4 - 5- 4 (5D
+ 1)(5D + 2)(5D + 3)(5D + 4),
and log(5 5 q(z)/z) is a quotient of two solutions of the equation Lf = o. In the remaining part of this report, we will explain Batyrev's construction of toric premirror data. §4. Toric mirrors 4.1. Convex geometry. Let M, N be a pair of free abelian groups of finite rank r = d + 1 endowed with a pairing (,): M x N -+ Z making them dual to each other. In MR = M ® Rand NR = N ® R, we consider a pair of convex compact closed polyhedra OM C M R , ONe N R . Each of them is an intersection of a finite set of closed halfspaces. 4.1.1. Definition.
OM ON
a). OM, ON are dual, if
= {m E MRI(m,n)
~ -1 for all
nEON},
(4.1)
= {n E NRI(m,n} ~ -1 for all mE OM}.
b). (OM, ON) form a mirror pair if they are dual and have integral vertices. If we start with any convex compact closed polyhedron ON and define 0 M by the first line of (4.1), it will also be such a polyhedron, and the second condition will be satisfied automatically. Duality of (OM, 0 N) induces an inclusion reversing isomorphism between the posets of faces of OM and ON. If in addition ON has integral vertices, then co dimension-one faces of 0 M are defined by equations of the type (m,ni) = -1, ni E N, but vertices of OM need not be integral. This is an additional (and restrictive) condition. It can be expressed via point count in (aO N) n N. Specifically, there exists a polynomial lea) of degree r = dimNR such that card (aON n N) = lea) for all integral positive a. T. Hibi proved that 0 M has integral vertices iff I ( -a - 1) = (-1 I (a) for all a. v. Batyrev calls members of mirror pairs reflexive polyhedra. 4.1.2. Lemma. If (0 M, On) form a mirror pair, they contain origin which is their only interior point. Proof. From (4.1), it is obvious that 0 E OM,O E ON, and that 0 does not lie on the boundary.
r
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
235
In order to see that, say, ¢ M does not contain any more integral interior points, represent ¢ M as a union of cones u(E) = ntE[O,l)tE where E runs over all co dimension-one faces of ¢ M • Any interior point mo E ¢ M belongs to some toE,O < to < 1. Hmo lies in the face (m,nE) = -1,nE E N, we have (mO,nE) = -to. Hmo is integral, we must have to = 0, that is rno = O. 4.1.3. Classification results. For every r, there exists only a finite number of reflexive polyhedra, but they are completely enumerated only for r = 1 and 2. There are 16 of them for r = 2, hundreds for r = 3, and thousands for r = 4. Here is one example for general r: put M = zr, ei = the i-th coordinate vector, ¢M = convex envelope of {e!, ... , e r , -(el + ... + (4.2)
ern.
For N ¢N
= Z,. and standard pairing we can easily check that = (-1, ... , -1) + convex envelope of {(r + l)el,""
(r + l)e r , O}.
(4.3)
4.2. Affine toric mirrors. Given a pair of dual lattices M, N as in 4.1, we can construct a pair of tori. Writing elements of M (resp. N) multiplicatively as xm (resp. yn) we put T(N)
= Spec C[xM],
T(M)
= Spec C[yN].
For G m := Spec [t, rl] we have the following canonical identifications: N
= Hom (Gm , T(N»,
M
= Hom (T(N), Gm)
and similarly for T(M). Given in addition a mirror pair of polyhedra (¢ M, ¢ N), we put VM
= 8¢MnM = ¢M nM\ {O}.
(4.4)
and similarly for VN. 4.2.1. Definition. The following two families of affine hypersurfaces in the tori T(M), T(N) are called affine mirrors of each other:
L
V(¢M) = VN: 1-
amx m = 0 (in T(N»,
(4.5)
mEVM
V(¢N)
= VM : 1-
L
bnyn
= 0 (in T(M».
(4.6)
nEVN
Notice that 1 in (4.5), (4.6) is actually xo, resp. yO, corresponding to 0 E ¢M,¢N' A word about our notation. Eventually we will construct toric premirror data as in 3.2.1, where V will be a partial compactification of the family VN and W that of family VM. We try to furnish the principal relevant objects by indices M, resp. N, in such a way that an object covariantly depended on its index.
236
YU.I.MANIN
So T(N) covariantly depends on its lattice of one-parametric subgroups N, and VN is a family of hypersurfaces in T(N), etc. 4.2.2. Example. In the notation of 4.1.3, put x e; in N. Then:
= Xi
in M and ye;
= Yi
r
1-
+L
a Xl··· Xr
1-
1
aixi
= 0,
(4.7)
i=l
'"' 1/ ~Yl1/1 .. ·yrr
Yl ... Yr "
= 0,
(4.8)
V=(Vl, ... ,vr)=f.(l, ... ,l)j O~Lvi~r+l, Vi~O. i
If we compactify T(M) to a projective space by introducing homogeneous coordinates Yi = Yi/Yo, (4.8) becomes the complete linear system of hypersurfaces
of degree r
+ 1 in pr:
VM: LBI'Yr ... y:r=o,LJ.ti=r+l,J.ti~O.
(4.9)
I'
For r ~ 4, they are Calabi-Yau manifolds outside the discriminantal locus defined by a universal polynomial in coefficients BI': D(BIJ) = O. For r = 3 (resp. r = 2), they are quartic K3-surfaces and cubic plane curves respectively. We have h11 = 1 for V M. On the other hand, (4.7) is actually a one-parameter family since ai's can be made constant by rescaling Xi'S. After some variable change in (4.7) and a suitable compactification, we obtain in this way for r = 4 the quintic mirrors of 3.4. In order to discuss in a more systematic way compactifications both in the toric spaces T(M), T(N) and the coefficient spaces am, bn we will briefly recall some constructions of toric geometry. 4.3. Toric (partial) compactifications. Let L be a lattice of finite rank, a c LR a closed convex cone with vertex in origin. We will be working only with cones finitely generated by a family of elements of L. Put at = {l* E LR.I(l*, I} ~ 0 for alll E a}, and
A.,.
= Spec (EBIE.,..CX I ).
The affine variety A.,. contains T(L), i.e., at n L* generates L* as a group, iff a is strictly convex that is, does not contain a non-trivial subspace. The natural action of T(L) upon itself extends to the action T(L) x A.,. -+ A.,.. So A.,. is a partial toric compactification of T(L). A more general construction of of compactifications is obtained if one glues together A.,. 's for an appropriate family of cones. Such families are called fans. For us, a fan 6. in LR is a finite family of strictly convex cones, containing all faces of all its elements and such that the intersection of any two cones is a face of each of them. We put P(6.) =
II A.,./(natural equivalence relation). "'E~
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
237
When 1.6.1 := UITE~O' = LR, P(.6.) is a complete toric variety which can be considered as a natural generalization of projective space. 4.4. Compactifying members of affine families VN, VM. For a reflexive polyhedron OM, denote by F(OM) the set of OM-compatible fans .6. M in MR, i.e., fans satisfying the following conditions: 4.4.1. Definition. .6.M is OM-compatible if the following hold: a). Every 1-cone of.6.M is generated by some m E VM, and every m E VM generates some 1-cone of .6.M. b) . .6. M is simplicial, i.e., every d-dimensional cone of.6. M is generated by d 1-cones. c) . .6. M is projective, i.e., there exists a strictly convex function 1] : MR -+ R linear on every cone of .6.M. The property b) implies that P(.6. M ) has only abelian quotient singularities. In c), fJ is said to be strictly convex (with respect to .6.M) if it is convex, and every maximal subset of MR on which it is linear is a cone of maximal dimension of .6. M . The property c) implies that P(.6.M) is a projective variety. The set F( 0 M) is obviously finite. Less obvious but true is that it is nonempty (condition c) can be satisfied). 4.4.2. Definition. Given a mirror pair (OM, ON), a pair of fans dM E F(OM), dN E F(ON), the Calabi-Yau families of the corresponding to ric premirror data consist of fiber compactified families V N C P(.6.N) = T(N), V M C
P(.6. M
)
= T(M).
Remark. Since P(.6.M),P(dN) have only abelian quotient singularities, its (anti)canonical divisor is Q-Cartier. Families V N, V M are precisely anticanonical systems of divisors. For r = 4 (d = 3), their generic members are nonsingular Calabi-Yau manifolds; for d ~ 4 they are generalized Calabi-Yau varieties with mild singularities. 4.5. Secondary lattices and tori. Equations (4.5) (resp. (4.6)) show that points of VM (resp. VN) define some one-parameter deformations of hypersurfaces V N (resp. V M) represented by coefficients am, m E VM (resp. bn , n E VN). On the other hand, according to 4.4.1 a), these points correspond bijectively to I-cones of dM (resp. dN) that is, to the irreducible divisors Dm at infinity of Pic P(.6. M ) (resp. Pic P(.6. N )) which in turn define one-parameter subgroups in Pic P(.6. M ) (resp. Pic P(.6. N )) and by restriction, on members of V M (resp. V N). This is the first approximation to the second part of the premirror data where we need spaces parametrizing simultaneously members of V N and elements of Pic P(.6. N ) ® C, and vice versa. To get the second approximation, we want to take into account that am, m E vM, can never parametrize V N effectively because the whole linear system is acted upon by T(N). Similarly, rays in Pic P(.6. M )®C generated by Dm, mE v M , cannot be linearly independent because divisors of monomials reduce to zero in Pic. In order to proceed systematically, we have to construct new pairs of lattices and tori.
YU.I.MANIN
238
4.5.1. Secondary lattices. Denote by Z[VM] the free abelian group generated by VM, and similarly for VN. Let ReI(vM) be the kernel of the natural homomorphism Z[VM] -+ M: EmElIM cm[m] I-t E cmm, and similarly for N. The image of this homomorphism if c M is a lattice of finite index in M, and similarly we define fy eN. Thus we have exact sequences
if -+ 0,
(4.10)
0-+ ReI(vN) -+ Z[VN] -+ fy -+ O.
(4.11)
0-+ Rel(vM) -+ Z[VM] -+
Denote by LN (resp. LM) the lattice dual to ReI(vM) (resp. ReI(vN))' Since (4.10) and (4.11) split, the dual sequences are exact. Identifying Z(VM)* (resp. Z(VN)*) with space offunctions Z" M (resp. Z" N ) and putting M* = N', fy* = M', we get exact sequences
o -+ N' -+ Z" o-+ M' -+ Z"N M
-+ LN -+ 0,
(4.12)
-+ LM -+ O.
(4.13)
Clearly, N c N' C NQ, Me M' c MQ. The embedding N -+ Z"M is just the restriction to v M of N as the group of functions on M, and similarly for N. 4.5.2. Positive cones. Denote by Rel~o(vN) the semigroup of relations with non-negative coefficients, and by Rel~o(vN) the respective cone in R[VN]. Denote by eM C LM ® R the image of R~~ in LM ® R. Spaces ReI(vL) ® R and LM ® R are dual. Using the standard facts of convex duality, one sees that
Rel~o(vN)
= ek,
Rel~o(vM)
= e~.
We will now construct tori T(LN), T(L M ) and show that they naturally parametrize simultaneously pre-mirror pairs (moduli space/complexified Picard group), or at least some subspaces of the latter, when toric linear systems do not form locally versal families. Then we will use cones eM, eN in order to construct their partial compactifications crucial for understanding the mirror map. 4.6. Theorem.
There exist two natural maps T(LN)(C) -+ Mod(VN),
(4.14)
T(LN)(C) -+ Pic (V M) ® C
(4.15)
and similarly with (M, N) reversed. (The second map is multivalued: see (4. 16) below). Proof. a). By definition, T(LN)
= Spec [Lt.] = Spec C[Rel(vM)]'
Writing ReI (v M) multiplicatively, we identify it with the group of monomials TImElIM a~ such that ~ c,.,.m = 0, c,.,. E Z. For a point ~ E T(N)(C), put ~m = xm(~) E C*. The natural action of T(N): xm I-t ~mxm, am I-t ~-mam leaves (4.5) invariant, and C[ReI(vM)]
239
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
can be identified with the span of T(N) invariant monomials in am. Hence C points of T(LN) bijectively correspond to the T(N)-orbits of hypersurfaces in V N defined by equations with all am '" O. This defines (4.14). More algebraically, we have an affine hypersurface (4.5) in T(ZtlM) x T(N) which is invariant with respect to the described T(N) action. The affine quotient gives a hypersurface in T(ZtlM) x T(N) /T(N), which can be identified with T(LN) x T(N') by choosing a splitting of (4.12). There is a natural isogeny T(N) -+ T(N') which allows one to lift this hypersurface back to T(LN) xT(N). b). For an arbitrary torus T(L), we have a natural identification L ® C = Lie T(L)(C) which defines the exponential map exp: L ® C -+ T(L)(C). We can explicitly define an inverse map log: T(L)(C) -+ L ® R
+ it ® R/27riL
whose real part is
L" 3 m
1-+
log Ix m (1])1 E R, 1] E T(L)(C),
and imaginary part is
On the other hand, (4.12) up to isogeny coincides with
so that we have a natural isomorphism
whereas LN C Pic (P(~M ))®R is a lattice commensurable with Pic (P(~M)) (and coinciding with it if VM generates exactly Mover Z as one sees from (4.10), (4.12)). So finally we get, combining with res: Pic (P(~M)) -+ Pic (V M): res 0 log: T(LN )(C) -+ Pic (P(~M)) ® R EB Pic (P(~M)) ® Ri/27riLN -+ Pic (VM) EB Pic (VM) ®Ri/27ri res(LN).
(4.16)
This is our multivalued map (4.15). 4.7. Partial compactification. The cone eN C LN ® R dual to e~ = defines the affine toric variety A~N :J T(N) whose function ring a';;: with Cm ~ o. Hence it is just the span of T(N)-invariant monomials contains in particular the point am = 0 for all m which defines the maximally degenerate anticanonical hypersurfaces in P(~N), the sum of all divisors at infinity. We will use this degeneration below in order to trivialize the bundle of holomorphic volume forms on fibers of VN by choosing a form with period 1 along a specific invariant cycle in the neighborhood of the degenerate hypersurface. ReI~o(vM) ® R
n
YU.I.MANIN
240
Now we proceed to refine the compactification AON by taking into account various possible choices of ll.M E F(OM)' For the proof of the following result, see Oda-Park [22]. Consider the cone of convex functions on M ® R linear on all cones of ll.M. Restrict them on R 11M and then consider the image of the resulting cone in LN ® R. Denote this image E(ll.M) C LN ® R. 4.8. Proposition. a). E(ll.M) is a closed convex finite polyhedml cone in LN ® R. Under the identification LN ® R = Pic (P(~M))R it coincides with the closure of the ample cone of Pic (P(~M))' b). All cones E(~M) for ~M E F(OM) and their faces form a finite convex polyhedml fan I( 0 M) with support EN; the cones E(~M) themselves are all cones of maximal dimension of this fan. In this way we get the following diagram of spaces:
The closed point the closed points
PeN
E
AON
corresponding to
am
= 0,
m E
VM,
is covered by
PE(~M) E AE(~M)' ~M E F(OM)'
Of course, the similar picture of partial compactifications of T(L M ) takes place in the mirror setting. We now look at (parts of) T(LM )(C) as a space parametrizing (parts of) Pic (P(~N))®C for various ~N E F(OM) and therefore furnishing the arguments of the function F counting rational curves on the members of various compactified families V N = V N(dN)' From this vantage point, the cones E(ll.N) correspond to various convergence domains of the same function which in its G-avatar depends on the moduli of V M and does not see any difference between various compactifications ll.N. We will now make this more precise. 4.9. Curve counting function. We want to define an analog of the function F (see 3.3) in our situation. We will choose a fan ~N E F( 0 N) and count rational curves C on a hypersurface V E I-Kp(~N )1, or more precisely, parametrized rational curves which are non-constant maps
Put Define also
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
241
The positivity property above implies the following fact:
IqC(~)1
< 1 for all CPo
and all ~ E U(LlN) C T(LM)(C),
Iqc(~)1-+ 0 as Im(t(~)) -+ 00 in c(LlN).
Consider now the holomorphic tangent vector bundle TT(LM )(C). It can be canonically trivialized by invariant vector fields. Restricting upon U(LlN) we get TU(Ll N ) ~ U(LlN) X LM ® C. Finally we define (now assuming dim (P(dN))
= 4):
Ft:. N : Sa(TU(Ll N )) = U(LlN) x Sa(LM ® C) -+ U(LlN) xC, Ft:.N
(~; E I , E 2, Ea) = (~; (ElE2 E 3) + ~ 1 ~eq~~~) (Ie, El){le, E 2){le, Ea)).
We remind the reader that algebro-geometric aspects of summing over C's are far from being firmly established: see [14], [15], [1]. Consider now the open embedding
The closure U(LlN) of U(LlN) in Ag(t:. N) (C) contains the maximal degeneracy point Pg(t:.N)' and all qe extend to this point and vanish there so that Ft:. N (pg(t:.N);El ,E2,Ea)
= (EI~Ea).
We expect that Ft:.N is meromorphic in the interior of U(LlN)' Let us put now U(ON)
= rl(LM ® R/LM + iCM) = Ut:.NEF(~N)U(LlN)'
4.9.1. Question. Does there exist a meromorphic function Ft:. on Sa(T) whose restriction on U ( 0 N) coincides with F t:.N ? IT the answer to this question is positive, this means that counting curves on a set of flops of anticanonical toric hypersurfaces reduces to choosing various branches of the same analytic characteristic function. 4.10. Periods of the mirror family. We now want to define the function G on a part Z of T(LM)(C) considered as a moduli space for (compactified) hypersurfaces in T(M). We will assume that there exists a fan LlM E F( 0 M) such that the generic member of V M = 1- Kp(t:. M ) 1is smooth. For d = 3 (r = 4) any LlM will do. For Z we will take U(LlM) T(LM) \ D(LlM) where D(LlM) is the discriminantal divisor of non-smooth anticanonical hypersurfaces. In this way we get as in 3.3 (W = VM):
=
where
.c is the sheaf of holomorphic volume forms.
YU.I.MANIN
242
4.10.1. Trivialization of C. To make it, we must choose a section w of 7r.ntv/z; it suffices to define it up to sign. Following D. Morrison [20], [21] we suggest to do it by choosing an appropriate invariant cycle 'Y in the local system of homology groups Hd(VM,o, Z), a E T(LM) \ D(dM) = U(dM). A complete understanding of the situation requires a description of the relevant modular group representation
7r1(U(dM),a) -+ Aut (Hd(VM,o,Z» which we lack at the moment. However the following prescription fits all the examples. a). Invariant cycle. Consider a (d + 1)-dimensional topological torus 'YT = 1 (8 )d+1 c T(M)(C) given by Ixnl = 1 for all n E N. Denote by U c U(dM) the set of points a = {anln E VN} in U(dM) for which EnEUlanl < 1. This means that 'YT n VM,o = 0 for a E U, so that
bT] E Hd+1(P(dM), VM,o; Z). IT d is odd (e.g. d = 3) we have a surjective map
0: Hd+1(P(dM), VM,o) -+ Hd(VM,o)' Denote by 'Yo the image of bTl in Hd(VM,o, Z). By construction, it is monodromy invariant over at least U C T(LM)(C). Recall that geometrically 0 can be described as follows. Take a small tubular neighborhood r(VM,o) in P(dM), then r(VM,o) \ VM,o restricts to an 8 1 fibration a(VM,o) C r(VM,o) over VM,o' For a cycle 'Y in VM,o, take its inverse image 'Y' in a(VM,o)' Then ob') = 'Y. b). Residue map. Denote by nd+1(log VM,o) the sheaf of merom orphic forms Wp on P(dM) with pole of order ~ 1 on VM,o' There exists a well defined map res: HO(p(6. M ),n d+1(log VM,a)) -+ HO(VM,a,n~M.J for which
.1
1 -2 7r1
wp
"f
= [ res(wp). J8"f
c}. Trivialization of C. Choose wP,o in such a way that
1
WP,o
= 27ri,
"fT
i. e.
1
res(wp,o) = 1
"fa
and trivialize C by choosing Wa = res(wP,a) as a unit section. Changing orientation of 'YT results in changing the sign of Wo' d). An explicit calculation of WP,a' On the affine chart T(LN) x T(M) with coordinates (an, x?') where n E VN, nl," .nd+l is a basis of N, we can put
WP,a
= (1-
L nEVN
anxn)-lxl1dx1
1\ .•. 1\
Xd~l dXd+1'
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
243
For a E fj, we can expand this and easily calculate:
(27ri~d+l
1
WP,a
= 1+
:E (:E len))! II a~n) /l(n)! := neal
IERel~(tlN) nEtiN
'YT
nEtlN
so that finally 1
Wa
= (27ri)dn(a) res(wp,a).
4.11. Concluding remarks. We have now completed the construction of the toric pre-mirror data. This construction has however two drawbacks. The first is that T(L M ) (resp. T(LN») not always parametrize the whole Mod (resp. Pic) spaces. This is however true when Aut P(~M)has T(M) as its connected component, and in general we can hope that partial toric premirrors constructed here extend to complete mirror data. The second is that we lack a general definition of the mirror maps q. The identity map of T(LN) (resp. T(LM» certainly is not the correct one; as examples suggest, it is "tangent" to the correct one. Educated guesses about q in various situations were made in [21], [6],
[9]. Addendum
(July 1994) This report was written about a year ago. This version is only slightly revised and corrected. Here is a list of some new results related to the questions discussed in the paper.
Counting points. E. Peyre [23] formulated a fairly precise conjecture about the constant c in (1.5) for anticanonical heights. He defined a Tamagawa measure that depends on a choice of the anticanonical height; the relevant Tamagawa number is the main ingredient of his constant. He has verified his prediction for certain small blow-ups. He has also checked that it agrees with previous calculations for generalized flag varieties and the singular series' for complete intersections furnished by the circle method. One remaining indeterminacy concerns the contribution of the Brauer group and/or more general obstructions of local to-global type. P. Salberger (paper in preparation) has shown that p 2 with four blownup points over Q and deleted exceptional curves has O(H(logH)4) points of height ~ H. His method is a refinement of that in [18]. A very careful strategy of estimates allows him to save one logarithm; unfortunately, it falls short of giving an asymptotic formula. V. V. Batyrev and Yu. Tschinkel (paper in preparation) established the expected analytic properties of the height zeta function of toric varieties, at least for anisotropic tori. They developed a generalization of the Tate method which proved to be very efficient for studying this problem. In particular their
244
YU.I.MANIN
constant has the same general structure as Peyre's one, with clearly visible contribution from the local-to-global obstructions. Counting curves. An axiomatic treatment of the so called Gromov-Witten classes which is the mathematical basis of curve counting is given in
M. Kontsevich, Yu. Manin. Gromov Witten classes, quantum cohomology, and enumerative geometry. MPI preprint, 1994 (to appear in Comm. Math. Phys.) This paper also contains a detailed discussion of the Fano case, which we omitted here concentrating on the Calabi-Yau varieties. The existence theorems for Gromov-Witten classes in the context of symplectic geometry are proved in Y. Ruan and G. Tian. Mathematical theory of quantum cohomology, preprint, 1994. See also A. Givental and B. Kim, Quantum cohomology of flag manifolds and Toda lattices, preprint hep-th/9312096 M. Kontsevich developed a very promising algebro-geometric approach to the curve counting and derived precise formulas in M. Kontsevich, Enumeration of rational curves via torus actions, MPI preprint, 1994. REFERENCES
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
[8] [9]
Aspinwall, P. and Morrison, D., Topological field theory and rational curves, Comm. Math. Phys., 151 (1993), 245-262. Batyrev, V.V., Dual polyhedra and mirror symmetry for Calabi-Yau hypersurfaces in to ric varieties, Essen University preprint, 1992. _ _ , Variation of mixed Hodge structures of affine hypersurfaces in algebraic tori. Essen University preprint, 1992. _ _, Quantum cohomology rings of to ric manifolds, MSRI preprint, 1993. Batyrev, V.V. and Manin Yu.I., Sur Ie nombre des points rationnels de hauteur bornee des varietes algebriques, Math. Ann., 286 (1990), 27-43. Batyrev, V.V. and van Straten, D., Generalized hypergeometric functions and rational curves on Calabi- Yau complete intersections in toric varieties, Essen University preprint, 1993. Bershadsky, M., Cecotti, S., Ooguri, H.and Vafa, C., Holomorphic anomalies in topological field theories. HUTP preprint 1993. _ _, Kodaira-Spencer theory of gravity and exact results for' quantum string amplitudes. HUTP preprint 1993. Candelas, P., de la Ossa, X., Green, P.S. and Parkes, L., A pair of CalabiYau manifolds as an exactly soluble superconformal theory, Nuclear Phys. 359 (1991), 21-74.
RATIONAL POINTS AND CURVES
[10]
[11]
[12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[17] [18] [19] [20] [21]
[22] [23] [24] [25]
245
Demazure, M., A utomorphismes et deformations des varietes de Borel. Invent. Math. 39 (1977),179-186. Ellingsrud, G. and Stromme, S.A., The number of twisted cubic curves on the general quintic threefold, Essays on Mirror Manifolds. (Ed. by S.T. Yau), Internat. Press, Hong Kong, 1992, 181-240. Franke, J., Manin, Yu.I. and Tschinkel,Yu., Rational points of bounded height on Fano varieties, Invent. Math. 95 (1989), 421-435. Katz, Sh., On the finiteness of rational curves on quintic threefolds. Compositio Math. 60 (1986), 151-162. _ _, Rational curves on Calabi-Yau threefolds, Essays on Mirror Manifolds. (Ed. by S.T. Yau), Internat. Press, Hong Kong, 1992., 168-180. Kontsevich, M., Aoo-algebras in mirror symmetry. Talk at the Bonn Arbeitstagung, 1993. Libgober, A. and Teitelbaum, J., Lines on Calabi-Yau complete intersections, mirror symmetry, and Picard-Fuchs equations. Duke MJ, Invent. Math., Res. Notices 1 (1993), 29. Manin, Yu.I., Notes on the arithmetic of Fano threefolds. Composito Math. 85 (1993), 37-55. Manin, Yu.l. and Tschinkel, Yu., Points of bounded height on del Pezzo surfaces. Composito Math., 85 (1993), 315-332. Mori, S., Threefolds whose canonical bundles are not numerically effective. Ann. of Math. 116 (1982), 133-176. Morrison, D., Mirror symmetry and rational curves on quintic 3-folds: A guide for mathematicians, Duke University preprint, 1991~ _ _, Picard-Fuchs equations and mirror maps for hypersurfaces, Essays on Mirror Manifolds. (Ed. by S.T. Yau) , Internat. Press, Hong Kong, 1992.,241-264. Oda, T. and Park, H.S., Linear Gale transform and Gelfand-KapranovZelevinsky decomposition. T6hoku Math. J. 43 (1991),375-399. Peyre, E., Hauteurs et mesures de Tamagawa sur les varietes de Fano, Max-Planck-Inst. preprint 1993. Schmidt, W.M., The density of integer points on homogeneous varieties. Acta Math. 154 (1985), 243-296. Witten E. Mirror manifolds and topological field theory. Essays on Mirror Manifolds. (Ed. by S.T. Yau), Internat. Press, Hong Kong, 1992., 265278.
SURVEYS IN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY, 1995 Vol. 2 @1995, International Press
Rectifiability of the singular sets of multiplicity 1 minimal surfaces and energy mininimizing maps LEON SIMON
Introduction. The question of what can be said about the structure of the singular set of minimal surfaces arises naturally from the work of the pioneers in the field of geometric measure theory/geometric calculus of variations, including De Giorgi [6], Reifenberg [21], Federer [8], [9], Almgren [1], [2], and Allard [3]. During the 1960's and 70's these authors established a partial regularity theory and existence theory for minimal submanifolds. An analogous theory for energy minimizing maps between Riemannian manifolds was later established by Schoen and Uhlenbeck [24] and (in case of image contained in a single coordinate chart) by Giaquinta & Giusti [11], and similar questions about the structure of the singular set of such minimizing maps naturally arise from their work. In recent years some progress has been made on these questions, and this paper has two main aims: First, we want to make a brief survey of these recent results and, second, we want to give a proof of the fact that the singular set of a minimal submanifold in a "multiplicity one class" M (see the discussion in §l below for the terminology) locally decomposes into a finite union of locally m-rectifiable locally compact subsets, where m is the maximum dimension of singularities which can occur in the class M. The proof of this, given in §7, exactly parallels the proof of the corresponding result (described in Theorem 2 below and first proved in [32]) for the singular set of energy minimizing maps into a real-analytic target; thus the reader will see that the proof given in §7 follows almost exactly, step by step, the proof of the main theorem of [32] (to the extent that even the labelling system is almost identical). The methods used in the proofs of all the recent results on the structure of the singular set (as presented in Theorems 1-7 below) are a mixture of geometric measure theory and PDE methods. The PDE methods involve in part ideas originating in quasilinear elliptic theory, developed by C. B. Morrey, E. De Giorgi, O. Ladyzhenskaya, N. Ural'tseva, J. Moser, and others, principally during the period from the late 1930's to the mid 1970's. A precise outline of the present paper is as follows: §l: Basic definitions, and a survey of known results. §2: Basic properties of mulitiplicity one classes of minimal surfaces. §3: A rectifiability lemma and gap measures for certain subsets of R". Partially supported by NSF grant DMS-9207704 at Stanford University; part of the work described here was carried out during visits to the Pure Mathematics Department, University of Adelaide, and ETH, Ziirich. The author is grateful for the hospitality of these institutions. 'l.R
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
§4: §5: §6: §7: §8:
247
Area estimates for multiplicity one classes of minimal surfaces. L2 estimates. The deviation function. Proof of Theorem 4. Theorems on Countable Rectifiability.
1 Basic Definitions and a Survey of Known Results. k, l, m, n will denote fixed positive integers with n = l + m ~ 2, and k ~ o. n will be the dimension of the minimal submanifolds or the domain of the energy miminizing maps under consideration. In the case of the minimal submanifolds, k will be the codimension, and l will be the "cross-sectional" dimension of the cylindrical tangent cones, as described below, and in the case of the energy minimizing maps l is the dimension of the domain of the cross-section of the approprate "cylindrical tangent maps" again as described below; in the energy minimizing setting we always take k = O. BZ(z) denotes the open ball with center z and radius p in Rq; Bp(z), Bp will often be used as an abbreviation for B;+k(z), B;+k(O) respectively. TJz,p will denote the map x I-t p-l(x-z). Thus TJz,p translates z to the origin and homotheties by a factor p-l. 1£; will denote j-dimensional Hausdorff measure. First we consider energy minimizing maps: N will denote a smooth compact Riemannian manifold, which for convenience we assume is isometrically embedded in some Euclidean space RP; of course this involves no loss of generality because of the Nash embedding theorem. W l ,2(0;RP) will denote the space of RP functions u = (u l , .•. ,uP) such that each u; and its first order distribution derivatives DiU; are in L2(0); the energy of such a map is £(u)
=
fo IDuI
2,
where IDul 2 = L~=l L~=l (Di Ui )2. If 0 is equipped with a smooth Riemannian metric L gi;dx i ®dx; (so that (gi;) is positive definite and each gii is smooth), then the corresponding energy £(g) is defined by £(g)(u)
=
1t
gi;(x)Diu. D;uygdx,
n i,;==l
(gii)
= (gi;)-I,
For a measurable subset A
Va = det(gii).
c 0, £A(U)
=
i IDuI
2•
W,~'~(Oj RP) denotes the set of u E L~oc(Oj RP) such that u E 'Wl,2(Oj RP) for every bounded 0 with closure contained in 0 (Le., for every open 0 CC 0).
248
LEON SIMON
W 1 ,2(0; N) will denote the set offunctions U E Wl,2(0; RP) such that u(x) E N for a.e. x E 0, and WI~';(OjN) denotes the set of U E WI~';(OjRn) with u(:c) E N for a.e. :c E O. U E Wl~; (OJ N) is said to be energy minimizing in 0 if
-
=
12
-
whenever 0 CC 0 and v E W1o'c (0; N) satisfies v U a.e. in 0\0. For any such energy minimizing map we define the regular and singular sets, reg U and singu, by reg u = {z EO: u is Coo in a neighbourhood of z}, sing u = 0\ reg u. Notice that by definition regu is open, and hence singu is automatically relatively closed in O. If u E Wl,2(Oj N) is energy minimizing, then for any fi Cc 0 the energy Co is evidently stationary in the sense that
(1.1)
=
whenever the derivative on the left exists, provided Uo u and Us E Wl~'; (OJ N) with us(x) uo(x) for x E O\fi and s E (-f, f) for some f > 0. In particular, by considering a family Us = IT(u+s() where IT denotes nearest point projection of an RP-neighbourhood of N onto Nand ( E C~(O; RP), we obtain the system of equations
=
n
~RnU +
(1.2)
L Au (Dju, Dju) = 0, j=1
(weakly in 0), where ~RnU = (~RnUl, ... '~RnUP), and Az denotes the second fundamental form of N at any point zEN. On the other hand if us(x) = u(x + s((x)), where ( E C~(Oj RP), then 1.1 implies the integral identity
In E~j=1(8ijIDuI2 -
2DiU· Dju)Di(j = 0,
(1.3) Notice that 1.3 implies (for a.e. p such that Bp(z) C 0)
I, (1.4)
Bp(z)
t
(8 ij IDul 2
-
2Diu . Dju)Di(j
i,i=l =
1 t 8B p (z)
i,j=l
(8ij1DU12 - 2Di u· DjU)1U(j
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
249
for any (= ((11··· ,(n) E COO(Uj Rn), where 11 = Ix-zl- 1 (x-z) is the outward pointing unit normal for 8Bp (z). In particular ((x) == x - Z implies (1.5) provided Bp(z)
en, where UR. =
(Ix - zl- 1 (x - z)· D)u. This can be written
whence by integration (1.6) for any 0 < (7
(1.1)
< P with Bp(z) C n.
Notice in particular this implies
IDu l2 is an increasing function
p2-n (
of p,
lBp(z)
so the limit (1.8)
9 u (z) == limp 2-n p.j.O
(
IDu l2
lBp(z)
exists at every point zEn. 9 u is called the density function of u. Letting (7 ,j.. 0 in 1.6 we obtain
(1.9) and by using 1.5 we have the alternative identity
We also want to consider "multiplicity one classes" of minimal submanifolds here, the theory of singularities of which are entirely analogous to the theory for energy minimizing maps. First we introduce the basic terminology. M will denote a set of smooth n-dimensional minimal sub manifolds , each M E M is assumed properly embedded in R n+k in the sense that for each x E M there is (7 > 0 such that M n Bu(x) is a compact connected embedded smooth sub manifold with boundary contained in 8Bu(x). We also assume that for each M E M there is a corresponding open set UM ::::> M, such that 1[n (M n K) < 00
250
LEON SIMON
for each M E M and each compact K CUM, and such that M is stationary in UM in the sense that
1M divM IfI dJ.t = O.
(1.1')
whenever IfI = (1fI1, •.. ,lfIn+k) : UM -+ Rn+k is a Coo vector field with compact support in UM. Here dJ.t denotes integration with respect to ordinary n-dimensional volume measure (i.e., n-dimensional Hausdorff measure) on M, and div M IfI is the "tangential divergence" of IfI relative to M. Thus n+k
divM IfI = ~)ej . VM)IfI;,
;=1 where e1, ... , en+k is the standard basis for R n+k, and "V M denotes tangential gradient operator on M, so that if f E C1(U) then "V M f(x) = Pz (gradR ,,+. f(x»), with Pz the orthogonal projection of Rn+k onto the tangent space TzM for any xEM. We assume that the M E M have no removable singularities: thus if x E MnuM and, there is u > 0 such that MnB.,(z) is a smooth compact connected embedded n-dimensional submanifold with boundary contained in IJB.,(z), then z E M. Subject to this agreement, the (interior) singular set of M (relative to UM) is then defined by singM = UM n M\M, and the regular set reg M is just M itself. (We give examples of such M in 1.12 below.) The monotonicity and density results for energy minimizing maps given in 1.5-1.10 have analogues for such stationary minimal submanifoldsj viz. using analogous arguments (starting with 1.1' rather than 1.3-see e.g. [25] for the detailed arguments) we have the identity (1. 7') for any x E M n UM for all U,p with 0 In particular
< u < p < R,
provided BR(X) CUM.
and the density function (1.8')
eM(Z)
== lim(wnrn)-lIM n Bp(z)1 p-l-O
exists for all z E M. (Of course the density is identitically equal to 1 on M, because M is a smooth n-dimensional submanifold.) Letting u .J.. 0 in 1.7' we obtain
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
251
for all z E M and p E (O,R), provided BR(Z) CUM, where (x - z)l.. = (x - Z) (i.e., (x - z)l.. is the orthogonal projection of x - z onto the normal space of M at x). By multiplying through by pn and differentiating with respect to p we also get the following analogue of 1.10:
P(T.M).L
(1.10')
We assume here also that the class M is closed under appropriate homotheties, rigid motions, and weak limits-we shall call such a class a "multiplicity one class" ; more precisely, we assume:
=
1.11(a) M EM=> q 0 1Jx,pM E M and q 0 1J x,pUM UqOf/_.pM for each x E UM, each p E (0,1], and for each orthogonal transformation q of Rn+k.
l.n(b) IT {Mj } C M, U c Rn+k with U C UMj for all sufficiently large and SUPj~1 lI.n(Mj n K) < 00 for each compact K C U, then there is a subsequence Mj' and an M E M such that UM ~ U and Mjl -+ M in U in the measure-theoretic sense that fM.,, f(x) d1l n (x) -+ fM f(x) d1l n (x) for any fixed
i,
continuous
f : R n+k -+ R
with compact support in U.
(Notice that 1. 11 (b) is a strong restriction, in that it precludes, in particular, the possibility of getting varifolds with multiplicity greater than one on a set of positive measure as the varifold limit of a sequence M j C M with each UM; ::) U for some fixed open Uj for this reason we refer to such a class as a multiplicity one class.) 1.12 Examples. In view of later applications, we should mention here a couple of important classes M which satisfy the conditions imposed above. One such class consists of the interior regular sets of the mod 2 minimizing currents described as follows: IT T is an n-dimensinnallocally rectifiable multiplicity one current in Rn+k, if spt2 8T denotes the mod 2 support of aT, if T is mod 2 minimizing in R n+k (in the sense that for each bounded open U c R n+k the mass of T LUis :5 the mass of S L U for any multiplicity one current S such that support of T - S is a compact subset of U and such that T - S has zero mod 2 boundary in U), and if reg2 T is the mod 2 regular set of T defined in the usual way as the set of all x E spt T\ spt2 aT such that T is mod 2 equivalent in a neighbourhood of x to multiplicity one integration over a ~mooth properly embedded n-dimensional sub manifold containing x, then the collection 12 of all such sets M reg2 T is a class M satisfying all the conditions imposed above, provided we take UM = R n+k \ spt2 aT. Indeed by the Allard theorem spt T\(reg T U spt2 aT) has lln-measure zero, and it follows that M = reg2 T satisfies 1.1, and, using the notation introduced above in our discussion of the general class M, we have sing M = spt T\(regT U spt2 aT), which coincides with the usual definition of the (interior) singular set of such mod 2 minimizing currents T. The property 1.11(b) (plus an existence theory) is true by the compactness theorem for flat chains mod p (see e.g. [8]).
=
LEON SIMON
252
Another such class is the collection 13 = {reg3 T} of the interior regular sets of n-dimensional multiplicity one currents T which are mod 3 minimizing in Rn+k (defined analogously to the mod 2 case); if M = reg3 T then M satisfies 1.1 with UM Rn+k\ spt3 aT, and sing M spt T\(regT U spt3 aT). Again the property 1.11 (b) (plus an existence theory) is true by the compactness theorem for flat chains mod p. Notice that these classes 72, 13 have dim sing M ::; (n - 2), (n - 1) respectively by [9], [25]. A third class which has the form of M above is the collection 7i of all submanifolds M of the form M = regT, where T is an n-dimensional oriented boundary of least area in some open U = UT C R n+k, in the usual sense that T = a[V] in U (in the sense of currents) for some measurable V C U and T L U has mass ::; than the mass of S L U, for any multiplicity one locally rectifiable current S in R n+k with support S - T equal to a compact subset of U and with a(S - T) = 0 in U. In this case, with M = regT, we take UM = U, sing M = U n spt T\ (reg T U spt aT), and the singular set satisfies dim singM\sptaT::; n -7 (see e.g. [9] or [25] or [10]). The property 1. 11 (b) in this case is discussed in e.g. [10], [8] or [25].
=
=
We now want to state the main theorems about the singular sets of energy minimizing maps and minimal submanifolds. To do this we first need to recall the definition of rectifiability of subsets of Euclidean space: A subset A C Rn is said to be m-rectifiable if llm(A) < 00, and if A has an approximate tangent space a.e. in the sense that for llm-a.e. z E A there is an m-dimensional subspace Lz such that
where, here and subsequently, '1z,.,.(x) == u- 1 (x - z) and ll m is m-dimensional Hausdorff measure. The above definition of m-rectifiability is well-known (see e.g. [25]) to be equivalent to the requirements that llm(A) < 00 and that 1lm_ almost all of A is contained in a countable union of embedded m-dimensional C1-submanifolds of Rn. A subset A C Rn is said to be locally m-rectifiable if it is m-rectifiable in a neighbourhood of each of its points. Thus for each z E A there is au> 0 such that A n {x : Ix - z I ::; u} is m-rectifiable. Similarly A is locally compact if for each z E A there is u > 0 such that A n {x : Ix - zl ::; u} is compact. Now we give a brief survey of the known results about the the structure of the set of singularities of energy minimizing maps and minimal submanifolds in multiplicity one classes. First we discuss energy minimizing maps: In the theorems concerning energy minimizing maps we continue to let n denote an arbitrary subset of R n, equipped with the standard Euclidean metric, but the reader should keep in mind that all theorems readily generalize to the case where n is equipped arbitrary smooth Riemannian metric gij dx i ® dx j •
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
253
The most general result presently known concerning the structure of the singular set of energy minimizing maps is the following, which was proved (for nCR equipped with arbitrary Reimannian metric) in [32]: Theorem 1. If'U is an energy minimizing map of n into a compact real-analytic Riemannian manifold N, then, for each closed ball Ben, B n sing'U is the union of a finite pairwise disjoint collection of locally (n - 3)-rectifiable locally compact subsets. Remarks. (1) Notice that being a finite union of locally m-rectifiable subsets is slightly weaker than being a (single) locally m-rectifiable subset, in that if A = U~=1 A k , where each Ak is locally m-rectifiable, there may be a set of points y of positive measure on one of the At such that 1[m«Uk#Ak) n B".(y» = 00 for each u > O. (This is possible because Ak has locally finite measure in a neighbourhood of each of its points, but may not have locally finite measure in a neighbourhood of points in the closure Ak and this may intersect At, l:l k.) (2) It is also proved in [32] that 9 u (z) is a.e. constant on each of the sets in the finite collection referred to in the above theorem, and that sing'U has a (unique) tangent plane in the Hausdorff distance sense at 1[m-almost all points z E sing u, and u itself has a unique tangent map at 1-£m-almost all points of singu. (See the discussion of [32] for terminology.) There is an important refinement of Theorem 1 in case (1.13)
dim singu $ m
for all energy minimizing maps into N. In this case the conclusion of Theorem 1 holds with m in place of n - 3: Theorem 2. If u, N are as in Theorem 1, m $ n - 3 is a non-negative integer, and (1.13) holds, then for each closed ball Ben, B n sing'U is the union of a finite pairwise disjoint collection of locally m-rectifiable locally compact subsets. Remarks. (1) As for Theorem 1, again 9 u (z) is constant a.e. on each of the sets in the finite collection referred to in the statement, sing u has a tangent space in the Hausdorff distance sense, and also 'U has a unique tangent map, at 1-£m-almost all points of sing'U. In [26], [28] there are also results about singular sets (albeit for special classes of energy minimizing maps and stationary minimal surfaces), which, unlike the results here, were proved using "blowup methods". In particular we have Theorem 3. If N = 8 2 with its standard metric, or N is 8 2 with a metric which is sufficiently close to the standard metric of 8 2 in the C 3 sense, then singu can be written as the disjoint union of a properly embedded (n - 3)dimensional C 1 ,I'-manifold and a closed set 8 with dim 8 ~ n - 4. If n = 4, then 8 is discrete and the C 1 ,1' curves making up the rest of the singular set have locally finite length in compact subsets of n. For further discussion and proofs, we refer to [27]. There is an analogue of Theorem 2 which applies to an arbitrary subplanifold M in a mulitiplicity one class M of stationary minimal submanifolds:
LEON SIMON
254
Here and subsequently we let
(1.13')
m = max{dim singM : ME M};
this maximum exists and is an integer E {O, ... ,n - I}, as shown in the discussion following 2.7 below. Theorem 4. Suppose M is a multiplicity one class of stationary minimal surfaces as in 1.11, supposem is as in 1.1:1, and ME M. Then for each x E singM there is a neighbourhood Uz of x such that sing M nuz is a finite union of locally m-rectifiable locally compact subsets.
1.14 Remark. Analogous to the remarks after Theorems 1, 2 we have in addition that SM(Z) is constant a.e. on each of the sets in the finite collection referred to in the statement of the theorem, sing M has a tangent space in the Hausdorff distance sense, and also M has a unique tangent map, at 1£m-almost all points of sing M. We give the detailed proof of Theorem 4 and Remark 1.14 in §7 below; as we pointed out in the introduction, the proof involves only very minor technical modifications of the proof of Theorem 2 given in [32]. In view of the examples in 1.12, we thus have in particular the following: Theorem 5. (i) H M is the regular set of an n-dimensional mod 2 mass minimizing current in R n+1c (n, k ~ 2 arbitrary), then the singular set singM is locally a finite union of locally (n - 2)-rectifiable, locally compact subsets. (ii) H M is the regular set of an arbitrary n-dimensional mass minimizing current in R n+l, then sing M can locally be expressed as the finite union of locally (n - 7)-rectifiable, locally compact subsets. (Except for the local compactness result, part (i) of the above theorem is also proved in [26] by using "blowup" methods, which are quite different than the techniques used in the proof of Theorem 4.) In addition to the above results, there are also more special results, proved using blowup techniques in [26], analogous to the results for energy minimizing maps described in Theorem 3. For example, we have the following: Theorem 6. Suppose the m of (1.13) is equal to (n - 1). H M E M, C(O) = C~O) x R E C n Tan zo M with C~O) a I-dimensional cone consisting of an odd . number of rays emanating from 0, and SCCD) (0) = mincET Sc (0), then there is p > 0 such that sing M n Bp(xo) is a properly embedded (n - I)-dimensional C1,a manifold. Theorem 7. If V is an n-dimensional stationary integral varifold in some open set U C Rn+k, and Xo E U with 1 < Sv(xo) < 2, then sing V n Bp(xo) is the union of an embedded (n - I)-dimensional c1,a manifold and a closed set of dimension :5 n - 2. If n = 2 we have the more precise conclusion that there is p > 0 such that either sing V n Bp(xo) is a properly embedded c1,a Jordan arc with endpoints in 8Bp(xo) or else is a finite union of properly embedded locally c1,a Jordan arcs of finite length, each with one endpoint at Xo and one endpoint in 8B p(xo).
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
255
For some special (but important) cla.<3ses of minimal surfaces Jean Taylor [33] and Brian White [35] used methods ba.<3ed on the "epiperimetric" approach of Reifenberg, and, for the special cla.<3ses to which they apply (for example for 2-dimensional U( M, c, a)-minimizing" surfaces), these methods yield a more complete description of the singular set than even that given in Theorem 6. (Theorem 6 refers only to the "top-dimensional" part of the singular set, so does not entirely subsume the results of [33], [35].) 2 Basic Properties of Multiplicity 1 Minimal Submanifolds. Here
M continues to denote a multiplicity one cla.<3s of n-dimensional minimal submanifolds in Rn+k and M EM with UM the corresponding open set a.<3 in 1.11.
C will denote the set of all cones in M i thus C = {C EM: Uc
= Rn+k
and 11o,>.C
= C VA > OJ,
r
where 110,>. is the homothety x t-t AX. will denote the "cylindrical" elements of C with singular axis of dimension m; thus
T
= {C E C : 3
an m-dimensional subspace Le C Rn+k with z
+C =
C V z E Le},
where m is a.<3 in 1.13'; notice that for technical rea.<3onS we include the Ca.<3e where C is an n-dimensional subspace, in which Ca.<3e singC = 0. In all other Ca.<3es, singC = Le. An important consequence of the Allard regularity theorem ([3]-see also [25] for an alternative presentation of this theory) is that the singular set sing M of M can be characterized in terms of the density 9 M a.<3 follows:
where a = a(M) > 0 is independent of M. (Of course it is true that 9 M (z) ~ 1 at all points of UM n M; this follows for example from the fact that 9 M (z) = 1 on M together with the upper semicontinuity of 9M(Z) decribed in 2.3 below.) We shall often use the quantitative part of the main regularity theory of [3]. To state this, a.<3sume z E M, Bp(z) C UM and either (a) w;lp-nIMnBp(z)1 < 1 + a or (b) /3 > 0 is given and both p-nlM n Bp(z)1 < /3 and infL p-n-2 fMnBp(z) dist(x, L)2 < a, where the inf is taken over all n-dimensional affine spaces in R n+k. Then the main theorems of [3] tell us that if either hypothesis (a) with suitable a = a(n, k) > 0 or hypothesis (b) with suitable 0: = a(n,k,/3,M) > 0 implies MnBp/ 2 (z) eM and (2.2)
sup
pi-1IDjul::; Cj 0: 1 / 2 ,
j ~ 0,
LnBp/ 2 (z)
where Cj depends only on j, L is an n-dimensional affine space containing z, and u : L nB3p/ 4(Z) -+ L.l. is such that B3p/ 4(Z) n graphu = B 3P /4(Z) n M. Indeed the conclusion subject to the first hypothesis (that w;lp-nIMnBp(z)1 < l+a)
LEON SIMON
256
is just one of the standard versions of the Allard theorem and the conclusion subject to the second hypothesis is easily checked to follow from the Allard theorem together with the compactness assumption 1. 11 (b) on M. By the monotonicity 1.7' it is easy to check that eM is an upper semicontinuous function: eM(Z) ~ lim sup eMj (Zj)
(2.3)
Zj-U
for any sequences of points Zj -+ Z and submanifolds M j E M with Mj -+ M in the sense of 1.l1(b). 2.2 and 2.3 will be used frequently in the sequel. For the present, notice that if we define Mz,u
= '1z,u M ,
for any given Z E UM n M and U E (0,1], then, according to monotonicity 1.7', we have that Mz,u has bounded area in any ball BR(O) as U .j.. 0, and hence the compactness assumption 1.l1(b) implies that for any Uj .j.. 0 there is a subsequence uj' such that Mz,uj' -+ C, where C E M with Uc = Rn+A:. Any such C is called a tangent cone of M at z. Using the monotonicity 1.7' it is easy to check (see [3] or [25]) that any such C is a cone with vertex at 0, so C is invariant under homothetiesj that is, (2.4) and also that eM(Z)
(:l.5)
'1o,uC
= ec(O). ec(O)
=C,
u
> 0,
An important property of cones C in M is that
= max{ec(z)
: z E C},
and the set of points z where equality is attained form a linear subspace Lc (possibly the trivial subspace {OJ), and we also have the translation invariance
z +C
(2.6)
=C,
z E Lc.
These facts are easily checked by using 1.7' (with C in place of M) and 2.4. We emphasize that 2.5 and 2.6 automatically hold for C E M which are coneSj i.e., which have Uc = Rn+k and 1]o,uC = C. There is another way in which such cones C E C arise, which is a slight variant of the idea of tangent cone. We let M EM, z E M and take arbitrary sequences Zj -+ z with eM(Zj) ~ eM(Z), Uj .j.. o. Then (again using monotonicity to justify the local boundedness of the area) by the compactness assumption of 1. 11 (b) we can take a subsequence {j'} C {j} such that Mz;"u;, converges to C, which again satisfies the invariance 2.4. We shall call such a map a pseudo tangent cone of M at z. Notice that if Zj = Z for each j, then this procedure is the same as the procedure above for constructing tangent cones, hence the terminology "pseudo tangent map". (The proofthat 2.4 holds in this case forms part of the argument in the proof of Lemma 2.16 below.) From now on m is defined by (2.7)
m
= sup{dim singM
: ME M}.
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
257
Notice by Federer's dimension reducing argument or by the more refined method of Almgren (see the discussion following 2.17 below) it is automatic that m is an integer, and that m ~ n - 1. Indeed to begin we can define mo = max dim Lc over all cones C E C with singC '" 0. Since clearly singC C Lc (by 2.6), we must then have m ~ mo. The fact that m ~ mo follows direct from 2.16 below (see Remark (3) following 2.16, keeping in mind that the proof of 2.16 used only that dimLc ~ m for each cone C E M with singC '" 0). Thus the m of 2.7 automatically satisfies
mE {O, ... ,n - 1},
m = maxdimLc,
where the maximum is over C E C with sing C '" 0. Of course if C E C with sing C '" 0, and dim Lc = m (i.e., dim Lc maximal), then we must have that sing C = Lc, because otherwise by the homogeneity 2.4 and the translation invariance 2.6 sing C would contain some (m + I)-dimensional half-space, contradicting 2.7. Cleary then, letting q be an orthogonal transformation of Rn which takes Lc to {OJ x Rm, such C must satisfy, for (x, y) E Rl+k X Rm = Rn+k (l = n - m ~ 1), (2.8)
where Co is a minimal cone in R l+k with Co n Sl+k-l
(2.9)
= E,
with E a compact (l- 1)-dimensional embedded submanifold of Sl-l+k (or a finite set of points if l = 1); thus for l ~ 2 we have in particular .that
(2.10)
HI::
=
0,
where HI:: is the mean-curvature of E as a submanifold of Sl-l+k j thus for l E is a compact minimal submanifold of Sl+k-l. For given {3 > 0 we define
Tp = {C E T : 9c(0)
(2.11)
~ 2
~ {3},
where T denotes the set of cylindrical C E C as defined at the beginning of this section. Using 2.2,2.7, and the compactness 1.11(b), it is easy to check that the set Tp is sequentially compact in M with respect to convergence as in l.11(b), and that 3
(2.12)
LsuplDjAcol ~ C, j=o I::
C E Tp,
j ~ 0,
where C = C(l, k, (3), Co, E are as in 2.8, 2.9, and Aco is the second fundamental form of Co. Finally we need a Lojasiewicz type inequality for the area functional on (i - 1)-dimensional minimal submanifolds of Sl-l+k j we begin by noting that, according to Lojasiewicz [20], if f is a real-analytic function on some open set
LEON SIMON
258
U of some Euclidean space R Q, then for each critical point y E U of I (i.e., each point y where 'V I(y) 0) there is 0: E (0,1] and C, 17 > 0 such that
=
I/(x) - l(y)1 1-a/2
(2.13)
::;
CI'V l(x)1
for every point x E BIT (y). There is an infinite dimensional analogue of this inequality which applies to the area functional AE over a given compact (i-l)dimensional submanifold 1:: of Sl-l+k. Specifically, for any such 1:: C Sl-I+k let AE denote the area functional over 1:: defined by
where 1/J is a C3 section of the normal bundle over 1::, and GE(1/J) means the "spherical graph" of 1/J defined by
Then there is 0:
= 0:(1::) E (0,1], C = C(1::), and 17 = 17(1::) > 0 such that
(2.14) whenever 11/Jlc3 < 17, where QE is the Euler-Lagrange operator of the functional A E • Thus QE is characterized by being an operator taking C 2 sections of the normal bundle over 1:: to CO sections of this bundle such that
IE
where the inner product is the usual L2 inner product given by (I, g) L2 = I·g. For the proof of 2.14 (based on the Liapunov-Schmidt reduction to reduce to the finite dimensional case 2.13) we refer to [30] or [31]. Now take any M EM, Zo E sing M, and define (2.15) Then we have the following lemma:
2.16 Lemma. If M E M, m is as in 2.7, and S+ is as in 2.15, then for each E > 0 there is Po = Po(E,zo,M) > 0 such that S+ has the following affine~pproximation property in B Po (zo): For each 17 E (0, Pol and each z E S+ n Bpo(zo) there is an m-dimensional affine subspace L Z • IT containing Z with
S+
n BIT(z) C
the (Eu)-neighbourhood of L z •IT .
Remarks. (1) The conclusion here might be termed a "half Reifenberg" property; Reifenberg's topological disc theorem requires such an hypothesis together with the reverse inclusion L Z • IT n BIT(z) C the (Ety)-neighbourhood of S+, in which case S+ n Bpo(zo) is a topological disc. (2) On the other hand one should keep in mind that even the full Reifenberg condition will not ensure any rectifiability properties for S+, as is shown for
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
259
example by the "Koch curves" in fractal geometry. For a fuller discussion of this, we refer to [31]. (3) But the reader should also keep in mind that the f:-approximation property of the above lemma does imply, as one can easily check by using successively finer covers of S+ by balls (see [28] for the detailed argument), that lI. m +13 (f)(S+ n BpoCzo)) = 0, where {3(f:) .j.. 0 as f:.j.. 0, and hence dimS+ ~ m by the definition of Hausdorff dimension. Proof of Lemma 2.16. IT the lemma is false, then there is f: > 0, Zo E sing 1.1., Pic .j.. 0, Ulc < Pic, and Zlc E Bp. (zo) n S+ such that
(1)
Bl (0) n 11z.,tr lo S+ ¢. f:-neighbourhood of any m-dimensional subspace.
Choose Ric .j.. 0 with Ric/pic ~ 00. Then by monotonicity 1.7' we have, for all p E (0, Ric] and all k 1,2, ... ,
=
6M(zlc) ~ w;lp-RIM n Bp(ZIc) I ~ w;lRk"RIM n BR,,(ZIc)1 ~ w;l Rk"RIM n BRlo+Plo (zo)l.
In terms of the rescaled submanifolds MIc
= 1]z..... M
this implies
6M(zlc) ~ w;lp-RIMIc n Bp(O) I ~ w;l Rk"RIM n BRlo+P,,(zo)1 for every P E (0, RIc/ulc) and all sufficiently large k (depending on pl. Since pic/Ric ~ 0 we have Rk"RIM n BR,,+p.(zo)1 ~ 9M(ZO), and since 9 M(zlc) ~ 9M(ZO) by hypothesis, we then obtain I
9 M(zo) ~ w;lp-RIMIc n Bp(O)1 ~ 9M(ZO)
(2)
+ f:1c,
where f:1c ~ 0 as k ~ 00. In particular the M Ic have uniformly bounded area on any fixed ball in R RH, so by the compactness of 1.11 (b) there is aCE M and a subsequence MIc' such that M Ic , ~ C locally on RR+1c in the sense of 1.11(b). But then (2) guarantees
w;l p-RIC n Bp(O)1
=9M(ZO),
V p > 0,
and by the monotonicity formula 1.9 applied to C we thus conclude that
xL
= 0,
x E C,
and hence (by the argument of [3] or [25]) that C is a cone: CEC.
(3)
Now let (4)
0
= 9 M (zo)(= 9c(0)).
By 2.6 and 2.7,
Lc = {z
E
RR : 9c(z) = o}
is a subspace of dimension ~ m, and hence is contained in an m-dimensional subspace L of RR. Then (with f: > 0 arbitrarily given), by the upper semicontinuity 2.3 of 9 we see immediately that this implies (5)
LEON SIMON
260
for all sufficiently large k', where LE denotes the e-neighbourhood of L. Indeed otherwise there would be a subsequence {k} C {k'} and xi; E Bl(O)\L E -+ x E B 1 (0)\L E and with 9 M ,(xi;) ~ a. But then by the upper semi-continuity 1.13 we have 9c(x) ~ a with x E B1(0)\L.. which contradicts (4). Thus (5) is established. But evidently (5) contradicts (1), so the lemma is proved. Now let Sj be the set of Zo E sing M such that the conclusion of 2.16 holds with Po 1/1'. Then for each W E Sj, there is a sequence {Wtll=1,2, ... C BJ..(w) n Sj with 9M(Wt) -+ inf{9M(z) : Z E B.l,.(w) n Sj}; if this inf is ~ ~ attained at some w. E Bi;(w) n Sj, then we select Wt = w. for each t. Thus
=
Bi,(w) n Sj
= U~l {z E Bi,(w) n Sj C U~l {z E B~(wt) n Sj ,
: 9M(Z) ~ 9 M(Wl)}
: 9M(Z) ~ 9M(Wt)},
which has llm+.B(ELmeasure zero by 2.16 and Remark (3) above, because Wt E Sj for every t. In view of the arbitrariness of W and the fact that sing M = UjSj by 2.16, we have ll m +.B(E)(singM) = 0, and therefore dim sing M
~
m,
since f > 0 was arbitrary. Now let sing. M denote the set of Z E singM such that 9M(Z) = 90(0) for some C E C as in 2.4 with dim Lc = m. Then we can apply exactly the same argument as in the above lemma and the subsequent discussion, with sing M\ sing * M in place of sing M; notice that at each stage of the discussion we obtain affine spaces of dimension m - 1 instead of affine spaces of dimension m. Thus in place of the conclusion dim sing M ~ m we have dim (sing M\ sing. M) ~ m - 1.
(2.17)
We shall use this fact in §7 below. By a slightly different argument, involving only the use of tangent cones rather than pseudo-tangent cones as in the above proof, one can prove a refinement of 2.17. Viz., dimS U) ~ j for each j = 0, ... , m, where S(;) is the set of Z E sing M such that all tangent cones C of M at z have dimLc ~ j. We shall not need this refinement here, so we shall not discuss the proof, which is given in [26] by modifying the corresponding argument in [1] for area minimizing currents. 3 A Rectifiability Lemma, and Gap Measures on Subsets of Rn. Let Bpo(xo) be an arbitrary ball in Rn, and suppose that S C Bpo(xo) is closed, that f, 6 E (0,1) with f < 6/8 (in the applications below we always have f « 6), and that S has the f-approximation property satisfied for S+ in 2.16. Thus for each yES and each p E (0, Po] we assume (3.1)
S
n Bp(Y)
C the (fp)-neighbourhood of some m-dimensional afflne space Ly,p containing y.
261
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
In all that follows we assume that Ly,p, corresponding to each yES and P ~ Po, is chosen. Then, relative to such a choice, we have the following definition. Definition. With the notation in 3.1 above, we say S has a 5-gap in a ball Bp(Y) with yES if there is z E Ly,p n B(1-6)p(Y) such that B6p(Z) n S 0. With notation as in the previous definition, we recall the general rectifiability lemma established in [32], which gives sufficient conditions for an arbitrary subset of R n to be m-recifiable, as defined in the introduction. This rectifiability lemma will be crucial in our later proof of Theorem 4. The reader should keep in mind that the results here will be applied in R n+k (rather than Rn) in the proof of Theorem 4.
=
3.2 Lemma (Rectifiability Lemma). For any 5 E (0, l2)' there is fO = fO(m, n, 5) E (0, :6) such that the following holds. Suppose f E (0, fO], Po > 0, Xo ESC Bpo (xo), and S has the f-approximation property 3.1 above. Suppose further that, for each Xl E S and PI E (0, Po], either S has a ;0 -gap in Bpl (xt) or there is an m-dimensional subspace L(xl,pd ofRn and a family :Fz1 ,Pl of balls with centers in S n B P1 (xt) such that the following 2 conditions hold:
(a) and
(b)
S n Bp(Y) c the fp-neighbourhood of Y + L(x!, pd
for every yES n Bpl/2(XI)\(U:FZ1,Pl) and every p E (0,PI/2] such that S has no 5-gaps in any of the balls BT(y). p ~ r ~ Pl/2. Then S is m-rectifiable.
3.3 Remarks: (1) It is important, from the point of view of the application which we have in mind, that the property (b) need only be checked on balls Bp(Y) such that S has no 5-gap in any of the balls BT(y), P ~ r ~ Pl/2. (2) Notice that if S does not have a 260-gap in B P1 (Xl) (so that the first alternative hypothesis of the lemma does not hold), then, provided f is sufficiently small relative to 5, no ball BT(y) for r E [Tt, Pf] and yES n B p1 / 2(XI) can have a 6-gap, so in particular condition (b) always has non-trivial content in this case. (3) In order to establish the Theorem 4 we are going to show that this lemma can be applied with sets S of the form S = Bp(Y) n {x E singM : eM(x) ~ eM(Y)} with suitable Y E singM and with P sufficiently small. Notice that Lemma 2.16 of §2 already establishes the weak f-approximation property, which is required before the above lemma can be used. Most importantly, we are able in the discussion of §§4-6 to get much more control on sing M in balls which do not have 5-gaps. This is the key point which makes it possible to check the hypothesis (b) and hence to prove the main theorems stated in the introduction. For the proof of 3.2 (which is based on a covering lemma), we refer to [32]. Next we want to establish the existence of a certain class of Borel measures on subsets S c Rn having the f-approximation of 3.1 above.
262
LEON SIMON
=
Let f > 0 and mE {1,2, ... ,n -I}, Bp(z) {x ERn: Ix - zi < p}, and let 0 ESC B 1 (0) be an arbitrary non-empty closed subset of R n with the f-approximation property 3.1. With the affine spaces spaces Lz,p fixed as in 3.1, and assuming f ~ ~/2 E (0, i4)' we make the following definition. 3.4 Definition. If Z E S and p E (0, lJ, the ball Bp(z) is said to be a ~-bad ball for S if either there is wE Lz,p n B(1-6)p(Z) such that B6p(W) n S = 0, or II(Lz,p - z) - Lo,ll1 ~ ~/2. Now we are going to define a family of subsets {Tp}PE(O,tl as follows:
3.5 Definition. For p E (0, il, we define Tp to be the union over all balls Bp(z) such that Z E S and no ball BO'(z), u E [p, lJ, is a ~-bad ball for S. 3.6 Remarks. (1) Of course the sets Tp depend on S and ~, but for convenience this is not indicated by the notation. Notice also that Tp esp, where Sp = {x E Rn : dist(x,S) < p}j intuitively one should think of Tp as being some sort of refinement or reduction of Sp, taking into account ~-gaps and ~-tilts. (2) It is possible to check the following properties direct from the definition of the Tp: (a) The u-neighbourhood of Tp C Tp+O' for each p, u > with p + u < i (so that in particular we have dist (Tp , Rn\Tp+O') ~ u). (b) Vz E S\Tp, p E (0, tl, there is u(z) ~ p such that BO'(z) (z) is a ~-bad ball for S. (c) The ~-neighbourhood of Tp\TS- is contained in T2P \Ti' p E (O,H Notice that, taking p = 2- l and u = 2- k - 2- l in (a) we have in particular that (d) dist(T2 -I,Rn\T2 -k) ~ 2- k - 1 for l ~ k + 1, k ~ 2. Proof of (a). Take any W E u-neighbourhood of Tp. Then by definition of Tp there is a z E S such that W E Bp+O'(z) , where no Br(z) is a ~-bad ball, T ~ p. Thus wE Tp+O' by definition of Tp+O" Proof of (b). Suppose z E S\Tp. Then some BO'(z), u ~ p, must be a .~-bad ball, otherwise Bp(z) C Tp by definition, contradicting the hypothesis that z ¢. Tpo Proof of (e). By (a), the ~-neighbourhood of Ti is contained in Tf' and hence the i-neighbourhood of Rn\Tf is contained in Rn\Ti' Also, again by (a), the i-neighbourhood of Tp is contained in T 2p . The combination of these inclusions then gives (c) as claimed.
°
°
t
3.7 Lemma. There is 80 = ~o(m,n) E (0, 116] such that if < f:5 :5 ~, and S, {T.,.} O'E(O, t 1 are as introduced above, then there is a Borel measure J1. on S with the properties jL(S) = 1 and, for each u E (0, 116]'
z
E
TO' nS,
263
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
where C
= C(n, m).
The measure J.L has the general form Q,.
00
J.L
=
L T mk L[Zk,j]
C l dm / 2
k=2
+ C21l
ffl
L To,
j=l
where [z] denotes the unit mass (Dirac mass) supported at z, To = np>oTp, E S n T2 -,. \T2 -1o-1, j = 1, ... ,Qk, k ~ 2, with
Cl , C2 depend only on n, m, and the Zk,j
S n T2 -1o \T2 -1o-1 C U~~~ax(k-2,2) U7.!1
k ~ 2.
B,P/22-l (Zl,j),
For the proof of this lemma, we refer to [32]. 3.8 Remarks. (1) It is important for later application that C does not depend on d, nor indeed on S. Of course one has to keep in mind that if the set S is very badly behaved (like a Koch curve for example), then the sets Tp can all reduce to the empty set for sufficiently small p, in which case the lemma has correspondingly limited content. (2) As part of the proof given in [32], it is shown that To is contained in the graph of a Lipschitz function defined over {OJ x Rm and with Lipschitz constant 5 Cd, so automatically ll m L To has total measure 5 C. 4 Area Estimates for Submanifolds in M. Here we continue to assume that M E M. Points in Rn+k will be denoted (x,y) E Rl+k X Rm, and we continue to use the notation r = Ixl and w = lxi-IX E SlH-l for x E Rl+k\ {OJ. We are often going to use the variables (r,y) = (Ixl,y) corresponding to a given point (x,y) E Rl+k X Rm, and it will be convenient to introduce the additional notation Bt
= {(r, y)
for given Yo Also,
> 0, r2+IY12 < p2}, E Rm and p > o. : r
B{: (y)
and we let vr(x, y)
where PT.J.
VT! Vy
= PT.J.
(-,,,)
Bt(yo)
= {(r, y)
: r
> 0, ly-yol2 < p2}
= M n Bp(Y),
be defined on M by
(-.v)
M(lxl-1x,0),
Vyi
= PT.J.
(-.,,)
M(elH+j),
i = 1, ...
, m,
M denotes orthogonal projection of Rn+A: onto the normal space
T(-;,y)M. Notice that we thus have m
ZI~
= l-IV'MrI2,
v;
m
m
=I>;i = L IPT(~.,,)M(elH+j)12 =L(I-IV'My I2). j
j=1
j=1
j=1
In particular, if e is any vector in {O} x R m, then IPT.J. M(e)125IeI2vy2. (-,,,)
The main inequality of this section is given in the following theorem:
264
LEON SIMON
4.1 Theorem. H ( E (0, ~), (3 > 0 then there are G = G({3,k,n) > 0, 1/ = 1/({3, k, n, () > 0 and a = a({3, k, n) E (0,1) such that the following holds: If p-n\B~ (0)\ ~ (3, 0 E M, w~lp-n\B~ (0)1-9M(0) < 11 and p-n-2 1B:'(0) r2(11:+ v;) < 11, then there is C E I with singC C {OJ X Rm, satisfying p-n-2
f
dist«x,y),C)2
< (,
B:'(O)
where M(r, y)
= M n Sr,y.
In proving Theorem 1 we shall need three lemmas, each of which is of some independent interest. The first of these gives some important general facts about C E Ii we use the notation of 2.11, and define
TJO) = {r:: (4.2)
r: is a compact (i- I)-dimensional embedded minimal submanifold of Sl+k-l with (().w,y) : ). > 0, Y E R m , w E r:} E 7/3}.
If r: is a compact (i-I)-dimensional embedded minimal submanifold of Sl+k-l , and if 'r/J is a cj section of the normal bundle of Cover r: (we write 'r/J E Cj (r:; Col», then we continue to let Gr; ('r/J) denote the "spherical graph" defined in §2 and Ad'r/J) the corresponding area functional as in 2.15. Notice that if I'r/Jlci is small enough (depending on r:), and if j ~ 1, then Gr;{'r/J) will be an embedded GLsubmanifold of Sl+k-l. Under suitable circumstances, we can also express appropriate parts of M E M as a spherical graph taken off a cone C E C. specifically, if n C C is open and if u is a cj section of the normal bundle of Cover n (we write u E Cj(n; Col» with L:;=o rj-1lDjul $ 'Y, with 'Y sufficiently small depending only on C (and not depending on the domain n), then we can define the spherical graph Gc{u) (analogous to 2.14) by Gc(u) = {(I + Ixl- 2Iu(x,y)1 2)-1/2«X,y) + u(x,y»)}; Gc(u) is then an embedded Ci-submanifold of RR+k. We can also define the area functional Ac(u) (analogous to 2.15) over C for such u E GI(n; Col) by Ac(u) = IGc(u)l.
Then we have the following:
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
265
TjO)
rj0),
4.3 Lemma. For each {3 > 0, is compact in the sense that if ~j E then there is a subsequence converging in the Hausdorff distance sense to an element ~ E Also, there is (1 (l({3,n,k) E (0, such that, if~lJ ~2 E
rj0).
iJ
=
rJ°) and E2 can be expressed as a spherical graph G!;l.,p ofa C3 function .,p taken
with 11/Jlc3(!;I) < (lJ then IE11 = 1~21. Furthermore there are constants E (0,1J and a = a({3, n, k) E (0,1) such that if ~1 E rj0) and jf ~2 (not necessarily in rj0») can be expressed as a spherical graph G!;l1/J of a C3 section 1/J of the normal bundle of E1 with 11/Jlc3(!;1) < (2, then Off~l
(2
= (2({3, n, k)
IIE 1 1-IE211 2- Q ::;
r
j!;1
IQ!;11/J12,
where Q!;1 denotes the minimal surface operator on E1 (i.e., Q!;1 (1/J) is the Euler-Lagrange operator of the area functional A(1/J) == IG!;l (1/J) I of spherical graphs over Ed. Remark. Thus we have a uniform Lojasiewicz inequality for a whole C3 neighbourhood of and also, by the first part of the above lemma, the area
rj0),
rj0) , and there are only finitely many values of the area corresponding to E E rj0) . Proof of Lemma 4.3. The compactness of TjO) is a direct consequence of
is constant on the connected components of of
the estimates of 2.12 and the compactness 1. 11 (b) for M. Next suppose there is no such (1. Then there must be sequences E j , Ej in converging in the
rJ°)
Hausdorff distance sense to a common limit E E
rJ°) but with
(1) According to the Lojasiewicz inequality of 2.14 we have a = O'(E) > 0 such that
= o(~) E (0,1) and
0'
(2)
IIG!;1 (1/J)I_I~1111-Q/2 ::; CIIQ!;l (1/J)II£2(!;I)'
11/Jlcs(!;t)
< 0'.
Therefore for all sufficiently large j we can apply this with graph!;1 (1/J) = E j , lS j in order to deduce that lEd = IE21, thus contradicting (1). Now if the inequality of the lemma fails, then there are sequences Ej E and 1/Jj E C 3 sections of the normal bundle of Cj over Ej, with Cj the cone determined by Ej , with Ej converging to a given E E 7)0) and with l1/Jjlcs but such that
rJ°)
(3)
where OJ .J.. 0 as j -+ 00. Thus IEjl = lEI for all sufficiently large j by the first part of the proof above, and (3) contradicts (2), because IIQ!;j(,pj)II£2(!;j) is geometrically the £2-norm of the mean curvature vector of G!;j (,pj) integrated over Ej and (since Ej is approaching E in the Ct-norm) this is proportional to the £2 norm of the mean curvature vector of lSj = G!;j(,pj) when lSj is expressed as a spherical graph taken off E.
266
LEON SIMON
4.4 Lemma. Let a E (0,1] and {3 > o. There is TJ = TJ(n, k,{3) E (0,1) sum that if B¢!/s(O)\{(x,y) : Ixl ~ a/16} = Gcu with C = Co x R m E /p, u a C 3 (CnB 7u / s (0)\{(x,y) : Ixl ~ a/16};C.L) function and 3
L
sup aJ-IIDjul ~ TJ, cnB T. /8 (0)\{(Z,II): tzl:5u/16} j=O then
and
B:./
IV",II(rl - l IM(r,y)l)1
sup 4 \{(",II): ":5u/S}
~ Ca- 1- n f
JB!;'\{(Z,II): Izl:5u/16}
r2(,,~ + ,,;).
Here V",II means the gradient with respect to the variables (r,y) E B;;l C = C({3, n, k), andu(r, y) denotes the function on ~ defined byu(r, y)(w) = u(rw, y), and ~ = Co n Sl+k-l .
Proof. As discussed in §2, the Euler-Lagrange operator v E C2(~; C.L) is characterized by the integral identity
QEV
for
so in particular
Also (see, e.g., the discussion of [26]) the Euler-Lagrange operator Qc of the area functional over C has the form
where
t::. ",11 v= ;:z=r 1 ~ + L,,3=1 "'~ 8"ltj~) 8,. (ri-l~) 8,. 8 II' , and
Notice that if Qcu = 0 in some region (3)
We also recall that the linear operator
nc
C, then by definition,
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
267
is a linear elliptic operator of the form
luv = fj.r,1/v
+ r- 2LE,uV •
where LE,u is a linear elliptic self-adjoint operator on functions v E C 2 (I:i Cl.). In particular (using the notation introduced prior to 4.3) if M = Gcu with u E C2(Oi Cl.) for some 0 C C, then since M t = M - telH+j is a minimal surface for each t, and M t = graphc Ut, where Ut(x, y) = u((x, y) + tel+k+j), then we have QCUt == 0 on a domain Ot = 0 - tel+k+j, and hence v = u1/; == ftu((x, y) + tel+k+j)lt=o is a solution of
luv
=0
for each j = 1, ... ,m. Also since M t = (1 + t)M is a minimal surface for each t with It I < 1, and M t = graphut, where Ut(x,y) = (1 + t)-lu((1 + t)(x,y», then we have similarly that v = RUR - U == ftUtlt=o is also a solution of this equation. But RUR - U = ((x, y) . D)u - u == r (u/r)r + E;:1 yiu1/;' so we have the equations ".
(4)
lu(u1/;)
= 0,
lu(r2(u/r)r)
= -lu(Eyiu ,,;) = i==1
-2fj.1/u. •
Notice that the operator lu W has the form
+ r- 2fj.EW + r-1a . VEw + r- 2b. w with lal, Ibl ::; C(n, k,.B) on B 7cr / S (0)\{(x, y) : Ixl < u /16}. Then the standard fj.r,1/w
Cl,a Schauder theory for such linear operators ([12]) gives 1
(5)
L
sup lui D i u1/12 ::; Cu- n Bf"/D \{(x,1/): Ixl
f u~, JB~/D \{(x,1/): Ixl
where B~ = CnBcr(O). By means equation (4) for r 2(u/r)r and again the c1,a Schauder theory (this time using also (2) to estimate the sup norm of fj.1/u) , we deduce that r 2(u/r)r satisfies 1
(6)
L
sup lui Di(r 2(u/r)rW Bf'v/4 \{(x,1/): Ixl
+ u~).
Next we note, by the notation introduced above, that telH+i+(x, Y)+Ut«x, y)) E M for all small ItI, and hence by differentiating with respect to t and setting t = 0 we have el+k+i + u1/;(x,y) E T(x,1/)+u(x,1/)M, whence (el+k+i).l. = -(u1/; (x, y)).l., where v.l. means the orthogonal projection into the normal space of M at the point (x,y) + u(x,y) E M. Since u is already normal to C, and C is invariant under translations in the direction el+k+i we also have
268
LEON SIMON
for (x, y) in the domain of u, provided the constant 1/ of the lemma is chosen small enough (depending on n, k, f3). By a similar argument using M t and fit we obtain m
(8)
«x, y)
+ u(x, y)).L = -r2 «u/r)r).L -
Lyi (u y; ).L(= (-R 2 (u/ R)R).L). i=1
Since C is invariant under homotheties of the x-variable, we whence have
But «x,y) + u(x,y)).L = PT.l.M«X,O) + u(x,y)) + Ej:l yiet+k+i' so we also have I«x, y) +u(x, y)).L1 ~ u(lvrl +mlvyl) on MnB".(O), where the right side is evaluated at the point (x, y) = (x, y) +u(x, y)-note that Ixl = Jr 2 + lu(x, y)12 at this point (x, y)). Also, by definition of vY ' lei+k+i I ~ Vy on M. Then (7) and (8) yield
(9) Now (1), (2), (5), (6), and (9) evidently imply the inequalities of the lemma. Next we have a lemma which gives important information about approximation of M E M by C E
r.
4.5 Lemma. Let {3 > 1, , > O. There are constants 1/ = 1/({3, (, n, k) > 0, a = a(n, k, f3) E (0,1) such that if p-nlM n Bp(O)1 ~ {3, 0 E M, and w;;-lp-nIM n Bp(O)I- 9M(0) < 1/, then the inequality
p-n-2 [
JMnB sp /4(0)\{(Z,II): Izl
implies that there is aCE
r
r2(v~ + v~) < 1/
with
and
with
M n B I5P /16(0)\{(X,y) : Ixl :5 p/16}
= Gcu
and
p-n- Z
[
JMnB15p/16 (0)
dist«x, y), C)2 :5 (, 3
Epi-lIDiulc3:5 (. B;"/8(0)\{(Z,II): Izl~p/16} j=o sup
269
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
Also there is ( = (n, k, {3) :S min «(1 ,(2), (1, (2 as in Lemma 4.3, such that, in addition to the above, we have
Ir l - I IM(r, y)I-IEII
sup Bip /4 \{(r,II): r
where M(r, y) is as in 4.1. Proof. First notice that the inequality 3
(1)
LP'IDjulc3
sup
B~/8(0)\{(""II):
:S C(
1",I::Sp/16} ;=0
is implied by the other inequalities
(2) p-n-2
IBM
(0)
dist«x, y), C)2
15p/16
< (,
together with the estimates of 1.12 and 2.12, so we only need to check (2). By rescaling it is enough to check (2) in case p 1. IT there is no such 71 for some given (, then there must exist a sequence M(j) EM with 1M; n B 1 (0)1 ~ {3, 1M; n Bl (0) I - e~(;) -+ 0, 0 E M U), and
=
«V~;»2 + (v~;»2) -+ 0
f
JM(j)nBs/
4 (0)\{("',II):
I"'I::S!}
yet such that, for every e E r with sing e = {O} x Rm, at least one of the inequalities in (2) fails if p = 1 and M = MU). By the compactness 1.11(b) there is a subsequence (still denoted M(j) such that M(j) -+ e, where v~ == 0 and v~ == 0 on B 5 / S (0)\{(x,y) : Ixl :S 8c(0) = len Bl (0) I(by (2.3». The monotonicity 1.7' yields that e extends to give an element of r with sing e C {O} x R m. Since M(j) -+ e we have
H,
ec(O) == Ie nB1(0)1 :S li~infIM(j) n B1(0)1 == li~infeM(;)(O), 3-+ 00
3-+ 00
and from the upper-semicontinuity 2.3 of the density function we also know that ec(O) ~ limsupeM(;)(O), j-+oo
and hence (2) is satisfied with p = 1 and with M(i) in place of M for j sufficiently large. Evidently this is a contradiction, so the required inequalities (2) (and hence also (1» must hold for some e e with singe = {O} x Rm, provided 71 is sufficiently small.
r
LEON SIMON
270
We now need to establish the final inequality of the lemma. By virtue of a(n, k, (3) E (0,1) and ( (n, k, (3) > 0 Lemma 4.3 we have that there is a such that (1) implies
=
Ir 1 -'IM(r,y)I_IEI1 1 -
=
a/2
:$ CIIQI;u(r,y»lIi2(E)
=
for each (r, y) E Bt/s(O) with r ~ p/16, where C C(n, k, (3). Then the required inequality holds by virtue of Lemma 4.4; notice that the hypothesis S
LpilDjul :$ 71
sup
B~/8(0)\{(z,y): Iz l:5p/16} j=O
required in Lemma 4.4 is satisfied (with C( in place of 71) due to 2.12 and the inequality (1) above. . We shall need the following corollary of the above lemma later.
(> 0, (3 > 1 there is 710 = 71o«(,{3,n, k) > 0 such that the following holds. Suppose C E 7 with singC = to} x Rm, M E M with p-nlM n Bp(O)1 :$ (3, w;lp-nIM n Bp(O)I- 9M(O) < 710,0 E M, and also
4.6 Corollary. For any given
p-n-2
f
JB~(O)\{(z,y): Izl<¥}
dist«x, y), C)2
< 710'
Then
and
singMnB p/ 2(O) C the «(p)-neighbourhood of{O} x Rm. Proof. By the regularity estimates 2.2 and 2.12 we have immediately that H = Gcu for some u E C2(B~/4(0)\{(x,y) :
M n B Sp / 4(O)\{(x,y) : Ixl :$ Ixl :$ H;C.!.) with S
Lpi-1lDjul :$ C71~/2 on B Sp / 4(0)\{(x,y) : Ixl :$
H.
j=O
Since C E 7 with sing C = {O} X R m, we have in particular that for any given (> 0 the hypotheses of Lemma 4.5 above hold, provided T}o = 71o({3,(,n,k) E (0, () is sufficiently small. Thus that lemma yields
p-n-2 for suitable inequality
6
E
f
JMnB sp /4(0)
7 with sing
p-n-2
6
C
r icnBap/4(O)\{(Z,y):
dist«x, y), 6)2
to} x
<(
R m and hence, the the triangle
dist«x, y), C)2 < C( Izl
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
which leads to dist«x, y), C)2
p-n (
271
~ C(
J MnBspl" (0)
since both C, C are cones. The first conclusion of the Corollary is now clear. To prove the final conclusion, we argue as follows: Suppose z E singM with dist«x,y), C) ~ 2(710 1()1/(n+2)p, where 710 E (O,!] is to be chosen shortly. Then, in consequence of the above proof, dist 2 «x, y), C)
p-n-2 (
~ (,
J MnBspl"(O)
which, together with the fact that B,op(z) c B 3p/ 4 (O), implies that dist 2«x, y), C)
«(op)-n-2 (
~ C710,
C = C(n, (3).
JMnB(Op(z)
Thus by the monotonicity 1.7', dist(z, C} ~ C71~/2(Op. Since C E 'TiJ, we have bounds lAc! ~ Cr- 1 on the second fundamental form of C at distance r from {O} x Rm. So by the regularity theorem, z E regM, a contradiction. Proof of Theorem 4.1. Let ( = (n, k, {3} and 71 = 71(n, k, (, (3) > 0 be as in Lemma 4.5. Then Lemma 4.5 implies that there is aCE r with C = Co x Rm, E = consL+k-l smooth compact, and a u E C3(CnB 15p / 16 (O)\{(x,y) : Ixl ~ p/I6}; Cl.) with
MnBI5p/16(O)\{(X,y) : Ixl ~p/I6}=graphcu which 3
(1)
Lpi-lIDju(r,y)lca :5 (,
sup cnB7p / S (0)\{(3:,y):
13:I~p/16}
j=O
and sup
I!M(r,y)l-rl-1IEII
Bt,.\{(•.•~' :P(/:~n (
(2)
-
r'(v' +
JB:-'\{(3:,y): l3:f
r
v'l)
1/(2-0<)
Y
Notice that by (1) and the estimates 2.12 we then have 3
(3)
LpilDjul
sup
~ C{3.
cnBsp/" (O)\{(3:,y) : 13:I
For each y E Rm with Iyl < p/2 we let (111
(5)
= sup( {O} U {(1 E (0, p/2] (1-1'1
1,B"
:
r2 (112 + 112) > })
[
M
.
(O,II)\{(Z,II): Ixl
r
11
-."
•
LEON SIMON
272
(6) if TJ is sufficiently small (which we subsequently assume). By the "five times" covering lemma (see e.g. [8] or [25]) we can find a countable pairwise-disjoint collection {B40'Wi (0, Yj)} such that
(7)
In particular, that (by definition of u y we have
for each u E (uy, p/2], and so for exactly the same reasoning (involving the first part of Lemma 4.5 and 2.12) which we used to conclude (1), (3) above, and keeping in mind that u- n 1M n BO' (0, y) I ~ {3 by the monotonicity 1.9', by taking a smaller TJ = TJ(n, k, (3, () if necessary, we can deduce that 3
Luj-llDjul ~ C{3
sup
B,?.. /s(O,y)\{(z,y): Izl~
for any u E (uy, p/2] and Iyl ~ p/2. Hence by Lemma 4.4, for each with Iyol ~ p/2, and for all u E [u YO ,p/2], we obtain
(9)
B:. /
sup
4 (yo)\{(r,y):
r
IV r ,y(r
l- l
Yo
E Rm
IM(r,y)1)1
r<
~ Cu- n
(
JB!;' (O,yo)\{(z,y): Izl<
r2(v;
+ v;).
We now want to define a Whitney-type cover for B;/2(0), as follows. For j ~ 2 let B p / 2 H2 (0, Zj,k), k = 1, ... ,Qj be a maximal pairwise disjoint collection of balls with centers (0, Zj,k) E B p / 2 (0) n {OJ x R m. Then for j ~ 2:
(10)
U~;'1 B p / 2i (0, Zj,k)
:-,
B p / 2 (0) n {(x, y) : Ixl < p/2 j +t}
for any point (x, y) E B p / 2 (0), and
(11)
# {k : (x, y) E Bp/2i-a (0, Zj,k)}
~
c,
C
= C(n),
for any (x,y) ERn, where #A denotes the number of elements in the set A. Next let 0 1 ,1 == B;/2(O)\{(r,y) : r < p/8}, fi 1 ,1 = Bt(O)\{(r,y) : r < p/16}, and Ql = 1, and define for j 2: 2 and k = 1, ... , Qj (12)
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
273
and
(13) Notice that all points (r, y) E OJ,k satisfy P/2 H3 S r < p/2 j lar OJ,k n Oi,l = 0, Ii - il ~ 4,
1,
and in particu-
so (11) it follows from that (14)
V(r, y) E Bt(O),
# {(i, k) :
(r, y) E fij,k} S C,
C = C(n).
Also, by (10),
U~1 U~~l
OJ,k
:J B:;2(O) n (U.f=2{(X,y) : 2- j - 2p S r < 2- j - 1 p}
(15)
u{(r,y) : r ~ il):J B;t2(O). Now, by (6), 01,1 intersects no B tTv (y), while for each (j, k) such that OJ,k does not intersect B u >; •• (Zj,k) we must have p/2H2 ~ O'z; .•. Thus, in any case, if OJ,k does not intersect B u,; .• (Zj,k) we can apply (9) with 0' = p/2 j - 1, Y = Zj,k (so Y = 0 in case i = k = 1), to deduce
1
r
Ivr,y(r 1- l IM(r, y)l) I r l - 1 drdy
OJ.,,
(16)
SC
~ r In; .• J
r2(v; + v~) dwr l - 1 drdy.
st-l
On the other hand if OJ,k does intersect B;J,; .• (Zj,k), then
i
~ 2 (by (6» and
~ 2-;-2 p, so OJ,k C BttT;.• (Zj,k) C Ui~OUi (Yi). Hence by summing in (16) and using (14), (15), we conclude that
O'j,k
r
JB:/2(O)\(UjBt"op; (II;»
(17)
r
IVr,lI(r 1 - l IM(r, y)l) I r l - 1drdy
SC
r
JB~(O)
r2(v; + v~) dxdy.
Notice also that using the monotonicity 1.7' and the definition (5) of have that for each j CT-,n- 2
II,
1
B~.. v; (0,11;)
1 0'-,n-2 r 2
all'
we
J,.rB~; (O,II;)\{(Z,II): Izl
Hence by summing on j, and using the disjointness of the B u ,,; (0, Yj), we deduce that
(18)
LEON SIMON
274
Now we want to use the collectioQ {B40ITII; (0, Yj)} to construct a. cut-off function. For each j, let (j : (0,00) X Rm ~ [0,1] be a Ceo function with (j(r,y) == 1 outside B1oIT II; (Yj), (j(r,y) == in BiDITII ; (Yj) and with
°
sup 1'V(jl $ Clay;.
(19)
8;
Now evidently, since the {B4IT; (Yj)} are pairwise disjoint, at most a finite subcollection ofthe B40ITII , (0, Yj) can intersect a given compact subset of R n \( {o} X Rm), so we can defin~ a smooth function ( : (0,00) X R m ~ [0, I] by (= IIj(j.
°
By.construction (== on ujBi"oITII; (Yj) ::> UIYI~p/2'ITII>oBtlTlI(Y)' In particular (ro, Yo) > ~ ro > a yO and hence
°
ril n - 2
f r2(v: + v;) ~ 1'/, J8~(O,yo)'{(z,y): l"'l
t
which (since ~. = ~) guarantees by Lemma 4.5 and the estimates 2.12 that u is smooth on each of the subsets B7ro/6(0, yo)\{(x, y) : Ixl < ro/2}, and hence in particular the function rl-lIM(r, y)I-IEI is smooth in a neighbourhood of (rO,Yo). Thus f(r, y) == (r, y)(rl-lIM(r, Y)I-I~D is a smooth function of (r,y) E Bt(O). Next we note that since f is smooth on {(r, y) : r E (0, p/2], IYI < p/2}, integrating by parts with respect to the r-variable gives (
JB:/ (0)
Iflrl - 1 drdy
2
(20)
1 ~ 1 ~
lyl
C
Iflr l - 1 drdy
lyl
+rl f
J1y1
Iflr l -
1 drdy
laarf Irt drdy.
We emphasize that this is valid even if f is not bounded near r = 0, because we can first prove (by integration by parts) an inequality as in (20) with r E = max{r - f,O} in place of r, and then let f 0. Since ( == 1 on B:/2\U7=,1 B1oITII;(Yj) and D,.( = EiD,.(iII#i(j, we obtain, in view of (17),
+
r < p/2, IYI < p/2 ~ Jr 2 + lyl2 < 3p/4,
(19), (6) and the fact that
f JB:/
Irl-tIM(r,y)I-I~11 2
r t - 1 drdy
(0)
~C f Irl-lIM(r,Y)I_I~11 JBi /4(0)\{(r,I/): r
r t - 1 drdy
p
,
40"'IIj
r2), (01/') 'J
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
275
which proves the theorem, in consequence of (2) and (18). 5 L2 estimates. Here we are going to use the area estimates of the previous section together with the monotonicity identities 1.7', 1.9' (and some variants of these) to obtain L2 estimates for u. These will be needed in the next section for proving the decay properties of the deviation function introduced there. M continues to denote an element of the multiplicity one class M, and we assume that B 2 (0) CUM and that 9M(0) ~ 90 ,
0 E sing M,
(5.1)
IBr (0)1 ~ (3,
where (3 is a given constant and 90 E {9c(0) : C E monotonicity 1. 7' this implies
n.
Notice that by
(5.2) With 80 as in 5.1
(5.3) S+ will be assumed to satisfy a weak f-approximation property, with f ~ fO = fo(n, k, (3) > 0 to be chosen, like that in 2.16; thus for each p E (0,1] and each Z E S+ we assume that
(5.4)
S+
n Bp(z)
C the (fp)-neighbourhood of Lz,p,
where Lz,p is an m-dimensional affine space containing z. We henceforth fix these affine spaces Lz,p. We also here assume that, with Rz(x,yf=1 (x,y) -z I, (5.5)
sup .IES+
r
sup w;lp-nIB:'(z) I ~ 90
JB~(O)
+ f,
zES+
where 80 E {9 c (0) : C E T} is as in 5.1, and p E (0,1] is given. (Of course by 1.7', the latter inequality in 5.5 implies SUPzES+ 8 M (z) ~ 80 + f.) Remark. We show in §7 below that for every given f > 0 and Wo E sing M with 9M(WO) = 80 E {9c(0) : C E T}, there is (T > 0 (depending on M, Wo, f) such that all of the above conditions are satisfied, by Lemma 2.16 and monotonicity 1.7'-1.10', with the rescaled surface '1wl, tT1 M in place of M for any WI E B tT / 2 (wo) n {z : 9 M (z) ~ 9M(WO)} and (TI ~ ~(T. These facts are of crucial importance in the eventual applicability of the results of the present section. We also here suppose that Zo E S+. p E (0,1], 'Y E (0, and that there exist points Zl, ••• , Zm in S+ n Bp(zo) such that
H
{Z; - ZO};=I, ... ,m are linearly independent and m
(5.6)
L:«z; - zo) . a)2 ~ 'Yp21a1 2 Va ;=1
E
L,
LEON SIMON
276
where L is the m-dimensional linear space spanned by Zl - Zo, ... , Zm - Zoo Notice that this states that the Zj - Zo are in "uniformly general position", up to the factor 'Y, in Bp(zo) n L. The main result of this section is the following: 5.7 Theorem. There is fO = fO(n, k, (3) with f = fO, then for all Z E S+
r
11B~8(zO) ~ Cp- 2d- n
1
x[ r
1B:' (zO)\{(Z,II): Iz-(,o 1< i} 0:
1«x,y)-z).1.12 Rr;+2 *
m
B:'(zo)
where
> 0 such that if 5.1, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6 hold
L I«(x,y) - Zj).1.12 + C i=O
(
n+2) 1-1/(2-0:)
~n+2
x
( 21dnfl«x,y)-Zj).1.1 2 + 1«x'Y)n~2z).1.12)](2~"j Rz p
j=O
= o:(n, k, (3) E (0,1), C = C(n, k, (3, 'Y), and d = p + Iz - zol.
We shall need the following three lemmas in the proof: 5.8 Lemma. Suppose L, ZO,.;. ,Zm are as in 5.6 (although here we do not need to assume that Zj E S+). Then for any n-dimensional embedded surface M (we do not need M E M here) we have m
C-l(rill~L
+ p2111L12)
~
L
I«x,y) - Zj).1.12 ~ C(rill:L
+ p2111L12)
in M,
i=O
=
=
where C C(m,n,'Y), rL(w) == dist(w,zo + L), rL radial distance from Zo + L = IPLJ. «x, y) - zo)l, and where I1ILI2 = IlpTJ. M 0 PLII 2, rill:L = (",1/) IPTJ. M(PLJ. «x, y) - zo»1 2 . If (1 E (0, p] and (0, ." ,(m are any other points ( .. ,1/) in B{:(zo) with (I, ... ,(m E Bu«(o) and with m
L:«(j - (0) . a)2 ~ 'Y(12IaI2,
a E L,
i=1
then m
C- 1 (rill:L
+ 0'211iJ -
C
L
m
dist 2«(j, Zo + L) ~
i=O
L I«x, y) _ (j).1.12 j=O
~ C(ri ll: L + 0'2 111)
m
+C L
dise«(j, Zo
+ L)
on B~ «(0)
j=O
for suitable C m
L
j=O
= C(n,m,'Y).
In particular, on B~«(O)'
I«x, y) - Zj).1.12 ~ C(p/(1)2
m
L (I «x, y) j=o
(j).1.12
+ dist 2«(j, Zo + L»).
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
277
Remark. Notice that the inequality E;1 «Zj - zo) • a)2 ~ "Yp2IaI 2, a E L, means that Zo,." ,Zm must be in "uniformly general position" in Zo + L up to the factor 1'; likewise the condition E;1 «(j - (0) 'a)2 ~ "Yu2IaI 2, a E L, requires that the nearest point projections (I>, , ., , of the (j onto L should be in such uniformly general position in BD'«(I»,
(:n
Proof of Lemma 5.B. By definition
so in particular
(w - Zj)1. - (w - zo)1. = (zo - Zj)1., and by the hypothesis we then have that on M m
"Yp2vl ~ C
(2)
L«w - Zj)1. - (w - ZO)1.)2. j=O
On the other hand using (1) with j = 0 we also have on
B:t (zo) that
(3) Combining (2) and (3) we then have m
riv:£ + p2vl ~ CL I(w - Zj)1.12 j=O
as claimed, Notice that the reverse inequality m
C- 1
L
I(w - Z;)1.12 ~ (rLvrL )2 + p2 vl
;=0
B:t
follows directly from (1) on (zo). Next notice (Cf, (1) above) that at any point WEB:! «(0)
(4)
(w - (;)1. == (w _ w')1. + (w' _ ('.)1. + «('. _ (;)1. 31. 3 1. = rLvrL + (Pdw - (;)) +
«(i - (;) ,
Taking differences in (4) we see that «(; - (0)1.
= -(w -
Since l(j - (; I = dist( (j, Zo then see that On U
(;)1.
+ (w -
+ L),
a2vI :::; C
L j=O
+ «(i - (;)1. - (I> -
m
ICw -
(0)1.,
by using the given hypothesis on the (; we
m
(5)
(0)1.
(;).1.12
+C L j=O
dist 2 C(j, Zo
+ L),·
278
LEON SIMON
Going back to (4) again we thus also conclude that on m
B:! «(0)
m
rill~L ~ C ~ I(w - (;)1.12 + C ~ dist 2 ('j, Zo + L), ;=0
j=O
which proves the required upper inequality for riv~L + u2IDLVI 2. The reverse inequality follows directly from (4) and the triangle inequality. The final inequality of the lemma is simply a matter of combining two of the previous inequalities, so this completes the proof of the lemma. In the proof of Theorem 5.7 we shall want to apply the main area estimate established in Theorem 4.1 of §4, and this requires that we check the hypothesis that M is L 2-sufficiently close to some e E T with sing e = {OJ x R m in the appropriate ball. 5.9 Lemma. For any given, > 0 there is if 5.1, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6 hold with f ~ fO, then
where the notation is as in 5.B, and dist«x, y), Zo + L) ~ p/16}j e1.),
U
fO
= fo(n, k, (J, () > 0 such that
E C3«zo
+ e) n B 2p/ 3(ZO)\{(x,y)
3
~pi-lIDjulo3 ~,
sup
(.zo+C)nB 2p /s(.zO)\{(Z,II): di8t«Z,II),.zo+L)~p/16} j=O
for some fO(n, k, (J)
e
E TO/3 with sing e
= L, 6c(O) = (}o.
Furthermore there is fO = ~ fO, then for all z E S+
> 0 such that if 5.1, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6 hold with f
dist 2 (z, Zo + L)
e 5: Cp-n {
J{(Z'II)EB~/4(.zo): rL~p/4}
(rlll;L + (p + Iz - zol)211i + I«x, y) - z)1.1 2)
5: Cf(p + Iz - zol)2 Remark. It is not assumed that Iz - zol is small herej Zo, z are unrelated points in S+. Proof of Lemma 5.9. Evidently we can assume without loss of generality that Lin 5.6 is {OJ xRm. To prove the first inequality, notice that by Lemma 5.8 above we have m
r~lI;o
+ p211~ 5: C L: I«x, y) - Z;)1.12, ;=0
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
279
where ro = Ix .... e.zo I, rovro = PTJ. M(X ..... e.zo' 0), Zo = (e.zo ,1].1'0)' Integrating (-.,,) this inequality over the ball Bp(zo) and noting that 5.5 implies
(1) we then have the first inequality as claimed. In view of the first inequality, the first part of Lemma 4.5 guarantees that the second and third inequalities of the lemma hold for some C E T with sing C = {O} X Rm and
(2) and 3
(3)
Lpi-1lDiulos
sup
:$
C.
(.z0+C)nB 2p / S (.z0)\{(z.u): Iz-t· o l$p/16} i=O
We agree that f and Care chosen smaller than the minimum distance between distinct elements of {ec(O) : C E Tp}. Then (2) gives ec(O) = 90 • We next claim that (for Csmall enough in (3», for any E RitA:,
e
where C = C(n, k, (3) is fixed (independent of e, u), provided fO = fo(n, k, (3) > o is small enough. Indeed otherwise by (2) and (3), after rescaling and trans-
lating so that p = 1 and Zo = 0, we would have a sequence Mi E M, with o E sing M Ci E Top with sing C i = C~O) X R m, and points E Sl+k-l such that
ej
j,
3
lei nB1 (0)1:$ (3,
sup
Lp iD ujlo8 ~ 0 as j ~ i
i
00,
CjnB2 / S (0)\{(z.u): IzI9/16} i=O
and
(5)
ej --+ eE Sl+A:-l,
Notice we also have
(6)
li~ inf ec; (0) 3~OO
>1
by virtue of 2.1. Using 1.11(b) we can assume that C j ~ C locally in the lIausdorff distance sense in Rn+k, Mj --+ C in B 2 / 3 (0)\{(x,y) : Ixl ~ 1/16} and that (e,O).L 0 on C. But this, together with stationarity of C, implies that C is invariant under translations in the direction of (e,O), which means
=
LEON SIMON
280
sing C contains the line through 0 in the direction of (~, 0), contradicting the fact that sing C = {O} x R m. (Notice that C is not a linear subspace because 9c(0) > 1 by (6) and upper-semicontinuity 2.3.) Thus (4) is established. On the other hand we have, using the notation Zo == (~zo, 17.10)' z = (~z, 17.1), (~.zo - ~.z, 0)1.
= «x, y) -
z)1. - «x, y) - zo)1. - (0, y -17.1)1.,
and hence
Integrating this identity over M and using (4) with
~
==
~.zo
-
~.z
yield
I~.z - ~.zo12
~ Cp-n [ (r~v~o + (p + Iz - zol)2v~ + I«x, y) J1y-".0 l
z)1.12)
by 5.5 and Lemma 5.8, as claimed. The third lemma is as follows: 5.10 Lemma. For any C E 7 with singC = {O} x Rm and any Lipschitz 'I/J on with 'I/J(r, y) 0 for r2 + lyl2 = p2, we have the identity
=
Bt
Proof. We begin by recalling the identity 1.3, which is valid for any Lipschitz Taking ( = 1jJ(r, y)(x, 0)
( = «(1, ... ,(n) : Bp -+ R n with ( = 0 on 8Bp. (where r = Ixl) in this identity, we thus obtain
where (pi j ) is the matrix of the orthogonal projection of Rn+k onto TzM. Since Di['I/J(r,y)] = r- 1 x i'I/Jr for i ~ t. + k, Di['I/J(r,y)] = Dyi-t-k'I/J for i = t. + k + 1, ... ,n + k, and n+k
L
i=l
we have
i=l
n+k
pii
= t. +
L
i=t+k+l
(1 - pii)
= t. + v;,
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
281
On the other hand by direct integration by parts in the r-variable we obtain
-i [ "p lcnBp
=[
lcnBp
r"pr,
so by adding this to the previous inequality we conclude the identity claimed in the statement of the lemma. Proof of Theorem 5.7. By rotating if necessary, we may assume that the subspace L of 5.6 is to} x Rm. IT Zo (eo, 170), then Zj (eo,17j) for j = 1, ... ,m. By the monotonicity inentity 1.10', for any C E r such that 90(0) = 80 and singC = to} X Rm, and for any Z E S+ nBp(zo), we have
=
=
[ 1((x'Y)n~2z).L12 ~ pl-n ( [ IVrlcmn-l_1ln-l(Cn8Bp(z»), lB!:'(z) Rz n lMn8Bp(z) where we have used the fact that 9M(Z) ~ 90(0) = 80 = n- 1 IEI. Let"p : R-+ [0,1] satisfy "p(t) == 0 for t ~ p, "p(t) == 1 for t ~ (1~9)p, "p' ~ 0 everywhere, and 1"p'(t)1 ~ 0(8)p-l. Multiplying each side of this inequality by "p(p) and integrating over [8p,p], for any 8 E (0,1) we get
2 [ I«x,y) ~:).L12 lB:',,(z) Rz
(1)
~ Op-n( [ lB!:'(z)
"p(R z ) - [ t/J(R z l(z+c)nBp(z)
».
On the other hand the identity of Lemma 5.10 above implies (after a translation taking Z to 0)
[
1B!:'(z)
(i + 1I;)"p(Rz ) - i /
= [
1B!:'(z)
(z+C)nBp(z)
r~R:;IIt/J'(Rz)IIVrzI2
t/J(Rz)
-1
(z+C)nBp(z)
r~R:;II"p'(Rz)1
+2 [ r~R:;II"p'(Rz)III~. + 2 [ E(yj JRz)rzllr• . " 11 ;,p'(Rz), lB!:'(z) lB!:'(z) j=1 where 0 depends on 8. Replacing t/J by "p2 and using the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality we obtain (2)
[ t/J(Rz ) lB!:'(z)
-1
(z+C)nBp(z)
t/J(Rz )
~ 0 ( 1[B!:'(z) r~R:;1t/J(Rz)It/J'(Rz)IIVrzI2 -
[ l(z+c)nBp(z)
r~R:;lt/J(Rz)It/J'(Rz)l)
+0 [ (R:;lt/J(R z )1t/J'(Rz )I + (t/J'(Rz»2)r~II~•. lB!:'(z)
On the other hand, for any non-negative continuous 0 on BJ;1 (z), the coarea formula tells us that [ JB:'(z)
OJ =
r (r
JBt(O) JM(r.1I)
0
m l - 1 ) drdy,
282
LEON SIMON
where J = y'det(dcp 0 (dcp)*) , dcp : TzM --t am+! is the induced linear map of the transformation cp : (x,y) E M --t (rz,y -11z) E (0,00) x R m, and
M(r,w) = ((x,y) EM: cp(x,y) = (r,w)}
={(x,y) EM: r
z
= r, y-11z = w}.
Notice that then J is given explicitly by
where /o(x, y) = 'Ixl and Ii(x, y) = y;, j = 1, ... ,m. But '\1 M Ii . '\1 M Ii = D /i· D Ii - (D /i).l.. (D Ii).l., where D / is the full gradient of / on Rn+A: and, at the point (x, y) E M, v.l. means the orthogonal projection of v onto (T(z,y)M).l.. Thus we deduce that
where m
lei;1 ~ C
L I(D /;).l.12 =C(v~. + v~).
;=0
Hence we conclude that
so that using the above coarea formula in (2) and combining the resultant inequality with (1) yield
(3)
=
where Mz(r,y) (M - z) n {(x,y) 2p in place of p) we have
Ixl = r}.
Now by 5.5,5.8 and 5.9 (with
lez .,....ezol2 (4)
~ Cp-n
{
JB3p(ZO)\{(z,y): Iz-(.o l~pI2}
(r~v:o + (p + Iz - zoD2v~
(Notice that for the present we need this only for the case z E S+nBp(zo), but in fact Lemma 5.9 shows that it is valid for all z E S+.) Since r~v~. = I(x - ~z, 0).l.12 = I(x - ~zo,O).l. + (~% .... ezo, 0).l.12 ~ 2r~v~o + 21(1: - ezol2,
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
283
by (4), 5.2 and the first part of 5.9 obtain
(5)
assuming Z E S+ n B p/ 2 (zo). In particular with ~ small enough we can apply the main area estimate 4.1 with 2p in place of p on the right side of (3), thus obtaining (after selecting (J = ~)
1 (6)
I«x,y) - z)1.1 2 < Op-n-2 (
B::'/8(Z)
R
z
n+2
J1B~(z)
-
+0 (p-n-2 (
r2(v 2
p
JB~(Z)\{(Z'II): Iz-E.I
z
r.
+ v 2) 11
r~(v:. + v~)) 1/(2-0)
Using (5) again on the right of (6) and also replacing p by 3p/4 yield, for all Z E S+ n B 3p/ 8(ZO), (7) ( I«x,y) - z)1.1 2 < 0 -n-2 { (r2v2 + p2v2) J1 R n +2 P J1 0 ro II B~4((ZO) Z B~ (zo) ) ~
+0 p-n-2 { J
B~(zo)'{(z'II): Iz-E.ol
«r~v:o + p2v~) + I«x,y) -
z)1.1 2 )
Notice that here we have used the fact that lez - ezol ::;; l for z E S+ n Bp(zo), by (4), and also used the inclusions B 3p / 2(Z) C B 2P (zo), B p/4(ZO) C B Sp/ 8(z) for Z E B3p/ 8(ZO). Now we want to consider Iz - zol ~ 3p/8. Then, with z == (ez,1}z), we have
+ (O,y -1}.. ).L + ({z·o + Iy -11.. 12,,; + I{z - {.to \2)
I«x,y) - z).L1 2 = I(x - {zo,O).L
::;; C(r~":o
{z,O).L1 2
LEON SIMON
284
By integrating this inequality over the ball Bp/4(ZO) (keeping in mind that we have the bound p-nIB:C(zo) I ~ Cp by 5.2), and using (4) (with p/2 in place of p), we obtain
(
1B:'!.(zo) ~cl
I«x,y) - Z).l12
B:'(zo)
(r~lI:o+cPlI~)+C
(
1B:' (zo)\{(:Jl,y): Iz-e.o l:::;p/4}
1«x,y)-z).l12,
where d = p + Iz - zol. Since Iz - zol ~ 3p/8 this implies
where we have used the fact that fB:'(zo) I«x,y) - Z).l12 ~ Cpn by 5.2. Using this and (7) for the case Iz - zol ~ 3p/8 we thus have
{
1«x,y)-z).l12
1,B:'!. (Zo) (8)
< cd- n - 2 X
(1
R nz +2
1
B~(zo)
B~(zo)\{(z,y):
n
2 112 + d2 11 2 ) + C(L)1-1/(2-et) (r Oro y dn
(r~lI;o + d211; Iz-e. o l:::;p/4}
dn +2
1
+
I«x, y) - Z).l12)) R zn +2
(2-0)
for every z E 8+. The proof is now completed by means the first conclusion of Lemma 5.8 (with L = {OJ x Rm) in each of the integrals on the right side of this inequality (8) and then replacing p by p12. 6 The deviation function,p. Here we use the gap measures of §3 in order to construct a certain deviation function "p, where "p(x, y) is the mean over z E 8+ (8+ as in §5) of the quantity I(x, y) - ZI-n- 2 1«x, y) - z).L1 2 (which appears on the left of the main inequality 5.7) with respect to a gap measure constructed as in §3, with 8+ in place of S.
285
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
We continue to assume the hypotheses 5.1 (hence 5.2) and 5.3, 5.4, 5.5 of §5. Let p E (0, d E (0, (smaller than the do(m,n) of Lemma 3.7), and let st, T:, J.t+ correspond to Sp, T p, J.t of §3 with S+ in place of S. By definition ofT:, dist(Z,Zl +LO,l) ~ Cdp for Zl E TpnS+ and Z E s+nBp(Zl)' Henceforth we assume without loss of generality that L O,I = {O} x Rm, as we did in the proof of 3.7. Than
H
le)
I~z - ~zll ~ Cdp, Zl = (~Z1! '1zJ E Tp Z = (~z, '1z) E Bp(Zl) n S+, p E (0, ~].
(6.1)
n S+,
Now define the deviation function 1/J by (6.2)
Since for given (x,y) E Bt{O)\singM, the integrand in 6.2 is an analytic function of Z E S+, 1/J is certainly well-defined on Bl (0)\ sing M. The main result concerning this function is the following: 6.3 Theorem. Suppose (3 > O. Then there is do = do(n, k, (3) > 0 such that the following holds. H 5.1-5.5 hold, and 810 ~ d ~ do, then for any p E (0, lIe] we
have the estimate
where a
= a(n, k, (3) E (0,1) and 9 :
9(n, k, (3) E (0,
312]'
Proof. The proof is based on the L2 estimates of the previous section. As mentioned above, we assume
(1)
L O,l
= {O} x Rm.
T:
Take p E (0, ~]. If = 0, then we have nothing further to prove, so assume that T: =F 0, and take an arbitrary point Wo E T: n S+. By definition of Tt(C Tt), there is a point Wo E Bp(wo) n S+ such that
(2)
B 2P (wo)ns+c{w: dist(w,wo+{O} xRm) <2dp}
and
(3)
B36p(W)
n S+ =F 0
'tIw E (wo
+ {O} x Rm) n B 2p (wo),
So that (4)
Bp(wo)
n S+
C
the (68p)-neighbourhood of Wo + {O} x Rm,
and (5)
B66p(w)
n s+ =F 0
Y W E (wo
+ {OJ
x Rffl)
n Bp(wo).
286
Also since any wE Bp(wo) n S+ is in
ri; n S+, by Lemma 3.7 we know that
(6) VuE [46 1 / 2 p, 116] and for any wE (wo+{O} xRm)nBp(wo), where C = C(m, n). Now let WI, ••• ,Wm be any points in ('ILIO + {a} x Rm) n Bp(wo) such that m
(7)
2
~)(Wj - wo) • a)2 ~ ~lal2
Va E {a} x Rm.
j=1
Let 9 E [86 1 / 2 , 6~1 be arbitrary for the moment. (We choose 9 = 9(n, k, (3) below.) In view of (5) and (6), for each j E {a, ... ,m} we can select points Zj E B p / 32 (Wj) n S+ such that
(8)
~ Cp-m f
JB:'(wo)\{(Z,II): Iz-(...o 1<9p/8}
1/J(x,y) dxdy.
Here we have used the general principle that for any Borel set U x V C B p (wo) x S+ and any r > a we have
(9)
for all , E V except for a Borel set E C V with ",+(E) $ r- 1 ",+(V). (This implies that if U11 U2 are two subsets of Bp(wo), and r > 2, then there exists at least one point' E V such that we simultaneously have (9) with each of the choices U = Ul! U = U2.) Also, since IZj - wjl :5 p/32, by (7) we obtain (10)
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
287
where L is the linear subspace spanned by z; - Zo, j = 1, . .. , m. On the other hand, automatically L satisfies
(11) by virtue of (2), (10) and the fact that Zo, ... , Zm E S+ n B2p(WO)' Similarly, for arbitrary given W E (wo + ({O} x Rm)) n Bp(wo), and any set (8, ... ,~ E Bep(w) n (Wo + {OJ x Rm) with
(12)
we can again use the general principle (9). This time we in fact use (9) with the choices U = Bep(w) and U = Bp(wo)\{(x, y) : Ix - ewo I ~ pI8}, in each case taking V = B ep / 4 (c<j) n S+. Then, keeping in mind (5), (6), the fact that (J ~ 881 / 2 and the remark immediately following (9), we can select (; E B ep/8(c<j) n S+ such that for each j = 0, ... ,m
(13)
where C = C(n, k, (3). (We emphasize that the choice of (; depends on w, but C only depends on n, k, (3.) Since 1(; - c<jl ~ (JpI8, from (11) and (12) it also follows that
(14)
In view of (10) and (14) we can apply Lemma 5.8 in order to conclude that m
(15)
E I«x, y) ~o
m
Zj).L12 ~ C(J-2:E ~o
I«x, Y)
- (j).L1 2
+ CO- 2 dist 2 «j, Zo + L)
LEON SIMON
on
Bt! (w), so that
(16)
+C(J-2«(Jp)n dist 2«(j,ZO + L) $.
C(J-2«(}p)l+2 [
,p + C(}-2«(}p)n dist 2 «(j, Zo + L)
JB:',,(W)
by the first inequality in (13). Hence 5.8 and 5.9 together with (8) and the second inequality in (13) yield
(17) dist 2 «(j, Zo
+ L)
~(I«x,y) - zj)1.12 L...J n+2 B:"(wo)\{(Z,II): Iz-e"ol~j} ;=0 RZi $. Cp2«(Jp)-m [ ,po
< cp21
•
+ I«x,y) - (j)1.12) n+2
R'i
JB:" (wo)\{(Z,II): Iz-e..o19Ip/8}
By combining (16) and (17) we conclude
for each w E (wo + ({O} x Rm» n Bp(wo). The presence of the factor (Jl $. () in the first term here is crucial, as we shall see below. Now we are going to use the main L2-estimate from Theorem 5.7 with p/2 in place of p. Since Izo - wol < p/321 and hence B p /16(ZO) ::> B p / 32 (WO), or B p/ 2 (zo) C Bp(wo), we have
RECTIFIABILITY OJ;' THE SINGULAR SETS
289
(19)
x( [
( /
lB:,(wo)\{(z,II):lz-(..,ol=:;f!} p
n
f:
I((x, Y)_Z;).L12+ I((x, Y)n~2z).L12)) ~
d ;=0
Rz
for each Z E S+. Then we want to integrate this with respect to the measure 1'+. First notice that, using the notation I'+(A) = 1'+ (A n S+),
[ ~ d + < 1'+(Bp(wo)) is dn I' pn +
+ ~ 1'+ (BU+1)p (wo)) -1'+(B;p(wo)) ~
(jp)n
3=1 00
:$ cp-t + Cp-n LI'+(B(Hl)P(WO))(r n - (j + 1)-n)
(20)
;:;:1 00
:$ cp-t + cp-t Lr(l+I) :$ Cp-l, ;=1
where we have used summation by parts and the fact that 1'+(BU+1)p(wo)) :$ Cjmpm by virtue of Lemma 3.5. Thus integrating in (19) and using the HOlder inequality and (20) we deduce that (21)
1
1
B::
1/J:$ cp-t- 2 S2 (W O)(
x
B:'(tuo)
L p
EI((x,y) _Z;).L12 +C(pm)I-I/(2;=0
(wo)\{(Z'II): Iz-(.. o l=:;p/16}
Q )
m
(p-t-2 L I((x, y) - z;).L12 ;=0
)
+ 1/J)
~
290
LEON SIMON
Now we use
(18)
Wi in place of w, estimating the terms zj).L12 on the right. At the same time we can use (8)
with
IBM.,/4 (w)' Ei=o I«x,y) -
in the remaining terms on the right. Thus from (22) it follows that
where 0 = O(n,k,p) is independent of fJ and 0 1 = 01(fJ,n,k,p). On the other hand, we have Bp(wo) n S+ C {(x,y) : Ix -'- ezol < 46p} by (4), and pm ~ Op+(Bp(wo» by Lemma 3.7, where we continue to use the convention p+(A) = p+(A n S+). Hence, assuming 46 ~ fJ/16, we see that (23) implies
(24)
st
where = ((x,y) , dist«x,y),S+) < u}. Notice that this was all valid starting with an arbitrary Wo E Tp n S+. Now choose a maximal pairwisedisjoint collection {Bp/ 12S (Pk)h=I, ... ,P with Pk E S+ n Tp~4' Then UBp/ 32 (Pk) covers all of the f4 neighbourhood of S+ n T;-;4' By Remark 3.4(2)(a) of §3 we have also that UBp(Pk) is contained in T2~' Since any point of Tt lies in at most O(n) of the balls Bp(Pk), replacing Wo by Pk in (24) and summing over k yield
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
so that, in consequence of 1-'+(8+)
291
= 1 and 8t :J T;t,
!.
provided 0 = O(n, k, 13) E [48 1 / 2 , 614] is chosen to satisfy CO ~ By changing a notation (taking (J /16 to 2(J) and replacing p by p/2, we finally obtain the required inequality.
7 Proof of Theorem 4. Let
13 > 1 and let (Jo
(1.1)
E {9dO) : C E 'Tp} be arbitrary, and suppose
Wo E singM with 9M(WO)
= (Jo.
Recall that, by the monotonicity identity, for each e E (0,1) there exists 0'0 \ O'o(e, u, wo) > 0 such that
9M(WO) ~ O'-nIB~(wo)1 ~ 9M(WO)
(1.2)
+ 10,
=
0' E (0,0'0].
Also, by monotonicity 1.9' we have the identity
(1.3) for each z, r such that Bp(z) CUM. Since BO'(z) C B(l+E)O'(WO) for any z E B::(wo), from 1.2 we deduce that
z E B::(wo), 0' ~ 0'0/2, provided that 9M(Z) ;;:: 9M(WO) and that 0'0 O'o(M, wo, e) > 0 is sufficiently small. Let 8+
take
Wl
= {z E B O'o/2(WO)
E 8+ n B EO'o/4(WO),
E
0'1
: 9M(Z) ;;:: (Jo},
E (0,100'0/4] and define
(1.4) where (7.5)
'7Wl,O'l
(x, y)
== all«x, y) - wt}. Then the above inequality gives
=
LEON SIMON
292
where
(7.6)
0 E S+(Wl,O'l)
={Z E Bl(O) : 9 M(z)
~ Oo} = BdO) n7]w l,/T1S+,
Notice that S+(Wl, 0'1) corresponds exactly to the S+ of §§5, 6 with Xi in place of M. Also, recall that by Lemma 2.16, we can, and we shall, assume that 0'0 == O'o(M, wo, f) is chosen small enough so that S+ has the €-approximation property of 2.16 and hence S+(Wl,O't} does also. Thus (Cf. 5.4)
(7.7)
S+(Wl, 0'1) n B/T(Z) C the (fO')-neighbourhood of Lz,tT,
for each Z E S+(Wl,O'l) and each 0' E (0,1], where Lz,tT is an m-dimensional affine space containing z. We fix these affine spaces in the sequel. Without loss of generality we assume L O,l
(7.8)
= {O} x Rm.
We emphasize that 7.5 and 7.7 hold automatically if 0'0 = O'O(f,U,WO) is chosen sufficiently small. We henceforth assume 0'0(10, u, WO) has been so chosen, and we continue to take M as in 7.4. Notice also that by 7.4 (choosing a new 10 if necessary) 5.1, 5.3, 5.5 all hold with S+(Wt,O'l) in place of S+ and with 00 = 9M(WO)' Thus we can apply the results of §5, §6 with M In place of M, and with S+ = S+(W1,0'1), 00 = 9 M(wo). Before we begin, we need to establish the following lemma, which is a simple inequality for real numbers:
7.9 Lemma. If 0 < a
1,0: E (0,1),13
a-1+ a /2 - b-1+ a / 2 ~ Ca- a / 2 ,
Proof. In case
> 0 and 0.2-a C
~ f3(b - a),
then
= C(f3, 0:) > O.
b/ a > 2 we have trivially that a-1+ 0 /2 _ b-1+ 0 /2 > _ Ca-1+ 0 /2 > _ C a -0/2 ,
so the required inequality holds in this case. In case b/a
~
2 we have
a-1+0/ 2 - b-1+0 / 2 = (1 - 0:/2)C-2+ 0 /2(b - a) for some c E (a, b) 1 - 0:/2 -0/2 b - a > a -2since a ~ b/2 4 a -0
> 13(1 - 0:/2) -
4
-0/2
a
since a 2- 0 ~ f3(b - a),
so again the required inequality is satisfied, and the lemma is proved.
Proof of Theorem 4. Let T:, J.t+ (corresponding to given a with 10 < a/8, and with M as in 7.4 in place of M) be as in §6. a ~ ao(n,k,f3) and € < fJ/B will be chosen later. Now, with M as in 7.4, by virtue of 7.3,7.5, we can apply all the results of §6 to M, and hence (1)
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
293
with 1/1 the deviation function of §6 with M in place of M, where () 0, and 0 = o(n, k, (3) E (0,1). In view of Lemma 7.9 we can use (1) to get
(ITt,. '")
where 10
(ITt '")
-1+./' ?:
-1+./' -
(2)
= fT+ 1/1. i
= (}(n, k, (3) >
CI;·/',
Then starting with p = ~ we can iterate the inequality (2)
in order to obtain j
= 1,2, ... ,
and hence
!
(3)
T"': ., /4
where 2'}' = 0/(2 - 0)
I:(U +
< C3·-1-2'1' 12'1' 0 ,
.1. '#' -
> 0.
Since (j
+ 1)1+'1' -
1)1+'1' - p+'1')!+
;=0
1/1
j = 1,2, ... ,
p+'1'
~ CI~'1'
~
Cp, this implies
I:r
1-'1'
~ CI~'1'.
;=1
T 8 ; /4
Using summation by parts we obtain that
so that
(4) where d is defined on Tt by 4
(5) Now for z E
2-A: d(x,y)= { 0
if (x,y) E Ti-~ \T2t:..~-1' k ~ 2, if (x,y) E Tri.
S+ n Tt and (x, y) E Tt we claim that
(6)
where R,,(x,y) = I(x,y) - zl· Here we include z E Tt, in which case d(z) = 0 so (6) says d(x, y) :5 4R,,(x, y), 'v' (x, y) E To prove this we can of course
Tt
LEON SIMON
294
Ti-.
k
assume d(x, y) > 0, so take any w = (x, y) E \Ti-.-l for some ~ 2, and consider cases as follows: Case (a): Z E T2~' for some q ~ k + 2. (If Z E To+, then this case will be applicable 'V q ~ k + 2.) Then by Remark 3.4(2)(d) of §3 we have Iw - zi ~ 2- k - 2 = 2- k /4 = d(w)/4. Case (b): Z E Ti-. \Ti-'-l with q 5 k + 1. In this case, if we assume that w ~ B.!!i!J.(z), then (keeping in mind that Z E S+ and d(z) = 2- q in case 2 z E T2~' \T2~'-1)' we have Iw - zl ~ 2- q - 1 ~ 2- k- 2 = d(w)/4. Thus (6) is always satisfied as claimed. Now inequality (4) states that
I((x, ~n~2z).L12 dJ.L+(z) dxdy 5
[ 1iog dl1+"Y [
(7)
iT;
18+
CI~'"I,
z
so that by interchanging the order of integration we deduce that
[
(8)
i'1+ T!
!log dl1+"Y I((x, y) - z).L1 2 dxdy < 1"Y R n +2 o· z
for all z E S+ with the exception of a set of J.L+ -measure 5 CPo. (We must keep in mind here that there will in general be lots of points z E S+ which are not in the support of J.L+. and these have J.L+ -measure zero, so in particular (8) need not hold for them.) In view of (6), (8) implies
1
(9)
T;\B¥(z)
- z).L1 2 dxdy -< 1"Y I logRz 11+'"1 I((x, y) R n +2 o. z
for all z E S+ with the exception of a set of J.L+ -measure 5 C IJ . Next note that according to Lemma 3.7 we have a countable set S = {Zj,k : j = 1, ... ,Qk, ~ 2} c S+ n such that
k
Tt
(10)
Zj,k E Ti-. \Ti-.-l, so d(Zj,k)
(11)
=
00
J.L
C1 6m / 2
= 2- k ,
j
= 1, ... ,Qk,
k ~ 2,
Q.
L
2- mk L:[Zk,j]
k=2
j=1
+ C2 1l m
L Tt,
c, = C,(m), i = 1, 2,
and
(12)
S n Ti-. \T:J-.-l C U~~'!'ax(k-2,2) U~l
B61/22-Io
(Zl,j)
Now let £0 C S be the collection of all Zj,k E S such that
'V k ~ 2.
295
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
and let £1 C Td" be the collection of all z E Td" such that
(14)
i
1\B¥(z)
- z).L1 2 dxdy > IJ IlogRz 11+'Y I«x, y) R n +2 o· z
Since 1'+(£0 U £d :$ Clri by (9), by (11) we have that
(15)
L
d(w)m
+ 1lm (£I)
:$ CIJ,
C = C(n, k, &).
wEt:o
Now take any Z E Tt n S+ \To+. From (12) it follows that for some Zj,1c E Sj if this Zj,1c ¢ £0 then by (9)
Z
E
Bd(Zi,.)/4(Zj,lc)
(16)
Regardless of whether Zj,k E £0 or not, by (10) and Remark 3.4(2)(d) (with k + 2, k + 1 in place of l, k) we have that z E B d (IIJ,.)/4(Zj,lc) C Rn\Ti=-.-:I so that
(17) Thus by (16), (17), for any
Z
E S+ n Tt\Td",
(18)
On the other hand if z E Td"\£l, then by definition d(z) -= 0, and (9) implies
(19)
- z).L1 hfTi\B¥(z) IlogRz 11+'Y I«x, y) Rn+2 II
2
dxdy
< l'Y, -
0
(18) and (19) are the main estimates, Using them we now want to check that We have all the hypotheses needed to apply the rectifiability lemma of §2 (in case p = 1 and S = S+), For this purpose, we first assume (20)
no ball Bp(z) with
Z
E B 5 / S (0)
n S+ and p E [k, 11 has a o-gap.
By the definition of o-gap in §3, from (20) it follows that (20)'
S+ has no .to-gaps in the ball Bl(O).
LEON SIMON
296
Also by Definition 3.1 and the definition of d(z) we have (20)"
d(z)
~ 3~
provided E is sufficiently small (depending on E, n, k, {3), which we subsequently assume. Using (20),7.7, 7.S, and the fact that E < 6/S we obtain
(21) In this case (19) implies
1
(22)
Q\B¥(z)
- z)1.12 dxdy < I! I logRz 11+"Y I«x, y) R n +2 0' z
H,
for any z E Tt\ct, where Q = Bs/s(O) n {(x,y) ~ Ixl ~ and (IS) implies that for any z E (8+ n Bl/2(0)\Tt)\(Uz; .• eEoBd(z; .• )/4(Zj,k)) there is always a point E 8+ n Tt\Tt such that
z
(23)
1
Q\B~(i)
Z
_Z)1.12 dxdy IlogR-I1+"YI«x,y) z R n +2 i
E B d (i)/4(Z),
< I! -
0'
d(z) ~ ~d(z).
Now take an arbitrary point z E (8+ n Bl/2(0)\Tt)\(UZ; .• EEoBd(z; .• )f4(Zj,k)) and let z be as in (23). 8+ = 8+(Wt,0'1) has no 6-gaps in Bp(z) for p ~ d(z), and hence for all p E [~, II we can select ZI, ... ,Zm E 8+ n Bp(z) such that 5.6 holds with z in place of Zo and with 'Y depending only on n, k, {3. Let 7] E (0,6 3 ] be given and let L be as in 5.6 (with z in place of zo). For E small enough (depending d(;' on 7], n, k, {3) and for p E [~, ~l we have all the hypotheses needed to apply Lemma 5.9 with 2p in place of p and with 7] in place of C. Hence there is C(p) E Top with singC(p) = L and u(p) E C 3 «z + C(p») n B 4p / 3 (Z)\{(x,y) dist«x, y), z + L) $ p/S}; (C(p»)1.) such that
MnB4p / 3 (Z)\{(x,y) : dist«x,y),z+L) $ piS} (24)
=graphu(p)nB4P / 3 (z)\{(x,y): dist«x,y),z+L) $p/S} and 3
(25)
2: sup pi-I IDiu(p) 1 S 7], i=O
provided that E is small enough depending only on d(z)j4, by 3.1,3.5 and 7.8 we have automatically (26)
7], n, k, {3.
Since for p
~
297
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
Using (24), (25), (26) with p = ~ we then can select a maximum interval (po,~] C [¥,~] such that there is W E C3(C n B1/S(z)\(Bpo(z) U K(z»j C.L) such that
-n
M
B1/S(z)\(Bpo(z) U (z + K»
= graph(w) n B1/S(z)\(Bpo(z) U (z + K»,
and 3
L~-lIDiwl ~ 71 2 / 3 ,
(27)
;=0 where C E TOfJ with sing C = {O} x Rm (we can take C = q(C(l/S» with q orthogonal such that q(sing C(l/S» = {O} x Rm and IIq - l R ft+kll ~ Cf), and where
K
= {(x,y) : Ixl ~ 41 1(x,y)I}.
By (20), 3.1, (24), (25) it is clear that
so long as f is small enough. Further, from (27) and (24), (25), (26) with p E [po, ~], it follows that w can be extended to give 'Iii E C3(Cn(Bl/S(Z)\(Bpo/2(Z)U (z + K»j C.L) with
(28)
M
n (Bl/S(Z)\(Bpo/2(Z) U (z + K» = graph(w)
_
n (Bl/S(Z)\(Bpo/2(Z) U (z + K»
and 3
(29)
L~-l sup IDi'lii1 ~ C71 2 / 3 ,
;=0 where
K
= {(x,y) : Ixl ~
9
40 1(x,y)I},
On the other hand by the identity (8) in the proof of Lemma 4.4, applied with 'Iii in place of u and with C71 2 / 3 in place of 71, C as in (29), we have (30)
provided 71 is small enough depending on n, k, (3. Now let
LEON SIMON
298
and let w(O') denote the L2(r) function given by w(s)(w) = w(z + sw), w E r. Then by direct integration, the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality, and (30) we obtain (31)
for any po/2 < 0' < T ~ 1/8. Taking T = ~ and using (24)-(26) with P = 1/8, and also (27) again, we then deduce that
for
0'
E [',
H Thus sup p- n -
(32)
2 (
_
JB:'(z)\(BpQ/~(z)U(Z+K»
PE[pQ,tl
Iwl2 ~ GTJ,
and hence by PDE estimates we can improve the estimate (29) to
a
'E ';-1 sup IDiwl ~ G1/ < 1/2/3,
(33)
i=o provided 1/ is small enough depending on n, k, {3. However this contradicts the maximality of the interval [Po, ~l unless Po = d(z)/4. Thus Po = d(z)/4 and, in consequence of (32), (34) Since
sup
[~,tl Z
p-n-2 ( B:'(zH\{(Z,II): Iz- xl<9p/40}UBd (.)/s(Z))
J
~ G1/.
E B d (z)/4(Z) and id(z) ~ d(z) ~ a12' from (34) it follows that sup
[2d(z),lJP- n - 2 (
JB~~(z)\{(z,y): Iz-{I:S;p/5}
where ~ is the projection of z onto its first i writing p in place of p/2, (35)
dist 2 ((x,y), C)
sup
[d(z),1IP-n-2 (
+k
dist 2 ((x,y), C)
~ G1/,
coordinates; in other words, by
JB~ (z)\{(z,y): Iz-{I:S;2p/5}
dist 2 «x, V), C)
~ C1J.
299
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
IT ( E (0, cPl is given and f is sufficiently small, depending on d, n, k, (3, then (35) combined with Corollary 4.6 gives
(36) S+ n Bp(z) C the ((p)-neighbourhood of Z + {O} x Rm,
P E [¥-, kl.
So, using the definition 3.3, we would have Z E T~Z)/2 unless one of the balls Bp(z), P E [!d(z), has ad-gap. But of course z E contradicts the definition of d(z) for d(z) > 0, so we
kl
T¥
conclude finally, keeping in mind (20),
Next notice that since To+ is a subset of the graph of a Lipschitz function over {O} x Rm with Lipschitz constant ~ Cd, in view of (15) we can select a {BO'. (Zk)} such that (38)
Uk E (0,
k),
£1 C UkBO'.(Zk),
Lur ~ cro· k
(31)'
(w as in (31) with
(36)'
Z
in place of i), and
S+ n Bp(z) C the «(p)-neighbourhood of z + {O} x Rm,
p E (0,
kl,
by the same argument used to derive (31) and (36), except that we use (22) in place of (23) and z in place of i everywhere. In view of (15), (36), (37), (38), and (36)' it is now evident that, provided (20) holds, we can take the collection {Bd(z;,.)/4(Zj,k)}z;,.Et:o U {BO'.(Zk)} to be the collection corresponding to Tzo,po in the rectifiability lemma of §2 in case we use ( in place of f, and then hypothesis (b) of that lemma is satisfied in case Xl = 0 and PI = 1. On the other hand if (20) fails, then some ball Bl.(Y) with y E Bl.(O) n 4 2 {O} X Rm must have a !-gap, and so the first alternative hypothesis of the rectifiability lemma holds in case Xl = 0 and PI = 1. Thus, provided f is sufficiently small, depending on 8, n, k, (3, we have shown that S+(Wl, Ul) satisfies the hypotheses of the rectifiability lemma 2.2 for Xl = 0, PI = 1. But then trivially any closed subset of S+ (WI, ut), including 'l/Wl,/Tl (B f /To/4(WO) n S+), also satisfies such hypotheses. That is, in view of the arbitrariness of WI, Ul, wEt have shown that S = Bf /To/4(WO) ns+ satisfy the hypotheses of 2.2 for any Xl E S, PI E (O,Pol, where Po = fuo/4. Thus the rectifiability lemma 2.2 implies that B f /To/4(WO)nS+ .is m-rectifiable. Finally, let B be any closed ball contained in UM. Then by monotonicity 1.7 there is a fixed f3 > 0 such that eM (y ) :::; f3 for each y E B. In particular
300
LEON SIMON
8c(0) ~ f3 for any tangent cone of M at any point y E B, and by Lemma 4.3 we know that {8M(Y) : Y E sing. M n B} is a finite set 0:1 < ... < O:N of positive numbers, where sing. M is as in 2.17. Let Sj
= {z E singM
: 8M(Z)
= O:j},
st = {z E singM : 8M(Z) ~ O:j}. st
Notice that is closed in n by the upper semi-continuity 1.13 of 8M. For any j E {I, ... ,N} and any y E Sj, according to the above discussion, there is p> 0 such that Bp(Y) n is m-rectifiable. Thus, in view of the arbitrariness of y, the set Sj has an open neighbourhood Uj such that
st st n Uj is locally m-rectifiable.
(41)
Of course the st n Uj are also locally compact, because open. Now let
V;
= {z E singM
: 8M(Z)
Then the V; are open in
< O:i+d,
j
st
is closed and
= 0, ... ,N -1,
VN
B
n singM = u,7=o{z
EB
= U,7=oB n
st
n sing M : n Yj
O:j ~ 8M(Z)
is
= n.
n by the upper semi-continuity 1.13 of 8 M,
= 0, O:N+! = 00, sri = sing M, and Uo = 0, we can write
0:0
Uj
and with
< O:j+!}
= (U,7=o(B n st n Uj n V;)) U (U,7=o(B n st\Uj) n Yj). This is evidently a decomposition of B n sing M into a finite union of pairwise disjoint locally compact sets, each of which is locally m-rectifiable; in fact for each j the set (B n st\Uj ) n V; C sing M\ sing. M, and hence has Hausdorff dimension ~ m - 1 by 2.17, and the set B n st n Uj n V; is locally m-rectifiable by (30). This completes the proof of Theorem 2. Proof of Remark 1.14. We have to show that for llm-a.e.
Z
E sing M
there is a unique tangent space for sing M at Z in the Hausdorff distance sense, and also that M has a unique tangent cone at z. For the former of these we have to show that, for llm-a.e. Z E sing M, there is an m-dimensional subspace L z such that for each € > 0 (1)
B1 (0)
n TJz,~ (sing M)
B1 (0)
n Lz
C the f-neighbourhood of Lz
and (2)
C the f-neighbourhood of TJz,~ (sing M)
for all (J' E (0, (J'o) where (J'o = (J'O(f, M, z) .J.. 0 as € .J.. O. Using the notation in the last part of the proof above, let z E Sj be any point where has an approximate tangent space. Then there is an m-dimensional subspace Lz with
st
(3)
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
301
(Notice such L" exists for Jim-a.e. z E Sj because Sj is locally m-rectifiable.) We show that (1) and (2) hold with this L". In fact the inclusion (2) is evidently already implied by this, so we need only to prove (1). Let Uk .!- 0 be arbitrary, and let C be any tangent cone of M at z with 11",tT., M -t C for some subsequence Uk" By (3) it is evident that the fk neighbourhood of Bl (0) n 11",tT., contains all of Lz n B 1 / 2 (0) for some sequence fk .!- 0, so that, in consequence of the upper semi-continuity 2.3,
st
8c(y) ~ 8c(0) = 8 M (0)
everywhere on L z n B 1 / 2 (0).
Thus by 2.5 and 2.6 we have Lc :J L", and since L z has maximal dimension m, this shows that Lc = L", so C E r with Lc = L". But then by 4.6 we have
Bl (0) n 11",tT., (sing M) c the fk-neighbourhood of L" for some sequence fk .!- O. In view of the arbitrariness of the original sequence 11k we thus obtain (2) as claimed. Finally we want to show that there is a unique tangent cone of C at Jim_ a.e. z E singM. Let Sj = {z E singM : 8M(Z) = aj} as above. For each f > 0, we can subdivide Sj into U~l Sj,i, where Sj,i denotes the set of points Z E Sj such that the conclusions (1) and (2) hold with Uo = t. Provided the original wo, U1 in the definition 7.4 of M are selected with Wo E Sj,i and U1 = 111(f,M,wo,i) ~ t. by (1) and (2) we then have that all points of z E 11wD, tTl Sj,i are contained in the set in the proof of Theorem 2 above. Hence by (31) of the above proof we conclude that there is a unique tangent cone of M at each point z E Sj,i n BtT, (wo) with the exception of a set of Jim-measure ~ fUr. In view of the arbitrariness of f, Wo here (and keeping in mind that we have already established that Sj,i is locally m-rectifiable) this shows that there is a unique tangent cone of M for Jim-a.e. points Z E Sj,i' Since Jim (sing M\(Ui,jSj,i)) = 0, the proof is complete.
Tit
7 Theorems on Countable Rectifiability. Recall that a set is countably m-rectifiable if it can be written as the countable union of m-rectifiable sets. There are some theorems about countable rectifiability of the singular set even without the hypotheses 1.13, 1.13' (Le., without assuming that we are in the top dimension of singularities over the entire class of maps or surfaces under consideration). For minimizing maps such theorems are established in [32]. Here we want to establish such a result for M EM. We are going to prove that sCm) is countably m-rectifiable, where, for a given ME M and m E {I, ... , n -I}, SCm) is the set of points Z E singM such that all tangent cones C of M at z are such that dim sing C ~ m. In fact we shall prove the stronger result that T(m) is countably rectifiable, Where T(m) is the set of points z E sing M such that all tangent cones C of At at z have dim Lc :5 m and sing C = Lc if dim Lc = m. Since trivially SCm) C T(m), this will also prove the above claim about s(m). For each 6 > 0, let Tjm) denote the set of points Z E sing M such that, Whenever C E C with inf.,.E(o,cI) fBI (o)n'1.... M dist 2 ((x, y), C) < 6, then we have
302
LEON SIMON
dim Lc ~ m and sing C
= Lc if dim Lc = m. We claim that
(1)
T(m)
Indeed if z ~ Uf=,l T~h)' then for (0, l/i1 with
C u<:o
3=1
T(m)
1/j'
i = 1,2, ...
we can find Cj E C and
(Tj
E
(2) and
(3)
either dim Lc;
>m
or both dim Lc; = m and sing Cj :f:. Lc;.
Notice that the latter alternative here implies that
(4)
singCj :J H j ,
where Hj is an (m + I)-dimensional half-space. Now by (2) some subsequence of C j (still denoted C j ) converges to a tangent cone 0 of M at z, and by (3), (4), 2.1, and 2.3 we have that dimLc
>m
or both dimLc = m and singC:f:. Lc.
Hence z f/. T(m) by definition, and (1) is proved. Next we define Tt;;), for (3 > 0, to be the set of all Z E
Tim)
such that
3
L
sup IDj ACol ~ (3 consn-",-l j=O
(5)
for all C E C such that inf.,.E(0,6]IIC - 77z,.,.MIIL2(Bl(O» < 6 and dimLc = m, where Co is such that sing Co = {O} and q(C) = Co x R m for some orthogonal q, and Aco is the second fundamental form of Co. (Notice that by definition of Tim> there is such a Co corresponding to each such C.) Now
Tt;;> is a. closed subset of
(6)
sing M
for each 6, (3 > 0, because if Zj -+ Z E sing M, with Zj E T},';;> Vj, and if C E C with f,,.,,,MnBl(0)dist 2 ((x,y),CnB I (0)) < 6 for some (T E (0,6], then, with this
(T,
f"oj,,,MnBd b) dist 2
large j. Since Zj E
Tt;;>,
«x, y), C n BI(O» < 6 for all sufficiently
we have dimLc ~ m, and also singC
= Lc E TJ;>
and
SUPmsn-",-l L~=o IDi Aco I ::; (3 in case dim Lc = m. That is, Z and hence (6) is proved. All the arguments used in the proof of Theorem 4 now carryover to the present setting essentially without change provided we use TJr;;) n S+ in place of S+. (Whenever we needed 2.12 before, we can now use inst'ead (5) above.)
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
303
Thus We conclude that for each given 6, /3 > 0 and for each z E TI,r;;) with eM(Z) = ec(O) for some C E C with singC = Lc of dimension m, there is p> 0 such that Bp(z) n {w E TI,r;;) : eM(W) ~ eM(Z)} is m-rectifiable, and then the argument in the last part of the proof of Theorem 2 shows that TI,r;;) locally decomposes into a finite union of locally m-rectifiable subsets. In view of (1) and the fact that TIm) = U~lTJ,i), which proves that T(m) is countably m-rectifiable as claimed. REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3J [4J [5J [6J [7J [8] [9J
[lOJ [11J
[12J [13J
[14] [15]
F. Almgren, Q-valued functions minimizing Dirichlet's integral and the regularity of of area minimizing rectifiable cur'rents up to codimension two, Preprint. F. Almgren, Existence and regularity almost everywhere of solutions to elliptic variational problems among surfaces of varying topological type and singularity structure, Ann. of Math. 87 (1968) 321-391 W. Allard, On the first variation of a varifold, Ann. of Math. 95 (1972) 417-491. F. Bethuel, On the singular set of stationary harmonic maps, CMLA, Preprint # 9226. H. Brezis, J.-M. Coron, & E. Lieb, Harmonic maps with defects, Comm. Math. Physics 107 (1986) 82-100 E. De Giorgi, Frontiere orientate di misura minima, Sem. Mat. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa (1961) 1-56. C. L. Evans, Partial regularity for stationary harmonic maps into spheres, Arch. Rational Mech. Anal. 116 (1991) 101-163 H. Federer, Geometrio Measure Theory, Springer, Berlin, 1969. H. Federer, The singular sets of area minimizing rectifiable currents with codimension one and of area minimizing flat chains modulo two with arbitrary codimension, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 76 (1970) 767-771. E. Giusti, Minimal surfaces and functions of bounded variation, Birkhauser, Boston, 1983 M. Giaquinta & E. Giusti, The singular set of the minima of certain quadratic functionals, Ann. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa Cl. Sci. (4) 11 (1984) 45-55 D. Gilbarg & N. Trudinger, Elliptic Partial Differential Equations of Second Order (2nd Edition), Springer, Berlin, 1983. F. Helein, Regularite des applications faiblement harmoniques entre une surface et une variete Riemanninenne, C.R. Acad. Sci, Paris 312 (1991) 591-596. R. Hardt & F.-H. Lin, The singular set of an eneryy minimizing harmonic map from B4 to 52, Preprint, 1990. R. Hardt & F.-H. Lin, Mappings minimizing the LP norm of the gradient,
304
[16] [17]
[18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]
LEON SIMON
Comm. Pure & Appl. Math. 40 (1987) 555-588. J. Jost, Harmonic Maps between Riemannian Manifolds, Proc. Centre for Math. Anal., Australian National Univ., 3 1984. S. Luckhaus, Partial Holder continuity for minima of certain energies among maps into a Riemannian manifold, Indiana Univ. Math. J. 37 (1988) 349-367. S. Luckhaus, Convergence of Minimizers for the p-Dirichlet Integral, Preprint, 1991. C. B. Morrey, Multiple integrals in the calculus of variations, Springer, Berlin, 1966. S. Lojasiewicz, Ensembles semi-analytiques t Inst. Hautes Etudes Sci. Publ. Math., 1965. R. E. Reifenberg, Solution of the Plateau problem for m-dimensional surfaces of varying topological type, Acta. Math. 104 (1960) 1-92. E. Riviere, Everywhere discontinuous maps into the sphere, Preprint. R. Schoen & L. Simon, Regularity of stable minimal hypersurfaces, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 34 (1981) 741-797. R. Schoen & K. Uhlenbeck, A regularity theory for harmonic maps, J. Differential Geometry 17 (1982) 307-336. L. Simon, Lectures on Geometric Measure Theory, Proc. Centre for Math. Anal., Australian National Univ., 3 (1983). _ _ , Cylindrical tangent cones and the singular set of minimal submanifolds, J. Differential Geometry 38 (1993) 585-652. _ _ , On the singularities of harmonic maps, in preparation. _ _, Singularities of Geometric Variational Problems, to appear in Amer. Math. Soc., Proc. RGI Summer School (Utah). _ _ , Proof of the Basic Regularity Theorem for Harmonic Maps, to appear in Amer. Math. Soc.( Proc. RGI Summer School (Utah) _ _II Asymptotics for a class of non-linear evolution equations, with applications to geometric problems, Ann. of Math. 118 (1983) 525:-572. _ _, Theorems on regularity and singularity of harmonic maps ETH Lectures, 1993, to appear. _ _, Rectifiability of the singular set of energy minimizing maps, Calculus of Variations and PDE, 3 (1995) 1-65. J. Taylor, The structure of singularities in soap-bubble-like and soap-filmlike minimal surfaces, Ann. of Math. 103 (1976) 489-539. B. White, Non-unique tangent maps at isolated singularities of harmonic maps Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 26 (1992) 125-129.
RECTIFIABILITY OF THE SINGULAR SETS
[35]
305
B. White, Regularity of the singular sets in immisicible fluid interfaces Proc. CMA, Australian National Univ., Canberra 10 (1985) 244-249. STANFORD UNIVERSITY
IN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY, 1995 Vol. 2 ©1995, International Press
SURVEYS
Homology cobordism and the simplest perturbative Chern-Simons 3-manifold invariant CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
1 Introduction. Witten predicted [18] that certain products of a certain 2-form could be integrated over products of a compact, oriented 3-manifold to give differential invariants of the 3-manifold. These predicted invariants were first constructed by Axelrod and Singer [2, 3] in the case where the 3-manifold has the rational homology of 8 3 • (A similar prediction in [18] for computing Jones' knot invariants had been partially realized by Bar Natan [4].) Subsequently, Kontsevich [9] gave an alternative realization of Witten's proposed invariants, with the same constraint on the homology of the 3-manifold. (Presumably, the invariants of Axelrod/Singer and of Kontsevich are the same, but the author has not seen a proof that such is the case.) Note that the invariants of Axelrod/Singer and Kontsevich have only been calculated for the 3-sphere (where they vanish). The Axelrod/Singer and Kontsevich invariants are formally related to the 3-manifold invariants of Reshitikin and 'furaev [14]. (The relationship here is presumed analogous to that between Jones, HOMFLY and other knot invariants and the knot invariants of Vassiliev [16], [17]j see [6], [5t [10].) There is no theorem at present which describes the precise relationship between these various 3-manifold invariants. Such a theorem would be useful in light of the fact that the invariants of Reshitikin and 'furaev can be explicitly computedj they have been computed in closed form for lens spaces [8] and Seifert fibered 3-manifolds [13]. This is the first of two articles focusing solely on the simplest of the invariants of Kontsevich, an invariant, 12 , which assigns a number to a 3-manifold M (as constrained above) by integrating the cube of a certain real valued 2-form over M x M. Of particular concern here is the value of 12 on the 3-manifold boundaries of a 4-dimensional spin cobordism which has the rational homology of 8 3 • The results in this article, together with those in the sequel [15], prove that 12 (M) = 12 (M') when M and M' are the boundary components of an oriented, spin 4-manifold W for which: 1. The intersection form on W's second homology (mod torsion) is conjugate to a direct sum of metabolic pairs. 2. The inclusions of M and M' into W induce injections of Hl(·jZ/2). (1.1)
(A metabolic pair is a symmetric, 2 x 2 matrix with zero's on the diagonal.) In particular, the preceding result implies that 12 (M) = 0 when M has the integral homology of 8 3 • These results are restated and proved in [15].
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
307
This article makes a large step on the way to (1.1)j the main theorem here, Theorem 2.9, states (in part) that 12 (M) = 12 (M') when M and M' are the boundaries of an oriented, spin 4-manifold W for which the inclusions of M and M' into W induce 1) Isomorphisms on H,lj Q) for p = 0, ... ,4. 2) Injective maps on H1 (·j71./2). (1.2)
In the course of proving Theorem 2.9, 12 (8 3 ) is shown to vanish. Thus, even without the sequel [15], the main theorem here can be used, in principle, to show that 12 vanishes for certain 3-manifolds. (It is possible that 12 == 0 for all
M!) The author hopes that the constructions in this article will prove useful in studying the full set of invariants of Axelrod/Singer and Kontsevich, and this accounts, in part, for the length of the presentation. (The constructions here playa crucial role in [15].) Before beginning the story, the author wishes to thank Robion Kirby and Paul Melvin for their comments concerning this work, and also for their encouragement and support. A debt is owed as well to Dror Bar-Natan for sharing his knowledge of knot invariants. This article is organized as follows: The definition of 12 and the main theorem (Theorem 2.9) are given in the next section. The remaining sections (3-11) are occupied with constructions that are needed for the main theorem's proof. Section 3 is a digression to present certain facts from Morse theory. Section 4 studies the homological constraints which arise in the proof. Sections 5-10 contain the construction of a solution to the homological constraints. The final aspects of the proof of the main theorem are provided in Section 11. 2 The definition and properties of 12 (M). The purpose ofthis section is to give a definition of Kontsevich's invariant, 12 (.), for compact, oriented 3-manifolds that have the rational homology of S3. This section also contains the paper's main theorem about the equality of 12 for a pair of 3- manifolds which occur as the boundary components of a certain kind of 4-dimensional cobordism. a) Topological considerations. Let M be a compact, oriented 3-manifold with the rational homology of S3. Fix a point Po EM. Let t::. c M x M denote the diagonal. Define the subspace (2.1)
I: == .6. u
CPo
x M) U (M x Po).
Lemma 2.1 describes the cohomology of M x M - I:. Before reading Lemma 2.1, be forewarned that a regular neighborhood of I: in M x M is a neighborhood
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
308
of E which strongly deformation retracts (reI E) onto E. It is an exercise to show that such neighborhoods exist. Also, in Lemma 2.1, cohomology is computed with real (IR) coefficients.
LEMMA 2.1. Let E be as defined in (fU). Then 1) H2((M x M) - E) ~ R 2) Let N C M x M be a regular neighborhood of E. Then, restriction gives an isomorphism H2((M x M) - E) ~ H2(N - E). 9) Let i : IR3 ~ N be an embedding which intersects E - CPo,Po) transversely in a single point, i(O). Then i* : H2(N - E) ~ H2(IR3 - 0) is an isomor-
phism.
4)
Hl((M x M) - E)
~
Hl(N - E)
~
O.
Proof. For the first assertion, use Meyer-Vietoris to prove that (M x M) ((Po x M) U (M x Po» has the rational homology of IR6. Then, use Meyer-Vietoris again to compute the cohomology of the remainder when t:J.. is deleted. In fact, this calculation with Meyer-Vietoris shows that M x M - E has the rational cohomology of 8 3 x 52.
Prove the second assertion using the Meyer-Vietoris exact sequence for the cover of M x M by N and M x MUE. (The Kunneth formula gives H2 (M x M) = 0, while restriction injects H 3 (M x M) into H 3 (E).) The third and fourth assertions are left as exercises with Meyer-Vieto-
0
~.
The cohomology of (M x M) - E with rational coefficients is isomorphic to its DeRham cohomology.
b) An invariant. Let C denote the set of pairs (N, cp) where N is a regular neighborhood of E, and where cp : N ~ IR3 is a smooth map with the property that cp-l (0) = !:. Define an equivalence relation on C as follows: Say that (No, CPo) and (N1 ,cpd are equivalent if there is a regular neighborhood N2 C No n Nl and a smooth map (2.2)
=
which obeys q,(0,·) = cp(O) and q,(l,.) CPl and q,-l (0) = [0,1] x E. Let c denote the set of equivalence classes in C. Now, change gears somewhat and pick a smooth, closed 2- form, It, on IR3 - 0 whose integral over the standard unit 2-sphere is equal to 1. For example,
Let cp E C. According to Lemma 2.1, there exists a smooth, closed 2-forIll on M x M - E which agrees with cp. It on N. Fix such a form and call it w", •
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
309
PROPOSITION 2.2. Let (N, It') E C and choose the following integral converges:
(2.4)
12
=[
lMxM-r.
w", A
w'"
as described above. Then
w'" A w'"
Furthermore, 12 is independent of the choice of w'" to extend It'* Il, and it is independent of the choice of Il. Infact, 12 depends only on the equivalence class of (N, It') in c .
Proof. The integral converges because the integrand has compact support on M x M - N. Indeed, w'" A w'" vanishes on N because w'" on N is the pull back of a form on 8 2 • Now, suppose that (No,It'o) and (NI,It'l) define the same equivalence class in c. Suppose that ILo and III are different choices for Il in Proposition 1.2. Suppose that Wo and WI are closed 2-forms on M x M - E which extend It'o ILo and It'i IJ.I from No and N, respectively. Let N2 C No n NI and "' Il to [0,1] x (M x M - E) as a closed 2-form w. With W defined, compute
°
(2.5)
d(wAwAw)
0= [ l[o,ljx (MxM-J:.)
using Stokes' theorem to express 0 (i.e. Equation (2.5)) as a sum of three terms. (Note that the integrand in (2.5) is compactly supported away from [0,1] x E since w is pulled back from a 4- dimensional manifold on [0,1] X N 2 .) The three terms alluded to above are as follows: The first term is the contribution to Stokes' theorem from {1} x (M x M - E)j it is the integral in (2.4) as computed using the data with subscript ~'t". The second term is the contribution to Stokes theorem from {OJ x (M x ME)j it is the integral in (2.4) as computed using the data with subscript "0". To write down the third term which contributes to the Stokes' theorem computation of (2.5), one must first fix N C N 2 , a smooth, oriented, codimension 1 submanifold that separates E c M x M from M x M - N 2 • With N understood, here is the third contribution to (2.5): (2.6)
812
=[
w /I. w /I.
W
l[o,ljxN
Note that (2.6) is zero because w on [0,1] x N equals
310
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
c) Singular framings. The previous subsection introduced the set c of equivalence classes of pairs (N, cp), where N is a regular neighborhood of 1:, and where cp : N -+ JR3 has 1: = cp-1(0). The purpose of this subsection is to describe a fiducial set of such classes. However, a preliminary, digression is required to define the notion of a singular framing of T* M. The digression has four parts. Part 1 of the digression introduces the standard· framing of T*JR3, dx (dX1,dx2,dxg). Part 1 also introduces the framing ~ of T*(JR3 - 0) which is given at x E JR3 by
=
~
(2.7)
= -dx + 21 x 1-2 < x, dx > x,
where < x,dx >= 1:~=1Xidxi' Part 2 of the digression makes the remark that a framing (such as ~ can be changed to a different framing using a matrix in G L(3, JR). Indeed, if 9 (gij) is a such a matrix, and if ( «(1, (2, (g) is a framing, then 9 ( is the framing given by (g()i 1:~=1 gij (j. Part 3 of the digression defines the notion of a singular framing:
=
=
=
DEFINITION 2.3.A singular frame, (, for T* M is an oriented trivialization of T*(M -Po) which has the following property: Let cp : JRg -+ M be an orientation preserving embedding (coordinate system) with cp(O) = Po. There should exist an element g E GL(3, JR), with positive determinant, and such that
(2.8)
lim sup 1 cp*( - g~ 1 (x) = O. r-+O Izl=r
(Note: Let ( be a frame for T*(M - Po). Suppose that cp and cp' are two coordinates systems as in Definition 2.3 and that there exists 9 which makes (2.8) true for cpo It is an exercise to show that there will exist g' which makes (2.8) true for cp'.) Roughly, a singular frame for T* M is a frame which looks like ~ in some coordinate system centered at Po. Part 4 of the digression defines a homotopy class of singular framing of T* M. Measure the distance between singular frames using the CO norm on sections of T*(M - Po). Then, give the set of CO norms the induced metric topology. A homotopy class of singular frames is just a path component of the space of singular frames.
LEMMA 2.4. The set c of homotopy classes of singular frames for T* M is naturally a principal bundle over a point for the abelian group 71"0 (Maps(Mj 80(3».
=
Proof. Since 11"2(80(3)) = 0, the set of homotopy classes of singular frames is in 1 - 1 correspondence with the set of homotopy classes of honest framing5 of T* M. Fix a frame of T* M and then the space of framings of T* M can be
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
311
identified with the space of maps from Minto 80(3). Thus, the set of homotopy classes of singular frames is in 1 - 1 correspondence with the group 11"0. The action of 11"0 on the set of homotopy classes of singular frames comes about as follows: Let (== «(1,(2,(3) be a singular frame, and let 9 == (gij)~,j=1 be a map from M to 80(3). Then 9 ( is the frame whose i'th component is given by ~1=1 gij (j. It is left to the reader to check that the aforementioned action is free and transitive. By the way, the group 11"0 is naturally isomorphic to an abelian extension of H 1 (M;Z/2) by Z. The projection,
(2.9) of a homotopy class [g] of map 9 : M -+ 80(3) is the cohomology class of the pull-back by 9 of the generator of HI (80(3); Z/2). Any two maps which have the same pull-back of said generator differ by a map which lifts to a map from M to 8 3 • The homotopy class of such maps to 8 3 is classified by assigning to a map its degree, an integer. There is also a homomorphism,
(2.10)
Poe:
11"0
-+ Z,
which is defined on a class [g] by taking the generator H3(80(3); Z) and evaluating its pull-back on M's fundamental class. Note that classes in 11"0 which lift to map Minto 8 3 are sent by Poe into 2 Z. End the digression. 0 PROPOSITION 2.5. A homotopy class, [(], of singular frames for T* M canonically defines an equivalence class, C( == c of pairs (N, tp), where N is a regular neighborhood of ~ and where tp : N -+ IR3 is a smooth map with tp-l (0) = E. Furthermore, when (N, tp) E C(, then tp* is an isomorphism between H2 (R3 ~ 0) and H2(N - E).
Propositions 2.2 and 2.5 define a map, 12 , from the set, c, of equivalence classes of canonical frames to lR. PROPOSITION
on c when the 2- 1 Poe[g] + r.
11"0
2.6. The map 12 : c -+ IR is equivariant under the action of 11"0 action on IR is defined by sending a pair ([g], r) E 11"0 X lR to
The propositions in this subsection are proved below. d) A canonical singular frame.
Note that 12 above is not a numerical invariant of M as it is apriori defined on the quotient, ~, of the set of homotopy classes of singular frames by the action of the kernel of the homomophism Poc. However, (as suggested by Kevin Walker)
312
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
one can apply an observation of Atiyah to produce a canonical element in c, and then apply 12 to this canonical element to produce the numerical invariant, 12 (M). The definition of 12 (M) requires the following four part digression: Part 1 of the digression recalls the observation of Atiyah [1] that a compact, oriented 3-manifold has a canonical homotopy class of franling of T* M EB T* M. Atiyah calls this 2-franle the canonical 2-franle. It will be denoted here by A. A franle S for T* M EBT* M which defines A is characterized by two conditions. The first condition requires that S differ from a product franle ((, () by a map from Minto 80(6) which lifts to a map Minto Spin(6). To describe the second characterizing condition, remark first that when M is the boundary of a compact, oriented 4-manifold, X, with boundary, then the franle S defines a franling of (T* X EB T* X)IM since T* XIM ~ T* M EB f with f being the trivial line bundle. Remark second that a franling S of (T* X EB T* X)IM has a relative first Pontrjagin number Pl(T* X EB T* X,S). (This number is defined to be the first Pontrjagin number of an JR.6 -bundle over the space X / M obtained by crushing M to a point. The bundle in question is trivial near M, and is isomorphic to T* X EB T* X away from M, with S defining the isomorphism.) With PI (T* X EB T* X, 3) understood, here is the 2nd condition that characterizes Atiyah's canonical 2-franle: For any X as above,
(2.11)
PI (T* X EB T* X, 3)
=6
signature(X)
(Note that the Hirzebruch signature theorem insures that when (2.11) holds for one X as above, it holds for all such X.) Part 2 of the digression serves as a reminder that every compact, oriented 3-manifold is the boundary of some compact, oriented, spin 4-manifold with boundary [18]. Furthermore, the signature mod(8) of such a bounding 4manifold is an invariant of M. Part 3 of the digression remarks that any map from a 3- manifold into Spin(6) deforms into Spin(3) and has a natural degree. Part 4 of the digression describes the relationship between singular franlings for T* M and franlings of T* M EB T*M: PROPOSITION 2.7. Let M be a compact, oriented 3-manifold with the rational homology of 8 3 • 1) A homotopy class of singular frame [(] for T* M naturally defines a pair, ([(_],[(+]), of homotopy classes ofhonestframesforT*M. Here, (+ = g(_ where 9 : M ~ 80(3) is a map with Poo(g) = 2 and which lifts to83• 2) The assignment [(] ~ ([(-] , [(+]), above, induces a natural, injective map 6 from !< into the set of homotopy classes of framings of T* M EB T* M. 3) If M bounds a compact, oriented, spin 4-manifold whose signature is zero mod(4), then Atiyah's canonical 2-frame is in the image of 6.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
4)
313
In general, there is a map 9 from M to Spin(6) with non-negative degree and such that 9 A is in the image of ().
This proposition is also proved below. End the digression and consider the following definition of I2(M): DEFINITION 2.8.Let M be a compact, oriented :i-manifold which has the rational homology of S3. Let A denote the canonical 2-frame of Atiyah. a) If M bounds a spin 4-manifold with signature 0 mod(4), then define eM E ~ to be (}-l(A).
b)
c)
In general, define CM E c so that (}(CM) = 9 A, where g is a map from M to Spin(6) whose degree is non-negative and minimal among the set of all g such that 9 A E Image( (}). Define I 2 (M) to be the value of Proposition 2.6's homomorphism h on CM·
e) 120 and cobordisms. The main purpose of this article is to prove that I 2 (M) is an invariant of a certain type of cobordism. A precise statement requires a two part digression. For Part 1 of the digression, consider a pair, Mo and Mt, of compact, oriented 3-manifolds. A 4-manifold with boundary, W, will be called an oriented, rational homology, spin cobordism between Mo and MI when the following requirements are met: First, W is oriented and spin. Second, W's boundary is the disjoint union of Mo and MI. Third, let iO,1 : M O,1 -+ W denote the inclusions as boundary components. These inclusions, plus the given orientation of W, orient Mo and MI. This boundary orientation of MI should agree with its given orientation, but the boundary orientation of Mo should disagree with Mo's given orientation. Fourth, the inclusions of Mo and MI into W should induce isomorphisms on the rational homology. End Part 1 of the digression and start Part 2. Let W be a compact, oriented, spin 4-manifold with boundary and let M be a component of Let K(Mj W) denote the cokernel of the restriction induced homomorphism Hl(WjZ/2) -+ Hl(MjZ/2). The purpose of Part 2 of the digression is to define a homomorphism
aw.
(2.12)
lw : c :-+ K(Mj W).
The definition of lw takes five steps: Step 1 remarks that TOOW is isomorphic to the trivial bundle because W is spin and not a compact manifold. In particular, T"W has a frame, (. For Step 2, let 1/1 be a singular frame for TOO M and let 1/1' be any honest frame for T* M which agrees with 1/1 on the compliment of a ball around Po. Note that 1/1' defines a frame for TOOWIM ::::: TOO M EB ~ by adding an appropriately oriented frame, E, for the trivial real line bundle E. Step 3 observes that there is a unique map g : M -+ SOC 4) which is characterized by the equation (..p', E) = g ((1M), Step 4 observes that pull-baCk by g defines an element l(..p',g) E H1(MjZ/2). Finally, St~p 5 observes that 1(1/1',g) depends
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
314
only on the pair (.,p, g), and that the image of I (.,pI ,g) in K(Mj W) depends only on the homotopy class of the singular frame f and on the 4-manifold W. This image is lw. End the digression. Here is the main theorem in this article: THEOREM 2.9. Let Mo and Ml be compact, oriented 3-manifolds with the rational homology of 8 3 • Let W be an oriented, rational homology, spin cobordism between Mo and MI. t) If the inclusions of both Mo and Ml into W induce injective maps on H 1 ('jZj2), then 12 (Mo) 12 (Mt). 2) More generally, if both the canonical homotopy class of singular frames for Mo and for Ml (as defined in Proposition 2.8) are represented by c E c with lw(c) 0, then h(Mo) 12(Mt).
=
=
3)
=
= =
12(83 ) 0 and so I2(M) 0 if M and 8 3 are cobordant by a spin cobordism with the rational homology of 8 3 •
The proof of Theorem 2.9 occupies Sections 3-11 of this article, but see Subsections 2i for the proof that 12 (8 3 ) = 0 and see Subsection 2k for an outline of the strategy for the proof of the rest of the theorem. f) Proof of Proposition 2.5. The proof of Proposition 2.5 uses the Pontrjagin-Thom constructionj and here is a short digression to outline how it works: Let Y be a smooth manifold and let Z c Y be a smooth submanifold of co dimension p with trivial normal bundle N C TYlz. Note that a trivialization of Z's co-normal bundle, N*, defines a unique homotopy class of maps from a regular neighborhood of Z in Y to RP which have Z as the inverse image of O. Indeed, a trivialization, (, of N* defines a (fiberwise) linear map ~ : N -t IRP which has zero as a regular value, and which has the zero section as the inverse image ofO. Now, call a map e : N -t Y an exponential map if it has the following two properties: 1) e's restriction to the zero section, Zo eN, is the identity. 2) e's differential along Zo induces the canonical identification between (2.13)
(TNlzo)jTZo
and
(TYlz)jTZ == N.
It is not hard to show that exponential maps exist. Because of (2.13), an exponential map defines a diffeomorphism between a neighborhood of the zero section in N with a neighborhood of Z in Y. (Use the inverse function theorem.) Furthermore, any two exponential maps are homotopic through exponential maps. (The zero'th and first order terms in the Taylor's expansion off the zero section of an exponential map are fixed completely by (2.12).) Fix an exponential map e : N -+ Y. As remarked, e defines a diffeomorphism between a regular neighborhood, N, of Z in Y with a regular neighborhood of the zero section i.q N. Thus
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
315
(2.14) is a map with Z as the inverse image of zero.
Because any two exponential maps are homotopic through exponential maps, one can conclude that the coframe " all by itself, defines an equivalence class, C(, of pair (N, cp) where N is a regular neighborhood of Z in Y, and where cp : N ~ RP is a smooth map with cp-l(O) = Z. (The equivalence relation between such pairs is analgous to the equivalence relation in Proposition 2.2.) By the way, this construction has an inverse. Let Z C Y be an embedded submanifold, and suppose there is a neighborhood N C Y of Z and a map cp : N ~ RP with 0 a regular value and with Z = cp-l(O). Let dx == (dXi)f=o denote the standard basis for T*W. Then (cp*dx)lz defines a framing for Z's conormal bundle in Y. End the digression. The plan of proof of Proposition 2.5 is as follows: Step 1 presents an essentially canonical map,
=
(2.15)
=1 X 12 y- 1Y 12 X
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
S16
(Dror Bar-Natan described q;o to the author.) Here are the salient features of q;o:
LEMMA 2.10. The map q;o has the following properties: 1) I q;o(x,y) 1=1 x II y II x - y I· 2) q;o is a submersion on 1R3 x IRs - (0,0). 9) dq;o 1.,=0= - I Y 12 dx. 4) dq;o 111=0=1 x 12 dy. 5) Let w x + y and let u = x - y. Then
=
(2.16) where (w, du)
dq;o lu=o= 2 I W 12 (-du
+2
I W 1- 2 (w, du) w),
=
E~=l Wi dUi.
Proof, All remarks are exercises with multivariable calculus.
o
Step 2: The coordinate system on No identifies No x M with B x M, where B C 1R3 is a neighborhood of the origin. Map No x M ·to B by first using the preceding identification and then projecting onto B. Call the preceding map cpo Note that 0 is a regular value of cp and that Po x M = cp-l (0). Thus, -cp*dx defines a frame for the conormal bundle of Po x M in M x M. Now, restrict attention to No x No c No x M. The map q;o of Lemma 2.10 maps Po x No to zero, and is a submersion along Po x No except at Po x Po· Note that q;(jdx and -cp*dx differ along Po x No only by multiplication of a scalar function. (This is Assertion 3 of Lemma 2.10.) In the coordinates of Lemma 2.10, cl)(jdx = - I Y 12 dx while cp*dx = -dx. Note also that the former frame is defined for Iyl < 1, while the latter is defined for I y I> O. Take a favorite, positive function h on [0,00) which obeys 1) h(t) = t for t < 1/2 2) h(t) = 1 for t ~ 3/4. (2.17)
Use _h(IYI2) dx to interpolate between q;(jdx where I y 1< 1/2 and between cp*dx where I y I> 1 and so construct a coframe for Po x M on the compliment of PoXPo which agrees with q;(jdx onPoxNo and with -cp*dx onPox(M -No). Use the Pontrjagin-Thom construction (as described above) to extend this coframe to a smooth map from a neighborhood of Po x M in M x M to IRs which agrees with q;o on a neighborhood of Po x Po· Given that the coordinate system about Po is fixed, the above extension will be canonical up to homotopy. As for M x Po, introduce the switch map, (2.18)
S:MxM-+MxM
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
317
which interchanges the factors. Obviously, the switch map interchanges Po x M with M x Po. Use the switch map to extend ~o along a neighborhood of M x Po.
D
Step 3: To extend the map ~o to a neighborhood of a, the strategy will be to find a coframe, (, for the normal bundle of a- Po which agrees with ~odx on (a- Po) n No x No. Given such a frame (, one can copy the arguments from Step 2, above, to extend ~o along a. As in Step 2, the extension will be unique up to homotopy. Now, a is canonically diffeomorphic to M, while the conormal bundle of a in M x M is canonically isomorphic to T* M. (The isomorphism here is given by 1I"R - 11"1, where 1I"R,L : M x M -t M are the projections onto the right (R) and left (L) factors.) So, the coframe (is a frame for T*(M - Po) with a prescribed form near Po. The constraint on ( near Po comes from the requirement that ( agree with ~odx. The latter is given in (2.16). Thus, up to the scalar factor, ( should be a singular frame for T* M in the sense of Definition 2.3, but with the matrix 9 in Definition 2.3 equal to the identity. If 9 := g, in Definition 2.3 is not the identity for the given frame (, then replace ( by g, (j this last frame will obey (2.8) with 9 the identity matrix. Thus, a singular frame for T* M can be used to build a map from a neighborhood of E to JR3 with all of the requisite properties. That said map is unique up to homotopy follows from two already mentioned facts: First, positive determinant matrices in GL(3, JR) form the path component of the identity. Second, the map in (2.14) is insensitive (modulo homotopies) to the choice of exponential map. g) Proof of Proposition 2.6. To consider the behavior of 12 when 11"0 acts on c, remember that the action of 11"0 is generated as follows: Let ( be a singular frame for T* M. Let 9 : M -t 80(3) be a smooth map which equals the identity near to Po. Then [g] E 11"0 acts on the class [(] of the frame ( to give the class of the singular frame 9 e. To compare the value of ~2 on [e] and on [g el, construct the map cp, : N -t JR3 as described in Proposition 2.5. One could construct CPg' too, but here is a shortcut to this map: Introduce the neighborhood No C N as before. Then, define a smooth map 1/J from No to 80(3) X JR3 as follows: 1) If p E (Eo x M) u (M x Eo), then set 1/J(P) := (1, cP,(P))· 2) If p E NA" then set 1/J(P) == (g(P) , cP,(P))· (2.19) Let m : 80(3) XIR3 -t JR3 denote the map which describes the group action. Let p: 80(3) X JR3 -? JR3 denote the projection. With m and with 'If; understood, one can take CPg' as follows: (2.20)
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
318
Equation (2.20) can be exploited with the help of the following observation: On 80(3) x (IR3 - 0), the 2-forms m* Wo and p* Wo are cohomologous, so find a I-form ao on 80(3) x (JR3 - 0) such that m*wo = p*wo + dao. Make ao restrict to 0 on 1 x (1R3 - 0). With ao understood, notice that ~;(Wo = ~,wo +1/J*dao on No - E. Let w and w' be closed 2-forms on M x M - E which extend ~,wo and ~; (wo, respectively. There is no obstruction to extending a from No - E as a smooth I-form a on M x M - E such that w' = w + da (See Lemma 1.1.) Then, «)2[g (] - «)2[(] is given by
(221) .
«)2[g (] - «)2[(] =
1IMXM -l:
(3 da t\ w t\ w +3 da t\ da t\ w +da t\ da t\ da)
Here is how to evaluate the right side of (2.21): Let 8 2 C JR3 denote a ball of small radius about 0 and which is in the image of ~, on Nt:.. - 11"-1 (Bo) and which is transversal to ~( on Nt:.. - 11"-1 (Bo). (One can assume, with no loss of generality, that such a 2-sphere exists.) Look carefully at the proof of Proposition 2.5. Introduce 8 to denote ~(1(82). This is a two sphere bundle over Nt:.. - 11"-1 (Bo). Because ao vanishes on Bo x M and on M x B o, Stokes theorem equates the right hand side of (2.21) with
(2.22)
«)2[g (] - «)[(]
=
is ~*
(ao t\ dao t\ p*wo).
(One uses here the fact that Wo t\ Wo = 0 and that 2 dao t\ p*wo is equal to -dao t\ dao.) Introduce i : 80(3) -+ 80(3) x 8 2 to be the inclusion as a fiber of the projection, p, to 8 2 • Then, the integral in (2.22) can be evaluated by pushing the integrand forward to 80(3) x 8 2 , and then by doing the 8 2 integration first. The result is
(2.23)
«)2[g (] - «)2[(] = Poo[g]
I
i*(ao) t\ di*(ao).
180(3)
The factor of Poo[g] in (2.23) is due to the fact that g* maps the fundamental class of M to Poo[g] times the fundamental class of 80(3). Now, the integral in (2.23) is simply a Hopfinvariant, and can be computed to be equal to 1/2. (Restrict m : 80(3) x 8 2 -+ 8 2 to mo : 80(3) x n -+ 8 2, where n is the north pole. Then di*ao = m(jwo. But, mo defines a principal 80(2) bundle with Euler class equal to 2, so 2 i*ao will integrate to lover the fiber of mo, while Wo integrates to lover the base. Thus, the value of the integral in (2.23) is equal to 1/2.) So, «)2[g (] = 2- 1 Poo[g] + «)2[(] as claimed. 0 h) Proof of Proposition 2.7. A singular frame, (, for T*M defines a 2-frame for TM as follows: Choose
a coordinate system around Po and introduce the matrix 9 as in (2.8). Then
319
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
(' == 9 ( obeys (2.8) with 9 replaced by the identity. Thus, on a small ball about Po, (' differs from the frame §. of (2.7) by a small amount, and so there is a canonical homotopy of (' so that it agrees with §. on a small ball, B, about Po. Now, 7r2(80(3)) vanishes, so there is no obstruction to deforming §. inside B so that the result, §.', agrees with §. near B's boundary, and agrees with the constant framing dx on an even smaller ball, B' C B. Such a deformation would change (' to an honest framing of TM. Unfortunately, 7r3(80(3)) ~ Z, so a topologist might argue that there is no canonical way to get an honest framing from ('. However, the frame §. is rather special (Kevin Walker pointed this out to the author); restrict it to the 2-sphere boundary 8 2 C B. Compare §. with the constant framing to define a map from 8 2 -+ 80(3). Lift this map to 8 3 = 8U(2) and one has the inclusion of 8 2 in S3 as the equator which is invariant under multiplication by ± 1 on S3. And, there are precisely two canonical deformations to a point of this equatorial embedding of S2 in S3. Indeed, consider taking the family of two spheres of decreasing latitude starting from 7r /2 and going to O. Or, take the family of increasing latitude, starting from 7r /2 and going to 7r. Thus, there are two canonical ways to obtain an honest framing from the singular framing (. Denote these two honest framings by (±. By construction, (+ = 9 (- where 9 : M -+ 80(3) has degree 2 and lifts to map Minto 8 3 • This exhibition of (± completes the proof of the first assertion of Proposition 2.7. To prove Assertion 2 of Proposition 2.7, take (± above and produce the 2framing 8, == (+ EEl (_. (Note that (+ EEl (_ is homotopic to (_ EEl (+ as a framing of T M EEl T M.) Clearly, if (0 and (1 define the same equivalence class of singular framing for T* M, then 8'0 and 8'1 will be homotopic as framings of T M EElT M and so define the same 2-framing of TM. To prove that the map 8 is injective on ~ , consider first a 4- manifold X which bounds M. Let 3,3' be frames for T* M EEl T* M. Then 3 is homotopic to 3' only if PI (T X EEl T X; 3) = P1 (T X EEl T X; 3'). With the preceding understood, let ( and (' be a pair of singular frames for T* M. Then (= 9 (' where 9 :-+ SO(3). A direct computation reveals that (2.24) This shows that the map 8 is injective and completes the proof of Assertion 2 of Proposition 2.7. To prove Assertion 3 of Proposition 2.7, consider a compact, oriented 4manifold, X, with boundary M. Suppose that X is connected, spin, and that X's signature is even. Define 3
(2.25)
Xo(X) == L(-l)i dim(Hi(Xj
JR».
i=1
Now xo is even because M is a rational homology sphere, and because the signature of X is assumed even. With this understood, then one can assume,
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
320
with no loss of generality that XO = O. (Indeed, if XO is initially positive, connect sum with Xo/2 copies of Sl x S3 to obtain a compact, oriented, spin 4-manifold with Xo(-) = O. If XO < 0 initially, connect sum with Xo/2 copies of S2 x S2 to obtain a compact, oriented, spin 4-manifold with XoO = 0.) Choose an embedding of the closed unit 4-ball in B c X and let Xo denote the compliment of this 4-ball. This Xo has two boundary components, one M and the other S3. Since Xo(X) = 0, the boundary splittings, T* Xo IM= T* M EElf and T* Xo 188= T * EEl f, extend over Xo as a splitting T* Xo = V EEl f. Here, V is an oriented 3-plane bundle over Xo. Furthermore, because Xo is a spin manifold, V is a spin 3- plane bundle, and so trivialj V ~ EEl3f. Let h be a singular frame for T* S3, and construct the frames h± for T* S3 as instructed above. The fact that V is trivial implies that the frame h+ for V IS8 extends over Xoj so does h_. Restrict these frames to M c axo to give frames, (±, for T* M3 = V IM8. Notice that (+ = 9 (_ for some 9 : M --t SO(3) which lifts to a map into S3. The point of the preceding is this: The extendability of h± over Xo implies P1(TB EElTB,eh) = Pl(TZ EEl Tz,ed· Now, for S3, one can compute rather explicitly that P1(TB EEl TBj eh) = 0 mod 8. Indeed, one can compute with the following choice for h±: Take h+ to be the Lie group framing given by the left-invariant I-forms, and take h_ to be the Lie group framing given by the right invariant I-forms. For h± as above, PI (T B EEl T Bj eh) = O. Since, P1(TZ EEl TZj ed = 0 mod (8), Atiyah's canonical framing will be realized bye, if Z's signature is 0 mod(4). Assertion 4 of Proposition 2.7 follows from Proposition 1 in
s3
m.
0
i) 12 (S3). The purpose of this subsection is to provide a proof of the assertion in Theorem 2.9 that 12 (S3) = o. (Dror Bar-Natan taught the author this proof.) This fact is needed later and so, for future reference, is stated as LEMMA
2.11. 12 (S3)
= o.
Proof. The strategy has two parts: Part 1 extends the map <1>0 in (2.15) to define a map, <1>1, from S3 x S3 to IR3 with inverse image I: s 8. Given that such an extension exists, take cp in Proposition 2.2 to be the restriction of <1>1 to a regular neighborhood of I:88 and use w'" == iJ.& in (2.4). The integrand is then zero so the integral in (2.4) is zero. Part 2 observes that dl IS8xpo and dl Ipoxs8 define linear maps from the respective normal bundles of S3 x Po and Po x S3 to IR3. Part 2 also observes that dlla defines a linear map from the normal bundle of 6. == 6. s 3 into IR3. With these facts understood, the fact that 12(S3) = 0 is established by demonstrating the following two points: 1) dq,llss xpo and dq,llpo xS3 define respective normal bundle framings of (S3 - Po) x Po and Po x (S3 - Po) which are homotopic (reI neighborhoods of Po x Po) to the normal bundle framings which are respectively
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
induced by the projections, S3 x S3. 2)
7rR,L,
321
on the right and left factors of S3 in
dcl l l.6. defines a normal bundle framing of .1s3 - (po,Po) which is gives Definition 2.8's canonical singular framing of T* S3.
Part 1: To exhibit the map cl 1, agree first to use stereographic projection from the north and south poles of S3 to cover S3 by two coordinate patches, U. and Un. (So, the north pole is the origin in Un and the south pole is the origin in U.). Agree to take the point Po to equal the south pole. Define cl l by 1) On U. x U. : cll(x,y) == (lx1 2 + 1)-1 (lyl2 + 1)-1 (lxl 2y -IYI2X). 2) On Un X U. : cl l (x, y) == (lxl 2 + 1)-1 (lyl2 + 1)-1 (y + IYI2X). 3) On U. x Un : cll(x,y) == (lxl 2 + 1)-1 (lY12 + 1)-1 (-lxI 2y - x). 4) On Un X Un : cl l (x, y) == (lx1 2 + 1)-1 (lyl2 + 1)-1 (x - y).
(2.26) It is left to the reader to verify that cl l is consistently defined, and that cl t l (0) = ES 3.
Part 2: Using line 1 or line 2 of (2.26), one finds dcl l l s 3 XPo to be proportional to the pull-back by 7rR of the constant frame on IR3. Likewise, using line 1 or line 3 of (2.26), one finds that dcl l Ip oXS3 is proportional to the pull-back by 7rL ofthe constant frame. As for dcl l 1.6., compute on Un X Un to find that dcl l 1.6. is equal to (7r R - 7ri,)(-(I+ I x 12)-2 dx). Remember that S3 - Po = Un and thus -(1+ 1 x 12)-2 dx is a framing for T*Un which extends as a singular framing for T* S3. The image of this framing under the map e of Proposition 2.7 is the pair «(_, (+) where (± are the Lie group framings given by the left and right invariant I-forms on S3 as SU(2). Let B C IR4 denote the unit 4-ball. It is left as an exercise to check that «(_, (+) stabilizes to give a framing of (T B ffi T B) IB which extends over B. 0
k) Outline of Theorem 2.9's proof.
Here is a simplified outline for a proof of Theorem 2.9: One would like to find a smooth, oriented, 7-dimensional manifold Z whose boundary is the disjoint union of Ml x Ml and Mo x M o, with the latter oriented in reverse. This Z should contain an oriented, dimension 4 subvariety, Ez, (a union of submanifolds) whose boundary is the union of EMl and EMo' with the latter oriented in reverse. (Here, EM is defined in (2.1) as the union of submanifolds. Each submanifold has its fundamental class; these are oriented so that the inclusion EM ~ M x M sends [AM]- [M x Po]- [po x M] (a linear combination of fundamental classes) to zero in H3(M x M; IR).) Given a singular frame for MI and an appropriate singular frame for Mo, one would like to find a smooth 2-form Wz on Z - Ez and then use Stokes' theorem to compare the integrals in (2.4) for Mo and for MI.
322
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
Unfortunately, this simplified strategy has not been realized. However, there is a modification of this strategy which can be carried out. Here are the steps; Step 1: Find a smooth, oriented manifold Z with boundary, and suppose that az is the disjoint union of MI x M2 and Mo x Mo (with the latter oriented in reverse) plus some number of copies of S3 x S3. Label these extra boundary components by a finite set, crit. Step 2:
8I:z
Inside Z, find an oriented, dimension 4 subvariety I:z with
= I:Mo U I:Mo UpEcrit (I:s8 )p.
Step 3: Make sure that there is a closed 2-form, wz, on Z - I:z with the choice of a singular frame for Mo and an "appropriate" singular frame for MI. (See Step 4, below, for the definition of "appropriate".) Require the following:
(2.27) The 2-form Wz should restrict to Mo X Mo - I:Mo as the 2-form used in (2.4) to compute 12 for Mo. It's restriction to MI X MI - I:Ml should give the 2-form used in (2.4) for the computation of 12 for MI' 2) 'The 2-form Wz should restrict to each copy of S3 x S3 as the 2- form used for (2.4) with the singular frame that gives 12 (S3) (see Ltlmma 2.11). 3) The wedge product Wz 1\ Wz should vanish near I:z.
1)
Step 4: IT the canonical frame (Definition 2.8) was chosen for Mo, check that the "appropriate" frame for MI is M1's canonical frame. Step 5: Given that Wz exists as prescribed above, use Stokes' theorem to prove that the values of 12 in (2.4) for Mo and for MI agree:
(2.28)
0== [ d(wz 1\ Wz 1\ wz)
}z
- [ }MoXMo
=[
Wz
1\
Wz
1\
Wz
}M1XMl
Wz
1\
Wz
1\
Wz
+ [
Wz
1\
Wz
1\
Wz .
}8!::!..z
Here, N z is the closure of a regular neighborhood of I:z in Z (with smooth . boundary) on which wz 1\ Wz = O. Thus, the last term in (2.28) vanishes. Section 3 begins the proof of Theorem 2.9 with the definition of the space Z. Later sections construct I:z and carry out the remaining steps of the proof. The construction of Wz is completed in Section 11. 3 Morse theory. This subsection reviews various Morse theoretic constructions which will be used in subsequent sections. The final two subsections define and explore the space Z for Section 2k's first step in the proof of Theorem 2.9. Suppose here that Mo and MI are both compact, connected, oriented 3manifolds whose rational homology is the same as that of S3. Let W be
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
323
an oriented, spin cobordism between Mo and MI. Assume that W is connected. By surgery on embedded circles, one can modify W so that HI (W j JR) = H3 (W j JR) = O. This will be assumed as well. a) Good Morse functions.
A function I : W -+ [0,1] will be called a good Morse function if the criteria below are met: 1) Mo = 1-1(0) and M1 = 1- 1(1).
2) dl IMo and dl 1M! are never zero. 3) The critical points of I are non-degenerate. 4) There are no critical points of index 0 or 4. 5) Let e be an index i critical point. Then I I(e) - i/41< 1/100. 6) IT e,d are distinct critical points of I, then I(e) =F I(d).
(3.1)
It is shown in [12] (for example) that W has good Morse functions. When I : W -+ [0,1] is a good Morse function, use crit(f) C W to denote the set of critical points of I. Use critk(f) C crit(f) to denote the set of critical points of index k. Let p E crih(f). There is an almost canonical coordinate system on a neighborhood of p. This coordinate system is an embedding t/Jp : JR4 -+ W with the following properties: 1) t/Jp(O) = p.
2)
(3.2)
There exists 8 > 0 such that t/J;I restricts to the radius 6 ball about p as the function
.1'*1 'Pp -
2 -Xl"
•-
2 Xk
+ Xk+l 2 + ... + X 42 •
(See, e.g. [12].) These coordinates will be called Morse coordinates. The image under t/J; will be called Up. of
r
b) Pseudo-gradient vector fields.
Aside from a Morse function and Morse coordinates, the standard machinery for Morse theory requires the choosing of a pseudo-gradient vector field for I. This is a vector field, v, on W with the property that v(f) > 0 on W - crit(f). Also, require of v that it have the following form near p E critk (f) : The pushforward by (t/Jp)-l of v should restrict to a small ball about the origin in lR4 to equal (3.3)
A pseudo-gradient vector field for f will often be called a pseudo- gradient, for short.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
324
A gradient flow line of a pseudo-gradient v is a map -y, of a closed interval,
I, into W with the following properties: 1) 1= [a,b] with -00 ~ a < b ~ +00. 2) IT a = -00, then -y(a) E crit(f); and if b = +00, then -y(b) E crit(f). 3) IT a> -00, then -y(a) E Mo; and if b < +00, then -y(b) E MI. 4) -y* (at) = v l-r(t) for all tEl (3.4)
(Here, at differentiates the coordinate t to give 1.) IT -y is a gradient flow line of a pseudo-gradient, v, say that -y begins at -y(a) and ends at -y(b). There is a great deal of flexibility in the choice of a pseudo- gradient. And, there are specific constraints which can be imposed on a pseudo-gradient which simplify some subsequent constructions. c) The Morse complex.
With the help of good Morse function f and an appropriate pseudo gradient, v, one can define a finite dimensional complex whose homology is naturally isomorphic to the relative homology H*(W, Mo; Z). (See, e.g. [12].) The complex is written (3.5)
To describe the {Ck} in (3.5), it is necessary to first digress to review the construction of ascending and descending disks: As described in [12], one can use v to define, for each p E critk(f), a pair of open subsets, Bp_ C int(W) and B p + C int(W), which are embedded disks of dimension k and 4 - k, respectively. Here, Bp+ is the ascending disk from p, and Bp_ is the descending disk from p. As a subset, Bp_ is the union {p} with the set of points of int(W) - crit(f) which lie on gradient flow lines which end at p. And, Bp+ is the union of {p} with the set of points in W - crit(f) which lie on gradient flow lines which start . at p. Note that (3.4) implies that 1) 1/Jp(Bp- n Up) = {(Xl,'" ,X4) E ]R4 : Xk+l = ... = X4 = O}, 2) 1/Jp(Bp+ n Up) = {(Xl,· •• ,X4) E ]R4 : Xl = ... = Xk = O}. (3.6)
These disks intersect at one point, p, and there transversally. Otherwise, (3.7)
f
I (Bp_
- p)
< f(P) < f I (Bp+ - p)
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
325
As W is assumed oriented, an orientation for Bp_ orients Bp+ so that their intersection number, [Bp_] • [Bp+], is equal to {I}. End the digression. One defines C le in (3.5) from the free Z-module, C Ie , on the set of pairs (3.8)
{(P, €) : p E critle(f) and € is an orientation for B p _}
Indeed, set Cle == ~/ ,.." with the equivalence relation (p, €) '" -(p, -f). (The Cle for different choices of pseudo-gradient are canonically isomorphic.) To define the operator in (3.5), it is necessary to make a two part digression. Part 1 of the digression introduces some constraints on the pseudo-gradient v. These are described next.
a
DEFINITION 3.l.Let f be a Morse function on W. A pseudo-gradient v will be called good if the following criteria are met: 1) If p, q E critle(f) and if Pi- q, then Bp+ n Bq_ 0.
=
2)
If p E critle(f) and q E Critlc+l (f) then Bp+ intersects Bq_ transversely. Furthermore, Bp+ nBq_ is a finite union of gradient flow lines, the closure of each starts at p and ends at q.
3) Ifp E critl(f) and q E crit3(f), then Bp+ intersects Bq_ transversally. 4) If Po E Mo and PI E Ml have been apriori specified, then require that Po start a gradient flow line with end at Pl. (By the way, because of their definitions in terms of v's flow lines, descending disks from distinct critical points do not intersect, and likewise, ascending disks.) See [12] for a proof that good pseudo-gradients exist. Henceforth, assume that v is a good pseudo-gradient. Part 2 of the digression considers the intersections of ascending and descending disks. Start the discussion with the introduction of MIe,Ie-l = /-1(4- 1 k -1/8). Due to (3.1), one can conclude that df is nowhere zero along MIe,Ie-l, so this subspace is an embedded submanifold of W. Furthermore, M Ie ,Ic-l is naturally oriented by using df to trivialize its normal bundle. Because of (1) in Definition 3.1, each B p _ intersects MIe,Ie-1 in its interior as a (k - 1) sphere Sp- which is oriented (by df) when Bp_ is oriented. Likewise, Bp+ intersects MIc+I,1e in a sphere, Sp+, of dimension 3 - k which is oriented when Bp_ is oriented. Note that Definition 3.1 implies (in part) the following assertion: If p E critle(f), then Sp- has transversal intersection in MIe,Ie-1 with any Sq+ from q E critle-l (f). With the preceding understood, use [Sp-l . [Sq+ 1E Z to denote the algebraic intersection number of Sp- with Sq+ in MIe,Ie-I. End the digression. Here is the definition of the boundary map a in (3.5):
(3.9)
a(p, €)
==
L:
([Sp-l' [Sq+]) (q, €q).
qEC._ 1
See [12] for a proof that (3.5) with 8 as in (3.9) is a cllain complex whose homology is isomorphic to H
* (W, Mo; Z).
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
326
Note that there is a dual complex to (3.5),
o -+ C*3
(3.10)
~ C*2 ~ C*I -+ 0
which is defined using -land -v when (3.5) is defined from the pair 1 and v. The homology of (3.10) computes H*(W, MI ; Z). Poincare' duality identifies H*(W, M 1 ; Z) with H 4 -*(W, Mo; Z), hence the duality between (3.10) and (3.5).
d) Factoring the cobordism. The purpose of this subsection is to indicate how to factor the cobordism W into two simpler cobordisms. The following proposition summarizes: PROPOSITION 3.2. Let M o , Ml be compact, oriented 9-manilolds with the rational homology 01 S3. Suppose that there is an oriented, spin cobordism, W', between Mo and MI. Then there exists an oriented, spin cobordism, W, between Mo and MI which decomposes as W = WI U WI U W 3, where 1} aWl = -MoUM~,aW2 = -M~UM{, and aW3 = -Mf UMI , where M~ and M{ are compact, oriented 9-manifolds with the rational homology of S3.
2}
W 1 ,2,3 are oriented, spin manifolds.
9} Both WI and W3 have the rational homology of S3. Meanwhile, W 2 has 4}
5}
6}
7}
vanishing first and third Betti numbers. WI and W3 have a good Morse functions with no index 3 critical points. Meanwhile, W 2 has a good Morse function without index 1 and index 3 critical points. If W' has the rational homology of S3, then W above can be assumed to have the rational homology of S3. And, one can assume that M~ = Mi and that W2 is the product cobordism. Let IWI and lw be as given in (2.12). Suppose that CMo or CMl (as in Definition 2.8) is represented by c in ker(lwl). Then lw(c) = 0 too. The intersection forms of Wand W' are conjugate by an element of GI(·, Z).
In particular, Assertions 5 and 6 of the preceding proposition allow one to prove Theorem 2.9's statements concerning 4- dimensional spin cobordisms with the rational homology of S3 between a pair of 3-manifolds with the rational homology of S3 by restricting to the following special case: Special Case: Let M o, Ml be compact, oriented 3-manifolds with the rational homology of S3. Let W be an oriented, spin cobordism between Mo and MI' Assume that W has the rational homology of S3 and assume that W has a good Morse function f with no index 3 critical points. (3.11)
The remainder of this subsection proves Proposition 3.2.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
S27
Proof of Proposition 3.2. First of all, let W' be the original spin cobordism between Mo and MI. Then, surgery on W' will produce an oriented, spin cobordism W which has vanishing first and third Betti numbers. The surgery removes tubular neighborhoods of embedded circles and replace them with copies of B2 x 8 2 • (Here, B2 is the unit ball in ]R2.) Given such W, find a good Morse function I on W and a good pseudogradient, Vj and then define the complex in (3.5). Label the critical points of index 1 as {aI, ... , ar }, label those of index 2 as {b 1, ... , br+s+tl, and label the index 3 critical points as {eI,'" , ct}. Here,s = dim(H2 (Wj JR)). (Remember that W has, by assumption, vanishing rational homology in dimensions 1 and 3.) Fix orientations for the descending disks from all of these critical points. With this understood, this set of critical points defines a basis for the complex {CIe} in (3.5). Now, it is convenient to relable the basis for C2 as follows: Since the map 8 EEl 8* : C2 -+ C1 EEl C3 is a surjection, one can relable the critical points {ba} so that (3.12)
8*: Span{br+s+i}~=1 -+ Cs , are both isomorphisms over Q. At the same time, one can require that the projection of Span {b r +i H=1 onto C2 /(8*C1 EEl 8Cs) is an isomorphism. With (3.12) understood, one can use 4.1 in [12] to find a new good Morse function I new which has the following three properties: First, I new agrees with I outside small neighborhoods of the points in crit2(f). Second, I new has the same critical points and pseudo- gradient as I. Third, there exists small € > 0 such that 1) I new( {bI, ... , br }) E (1/2 - 2 €, 1/2 - €) , 2) 3)
Inew({br +1'''' ,br +s }) E (1/2-E,1/2+€), E (1/2 + €, 1/2 + 2E)
I new( {b r +s+1 , •• , br +8 +t})
(3.13) Note that (3.12), (3.13) indicate that W 1) WI == 1-1 ([0,1/2 - ED 2) W 2 == 1-1 ([1/2 - E, 1/2 + E]) 3) Ws == 1- 1 ([1/2 + €, 1])
= WI U W2 U W s , where
(3.14) The boundaries of Wl,2,3 are compact, oriented 3-manifolds with the rational homology of S3. This is guaranteed by (3.12). Meanwhile, the inclusion of any boundary component of W I ,3 into W I ,3 induces an isomorphism of rational homology. This is not true for W 2 ; this W2 has the zero first and third Betti numbers, but the second Betti number of W2 is equal to s.
328
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
Note that the function / new can be used as a Morse function on W1,2,3. On WI, it has no critical points of index 3, on W3 it has no critical points of index 1, while on W2 , it has only critical points of index 2. The preceding remarks prove Assertions 1-5. To prove Assertion 6, suppose, for the sake of argument that eMo is represented by e in ker(lwl). Let ~ be a singular frame for T· Mo in the class e and let f be a smooth frame for T· Mo which agrees with ~ on the complement of a ball about Po. Write T·W' IMo~ T* Mo E9~, where ~, is the trivial bundle, spanned by df IMo. With this understood, ~' extends to a frame (~', df) for T*W' IMo. Note that lWI(e) is the obstruction to extending this frame over W'. Likewise, 1w(e) is the obstruction to extending «(',df) over W. With this understood remark that Assertion 6 will be proved by demonstrating that (e, df) extend over W if it extends over W'. This demonstration requires four steps. Step 1: Fix a frame e' for T* W' which extends
(e, df).
Step 2: Let q C W' be an oriented, embedded circle whose fundamental class is a generator of HI (W'; Z) /Torsion. Suppose a surgery is done on W' to kill the class generated by q. Such a surgery will replace a tubular neighborhood of q in W' with B2 X S3. Because 71'2(80(3» = 0, all framings of T*(B2 x 8 2) are mutually homotopic. A framing of T·(B 2 x S2) rest:i'icts to the boundary where it can be written as he', where h == h( e') is a map from 8 1 x 8 2 to SO( 4). IT h lifts to 8U(2) x SU(2), then the frame (q',df) will also extend over the manifold which is obtained from W' by surgery on q. Step 9: With this last point understood, suppose that h does not lift as required. The strategy is to abandon e' and find a new extension, e" for (q', df) so that the resulting h(e") does lift to 8U(2) x SU(2). Step 4: To construct e", let s : q -t SI be a degree 1 map. Since the restriction map H1(W'; Z) -t H1(q; Z) is surjective, the map s extends as a smooth map from W' to SI. Since Mo has vanishing first cohomology, the map s can be taken to map Mo to point, 1 E Sl. Let j : 8 1 -t 80(4) be a map which generates 71'1 (SO(4» and which takes 1 to the identity matrix. The composition k == j 0 s maps W' to 80(4) and maps Mo to the identity. Thus, e" == ke' defines an extension of (~',df) over W', and h(ke') = h(e)k-l wilrIift to map SI x 8 2 into SU(2) x SU(2). Thus, Assertion 6 follows from this last remark with Step 3. As for Assertion 7, it is directly a consequence of the fact that W is obtained from W' by surgery on a set of circle generators of HI (W'; Z) jTorsion. 0
e) A basis theorem for the Special Case.
Assume here that W is a cobordism which satisfies the assumptions of (3.11). In particular, W has the rational homology of S3, and also W has a good Morse function f with only index 1 and index 2 critical points. Fix a good pseudogradient v for f. Introduce the complex in (3.5) for W. This is a 2-step complex, and the boundarr map 8 : C 2 -t C1 is an isomorphism over the rationals. Let {aI, ••. , a r }
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
329
label the index 1 critical points and let {b 1 ,··· ,br } label the index 2 critical points. Orient the descending disks from these critical points so that these sets of critical points can be considered as a basis for C1 ,2, respectively. With the basis for C1 ,2 chosen as above, the boundary maps in (3.5) are simply integer valued matrices. That is, Obi = EjSi"j aj, where S == {Si"j} is an integer valued, r x r matrix. Here is a useful observation: The precise form of the matrix S is determined by the choice of good pseudo-gradient v. With this fact understood, one can ask whether there is a choice of peudo- gradient for I which gives a "nice" matrix S. The answer to this question is given by Milnor's basis theorem (Theorem 7.6 in [12]): PROPOSITION 3.3. Let W be a cobordism which satisfies {9.11}. Then W has a good Morse junction, f, with no index 3 critical points and with the following additional properties: There exists a labeling, {a1,··· ,ar } and {b 1, ... br }, for the respective index 1 and index 2 critical points of I. And, there exists a good pseudo- gradient for I and a choice of orientations for the descending disks from I's critical points. And, this data is such that 1) For all i E {I,··· ,r}, 2) Obi = EjSiJ aj, where S == {Si,j} is an upper triangular, integral matrix with positive entries along the diagonal.
9)
For all i E {I,··· ,r - I}, one has I(ai)
> I(ai+d and I(b i ) > I(bi+d.
(3.15) The remainder of this subsection is occupied with proving this proposition. Proof of Proposition 3.3.
Start with a good pseudo-gradient, v, for
f. Fix orientations for the descending disks so that the boundary operator in
(3.5) can be represented as a matrix, T, so that Obi = EjTi,j aj. Note that the matrix T is integral and invertible over the rationals. Now, a fundamental result in algebra (see, e.g. [11]) states that there exists a unimodular, integral matrix V such that V T == T' has only zeros below the diagonal. Let Q== {Qi == E j Vi,j bj}. This is a new basis for C 2 , and oQ = V T a = T'a. With V and T' understood, appeal to Theorem 7.6 in [12] to find a pseudogradient for I, v', for which the resulting descending disks represent the basis b for C2 • For this pseudo-gradient, the boundary operator in (3.5) is given by the matrix T'. By changing the orientations of the descending disks if necessary, one can change the signs of the diagonal elements of T' so that they are all positive. Call the resulting matrix S. The given arrangement of the critical values of f can be insured by making an appropriate, small perturbation. 0 By the way, if the boundary aC2 -+ C 1 is an isomorphism over Z, then the matrix S in Propostion 3.3 can be taken to be a diagonal matrix.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
330
o· ;
As a last remark, note that the matrix for the adjoint complex, C 1 -+ C2 , will be the transpose of the matrix S in Proposition 3.3. This matrix, ST, will be lower triangular. 0
f) Morse theory on W
X
W
The manifold W x W is a manifold with boundaries and corners. Here it is:
WxW
(3.16) The reader is invited to formalize a "manifold with boundaries and corners", but the picture above should be self explanatory. The good Morse function 1 on W can be used to illuminate (3.16) near the corners. To do so, one must note first that Properties 1 and 2 in (3.1) make it possible to use the pseudo gradient to give W its product structure near oW. To be precise, there is a diffeomorphism,
(3.17)
Ao : 1-1([0,1/8» -+ Mo x [0,1/8)
which restricts to 1-1(0) as the identity and which has >"'01 given by projection to [0,1/8). There is a corresponding
(3.18) Using (3.17), a neighborhood of Mo x Mo in W x W is mapped by >"0 x >"0 to (3.19) (Mo x [0,1/8» x (Mo x [0,1/8»
R:l
Mo x Mo x [0,1/8) x [0,1/8).
Of course, >"0 x >"1, >"1 X >"0 and >"1 X >"1 give similar structure to the other corners ofW x W.
331
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
With a good Morse function, I, chosen for W, introduce the function F : W x W -+ [-1,1] which sends (x, y) to
(3.20)
F(x, y)
=I(y) - I(x).
This is a function with properties that are listed in the next lemma. The lemma's statement uses the following notation: First, introduce the projections, 1fL : W x W -+ W and 1fR : W x W -+ W which send (x,y) to x and to y, respectively. Second, when v is a vector field on W, introduce the vector fields VL and VR on W x W which are defined so that (3.21)
1) 2)
= v and d1fR VL = OJ d1fL VR = 0 and d7rR VR = V.
d1fLVL
LEMMA 3.4. Let I be a good Morse function lor Wand let v be a good pseudo-gradient for I. Then, the /unction F of (9.20) has only non- degenerate critical points. Furthermore: 1) critn(1) = Uk(Crit4+k-n(1) x critk(1))· 2} The vector field VR - 'ilL is a pseudo-gradient for F which obeys 1- 9 of Definition 9.1. 9) The pseudo-gradient VR -'ilL gives the following descending and ascending disks for (p, q) E cri4+k-n (1) X critk (1) C critn (1):
(3.22) B(p,q)+
4)
= Bp_ x Bq+.
The pseudo-gradient VR -'ilL is nowhere tangent to a boundary or a comer in (9.16).
Proof· The proofs of these assertions are left as exercises. But, for Assertion 3, note for example that near Mo x M o, (AO X Ao)-l (Of (3.19)) pulls back F to send the point ((x, t), (y, s)) in (Mo x [0,1/8)) x (Mo x [0,1/8)) to (3.23)
((AO
X
Ao)-l)* F((x, t), (y,
s»
=
s _. t.
Note, by the way, that (3.22) indicates how to orient B(p,q)_ given orientations for Bp_ and B q+. And, with orientations to the descending disks {B(p,q)_ : (p, q) E crit(F)}, one can consider the analog to the chain complex C in (3.5) as constructed for W x W using the function F and the pseudo-gradient vR -'ilL. The following lemma describes the homology of this complex. 0
332
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
LEMMA 3.5. The analog of the chain complex C in (3.5) as constructed for W x W using F and the pseudo-gradient VR - VL gives a chain complex, C F , which is canonically isomorphic to C· ® C, where C· is the complex in (3.10). The homology of the complex CF is canonically isomorphic to H* (W x W,(W x Mo) U (MI X W)jZ). Notice that the relative homology above is that of the square in (3.16) relative to the union of its bottom and right sides.
o
Proof. This follows from Lemma 3.4 and (3.22). g) The space Z.
As outlined in Section 2k, the first step to proving Theorem 2.9 is to construct an oriented, 7-dimensional manifold Z whose boundary is the disjoint union of Mo x M o, MI X Ml and some number of copies of S3 x S3. The purpose of this subsection is to construct such a Z using the cobordism W and a good Morse function f on W. To begin, construct F from f as in (3.16). Use F to define (3.24)
Z
== F-1(0) = ((x,y) E W
x W: f(x)
= f(y)}.
This subspace Z plays a central role in subsequent parts of the story, and the purpose of this subsection is to describe some of Z's properties. To begin, note that both Mo x Mo and MI x MI lie in Z since f is constant on Mo and also on MI. Near these corners, Z is a manifold with boundary given by the disjoint union of Mo x Mo and MI x MI' See (3.19). Unfortunately, Z is not a manifold everywhere unless f has no critical points. This is because 0 is not a regular value of the function F. Fortunately, the singularities of Z are not hard to describe; they occur at the points of crit(F) n Z, that is, points of the form (P,p) C W x W where p E crit(f). (Remember that the critical points of f are assumed to have distinct critical values.) Furthermore, the neighborhoods of these critical points are relatively easy to describe. The picture is given in the following lemma. The lemma introduces the nation of a cone on a manifold N. This is the space which is obtained by taking [0,1) x N and crushing {OJ x N to a point.
LEMMA 3.6. Let f be a good Morse function on W. Let p E critk(f). Then, a neighborhood of (P,p) in Z is naturally isomorphic to the cone on S3 x S3. In fact with tPP and Up = tPp(]R4) as in (3.2), then the map (t/Jp x tPp)-lmaps Z n (Up x Up) to a subset of]R4 X which intersects a ball neighborhood of (0,0) as the set 0/ (x, y) which obey
r
(3.25)
y~ + ... + y~ + x~+1 + ... + x~
= x~ + ... + x~ + 1I~+1 + ... + y~.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
333
Warning: As indicated by {3.25}, the cone on S3 X S3 here is not induced by the obvious product structure on W X W. The product structure which induces {3.25} is the product structure in (3.26)
with B(p,p)± as in {3.22}. Proof. Equation (3.25) is an immediate consequence of (3.2).
o
The manifold (with boundary) Z in Section 2k will be found inside Z; it is obtained by excising from Z. a small ball about each of the singular points (P,p) for p E crit(f). More precisely, one fixes some small r > O. Then, the intersection of Z with Up X Up is mapped by 1/Jp x 1/Jp to the set of (x, y) which obey (3.27) With (3.27) understood, aznup x Up is mapped by 1/Jp x 1/Jp to the set of (x,y) which obey 1) y~ + ... + y~ + X~+l + ... + x~ = r, 2) x~ + ... + x~ + y~+l + ... + y~ = r. (3.28) As the precise value of r here is immaterial (as long as r is small), the precise value will not be specified. There is an alternative approach to defining Z. Here, Z is a "blow up" of Z at the points of the form (P,p) E crit(f). In this case, Z maps to Z by a map 1r. Each point in Z - {(P,p) E crit(F)} has a single point in its inverse image. But, the inverse image of any point (P,p) E crit(F) is the corresponding S3 X S3 c az. This blow up corresponds to resolving the cone point in N == ([0,1) x N)/( {O} x N) with the tautological projection 1r : [0,1) x N ~ N. h) Properties of Z. With Z now defined, here are its salient features: A manifold: Z is a manifold with boundary, (3.29)
Orientation: The manifold int(Z) has a natural orientation. Indeed, W x W has a natural orientation. Then, int(Z) C F-l (0) is open, .and dF '" 0 on int(Z), so the 1 form dF trivializes the normal bundle to int(Z) C W x W. This serves to orient Z. The induced orientation on Ml X Ml C az agrees
334
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
with its canonical orientation, but the induced orientation on Mo x Mo c az disagrees with the canonical orientation. To orient (83 x 8 3 )1" use the inclusion of W ~ ~w C W X W to orient..6. w and hence ~z. The boundary of ~z intersects (8 3 x 8 3 )1' as ~ss(== (~ss)p) Give (~ss)p the induced orientation from ~z. Then, orient the left factor of 8 3 in (8 3 X 8 3 )1' so that the composition of 7rL : ~Ss -+ 8 3 and then the inclusion 8 3 -+ (8 3 x point) C (83 x 8 3 )1' is orientation preserving. Orient the right factor analogously and use the product orientation to orient (8 3 x 8 3 )1'. (Remark that the induced orientation on (8 3 x 8 3 )1' as a boundary component of Z agrees with this orientation if index p is odd, and it disagrees if index p is 2.) Homology: The rational homology in dimensions 0-3 of Z is of some concern in subsequent sections. Consider
LEMMA 3.7. 8uppose that W has the rational homology of 8 3 • Then the rational homology of Z is as follows:
1) Ho(Z) ~)" H1(Z) 9)
~ ~
R H 2(Z)
~
o.
There is a surjection
(3.30) Here L_ is freely generated over IR by
(3.31)
L._ == {Btp,q)_ n Z : (p, q)
E cri4(F) and F(p, q)
> O},
E crit4(F) and F(p, q)
< O},
while L+ is freely generated over IR by
(3.32)
4
== {Btp,q)+
n Z : (p, q)
Note that the intersections which define L.± in (9.91), (9.9~) are all embedded 3-spheres. Also note that the inclusion of Z in W x W gives an isomorphism on 7rl and 7r2·
Proof. Note first that HO,1,2(Z) and HO,1,2(Z) agree, and that
(3.33) This follows using Meyer-Vietoris for the cover of Z by the union of Z and the cones on the (8 3 x 8 3 )1' in «3.25). Next, pick f > 0, but small so that F has only critical points ofthe form (P,p) in F- 1 «-f,f». Let V == F-l« .... f,f)) observe that V strongly deformation retracts into Z. Thus, Hi(V) ~ Hi(Z).
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
335
To compute Hj(V), observe that W x W can be constructed from V by a sequence
V==V3 Cl/4CVsCV6 ==WXW,
(3.34)
where Vk+l is obtained from Vic by the attachment of disjoint handles, (BIc f< B 8 - 1c ),S, on disjointly embedded (Sk- l x B 8 -k),s in the boundary of Vic. To be precise, V4 contains all of F's index 4-critical points,
V4 == P-I([-1/8, 1/8]);
(3.35)
and V5 contains all index 3,4, and 5 critical points,
V5 == P-I([-3/8,3/8]).
(3.36)
The attaching 3-spheres for the handles that change V3 to V4 are given by (3.31), (3.32). Meanwhile, the attaching 4-spheres for the handles that change V4 to V5 are (3.37)
{B(p,q)_
n p-l (1/8) hp,q)E crit6(F) U{ B(p,q)+
n p-l (-1/8) }(P,q)Ecrits(F)-
The 5-spheres for the attachments that change Vs to V6 should be obvious. The resulting Meyer-Vietoris sequences from (3.34) read, in part, (3.38)
H 3 (L-t) EB H3C[~_) H 3(V4)
Rj
-4
H 3(V3) --+ H 3(V4 ) --+ 0,
H 3(V5)
Rj
H3(VS).
The third assertion in Lemma 3.7 follows from (3.38) and (3.33). The other [J assertions follow by Meyer-Vietoris from (3.34)-(3.37).
4 Homological constraints. In this section, Mo and Ml will both be oriented, 3- dimensional manifolds with the rational homology of S3. And, W will be an oriented, connected, spin cobordism between Mo and MI. Let J : W -4 [0,1] be a good Morse function. Use f to construct the space Z as described in Sections 3g and 3h. The proof of Theorem 2.9 is a five step affair which is outlined in Section 2k. The manifold (with boundary) Z of Sections 3g, h realizes the first step in the proof. The next step in the proof is to construct a subvariety Ez C Z with various properties as outlined in Steps 2 and 3 of Section 2k. The purpose of this section is to reformulate some of these requirements in a purely homological way.
336
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
a) The homology of EM and M
X
M.
In order to understand the homological constraints on Ez, it proves useful to digress first with a homological interpretation of some of the constructions in Section 2. Return then to the milieu of Section 2 where M is a compact, oriented 3-manifold with the rational homology of 8 3 and where EM eM X M is defined by (2.1). The inclusion EM C M X M induces a surjective homomorphism on the respective rational homology groups in dimension 3, with a one dimensional kernel.
(4.1)
aM == [.:lM] - [Po X M] - [M X Po]
This aM bounds (rationally) in M
X
M, and a bounding cyle defines a class,
(4.2) (Here, H.(X, Y) for a space X and subspace Y C Xdenotes the relative homology with rational coefficients.) The Poincare dual of PM is the generator of H 2 (M X M -EM) which figures so prominently in Section 1. End the digression. b) Homological constraints on Ez from wz. Return to the bordism milieu of the introduction. The subvariety EE should have a physical boundary (as a cycle, for example) which is given by (4.3) where (Ess)" is the obvious Ess in the boundary component (8 3 X 8 3 )p of Z. Finding Ez to satisfy (4.3) would satisfy Step 2 in Section 1h. However, there are certain cohomological constraints on a solution to (4.3) which must be satisfied before it can solve the constraints which are implicit in Step 3 of Section 2k, and in particular, Parts 1 and 2 of (2.27). These are expressed by the following lemma: LEMMA 4.1. Let Ez C Z be a subvariety which obeys (/..3). Then, there is a closed 2-form, Wz, on Z - Ez which restricts to any component Y C 8Z - 8Ez to generate H2(y) if and only if H 4(Ez,8E z ) contains a class az which obeys: 1) The image of az in H4(Z, 8Z) is zero.
2)
(4.4)
8az in H3(8Ez) obeys 8az
= aMI
- aMo
+
L
(ass )p.
"Ecrit(f)
(The absence of signs in the last term in (4.4) stems from the convention of Section 3h for orienting the right and left factors of 8 3 in the boundary component (8 3 X S3)" C 8Z.)
The third constraint in (2.27) is the most difficult of all to satisfy. The strategy for satisfying the third constraint in (2.27) has two parts, one homological
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
337
and the other geometric. For both parts, fix Nz C Z, a regular neighborhood of Ez. The homological issue is to characterize a closed 2-form on N z - Ez which is the restriction from Z - Ez of a closed 2-form Wz from Lemma 4.1. The geometric issue is to find such an w which obeys w A w = O. The following lemma resolves the homological issue: LEMMA 4.2. Suppose that Conditions 1 and !J of Lemma 4.1 are obeyed. Let N z C Z be a regular neighborhood of Ez. A closed 2-form, w, on N z - Ez is the restriction to Nz - Ez of a closed 2-form Wz on Z - Ez as described in Lemma 4.1 if the following occur: 1) The connecting homomorphism from H2(Nz - Ez) to H~omp(Nz) sends w to a multiple of the Poincare dual of az E H4 (Nz, N z n oZ). 2) The restriction homomorphism H2(Z) -t H2(Ez) is surjective.
This lemma is proved below. The last subsection in this section discusses the strategy for finding an appropriate w near Ez with w A w = O. Proof of Lemma 4.1. To prove necessity, start with the observation that the cohomology class in H2(Z - Ez) of the 2-form in question has Poincare dual (4.5)
pz E H5(Z, Ez U oZ).
The requirements in (2.27.1) and (2.27.2) concerning the restriction of Wz to OZ imply the following homological condition on opz (4.6)
opz
= PMl -
PM2
L
+
(pss)p - az,
pEcrit(f)
where (4.7) is a class which obeys (4.4) (so that 02pZ will vanish). To prove the sufficiency assertion of the lemma, start with pz as described. Represent az as a cycle on Ez. By assumption, one has az - T = opz, where T is a 4-cycle on oz, and where pz is a 5-cycle on Z. Note that OT is equal to the right side of (4.6) also. Thus, (4.8)
T - (PMl - PM2
+
L
(Pss )p)
pEcrit(f)
has zero boundary, and so defines a class in H4(8Z). However, this group is zero (H4(8Z) ~ H2(8Z) = 0 (see Section 2). Thus, (4.6) holds for some 5-cycle
338
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
pz on Z. The Poincare dual of pz is a class in H2(Z - Ez) with the required properties. 0 Proof of Lemma 4.2. The question of extending a closed 2-form on N z Ez over Z - Ez is described by part of the Meyer-Vietoris sequence for the cover of Z by (Z - Ez) U Nz. The relevent part is: (4.9)
H2(Z) -+ H2(Z - E z ) EB H 2(Ez) -+ H2(Nz - Ez) -+ H3(Z)
The last arrow in (4.9) factors through the inclusion induced map H~omp(Nz) -+ H 3(Z). So, if the image of w in H~omp(Nz) is Poincare dual to a multiple of Uz as a class in H4(Nz, Nz n 8Z), then the image of win H3(Z) is zero if the image of Uz in H4(Z,8Z) is zero. This is the first condition in Lemma 4.1. Thus, under Condition 1 of Lemma 4.2, the class w maps to zero in H3(Z). When Condition 2 of Lemma 4.2 holds, then w must be in the image of the restriction homomorphism from H2(Z - Ez) because of the exactness of (4.9). 0 c) Satisfying Lemma 4.1's constraints. The second constraint in Lemma 4.1 will be satisfied by construction; as it is essentially a restatement of (4.3) with orientations taken into account. The first constraint in Lemma 4.1 is more subtle. Here is a strategy for finding a solution: The variety Ez will be constructed from a union of varieties, (4.10)
Each variety on the right side of (4.10) will carry a fundamental class. (Here, a variety is a union of embedded submanifolds. If the constituent submanifolds are oriented, then the variety has a fundamental class which is the sum (in the relevent homology group) of the fundamental classes of the constituent submanifolds.) And, for a particular integer N > 0, the class Uz will be given
as (4.11) In (4.10), (4.11), az and EL,R are honest submanifolds; these will be defined in subsequent subsections. Meanwhile, E± will be honest varieties unless N = 1 in (4.11). The construction of E± is quite lengthy and starts in the next section with the completion in Section 10. But, see subsections 4/, 9 below. With (4.11) understood, the first constraint of Lemma 4.1 will be solved with the help of Lemma 4.3, below. (The statement of this lemma reintroduces L.~ from (3.31), (3.32).) LEMMA 4.3. Suppose that W has the rational homology of S3. Let V C Z be a union of dimension 4 sub manifold with boundary such that 8V c. {) Z. Suppose
339
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
that each component of V cames a fundamental class. Then [V] E H4(Z, 8Zj 1R) vanishes if: 1) [8V] = 0 in H 3 ({JZj 1R). £) V has zero intersection number with any component x C (It- u 4). (The intersection number of V with an embedded, 9-dimensional submanifold of Z is defined to be the sum of the intersection numbers of the components of V.) Proof. Poincare duality equates H4(Z, 8Z) with H3(Z). Intersection theory makes this explicit, as the intersection pairing between H4(Z,8Z) and H3(Z) becomes, under Poincare duality, the dual pairing between H3(Z) and H3(Z), Now, use this fact with Assertion 3 of Lemma 3.7. 0
d) The subspace az Let a w
c W x W denote the diagonal.
Clearly, aw
c
Z. Let a z denote the intersection of aW with Z c Z. (Alternately, if Z is thought of as the blow up of Z, then a z can be defined as the inverse image of aw under this blow up.) Note that az is a submanifold with boundary in W, and
(4.12) The orientation of W defines an orientation for a w and thus for a z . The orientation of (ass)p is induced from the orientation of a z in Section 3h as a boundary component ()f az. With this understood, one has:
LEMMA 4.4.
Let [az] E H4(Z,8Z) denote the fundamental class of az.
Then
(4.13)
8[az] = -raMo]
+ [aMI] +
E
[(ass)p].
pEcrit(f)
as a class in H3(8Z). Proof. This is left as an exercise. As a final remark, note that (4.14)
l'his is a consequence of Condition 1 in Definition 3.1.
o
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
340
e) The submanifolds ER,L' By assumption (see 4 of Definition 3.1), there is a gradient flow line for the pseudo-gradient v which starts at Po and which ends at Po. Let "I denote this line. Define 1) ER b x W) n Z, 2) EL (W x "I) n Z.
=
=
(4.15) Here are the properties of these spaces:
4.5. Both ER and EL are embedded submanifolds (with boundary)
LEMMA
of Z. Also,
1) 8ER = (Po x Mo) U (PI x MI). E) 8EL = (Mo x Po) U (MI x PI)' 9)
Let 7rL and 7rR denote the respective right and left factor projections from W x W to W. Then 7rR : ER -+ Wand 7rL l EL -+ W are both diJJeomorphisms.
4)
ER·n!::J. Z
= EL n!::J. z = ER n EL = b x "I) n !::J.z. Furthermore, this subspace ("I x "I) n!::J.z has a neighborhood U C Z with a diffeomorphism (of manifold with boundary) 1/Ju : U ~ [0,1] X lR.3 X lR.3 which obeys
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) 5)
6)
1/Ju(h x "I) n !::J.z) = [0,1] x (0,0). 1/JU(ER) = [0,1] x {O} X lR.3 • 1/JU(EL) = [0,1] X lR.3 X {O}. 1/Ju(!::J.z) = [0,1] X !::J.RS, 1/Ju(Mo x Mo) = {O} X lR.3 X lR.3 • 1/JU(MI x M l ) = {I} x lR.3 x lR.3 . The interchange map (z, z') -+ (z', z) on Z is mapped by 1/Ju to
(t,x,y) -+ (t,y,x). Both ER and EL have empty intersection with the components of L._ U4 of (9.90), (9.91). Orient ER and EL by 7rL and 7rR, respectively. Then
(4.16)
8[EL]
= -[Mo x Po] + [MI x pd.
The remainder of this subsection is occupied with the proof of this lemma. Proof. Since "I is a flow line of v, it has a parametrization (4.17)
1.: [0,1]-+ W
with (-y* J)(t) = t. This implies that the function F of (3.16) restricts without critical points to "I x W and to W x"l j therefore, both ER and EL are submanifolds of Z.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
341
Assertions 1 and 2 of the lemma follow because 'Y is assumed to miss crit(f). To prove the third assertion, use 'Y to view ER as the graph of fin [0,1] x W, where'TrR restricts as the obvious projection to W. The proof of Assertion 3 for E L is analogous. To prove Assertion 4, note that 'Y, being embedded, has a neighborhood U"( C W with a diffeomorphism tP., : U"( ~ [0,1] X Ji3 which obeys f(tP:;l(t,x» = t and tP.,("(t» = (t,O). (Use the implicit function theorem to construct such a tP"( .) Take U = U., X U'" and take tPu = tP., X tP"( . The verification of (a)-(g) 0 follow immediately.
f) The varieties E±. With ~z and ER,L defined in the preceding section, the solution (Jz of (4.11) to Lemma 4.1's constraints is missing still [E_] and [E+]. Indeed, the class [~z] - [ER] - [EL] is a class in H 4 (Z, aZ) whose boundary is equal to
(4.18)
-(JMo
+ (JM1 +
L
[~S3]p,
pEcrit(f)
which is only a part of the right side of (4.4). As remarked earlier, the construction of E± is quite lengthy. To simplify matters, the decomposition given in Proposition 3.2 will be invoked to break the discussion into two parts so that the cobordism W can be assumed to obey the conditions of (3.11). That is, W will be assumed to have the rational homology of S3 and W has a good Morse function with no index 3 critical points. The construction of E± for W given by (3.11) is started in the next section with a digression to describe certain constructions on such W. The construction of E± for (3.11) is completed in Section 9. With W understood to be given by (3.11), here is a rough description of E±: Fix a good Morse function f : W ~ [0,1] with no index 3 critical points. Let aI, ... ,ar and b1 ,' •• ,br label the index 1 and index 2 critical points of f. Now fix a good pseudo-gradient, v, for f, and fix orientations from the descending disks from crit(f) such that the conclusions of Proposition 3.3 hold. That is, with the orientations implicit, the points aI, ... ,ar and bl , ... ,br define a basis for C 1 and C2 , respectively. And, with respect to this basis, the boundary map in (3.5), C 1 ~ C2 , is represented by an upper triangular matrix, S, with positive entries on the diagonal. A pair E±, of subvarieties (with boundary) of Z will be constructed with 8E± C 8Z. The variety E_ is obtained as the intersection with Z of a subvariety of W x W; this subvariety is constructed by performing various surgeries on multiple copies of products of the ascending disks from points in critl (f) with the descending disks from the points in crit2 (f). Meanwhile, the variety E+ is obtained as the intersection with Z of a different subvariety of W x W. In this case, the subvariety is constructed by surgery on multiple copies of the product of the descending disks from crit2 (f) with the ascending disks from critl (f).
a:
342
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
The varieties E± will be naturally oriented and seen to define classes [E±] C H4(Z,8Z). The boundaries of these classes are
L: [S31,,_,
8[E-1 = N
(4.19)
"Ecrit(f)
8[E+1
=N
L:
[S3],,+,
"Ecrit(f)
where (4.19) has introduced the following shorthand: When p is a critical point of I, use [S3],,_ to denote [S3 x point] E H3((S3 x S3),,), and use [S3],,+ to denote [point x S3} E H3((S3 X S3),,),. Here, the orientations on (S3 x point) and (point x S3) are defined in Section 3h. (The diagonal in (S3 x S3)" is oriented as a component of the boundary of Az and then the right and left factors of S3 in (S3 x S3)" are oriented by using the canonical identification of S3 with ~S3.) The [E±], of (4.19) will be constructed to have zero intersection pairing with the classes in L± of (3.30). This will insure that Oz of (4.11) satisfies both requirements of Lemma 4.1. (See Lemma 4.3.) g) Constraints from Wz A Wz
= O.
With Ez in (4.10) constructed so that both requirements of Lemma 4.1 are satisfied, there is a 2-form on Z - Ez which is a candidate for the form Wz in Step 3 of Theorem 2.9's proof. The issue then arises as to whether Oz can be found to satisfy the conditions in (2.27). The construction of a closed 2-form which satisfies,the conditions of (2.27) is carried out in Section 10. However, to motivate some ofthe intervening contortions, here is a rough summary of the difficulties: Remark 1: As long as E± in (4.10) have empty intersection with Mo x Mo and with MI x M 1 , then there is no obstruction to finding Wz which obeys (2.27.1). (See Lemma 2.1) Remark 2: The remaining requirements of (2.27) are harder to satisfy. In particular, the second requirement in (2.27) will require that for each p E crit(f), (4.20)
1) 2)
E_ n (S3 x S3)" E+ n (S3 x S3)"
= S3 X x" = x" X S3.
This requirement and (4.19) are incompatible unless N = 1 or unless E± are singular. Together, (4.19), (4.20) force the use subvarieties for E± instead of submanifolds. Given (4.20), the second constraint in (2.27) can also be satisfied. (See Lemma 2.1 again.) Remark 3: The first condition of Lemma 4.2 is not easy to satisfy with a. 2-form w which obeys w A w = O. In the case where N = 1 in (4.11) (so E± are manifolds) the strategy will be to find a regular neighborhood Nz C Z of Ez and a map
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
343
(4.21) which obeys 't'Zl(O) = I:z and which pulls back the generator of H~omp(1R3) to a non-zero multiple of the Poincare dual in H~omp(Nz) to (1z E H 4 (Nz, N z n aZ). In this case, (4.22) with J1. as in (2.3). In the case where N > 1 in (4.11), the preceding strategy will be modified. When N > 1 in (4.11), then 't'z, as in (4.21), will be defined only in a neighborhood of Az U EL U ER C I:z, and Wz will be defined near Az U EL U ER by (4.22). But, near the remainder of I:z (i.e. near most of E±), the form Wz will be defined somewhat differently. (The basic difference being that Wz will be defined locally as the pull-back of a closed 2-form from a space of dimension less than 4. However, the space in question will not always be 52. In some places, the space will be the compliment in 51 of N + 1 distinct points.) This strategy for constructing a closed, square zero solution to Condition 1 of Lemma 4.2 requires Az, EL,R and the constituent submanifolds of E± to have trivial normal bundles in Z. (See Remark 4, below.) The success of this strategy also requires that the mutual intersections of Z, EL,R and E± have a canonical form. (See Remark 5, below.) Remark -I: The normal bundle of Az in Z is trivial if and only if Z is a spin manifold. Indeed, H 4 (Az) = 0 and therefore, an oriented 3-plane bundle over Z is classified by its 2nd Stieffel-Whitney class. Since Z has trivial normal bundle in W x W, the Stieffel-Whitney classes of the normal bundle to Az in Z are the same as those of the normal bundle to Az in W x W. The latter are the restrictions of the Stieffel-Whitney classes of the normal bundle of Aw in W x W. And, this last normal bundle is naturally isomorphic to the tangent bundle of W. Finally remember that W is said to be spin if the 2nd StieffelWhitney class of its tangent bundle vanishes. The normal bundles to EL,R are trivial, since they are isomorphic to the normal bundle to the path 'Y in W. A constituent submanifold of E+ (or E_) has a normal bundle in Z. IT care is taken in constructing E±, then these normal bundles will be trivial too. Remark 5: The construction of a square zero w to satisfy the first condition of Lemma 4.2 seems to require that E± do not intersect each other or Az and EL,R in a complicated way. Infact, the E± that are finally constructed will have empty intersections with EL,R, while (4.23) where {filr=l are disjoint, embedded paths in l:1z. In fact, fix the label i E {I, ... ,r} and let a == ai and b == bi be the i'th pair of index 1 and index 2 critical points of the Morse function f as described by Proposition 3.3. Then, Vi
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
344
will start at the point (Xa, Xa) E (S3
(S3
X
X
S3) a and will end at the point (Xb, Xb) E
S 3h.
Assertion 4 of Lemma 4.5 describes the intersections amongst EL,R and il z . Assertion 4 of Lemma 4.5 and (4.23) (with some conditions on normal bundle framings) insure that the intersection of E± with ilz has the appropriate form for the construction of a square zero w to satisfy the first condition of Lemma 4.2. Remark 6: The second condition in Lemma 4.2 will be satisfied by taking care to construct E± to have vanishing H2. Note that Z, ilz and EL,R all have vanishing H2. (See Lemmas 3.7, 4.4 and 4.5, respectively). Care must also be taken to insure that E± do not intersect each other or ilz and EL,R in a complicated way. Infact,
LEMMA 4.6. Suppose that Ez is given by (4.10) with ilz and EL,R as described in Sections 4d and 4e, respectively. Suppose that E± c Z are varieties which have empty intersection with EL,R and which intersect each other and ilz as described in (4.29). Suppose, in addition, that H2(E±i Q) = O. Then H2(Ezi Q) = 0 and the homomorphism H2(Z; Q) -t H2(Ezi Q) of Lemma 4.2 is surjective by default.
Proof. Because the intersections of ilz , EL,R and E± with each other are a union of line segments (which have vanishing Hl), the Meyer-Vietoris exact sequence shows that H 2 (Ez) is isomorphic to the direct sum of H 2 0 for (.) == il z , EL,R and E±. By assumption H2(E±) O. Meanwhile, H2(il z ) ~ 0, since ilz is the compliment in ilw ~ W of a finite union of disjoint (open) 0 4-balls. And, H2(EL,R) ~ 0 since EL.R ~ W.
=
Remark 7: In summary, the construction of E± for the case of (3.11) will proceed with care taken with: 1) Normal bundle framings. 2) 3)
Intersections with ilz,EL,R and with each other. Keeping H2(E±) equal to zero.
(4.24)
5 Disk intersections for the Special Case. The construction of E± for W given by (3.11) starts in this section with a digression to describe certain constructions on such W. The constructions here serve to modify the ascending disks from index 1 critical points and also descending disks from index 2 critical points. With W understood to be given by (3.11), begin the discussion by fixing a good Morse function! : W -+ [0,1] as described by Proposition 3.3. As in Proposition 3.3, let al,'" ,ar label 1's index 1 critical points and bl ,'" ,b,. label the index 2 critical points.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
345
Fix a good pseudo-gradient, V, for f, and fix orientations from the descending disks from crit(f) so that the conclusions of Proposition 3.3 hold. That is, with the orientations implicit, the points aI, ... ,ar and b1, ... ,br define a basis for Cl and C2 , respectively. And, with respect to this basis, the boundary map in (3.5), a : C1 -+ C2 , is represented by an upper triangular matrix, S, with positive entries on the diagonal. The matrix S gives a certain amount of algebraic information about the intersections of the descending disks from crit2 (f) and the ascending disks from Critl(f). That is, the intersection of the descending disk from bi and the ascending disk from aj is a discrete set of How lines which start at aj and end at bi. Each such How line carries a sign, ±1. And, the matrix element Bi,j computes the sum of these ±l's. In particular, Proposition 3.3 insures that the algebraic intersection number of the descending disk from bi and the ascending disk from aj is zero if i > j. However, even when i > j, the point aj may lie in the closure of the descending disk from bi. This is an unpleasant fact which must be circumvented in order to facilitate certain constructions in the subsequent subsections. The purpose of this subsection is to modify the descending and ascending disks so as to make this eventuality irrelevent. The expense here is to replace the disk with a more complicated submanifold of W. a) Past and future. The purpose of this subsection is to introduce some terminology which will arise in the modification constructions below. To begin, focus on a subset U C W. Define the past of U, written past(U), as follows: A pointx E past(U) if there is a gradient How line 'Y : [a, b] -+ W and times t, t' E (a, b] with t' ~ t and with 1) 'Y(t) = x,
2) 'Y(t') E U. (5.1) Define the future of U, written fut(U), as the subset of points x in W for which there is a gradient flow line which obeys (5.1) but where t, t' E [a, b) and t' ~ t. Note that past(U)n fut(U) = U. For example, if pEW is not a critical point, then past(p) is the set of points which are hit before p on the gradient flow line through p. However, if p E crit(f), then past(p) = Bp_. b) Tubing descending disks froIll crit2(f). This subsection begins the modification process; it describes a construction, tubing, which modifies the descending disk from an index 2 critical point bi so
that the closure of the modified submanifold is disjoint from any index 1 critical Point aj for j < i. To make the tubing construction, focus first on some index 2 critical point b == bi and a particular index 1 critical point a = aj for j < i. A descending
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
346
disk from the index 2 critical point b will intersect a neighborhood, Ua of a in a finite set of components. Each of these components contains the intersection of Ua with a gradient flow line which starts at a and ends at b. To be precise, let V C B b - n Ua be a component. After a small isotopy, one can find Morse coordinates for Ua so that
(5.2)
1/Ja(V)
= {(Xl,X2,X3,X4); X2 ~ 0 and X3 = X4 = o}.
With (5.2) understood, the flow line between a and b which lies in V is given in the Morse coordinates by intersecting 1/Ja(V) with the ray {(Xl,X2,X3,X4) : X2 > 0 and Xl = X3 = X4 = o}. To consider the full intersection of Bb- with a neighborhood of a in W, it is convenient to first intersect 1/Ja(Ba+) with a small radius sphere in lR" about the origin. Call the result S+i in Morse coordinates, this S+ is a small radius 2-sphere in the 3-plane where Xl = O. The intersection Bb- n S+ is transverse, and is a finite number of points, Bb- n S+ = {ea }. Because j < i and the matrix S is upper triangular, the 2-sphere S+ has zero algebraic intersection number with B b _. This means that the points {e of Bb-'s intersection with S+ can be paired so that each pair contains one point with positive intersection number and one with negative intersection number. Write this pairing as Q }
(5.3) Since S+ is a 2-sphere, the two points of any pair Gan be connected by a path in S+. These paths can be drawn so that paths coming from distinct pairs in Bb_nS+ do not intersect. The paths should also be drawn to avoid intersections of S+ with any other descending sphere from crit2(J). Let {(/J}~=l be the set of paths just defined. The value of f on S+ is some constant, fo > f(a). Then, introduce M == f-l(Jo) nua • This will be a smooth 3-manifold given by
(5.4)
1/Ja(M+)
= {(Xl.'"
,X4 :
-X~
+ X~ + X~ +- X~ = fo}.
With M+ understood, thicken each ( E {(/J} to a thin ribbon in M+i call this ribbon ( ~ I x I, where I == [0,1]. (The ribbon should be thin so that it's only intersection with a descending disk from crit2(J) is with 8(.) Thus parameterized, I x {1/2} == (, while 81 x I is embedded in Bb- n M+. To be explicit, parameterize as ((T) E S+ for T E [0,1]. Then, to a first approximation, ~ should be parameterized by (T, T') as (5.5)
1) 2)
Xl
= fJ/2 £(2T'-1),
(X2,X3,X4)
= (1 + £2 (2T' _1)2)1/2 (Tn
for small £ > O. Let 710- denote the past of (0,0) i it is part of a gradient flow line which starts on Mo. Let 710+ denote the past of (0,1), part of another gradient flow line starting on Mo. -
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
347
The union 110 == 1Jo- U(O,·) U77o+ is a piece-wise smooth curve in Bb-. Here is a picture of 1Jo and past(1Jo):
{.
/
~ I ~I, / '70-
\
'f+
(
Past(11o)
(5.6) Let 1Jl - denote the past of (1,0) and let 771+ denote the past of (1, 1). Set == 1Jl- U (1,·) U '71+. This is a piece-wise smooth curve in Bb-. With the preceding understood, here is a surgery on Bb-: Delete from Bbthe set past(1Jo)U past(77d to get a manifold with piecewise smooth boundary 1Jo U1Jl, and then glue on to this boundary image «()U past«((·, O»U past«((·, 1). Call the resulting space B~_. See the following piCture: '71
Pa.st(~, 0)
(5.7)
348
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
The surgery just described is the tubing construction on a cancelling pair of intersection points of Bb- with S+ Effect this tubing construction for all the pairs in (5.3) which comprise Bb_'S intersection with S+. Because the surgeries are constructed using gradient flow lines, the surgeries from different pairs in (5.3) do not interfere (or intersect) each other. After all n surgeries are performed, the result is a piecewise smooth submanifold of W whose closure misses the critical point aj. This submanifold can be smoothed after a small perturbation and will henceforth will be assumed smooth. Effect the same tubing construction for all pairs of intersection points for all aj with j < i. Use Bu- to denote the result of doing this surgery. (Note: Because the surgeries are defined using gradient flow lines, the surgeries which come from different index 1 critical points do not interfere nor intersect with each other.) Finally, effect this same tubing construction for all bi in crit2(J). Note that this can be done so that the resulting set of submanifolds {B1b- : b = bi}i=l are disjoint in W. (The point here is that the paths ( and the ribbons (in (5.5) have only the two boundary points of ( as intersection points with descending disks from Crit2(J). The rest of the tubing construction uses only gradient flow lines-and so won't create intersections with descending disks.)
c) Normal bundles. Let b = b. E Crit2(J). The submanifold Bb- C W is oriented as the negative disk from the degree 2 critical point b = b•. As an oriented submanifold of W, Bb- has a canonical trivialization of its normal bundle (up to homotopy). Simply flow the trivialization of the normal bundle of B b- at b along B b- using the pseudo-gradient v. The preceding subsection described the construction of a submanifold Bufrom Bb- by doing surgery on embedded arcs in Bb- with endpoints on Bb- n Mo. The resulting 2-dimensional submanifold can be seen to be orientable, and it inherits a canonical orientation from Bb-. (Note that each surgery that is performed on B b - is constrained to lie in a 3-dimensional ball in W. One dimension of this ball is the pseudo-gradient flow direction, the other two dimensions can be parameterized by the ribbon coordinates on ( in (5.5).) As B 1b - is not closed in W, the normal bundle-to B1b- will be a trivial bundle, and the claim is that there is an essentially canonical trivialization up to homotopy. The point is that in constructing B1b- from Bb- one does a large number, say N, of essentially identical, non-interfering surgeries. So, one need only check that the canonical normal trivialization of Bb- extends over anyone of these surgeries to give a normal trivialization of the postoperative manifold which agrees with the normal trivialization of B b - away from the area of surgery. That such is the case is easy to check, since each individual surgery can be performed inside a 3- dimensional ball inside of W.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
349
d) Tubing ascending disks from critl (f).
Let a == ai C critl (f). The closure of the ascending disk from a will typically intersect many of the points in Crit2 (f). The purpose of this subsection is to modifies the ascending disk so that the closure of the resulting submanifold of W is disjoint from {bj};>i' This modification procedure will also be called tubing. To begin the tubing construction, focus attention first on an index 2 critical point b == bj with j > i. Introduce the Morse coordinates,
(5.8)
where the points in Aj can be described as follows:
(5.9) 1) 2) 3)
The signs for all points in Aj agree, and for j > 1, disagree with those in Aj - l . In clockwise order, Al starts with el. The points in Aj follow clockwise those in Aj - 1 .
The (n + 1)'st round of pairings is obtained by assigning the last point in Aj to the first point in AjH; doing this for j = 1, ... ,J - 1.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
350
See the following diagram:
~ ....>
= pairing
(5.10)
Let PnH C YnH denote the set of points just paired. This PnH contains at least two points (i.e., one pair) unless YnH is already the empty set. If YnH :I 0, then Y n+2 == Y n+1 - Pn+1 contains strictly fewer points then YnH . Thus, iterating the pairing process as just described will eventually pair up all the points of Ba+ n s_. With the pairing process complete, turn to the tubing process. Start the discussion by considering the set P1 of points which were paired on the first round. By construction, P1 decomposes as a union of nearest neighbor pairs, with a pair, {e,e'}, in the decomposition composed of one point with positive intersection number and one with negative intersection number. Write {e, e'} with e' clockwise from e on S_. Let, denote a (closed) interval of S_ which sits clockwise between e and e'. The value of the function f on S_ is some constant, 10. One can assume, with no loss of generality, that M_ == 1-1(10) is a smooth submanifold of W near the critical point b. Indeed,
(5.11)
With M_ understood, thicken, to an embedded 1 x D2 inside M_. Here, 1 = [0,11 and n 2 is the standard 2-disk. The embedding sends 1 x {OJ to , with {OJ x {OJ going to e and with {I} x {OJ going to e'. Meanwhile, the embedding should embed 81 x D2 into M _ n Ba+ as neighborhoods of {e, e'} in M I Only I x {O}5bould intersect S_ and only 81 x D2 should intersect Bo.+.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
351
Agree to identify I x D2 with its image inside M_. See the following picture:
•••-••-••-•. - ~S_ ... ••••• :~.'"~.:...~••_••_•.J-...~.
Picture in
M_
(5.12) With IxD2 understood, perform the following surgery on Ba+: Delete fut( {OJ x D2)U fut({I} x D2) from B a+. The closure of the resulting space has a new "boundary" which is piecewise smooth, being the union
With this deletion complete, glue onto the boundary above the set fut(Ix8n2)U (/ x D 2 ). The result will be a piece-wise smooth manifold (in its interior) which can be smoothed to give a smooth manifold (in its interior) whose closure has two less intersections with S_. Let B~+ denote the resulting smoothed manifold. See the following diagram:
(5.14) Notice that the B~+ intersects S_ in the set Y2. A.nd, the subset P1 of points paired on the second round consists, by construction, of nearest neighbor pairs on S_. One can therefore repeat the preceding tubing construction to obtain a sub-manifold B~+ C W whose intersection with S_ is precisely the set Y 3 • Clearly, an iteration of the tubing construction (as described above) will result, finally, with a sub-manifold of W with no intersections with S'-. See the
352
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
following diagram:
---.--.~:==::--
(5.15)
One can make the same tubing constructions simultaneously at all of the points in {b H1 ,'" ,br }. This is because tubings from distinct critical points will not interfere with each other. (They are defined by gradient flow lines so do not intersect each other in W - crit(f).) Use B 1a+ to denote the submanifold ofl W which results from doing these tubing surgeries near all of the points in thb set {bH1 ,' .. ,br }. Complete this tubing construction for each a E critl (f). The resulting set {Bla+ : a E Crit2 (J)} may contain pairs which mutually intersect, but notice that these intersections will occur only in small ball-neighborhoods of the points of crit2(f). e) Normal framings for B 1a+ The purpose of this subsection is to point out that the submanifolds {B 1a+} all come with a canonical normal bundle framing. Indeed, Ba+ is oriented and the tubing constructions do not destroy the orient ability of B 1a+ and it is left to the reader to check that B 1a+ inherits a natural orientation from B a +. An orientation for B 1a+ induces one on the normal bundle of B 1a+. And, since B 1a+ C W has codimension 1, the act of orienting the normal bundle of B 1a+ gives that bundle a trivialization. f) The How line 'Y.
There is a flow line, 'Y, which starts at Po E Mo and which ends at PI E MI. (See 4 of Definition 3.1.) One can assume that all Bl a + and B1b- constructed
353
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
here are disjoint from 'Y. Here is why: The flow 'Y must avoid all of the critical points of f. Since W is compact, there is an open subset of U C W which contains crit(J) and is such that past(U) and fut(U) are disjoint from 'Y. Given such a set, one can assume without loss of generality that (5.16)
1) 2)
B lo+ C fut(U) for all a E critl(J). Blb- C past(U) for all bE crit2(J).
6 The first pass at E±" This section will construct submanifolds El± C Z which plug into (4.10), (4.11) to solve the constraints of Lemma 4.1 in the case when W is described by (3.11). (So W has the homology of 8 3 and W has a good Morse function with no index 3 critical points.) a) The submanifolds Y;,j±"
As in the preceding section, fix a good Morse function f on W with no index 3 critical points, and label the index 1 and index 2 critical points of f as {al,' .. ,ar } and {bl ,· .. ,br }, respectively. For each a E critl (J), construct the submanifold B lo+ C W as directed in the preceding section. Also, for each bE Crit2(J), construct the submanifold Blb- C W as directelin said section. When 1 ~ i ~ j ~ r, set a ai and set b bj • Now define
=
1) 2)
(6.1)
Y;,jY;,j+
=
= Z n (Blo+ x Blb-) = Z n (Blb- x B lo+)
These subspaces will be used to construct the varieties E± of (4.10). (See also (6.3) and Definition 6.4, below.) Lemmas 6.1 and 6.2, below describes some of the salient features of Y;,j±.
=
=
6.1. Let 1 ~ i ~ j ~ r, and set a ai and b bj • After {arbitrarily} small isotopies of Blo+ and Blb-, the former the identity near a and the latter the identity near b, the subspaces Y;,j± C Z will be closed, embedded, dimension 4 submanifolds {with boundary}.
LEMMA
1}
2} 8Y;,j± = 0 if i ~ j. 3} 8Y;,i± C (8 3 X 8 3 )0 U (83 x S 3 h. 4) 8Y;,i- n (83 x 8 3 )0 is the disjoint union of embedded 3-spheres, each isotopic to (S3 x point). Likewise, 8Y;,i- n (S3 x S 3h is the disjoint union 5)
6) 7) 8)
of embedded 3-spheres, each isotopic to (83 x point). 8Y;,H n (S3 x 8 3 )0 is the disjoint union of embedded 3-spheres, each isotopic to (point xS 3 ). Meanwhile, 8Y;,i+ n (S3 x 8 3 h is the disjoint union of embedded 3-spheres, each isotopic to (point?< S3). All Yi,j± are orientable. The product normal framings of Bl o + and B lb - in W induce a framing of the normal bundles to Y;,j± in Z. All Yi,j± have H2(l'i,j±) = o.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
354
9}
All Yi,j± are disjoint from ER,L in (.+.15).
(Remark that Assertions 8 and 9 are not needed until one reaches the part of Theorem 2.9's proof where (2.27.3) must be verified.) The proof of this lemma is deferred to Subsection 6c. Since all the Yi,j± are orientable, one can consider their intersection numbers with the generators of H3(Z). These intersection numbers are computed in Lemma 6.2, below. Lemma 6.2 uses the following notations and conventions: Let p and p' be critical points of f with the same index, and for which f(P) > f(P'). Consider L(p,p')+ == (Bp_ x B p'+) n Z E 4. This is the boundary of the subset of Bp_ x B p'+ where F ~ O. (The latter is a manifold with boundary.) Orient Bp_ x By+ with the product orientation and then agree henceforth to orient L(p,y)+ with the induced orientation as the boundary of the subset where F ~ O. Consider now the 3-sphere L(p' ,p)_ == (Bp' + x Bp_) n Z E L.-. This is the boundary of the subset of B p'+ x Bp_ where F ~ O. (The latter is a manifold with boundary.) Orient By + x Bp_ with the product orientation and then agree henceforth to orient L.(y,p)_ with the induced orientation as the boundary of the subset where F ~ O. LEMMA 6.2. Add the following to the conclusions of Lemma 6.1: The submanifolds {Yi,;±} have tmnsversal intersections with the 3- spheres in L.± and Yi,j- n L.- 0 and Yi,H n 4 = 0, where L.± are given by (3.31), (3. 32}. Furthermore, the {Yi,i±} can be oriented so that 1} The intersection of Yi,;- with L(p,p')+ E 4 is empty unless p :::: ai or p' = bj • If p = ai and p' = ak, then the intersection number is -S;,k. If p = bk and p' = bj , then this intersection number is Sk,i'
=
2)
The intersection of Yi,H with L(p' ,p)_ E L.- is empty unless p' :::= bj or p = ai. If p' = b; and p = bk, then the intersectian number is Sk,i' If p = ai and p' ak, then the intersection number is Sj,k.
=
3} (6.2)
= (Si,;) ([S3]a_ + [S3]b_), 8[Yi,i+] = (Si,i) ([S3]a+ + [S31b+)'
8[Yi,i-]
Here, Si,i > 0 is given in (3. 15}. (For p defined subsequent to (.+.19).)
=a
or b, the classes [S3]p± are
The proof of this lemma is deferred to Subsection 6d, below. b) The construction of [E±J.
With the orientations of Lemma 6.2, the submanifolds {Yi,j±} of Lemma 6.1 will define homology classes in H4(Z,8Z) and linear combinations of these classes will produce classes [E±l which fit into (4.11) to solve the constraints of Lemma 4.1. To be precise here, introduce the matrix S of (3.15) and the
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
355
integer valued matrix T == det(S) S-1. Note that T == (Ti,j) is upper triangular (when i > j, then Ti,j = 0) with Ti,i = det(S)/Si,i' With T understood, introduce
(6.3)
[E1-] == LTi,j [Yi,j-] and [E1+] == LTj,i [Yi,H]' i.,j
i,j
(In (6.3), the sums are over all pairs i,j with 1 ~ i ~ j ~ r.) Here are the salient features of these classes:
LEMMA
(6.4)
6.3. Define the classes [Ea] by {6.9}. Then 8[E1_]
= det(S)
L
[S3]p_.
pE crit(f)
8[E1+l = det(S)
L
[S3l p +'
pE crit(f)
Furthermore, [Eal have zero intersection pairing with the classes which are generated by the 9-speres in k± of (9.91) and {9.92}. It follows from this lemma that Lemma ..p is satisfied if the classes [E±l in (4.11) are set equal to [Eal from {6.9}. In this case, (4.11)'s integer N must equal det(S). (In later constructions, it proves convenient to take [E±l in {4·11} to be some multiple of [Eal from (6.9}.) Proof. Consider first the properties of [E1 -]. It follows from Assertion 1 of Lemma 6.1 and Assertion 1 of Lemma 6.2 that 8[E1_] obeys (6.4). This is because the boundary annihilates all terms in (6.3) save those for which i = j. Then, (6.4) follows from (6.2) and the fact that Ti,i = det(S)/ Si,i' According to Assertion 2 of Lemma 6.2, [E1-1 is represented by the fundamental classes of submanifolds with empty intersection with the classes from k_. To study the intersection pairing between [E1-] and a class from ~, fix integers m and n with 1 ~ m < n ~ r. Let a == am and let a' == an. Consider the pairing between [E1-l and the class of L(a,a')+' Using Assertion 3 of Lemma 6.2, one finds that this number is equal to (6.5)
LTm,kSk,n, k
which is zero because m =f. n and T is proportional to S-1. Next, let b == bm and let b' == bn and consider the pairing between [E 1 -] and the class of L(b,b/)+. Using Assertion 3 of Lemma 6.2 again, one finds that this pairing is equal to (6.6)
356
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
which is also zero, because m '# n and T =det(8) 8- 1 • Thus Lemma 6.3 is proved for [EI-J. The prooffor [EHl is analogous and is left to the reader. 0 c) Proof of Lemma 6.1
Fix i and j such that 1 ~ i ~ j ~ r and let a == ai and b == bj. For Assertion l's proof, note that Yi,j- n int(Z) will be a submanifold of int(Z) if F's restriction to Bl a+ X B1b- has zero as a regular value. This will follow if f's restriction to B 1a+ has disjoint critical values from its restriction to B lb _. With an arbitrarily small isotopy, of B1b- near f-IU(a», one can insure that f(a) is not a critical value of f on B lb _. Likewise, an arbitrarily small isotopy of B 1a+ near where f = feb) will insure that feb) is not a critical value of f on B la +. With this understood, a small isotopy of Bl a+ which is the identity near a will insure that the critical values of f on Bl a+ are disjoint from those of f on B 1b-. Argue as follows to prove that Yi,i- is closed: The closure of Blb- in W adds only the descending disks from {akh~j. However, f(B la+) ~ f(ai) > f( {akh>i) (see Assertion 2 of Proposition 3.2). Therefore, where (niJ) ~ 3/8, the closure of (B1a+ X B1b-) n Z adds nothing unless i = j, and then, only the point (a,a) is added. Likewise, Bl a+ is not closed in W, but its closure adds only ascending disks from {bkhi.) However, f(B1b=) ~ f(bj ) < f({bkh<j) because of Assertion 2 in Proposition 3.2. Therefore, where (niJ) ~ 3/8, the closure of (B 1a+ X B 1b-) n Z adds nothing except when i = j, in which case only the point (b, b) is added. The preceding proves that (B1a+ X B lb -) n Z is closed. A similar argument proves that l'i,i+ is closed. Note that the preceding argument proves Assertions 2 and 3 also. To prove Assertion 4, consider first the neighborhood Ua of a in W as described by the Morse coordinates (3.2). The submanifold Blb- intersects this ball in at least 8 i ,i components; and a typical component, say V, has the following form: There is a unit vector v with coordinates (0, V2, V3, V4) and (6.7) (The unit vectors (i.e. v) are distinct for distinct components of B 1b - n Ua .) Equation (3.6) describes Bl a+ near a since near a, it is identical to B a+. Consider next the neighborhood Ua x Ua of (a, a) in W x W, and use the coordinates of (3.25). One sees that near (a, a), each component of Bl a + X B 1b - has the form B 1a+ X V, where V C B1b- is given by (6.7). Thus, the intersection Bl a+ X V with Z near (a, a) is given by the set of points «Xl,X2,X3,X4), (Yl,Y2,Y3,Y4» E]R4 X lR" where 1) Xl = 0 2) (Y2,Y3,Y4) = tv for t > 0, 3)
t2
= Y~ + x~ + x~ + x~.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
357
(6.8) Note that this set intersects (8S
X
8 S )a
c az as 8 s
x Pv, where
(6.9) Equations (6.7) and (6.8) establish the first part of Assertion 3 concerning the intersection of Yi,;- with (8S X 8 S )a' An analogous argument shows that the intersection of Yi,;- with (8S x 8 S )b has the following form: The coordinate chart Ub describes a neighborhood of b in W. A component, V, of the intersection of Bl a+ with Ub is given as
(6.10) and v E
]R2
with
1v 1= I}.
Use Ub x Ub to describe a neighborhood of (b, b) in W. The intersection of B 1a+ X B1b- with this neighborhood will be a union of components, each of the form V X B lb - with V as above. With this understood, V x B 1b - intersects Z as the set of points in JR4 x ]R4 of the form ((Xl, X2, Xs, X4), (YI, Y2, Ys, Y4») where (6.11)
°
1) (Xl, X2) = t v for t > and 2) Ys = Y4 = 3) t 2 = y~ + y~ + x~ + x~.
°
1v 1= 1
The preceding equation demonstrates that V x Blb- intersects (S3 x S3)b C 8 3 x Pv, where Pv = (rVI,rV2,0,0) . The proof of Assertion 5 of the Lemma 6.1 follows essentially the same arguments which prove Assertion 4. The details for Assertion 5's proof are omitted. Consider now the proof of Assertion 6: Both B 1a+ and B lb - are orient able (as described in the previous section), and so their product is orientable. Then, the restriction of dF to the product trivializes the normal.bundle of Yi,;- in B 1a+ X Blb- and similarly that of Yi,j+ in Blb- X B 1a +. To prove Assertion 7, remark that both B 1a+ and B1b- were constructed with canonically trivial normal bundles. Thus, their product has a canonical (up to homotopy) trivialization of its normal bundle in W x W. With this understood, remember that Z is cut out of W x W as part F-1(0), while Yi,;- is cut out of B 1a+ X B1b- as part of F-1(0), so the trivialization of (B 1a+ X Blb_)'s normal bundle in W x W defines, upon restriction to F- 1 (0), a trivialization of the normal bundle to Yi,;- in Z. Once again, the argument for Yi,i+ is analogous and omitted. To prove Assertion 8, first remember that B 1a-+< and Blb- are constructed from Ba+ and Bb-, respectively by surgery. The surgery on B b - occurs near where f = 1/4, while the surgery on B 1a+ occurs near f = 1/2. This implies that Yi,j- can be seen as the result of a surgery on the 4-sphere which is the intersection of the descending disk from F's index 5 critical point (~, b) with F- 1 (1/8). The surgery is on embedded SO x B 4 ,s in said 4-sphere. The number
az as
35S
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
of these surgeries is the combined total of the surgeries which make Bla+ from Ba+ and Blb- from Bb-. Each such surgery increases the rank of Hl(·jZ) by one, but leaves H2 (.j Z) = o. Assertion 9 follows from (4.1S) and (S.16). 0
d) Proof of Lemma 6.2. Consider first that the 3-spheres in L± do not come near the critical points (P,p) of F. This follows from Proposition 3.2. Therefore, an (arbitrarily) small isotopy of B 1a+ or of B1b- will result in transversal intersections between Yi,i± and any of the spheres in L.±. Remark next that the intersection of Yi,j- with some L(p',p)_ is non-empty only if Bla+ n B p'+ "I 0 and also B1b- n Bp_ '" 0. The former is empty if p and p' have index 2, while the latter are empty if p and p' have index 1. To prove Assertion 1, one should consider orienting Yi,j- as follows: Orient B 1a+ X B1b- with its product orientation. Then, note that Yi,j- is a codimension zero part of the boundary of the subset of B 1a+ X Blb- where F ~ o. Give Yi,jthe induced boundary orientation. Use 0 to denote said orientation. With the orientation 0, the intersection number between Yi,j- and some L(p,p'l+ E 4 is equal to the coefficient in front of (P,p') in the expression for the 8(a, b) in the complex C F of Lemma 3.S. (Note that B 1a+ X Blb- is homologous to the descending S-disk from (a, b).) The computation of this coefficient is straightforward and leads to Assertion 1. (The fact that the intersection in question is empty unless p = ai or p' = bj follows from the fact that when a and a' are index 1 critical points of j, then B 1a+ n B a,- = 0 unless a = a'. Likewise, when band b' are index 2 critical points of j, then B1b- n Bb'+ = 0 unless b = b'.) The proof of Assertion 2 is analogous. Here, the orientation 0 for Yi,H is defined by considering Yi,H as a co dimension zero part of the boundary of the subset of B1b- X B la+ where F ~ O. Consider now the proof of Assertion 3. There is a proof along the lines of the proof of Assertion 1, but a direct proof is had by the following argument: Let a == ai and b == bi. An intersection point, q, of (B a + n M 3/ S ) with (B b- n M 3 / S ) corresponds to one boundary component of (Ba+ x Bb-) n Z in (83 X 8 3)a and, likewise, to one boundary component in (8 3 x 8 3 )&. (And vice-versa.) The orientation of these boundary components relative to the given orientations of (8 3 )a_ and to (8 3 )b_ will be found equal, but opposite the local intersection number at q of (Ba+ n M 3 / S ) with (Bb- n M 3 / S ) in M 3 / S • 8tep 1: This step compares the local intersection number at q with the orientation of the corresponding boundary component of (Ba+ n Bb-) n Z in (8 3 X 8 3 )a. To begin, take the Morse coordinates near a of (3.2) so that Ba+ = {x == (Xl,X2,X3,X4) : Xl = O}. Orient Ba+ by {h8384 E A3TBa+. A neighborhood, U C M 3 / S of M 3 / 8 's intersection with Ba+ is isotopic to {x : -x? + x~ + x~ + x~ = R2} for some R > T. This U is oriented at q E (0, R, 0, 0) E U by -81~84. Now q lies in B a +, hut suppose that q is also a point of intersection Bb- and B a+. Suppose further that the local intersection number at q of (B a+ n M 3 / S )
359
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
with (Bb- n M3 / s ) is equal to E = ±1. Without loss of generality, Bb- can be assumed to intersect a neighborhood of U as {x : X2 > 0 and X3 = X4 = o}. To obtain the correct intersection number at q, it is necessary to orient B,,_ using -E 81 th. (Note that df = dX2 at q, so (Ba+ n M3 / s ) is oriented near q by as84, while (B,,_ n M 3/ s ) at q is oriented by -E8l _ Then, their intersection at q has local orientation -E~as84 which agrees or disagrees with the orientation -8l as84 of M 3/ s depending on whether E = ±1.) With the preceding understood, it follows that Ba+ x B,,_ is oriented near (q, q) by -fth83848~ 8~; here the prime indicates a vector field from the second factor of W in W x W, while the absence of a prime indicates a vector field from the first factor of W. Now, at the point (q, q), the I-form dF = dx~ - dX2; this implies that f (th + 8~)83848L orients (B a+ x B,,_) n Z in (83 x 8 3 )a near (q,q). Finally, the boundary ofth~ component of (Ba+ xB,,_)nZ in (83 X 8 3)a which corresponds to the point q is oriented by contracting this last frame with -dx~ - dX2 which yields -Eas848r. This disagrees with the orientation of (S3 )awhen E = +1 and it agrees with said orientation when E -1. Step 2: This step compares the local intersection number at q with the orientation of the corresponding component in (8 3 X 8 3 )" of the boundary of (Ba+ x Bb-) n Z. To begin, take the Morse coordinates of (3.2) around b. Then, B,,_ = {x : X3 = X4 = o}. Orient B b- by 8 1 th. If. neighborhood, U, of the point q in M 3 / s is isotopic to the subset given in Morse coordinates as {x : -x~ - x~ + x~ + x~ = .... R2}. Here R » rand q is the point (0, R, 0, 0). The orientation of M3 / 8 is determined from the fact that df at q is -dx2 • Thus, 81 83 84 orients M 3/ s . Meanwhile, a neighborhood of q in Ba+ can be assumed given by the set {x : Xl = 0 andx 2 > o}. This part of Ba+ is oriented by fthas84. (Thus, (Ba+ n M 3 / s ) is oriented at q by - f as 84 while -81 orients (B b- n M 3 / s ) at q. Their intersection gives E81 as84 for the orientation of M 3 / s as it should.) The orientation for Ba+ x Bb- near (q,q) is thus given by fthas848r8~. The I-form dF at (q, q) is given by -dx~ + dX2, and this means that f (82 + 8~)83848i orients the part near (q,q) of (Ba+ nBb-) n z. With this last point understood, it follows that - f as848~ orients the part of 8«Ba+ n B b-) n Z) in (S3 x 8 3 h which corresponds to q. Note that this orientation disagr~es with the given orientation of (S3)b_ when f = +1, but it agrees when f = -1. In particular, note that this anti-correlation with the local intersection number at q is the same as that for components of 8«Ba+ x Bb_) n Z) in (S3 X S3)a. It follows from the preceding calculations that (6.2) holds if the orientation - 0 is used on {Yi,j-}. A similar argument shows that the second line of (6.2) is correct if the {Yi,H} are also oriented with -0. The details here are left to the reader.
=
e) Push-oft's.
The next task is to provide a representative of each [E1±l as the fundamental class of a smoothly embedded submanifold (with boundary), E1± C Z. Here,
oE1 ±
C
oZ.
The construction of E 1 ± requires the introduction of a procedure, called
360
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
push-off, for making copies of embedded submanifolds. The following digression described the push-off procedure. Start the digression by considering the following abstract situation: Let X be a compact manifold with boundary, and let Y C X be a compact submanifold with boundary, which intersects ax transversally as ay. Let Ny -t Y denote the normal bundle to Y in X. (Note that Ny restricts to ay as the latter's normal bundle in ax.) Suppose that Ny admits a section, s, which never vanishes. Let e : Ny -t X be an exponential map which maps Ny 18Y to ax. (See (2.13).) Together, e and S and a real number A '" 0 define a map, (6.12)
e(AS(')) : Y
-t
X,
whose image is disjoint from Y. IT A has small absolute value, then the image, Y', of (6.12) will be an embedding of Y into X, where ay' is an embedding of
ay into ax. This image, Y', is called a push-off of Y. Here are some properties of the push-off: (.) Y' is disjoint from Y, but smoothly isotopic to Y. (The obvious isotopy is to consider A -t 0 in (6.12). This isotopy will isotope ay' to ay in ax.) (.) IT Y comes with some apriori orientation, then Y' has a canonically induced orientation which makes [Y] = [Y'] in H*(X,aX). (.) Let V C X be a submanifold which intersects Y transversally. Then V will also intersect Y' transversally if A in 6.12) has sufficiently small absolute value. (.) Let V C X be a closed submanifold with empty intersection with Y. Then V n Y' = 0 if A in (6.12) has sufficiently small absolute value. (.) IT Y has a framed normal bundle, then this framing naturally induces a framing of the normal bundle to Y' . (6.13)
Note also that one can define any finite number of disjoint push-offs of Y by using different values of A in (6.12). Alternately, one can use different sections {Sl,'} of Ny with fixed A as long as the {Sj} are no-where vanishing and no two are anywhere equal. In the sequel, assume the following conventions: (-) Any pair of distinct push-offs of the same submanifold are mu,tually disjoint. (-) Suppose that the normal bundle Ny is trivial, and that an apriori trivialization has been specified. (Call it the canonical trivialization.) In this case, agree that all push-offs of Y will be defined by using for s in (6.12) a constant linear combination of basis vectors for the canonical trivialization. (-) When the precise choice of exponential map or parameter A or section s in (6.12) are irrelevent to subsequent discussions, their presence will not be
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
361
explicitly noted. (But, keep the preceding convention on the section s when the normal bundle to Y has been trivialized.) (6.14) (The last two conventions in (6.14) allow one to speak of a push-off of Y with-out cluttering the conversation with a list of irrelevent (but necessary) choices.) End the digression. f) E1± as submanifolds.
The purpose of this last subsection is to define [E1±] of (6.3) as the fundamental class of a closed, embedded submanifold (with boundary) of Z. Consider first [E1 -]. This [E1-] is a sum of fundamental classes of the {Yi,j-}. The first observation is that each Yi,j- n Yn,m- = 0 unless m = j. This is because the various {B 1b - he crit2(f) are mutually disjoint. There may be non-empty intersections between Yi,j- and Yk,j- when i '" k. These can be avoided if the following convention is used: Remember that each B1b- has trivial normal bundle in W. And, remember that said normal bundle has a canonical trivialization up to homotopy. For each b E Crit2(J), choose a trivialization of the normal bundle of B lb - which is in the canonical homotopy class. Then, fix j and when i < j, define Yi,j- as in (6.1) but where B1b- is replaced by a push-off copy. For each such i, use a different push-off copy. This will make Yi,j- disjoint form Yk,jwhen i '" k. Now, generalize this process of separating the {Yi,j-} as follows: Reintroduce the matrix T = (Ti,j) which appears in (6.3). For each pair (i,j) with 1 ~ i ~ j ~ r, let a ai and b bj . Take I Ti,j I distinct push-off copies of B1b- and use these in (6.1) to define I Ti,j I distinct push-off copies of Yi,j_. It will prove convenient to require that all such push-off copies are disjoint from the flow line 'Y of Part 4 in Definition 3.1. (One can make all such copies in past(U), where U C Wis an open subset which contains crit(J) and whose past and future are disjoint from 'Y • See (5.16).) Since the various {Blb- he crit2 (f) are mutually disjoint, one can make all of these push-offs so that each copy of Yi,j- is disjoint from each copy of Yk,lwhen (i,j) '" (k,l). With the preceding understood, consider:
=
=
PROPOSITION 6.4. Define E 1- C Z as an oriented sub manifold of Z (with boundary) as the union over all pairs (i,j) (with 1 ~ i ~ j ~ r)) of the I Ti,j I push-offs of Yi,j- as defined above. Take these copies with the following orientations: Orient the copies of Yi,j- as i11 Lemma 6.2 if Ti,j > 0; and oriented them in reverse if T .. ,j < O. Define El+ C Z as a submanifold to be the image of E 1 - under the switch map on W x W which sends (x,y) to (y,x). (This map preserves Z.) Then these oriented submani/olds can be assumed to have the following properties: 1) The fundamental clas.ges oj EH obey (6.3).
362
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
2) El± intersect OZ transversely in OEl±' 3) El± have empty intersection with Mo X Mo and MI X MI. 4) El± have trivial nonnal bundles in Z, and said nonnal bundles have canonical trivializations up to homotopy.
5) H2(El±; Z) = O. 6) El± have empty intersection with
ER,L
of (4.15).
The proof of this proposition is left to the reader. 7 The second pass at E±. Assume here that W obeys the constraints of (3.11). If E± in (4.10) is E 1± of Proposition 6.4, then the resulting I::z satisfies Steps 1 and 2 plus Part 1 of Step 3 in Section 2k's outline of the proof of Theorem 2.9. However, the completion of Step 3 requires modifications of El±. The problem is that El± intersect the various (S3 x S3)p C oZ too many times, and they intersect each other too many times, and they intersect f:l. z too many times. The change of El± into E± is a multi-step process which begins in this section and ends in Section 10. Then, Section 11 constructs a 2-form Wz to satisfy (2.27). This section starts the process by modifying El± to make a submanifold, E2±, with simpler intersections with the (S3 x S3)p C oZ. a) The submanifold
E~_.
To begin the modification process, fix i E {I,· .. , r} and, as usual, set a :: a, and b :: bi' Make 2det(S) additional push-off copies of Blb-. Make these copies so that they are disjoint from all other push-off copies of {Bib' _ : b' E crit 2 (f)} which have so far been constructed. Use these 2det(S) push-off copies of BIb..., to make 2 det(S) copies of B 1a+ X B1b- and then 2 det(S) copies of Yi,,- as describe in (6.1). Orient the first det(S) of these Yi,i- canonically, and orient the remaining det(S) of these copies opposite to their canonical orientation. The first det(S) copies of Yi,i- (the ones with the canonical orientation) will be called the special Yi,i-. Define Ei_ to be the union of Proposition 6.4's E 1 - with the (oriented) submanifold which is comprised of the union of the preceding 2det(S) copies of oriented Yi,i-. Notice that this Ei_ still obeys the conclusions of Lemma 6.3 and Proposition 6.4. b) Tubing near (a,a) Consider now the intersection of E~_ with (S3 (6.9), this intersection is given as
X
S3)a: As described in (6.8),
(7.1)
where
A~ C
8 3 is a finite set of points. Each point in A~ comes with a sign more plus signs than minus signs. This means that
{±I}J and there are det(S)
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
363
the set A~ can be decomposed as Ao UTo, where the points in To can be paired so that the signs in each pair add to zero. It proves useful to take some care in defining the set Ao. Here is how: To begin, note that the intersection of Bb- n j-l(3/8) with Bo+ n j-l(3/8) is transversal, and has intersection number 8 i ,i. Pick a point in this intersection where the local intersection number is positive. Such a point lies on a gradient flow line, 1'(= I'i) which starts at a and ends at b. The intersection of I' x I' with (83 X 8 3 )0 is a point, Po x Po, where Po E 8 3 • With Po singled out, note that the intersection of any push-off copy of ¥i,1 with (83 X 8 3)0 contains a unique (8 3 x p~) where p~ is the push-off of Po. (There is a canonical isotopy between the push-off copy and the original (shrink A to zero in (6.12), and under this isotopy, p~ moves to Po.) In particular, each of the det(8) special copies of ¥i,i defines such a point p~, and these det(8) points are the points that comprise
Ao· As remarked above, the points in To can be paired up so the signs of each pair sum to zero, (7.2) For each pair {e a , e~} in (7.2), E 1 - induces orientations on 8 3 x ea and 8 3 x e~, and these orientations are opposite. Now, for each pair, {e, e/} on (7.2)'s right side, embed [0,1] into 8 3 to have boundary {e, e/ }. (Do this in such a way that the embedded intervals from distinct pairs do not intersect.~ The associated 8 3 x [0,1] has boundary (8 3 x e) U (83 x e/) and the orientations here agree with those which are induced by E 1 _. Hence, 8 3 x [0,1] C (8 3 X 8 3 )0 can be surgered to E 1 _ along their common boundaries, (8 3 x e) U (8 3 x e' ). The result is a topological embedding in Z of a smooth, oriented manifold with boundary, where the boundary embeds (smoothly) in az, (The embedding has "comers", these being the components of 8 3 x {ea,e~} where the surgery took place.) The point is that this new manifold has two less boundary components then E~ _. Here is a picture:
83
X
[0,1]
(7.3)
Make the preceding construction for each pair on the right side of (7.2). The result is a topological embedding of a surgered EL. (The "comers" of the
364
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
embedding are the components of S3 X T a.) The embedding of this surgered Ef_ intersects (S3 X S3)a in S3 X Aa (where it is the same as Ef_) and also in a copy of S3 x [0,1] for each pair on the right in (7.2). (The copies of S3 x [0,1] for distinct pairs will not intersect if one takes care to insure that the embedded [0, 1]'s from different pairs do not intersect.) Now note that the copies of S3 x [0, 1] can be isotoped normally off (S3 X S3)a (push radially outward in the coordinates of Lemma 3.6 so that the resulting embedding of the surgered E~_ intersects (S3 X S3)a in S3 X Aa. And, note that all of the" corners" in the resulting embedding can be readily smoothed so that the result is an embedded submanifold of Z. The following diagram illustrates:
smoothed
(7.4)
The preceding construction can be done at all a E critl (f). The result is a submanifold, Ef'_ C W. Note that Ef'_ has a minimal number of intersections with any (S3 X S3)a C az as its intersection is equal S3 X Aa"a set of det(S) push-off copies of S3 X Pa. Note also that Ef'_ agrees with Ef_ away from {(S3 x S3)a}aE critl(/). c) Tubing near (b, b)
=
Let b bi E critl (f). Consider now the intersection of Ef'_ with (sa x S 3 h: As described in (6.8), 6.9), this intersection is given as (7.5)
S3
X
A'b'
where A~ c S3 is a finite set of points. Each point in A~ comes with a sign (±1), and there are det(S) more plus signs than minus signs. This means that the set A~ can be decomposed as Ab U T b, where the points in Tb can be paired so that the signs in each pair add to zero. It proves useful to take some care in defining the set A b • Here is how: The flow line 1-'(= I-'i) which starts at a and ends at b. The intersection of I-' x I-' with (S3 x S 3 h is a point, Pb x Pb, where Pb E S3. With Pb singled out, note that the intersection of any push-off copy of Yi.i with (S3 x S 3 h contains a unique (S3 x Ji,,) where P~ is the push-off of Pb. (There is a canonical isotopy between the push- off copy and the original (shrink A to zero in (6.12), and under this isotopy, P~ moves to Pb.) In particular, each of the det(S) special copies of Yi.i
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
defines such a point
Pb'
366
and these det(S) points are the points that comprise
Ab. As remarked above, the points in Tb can be paired up so the signs of each pair sum to zero,
(7.6) For each pair {e a , e~} in (7.5), Ef/_ induces orientations on S3 x e a and S3 x e~, and these orientations are opposite. With this understood, one can repeat the tubing construction as described in the previous subsection (see (7.4), (7.5» to surger E~/_ near (b, b) and then isotope the result to obtain an embedded submanifold of Z which intersects (S3 x S3h in S3 x A b. FUrthermore, this last construction can be done simultaneously near all (b, b) for b E crit2(!)' Use E 2 - to denote the resulting submanifold of Z. d) The intersection of E2± and ER,L' The next four subsections describe various properties of E 2 ±. The purpose of this subsection is to prove
LEMMA 7.1. The submanifolds E 2 ± C Z can be constructed as described above so that they do not intersect EL,R of (4.15).
Proof. Let U C W be an open neighborhood of critl (f) and let U ' C W be an open neighborhood of Crit2 (f). Then E2± can be made (as described above) so that they are supported in Z's intersection with (fut(U) x past(U' The latter set is disjoint from ER,L if U and U' are not too big; this is because the flow line 'Y misses 1's critical points. 0
».
e) The intersection of E2± with 6. z : Fix i E {I,· .. ,r} and let a == ai and b == bi. By construction, E 2 - intersects (S3 X S3)a in S3 X Aa. It intersects (S3 x S3h in S3 x Ab • Here, Aa and Ab are sets of det(S) points. Now, there is a natural way to pair the points in Aa with those in Ab and here it is: When p E Aa and p' E Ab are partners, then (P,p) and (P',p') are the endpoints of a transversal component of E 2 - n 6. z which is an embedding of [0, 1]. Such a pairing exists for the following reasonS: If p E Aa, then S3 x p is a component of the intersection of a push-off copy of Yi,i- with (8 3 X 8 3 )a. By design, there exists a unique p' == p'(P) E Ab for which 8 3 x p' is a component of the intersection of the same push- off copy with (8 3 x 8 3)b. This is another definition of the pairing between Aa and A b • To finish the story, remark that the afore-mentioned push-off copy of Yi,i- is (B 1a+ X B~b_) n Z, where B~b_ is a push-off copy of Blb_. And, both p and p'
366
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
lie on a push-off copy, J." C B 1a+ n B~b_' of a chosen flow line, p,(= f..ti), which starts at a and ends at b. Finally, (f..t' X J.") intersects Z transversally in 4z and (f..t' X f..t') n Z is an embedded interval in !::t.. z and a transversal component of ~_ n!::t..z.) With the preceding understood, one sees that
(7.7) where ri is the union of det(S) push-offs (in !::t.. z ) of (f..ti X f..ti) n !::t.. z , and where C C int(!::t.. z ) is compact. Infact, after an (arbitrarilly small) isotopy of the push-offs of the {B1b- : b E Crit2(f)} (with support away from crit(f», one can arrange for the intersection in (7.7) to be transversal. In this case, C is a disjoint union of embedded circles in int(!::t..z).
f) Normal framings. Consider now the normal bundle to E 2 _. Of particular interest in subsequent sections is the fact (see Lemma 7.2, below) that E 2 - has trivial normal bundle. Also of interest is the behavior of a framing of this normal bundle on 8E2 _ and along the components of {ri} from (7.7). Two digressions are required before Lemma 7.2: The first digression defines the notion of a product framing of the normal bundle of a submanifold in Z: This is a framing of the normal bundle with the property that each basis vector is annihilated by the differential of either 7rL or 7rR. The same definition works to define the product framing of a submanifold of W x W. A second digression is required to set the stage for a discussion of the normal framing near 8~_ and {rd. To start, consider i E {I,." ,T}. As usual, let a ai and b bi. Let f..t C ri be a component and define p,r/ by requiring (p, p) f..t n (S3 X S3)a and (p' ,p') J.' n (S3 x S 3h. Associate to J.' the subset of E 2 -
== =
=
(7.8) Note the following: Let p,' C r i be any other component. Then, E 2 - near the J." version of (7.8) is naturally defined as a push-off of E 2 - near the f..t version of (7.8). (Near the J.'-version of (7.8), ~_ is a push-off copy of an open neighborhood of (B 1a+ X Blb_)nZ. And, near the f..t'-version, E 2 _ is a different push-off copy of the same open neighborhood. Infact, each of these push-off copies is constructed as B1a+x (push-off copy of B 1b -). These last observations give a natural method of comparing a given normal framing of E 2- along the f..t and J1.' versions of (7.8). See (6.13). End the second digression.
LEMMA 7.2. The sub manifold ~_ has trivial normal bundle in Z. Furthermore, the normal bundle to E2- has a /raming with the following properties:
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
367
Let i E {I, ... , r} and let J.I. E rio Then the frame is a product frame along (7.8) and it restricts as a constant frame along S3 X P and S3 X p'. Furthermore, let J.I.' c r i be a different component. Then the push-off which identifies E 2 - near the J.I. and J.I.' versions of (7.8) will identify the restriction of the frame to the J.I. and tt' versions of (7.8). Proof. Because E 2 - is constructed by surgering E I _ and the latter is a union of (6.1)'s {Yi,j _ }, the proof starts with a description of the normal bundles to (6.1)'s {Yi,J±}' To begin, consider i,j E {I,,,, ,r} such that i ~ j. Let a ai and b bj. Then Bl a+ X Bu- C W x W has trivial normal bundle with a natural product framing. This implies that Yi,j- in (6.1) has a natural product framing of its normal bundle in Z. (See Lemma 6.1.) Consider now i = j and the induced normal framing of a component of
=
=
D
oYi,i-.
LEMMA 7.3. Let c denote either ai or hi. Let S3 x p be a component of OYi,i- n (S3 x S3)e. Then the product normal framing of Yi,i- in Z induces a product normal framing of S3 x p in (S3 x S3)c and this induced normal
framing is homotopic through product framings to the constant normal framing as defined by choosing a fixed basis for T S3 Ip and using the projection 7T'R to write the normal bundle in question as S3 x TS 3 Ip. Proof. Consider first the case c = ai. Here, p is described by (6.9). Think of the vector v (V2, V3, V4) as a point in the unit 2-sphere#about the origin in the 3-plane spanned by the coordinates (Y2, Y3, Y4)' With this understood, then (6.9) implies that a product normal frame to Yi,i- restricts to (S3 x p) C oYi.ito have the form oZlIe2,e3), where the vectors e2,3 E TS 2 lv, and where OXI is tangent to the Xl axis. In particular, this is a normal frame for S3 x p in (S3 x S3)e. Furthermore, it is homotopic through product frames to the trivial frame because 7T'3(SO(2)) = 1. (In fact, the vectors e2,3 depend only on the YI coordinate. ) Next, consider the case where c = bi: Here, S3 x p is described in (6.11). Think of the vector v (Vl,V2) in (6.11) as a point in the unit circle in the plane X3 = X4 = O. Then, a product normal frame from Yi,i- restricts to (S3 x p) C OYi,i- to have the form (el,oY3,OY4)' where el E TS2 Iv and where 0Y3 ... are tangent to the Y3 and Y4 coordinate axis, respectively. This frame is evidently homotopic through product frames to the constant frame; simply homotope el to a constant length vector. End the digression. D
=
=
To complete the proof of Lemma 7.2, remember that E 2 - was constructed from E 1 - by taking a pair, S3 x e and S3 x e /, in the same boundary component and gluing to them a boundary S3 x I. Here I is an embedded interval in S3 with boundary {e, e'}. According to Lemma 7.3, the induced normal framing on any boundary component is homotopic to the constant framing; and so there is no obstruction to connecting the normal framing on S3 x e to the normal
368
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
framing on 8 3 x e' over the interval 8 3 xI. The following diagram illustrates the procedure:
t
(7.9) The aforementioned argument shows that E 2 - has a framing for its normal bundle. But, the argument above also shows that there is a framing for the normal.bundle of E 2 - which agrees with Lemma 7.3's product framing for E l near (7.8) for any i E {I,··· .r} and any J.t E rio (Remember that near (7.8), E2- and E l - agree.) This last observation plus Lemma 7.3 imply the final two statements of Lemma 7.2. g) Further properties.
Define E 2- as above. Then, define E2+ C Z to be the image of ~_ under the switch map which sends (x, y) C Z to (y, x). The following proposition lists the salient features of E2±: PROPOSITION 7.4. Define E 2 ± as above. These submanifolds can be constructed and oriented so that the following hold: 1) The fundamental classes of E2± obey (6.9). 2) E2± intersect 8Z transversely in 8E2± 9) E2± have empty intersection with Mo x Mo and Ml x M l . 4) If p E crit(f), the intersection of E 2 - with (83 x 8 3 )p is 8 3 X Ap where Ap C 8 3 is a set of det(8) points. Similarly, the intersection of E2+ with (83 x 8 3 )p is Ap X 8 3 • 5) The normal bundle of E 2 - are described by Lemma 7.2 and the normal bundle of E2+ is described by Lemma 7.2 if (7.8) is replaced by its switched version, (p x 8 3 ) U (P' X 8 3 ) U J.t. 6) H2(E2±iZ) = o. 7) E2± have empty intersection with ER,L of (-4.15).
Proof. The only assertion which is not already proved is Assertion 6. To prove Assertion 6 for E 2 - , remark first that E 1 _ has vanishing H2. (See Proposition 6.4.) Then, note that E 2 - is constructed from E 1 -, by gluing various
HOMOLOGy COBORDISM
369
copies of S3 x I onto boundary (S3 x SO)'s. This sort of surgery will decrease HO or increase HI, but it can not change H2. 0
8 The third pass at E±. The submanifolds E 2± of the preceding section intersect the diagonal as described in (7.7), with C C int(~z) being a finite union of embedded circles. The purpose of this subsection is to modify some number of like oriented, push-off copies of E 2 ± so that the result, E 3 ±, intersects Ilz as in (7.7) but with C = 0. To be precise, consider: PROPOSITION 8.1. There are oriented submanifolds (with boundary) E 3 ± C Z with the following properties: 1) E3+ is the image of E 3 - under the switch map on Z sending (x, y) to (y,x).
2) 3) 4) 5)
6)
7)
8)
The fundamental classes [E3±l are equal to N [E1±l for some integer N ~ 1. Here, [El±l are described by (6.3) and Lemma 6.3. E3± have empty intersection with Mo x Mo and MI x MI. E3± have empty intersection with EL,R of (4.15). If p E crit(f), then the intersection of E 3- with (S3 x S3)p has the form S3 x Ap, where Ap is a set of N points. Similarly, the intersection of E3+ with (S3 x S3)p is Ap X S3. E 3 - n Ilz = U'=l r, , where r, c Ilz is as follows: There is a flow line 1" which starts at and ends at b,. With the canonical identification of Ilw with W understood, r, is the union of N like oriented, disjoint, push-oil copies of a closed interval, I elL'. And, each of these N push-oils of I starts in (Aa x Aa) n Ilz and ends in (Ab x Ab) n Il z . Both E3± have trivial normal bundles in Z. The normal bundle of E 3has a framing, (, which restricts to a product normal framing on a neighborhood of (U'=l r i) U {S3 X Ap }PE crit(f). Furthermore, this framing ( restricts to {S3 x Ap}PE crit(f) as a constant framing. The normal bundle to E3+ in Z is described by applying the switch map to the preceding. H2(E3±; Q) O.
a,
=
(Compare with Proposition 7.4.) The rest of this section is devoted to the construction of E 3 _. The first subsection below (8a) introduces some of the basic tools. Subsections 8b - 8e apply the tools from 8a to the proof of Proposition 8.1. The final subsections, 8f - 8h, contain the proofs of three propositions that are stated in 8a. a) Deleting circles.
In comparing Propositions 8.1 and 7.4, one sees that the essential difference between E 2 - and E 3 - is that the intersection of both are described by a form of (7.7), but that E 3 - n Ilz has no compact components. With this understood, remark that E 3 - will be constructed from some number of like oriented, disjoint,
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
370
push-off copies of E2- by surgery, with the point of the surgery to eliminate the unwanted compact components of the intersection with ~z. Of course, this must be done so as not to destroy any of desired properties of ~_-i.e., Assertions 2-5 and 7, 8 of Proposition 8.1. In abstraction, the problem is to remove circles which are components of the transversal intersection between two four dimensional submanifolds inside a seven dimensional submanifold. Here is the model: MODEL: Let X be a connected, oriented 7-manifold, and let A, B C X be oriented, dimension 4 submanifolds which intersect transversally. Let 0 C X be an open set and let 0' == (A n B) n O. Suppose that 0' is compact; a disjoint union of oriented, embedded circles.
(8.1) Given the model, here are the problems: PROBLEM 1: Find an oriented, dimension 4 submanifold A' C X with the following properties: 1) A' n (B n 0) 0. 2) A - (A n 0) A' - (A' nO). 3) [A] [A'] in H4(X, X - 0).
= =
=
PROBLEM 2: Find A' as in Problem 1 with H2(A'; Q) PROBLEM 3: Assuming that A - (A
= O.
n 0) has trivial normal bundle, find
A' solving Problems 1 and 2 with trivial normal bundle. And, given, apriori, a frame (for A' as normal bundle over A- (AnO), extend (over A' as a normal bundle framing. (8.2) These three problems will arise a number of times in the subsequent two sections and will be solved under various assumptions on A, B and O. The solution to Problem 1 begins with the following basic surgery result: PROPOSITION 8.2. Let X, A, B, and 0 be as described in (8.1) and in Problem 1 of (8.2). If the class, [0'], of 0' is zero in HI (B n 0; Z), then there is a solution to Problem 1.
Problem 2 can be solved when extra conditions are added:
8.3. Let X,A,B, and 0 be as in (8.1) and Problems 1 and (8.2). Assume that [O']=OinHI(BnOjZ). The map H~omp(Aj Q) -+ H 3 (A; Q) is injective. And, assume either HI(O'jQ) -+ HI(AjQ) is injective, or else assume B n 0 is connected and [0'] '# 0 in HI (Aj Q), Then, there exists A' C X which solves Problems 1 and is such that H 2(A / j Q) ~ H2(A; Q). Thus, Problem 2 is solved by A' if H2(A; Q) = O.
PROPOSITION
2 of a} b} c} d)
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
371
Remark that Condition b of this proposition will be true automatically if
A n 0 is the interior of a manifold with boundary, A, whose boundary, 8A, obeys H2(8Aj Q) = O. To solve Problem 3 of (8.2), it is necessary to digress first to define a '1./2 valued invariant for homologically trivial, normally framed circles in an oriented 4-manifold with even intersection form. (This is invariant is well known to 4manifold topologists.) To start the digression, let B denote the oriented 4-manifold. To say that B's intersection form is even is to say that the self- intersection number of any embedded, orient able surface in B is an even number. (Note that B need not be compact.) Let u C B be the finite union of disjointly embedded, oriented circles which represents the trivial element in HI (Bj '1.). The invariant in question, XB,u(-), assigns ± 1 to the various homotopy classes of framings of the normal bundle to u in B. (If u is a single circle, then there are precisely two normal framings up to homotopy since 1fl(SO(3» ~ '1./2.) To calculate XB,u, first choose an oriented surface with boundary, ReB, such that 8R = u. An oriented frame (== (el,e2,ea) for the normal bundle to u in B' will be called an adapted frame when the vector ea is the inward pointing normal vector to R along 8R. LEMMA 8.4. Let B, u and R be as described above. Let' be an oriented, normal frame for u C B. Then, is homotopic to an adapted frame.
Proof. On a component, C, of (J, two normal frames differ by a map from SI to SO(3). With this understood, note that 1fl(SO(3» ~ Z/2, so there are two homotopy classes of normal frames along C. Two normal frames for which ea is the inward normal to R differ by a map from SI to SO(3) which factors through a map from SI to SO(2) C SO(3). With the preceding understood, the lemma follows because the induced homomorphism from 1fl (SO(2» to 1fl (SO(3» is 0 surjective.
The important feature of an adapted normal frame is that an adapted normal frame allows one to make an unambiguous definition of the mod(2) selfintersection number, (R· Rh, of R. Here is how: Take a section of R's normal bundle in B which agrees with el on 8R. Perturb the section away from 8R so that it has transverse intersection with the zero section. Then, count the number of such intersection points mod(2). One can also define R . R E Z by counting intersections with sign, but only the mod(2) intersection number is required for the definition of XB,u' LEMMA 8.5. If two adapted frames are homotopic in the space of all normal /rames for u, then the corresponding values of (R . Rh agree.
Proof. Adapted, normal frames to a given component C C u can be found which differ by a degree one map to 80(2) and are such that the corresponding
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
372
push-off's of R are identical save for a small open set near a point in O. With this understood, one need only check the lemma for the case where R is a planar 2-disk in See, e.g Section 1.3 of [7]. 0
r.
It follows from Lemmas 8.4 and 8.5 that the surface R defines a map, XB ,tT (.), from the set of homotopy classes of normal frames of u C B to '1-/2. By definition, XB,tT(() assigns to, the number (R· Rh that is computed by using an adapted frame which is homotopic to ,. Consider the dependence of XB ,tT (-) on the surface R:
LEMMA 8.6. Suppose that B has even intersection pairing in its second homology. Then XB ,tT (-) is the same for all surfaces R bounding u.
Proof. Let ( be a framing of the normal bundle to u in B. Let R 1 ,2 C B be a pair of surfaces which bound u. The task is to show that Rl . Rl = R2 . R2 mod(2). One can assume, with no loss of generality, that ( is adapted to R 1 • Since 1fl (8 2 ) ::::l 0, the surface R2 can be isotoped, with u fixed, so that e3 is the outward pointing normal vector to R 2. With this understood, Rl and R2 can be joined together along u to obtain a 0 1 immersion of a closed, oriented surface, R, in B. (The lack of smoothness occurs across u.) The surface R may not be embedded because Rl and R 2 , though individually immersed, may intersect each other. Any way, with a small isotopy of Rl (away from 8Rt), the jntersections of Rl with R2 can be made transverse. An embedded surface in B has a well defined self-intersection number. An immersed surface has a well defined intersection number also. In this case,
(B.3) The number in (8.3) is the intersection number for the embedded surface that is obtained by resolving all of the double points of R. Given that (B.3) is the self intersection number of an embedded surface in B, the assumptions in Lemma B.5 require that (8.3) be an even number. Thus Rl . Rl = R2 . R2 mod(2) as required. (Here is how to resolve a double point of an immersed surface: In local coordinates the transveral intersection of the two sheets of the surface is described by the zeros in C2 = r of the equation (B.4)
Zl Z2
= o.
The resolution of the intersection point replaces the solution to (B.4) with the solution to the equation Zl Z2 = E. Here, E E C is small but not zero.) 0 With the invariant XB,u(') of Lemma 8.6 understood, end the digression. fiyr,; i~ " IlQlution to {8.2)'s third problem:
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
373
PROPOSITION 8.7. Let X,A,B, and 0 be as in {8.1} and Problems 1 and f2 of {8.2}.- Assume that Conditions a, b and either cor d of Proposition 8.9 hold. Suppose that B has even intersection form and that A c X has a trivial normal bundle. Let ( be a given frame for A's normal bundle in X. 1) The restriction of ( to (J' (AnB) nO defines a normal frame, (" e I", to (J' in B.
=
2) 9}
=
ffxB,,,«(,,) = 0, then there is a solution, A' c X, to Problem 1 such that the normal frame ( over A - (A n 0) extends over A'. Thus, if H2(Aj Q) = 0, then A' solves Problems 1-9 of {8.2}.
The proofs for Propositions 8.2, 8.3 and 8.7 are given in Subsections 8f-8h.
b) The proof of Proposition 8.1. Let E~ _ denote the disjoint union of some number N ~ 1 disjoint copies of E2 _. The goal is to apply Propositions 8.2,8.3 and 8.7 to remove the compact (circle) components, C, of the intersection of E~_ with t!.z. With this goal understood, Proposition 8.2, 8.3 and 8.7 will be considered with the following identifications: Take
(8.5)
X = int(Z) ,
A
=
int(E~_),
B = int(t!.z).
Take 0 to be the compliment in int(Z) of the closure of a regular neighborhood of
(8.6)
=
Here, -, {t. ({ti x {ti) n t!.z with {ti as in Section 7b. This regular neighborhood should contain {ri} in (7.7) of E 2 - nt!.z, and it should also contain the push-off copies of {ri}which comprise the interval components of E~_n t!.z. Needless to say, 0 should contain the compact components of E~_ n int(Z). With this choice of X, A, B and 0, the assertions of Proposition 8.1 will follow from Proposition 7.4 if the hypothesis of Propositions 8.2, B.3 and B.7 can be verified for a suitable N. (Remember that E~_ is comprised of N pushoff copies of E 2 _.) Note: With regard to Proposition 8.7, the normal framing, (, of any push- off copy of E 2 - c EL should be the normal framing of E 2 which is described by Lemma 7.2. Subsections Bc-8e verify that there exists N ~ 1 for which the hypothesis of these three propositions are satisfied. 0
c) Removing circles in E~_
n t!.z
•
The purpose of this subsection is to verify that there exists an integer Nl ;::: 1 which is such that the hypothesis of Proposition 8.1 can be verified when E~_ is any multiple of Nl push-off copies of E 2 _. The discussion begins with a digression to study the first homology of B nO. (Equations (8.5) and (8.6) define B and 0.) The projection 7rL (or 7rR) identifies
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
374
B with int(W). This projection identifies B n 0 with the compliment in W of U crit(J) U (Ur=lIJ.i) U 'Y, where 'Y is the How line a regular neighborhood of in 4 of Definition 3.1. Now consider (1 C B n 0, a finite union of embedded, oriented circles. After a small isotopy, the circles in (1 can be arranged to have empty intersection with the descending disks from crit2(J). With this isotopy understood, the pseudo-gradient How will isotope the circles in (1 so that the resulting circles, (11, lies in the open submanifold W3 == {x E W : 3/4 < f(x) < I}. That is, f«(11) is larger than any critical value of f. The pseudo-gradient How defines a diffeomorphism between W3 and M1 x (3/4, 1). By assumption, M1 is a rational homology sphere, which means that the homology class, [(1d, of (11 is zero in H 1 (W3 - W3 n 'Yi Q). (Note that W3 n'Y = PI x (3/4,1).) Alternately, one can conclude that
aw
(8.7) for some integer Nl ~ 1. This means that Nl push-off copies of (11 bounds an embedded surface in W3 - W3 n 'Y. (Orient all Nl push-off copies of (11 identically. ) Thus, Nl push-off copies of (1 will bound an embedded surface in B n O. End the digression. To verify Proposition 8.2's hypothesis for E~_, consider the discussion of the preceding subsection where (1 is equal to 0 in (7.7). This choice of (1 determines the integer Nl in (8.7). If Nl = 1 in (8.7), then Proposition 8.1 can be directly applied to A == ~_ so that the result, A', intersects l:l.z C Z as described by (7.7) but with 0 = 0. However, the case NI > 1 in (8.7) can not be ruled out. In the case that N1 > 1, let m ~ 1 and let E~_ denote the disjoint union mNt disjoint, push-off copies of E 2 -, all oriented as E 2 -. (Use the normal framing of Section 7f when making these push-offs.) With E~_ understood, observe that (8.8)
where 0' in (8.8) is, by design, m N1 disjoint, push-off copies of 0 from (7.7). In (8.8), each ri is the union of mNI det(S) push-offs (in l:l.z) of IJ.i == l:l.z n (JJi x IJ.i). By construction, the homology class of 0' in H t (B n OJ Z) is zero. (Because [0'] = mNt [C] and the class of 0 is Nt-torsion.) With the preceding understood, then Proposition 8.1 can be applied with X, A, B and 0 as described by (8.5) and (8.6) so long as the number N is a multiple of Nl in (8.7). d) Constraining H2.
Proposition 8.2 constructs a submanifold A' C Z from some number N > 1 push-off copies of E 2 _. (Here, N must be a multiple of Nl from (8.7).) This
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
375
A' is constructed so that it misses EL,R and a form like ~_ near 8Z. And, the intersection of A' with liz is the union Ui=tri, where r i is the union of N det(S) push-off copies of the path -1'I.• H Proposition B.l's E 3 - is this A', then A' will have to have vanishing 2nd cohomology. That is, A' must be a solution to Problem 2 in (B.2). Proposition B.3 will be used to solve Problem 2 in the case at handj this is the subject of the present subsection. The task here is to verify that the conditions of Proposition B.2 can be met for A E~_ n X with E~_ some number, N, of like- oriented, push-off copies of E 2_. (Note that Assertion 6 of Proposition 7.4 asserts that H2(Aj Q) = 0.) Taking Conditions a - c in order, remark that the previous subsection has established that Condition a is satisfied when N is divisable by a certain integer (N1 of(B.7». Condition b is satisfied because of Assertion 4 of Proposition 7.4. That is, A has closure a manifold with boundary, and the boundary is a number of copies of S3. Since H2(S3) = 0, the required injectivity holds. Condition c is established by the following lemma:
=
LEMMA B.B. Let C denote the union of the compact components of ~_nliz. The inclusion of C into E 2 - induces a monomorphism from HI (Cj 1'.) into HI (E2 - j 1'.).
Proof. Remark that ~_ is obtained via ambient surgery (in Z) on various embedded (SO x B 4 )'s in disjoint unions of {Yi,i- : i ~ j E {I,··· ,r}} (see (7.3». As remarked earlier, Yi,i- can be viewed as the result of ambient surgery (in F- 1(I/B)) on various embedded (SO x B4)'S in the 4-sphere which is the intersection ofthe descending 5-disk from (ai, bi) with F-I(l/B). For a given So x B4, the SO x {OJ is a pair of algebraically cancelling intersections of said descending 4-sphere with the ascending 4-disk from some (ai, ak) or (b k , bj ) in crit4(F). Thus, E 2 - is obtained from a disjoint union of embedded 4- spheres in F-I(I/B) by ambient surgery on embedded (SO x B 4 )'s. It follows from the preceding that Hl(E~_) is a summand of some number of 1'.'s. And, it follows that a union, 0', of oriented, embedded circles in E 2 - injects its first homology into Hl (E2 - j Q) if: 1) An added I x S3 which intersects 0' has intersection number ±1 with {point} x S3 . 2) Each component of 0' intersects at least one I X S3. (8.9)
In the present circumstances,
0'
is the union of the compact components of
n D..z. To understand 0', remember that E'l- is constructed from E 1 - by ambient surgery. The reader can check that this surgery is disjoint from any compact components of El- n D..z. Indeed, the surgery from E 1 - to E 2 - takes
E~_
376
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
place on push-off copies of {Yi,i-}i=l' but the compact components of El-n.6. z are the components of the various push-offs of Ui<j(Yi,j- n .6. z ). Thus, the compact components of E 2 - n .6. z are of two types: A Type 1 component is a compact component from E 1 - n.6. z . And, a Type 2 component is created by the surgery which changed E 1- into &_. (The latter are made in the surgery on the various push-off copies of {Yi,i- H=l') To understand the Type 1 components, use 7rL or 7rR to identify .6. w with W and this intersection is identitified with B 1a+ n B1b-. (Here, a = ai and b = bj.) To see the latter, start with Ba+ n Bb-. This is a disjoint union of flow lines which start at a and end at b. The surgery which changes Bb- to B1beffects the intersection with B a+. The effect is to surger the flow lines near a. See the following picture:
(8.10)
A similar picture occurs near b when Ba+ is surgered to produce B 1a+. The resulting intersection B 1a+ n B lb - differs from Ba+ n B b- in that the ends of the flow lines in the latter have been tied together near a and near b to produce a compact intersection with some number, ni,j, of components. (This 'fti,j is at least one, but no more than half of the number of components in Ba+ n Bb-.)
377
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
See the following (very schematic) picture: surgery to Bb-
) Ba.
Surgery to Ba+
11111111
(8.11)
= B16-n B a+
The effect of the preceding picture for the intersection with tlz of one pushoff copy of Yi,i- is as follows: Each surgery ties together an end of one flow line (for f's pseudo-gradient) in tlz with the nearby end of a se~ond flow line in tlz the tie being across the associated I x S3. (Here, the canonical identification of tlw with W is taken implicitly.) See below: Added by surgery
(8.12)
Thus, each copy of Yi,i- in E 2 - (for i < j) produces ni,i components in u. And, (8.9) is satisfied for each such copy. As (8.9) is obeyed for each copy of Yi,i-' and as the surgeries on the different copies of Yi,i are independent, it follows that (8.9) is satisfied by the set of all Type 1 components. That is, (8.9) is satisfied by the union of the compact components of E 1 - n tl z . Consider now the Type 2 components. To understand these components, remember that E 2 - was constructed from E 1 - by ambient surgery on various push-off copies of {Yi,i-}' The surgeries do not connect a push-off of Yi,i- with one of l'i,j- if j # i.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
378
Fix i E { 1, . .. ,r}. The union of push-off copies of a given Yi, i intersects Llz in the union of the corresponding push-offs of the set of flow lines which is Ba+ n B b_. (Use a ai and b bi). As far as these copies of Yi,i- are concerned, E 2 - is constructed from them by surgery on embedded (SO x B4)'s. The result surgery changes the afore mentioned intersection with Ll z ; each such surgery near (a, a) ties the ends near (a, a) of two of flow line copies across the added I x S3. There is a similar effect near (b, b). See (8.12). It follows from the preceding picture that (8.9) holds for all of the Type 1 flow lines also, and since the added (I x S3)'S which effect Type 1 flow lines are disjoint from Type 2 flow lines, the lemma is established in total. 0
=
=
e) Prescribed framing. The purpose of this subsection is to establish that the conditions of Proposition 8.7 can be met for X,A,B and 0 of (8.5) and (8.6) if the number N (of copies of E 2 - in E~_) is an even multiple of the integer Nl in (8.7). Here, the framing ( of the normal bundle in Z to each push-off copy of E 2 - c E~_ is described by Lemma 7.2. To begin, observe first that B has vanishing rational homology in dimension 2, so the condition on B's intersection form is trivially satisfied. Also, as A is some number of push-off copies of E 2 -, it has trivial normal bundle in Z. Next, remember that an integer Nl > 1 has already been found which has the following properties: If N 2': 1 is divisible by Nl and if A is taken to be N pushoff copies of E 2 - (all like oriented), then a is the boundary of an embedded, oriented surface ReB. With the frame a as described above, let (IT lIT' The final question is the value of XB,IT«(IT)' Here is the answer: If N is an even multiple of N 1, then XB,IT «IT) = O. This assertion follows from the following lemma:
=(
LEMMA 8.9. Let X be an oriented 4-manifold with even intersection form. Let ai, a2 C X be compact, oriented, embedded l-manifolds which are disjoint. Let (1 and (2 be normal frames for al,2, respectively. Let a = al U a2 and let e by the normal frame for a which is given by ( IlTl,2= (1,2, Then XB,IT«() XB,lTl«I) + XB,1T2«(2).
=
Proof. By assumption, al bounds an embedded, oriented surface, Rl eX. Likewise, a2 bounds a similar surface, R 2. If Rl and R2 are in general position, then R2 n a2 = 0 and vice- versa. Meanwhile, Rl will intersect R2 transversally in a finite set of points. Resolve the double points in Rl U R2 (as in (8.4» to obtain a compact, oriented, embedded surface, ReX, with boundary a. Now, no generality is lost by assuming that (1,2 are adapted frames for R 1 ,2, respectively. In this case, ( will be an adapted frame for R. Then, R· R is given by (8.3), and the lemma follows. 0
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
379
f) Proof of Proposition 8.2. The proof starts with a digression for some constructions on a neighborhood of B in X. To start the digression, define N -+ B to be the normal bundle to B in X. Fix an exponential map,
e:N-+X
(8.13)
which maps N I., into A. Put a smooth fiber metric on N with the property that e embeds the set
(8.14)
N' == {v E N:I v
1< 2}
onto a neighborhood N C X of B. Agree now to identify N with N' using e. Introduce the 2-sphere bundle 8 -+ B,
(8.15)
8 == {v E N
:1 v 1= I}.
Identify 8 with its image by e in X. This 8 is the boundary of a tubular neighborhood of B in X,
(8.16)
T == {v EN
:1 v I~ I}.
End the digression. The proof proper of Proposition 8.2 starts by remarking that u, by assumption, is the boundary of a smooth, oriented, embedded surface (with boundary), ReB n O. Find such an R for which int(R) has no compact components. Because u has co dimension 3 in B, one can require that int(R) nu = 0. (The local model for R near u is given by taking u to be the line Xl = X2 = X3 = 0 in r, and R the half plane Xl = X2 = 0 with X3 ~ 0.) Let 8 R == 8 IR . This is a smooth oriented 4-manifold (with boundary) which is embedded in X. The boundary of this 4-manifold is 8., == 8 I.,. Note that 8., C A is the boundary of T., == T I." the embedded image of u x B3 onto a tubular neighborhood of u in A. With the preceding understood, introduce the following surgery on A:
(8.17)
A~
== (A - int(T.,)) U SR.
Note that A~ C X is a Co embedding of a smooth, ori~nted manifold; the embedding has a corner at StT where SR and A - int(TtT) overlap. See the
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
380
following picture:
~///~R
"0'
(B.18) A neighborhood of this corner of A~ is embedded in TR. Smooth A~ in TR along the corner, and one obtains a smoothly submanifold, A' C X which solves Problem 1 in (8.2). Indeed, the first two requirements are met by construction. As for the third, remark that [T IR] defines a 5-dimensional cycle in 0 whose boundary is [A']- [A]. 0
g) Proof of Proposition B.3.
Consider first the proof of the proposition under the Assumption a-c. Let A' be as described above (see (8.17)). Then, H2(A') can be computed using the following homology exact sequences for the pairs (A,Tu) and (A',SR):
(B.19)
1) 2)
Hl(A) -+ Hl(Tu) -+ H2(A,Tu) -+ H2(A) -+ H2(Tu) . Hl(A') -+ Hl(SR) -+ H2(A ' ,SR) -+ H2(A') -+ H 2(SR) -+ H 3 (A' ,SR)'
(Use rational coefficients please.) In Sequence 1, the first arrow is surjective because of Assumption c. And, H2(Tu) :::: 0 because Tu is a tubular neighborhood of a disjoint union of circles. Thus (B.20)
To analyze the second sequence of (8.19), note that its first arrow is surjective. This is because R is path connected, thus forcing 8 R to be a topologically trivial 2-sphere bundle. For the same reason, H2 (8R) :::: H2 (aTu). Meanwhile, excision identifies H* (A' ,8R) :::: H* (A, Tu). Thus, with (8.20), the second sequence in (8.19) implies
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
381
(8.21) Poincare' duality plus Assumptions b and c of Proposition 8.3 imply that the last arrow in (8.21) is surjective, thus establishing an isomorphism between H2(A) and H 2 (A'). Now consider Proposi~ion 8.3 with Assumptions a, b and c'. Remark here that when u is connected (i.e. just one circle), then Assumption c' implies Assumption c. With this fact understood, here is the task ahead: Under Assumptions a, band c', find an ambient (in 0) surgery on A so that the result, A, has the following properties: (8.22)
1) [AJ = [A] in H4(X, X - OJ Z). 2) H2(A.) ~ H2(A). 3) H:omp(A) -+ H 3 (A.) is injective. 4) A intersects B inside 0 in a single compact component which is not trivial in HI (A, Q) but which bounds in B n O. A solution to (8.22) will validate Proposition 8.3. Here is an algorythm for constructing A: To begin choose a pair of components, Cl ,2 C u. Fix Pl E Cl and P2 E C2 • By assumption, B n 0 is path connected, so there is a path in B (a smoothly embedded interval), T, which starts at Pl and ends at P2. Make sure that int(T) has empty intersection with A. Also, arrange T so that it is not tangent to A along its boundary. The choice of PI as the starting point and P2 as the ending point orients T. Let V -+ T denote the normal bundle to T in B. This is an oriented 3-plane bundle over T. Note that TCl IPI C V IPI ~ IR3 and also TC2 C V Ip2~ R3 are oriented lines. As 8 2 is path connected, there is an oriented, dimension 1 sub-bundle Va C V whose restriction to PI is TCI and whose restriction to P2 is the line TC2 , but oriented in reverse. With Vo understood, remark that Va EB N -+ T is an oriented 4-plane subbundle of the normal bundle to T in O. Also note that this bundle restricts to PI and as T A IP1' and it restricts to P2 as the 4- plane T A 1P2' but with its orientation reversed. The normal bundle to T in X is isomorphic to V EB N. Fix an exponential map eT : V EBN -+ X which restricts to N as e in (8.13), which restricts to map V into B, and which maps VO IP1,2 into Cl ,2, respectively. (Thus, e.,. Iv is an exponential map for T in B.) Put a fiber metric on the bundle Va EB N such that e.,. embeds the subspace of vectors v with norm less than 2. Let 8 C Vo EB N denote the radius 1 sphere bundle, and identify 8 with its embedded image under e T • Let T C Yo EB N denote the radius one, 3-ball bundle .. Identify T with its embedded image under e T • Note that T IPI is a tubular neighborhood in A of PI, while T 1P2 is a tubular neighborhood of P2 in A.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
382
Now define the following surgery on A:
(8.23)
Ao
=
(A - int(T IPI UT Ip2)) U 8.
This is a Co embedding of a smooth manifold, AI, in X. Here, the embedding is smooth away from 8 IPI W8 Ip2' where there is a corner. Near this corner, Ao is embedded in Vo Ell N. Smooth out the corner in Vo Ell N and the result is an embedding of Al into X:
, ,
- - - rA
(8.24) With Al understood, consider its properties with respect to (8.22): First, the homology classes of Al and A agree are equal in H4(X,X - 0). This is because Al and Ao define the same class and the 5-manifold T defines a cycle in 0 with boundary [Ao] - [A]. Second, H2(Al) = 0, because Al has been obtained from A by surgery on an embedded 8 0 x B4 (i.e. T IPI UT Ip2). Third, H~omp(Al) ~ H3(At} is injective. Both are either equal to their A counter-parts, or are obtained from their A counter parts by the addition of 1 generator which is dual to the 3-sphere 8 IPI. (Prove this with Meyer-Vietoris.) Fourth, the intersection of Al with B in 0 has one less component then that of A with B in O. This is because the surgery from A to Al has surgered C1 to C 2 by removing an embedded 8 0 x Bl from C 1 UC2 (i.e. (TnVo) IPI u(TnVO)Pl); the missing 8 0 x Bl is replaced by 8 n Vo. (See (8.24).) Note that the homology class in HI (B n 0) of 0"1 == Al n B n 0 is the same as that of 0" == An B n O. Indeed, 0"1 defines the same homology class as 0"0 == Ao n B n 0, and Tn Vo as a 2-cycle in B n 0 has boundary [0"0] - [0"1]. If 0" had only two components to start with, then set A == Al and stop, because (8.22) has just been verified for this A. If 0" had more than two components, iterate the preceding procedure by renaming Al == A and 0"1 == 0". The iteration stops with A which obeys (8.22). 0
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
383
h) Proof of Proposition 8.7. The construction of A' from A for solving Problem 1 (and Problem 2) of (8.2) via Propositions 8.2 and 8.3 is described in the preceding two subsections. The construction involves two types of ambient surgeries in X. The first type of surgery gives the smoothing, AI, of Ao in (8.23). The second type of surgery gives the smoothing, A', of the ~ in (8.17), (8.18). Type 1: Extending frames for surgery on SO x B4. Consider the smoothing, At, of Ao in (8.23). Let U c A be an open neighborhood of T Ipl uT 11'2. 0
LEMMA 8.lD. Let ( be a normal frame for A in X. Then there is a normal frame for Al in X which agrees with ( on A - u.
Type 1: Extending frames over surgery on Sl x B3. The assumption here is that A' is obtained from A by smoothing the surgery A~ in (8.17). (See (8.18) too.) Let ( be a normal frame for A in X, and let U C A be a neighborhood of T.,.. LEMMA 8.11. The normal frame ( on A - U extends as a normal frame over the smoothing, A', of (8.17) if and only if ( I.,. is homotopic to an adapted frame for which (R . R) mod(2) = o.
H B has even intersection pairing, then according to Lemma 8.6, the Z/2 number (R· R) mod(2) is the invariant XB,.,.«( I.,.). Thus, Lemmas 8.10 and 8.11 with the constructions in the two preceding subsections prove Proposition 8.7. The remainder of this section is occupied with the proofs of the preceding two lemmas. Proof of Lemma 8.10. The strategy is to first define a normal frame, (1, for int(S) in X. Having done so, the final step proves that there are no obstructions to connecting (I to ( on A - U. To construct (1, first fix a normal frame, (e1' e2, e3), for the normal bundle (V) of Tin B. One can arrange such a frame so that e3 is tangent to the sub-line yo. Then, (e1,e2) orient VIVo. Use the exponential map er : V EB N -+ X to identify a neighborhood of the zero section of V $ N with a neighborhood of T in X. With this identification understood, then the normal bundle to int(S) in X is spanned by (I == (e1,e2,e~), where e~ E T(Vo EB N) Is restricts to the fiber over x ETas the inward pointing normal vector to S I., in (Vo EB N) I.,. With (1 understood, consider connecting (I to, near as. To make such a connection, introduce the tangent vector, v to T. Let lL denote a lift of v to VEBN. At PI or P2, the triple (e1, e2, v) defines a normal frame. for A in X. The normal frame ( for A in X can be homotoped inside U so that it agrees with (et,e2'v) at PI and P2 and equals (el,e2,lU on a neighborhood, U' , of T Ipt.2
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
384
with compact support in U. Thus, 2/3 of the normal f,rame (, i.e. (el,e2), have been extended over A 1 • The compliment in the normal bundle to A1 of the 2-plane span of (el, e2) is an oriented line bundle which is framed by!l. on U - U' and by e~ on int(S). There is no obstruction to framing this compliment by a frame which agrees with !l. on U - U' and with e~ on the compliment in S of an apriori specified neighborhood of as. 0 Proof of Lemma 8.11. The strategy for extending (on A - U as a normal frame for A' will be to construct a normal frame, (1, for SR in X, and then consider whether ( and (1 can be joined. To construct (1, introduce the normal 2-plane bundle, V, to R in B. Since R is oriented, V is an oriented bundle and so trivial because inteR) has no compact components. Let el,e2 be a frame for V. Note that V E9 N -+ R is the normal bundle to R in X. Choose an exponential map eR : V E9 N -+ X which restricts to N as e in (8.13). Use eR to identify a neighborhood of the zero section in the bundle V E9 N with a neighborhood of RinX. Let e3 be the inward pointing normal vector to SR C TR eN IR. Then the triple (1 == (el, e2, e3) span the normal bundle to S R in X. With the normal frame for S R understood, consider its extension to a normal frame for A on the compliment in U of a neighborhood U' of Tq. For this purpose, introduce v to denote the inward pointing normal vector field to R along u. Lift v to a vector field !l. on (V E9 N)q. Since A near u is identified by (8.13) with a neighborhood of the zero section of N Iq, it follows that a normal frame for A near u is given by the triple (e1e2,!l.). Furthermore, there is no obstruction to joining this frame on the compliment of a neighborhood U' of Tq with the frame (1 == (e1, e2, e3) on the interior of SR. (The pair (e1, e2) define 2/3 of the extension, and Q and e3 define the same orientation for the complimentary line.) With the preceding understood, then one can conclude that the normal frame ( extends from A - U to A' if the restriction of ( to u is homotopic to the normal frame (el, e2,!l.). Now the latter frame is an adapted frame and, by construction, R· R = 0 for (e1,e2,!l.). Thus, (Iq is homotopic to (e1,e2,u) if and only if (Iq is homotopic to an adapted frame for which the corresponding R . R is even. (See Lemma 8.5.) 0
9 The fourth pass at E±. The submanifold E3- of the preceding section intersects Az as described by Assertion 6 of Proposition 8.1. Let f) : Z -+ Z denote the switch map which sends (x,y) to (y,x). Since E 3 +. = f)(E3_), the intersections of E 3 - with Az are also intersections of E 3 + with A z . Unfortunately, there may be compact components to E 3 - n E 3 + which occur in Z - A z . Such extra components are troublesome and must be eliminated, and their elimination is the goal of this section. As will be seen, surgery on E 3 ± will result in oriented submanifolds (with hnlln~nJY1 ~~+ ~ which have the following properties:
[
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
385
PROPOSITION 9.1. There are oriented, embedded submanifolds (with boundary) E4± C Z with the following properties: 1) There is an open neighborhood U C Z of Az U az such that E4+ n U and E4- n U are images of each other under the switch map on Z. 2) The fundamental classes [E4±] are equal to N [El±] for some integer N ~ 1. Here, [El±] are described by (6.3) and Lemma 6.3. 3) E4± have empty intersection with Mo x Mo and Ml X MI. 4) E4± have empty intersection with EL,R of (4.15). 5) If p E crit(f), then the intersection of E4- with (S3 x S3)p has the form S3 x Ap, where Ap is a set of N points. Similarly, the intersection of E4+ with (S3 x S3)p is Ap X S3.
n Az
= ui=lri, where ri C
!:l.z is as follows: There is a flow line and ends at bi' With the canonical identification of Aw with W understood, r i is the union of N like oriented, disjoint, push-off copies of a closed interval, I C /Ji. And, each of these N pushofJs of I starts in (All X Aa) n!:l.z and ends in (Ab x Ab) n!:l.z. Likewise, EH n!:l.z = Ui=lr,. 7) E 4- n E4+ = Ui'=l r~, where r~ C Z is the union of r i with N - 1 like oriented, push-off copies of r i in Z - !:l.z. 8) Both E4± have trivial normal bundles in Z. The normal bundle of E4has a framing, (, which restricts to a product normal framing on a neighborhood 0/ (Ui'=lri) U {S3 x Ap}pE crit(f). Furthermore, this framing ( restricts to {S3 x Ap}PE crit(f) as a constant framing. The normal bundle to EH in Z has a framing which restricts to EH n U as the image 0/ ( under the switch map. 9) H2(E4±; Q) = O.
6)
E4-
/Ji which starts at
ai
(Compare with Proposition 8.1. The only essential change is in E 4 - n E H • But note that the integer N, the points {Ap} and the line segments {rd which appear here may be different from those which appear in Proposition 8.1.) The rest of this section is devoted to the construction of E4±.
a) E 3 - n E 3+ on Z - Az. Isotope E3+ in Z - (!:l.z U aZ) so that its intersection on Z - !:l.z with E 3 - is transversal. (Still use E 3+ to denote the after isotopy submanifold.) This intersection is now a finite union of disjoint, embedded, oriented circles, a, with N - 1 like oriented, push-off copies of {ri } in Z - !:l.z. (These pusho1£s of {ri} are disjoint from a.) There is a natural inclination to remove the circle components, a, by apply the techniques from the previous section (Propositions 8.2, 8.3 and 8.7). However, either
(9.1) or not; but [aJ is never non-trivial in one and trivial in the other. (Because, before perturbing E 3 +. one was the image of the other under the switch map.)
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
386
IT (9.1) holds, then one can not (directly) apply Proposition 8.2 to remove the intersection u. IT (9.1) does not apply, then Proposition 8.2 can be applied, but not (directly) Proposition 8.3. So, whether or not (9.1) holds, some preliminary work must be done before the techniques from Section 8 can be employed. Consider the case where (9.1) holds.
=
LEMMA 9.2. Let 0 Z - (~z U 8Z U EL U ER)' There is an ambient surgery (in 0) of E 3 - which results in an oriented submanifold (with boundary) E~_ C Z with the following properties: 1) Assertions 2-8 of Proposition 8.1 hold when E~_ is substituted for E 3 _. 2) There is a tubular neighborhood, Ut:. C Z, of ~z which intersects E~_ n E~+ as u'=lr~, where q is the union of r i with N - 1 disjoint, like oriented, push-off copies of rio 9) E~_ n E~+ intersects Z - Ut:. as a disjoint union, u', of oriented circles which obey (a) [u'] "I 0 E Hl(E~_; Q). (b) [u'] = 0 E H_ 1 (E3+; Q).
(9.2) (Note that there is no E~+; the symmetry under the switch map will be broken here.) The proof of this lemma will be given shortly. Consider the case where (9.1) is false. The goal here is to modify E3+ as described in the following lemma:
=
LEMMA 9.3. Let 0 Z - (8Z U ~z U EL U ER)' There is an ambient surgery (in 0) of some number n ~ 1 of like-oriented push-offs of E3+ which results in an oriented, embedded submanifold, (with boundary) E~+ C Z with the following properties: 1) Let E~_ denote the union of n like-oriented, push-off copies of E s _. The Assertions 2-8 of Proposition 8.1 hold when E~± are substituted for Ea. 2) There is a tubular neighborhood, Ut:. C Z, of ~z which intersects E~_ n E~+ is U'=l q, where q is the union of r i with N - 1 disjoint, like oriented, push-off copies of r i. 9) E~_ n E~+ intersects Z - Ut:. as a disjoint union, u', of oriented circles which obey (a) [u'l"l 0 E Hl(E~_j Q). (b) [u'] = 0 E H-l(E3+;Q)'
(9.3)
This lemma will also be proved shortly.
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
Proof of Prop.osition 9.1.
387
=
When (9.1) is true, take E~_ from Lemma 9.2 and set E~+ E3+. When (9.1) is false, take E~± from Lemma 9.3. Use 0" to denote the intersection in Z - (8Z U Ua U EL U ER) between E~±. Use (9.2b) or (9.3b) in the respective cases, to find an integer N3 ~ 1 with the property that N3 [0"1 = 0 E H 1 (E3+jZ). Take 2 N3 push-off copies of E~_, all with the same orientation as E 3-, and let A denote the interior of the resulting union. Take 2 N3 push-off copies of E~+, all oriented as E~+, and let Bo denote the interior of the resulting union. Let X int(Z) and let be as before. Now, Proposition 8.2 can be invoked using Bo for B, but not Proposition 8.3 because Assumption c has not been shown to hold, and because Assumption c! will be false because Bo will not be connected. However, there is a surgery which remedies this problem: 0
°=
°
=
°
LEMMA 9.4. Let B o, A, X and be as described above. Then, there is an ambient surgery in A on some finite number of embedded (80 x B4) 's in Bo such that the result, B is path connected. This surgery does not change either H 1 ('j Z) or H2 ('j Z). Finally, if ( is a normal frame for Bo in X, and ifU C Bo is a neighborhood of the (80 x B4) 's, then ( IBO-U extends smoothly over B as a normal frame for B in X.
°-
The proof of this lemma is given below. With Lemma 9.4 understood, Propositions 8.2, 8.3 and 8.7 can be applied using X, 0, A and B as described above. Use E 4 - to denote the closure in Z of the promised solution, A', to Problems 1-3 in (8.2). Relable E4+ to denote the closure in Z of B. The pair E4± will satisfy the requirements of Proposition 9.1.
b) Making [0"] '" 0 E Hl(E~_jQ). This subsection is concerned with the construction of E~_ of Lemma 9.2. This construction requires a preliminary digression to introduce another surgery tool. The digression concerns the abstract model of (8.1). Proposition 9.5, below, summarizes the digression. The statement of Proposition 9.5 requires the following remarks to set the stage: When 8 -+ A is an embedded 2-sphere, let 1)s -+ 8 denote the normal bundle to 8 in A. Suppose that P C X is an embedded 3-dimensional ball with boundary 8. (The local model here takes 8 to be the plane X3 = ... = X7 = 0 in ]R7 and then P is the half plane X3 ~ O,X4 = ... = X7 = 0.). Use Np to denote the normal bundle to P in X. The natural inclusion (9.4)
O-+1)s-+Npls
plays an important role in Proposition 9.5. PROPOSITION 9.5. Let A,B,O,X and 0' be as described in {8.1}. Assume that: a} H~omp(Aj Q) -+ H3(A; Q) is injective.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
388
b)
[a] = 0 E Hl (A; Q). Suppose that there exists an embedded 2-sphere S C (A n 0) - a which bounds an embedded 9-ball P cO, and:
c)
The fundamental class of S is homologically trivial in H2 (A; 10)·
d)
int(P)
nA
= 0.
e) P intersects B transversally. f) With respect to some orientation on P, [P n B] g) (Np Is)/vs ~ S is a trivial 2-plane bundle. 1)
i
0 E Ho(P; Z).
Let U C X be an open neighborhood of P. There exists an embedded, oriented, 4-dimensional submanifold A' C X with the following properties: A' intersects B transversally in a', and [a'] i 0 E HdA';IQ).
= H 2 (A, 10).
2) 9)
H 2 (A'; 10)
4)
A'
5)
[a'] = [a] E Hl (B; 10). Ftt.rthermore, If A has trivial normal bundle in X, then so does A'. And, if ( is a frame for the normal bundle to A in X, then, IA-U extends over A' as a frame for the normal bundle to A' in X.
6)
H:omp(A'; Q) ~ H3 (A'; Q) is injective.
=A
on X - U and [A]
= [A']
in H4(X,X - 0).
This proposition will be proved in the next subsection. Consider now its application to (9.2).
Proof of Lemma 9.2. The lemma will be proved by applying Proposition 9.5. For this purpose, take X to be int(Z) and then define 0 Z - (8Z U UlJ. U EL U ER). Take A int(E3_) and, likewise, take B int(Ea+). Given that the assumptions of Proposition 9.5 hold when (9.1) is true, one should take E~_ to be the closure in Z of the sub manifold A' of Proposition 9.5. As for the validity of the assumptions of Proposition 9.5, remark that Assumptions a - b are satisfied by construction; see Proposition 8.1. (Assumption b holds since E 3 - is a manifold with boundary whose boundary is a union of 3-spheres; and H2(S3) = 0.) The remaining assumptions of Proposition 9.5 will be verified with the exhibition of a 2-sphere SeA n 0 with the requisite properties. To find the appropriate 2-sphere, it is important to remember that E 3 - was constructed from E~_. Here is a brief summary: The compact components of EL n dz bound a connected, oriented, embedded surface (with boundary) R C il z . Let N ~ dz be the normal bundle. A fiber metric was chosen for N, and an exponential map e : N ~ Z was chosen so that e mapped the radius 2 ball fiber bundle in N diffeomorphically onto its image in Z. (This ball bundle in N was identified using e with a neighborhood of ilz in Z.) Also, e was constrained to map N laR into E~_. Next, the radius 1 sphere bundle, SR C N IR was introduced, as well as the radius 1 ball bundle, TR C N IR. Finally, E 3 _ was defined to be the result of smoothing the corner in the surgery
=
=
=
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
389
(9.5) By the way, no genetality is lost by assuming that the surgery in (9.5) occured. Indeed, if E 2 - = E3- and no such surgery occurs (in which case E 2 _n int(~z) has no compact components), then there are isotopies of El± so that the resulting submanifolds obey the conclusions of Proposition 9.1. Or, if E 2 - = E 3 - , then one could add two push-off copies of Y1,l- to Ef_ of Section 7a, one oriented positively and the other oriented negatively. Then, the tubing construction of E 2 - will insure that E 2 - n int(~z) has a compact component. With (9.5) understood, remark that E3+ is obtained from 9(E3-) by an isotopy. Let R' C R denote the complement of a (small) collar of 8R. Near R',E3- is 8R IR' and this coincides with 9(E3-) near R'. (Thus, 9(E3-) and E 3- dQ not intersect transverally.) Choose the isotopy to obtain E3+ from 9(E3-) so that E3+ near R' is a sphere bundle 8R+ eN IR' of radius greater than 1. Pick a point x E R' and let
(9.6) This is a homologically trivial, embedded 2-sphere in E 3 _. This 8 z bounds the 3-ball Tz C N Iz which is the unit ball in the fiber of N at x. Notice that this 3-ball has empty intersection with E 3+ since the latter intersects the fiber at x in a sphere of radius larger than 1. However, the ball T z intersects ~z transversally in a single point, namely x. This intersection with ~z will now be traded for N transversal intersections with E3+. (This is the same N as in Proposition 8.1.) The technique used here is called "connect summing with a transverse sphere" (see, e.g. Chapter 1 of [7]). This technique proceeds as follows: Fix p E crit(J) and then fix a point q E 8 3 - Ap. Observe that the sphere 8 3 x q C (83 X 8 3 )p intersects ~z transversally once (at q x q), and it intersects E 3 + transversally N times, at q x Ap. Orient S3 x q and all N intersections with E 3+ will have the same sign. (See Assertion 5 of Proposition 8.1.) Because q ¢ Ap , this S3 x q will have empty intersection with E 3 _. Take this S3 x q C (S3 X 8 3)p and push it off 8Z so that it is an embedded submanifold, Y C int(Z). Push if off only slightly, so that Y still intersects E3+ in the N points of the push-off of q x Ap , and so that Y intersects ~z in the push-off of q x q. Also, do not let Y intersect E 3 _. Remark that N is an oriented vector bundle, and thus Tz is an oriented 3ball. Orient Y so that its intersection number with ~z is the opposite of that for T z n ~z. Now, one can "tube" Y to T", to obtain a new 3-ball, P C Z with the following properties: 1) 2)
3)
=
8P S"" P n (Az U az U EL U E R ) = int(P) n E 3 - = 0,
0,
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
390
4)
P n E3+ is N distinct points, all homologically the same in Ho(P).
(9.7) Abstractly, P is the connect sum of Y and T z . Realize this connect sum in Z by choosing a path, T, between x and x, Y n!:::.z in int(!:::.z). Make sure that T avoids the paths {ri}i=l of Assertion 6 in Proposition 8.1. Modify the exponential map e: N -t Z so that e maps N Izl into Y. Let S,. eN Ir denote the radius 1/8 sphere bundle. Let T~ C N 1:1: and TZI eN Izl denote the radius balls of radius 1/8. Then Y is obtained by smoothing the corners of the surgery
=
(9.8)
«Y - T~/) u (Tz
- T~))
u Sr.
Here is a picture:
-
!:::.z
(9.9)
_
!:::.z
(9.10)
=
The 3-ball P and the 2-sphere S Sz satisfy Assumptions c - J of Proposition 9.5. To apply Proposition 9.5 to prove Lemma 9.2, it is only' necessary to check that Assumption f of Proposition 9.5 is satisfied. For this purpose, let 7r : Sz -t x denote the projection. Then, the normal bundle to Sz in A is isomorphic to 7r*TR Iz. Meanwhile, the normal bundle to P in X along Sz is the same as the normal bundle to Tz in X along Sz which is isomorphic to 7r*TD.z I",. Thus, the quotient (Np Is)/vs ~ 7r*«TD.z Iz)/(TR 1:1:)), which is lli' 0
tlfiyinl. reouireo,
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
391
c) Proof of Proposition 9.5. Since [S] is homologically trivial in A, Vs -t S is a trivial 2- plane bundle. Since P is a 3-ball, so N P -t P is a trivial 4-plane bundle. And, because (Np Is)/vs is a trivial bundle, there are no obstructions to extending Vs over P as a 2-plane sub bundle of N p. Use v -t P to denote this 2-plane bundle. Fix an exponentional map ep : Np -t X with the following properties: First, ep should restrict to Vs as a map into A. And, ep should restrict to map Np IpnB into B. Fix a fiber metric on Np with the property that ep embeds the interior of the unit ball bundle in Np onto a neighborhood of P in X. Then, use ep to implicitly identify the unit ball bundle in N p with its ep-image. With the preceding understood, let So C v denote the I-sphere bundle of radius 1/4. Let to C v denote the ball bundle of radius 1/4. (Thus, aCto I int(P) = So I int(P)') Introduce the surgery
(9.11)
Ao
= (A -
to Is) u So,
which is a Co embedding of a smooth, oriented 4-manifold, A' into X. This embedding is smooth away from the corner at So Is and it can be smoothed inside v to produce a smooth embedding of A' into X. Note that A' can be arranged to agree with A on the compliment of any apriori specified open neighborhood U C X of P. With A' understood, consider the various assertions of Proposition 9.5: To prove Assertion 1, consider that (9.12)
u'
= (A' n B) n 0 = So IpnB U
u.
This is a transversal intersection because P intersects B transversaly. The fact that lU'l '" 0 in Hl(A'j Q) follows via Meyer- Vietoris and the fact that [pnBj '" 0 in Ho(P). (Use the Meyer- Vietoris sequences for the decompositions A = (A - So Is) U (to Is) and also A' = (A - So Is) u so.) Meyer-Vietoris also proves Assertion 2, namely H2(A' j Q) = H2(Aj Q) . (Use the same sequences as above.) Assertion 3 is true because one can interpret to as a cycle, and this cycle obeys ato = [A] - [A']. Assertion 4 is true because the circles in So IPnB bound the discs to IPnB. To prove Assertion 5, the strategy will be to find a framing of the normal bundle to int(so) in X which is compatible with the framing ( on A - S. To begin, introduce the notation ll. to denote the vector field along So C to which points radially inward on each 2- ball fiber of to -t P. With ll. understood, the normal bundle to So in X is isomorphic to (Np/v)ffi Span(ll.). The bundle Np/v -t P is a trivial 2-plane bundle (because P is a ball), and so it has a global frame, (el,e2)' Thus, (el,e2,1l.) is a frame for the normal bundle to int(so) in X. Now consider the normal bundle to A along S. For this purpose, let e3 denote the inward pointing tangent bundle to P along S _ (So
e3
spans the nonnal
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
392
bundle to 8 in P). Then, along 8, the normal bundle to A in X is isomorphic to (Np/v) Is Ell Span(e3)' Thus, Np Is Ell Span(e3) -+ 8 is isomorphic to the normal bundle of 8 in X. Let es : Np Is Ell Span(e3) -+ X be an exponential map which maps Vs into A and which maps v Is Ell Span(e3) into P. Use es to identify a neighborhood of 8 in X with a neighborhood of the zero section of the bundle Np Is Ell Span(e3) -+ 8. Because 11'2(80(3)) = 0, there are no obstructions to homotoping the given normal frame <: in a neighborhood of 8 so that the restriction of <: to said neighborhood is(el Is, e2 Is, e3). Thus, two thirds of the frame <: can be extended over A' from A - 8. As usual, there is no obstruction to homotoping lL near So Is to equal e3 on the compliment of a neighborhood of 8 in A. 0
d) Making [0']
= 0 in HI (EH
)·
This subsection is concerned with the construction of E~+ of Lemma 9.3. The construction requires a preliminary digression to introduce a modified version of Proposition 8.2. Here is the scenario: As in Proposition 8.2, X is a smooth, oriented 7-manifold and A,B are oriented, 4-dimensional submanifolds of X. Let 0 c X be an open set which contains a component, 0', of A n B. PROPOSITION 9.6. Let X, 0, A, Band 0' be as described above. 8uppose that a) [0'] '" 0 in HI (Bj Q). b) [0']=0 in H1(OjQ).
c)
H:omp (Bj Q) -+ H3 (Bj Q) is injective.
d)
B has trivial normal bundle in X with a given normal framing <:.
e)
0 is path connected.
1)
Then there exists n '" 1 and there exists an oriented, dimension 4 submanifold B' C X which obeys: Let Bo denote the disjoint union of n distinct, like oriented push- off copies of B. Then B' = Bo in X - O.
2) B' intersects A tmnsversally, and 0" == (B' n A) n 0 is compact. S) [0"] = 0 in H1(B'jZ). 4) [0"] = n [0'] in HI (Aj Q).
= H2(BojQ).
5)
H 2(B'jQ)
6) 7)
[B'] n[B] in H 4 (X, X - OjZ). B' has trivial normal bundle in X and the push-off normal /raming, (, of Bo extends from Bo - Bo n 0 to a smooth normal framing of B' in X.
=
This proposition is proved below. Consider its application first. Proof of Lemma 9.3. The strategy is to apply Proposition 9.6. For this purpose, set X == int(Z) and 0 == Z - (8Z U UA, U EL U ER)' Set A == int(E3_) and set B == int(E3+). Assumption a of Proposition 9.6 holds under
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
393
the assumption that (9.1) is false. Assumption b of Proposition 9.6 holds for the following reason: The vanishing of HI(ZjQ) is guaranteed by Lemma 3.7. The vanishing of HI (OJ Q) then follows using Meyer-Vietoris. (Remember that D.z and EL,R are co dimension 3 in Z.) Assumption c of Proposition 9.6 holds because B is the interior of a manifold (EH ) with boundary a disjoint union of 3-spheres. (Remember that H2(S3) = 0.) Thus, the assumptions of Proposition 9.6 hold when (9.1) is false. Take E~+ in Lemma 9.3 to be equal to the closure in Z of the submanifold B' of 0 Proposition 9.6. Proof of Proposition 9.6. By assumption, there exists an integer n such that n[u] = 0 E HI(OjZ). Use the given framing of B's normal bundle in X to push-off n parallel copies of B, all with the same orientation as B. Let Bo denote the union of these n disjoint submanifolds. Make these push-offs close to the original, so that Uo == (Bo n A) nO will be equal to n like oriented, push-off copies of u. Then [uo] = 0 in HI(OjZ). This means that Uo is the boundary of an oriented, embedded surface with boundary, ReO. Since A and B have co dimension 3 in 0, one can arrange R so that int(R) n A = 0 and int(R) n B = 0. One can also arrange R to be connected because 0 is connected. Here is the local picture of R near a component of Uo: Let e be a component of Uo. Let Ve denote the normal bundle to in R, an oriented line bundle. Then, the normal bundle to in 0 splits as the direct sum veffiL Ie ffiTBo Ie, where L -+ Uo is an oriented 2-plane bundle, and so trivial. (Thus, the normal bundle for B in X along Uo splits as Ve ffi L Ie.) Choose a framing, (E, for TBo Ie and also choose a framing (el,e2) for L. If a frame, (, has been given for B's normal bundle in X, then choose (el,e2) so that with the addition of an oriented frame, e3, for Ve; the triple (el' e2, e3) defines an adapted frame to which is homotopic to ( Ie. (See Lemma 8.4). Choose an exponential map, ee, from the normal bundle along into X which maps the positive axis in v into R and which maps TBo Ie into Bo. Use this exponential map and the given framings to identify an open neighborhood of e in X with one of e x (0,0) in the triple product e x 1R3 x 1R3. Then R near e is identified with the subspace of points (t, x, y)in ex R3 x R3 where Xl = X3 = Y = 0 and Xl ~ o. Meanwhile, Bo near e is identified with the subspace of points (t, X, y) with X = o. And, A near is identified with the subspace of points (t,x,y) where
e
e
e
e
e
(9.13)
X
= A(t) y
+ 0(1 y
12 ),
where A : e -+ GI(3, IR). Because R is connected and has non-trivial boundary, the normal bundle NR -+ R to R in X is isomorphic to the trivial 5- plane bundle. On uo, this 0 bundle has a splits as N R ::::l L ffi T Bo luo. LEMMA
9.7.
The subbundle L
C
NR
luo
extends over R as an oriented,
394
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
~-plane subbundle, LR, of NR. Furthermore, given a framing (el. e2) for L, there exists an extension L R -+ R of L over which the framing (el, e2) extends.
Proof. Choose a trivialization for N R to identify this bundle with R x ]R5. Then LeNR 1<70 is defined by a map from 0'0 into the space of oriented 2-planes in ]R5. The space of such oriented 2-planes deformation retracts onto 80(5)/(80(3) x 80(2)); thus, L is defined by a map, TJ : 0'0 -+ 80(5)/(80(3) X 80(2)). Note that the choice of an oriented frame (el' e2) for L defines a lift of TJ to a map TJ : 0'0 -+ 80(5)/80(3). With the-preceding understood, the question here is whether or not this map TJ can be extended over R. The answer is that TJ can be extended because 80(5)/80(3) is simply connected. 0 With Lemma 9.7 understood, pick an extension, LR -+ R of Lover Rover which the given frame (el,e2) for L extends. Introduce VR ~ NR/LR and choose a splitting NR ~ LR EB VR with the property that VR 1<70 agrees with TB 1<70' Fix an exponential map eR : NR -+ X with the property that eR on NR 1<70 agrees with the restriction of eO'o to L EB T Bo 1<70' Choose a fiber metric on NR so that eR embeds the interior of the radius 2 ball bundle onto an open neighborhood of int(R) in X. Let f > 0 and let TR C VR denote the radius f ball bundle. Let 8 R C TR denote the sphere bundle of radius f . Since VR is oriented, both TR and 8R are isomorphic to trivial fiber bundles. With all of the above understood, define the surgery (9.14)
This Bl is a CO embedding of a smooth, oriented manifold into X. The embedding fails to be smooth at the corner, 8R 1<70' Smooth Bl inside VR on a neighborhood of this corner to produce a smoothly embedded, oriented submanifold, B' eX. The claim now is that B', as described above, will satisfy Assertions 1-7 of Proposition 9.6: Assertion 1 is true by construction. To prove Assertion 2, use (9.13) to see that 0" is a push-off of 0'0. Indeed, for small f, the copy in 0" of the component COin (9.13) is given, to order f2, as the set of (t,x,y) with (9.15)
x
= (f (E
1 A- l
);,l 12)-1/2,0,0)
1~j9
and y = A -1 (Xl, 0, 0) . Here 4~J are the components of the inverse to A in (9.13). Note that this identification of 0" confirms Assertion 4 as well. To prove Assertion 3 of Proposition 9.6, observe first that (9.15) identifies 0" as a section of SR over a push-off into inteR) of 0'0. Thus, 0" bounds in B' if the section in question, s, extends as a section over R of SR. Now, SR is a trivial 2-sphere bundle so isomorphic to R x S2. Such an isomorphism identifies the
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
395
section s, with a map, also called s, from 0' to S2. Since 71"1 (S2) == 0, any such map extends over R. To prove Assertion 5, invoke the Meyer-Vietoris exact sequences for the decomposition Bo == (Bo - TR 1000) U TR 1000 and for the decomposition of Bl in (9.14). (Note that Bl and B' are homeomorphic.) To prove Assertion 6, remark that B' and Bl are CO-isotopic by an isotopy with support in 0, so [B'] = [B l ] in H 4 (X,X - O;Z). Meanwhile, TR, as a 5-cycle in 0 satisfies aTR = [Bl]- [Bo]. Finally, consider Assertion 7. To begin, remark that the normal bundle to SR in X is isomorphic to LR EB T, where T -t SR is the trivial line bundle which is SR'S normal bundle in YR. Now, by construction, LR has a frame, (e~,e~) which extends (el,e2)' Meanwhile, the normal bundle, N B, to B in X splits upon restriction to 0'0 as L EB v ooo ' where vooo is the normal bundle to 0'0 in R, an oriented line. And, the frame, is homotopic in a neighborhood of 0'0 so that the result restricts to 0'0 as (el' e2, e3), where (el, e2) frame L and where e3 is the inward pointing normal vector to 0'0 in R. Thus, two thirds of the normal frame, can extended from the compliment of a neighborhood of 0'0 in Bo over B'. As usual, there are no obstructions to extending the remaining third of , over B'. e) Proof of Lemma 9.4.
II there are some number q > 1 components of B o, label the components of Bo as {Bo,a}~=l' Pick Ya E Ba n (0 - A) for each index a > 1. Also, choose q - 1 distinct points {Xa}a~2 C BO,l' Since 0 is path connected, so o - A will be path connected; and so one can find, for each a ~ 2, a path Pa (an embedding of [0,1]) which starts at Ya and ends at Xa. Choose the set {Pa}a>2 to be distinct. Now, for each a ~ 2, mimick the surgery in (8.23) to make ~ ambient connect sum of Bo,a with BO,l' Since the {Pa} are distinct, these connect sums can be made with out interfering with each other. Use B to denote the result, after smoothing near the corners. The verification that B does the job is left to the reader as an exercise. (For the framing issue, see Lemma 8.10.) 0
10 The last pass at E±. It is the purpose of this section to explain how to make E± from E4± of the preceding section. The metamorphasis from E 4 ± to E± will be called melding. This melding operation only changes E4± in a neighborhood of tl. z U az, and the neighborhood in question can be as small as desired. In particular, in this neighborhood, E4± should be the image of E 4 - under the switch map e : Z -t Z which sends (x, y) to (y, x). (See AsseJ,"tion 1 of Proposition 9.1). Furthermore, in this neighborhood, E 4- (hence, E4+) should consist, locally, of N parallel push-off copies (see Assertions 5 and 6 of Proposition 9.1). The effect of the melding will be to push all of these parallel copies together on some smaller neighborhood of tl.z U az. The cost of the melding is that E± will not be a manifold (unless N = 1 in Proposition 9.1).
396
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
a) E 4 - near Llz U 8Z.
Consider E 4 _. The following construction will be done r times, once for each pair in {(ai, bini=l' These r versions can be done simultaneously, so fix attention on one index i, and simplify notation by setting a == ai and b == bi. The set r i C E 4 - n Llz is a set of N embedded .intervals which connect the N components of 8 3 x Aa = E4- n (83 x 8 3 )a with the N components of 8 3 x Ab = E 4 - n (8 3 x 8 3 h. Near (10.1) E 4 - consists of N components (sheets), {Ya }:;=l' Here is a picture:
(83
X
8 3 )0
/
----'-----,.....
-\
I
.......--,---~'
(10.2)
The sheets {YQ}a~2 are push-off copies of Y l • As for Y l , it is an embedded image in Z of the compliment in the open, unit 4-ball of the interiors of a pair of disjoint 4-balls, B±, ofradius 1/8, respectively centered at (±1/4, 0, 0, 0). Note that the boundary of B_ is mapped to 8 3 X Pa C 8 3 X Aa, and the boundary of B+ is mapped to the corresponding 8 3 x Pb C 8 3 X A b • Furthermore, Yi n Llz is the segment of the Xl axis between (±1/8, 0, 0, 0) E 8B±. Here is a picture ofYI :
0---0 (10.3)
397
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
As remarked, the {Ya-Jo>2 in (10.2) are push-off copies of Yi. To be precise here, remember that YI' hM a framing, , == (et, e2, e3), to its normal bundle, NYl, which is a product framing that restricts to both (83 X Pal and (83 x Pb) as a constant framing. (See Assertion 8 of Propositio 9.1.) Fix an exponential map,
(10.4)
which maps NYl's restriction to (83 X Pal into (83 x 8 3 )a, and which likewise maps Ny1's restriction to (8 3 X Pb) into (83 x 8 3 h. Fix a metric on NY1 which makes the frame , orthonormal, and fix € > 0 such that (10.4) embeds the interior of the radius 2€ ball bundle onto a neighborhood of YI in Z. Use e in (10.4) to identify the interior of this ball bundle with its image in Z. With the preceding understood, the copy Yo of YI can be taken as the image of the section So : YI -+ NY1 that is given by
(10.5)
b) The meld. With the preceding picture E 4 - near (10.1) understood, here is the meld: Fix a function (3 : [0,1] -+ [0,1] which has the following properties:
(10.6) 1)
(3 (3
== 1 on [5/8,1]. == 0 on [0,1/2].
2) 3) {3 is nondecreasing. As described in (10.3), identify Y I with a subset of the unit ball about the origin in ]R4. Use x to denote the Euclidean coordinate in and, by restriction, a point in Yi. By the way, note that the assignment to x E Yi of the number {3(1 x D defines a smooth function on Y I which vanishes in a neighborhood of
r,
(10.7)
B_ U {(Xl, 0, 0, 0) : -1/8:$
Xl
:$ 1/8} U B+.
For a ~ 2, define the deformation, Y~, of Yo as follows: Y~ is the image in Ny of the section s~ which sends X E Yi to (10.8)
s~(X)
== (a -1) N- I (3(1
X I) Eel'
Notice that y~ agrees with Yo on the compliment of a regular neighborhood of (10.1) in Z; hut that Y.! coincides with Yt on a smaller neighhorhood of
398
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
(10.1). Here is a picture for a: ~ 1:
(10.9) In (10.9), the shaded region marks where Y~ and Y1 intersect. Here is a picture of all the {Y~}Q~l:
(10.10) Use E_ to denote the result of applying the preceding meld operation to E 4 in a neighborhood of (10.1) for each i E {I", . ,r}. As for E+, remember that EH coincided with 9(E4-) near each of the r versions of (10.2). This neighborhood can be assumed to include the regions that are depicted in (10.2). With this understood, set E+ == EH outside of the 9-image of the regions in (10.2), but inside the 9-image of each region in (10.2), declare
(10.11) c) Properties of E±. The following proposition describes some of the salient features of E±:
10.1. Construct E± c Z as described above. Then: There is an open neighborhood U C Z of D..z u az such that E+ n U and E_ n U are images of each other under the switch map on Z. 2} The fundamental classes [E±l are equal to N [E1±l for some integer N ~ 1. Here, [El±l are described by {6.8} and Lemma 6.8. 3} E± have empty intersection with Mo x Mo and Ml x M 1 , .I} E± have empty intersection with EL,R of (4. 15}. PROPOSITION
1}
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
399
5) If p E crit(f),jhen the intersection of E_ with (S3 x S3)p has the form S3 x x P ' where xp is a single point. Similarly, the intersection of E+ with (S3 x S3)p is xp X S3. 6)
E± n t:::.z
=
Ui=l Vi, where Vi C t:::.z is as follows: There is a flow line I'i which starts at ai and ends at bi . With the canonical identification of t:::.w with W understood, Vi is a closed interval in a push-off copy of I'i. And, Vi starts at (XCl,X CI ) E (S3 x S3)CI and Vi ends at (Xb,Xb) E (S3 x S3h. Here, a ai and b bi'
=
7) 8)
E_ n E+ = Ui=l Vi. H2(E±i Q) = O.
=
The proof is straightforward and left to the reader. (See Proposition 9.1. Also, use Meyer-Vietoris to compute H2(E±).) Here is a picture:
(10.12)
11 Completing the proof. The purpose of this last section is to complete the proof of Theorem 2.9. The strategy here will be as follows: Suppose that Mo and MI are cobordant via a spin 4-manifold, W, with the rational homology of S3. Factor the cobordism as in Assertion 5 of Proposition 3.2 into two pieces, WI n W 3 • Both WI and W3 are given by (3.11). Here, W l is a cobordism from Mo to a rational homology sphere M, while W3 is 'lo cobordism from M to MI. In both cases, the manifold with boundary, Z. (= ZI,3), has been defined, and Sections 4d, 4e and 10 describe the variety I:z. C Z. (The latter require a choice of base pointp eM.) Let Z ZlUZ3 and I:z I:Zl UI: zs , where the common boundary components in both cases are identified (these being M x M in the former and I:M in the latter).
=
=
400
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
With Z and ~z understood, the proof plan from Section 2k will be complete with the completions of Steps 3 and 4 in Section 2k. These steps are consider~d below. Completing Step 3 requires the construction of a 2-form Wz on Z - ~z which satisfies (2.27). This 2-form will be constructed first on the compliment of ~z in a regular neighborhood Nz C Z of ~z. The extension to Z - ~z will be made by appeal to Lemma 4.2. Step 4 of Theorem 2.9's proof (from Section 2k) will be completed during the construction of wz. Let NZl == NZnZl and define Nzs analogously. The 2-form Wz on Nz - ~z will be constructed first on NZl - EZl and second on Nzs - ~zs' The case of NZl -EZl is considered in Subsections 11a-h and that of Nzs -~3 is considered in Subsection 11i. These two constructions are matched in Subsection 11j where Step 4 of Section 2k is verified. Section 11k completes the proof of Theorem 2.9 with a discussion of the conditions in Lemma 4.2. To avoid cumbersome notation, the subscript ''1'' will be dropped in Subsections a-h. Thus, in these sections, Z will denote Zl, Ez will denote EZll etc. a) Preliminary remarks.
Construction of Wz on Nz - ~z is accomplished in two steps. The first step defines Wz near t::.z U EL U ER by using (4.22), but where cpz is a map which is defined only on a regular neighborhood, N', in Z of t::.z U EL U E R . This cpz has cpzl(D) = ~z n N'. The second step constructs Wz on Nz - N'. The construction of cpz occupies Subsections b - I, below. The construction of Wz on Nz - N' occupies Subsections 9 and h.
b) Near EL n ER. The purpose of this subsection is to construct cpz near EL n ER. To be precise, a neighborhood U C Z of EL n ER will be described with a map (11.1)
cpu: U -t IR3
which obeys (11.2)
Then, cpz I U will be declared equal to cpu. A digression on framings begins the construction of CPu. To start the digression, fix a frame for T M Ip. This frame can be thought of as a frame for the normal bundle to p in T M. Use the pseudo- gradient flow to extend this frame as a normal framing to the flow line 'Y C Z. This normal framing to 'Y induces a framing of T Mo Ipo. End the digression. Parameterize that flow line 'Y so that IC'Y(t)) = t. Let N'"( -t 'Y denote the normal bundle to 'Y in W and select an exponential map e'"( : N'"( -t W which maps N'"( Ipoop into Mo,M, respectively. Require that
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
f
(11.3)
0
e'Y(t)
401
= t.
Use this exponential map and the normal framing with the afore- mentioned parameterization of'Y to define a diffeomorphism, 1/J-y, from a neighborhood, 01' C W of'Y onto [0,1] x B, where B C 1R3 is a ball-neighborhood of the origin. Using the preceding identification, build 1/Ju (u'Y X u'Y) Iz of the neighborhood U Z n (o'y x 01') of EL n ER with [0,1] x B x B. This U and 1/Ju obey the conclusions of Assertion 4 in Lemma 4.5 except that B C 1R3 should everywhere replace 1R3 and B x B should everywhere replace 1R3 x 1R3 . With the preceding understood, define cpz on U to be the composition of the map 1/Ju with the map from [0,1] x 1R3 x 1R3 which sends (t,x,y) to ~o(x,y) with ~o given by (2.15). Note that cpz lu agrees with Proposition 2.5's map cP when restricted to a neighborhood of Po x Po in Mo x Mo, or to a neighborhood of p x pin M x M. Note also, for reference below, that the map cpz lu is invariant under the switch map e : Z ~ Z which sends (x,y) to (y,x).
=
=
c) Near EL U ER'
The purpose of this subsection is to construct cpz near EL U E R . To begin, remark that the normal bundle N R ~ ER to ER in Z is naturally isomorphic to rrlN'Y. Thus, said normal bundle has a natural framing. Take the dual to this natural framing to frame the dual bundle, NR and choose an exponential map eR : NR ~ Z. The framing of NR and eR together define a map, CPR, from a neighborhood of ER in Z into 1R3 which has ER as the inverse image of zero. (See (2.14).) Choose this exponential map so that it sends NR IMoXMo into Mo x Mo and likewise sends NR IMxM into M. (The exponential map e'Y : N'Y ~ W of the preceding subsection induces such an exponential map in a natural way.) On ER n U, the differentials of the maps CPR and cpu are scalar multiples of each other, and so there is a homotopy of CPR near U which has it agree with cpz lu on U and so extend cpz lu to map a neighborhood of ER in Z to 1R3 with the correct inverse image of zero. See the Step 2 of the proof of Proposition 2.5 for the details. With cpz lu now extended over E R , extend it further over ER U EL by using the switch map e : Z ~ Z. Use cpz IRL to denote this extended map. Note that cpz IR,L can be made so that its restriction to a neighborhood of CPo xMo)U(Mo xPo) in Mo xMo agrees with the map cP for Mo in Proposition 2.5. Likewise, its restriction to a neighborhood of (p x M) U (M x p) in M x M can be arranged to agree with the analogous cP for M d) Near E± n
~z.
The intersections between E± and between these varieties and ~z form a set of disjoint line segments, {Vi}i=I. (Note that E± are manifolds near these line segments.) The purpose of this subsection is to define the map cP z near each Vi·
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
402
To start, fix i E {I,··· ,r}. Let a == ai and b == bi • Note that Vi has end points (xa, xa) C (S3 X S3)a and (Xb, Xb) C (S3 x S 3 h. Also, the identification, using 7rL or 7rR, of t:J..z with a subset of W identifies Vi with a subinterval in a pseudo-gradient flow line which starts at a and ends at b. Remember that E_ is the result of melding E 4 - of Proposition 9.1. This means, in particular, that (S3 X S3)a U Vi U (S3 x S 3 h has a neighborhood, Ui C Z, such that E_nUi is the same point set as a component, Y, of E 4 _nt:J.. Z . Meanwhile, E+ n Ui = 9(Y). Remark next that E4- has, according to Assertion 8 of Proposition 9.1, a special normal framing, (. And, EH has a special normal frame, (', which restricts to Ui as the image of ( under the switch map a. The pair of frames «(, (') restrict to Vi to frame the normal bundle Ni ~ Vi of Vi in Z. Notice that e fixes t:J..z and the differential of a (denoted a*) acts on Ni and interchanges Span«() with Span('). Fix an exponential map e : Ni ~ Vi with the following properties:
(11.4) 1) . e :Span«() ~ E_. 2) e :Span«(') ~ E+. 3) At (Xa,xa),e maps Ni into (S3 X S3)a. 4) At (Xb,xb),e maps Ni into (S3 x S 3 h. 5) a 0 e = eo a·. Together, the map e and the frames «(, (') define a map (11.5) with the following properties:
(11.6) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
°
There is an open ball B C IR3 about and 1/J embedds 1/J is the identity on Vi x (0,0). 1/J-l(E_) = {(t,x, 0) E Vi x IR3 X IR3}. 1/J-l(E+) = {(t,O,y) E Vi x IR3 X IR3}. 1/J-l(t:J..Z) = {(t,x,x) E Vi x IR3 X IR3}. 1/J«x a,xa) x IR3 x IR3) C (S3 X S3)a. 1/J«Xb,Xb) x IR3 x IR3) C (S3 x S 3 h· 1/J(t,x,y) = 8(1/J(t,y,x».
Vi
x B x B.
Given the preceding, define the map cpz on a neighborhood of declaring that (11.7)
(cpz
0
1/;)(t, x, y)
==
~o(x, y),
Vi
in Z by
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
where
~o
403
is given in (2.15).
e) Near (S3 x S3)p. The next step is to define the map cpz near Z's boundary components {( S3 X S3)p he crit(J). So, fix i E {I,···, r} and let p denote either ai or bi. A neighborhood, Vp C Z, of (83 x S3)p is diffeomorphic to the product (S3 x S3)p X [0,1) as a manifold with boundary. Furthermore, there is no difficulty in finding such a diffeomorphism so that (11.8)
1) 2) 3)
4)
E_ n Vp = (S3 X xp) x [0,1). E+ n Vp = (xp X S3) X [0,1). t::.z n Vp = t::.ss x [0,1). The switch map acts by Sex, y, t) = (y, x, t).
In Vp, the variety E_ is smooth and it agrees with a component, Y, of E 4- n Vp. Also, E+ n Vp = 8(E_ n Vp). Also, E4- has the normal frame, (, which restricts to Y as a constant frame. And, E4+ has the normal frame (' which restricts to 8(Y) as 8 * (. Use these constant frames to define frames for the dual bundles to the normal bundles of Y and 8(Y) in Z. Then, use these frames for the conormal bundles to extend cpz I Ui of (11.7) to a neighborhood of E± n Vp by mimicking Step 2 in the proof of Proposition 2.5. (Exploit the product structure on Vp in (11.8).) Meanwhile, T*S3 has its singular framing which gives (see Proposition 2.7, Definition 2.8 and Lemma 2.11) the canonical homotopy class of singular framing for which the value of 12 (S3) is zero. As in Step 3 of Proposition 2.5's proof, use this framing to obtain a singular framing of the normal bundle to t::.S3 x [0,1) in Z. (Remember that (S3 x 8 3)p has two obvious projections to 8 3 , these are given by the product structure in (3.26) and are denoted 11"::1::. To be explicit, introduce the coordinate sytem 'l/J p of (3.2) and introduce Up == 'l/Jp(JR4). Note that Up x Up is a neighborhood of (P,p) in W x W. With this understood, 11"± are the restrictions to (S3 x S3)p of the maps from Up x Up to JR4 which are given by
(11.9) when p E critl (f)j and by (11.10)
1I"_(x,y)
== (Yl',Y2,X3,:C4) and 1I"+(x,y) == (Xl,X2,Y3,Y4)
when p E crit 2(J). Then, the map 11"* *'d'fi T*S3'. h h al bundle to Ass in (S3 x 83)".) + - 11"_ 1 entl es Wlt t e norm
404
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
As in Step 3 of the proof of Proposition 2.5, use the induced framing of the normal bundle to ~~ x [0,1) in Z and the product structure of Vp as described in (11.8) to extend
f) Near
~z.
At this poin:t, the map
As a preamble, remark that
(11.11)
X
l(t,1J.1J) =
2 (v, du) v- I V
12 du,
where (v, du) == ~1=1 vi dUi· The singularity of X near each Vi will have the form of (11.11) when the coordinates of (11.5), (11.6) are used. Also, X is constrained on the diagonal ~S3 in each (S3 x S3)p so that the inverse of the natural identification (71"+ - 7I"~) between T* S3 and the conormal bundle of ~S3 C (S3 X S3)p sends X to a singular coframe which gives S3'S canonical singular frame. With the preceding understood, agree now to further constrain X along ~Mo as follows: The inverse of the natural identification (7I"R - 7I"iJ between T* Mo and the conormal bundle to ~Mo C Mo x Mo should send X to a singular frame for T* Mo. (See Definition 2.3). This X, as constrained above, will extend over the rest of ~z when the following condition is met:
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
LEMMA
405
11.1. Let
(11.12)
z
and let X be a frame for N ~ (.6. z - ('Y U (Ur=IVi» which is defined on a neighborhood ofT as described above. If the homotopy class ofT- Mo 's singular frame (rrR _7r£)-1 (X I .6.Mo) is in ker(lw) (see (2.12), then the frame X extends over .6. z - T as a frame for N
z.
Given that Lemma 11.1 is true, the extension of the map cpz near .6. z is obtained by using (2.14) and a singular frame X as described above for which (7rR - 7r£)-I(X I .6. Mo ) gives Proposition 2.7's canonical homotopy class of singular frame for T- Mo. (Theorem 2.9 assumes that the canonical singular frame for Mo is annihilated by the homomorphism IWluw3; and this implies that this homotopy class is also annihilated by lWl.) The construction of cpz near .6. z using X can be made with a straightforward appropriation of the arguments in Step 3 of the proof of Proposition 2.5. These final details are left to the reader. Proof of Lemma 11.1. The singular framing X has been defined near the point p E .6. M by (11.11). First, choose any extension, X', of X over the remainder of .6. M so that (7rR - 7r£)-I(X' I .6. Mo ) is a singular frame for T* M as described in Definition 2.3. Because W is a spin manifold, the bundle N ~ .6. z is a trivial bundle, so it has a framing, h. If h 1 ,2 are a pair of framings of N then hI = 9 h2 , where 9 : .6. z ~ 80(3). Let Uo C .6. z be a regular neighborhood of .6.Mo U 'Y U .6.M. This Uo can be taken so that the boundary of its closure in .6.zis a sub manifold which is diffeomorphic to the connect sum of Mo with M. One can also take Uo so that the extension X' is defined on the boundary of its closure. ai and b bi. Let Ui C .6.z be a regular Fix i E {I,··· , r} and set a neighborhood of (.6. s 3 )auViU(.6.s3 h. This Ui can be taken so that the boundary of its closure in .6. z is a submanifold which is diffeomorphic to 8 3 • One can also take Ui so that X (and so X') is defined over the boundary of its closure. Let X .6. z - (Uo U (UiUi)). By construction, X is a smooth manifold with boundary, and X' is defined over ax. Let h be a frame for N over .6. z . Then X' = 9 (h lax) where 9 : ax ~ 80(3). Extending X' over int(X) is the same as extending g. Obstruction theory shows that the map 9 will extend if:
z
=
=
z,
=
z
(11.13) 1) 2)
g.: H 1 (aXjZ/2) ~ Hl(80(3)jZ/2) annihilates the kernel of the inclusion induced homomorphism i· : H I (aXjZ/2) ~ H 1 (XjZ/2). g.: H 3(aXj Z) -+ H3(80(3)j Z) annihilates the kernel of the inclusion induced homomorphism i· : H 3 (8X; Z) ~ H 3 (Xj Z).
These two conditions can be satisfied for some extension X' of X provided that the restriction of X to .6.Mo - Po differs from h by a map 90 : (Mo ~ Po) -+ 80(3) for which
406
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
(11.14) annihilates the kernel of i. : H1 (MojZ/2) 4- H 1 (WjZ/2). That is, if the invariant lw(-) of (2.12) vanishes on the homotopy class of T· Mo's singular frame (nil - n.i)-l(x I ~Mo). This proves the lemma. 0
g) Wz Near E_. The map cpz has now been defined near all of ~z save for the compliment in E± of a neighborhood of ~z. Let N' C Z denote a regular neighborhood of ~ZUELUER over which cpz is defined. With this understood, define Wz == CPzl', where I' is the 2-form of (2.3). The task in this subsection and the next is to extend Wz over the rest of ~z. In order to accomplish this task, it proves useful to focus first on E_. There are three distinguished regions of E_. Regions 1 and 2 each consist of r components. Each such component is labeled by i E {I,··· ,r}. To describe the i'th component of Region 1 or 2, it proves convenient to return to the notation and coordinates that are used in Section 10 to describe the meld region in E_ near Vi and (83 X 8 3 )a and (83 x 8 3 )b for a == ai and b == bi. In particular, return to (10.7) - (10.10). With the preceding coordinates understood, the i'th component of Region 1 is defined to be the compliment in the interior of the ball of radius 15/32 in r of the balls B± of radius 1/8 and center ±1/4, respectively. The i'th component of Region f is the transition region between the fully melded part of E_ and the part of E_ which agrees with E 4 _. Here is a 5 step definition of the i'th component of Region 2: 8tep 1: Introduce the annulus A C JR4 which is given as the compliment of the radius 13/32 ball about the origin in the ball of radius 1 about the origin. This A is identified as an open subset of the sheet Y1 of E4-. (In Section 10, Y1 is identified w:th the subset of JR4 that is the compliment interior of the radius 1 ball of the balls B±.) Step f: In JR4, intoduce the rays {rQ}~=o by (11.15)
ro == {(t, y) : y IrQ == {(t, y) : y
= 0 and t ~ O}.
= N- I (a -
1) Eel and t ~ O}.
Here, el is the unit vector along the first axis in ]R3. Step 9: Take the function (3 of (10.6) and define a map 1/J from ]R4 x ]R3 into ]R4 by setting (11.16)
1/J(x,y)
= «(3(1 x I),y)
with (3 as in (10.6). Here,]R4 is written as ]R x ]R3. Step projection
4: Introduce -the
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
407
(11.17)
Step 5: The i'th component of Region 2 is given as (11.18)
Region 9 contains the compliment in E_ of Regions 1 and 2. And; Region 3 intersects the i'th component of Region 2 in (11.19) where A' is the compliment of the radius 7/8 ball in the interior of the radius 1 ball. ·Wz
in Region 3
With the preceding understood, Here is a four step definition of Wz in Region 3: Step 1: Note that E_ in Region 3 (= R 3) agrees with E4- which has framed normal bundle. Use the framing, (, from Assertion 8 of Proposition 9.1. Step 2: Choose an exponentional map to map said normal bundle into Z. Step 9: Define a map, 'P, from a neighborhood of R3 into IR3 by using (2.14). The map 'P will have 'P- 1 (0) = R 3. Step 4: Define Wz on Region 3 to be (11.20) with J.I. as in (2.3) and with N as in Assertion 2 of Proposition 10.1. wZ in Region 1
The definition of 'P z in Region 1 is almost as simple: In each component of Region 1, E_ coincides with a sheet of E 4 - and so has framed normal bundle. Use the framing ( again. Again, pick an exponential map for the normal bundle, and define a map 'Pz using (2.14). This 'Pz will not necessarily match up where 'Pz has already been defined, i.e. near each Vi and near each (S3 x xp) C (S3 X S3)p. However, the differentials of 'Pz and 'Pz differ at most by a scalar multiple along E_ where both are defined, so it is a straightforward proceedure to modify 'Pz to match up with 'Pz where the two disagree. See the argument in Step 2 of the proof of Proposition 2.5. With this matching complete, define Wz in Region 1 by (11.21)
where p, is as specified in (2.3).
_ 'Pz -1() Wz = p"
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
408
Wz in Region 2
Fix i E {I, ... , r} and consider the definition of Wz near the i'th component of Region 2, i.e. near (11.18). The 2-form Wz will be defined near (11.18) in r x 1R3 as the pull-back via the map"pl l"p I of a 2-form on 8 3 -U~=o(83nr",). This 2-form PN, is given as follows: First, let {p", == 83nr",}~=o. Then, employ:
LEMMA 11.2. Let N ~ 1 be given as well as N + 1 distinct points {p"'}~=o C 8 3 • For each 0: E {O,··· ,N}, let E", C 8 3 be an embedded 9- ball with E", n (U""p",,) = p",. Orient aB", by the normal directed towards Pa. Let Wa be a
closed 2-form on Ea - Pa with the following property: 1) 8Bo Wo l.
J
= J8B .. Wa = liN if 0: ~ l.
2) Then, there is a closed 2-form, PN, on 8 3 - U~=oPa which, for all to E", - Pa as W",.
0:,
restricts
Proof. Use Meyer-Vietoris. The lemma gives PN once suitable {Wa}~=o are specified. These should be chosen so that ("pI l"p I)"PN agrees with Wz where Region 2 overlaps Regions 1 and 3. (The overlap with Region 1 determines Wo and the N components of the overlap with Region 3 determines {W",}a~l. In this regard, remember that E_ in Region 2 is made by modifying the amounts of push-off of N sheets, {Ya}~=l' of E 4_. These push-offs are all parallel and in the e3 direction with respect to the frame' of E 4 _. On the sheet Y"" the frame ( is the push-off copy of the frame, on Y1 • Thus, the frame, on each sheet of (11.21) agrees with the constant frame (el, e2, e3) for 1R3 .) The details here are left to the read&. 0
h) Wz near E+" Where E+ and E4+ differ, E+ = 8(E_). In fact, E+ can be divided into three regions, which are Region 3 and the image by 8 of Regions 1 and 2 in -E_. On Region 3, E+ and E4+ agree. With this understood, the form Wz should be defined near the 8 image of the E_ regions 1 and 2 by pull-back using the map 8. The definition of Wz on Region 3 of E+ mimics the definition of Wz on Region 3 of E_ and the details are left to the reader.
i) The form Wz on Z3" Remember (from this section's introduction) that the original cobordism, W, between Mo and MI was split in half as WI U W3 , and this resulted in a corresponding split of Z = Zl U Z3. The preceding subsections defined Wz on N Zl - Zl, and it is the purpose of this subsection to describe Wz on N Za - Z3· But for an obvious change of notation, the construction of Wz on N Za - Z3
repeats the constructions of the previous subsections (a- h). (The notation change replaces W == WI by W == W3 and (Mo,Po) by (Ml,PI).)
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
409
j) Continuity of Wz. Let Z == Z3 U Z3 as in the introduction to this section. Likewise, let W == WI U W3 • Let I:z == I:ZI U I:Z3 and let N z be the corresponding union of NZI and Nzs • The continuity of Wz cross (Nz - I:z) n (M x M) is a concern because Wz has been separately constructed on N Zl - I:ZI and N Zs - I:zs • Let WZs denote the restriction of Wz to NZI - I:Zl and let wZs denote the analogous restriction to N Zs - I:zs . The constructions in Subsections lIb, and 11c insure that WZ I and wZs match up nicely near p x M and M x pin M x M. At issue is the match between WZ 1 and wZs near t:J.. M eM x M. Subsection f describes WZ 1 and wZs near t:J..M. The form WZ 1 is constructed with the help of a singular frame for M which is an extension over WI (see Lemma 11.1) of the canonical singular frame for Mo. Likewise, wZs is constructed near t:J..M with the help of a singular frame for M which is an extension over W3 of the canonical singular frame for MI. At issue is whether these two singular frames can be chosen to agree. The purpose of this subsection is to prove that these frames can be assumed equal under the assumptions of Theorem 2.9. To begin, consider WI and remark that the singular frame in question which defines wZl near t:J.. M comes from a frame Xl for the conormal bundle NZI for t:J.. ZI - hI U (n~';l Vii)) as a submanifold of Zl. Here, the notation is from Lemma 11.1 except that subscripts "l" now appear to signify subsets of Zl. In particular, Xl has the prescribed singularity of (11.11) along 71 U (U~';l Vii). Likewise, wZs is defined with the help of a frame, X3, for the conormal bundle Nzs of t:J.. zs - b3 U (n~;l V3i)) with the prescribed singularity of (11.11) along 73 U (Ui=lT3 V 3i). Theorem 2.9 assumes that (2.12)'s homomorphism lw annihilates the canonical singular frame for Mo. This implies that the proof of Lemma 11,1 can be repeated with minor notational changes to prove that Xl extends over (11.22) as a frame for the conormal bundle N z for t:J..z in Z. Likewise, Theorem 2.9 assumes that lw annihilates the canonical singular frame for Mlj and so X3 extends over (11.22) also. With the preceding understood, then the following lemma implies that Xl and X3 can be chosen to agree. Thus, the lemma below resolves the continuity issue. LEMMA 11.3. Let X == Xl or X3. If (7rR - 7riJ-l(x I t:J..Mo) gives Definition 2.8's canonical homotopy class of singular frame for T* .l\.fo, then Definition 2.8's canonical homotopy class of singular frame for T* Ml is given by (7rR - 7riJ-l(X I t:J..M1 ) · Proof. To start the argument consider the following three remarks: Remark 1 is that the dual, N to the normal bundle of ~w C W x W is canonically
w,
410
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
isomorphic to T*W. The isomorphism is 11'1 - 1l"R : T*W -+ T*(W x W) 1.60. (The image of the preceding map annihilates T ~ w.) Remark 2 is that the restriction of N to ~z has a natural line subbundle, namely Span(dF) c Nw, where F is the function in (3.20). The quotient bundle is naturally isomorphic to N Thus, N splits over ~z as
w
z.
N
(11.23)
w~ N zEB
w
Span( dF)
Remark 3 is the observation that, as in Proposition 2.7, there are, up to homotopy, two canonical, honest framings, Ct+,X-), of N ~ ~z which can be obtained from the singular framing X. (Copy the construction of (± in the proof of Proposition 2.7 and use the fact that the singularity of X along any of the paths 7'1 U 'Y3 or {vu} ~~1 or {Va i } ~;L are independent of the parameter 0 along that path. See (11.11).)
z
Given the following three remarks, it follows that X with dF gives a framing of N $ N over ~z, namely «X+,dF), (X-,dF».
w w
LEMMA
N
11.4.
The framing ((X+,dF), (X-, dF» extends to a framing of over ~w.
w w EB N
Accept this lemma and here is how to finish the proof of Lemma 11.1 's second assertion: It follows from Lemma 11.4 that the framing for N EB N over ~Mo given by «X1+, dF), (Xl-, dF» extends over all of ~w to give a framing, «X~+, dF), (X~-, dF», for N EB N over ~Ml' Suppose first that (X1+, Xl-) gives Atiyah's canonical framing on the nose. (See, e.g. Assertion 3 of Proposition 2.7.) Then, because W has index zero, (X~+,X~-) must give Atiyah's canonical framing for MI. Now, suppose that (X1+,XI-) = gA, where 9 is a map from Mo to Spin(6) with minimal, non-negative degree, and where A is a frame which gives Atiyah's canonical frame. There is no obstruction here to extending 9 over ~w as a map to Spin(6). With this extension understood, it follows that g-1 (X~+, X~-) must give Atiyah's canonical frame for MI' (This is because W has signature zero.) By definition, there exists a map h from Ml of minimal non- negative degree such that hg- 1 (X~+,X~-) == (X3+,X3-). This implies that degree(hg-l) ~ O. (Note that the degrees of g's restrictions to Mo and to MI must agree.) Now, reverse the roles of Mo and Ml and also Xl and X3 in the preceding argument. The inevitable conclusion has degree(g h- 1 ) ~ O. However, deg(hg- 1 ) = - deg(gh- 1 ). so 9 and h must have the same degree. This implies the lemma in the general case. Proof. The framing «:~+, dF), (X-, dF» is defined over each {(~S3 )P}PE crit(j) and the task is to extend this frame over the open 4-ball components in .6. w -.6.z which are bounded by the 3- spheres in {(.6. s a)p}pE crit(J). For this purpose, fix p E crit(f) and introduce the coordinate sytem 1/Jp of (3.2) and let Up == 1/Jp(JR4). Note that Up x Up is a neighborhood of (P,p) in W x W. The projections 11'::1: of (11.9), (11.10) define a second product structure on Up x Up.
w w
w w
411
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
Let T denote the I-form on r which is the exterior derivative of the square of the distance function from the origin. Then, note from (3.25) that (11.24)
(11'+ - 1I':')T = dF
la
w
Thus, the inverse of (11'+ - 11'~) over 6.R 4 is a map which identifies N with T* 6.R 4. This map identifies the frame «X+, dF), (X-, dF)) with a frame for (T*r EB T*JR4) IS3 which gives Atiyah's canonical 2-frame (see Definition 2.8 and Lemma 2.11). Atiyah's canonical 2- frame for 8 3 extends over the 4ball, and so .the image of this extension under the map (11'+ - 11'~) extends «X+, dF), (X-, dF)). 0
k) Verification of Lemma 4.2. Define Wz on Nz - 6.z as above. If Wz can be shown to extend to Z - ~z as a closed form, then (2.28) completes the proof of Theorem 2.9. The extension will be made by appealing to Lemma 4.2. As previously remarked, the second condition of Lemma 4.2 follows from Proposition 10.1 so only Condition 1 of Lemma 4.2 is at issue. To verify Condition 1 of Lemma 4.2, remark first that the image of the class of Wz in H~omp(Nz) is represented by a closed 3- form, 71, which is obtained as follows: Let p : N z ~ IR be a smooth function which has compact support and which takes the value 1 near Ez. Then (11.25)
71 == -dp
1\
wz.
Clearly, this form integrates to zero over any closed 3-cycle in N z. But, to decide whether 71 is Poincare dual to uz, one must compute the integral of 71 over cycles which represent certain classes in H3 (Z, Z - Nz). To identify the relevant cycles, remark that
It is therefore permissable to concentrate on each factor in (11.26) separately. Since the arguments are the same for either factor in (11.26), the notation will be simplified starting in the next paragraph by using Z to denote either Zl or Z3. To begin the verification of Condition 1 of Lemma 4.2, remark that it is convenient to replace Uz by a homologous cycle. For this purpose, remark that an isotopy of E4% pushes this space into N z if it is not there already. With E4% in Nz, note that the class Uz in H,,(Nz,Nz - ~z) is the same as u' == [~z] - [EL] - [ER ] - N- 1 ([E,,_] - [EH])' The latter is obviously a sum of classes which are represented as the fundainental classes of oriented submanifolds of N z which have trivial normal bundles. As such, there is an unambiguous intersection pairing between u' and classes in H 3 (Z, Z - Nz)·
412
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
With the preceding understood, note that the Poincare' dual of 0" is characterized by the following fact: Its integral over a cycle in H 3 (Z, Z - Nz) is the same as the intersection number of said cycle with 0". Since the Poincare dual of 0" is equal to the Poincare' dual of O'z, it is sufficient to consider the integral of the 3-form 17 over cycles with boundary in Z - N z and compare the value of said integral with the intersection number of the cycle with 0". This last task is straightforward because one can consider each of the constituent submanifolds (i.e., tl.z, EL,R and E4±) separately. The task is left to the reader as an exercise. REFERENCES
[1] [2]
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[9] [10]
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
M. F. Atiyah, On jramings of 9-manifolds, Topology 29, 1- 7 (1990). S. Axelrod and I. M. Singer, Chern-Simons perturbation theory, Proc. XXth DGM Conference (New York, 1991), S. Catto and A. Tocha, eds., World Scientific, 1992, 3-45. S. Axelrod and I. M. Singer, Chern-Simons perturbation theory II, Jour. Diff. Geom. 39 (1994) 173-213. D. Bar-Natan, Perturbative aspects of the Chern-Simons topological quantum field theory, Ph.D thesis, Princeton Univ., June 1991. D. Bar-Natan, On the Vassiliev knot invariants, Topology, to appear. J. S. Birman and X-S Lin, Knot polynomials and Vassilievs' invarients, Invent. Math. III (1993) 253-287. M. F. Freedman and F. Quinn, Topology of -I-dimensional manifolds, Princeton University Press, Princeton 1990. L. Jeffrey, Chern-Simons invariants of lens spaces and torus bundles, and the semi-classical approximation, Commun. Math. Phys. 147 (1992) 563-604. M. Kontsevich, Feynman diagmms and low dimensional topology, MaxPlanck-Institute (Bonn) Preprint. X-So Lin, Vertex models, quantum groups and Vassiliev's knot invariant, Columbia Univ. Preprint, 1991. C. C. MacDuffe, The theory of matrices, Springer, Berlin 1933. J. Milnor, Lectures on the h-cobordism theorem, notes by L. Siebenmann and J. Sondau, Princeton University Press, Princeton 1965. L. Rozansky, Large k asymptotics of Witten's Invariant of Seifert Manifolds, University of Texas preprint 1993. N. Yu. Reshitikin and V. G. Thraev, Invariants of 3-manifolds via link polynomials and quantum groups, Invent. Math. 103 (1991) 547-597. C.H. Taubes, Homology cobordisms and the simplest perturbative ChernSimons 3-manifold invariant, Harvard University preprint 1993. V. A. Vassiliev, Cohomology of knot spaces, in: Theory of sing,/!-larities and its applications, V. I. Arnold, ed. American Math. Soc., Providence,
HOMOLOGY COBORDISM
413
1990. [17] V. A. Vassiliev, Compliments 0/ discriminants 0/ smooth maps: Topology and applications, Trans. of Math. Mono. 98, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, 1992. [18J E. Witten, Quantum field theory and the Jones polynomial, Commun. Math. Phys. 117 (1988), 351-399.
SURVEYS IN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY, 1995 Vol. 2 ©1995, International Press
Metabolic cobordisms and the simplest perturbative Chern-Simons 3-manifold invariant CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
1 Introduction. The perturbative, Chern-Simons three-manifold invariants were predicted by Witten [8J and then defined by Axelrod and Singer ([lJ and [2]). Kontsevich [4J has given a second realization of Witten's predictions; and the simplest of Kontsevich's invariants is the subject of this article, and its prequel, [7J. As described in the first article, [7J, the simplest of Kontsevich's perturbative Chern-Simons invariants is defined for compact, oriented 3-manifolds M which have the rational homology of S3. The invariant, 12 (M), is computed by an integral
h(M) = {
(1.1)
wAwAw,
lMxM
where w is a closed 2-form on M x M with a prescribed singularity on (1.2)
EM
= fl.M U (Po x M) U (M x Po).
Here, fl.M C M x M is the diagonal, and Po E M is a chosen base point. The reader is referred to Section 2 of [7J and Definition 2.8 of [7J for the details. (This article is a sequel to [7J.) Suffice it to say that HbeRham(M X M - EM) ~ IR, and w is a generator of this group. In particular, w restricts to every linking 2-sphere around EM as 2-form with total volume 1. None-the-Iess, w is constrained so that w A w = 0 near EM, thus insuring that the integral in (1.1) is well defined. a) Cobordisms and 12 • Let Mo and Ml be a pair of compact, oriented, 3-manifolds with the rational homology of S3. An oriented cobordism, W, between Mo and MI is a compact, oriented 4-manifold with boundary; and that boundary should be the disjoint union of Mo and MI. Furthermore, the induced boundary orientation (using the outward pointing normal) should be correct for MI and wrong for Mo. IT W is also a spin manifold, then the cobordism is called a spin cobordism. Theorem 2.9 in [7J gives a set of conditions on the spin cobordism W which imply 12(Mo) = 12 (M1 ). In particular, one condition in [7]'s Theorem 2.9 required that W have the rational homology of S3. It is the purpose of this Supported in part by the National Science Foundation. Dedicated to Raoul Bott on the occasion of his 70th birthday. 414
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
415
article to greatly relax this condition. The relaxed conditions are stated below in Theorem 1.2. Here is a corollary of Theorem 1.2: THEOREM 1.1. The invariant 12 (} equals zero on a 9-manifold with the integral homology of S3.
The full statement of Theorem 1.2 requires the following digression to introduce some necessary terminology. To start the digression, introduce tor(H2) C H 2 (Wj Z) to denote the torsion sub-group. Next, recall that there is a natural, symmetric, bilinear form on H 2 (Wj Z) H 2 (Wj Z)/tor(H2), this being the intersection pairing. This form is non-degenerate, but not in general unimodular. (It is unimodular if Mo and Ml have the integral homology of S3.) The intersection form, (3, on H 2 (W; Z) will be called equivalent to a sum of metabolics ifit is conjugate under GL(·,Z) to
=
(1.3) where H(m) for mE Z is the symmetric, 2 x 2 matrix with zero on the diagonal and with m in the off diagonal entries. For example, the compliment of a pair of disjoint, open balls in S2 x S2 is a spin cobordism between S3 and S3 whose intersection form is conjugate to either H(I) or to H(-I), depending on the orientation. End the digression. THEOREM 1.2. Let Mo and Ml be compact, oriented, 9-manifolds with the rational homology of S3. Let W be an oriented, spin cobordism between Mo and MI. Suppose that: 1) The intersection form of W is equivalent to a sum of metabolics. 2) The inclusions of both Mo and Ml into W induce injective maps on
Hd·jZ/2). Then 12CMo)
= h(Md.
Theorem 1.2 is an immediate corollary to Theorem 1.3, below. The statement of Theorem 1.3 requires the following 2-part digression. For Part I of the digression, consider a compact, oriented 3-manifold M with the rational homology of S3. Fix a point Po EM. Then, introduce from Definition 2.3 in [7] the notion of a singular frame for T· M. (This is a frame for T"CM - Po) with a prescribed singularity at Po.) As in Lemma 2.4 of [7], let c denote the set of homotopy classes of singular frames for T· M. Define an equivalence relation on c by declaring, and (' to be equivalent when, = g . (' where g is a degree zero map from M to SO(3). Let ~ denote the resulting set of equivalence classes. Finally, use Definition 2.8 of [7] to identify a canonical element CM E ~. For Part 2 of the digression l let W be a compact, oriented 4-manifold with boundary and suppose that M, as above, is a component of aw. Let K(M; W) denote the cokernel of the restriction homomorphism HI (W; Z /2) --+ Hl(M;Z/2). As in (2.12) of [7], introduce the' homomorphism lw : C --+ K(M; W). End the digression.
416
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
THEOREM 1.3. Let Mo and Ml be compact, oriented, :i-manifolds with the rational homology of S3. Let W be an oriented, spin cobordism between Mo and MI. Suppose that: 1) The intersection form of W is equivalent to a sum of metabolics. 2) Both CMo and CMI are represented by c with lw(c) = o. Then 12 (Mo) = h(M1 ). .
b) Proof ot Theorem 1.1.
Orient S3 as the boundary of the unit ball in C2. Let P denote the Poincare homology sphere. This is a quotient of S3 by a certain finite subgroup of SO(4), and as such, inherits an orientation from S3. (Note that P is an integral homology sphere.) Note that P is spin cobordant to S3, and there is such a spin cobordism with signature divisable by 8 (See, e.g., [3]). (The signature of a 4-manifold is the number of positive eigenvalues minus the number of negative eigenvalues in the intersection form after diagonalizing the latter over Q.) Let M be a compact, oriented 4-manifold with the integral homology of S3. There is an oriented, spin cobordism between M and S3, and the index of such a cobordism is automatically divisible by 8 (again, see [3].) Thus, there is a spin cobordism between M and S3 or between M and P with signature divisable by 16. Let W denote the afore-mentioned cobordism. If the signature of W is not zero, then the connect sum of W with some number of K3 surfaces (with the appropriate orientations) gives a new spin cobordism between M and S3 or P which has signature zero. This will now be assumed. The intersection form of W is a signature zero, unimodular, even, symmetric matrix. (The form is even if {3(x, x) E 2Z for all x.) Such a form is equivalent over Gl(·, Z) to a sum of metabolics as in (1.3) with all rna = ±1 (once again, see [3]). Thus, the first condition of Theorem 1.2 is met with Mo = M and with Ml = S3 or P. The second condition of Theorem 1.2 is also met because both Mo and Ml have trivial homology. It follows that 12 (M) = 12 (S3) or else 12 (M) = 12 (P). Now 12 (S3) = 0 (Theorem 2.9 in [7]) so Theorem 1.1 will follow with a demonstration that 12 (P) = O. With the preceding understood, let P denote the Poincare homology sphere with the opposite orientation. Then 12 (E.) = 12 (P) since PUP bounds a spin cobordism with index divisable by 16. However, unless 12 (P) = 0, this conclusion is incompatible with LEMMA 1.4. Let M be a compact, oriented :i-manifold with the integral homology of S3. Let M denote the manifold M with reversed orientation. Then 12 (M) = -12 (M).
Proof. The form w for the computation of 12 (M) is constructed after choosing a singular frame, (, for T* M in the class of CM. (See Proposition 2.5 in [7].) The frame (== «(1,(2,(3) must be compatible with the orientation of M. With this point understood, then (' == (-(1,(2,(3) will be an oriented, singular frame for T* M, which is in the class CM (see Proposition 2.7 and Definition 2.8 of
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
417
[7].) The form -w will result from the constructions in [7] using the frame ('. Meanwhile, the orientation of M X M is not sensitive to the choice of orientation for M. 0
c) An outline for proving Theorem 1.3. Here is a 4 step program for proving Theorem 1.3: Step 0: Start with a cobordism between Mo and Ml which obeys the conditions of Theorem 1.3. Appeal to Proposition 3.2 in [7] to find a cobordism W between Mo and Ml which decomposes as W l U W 2 U W3 with the following properties:
1)
2) (1.4) 3)
4)
aWl = Mo U M&, aW2 = M& U M{, and aW3 = M{ U Mit where M~ and M~ are compact, oriented 3-manifolds with the rational homology of S3. Wl 2 3 are oriented, spin manifolds. Both W l and W3 have the rational homology of S3. Meanwhile W2 has vanishing first and third Betti numbers; and W2 has a proper Morse function with no index 1 or index 3 critical points. Both CMo and CMl are represented by elements in the kernel of two
Step 1: Construct a compact, oriented 7-manifold with boundary Z C W x W. The boundary of this Z is the disjoint union of Mo x Mo, Ml X Ml and some number of copies of S3 x S3. Note that (1.5) where Zi C Wi X Wi are compact sub manifolds with boundary. The Zi are described in Section 3g of [7]. (The boundary of Zl, aZl, is the disjoint union of Mo x Mo and M& x M& plus copies of S3 x S3. Meanwhile aZ2 contains M~ x M&, M{ x M{ and copies of S3 x S3. Finally, aZ3 is the disjoint union of M~ x M~, Ml X Ml plus copies of S3 x S3. In addition, Zl and Z2 are glued together along M~ x M~, while Z2 and Z3 are glued together across M{ x M{.) Step 2: Inside Z, find an oriented, dimension 4 subvariety I:z with az being the disjoint union of I:Mo, I:Ml and copies of I:s3, one in each S3 X S3 boundary component. Note that (1.6)
where I:Z1 •3 are described in [7] (see Eq. (4.10) in [7] and consider Sections 4d, 4e and 10 in [7].) The subvariety EZ2 C Z2 is constructed here, and the details of the construction of EZ2 account for most of the length of this article.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
418
Step 3: Find a closed 2-form, Wz, on Z - Ez with the following properties: 1)
(1.7)
2)
3)
The 2-form Wz should restrict to Mo x Mo - EMo as the 2-form used in (1.1) for computing h(Mo). Its restriction to Ml x Ml - EMl should give the 2-form used in (1.1) for computing 12 (Mt}. The 2-form Wz should restrict to each 8 3 x 8 3 - Ess as the 2-form used for (1.1) for computing 12 (8 3 ) = o. The triple wedge product Wz 1\ Wz 1\ Wz should vanish near Ez.
Step 4: Given that Wz exists as prescribed above, use Stokes' theorem as in (2.28) of [7] to prove that 12(Mo) = 12(M1 ). d) Issues in the construction of Z, Ez and Wz. Compare the outline above with the outline in Section 2k of [7] for the proof of [7]'s Theorem 2.9 and note the similarity between the two strategies. The construction of Z2 C W 2 X W 2 mimics the construction of Zl and Z3 in [7]. In all cases Z. is given as F-1(0) for a function F (7rid - 7rll) on W. X W. which is constructed from an appropriately chosen function f : W. --+ [0,1]. Here 7rR,L : W. x W. --+ W. are the left and right projections. (As in [7], the extra 8 3 x 8 3 boundary components of Z. are in 1-1 correspondence with the critical points of the function f.) The construction of EZ2 here also mimics the construction of EZl and Ezs in [7] in that all are given as Ez. = ll.z. U EL U ER U E_ U E+. Here, as in [7], ll.z. C W. x W. is the diagonal, EL,R are sections for the projections 7rL,R, and E± are certain subvarieties which are constructed with the help of a pseudogradient vector field for the function f. As in [7], the variety Ez will restrict to each component M x M C az as EM. Furthermore, the variety Ez. is constructed so that the conclusions of Lemma 4.1 hold for Ez. This lemma gives necessary and sufficient conditions for Z2 - Ez. to admit a closed 2-form, Wz., whose restriction to each component M x Me aZ2 is a generator of H2(M x M - EM). The analogous closed forms, WZ1 and WZa are constructed on Zl - EZl and Zs - Ezs in Section 10 of [7]. The form Wz in (1.7) is defined so that its restriction to Z. = Zlo Z2, and Z3 is equal to the corresponding WZ., The construction of a 2-form wz. as above which satisfies the first two requirements of (1.7) follows essentially the same plan as used in Section 10 of [7] to construct WZ1 and WZa' The most difficult requirement to satisfy is the third requirement of (1.7). The new difficulty, not present in [7], is the fact that the restriction map £* : H2(Z2) --+ H2(Ez.) is not surjective when W has rational H2. Indeed, the arguments in [7] can be followed with minor modifications to construct a 2-form, !el.z., on the compliment of I:z. in a neighborhood of I:z. U aZ2 which obeys the first two conditions of (1.7) and which has s.quare zero near Ez•. However, Meyer-Vietoris shows that there is an obstruction in coker(£*)
=
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
419
to extending this form WZ2 over Z2 - ~Z2' (There is no such extension problem for ZI and Z3; see Lemma 4.2 in [7].) There is no argument at present which demonstrates that the coker(t*) obstruction is zero. But all is not lost because the application of Stokes' theorem in (2.28) of [7] requires less than the vanishing of WZ2 "wz2 near ~Z2' The application of Stokes' theorem requires only the vanishing of WZ2 "wz2 "wz2 • With this fact understood, remark that f!Lz2 - IJ. has cube zero if ~2 and IJ. both have square zero. Thus, the issue is framed as follows: Can the obstruction in coker(t*) be killed by adding a closed form IJ. to ~Z2' where IJ. has square zero, is smooth near ~Z2 and has support on Z2? As demonstrated in Section 6, the answer to this question is yes. The construction of IJ. as above requires that care be taken with the construction of E± for ~Z2' In particular, H2(E±) must be controlled; as well as the kernel of a certain homomorphism (1.8) The control of ker(t') requires arguments which do not appear in [7]. e) The remaining sections. Here is a brief outline of the remainder of this article: Sections 2, 3, 4 and 5 concern themselves with the construction of E± for ~Z2' In fact, Sections 2 and 3 are occupied with various preliminary constructions on the cobordism W 2 , with the proper introduction of E± reserved for Section 5. Section 4 describes a preliminary version of E±, while Section 5 constructs the final version from the preliminary version by ambient surgery in W2 • The proof of Theorem 1.3 is completed in Section 6. 2 Morse Theory. This section serves as a preliminary digression to introduce certain Morse theoretic constructions that are used in the subsequent construction of E± and ~z. The subject here is a compact, oriented, 4-dimensional cobordism between a pair of compact, oriented 3-manifolds with the rational homology of S3. Given such a cobordism, one can find a second cobordism which is described by (1.4) and Proposition 3.2 in [7]. The whole of the discussion in [7] concentrates on the factors WI and W3 (which have the rational homology of S3); and the discussion here will concentrate on the factor W2 • With this last point understood, let Mo,l be a pair of compact, oriented 3-manifolds, both with the rational homology of S3. In this section, W will denote a compact, oriented, 4-dimensional cobordism from Mo to Ml which has a good Morse function with only index 2 critical points. (Section 3a in [7] defines a "good" Morse function.) a) Algebraic considerations. The intersection form, /3, for W is a bilinear form on H 2 (W; Z) which is non-degenerate and symetric. Suppose that this form is conjugate over Gl(·, Z) to a form which appears in (1.3).
420
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
Concerning the homology of W, remember that W has a good Morse function with only index 2 critical points. The relative homology exact sequence gives
o ~ H2(W;Z) ~ H2(W, Mo;Z) ~ Hl(Mo;Z)
(2.1)
~
H 1 (W; Z) ~ 0,
and the group H 2 (W, Mo; Z) is freely generated. This implies that H 2 (W; Z) is freely generated too. Let {uiH=1 be a given basis for H 2 (W, Mo; Z), and {TiH=1 for H2(W;Z), Then the image of {Ti} in H2(W,Mo;Z) is given as {T; == Ej8i ,; . u;} for some integer valued matrix (8i,;). The matrix (8i,;) is invertible over Q, it is unimodular if and only if Hl(Mo;Z) = O. Given the basis {Ti} for H 2 (W;Z), then one can find a basis lUi} for H 2 (W, Mo; Z) for which the matrix (8i ,;) is upper triangular (see, e.g., [5]) with positive diagonal entries. That is, (2.2)
8.i,; = 0 if i
> j and 8i,i > O.
Note: If Hl(Mo;Z) = 0, then the basis {u;} == {T;} is allowed. Let / : M ~ [0,1] be the good Morse function witp only index 2 critical points. One can arrange for such an f to have one critical level, /-1(1/2). A choice of pseudo-gradient for the function f defines the descending 2-disks, {B,,- : p E crit(f)} , from the critical points of /. Each B,,- is an embedded 2-disks in /-1 ([0,1/2]) to which / restricts with a single maximum, p. Orient these disks and they give a basis for H 2 (W, Mo; Z). Using Milnor's basis theorem (Theorem 7.6 in [6]), one can find: 1) (2.3)
2) 3)
A good Morse function / on W with critical value 1/2 and only index 2 critical points. A labeling{b1, "0, br } of crit(f). A pseudo-gradient, v, for /.
And, these are such that the given basis {uiH=1 for H 2 (W, Mo; Z) is given by (2.4)
Here, [B,,-] E H 2 (W, Mo; Z) is the fundamental class for an appropriate choice of orientation for B,,-. b) Factoring the cobordism.
It proves convenient to factor the cobordism W into a linear chain of simpler cobordisms. The following proposition describes the process: PROPOSITION 2.1. Let M o,1 be a pair of compact, oriented 3-manifolds, each with the rational homology of 8 3 • Let W be a compact, connected, oriented 4 dimensional cobordism between MQ and MI. Assume that the intersection
421
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
form for W obeys (1.3) and assume that W has a good Morse function with only indea; 2 critical points. Then W can be decomposed as
(2.5) where Wj C W is a compact 4-dimensional submanifold with two boundary components, Fj and Fj+1' which are embedded, 3-dimensional sub manifolds of W. These have the following properties: 1) For each j, Fj has the rational homology of 8 3 • 2) Fn+1 Mo and F1 M 1. 3) For each j, Wj n Wj-1 Fj . 4) For each j,H2 (Wj ;Z) ~ EB2Z and the intersection matria; is conjugate by GL(2; Z) to H(mj) for some mj E Z - to}. 5) For each j, Wj has a good Morse function which has only two critical points, both with indea; 2.
=
=
=
The remainder of this subsection is occupied with the proof of this proposition. Proof. The first step is the construction of the W j , and the second step verifies their properties. Step 1: Because of (1.3), the number r of critical points of f must be even. Given this point, fix small € > 0 and modify f slightly so that for j E {I, ... , r/2}, the critical points (b2j , b2j-d have critical value 1/2 - €. (j /r). Thus, (b r , br-d have the smallest critical value, while (b 2 , bt) have the largest critical value. Set F r / 2+1 M o, and for j E {2, ... , r /2}, let
=
Fj
(2.6)
=f-1(1/2 -
€.
(j - 1/2)/r).
Note that each Fj is a smooth, oriented submanifold which splits W into two pieces. For 2 ~ j ~ r /2 f let V; C W denote the closure of the component of W - Fj which contains Mo. Set W r / 2 Vr / 2 and for 1 < j < r/2, set
=
(2.7) For j = 1, define W1
Wj
=W -
=V; -
int(V;
+ 1).
int(V2) and define F1
= M 1.
Step 2: Consider now the properties of the {Wj} and {Fj }: First of all, Assertions 2 and 3 of Proposition 2.1 follow by construction. As for Assertion 5, note that Wj is a submanifold with boundary in W which contains no critical points of f on its boundary, and which contains only the critical points b2 j, b2 j-1 of f in its interior. Thus, a rescaling of f on Wj will yield a good Morse funhion on Wj to verify Assertion 5 of Proposition 2.1. The proofs of Assertions 1 and 4 of Proposition 2.1 require a digression to construct representative cycles for the generators {Til of H 2 (W; Z). The cycle for a given Ti will be the fundamental class of a submanifoldTi C W. To start the digression, remember that H 2 (Wj Z) is assumed to have a basis {Tj}j=l in which the intersection form is given by (1.3). And, remember that
422
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
the image of Ti in H 2 (W, Mo; Z) is given by EbE crit(f)Si,j(b) . Uj(b) , where Uj(b)s shorthand for [B b_] with b bj • (This introduces the indexing function j(.) : crit(J) -+ {1, ... ,T} which is defined so that j(b) j when b bj.) Finally, remember that the Morse function, and its pseudo-gradient have been assumed chosen so that the matrix (Si,j) obeys (2.2). The submanifold representative T i , for Ti can be recovered from (Si,j) and {Bb- : b E crit(f)} by the following construction: Let M1 / 4 ,-1(1/4). Note that M1 / 4 is diffeomorphic to Mo. Note as well that CbB b_ n M 1 /4 is an embedded circle which is naturally oriented given that B b- is oriented. Thus, Cb- determines a homology class, [Cb-] E HI (M1 / 4 ; Z). Meyer-Vietoris (Eq. (2.1)) implies that
=
=
=
==
(2.8) Construct push-offs of each Cb- by taking a push-off copy of the corresponding Bb- and intersecting with M1 / 4 • Let!!:.i c: M1/ 4 denote the oriented 1dimensional submanifold which is the union, indexed by b E crit(f), of ISi,j(b) I push-off copies of Cb-, oriented correctly when Si,j(b) > 0 and oriented incorrectly otherwise. According to (2.8), this !!:'t bounds an oriented surface with boundary, Ri C M 1 / 4 , which is such that int(~) n!!:.i = 0. With ~ understood, represent Ti by the fundamental class of a subvariety TI which is defined to be the union of ~ with the union, indexed by b E crit(f), of ISi,j(b) I push-off copies of Bb-, oriented correctly if Si,;(b) > 0 and oriented incorrectly otherwise. Smooth the corners of TI near -, J.t. to obtain an embedded surface, Ti C W. This Ti is naturally oriented and its fundamental class representJ5 the class Ti. End the digression. To return to the proof of Proposition 2.1, and, in particular, the proof of Assertion 1. By construction, H 2 (V;, Mo; Z) is generated by {[Bb-] : j(b) ~ 2j -I} and thus is a free group. Since Mo is a rational homology sphere, H 2 (Mo; Z) = 0 and therefore (1.3) (with V; replacing W) asserts that H 2 (V;; Z) is also free; by construction, its generators are UTi] : i ~ 2j - I}. The intersection form of V; is the restriction of the form for W to {[Ti] : i ~ 2j - I}. This is a sum as in (1.3) and is non-degenerate over Q. The non-degeneracy of the intersection form of V; over Q implies that F j is a rational homology sphere. To prove Assertion 4, note that H2 (Wj , Fj+l; Z) is freely generated by {[Bb_n Wj] : j(b) = 2j-1 or 2j}. Since Fj+1 is a rational homology sphere, H 2(Fj +l; Z) = 0 and so the (Wj, Fj+l) analog of (1.3) implies that H 2(Wj; Z) is free ofrank
2. Furthermore, the intersection form on H 2 (Wj; Z) must be non-degenerate because the boundary of Wj has no rational homology. In fact, the inclusion of Wj into V; induces an injection H 2(Wj ; Z) -+ H 2(V;; Z) with image the generators [T2j-l] and [T2j ]. This implies the statement in Assertion 5 concerning the intersection form on H2 (Wj; Z). Here is why H2(Wjj Z) injects into H 2(V;j Z): One must prove that the submanifolds {T2j, T2j-t} are homologous to submanifolds which lie in Wj.
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
423
This happens if T2 j and T2 j-l have zero intersection number with all B b- for b = bi and i > 2j. Indeed, if T == T 2 j, T 2j - l has zero intersection number as described, then the intersection points of T with each such Bb- can be paired as ± pairs. (One point with positive intersection number, and one with negative.) Then, surgery on these embedded So's in T will yield a new surface, T', (with larger genus) which is homologous to T and which has no intersection with Bbwhen b == bi and i > j. (Mimic the tubing construction in Section 5d of [7].) The pseudo-gradient flow can then be used to isotope this T' into Wj. With the preceding understood, the lemma follows with the realization that the intersection number of T, as above, with Bb-, as above, is a linear functional of the entries of the matrix (Si,j)i>j. And, this is, by assumption, the zero matrix. 0
c) Z and W x W. This subsection describes Z C W x W, a submanifold with boundary. For the most part, the discussion here mirrors the discussion in Section 3g, h of [7] where an analogous Z is defined. The stage is set with the following Definition: DEFINITION 2.2. Let M o, Ml be compact, oriented 3-manifolds with the rational homology of 8 3 •
. A simple type cobordism: A cobordism W between M o and Ml is of simple type if the following criteria are met: 1) W is oriented and connected. 2) W has a good Morse function with only two critical points, both of index 2. 3) H 2 (W; Z) ~ Z2, and the intersection form of W is conjugate over GL(2; Z) to H(m) for some integer m "I- O• . A simple type Morse function: Let W be a cobordism of simple type. Let ~ [0,1] be a function and let v be a pseudo-gradient for I. Then (I, v) are of simple type if the following criteria are met: 1) 1_1(0) = M o and 1-1(1) = MI. 2) dl "I- 0 near 8W. 3) I has only two critical points, (bl'~)' both with index 2. 4) 15/16 < l(b 2 ) < 1/2 < I(bt} < 17/16. 5) There are integers ml > 0, m2 > 0 and ml,2; and there are orientations of the descending disks from b1 and ~ such that
I: W
(2.9)
0"1
== ml . [Bbl-J + ml,2 . [Bb2-J and
0"2
== m2 • [Bb2-J
generate the image in H2(W, Mo; Z) of H2 (W; Z). 6) The pseudo-gradient v is good in the sense of Definition 3.1 in [7J. With the stage set, assume below that W is a cobordism of simple type, and that (I,v) are a pair of Morse function and pseudo-gradient on W which are also of simple type.
424
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
As in Section 3g of [7], introduce
Z
(2.10)
=((x,y) E W x W: F(x,y) =fey) - f(x) = O}.
Define Z C Z by intersecting the latter with the compliment in W x W of (open) small radius balls about (bl' bl ) and (b 2 , b2 ). That is, mimick the constructions in Sections 3i and 3h of [7]. Some properties of Z are listed below: A manifold: Z is a manifold with boundary,
(2.11)
az = (Mo x Mo) U (Ml
X
Mt) U (S3
X
S 3ht U (S3
X
S3)b2 j
here (S3 x S 3h is the link around Z's singularity at (b, b). (See Section 3h of
[7].) Orientation: The manifold int(Z) is naturally oriented using the orientation from W x W along with dF to trivialize the normal bundle to int(Z) in W x W. Orient the various components of (2.11) as described in Section 3h of [7]. Homology: The rational homology of Z is described by
2.3. Let W be as described above. Then the following hold: Ho(Z) ~ R. Hl(Z) ~ o. The inclusion Z C W x W induces H 2 (Z) ~ H 2 (W x W) ~]R4. There is a surjection
LEMMA
1) 2) 9) 4)
(2.12) Here, L± ~ ]R are freely genemted by embedded 9-spheres in Z as described in Equations (3.92) and (3.33) of {7J. Proof. Mimic the proof of Lemma 3.7 in [7]. D 3 Constructing Tl and T 2 • The constructions in [7] aside, the proof of Theorem 1.3 is mostly occupied with constructions on W 2 x W 2 , where W 2 is described in (1.4). The previous subsection introduced a factorization of such a W2 as a sequence of cobordisms of simple type, each with a Morse function f and pseudo-gradient v of simple type. (See Proposition 2.1 and Definition 2.2.) The required constructions for W2 in (1.4) can be reduced to a series of identical constructions, one on each simple type cobordism factor in (2.5). With the preceding as motivation, this section will restrict attention to a cobordism W of simple type with a Morse function f and pseudo-gradient v which are of simple type also. The purpose of this section is to describe a very useful pair of 2-dimensional sub manifolds of W, Tl and T 2 , whose fundamental classes generate H 2 (W) and give the intersection form H(m). Thus, this section serves as a second digression before the construction of E±.
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
425
a) Reconstructing T2 • The submanifold T2 is obtained by smoothing the corners of a CO embedding of a smooth surface into W. This embedding can be obtained as follows: Step 1: Let V C W denote the set {x E W : I(x) ~ 1/4}. To construct T 2 , first introduce the number m2 from (2.9) and take m2 push-off copies of Bb2 _ n V, all with the same orientation. Make these push-offs so that f restricts to each copy with only one critical point, a maximum. And require that said maximum be close to b2 in the following sense: Use the Morse coordinates of (3.2) in [7] and the Euclidean metric on lR" to measure distance. With this understood, the distance from each such minimum to b2 should be much less than the number r which is used in (3.29) of [7] to define the boundary of Z. To be precise, work in the Morse coordinates of (3.2) in [7] near b2 • Choose m2 distinct unit vectors {ncr} in the (X3, X4) plane. Then, choose f > 0 but with f «r. Define the o:'th push-off of Bb2- to be the set (3.1)
Step 2: Use B~2_ to denote the resulting m2 push-offs of Bb2; this is an oriented, submanifold with boundary in V. It is important to realize that 8B~2_ C M 1/ 4 == 1- 1(1/4) is a disjoint union of m2 embedded, oriented circles. These circles bound an oriented, embedded surface with boundary R2 C M 1 / 4 which intersects 8B~2_ as 8R2. Take such an R2 which is connected and which has no compact components. Set (3.2) This is a (tame) CO-embedding of a smooth surface; the embedding is smooth save for the corners along 8R2 • However, these corners are right angle. corners in a suitable coordinate system and can be smoothed without difficulty. The resulting smooth submanifold of W is T 2 • Step 3: The push-offs B~2- can be constructed so that T~ has the following properties: 1) No pseudo-gradient flow line intersects T~ more than once. 2) No pseudo-gradient flow line is anywhere tangent to B~2-' 2) T~ has empty intersection with Bb2-' (3.3) 3) The restriction of 1 to B~2- has only index 2 critical points, and precisely one on each component. 4) Each component of B~2- intersects B~+ transverally in exactly one point. To satisfy (3.3), first note that the explicit description in (3.2) for B~2- obeys (3.3). (This is because the vectors {ncr} in (3.1) are assumed to be distinct.)
426
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
Second, note that B" _ can be made so that: (3.3) holds, 8B"2_ lies on the boundary of an embedded solid torus N C M 1/4, and Past(B~l-) n M1/4 lies in the interior of N. Note that the core circle of N is Bb2- n M1/4' (Recall from Section 5a in [7] the definition of the past and future of a set U (written past(U) and fut(U), respectively). For example, past(U) C W is the set of points which can be obtained from U by traveling along pseudo-gradient flow lines to decrease I.) The Morse coordinates in (3.1) extend over a neighborhood of Bb2- in W, and with this understood, the tubular neighborhood N is described by
N ~
(3.4)
(X1,X2, X3,X4) :
x~
+ x~
::; E
and x~
+ x~ = x~ + x~ + c,
Here c > 0 is an appropriate constant. Equation (3.3) follows by showing that 8B~2_ bounds an embedded surface with boundary in the compliment ofint(N). And, such a surface exists because the class T2 E H2 (W; Z) has zero self intersection number. With the coordinates of (3.1) and (3.4) understood, the submanifold R2 can be assumed to intersect a neighborhood of N as the set of (Xl, X2, X3, X4) which obey:
1) 2)
(3.5)
(X3, X4)
x~
= t . no<
for t ~
E
and some a E {I, ... , m2}'
+ x~ = x~ + x~ + c.
Step 4: Henceforth, assume that T~ in (3.2) obeys (3.3) and (3.5). The corner in T~ at 8R2 can be smoothed to produce a smooth submanifold T2 c 1- 1 ([1/4,1]) which contains R2 as a submanifold. The manifold T2 is obtained by flowing points in B~2- near M1/4 slightly into their past so that the result (also called B~2-) is tangent to M1/4 at 8B~2_ to infinite order. Note that T2 can be so constructed to obey 1) 2)
(3.6) 3) 4)
No pseudo-gradient flow line intersects T2 more than once. No pseudo-gradient flow line is anywhere tangent to T 2 • T2 has empty intersection with B b2 -. Where 1 > 1/4 + 1/100, the restriction of 1 to T2 has only index 2 critical points.
b) Constructing T{. It is convenient to replace Tl of the previous section with a different, though homologous submanifold. The construction of the new version of Tl requires first the construction of a piece-wise smooth submanifold T{ C W which is defined in this subsection. Second, the construction of the new T1 requires a modification of T{ to give a smooth submanifold, T{' C W. This T{' is described in the next subsection. The new version of T1 is finally presented in Subsection 2f, below. The construction of T{ is accomplished in the following steps: Step 1: Let M 3 / 8 == ,-1(3/8). Introduce the integers ml and ml,2 from (2.9). Use B~l- to denote the union of ml disjoint, push-off copies of Bbl-n
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
427
fut(M3 / s ) together with Iml,21 disjoint, push-off copies of B b2 -n fut(M3 / s ). Orient Bbl _ by taking the given orientation for the push-offs of Bbt _ and, if ml,2 > 0, the given orientation for the push-offs of Bb2-' However, if ml,2 < 0, use the opposite orientation for the push-offs of Bb2-' The function f should restrict to each of the ml push-off copies of Bbl _ to have only one critical point, a maximum. And this maximum should be close to b1 j its distance should be much less than the number r from (3.29) in [7] when distance is measured using the Euclidean metric on JR.4 in the Morse coordinates from (3.2) of [7]. Thus, use the Morse coordinates around b1 and (3.1) to define the typical push-off of Bbl-; in (3.1), use E « r and use distinct {no}. Note that fut(T2 ) intersects Bbt- in a finite set of arcs with one endpoint at b1 • With this understood, make the push-off copies of Bbt-n fut(M3 / S ) which comprise Bb 1 _ such that each intersects Bbl + transversally in a single point, and such that each intersects fut(T2 ) as a finite set of half-open arc with the following properties: 1)
(3.7)
2) 3)
Each end-point lies on 8B bt _. The closure of each arc has its second endpoint on the intersection with Bbl +. The function f restricts to each arc without critical points.
Meanwhile, the function f should restrict to each of the Iml,21 copies of Bb2to have only one critical point, a maximum. In this case, this maximum should have distance from b2 much greater than r (of (3.29) in [7]) when measured with the Euclidean metric in the Morse coordinates of (3.2) in [7]. Thus, a push-off copy of Bb 2 - in Bbt_should be given by (3.1) but with E» r. Also, for these Iml,21 push-offs of B b2 -. use a set of unit vectors {n~} in (3.2) that is disjoint from the set that was used to define Bb2 _. Require that
(3.8) whenever Be B b1 - is any of the set of Iml,21 push-off copies of B b2 -n fut(M3 / s) in B bt _. (See (3.5) and (3.6.3).)
Step 3: The boundary of B b1 - is a diSjoint union of oriented circles in M 3 / S ' This union of circles defines a cycle which is null homologous in M 3 / S ' And, 8B~1_ bounds an oriented, embedded surface with boundary, R~ C M 3 / S , which intersects 8B bt _ as 8R~. Take R~ which is c'onnected and which has no compact components. With R~ and Bb 1 _ understood, set (3.9)
428
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
c) Constructing T{'. Given that T2 has already been constructed, it is desirable to modify T{ by isotopy so that the result, T{', has the following property: 1) No pseudo-gradient flow line intersects T{' more than once where f :5 sup(fIT2). (3.10) 2) No pseudo-gradient flow line is anywhere tangent to T{' where f :5 sup(fIT2). If T{' == T{ is given by (3.9), this condition may not hold. (Note that (3.10) holds separately for R~ and for B~l-') However, (3.10) can always be achieved by redefining the push-offs in Bbl _. The redefinition of B~l _ begins with the following observation: A component B C B b1 - which is a push-off copy of B b3 - needs a choice of fin (3.1) for its definition. Let fl denote the chosen value of f. Likewise, each copy of B b2 comprising B b2 _ needs a choice of f in (3.1). Use f2 to denote the choice here. One is required to choose fl » f2. If fl is, none-the-Iess, much less than f(b 1 ) - f(b 2), then there are numbers hI < h2 which are both greater than sup(fIT2 ) but which are both significantly less than f(b 1 ) (as measured in multiples of fd and also less than the maximum of f on any of the components of B b1 -. Note next that 8Bi_ is disjoint from the solid torus N in (3.4). This implies that 8R~ has a collar C C R~ which is disjoint from N. Each component of C is an embedding in R~ of [0,1] x 8\ and the convention will be that {O} x 8 1 corresponds to a component of 8R~. Fix such a collar with the following properties: A component which intersects a push-off of Bb2- in B b2 - should be disjoint from fut(T2 ). (See (3.8).) And, a component which intersects a push-off of Bbl- in B~2_ should intersect fut(T2 ) as an arc between said components two boundaries. (See (3.7).) Define a re-imbedding of C u B~l _ in W as follows: Move points of C u B~l by an isotopy of W which pushes points along pseudo-gradient flow lines. The result of the isotopy should push B~l _ to where f ~ hI but it should leave the image of C where f :5 hI. Thus, 8R~ is pushed to f-l(hl). The isotopy should keep fixed the compliment in C of a neighborhood of aR~ and it should fix points in B b1 - where f ~ h2 • It is not difficult to make this re-imbedding so that
1) The restriction of f to the image of C has no critical points where f > 3/8. (3.11) 2) The restriction of f to the image of B~l- has only index 2 critical points, and there is precisely one on each component. The embedded image of C u B~l _ gives a piecewise smooth embedding in W of a union of disks. Indeed, the embedded image of C U B~l _ has a corner where the images of C and of B~l- intersect, that is, along f-l(ht}. Choose
429
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
in advance a neighborhood of this corner, and the image of C U B~l_ can be smoothed in the chosen neighborhood so that the result, 1 - , has the following properties:
Br
1)
2) 3)
4) 5) (3.12)
6) 7)
B~' _ = B~l_ where f < h2 • B~~ _ agrees with the image of C where f 2: hl.
The restriction of f to B~'l- has only index 2 critical points where f > 3/8; and there is precisely one on each component. Each component of B~'l- is either a push-off copy of Bbl -, or else one of Bb2 -' A component of B b1 - which is a copy of Bbl- intersects Bbl + transversely in a single point, Such a component also intersects fut(T2 ) in a finite set of halfopen arcs with their boundaries on M 3 / 8 • The closures of each half-open arc is an embedded arc whose other end-point is the intersection point with Bbl+' Furthermore, f restricts to each half-open arc with no critical points where f < 3/8. A component of Bbl _ which is a copy of Bb2- has empty intersection with fut(T2 ). No pseudo-gradient flow line is anywhere tangent to
B"bl-' Let (3.13)
Rr ==
R~
- C and define
T1il -= R"1 U B"bl-'
This submanifold obeys (3.10). (Where f 2: hl,T{' is obtained from R~ by flowing the latter along pseudo-gradient flow lines.) d) Intersection of fut(T{') with T2 and T{' with fut(T2 ). The intersection between fut(T{') n T2 is the union of a finite set of half-open arcs each of which has its endpoint at one of the points of T{' n T 2 , and viceversa. (Note that T{' n T2 = R~ n T 2 .) The closure of each half open arc is an embedded arc with its other end point where B~2- intersects B b2 +. There are at least m such arcs. The intersection ofT:' with fut(T2 ) is more complicated. After perturbing T{' slightly, this intersection can be assumed to have the following form: It consists of a finite, disjoint set of closed arcs, half-open arcs, and open arcs in T{'; and disjoint from these arcs, there is a finite set of disjoint, embedded circles. Each point of T{' n T2(= R~ n B:'2-) will be a boundary component for some arc, either half open or closed. (But, there may be more or less arcs than boundary components of arcs.) The closure of a half-open arc will be a smooth arc whose other endpoint lies on B:': _ n Bbl + (and thus in a push-off copy of Bb. _ in B:". _). The closure
430
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
of an open arc will also be a smooth arc, but with both of its endpoints in B~l_nBbl+. To see that such is the case, introduce R2 == fut(R2)n/- 1 (7/16). This will intersect TI' in the m2 push-off copies of Bbl-. (In fact, its intersection number with the union of said m2 copies is equal to m. See (5) and (6) of (3.12).) Each intersection point of & with TI' has one half-open arc component or one open arc component of T{'n fut(T2) passing through it. FUrthermore, each half-open arc component intersects precisely one point of TI' n &, while each open arc component intersects precisely two such points. Each half-open arc component intersects /-1([7/16, 1]) as a push-off copy of a pseudo-gradient flow line for / in Bbl- which ends in ~j and each open arc component intersects /-1 ([7/16, 1]) in a pair of such push-offs. The circles in T{'n fut(T2) can be assumed to lie in the interior of Rr. (See (5) and (6) of (3.12).) It is important to note that there are at least m half-open arcs components of TI/n fut(T2)j any less would be incompatible with the assumed value of m for TI' . T2. H a pair of points in TI' n R2 are points on the same open arc, then these points will have opposite local intersection numbers for T{' n T 2 • A similar argument shows that for at least m of these arcs, both the intersection point in B~/l _ n R2 and the endpoint in Rr n B~2 _ are points of positive local intersection number for T{' n R2 and for Rr n T2, respectively. With the preceding understood, fix one half-open are, (3.14) which intersects B~/l _ n R2 at a point of positive local intersection number, and which ends in Rr n B~2- at a point with positive local intersection number. e) HOInology of TI and T2 and the linking matrix.
There is one additional constraint that must be imposed on TI' j and this one also requires advanced knowledge of T2. Suppose that TI' and T2 have already been constructed. The surface T2 has some genus 92 ~ O. As such, its first homology has a basis which is represented by the fundamental class of a set, {112fj}~~1 C int(R2 ), of 2·92 embedded, oriented circles. Take nl (from above) like oriented, push-off (in R 2 ) copies of each "72a • Together, these form a set {p~J, where (3 runs from 1 to 292, and where i runs from 1 to nl. The pseudo-gradient flow pushes R2 isotopically into M 3 / 8 as the submanifold fut(R2) n M 3 / 8 , and thus the circles {p~J are pushed isotopically into M 3 / 8 as a set, {Pfj;} C M 3 / 8 , of 2 . nl • 92 circles. Fix the set of circles {Pfji} once and for all. These circles will be used to constrain Rr j but a short digression is needed to define these new constraints. Start the digression by observing that the surface T{' has some genus 91 ~ 0 and so its first homology is represented by the fundamental class of a set of 2·91 embedded, oriented circles, {111a}!~1 C int(Rn C M 3 / S • These generators should be chosen to be disjoint from the arc vO which is described in (3.14). (This is possible because VO is an arc with one endpoint on aR~ and the other in the interior of R~'.)
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
431
The manifold M 3 / s , being diffeomorphic to Mo, has the rational homology of Sa. This means, in particular, that some number nl ~ 1 of like oriented pushoff copies (in of each "110 bounds an embedded surface with boundary, Sa C M 3 / s. No generality is lost by assuming that R~ intersect each of the circles {pP.} transversally. Likewise, there is no generality lost here by requiring that the {"Ila} which generate H 1 (Tt) be disjoint from the set {ppJ. Push-off, in R~, the nl copies of each "I1a. Make these close to "Ila to insure that the push-off isotopy is disjoint from {pP.}. Find the submanifold with boundary Sa C M 3 / s which intersects the nl push-off copies of "Ila as its boundary. In general position, each such Sa will intersect each of the circles PP. transversally. So, there is a 291 x 292 matrix A == (Aa,p) where Aa,p is the sum of the intersection numbers between the sudace Sa and the nl circles {pP.} ~';1. (Here, the index {3 is fixed.) The matrix A will be called the linking matrix between the set {"Ila} and the set {pp.}. Note that the entries Aa,p are divisible by the integer nl, and that the definition of Aa,p requires the apriori choice of push-offs {p~J of {"I2P}· With the preceding understood, the point of this subsection is to remark that there is an isotopy of R~ in Ma/ s (reI aR~, the arc va, and R~ nT2 ) to a surface R*1 C M a/ s so that the linking matrix A* between the isotoped circles, {"I*la}, and {pp.} has all entries zero. In fact, this can be accomplished using finger moves to isotope "I1a to change its linking number with each PPI but leave unchanged the linking number with each PP.>I. (Note that the linking number with PPI can be changed only by multiples of an integer which divides nl, while the entries of the matrix Aa,p are divisible by nd Each such finger move changes R~ by an ambient isotopy which fixes the compliment of a small ball in R~ and which stretches the interior of this ball over a regular neighborhood of some arc in M 3 / s . The ability to simultaneously change all entries of A to zero is based on the fact that the finger move isotopy moves R~ only in tubular neighborhoods of arcs. Because each finger move changes R~ only in the neighborhood of a point, these finger can be made away from aR~, the path vo. For the same reason, the finger moves can be done so as to leave R~ n T2 unchanged. With the preceding understood, it will be assumed in the sequel that there exist nl ~ 0 and a set of:
Rn
1) (3.15)
2) 3)
circles {"I2P} C T2 which generate H 1 (n) for the homology of T 2 , nl push-off copies, {{PPi} ~';1}' of {'f/2P} , circles {711a} which generate HI (T{'),
with the property that the resulting linking matrix A = (A a ,/1) has all entries zero. Furthermore, {111a} will be assumed disjoint from Vo of (2.14) and from fut( {p~.,}).
432
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
f) Definition of T1 • With T{' understood, the surface Tl C W can now be constructed by isotoping T{' into the future a small amount along pseudo-gradient flow lines. This construction of Tl is accomplished by the following steps:
Step 1: Find an embedding (3.16) with the following properties:
(3.17)
1) cP is the end of an isotopy which moves points along pseudo-gradient flow lines. 2) cp is the identity where I ~ 3/8 + 1/100. 3) Let M == cp(M3 /s). Then 11M> 3/8. 4) I restricts to cp(VO) with out critical points. 5) inf(Jlcp({1]la})) > sup(Jlcp({pfji nT{'})). 6) I restricts to CP(B~'l_) with only index 2 critical points, one on each component.
To find such a cp, use the pseudo-gradient flow to construct a diffeomorphism (3.18)
1-1 ([3/8,7/16]) ~ M3/s
x [3/8,7/16],
where the pseudo-gradient flow lines are mapped to the lines p x [3/8,7/16], and where I is given by projection onto the second factor. With respect to (3.18), the embedding cp sends (p, t) to (p, g(p, t)), where g is a smooth function. It is left to the reader to find g which makes (3.17) true. (Remark here that {1]la} are disjoint from VO and from {Pfj.}.}
Step 2: With r.p understood, define (3.19) Also, introduce Rl == c,o(Rl'). Here are some important properties of T 1 :
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
433
1) No pseudo-gradient flow line intersects Tl more than once where f ~ sup(fIT2 ). 2) No pseudo-gradient is anywhere tangent to TI where
(3.20)
f ~ sup(fIT2 ). 3) Tl n T2 = int(Rt} n B b2 -·
4) Where f ~ 3/8 + 1/100, the restriction of f to TI has only index 2 critical points.
4 A start at Ez. This section begins the construction of the subvariety as in (1.6). The plan is to factor the cobordism W 2 from (1.4) as a sequence of cobordisms of simple type (Definition 2.2), and to define a E. for each component, simple type cobordism in this factorization. Then, EZ2 in (1.6) is defined to be the union of these E. for the constituent simple type cobordisms which comprise W2 • With the preceding understood, assume in this section and in Section 5 that W, and the Morse function f and the pseudo-gradient v are of simple type, as defined in Definition 2.2. Use the definitions in Section 2c to define Z C W x W. Sections 4 and 5 will construct a particular oriented, dimension-4 subvariety with boundary Ez C Z. The boundary of Ez will sit in 8Z. Furthermore, Ez will contain a class az E H4 (E z ,8E) which obeys the conclusions of Lemma 4.1 in [7]. As in Section 4c and (4.10) of [7], the variety Ez will be given as a union EZ2
(4.1) Here, 6. z is as described in Section 4d of [7], and EL,R are as described in Section 4e of [7]. (Remember: 6. z is the intersection of Z with the diagonal in W x W. Meanwhile, ER,EL are the respective intersections of Z with 7 x W and W x 7; here 7 C W is the pseudo-gradient flow line which starts at Po E Mo and ends at PI E Md a) A first pass at E_. Recall that the future of a set U C W (written fut(U)) is the set of points in W which can be reached from U by traveling along a gradient flow line in the direction of increasing f. Introduce (4.2) Equations (3.6) and (3.20) ensure that TI x fut(T2) and fut(Tt} x T2 intersect Z transversally, each as a smooth submanifold with boundary. These assertions are proved with the following fact: Let U C W be a submanifold which intersects no pseudo-gradient flow line more than once, and which is nowhere tangent to a pseudo-gradient flow line. Then fut(U) C W is a smooth submanifold with boundary, and that boundary is U.
434
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
b) E{_ as a cycle. To consider Ef_ as a cycle, it is necessary to understand first the boundaries of (T1 x fut(T2)) n Z and (fut(Td x T 2) n Z. One finds (4.3)
8[(T1
x fut(T2)) n Zl
= [(T1
x T 2) n Zl u [(T1 x fut(T2)) n 8Zl,
and, likewise,
(The conditions in (3.6) and (3.20) are used here.) It follows from (4.3), (4.4) that orientations exist for both (fut(Td x T 2 ) n Z and (T1 x fut(T2)) nz such that 8[Ef_l has support (as a cycle) in (S3 X S3hl U (S3 x S3h~. With the preceding understood, write
(4.5) where, Sbl+ C (S3 X S3hl while Sb~- C (S3 X S3h2' It is left as an exercise to prove that Sbl + can be identified as being some number of push-off copies of the right-hand sphere, (S3hl+ c (S3 x S3)bl; while Sb2- consists of some number of disjoint, push-off copies of (S3)b~_ C (S3 X S3)b2' (See the proof of Lemma 4.1, below.) The next task is to determine the homology classes of the cycles that Sbl + and Sb2- define.
»n Z and (fut(Td x T 2) n Z of
LEMMA 4.1. The components (Tl x fut(T2 E{_ can be oriented so that as a cycle,
(4.6) Proof. Orient E{_ as follows: To begin, orient T1 and T2 to make their intersection number [Til' [T2l equal to m. Let 01,2 E A 2T(T1,2) denote the respective orientations. Next, orient fut(Td and fut(T2) by using -v A 01,2, where v is the pseudo-gradient for f. (Note that v is tangent to fut(T1,2) and is inward pointing along Tl or T2') Orient T1 x fut(T2) as 7rL * 01 A 7rR * (-v A 02) and orient fut(Td x T2 as 7rL * (v A 01) A 7rR * 02. Notice that the former is oriented using the product orientation, but the latter is oriented in reverse. This insures that the respective orientations which are induced on T1 X T2 are, in fact, opposite. Near b1 , T1 is identified with m1 like oriented, push-off copies of the descending disk Bbl-' Using the Morse coordinates of (3.2) in [7], this descending disk is given by setting X3 = X4 = O. And, one can assume, without loss of generality, that 01 = 8"'1 " 8"'2' Here, the orientation for W can be assumed to be
o
=Near 8"'1 " 8"'2 " 8"'3 " 8"'4 . b ,fut(T is a union of some number of disjoint components.
These 2) 1 components can be described as follows: The pseudo-gradient flow isotopes T2
435
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
to where f ~ 7/16 in W. This isotopic image, '£..2' intersects TI transversally; in fact, '£..2 intersects TI in the ml push-off copies of Bb1 _. Each intersection of '£..2 with Bb1- defines a component fut(T2 ) near bl , and likewise each intersection point of '£..2 with one of the ml push-off copies of B b1 - defines a component of TI x fut(T2) near (b l , bl)' Thus, the intersection points of '£..2 with the ml push-off copies of Bbl- are in 1-1 correspondence with the components of Sbl +. Using Morse coordinates of (3.2) in [7] near bl , a typical component offut(T2) near bl is given by {x : Xl = O,X2 > O}. IT this component corresponds to a positive intersection point of '£..2 with TI, then this component can be assumed oriented by -OX2 "OX8 "OX4; here OX2 is equal to v where Xl, X3 and X4 all vanish and X2 > O. Thus, the corresponding component of TI x fut(T2) is oriented by
(4.7) where
(4.8)
Xl
= Xs = X4 = YI = Y3 = Y4 = 0
and Y2
> O.
Here, the orientation for the intersection of TI x fut(T2) with Z is given by contracting (4.7) with -dY2 + dx 2. The resulting orientation is OX1 " (OX2'+ ( 112 ) " OilS" 0114 , The induced boundary orientation is given by contracting this with -dX2 - dY2; and the result is OX1 "OY8 "0114 , Meanwhile, (SSh1+ = {(x,y) : YI = Xs = X4 = O,X2 = r}. At the point in (4.8), (SShl+ is oriented by OX1 "0113 " 0114 also. Notice that this orientation is the same as that of the boundary of the given component of TI x fut(T2), and this component, by assumption, corresponds to a positive intersection point between TI and L. To summarize the preceding, a component of Sb1 + is oriented the same as (S3hl+ if the corresponding intersection point between TI and L is positive; while it is oriented in reverse if the corresponding intersection point between TI and T 2 is negative. This observation justifies the factor of m in the first term on the right side of (4.6) because the algebraic intersection number between Tl and '£..2 is equal to that between TI and T 2, which is m. Consider now the analogous calculation near (b 2 , b2 ). Here, the roles of TI and T2 are interchanged. The intersection of TI and T2 occur along B~2 _; the m2 push-off copies of Bb2-' Thus, the components of fut(Tt} x T2 near (b2, b2) are in 1-1 correspondence with the intersection points of TI and B~2- as are the components of S62-' Use the Morse coordinates of (3.2) in [7] near b2 • A typical component of fut(Tt} x T2 near (b 2, b2 ) is given as (4.9)
{(X,y) : Xl
= Y3 = Y4 = O,X2 > O}.
IT the component above corresponds to an intersection point of TI with B~2which has positive intersection number, then the orientation of (4.9) is given by OX2 " OX8 " OX4 " 0Y1 "0112 at points where (4.10)
Xl
= Xs = X4 = YI = Ys = Y4 = 0
and X2 >
o.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
436
The orientation for the intersection of (4.9) with Z is given by contracting its orientation with -dY2 + dx 2 • The resulting orientation at (4.10) is OZ3 "OZ4 " 0111 " (0112 + OZ2). The boundary orientation is obtained by contracting again with -dX2 - dY2; the result is OX8 "OZ4 "0111 . Note that this orientation equals the given orientation on (8 3 )62_' The preceding is summarized as follows: A component of Sb2 _ is oriented as (8 3 )62_ if the corresponding intersection point of Tl and T2 is positive; and the component is oriented negatively if the corresponding intersection point is negative. Thus, the factor of m in the second term on the right in (4.6) also follows from the fact that Tl . T2 = m. 0 c) E 1 - as a smoothing of E~_. As defined by (4.2), E~_ is the union of a pair of 4-dimensional submanifolds with boundary in Z which meet along a common boundary component which is (Tl x T2 ) n Z. There are no obstructions to smoothing the crease along (Tl x T 2 ) x Z to obtain a smoothly embedded, oriented submanifold with boundary, El- C Z. The next few subsections will describe some additional properties of E 1 _.
d) E1+' Introduce the switch map
(4.11)
9:WxW---+WxW,
which interchanges the coordinates. This map preserves Z. Define 9(E~_) and E1+ 9(El-). Thus,
=
E~+
_
(4.12) e) The intersection with
~z.
Make the standard identification of ~w C W x W with W (project on either right of left factor). This identifies ~z with the compliment in W of the union of an open ball about b1 and an open ball about b2 • And this identifies E~~ n~z with the intersection of
(4.13) with the compliment in W of said balls. To begin the analysis of (4.13), note that fut(Td nT2 is the union of a finite set of half-open arcs which start at the points of Tl n T2 (this is the same as Rl n B~2_). The closure of each of these half-open arcs is an embedded arc whose other endpoint is in B~2- n Bb2+. Remark that there are at least m such arcs. The intersection of Tl with fut(T2 ) is the image under the embedding r.p in (3.16) of T{' n fut(T2 ). The latter is described in Section 3d.
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
437
It follows from the description in Section 3d of T{' n fut(T2 ) that the intersection of E l - with i:::.. z is the disjoint union of some number of arcs and some number of circles. The end-points of the arcs lie 8El _ n i:::.. z , that is, on (S3 x S3hl U (S3 X S3h2. It is important to note that there are at least m such arcs which join m points of Sbl+ n (i:::..sahl with m points of Sb2- n (i:::.. s ah2. Furthermore, the proof of Lemma 4.1 shows that for at least m of these arcs, the one end point in Sbl+ and the other in Sb2- lie in components which are oriented positively with respect to the given orientations of (S3)bl + and (S3)b2_' respectively. In fact, there is an arc, v C E l - n i:::.. z , which connects a positively oriented component of Sbl + with a positively oriented component of Sb2-' and which is characterized as follows: Before smoothing E~_ to E l -, this v was an arc in E~_ which intersected Tl n fut(T2) as l;?(vO) n i:::.. z , where VO is the half-open arc in (3.14).
f) Intersections with
EL,R'
The submanifold E l - can be assumed to have empty intersection with EL,R. Indeed, the flow line 'Y between Po E Mo and Pl E Ml misses a small ball around bl and b2 ; and a small perturbation of Rl and R2 will insure that 'Y misses these surfaces ·also.
g) Normal framings. The claim here is that E l - has trivial normal bundle in Z, and that there is a trivialization of said normal bundle which restricts to each component of Sbl + and Sb2- as the constant normal framing. (Recall from [7] that the constant framing of S3 x point in S3 x S3 is the normal framing which is given by 7rR * f, where 7rR maps S3 x S3 onto the right factor of S3, and f is a normal framing of the point.) The establishment of this claim requires the following six steps. Step 1: This first step identifies E 1 _: LEMMA
Tl
4.2.
The submanifold E 1 - is diffeomorphic to the compliment in
x T2 of a finite number of disjoint, open balls. Proof. The identification of E 1 _ starts with the identification
(4.14) where U is a finite set of disjoint, open balls. Meanwhile, (4.15)
[Tl x fut(T2 )] n Z ~ [(Rl x R 2 ) U (B~l_ x R 2 ) U (B~lj- x B~2-)]- U'.
Here, Rl x R2 and B~l _ x R2 are attached along their common boundary component, 8B~1_ X RI. Meanwhile, (B~l- x R 2 ) U (B~I-" x B~2-) are attached along their common boundary component, B~l_ X 8B~2_. Finally, U' C int(B~l_ x R 2 ) is a finite, disjoint collection of open balls.
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
438
Remember that (fut(Ttl x T2) n Z and (Tl x fut(n)) n Z are attached along their common boundary to obtain E l _. This common boundary is (4.16) where (Sl)m2 ~ (B~2_ n M). With (4.16) understood, one can see (4.14) and (4.15) as a decomposition of Tl x T2 less some number of open balls by writing TI ~ B~I_ URI and T2 ~ B~2_ U R2. 0 Step 2: The normal bundle to E I - in Z is an oriented three-plane bundle, and since E I - is not closed, this 3-plane bundle is classified by its 2nd StieffelWhitney class, W2' This class is zero for the following reasons: First, W2 (TW) = 0 since W is assumed to be a spin manifold. Thus, w2(T(W x W)) = O. Second, remark that T(W x W) IZ ~ T Z EEl~, where ~ is the trivial, real line bundle. Thus, w2(TZ) = O. Restricted to EI_,TZ ~ TEl _ EEl vE1 _, where vE1 _ is the normal bundle in question. Now, Tl x T2 is a spin manifold, and therefore w2(E l -) = OJ so w2(vE l -) = 0 as claimed. Step 3: Having established that E I - has trivial normal bundle in Z, it remains yet to establish that this normal bundle has a trivialization which restricts to each component of BEI - as the constant normal framing. Here is an outline of the argument: a) Remember that E I - is the image of an embedding of the compliment in TI X T2 of some number of open balls. With this understood, the proof establishes that this embeddin~ extends as an embedding of TI x T2 into W x W. This extension will be called E I _. b) The proof establishes that the normal bundle in W x W to EI - splits as N EEl~, where N is a trivial 3-plane bundle, and where ~ restricts to E I - C EI as the normal bundle to Z in W x W. c) The proof establishes that N is a trivial 3-plane bundle over EI _, d) Thus, N restricts to E I - as vEI-j and the restriction of a framing of N to E I _ gives a framing of vE1 _ which is homotopic to the constant framing over each component of BEl _. Step 4: To esteblish Step 3a, above, remark that a component, C of BEl on (83 X 8 3 )61 has a neighborhood in E I - which can be assumed to have the following form in coordinates from Lemma 3.6 in [7]: (4.17)
{(x, y) : X3
= X4 = Y2 = 0
and x~
+ x~ + y~ + y~ = yn,
where YI ~ (r/2)l/2. Here, C is given by (4.17) with YI = (r/2)1/2. Note that C is the intersection with (83 x 8 3 )61 of a push-off of the ascending 4-ball from the critical point (b l , bl ) for the function F on W x W which is given in (3.20) of [7]. Thus C bounds an embedded 4-ball in W x W, for example, the ball B C (W x W - Z) which is given by (4.18)
{(x,y) : X3
= X4 = Y2 = O,Yl = (r/2h/2 and x~
+ x~ + y~ + y~
$ r/2}.
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
439
Each boundary component of E 1 _ has its analogous Bj and these can be taken to be mutually disjoint, being all push-off copies of a descending 4-ball for F from (b l , bl ) or from (b 2 , ~). Glue these 4-balls to E 1 - along their common boundaries and smooth the corner along aE1 - to obtain EI -, an embedding of TI x T2 into W x W which extends E I -. Step 5: To establish Step 3b, note that the normal bundle to E1- in W x W splits as vEI - EEl ~ where ~ is spanned by a section of T(W x W) along EIwhich has positive pairing with dF. With this understood, consider the vector field -a/aYI in the coordinates of (4.17), (4.18). This vector field is nowhere tangent to E1 - and restricts to a neighborhood of B in EI - to have positive pairing with the -I-form dF. Thus, -a/aYI extends the preceding splittin~ of the normal bundle of E 1 - in W x W to a splitting of the normal bundle of E I in W x W as N EEl~, where N = vEI _ over E I _. Step 6: The fact that vEI _ is trivial implies that w2(N) = O. Thus, N is the trivial bundle if N's first Pontrjagin class vanishes. This class is computed as follows: Since PI (T(TI x T2)) = 0, it follows that PI (N) is the same as PI (T(W x W»IE 1 _. Thus, N is trivial if PI (T(W x W) is trivial as a rational class. The latter is trivial because PI (T(WxW» ~ lI'L *PI (TW) +lI'R*PI (TW)), and both these classes vanish because W is has non-trivial boundary. h) A fiducial homotopy class of normal framing. The previous subsection establishes that there are homotopy classes of normal framings for E 1 - in Z which restrict to each component of aEI _ as the class of the constant normal framing. The purpose of this subsection is to describe a subset of such classes which behave nicely when restricted to a specific set of generators for H1(EI -). To make this all precise, it proves useful to first digress to describe a set of generators of HI (E1 -). To begin the digression, take the generators {7]la} for HdT{') and {7]2,B} for HI (T2 ) as desctibed in (3.15). Choose a point Xl E RI and a point X2 E R 2 • Then, generators for H1(EI - ) are given by (4.19)
1)
{Sla
2)
{S2,8
== (CP(7]la) X fut(x2)) n Z}, == (Xl x fut(7]2,8)) n Z}.
Fix generators {Sla, S2,B} as above. End the digression. Ideally, a normal frame for E I - should restrict to these circles as a product normal frame, e = (el,e2,e3), for RI x fut(R 2 ) in W x W with the following properties: (4.20)
1) 2) 3)
el is normal to cp(M3 / S ) in W and (dJ, el) < O. e2 is normal to RI in cp(M3 / S )' e3 is normal to fut(R2} in W and (dJ, e3) = O.
LEMMA 4.3. Given generators {Sla, S2,8} for H.(EI_) as described in (4.19), there is a nonnal /rame for E 1 _ in Z whose restriction to each component 0/
440
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
8E1_ is a constant normal frame, and whose restriction to each
8
E {Slo,S2/3}
is described by (4.EO). Relllark: A normal frame for E 1 - which is described by Lemma 4.3 will be called a fiducial normal frame. Proof. The restriction of a given normal frame of E 1- to S E {Slo, S2/3} can be written as 9 . e, where 9 : S ~ SO(3). H 9 is null-homotopic, then., and only then can be homotoped to a frame whose restriction to s is equal to e. With the preceding understood, note that a map 9 : Sl ~ SO(3) is classified by the class in H1(Sl; Z/2) ofthe pull-back of the generator, u , of the module HI (SO(3); Z/2). Therefore, a normal frame for E 1- (which is homotopic to a constant frame on each component of 8E1 -) defines an element >.(e) E (EBoH1(SlO; Z/2)) EB (EB/3H 1(S2,B; Z/2)) which is the obstruction to deforming to a fiducial frame. By the way, note that when h : E 1 - ~ SO(3), then >'(h . e) = >.(e) + i* h*u, where i is the inclusion map of (UaS10) U CU/3S2,B) into E 1 _. To prove the lemma, take a normal frame for E 1 - and define a map q : (UoS1a) U (U/3S2/3) ~ Sl as follows: H s E {Slo,S2,B} and >.ce) has trivial summand in HI (s; Z /2), then make ql s the constant map. Otherwise, make qls a diffeomorphism to 8 1 (a degree one map.) Because {S10, S2,B} generate H 1(E 1-), this map q extends as a map q : E 1- ~ Sl which is trivial near 8E1_. Let j : Sl ~ SO(3) generate H1CSO(3» and set h == j 09: Then >'(h 0 e) = 0 because of the equalities i*h*u = (j 0 q)*u = >.(e). 0
e
e
e
e
e
i) H2(E1_) and H 2(E 1_). Lemma 4.2 implies that (4.21) Of course, H 2 (E1 -; 1R) is isomorphic to (4.21), but the proof of the results in the introductory section requires a set of generators for H 2 (E 1-i 1R). To give such generators, it is necessary to first choose orientations for Tl and T2 so that their intersection number equals m. Choose a point PI E B~l _ with f(Pt> < f1T2. Also, choose a point P2 E R2 which is on a gradient flow line which ends on MI. With these choices understood, then (4.22)
== (T1 x fut~» n Z,
1)
T1-
2)
T2- == PI x (fut(T2) n f- 1(P1»
are embedded sub manifolds of E 1 - each of whose fundamental class is a generator of H 2 (E 1-). To obtain the remaining generators, it is necessary to first choose embedded circles, {1/10} c R~ and {1/2,B} C R2 which generate the respective first homology of T;' and T 2 • Equation (3.15) introduces an integer n1 ~ 1 and then, for each /3, a set {P~J~l of n1 like oriented, push-off copies (in R 2) of 1/213. Let 1/~13 == UiP~ •. Orient this submanifold of M 1 /4 by taking the given orientation of
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
441
Pp;.
each For £Uture applications, it should be assumed, as in Section 3e, that {171a} is disjoint from fut({71~.a})· For each a, fix a set, 71~a C R~, of n1, like oriented, push-off copies of 711 a . Do not make a big push off: The push-off isotopy must not intersect £Ut( {71;.a} ) nor should (3.17.5) fail with {71~a} replacing {711a}. The remaining generators of H 2 (E1 _) can be taken to be the fundamental classes of (4.23)
j) Pushing off H2(E1 -). The second homology of EL with real coefficients is generated by (4.24) The second homology of ER with real coefficients is generated by the corresponding [TIRJ == 8.[T1 L] and [T2RJ = 9.[T2LJ. The inclusion map from EL U ER into Z identifies these four classes as generators of H 2 (Z). (Use real coefficients here and through out this subsection.) The inclusion map of E 1 - U ER U EL into Z induces a homomorphism (4.25) with the property that
1) (4.26)
2)
t· t .
3)
t·
([TI-J- [TlL])
= 0,
([T2-J - [T2 R]) = 0, [Ta •.a-J = 0.
As discussed in Section 4h, the submanifold E 1 - has a trivial normal bundle in Z with a fiducial homotopy class of framing which restricts to each component of 8E1 _ as the class of the constant normal framing. Choose a framing from such a homotopy class and use one of the frame vectors to push each of the submanifolds T1 -,T2 -, and {Ta •.a-} into Z - E1-. IT P2 is chosen so that fut(P2) is disjoint from T 1 , then the submanifold T 1 is disjoint from EH U 6.z. IT PI is chosen to be disjoint from fut(T2 ), then the submanifold T 2- is likewise disjoint from EH U6. z . As {71la} and £Ut( {71~.a}) are assumed to be disjoint, {Ta •.a-} is disjoint from 6.z. And, because of (3.17.5), {Ta ..a-} is disjoint from E H • Thus, T1 -, T2 - and all {Tal.a-} can be pushed off of E 1 - into Z - EI where (4.27) in an essentially canonical way. Both EL and ER have a canonical homotopy class of normal bundle framing. The canonical homotopy class of normal framing for EL is the class of the normal framing which is obtained by pulling back via the projection 7rR a normal bundle
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
442
framing for the arc 'Y in W. Similarly, the canonical homotopy class of normal framing for ER is obtained by pulling back via the projection 7rL the same normal bundle framing for 'Y C W. Fix a framing in the canonical homotopy class for EL'S normal bundle and use one of the framing basis vectors to push TlL and T2L off of EL into :E1- Then, push TIR and T2R off of ER into :El by the analogous method. These push-offs define a homomorphism (4.28) and the purpose of this subsection is to prove LEMMA 4.4. The classes ([T1 -] erate the kernel of ,'. Thus, ker(t')
-
[TIL]), ([T2-] - [T2R]) and {[Ta,p-]} gen-
= ker(t).
Proof. The proof considers each of the three kinds of classes in turn. Case 1: The class [T1 -] - [TlL]. To begin, remark that there is a natural push-off, Tf_, ofll_ into 1;1 which is obtained by using (4.22.1) withP2 replaced by a point p~ E M I / 4 - R2 which is a push-off of P2. This sort of push-off can be defined by a normal framing, (el' e2, e3), for E I - which has the following property: Along T 1 - C (Tl X fut(T2)) 11 Z, the frame is the restriction from Tl x fut(T2) of a product frame, where
(4.29)
1) 2)
is normal to fut(T2) in Wand (df,ea) = 0, (el. e2) is a normal frame for Tl in W.
ea
The push-off TL as described above is then obtained by pushing off T 1 - along the normal vector e3. Now Tl has trivial normal bundle (its self intersection number is zero), so there is a normal frame as in (4.29) for E 1 - along T 1 _. Furthermore, LEMMA 4.5. There is a fiducial normal frame from Section 4h whose restriction to T 1 - is described by (4.29).
This lemma is proved below; accept it for the time being to continue with the proof of Lemma 4.4 for [T1-] - [TIL]. An acceptable push-off of TlL is defined as follows: Take a point PofMl/4 which is near too, but not equal to 'Y n M 1 / 4 • A push-off of TlL into Z - :El is (Tl X fut(Po) n Z. Since R2 and Rl both are connected, and both have non-trivial boundaries, one can find a path p, in M 1 / 4 with one endpoint P~ and the other Po and whose future is disjoint from Tl, T2 and 'Y. With this understood, then (Tl x fut (p,)) n Z is an isotopy in Z - :El between the push-offs of T 1 - and TlL.
e
Proof. Let denote a normal frame from Section 4h. There is a map 9 : T 1 _ --+ 80(3) such that g. <elTl - ) is described by (4.29). With this under-
stood, the lemma follows if such a map 9 can be found which is null homotopic. Now, a map 9 : T 1 - --+ 80(3) is null homotopic if and only if the map lifts to a
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
44S
map into 8 s . The obstruction to such a lift is an element (J(9) E HI (T1-; 7l. /2) which is the pull-back by 9 of the generator of H1(80(3); 7l./2). Note that (J(91 . 92) = (J(91) + (J(92). Store this information. Consider now the homotopy classes of normal frames which have the form of (4.29). Given that es is constrained to lie on a fixed side of R 2 , these are in 1-1 correspondence with the homotopy classes of normal frames of T 1 • The latter set is isomorphic (though not canonically) to the set of homotopy classes of maps from T1- to 80(2) ~ 8 1 • Meanwhile, a map h : T1 - ---+ 8 1 is distinguished up to homotopy by an invariant (J1 (h) E HI (T1-; 7l.) which is the class of the pull-back by h of the generator of H1(8 1). Furthermore, let j : 80(2) ---+ 80(3) denote the usual inclusion. Then j 0 h : Tl- ---+ 80(3) and one has (J(j 0 h) = (J1 (h)mod(2). The lemma now follows from this last comment because H1(T1 _;7l./2) ~ HI (T1 -; 7l.) ® 7l./2. Case 2: The class [T2-J- [T2RJ. The argument for [T2-J- [T2RJ is essentially the same as the preceding one and will not be given. Case 3: The classes {[Ta,pl}. The first step is to consider the trivialization of the normal bundle of E 1- along a given Ta,p. LEMMA 4.6. There are fiducial normal frames for E 1 - (as d"efined in Section 4h) that restrict to Ta,p as the restriction of a normal frame e = (e1, e2, es) which is a product normal frame for the submanifold R1 x fut(R2) c W x W as described by (4.20).
This lemma is proved below; accept it momentarily to continue the proof of Lemma 4.5. Describe the push-off of Ta,p_ into Z - ~1 as follows: Let M s/ s == f- 1(3/8). Push l1~a into M 3 / s along the pseudo-gradient flow. Use !l~a to denote the resulting set of circles. Then (4.30)
is a acceptable push-off of Ta,p- into Z - ~1' Now, remark that l1~a bounds a smooth surface 8 a c cp(Ms/ s ), ana this means that rl' bounds in M s/ s , the bounding surface, Sa, is obtained by flowing 8 a alongthe pseudo-gradient flow lines into M s/ s . With the preceding understood, (4.31)
bounds L,p- in Z. Note that (4.31) is disjoint from E1- and from E1+' It is also disjoint from E L , and it is disjoint from ER if Sa is chosen to miss the point of intersection of'Y with cp(Ms / s ). The intersection of (4.31) with az is (4.32)
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
444
This may be non-empty. However, by assumption, the linking matrix of Section 3e has all entries zero, which means that the intersection points in (4.32) can be paired so that the local intersection numbers (±1) of the points in each pair cancel. The cancelling of these local signs in pairs implies that an ambient surgery in Z of the interior of (4.32) (remove (SO x B3) which intersect !:::.Z and replace with (B1 x S2)'S which do not) will result in a submanifold with boundary in Z which is completely disjoint from ~1 and which bounds L,{3-' Proof. Upon restriction to TO/,/3, a fiducial normal frame ~ for E 1- (as described in Section 4h) has the form 9 . e for some 9 : TO/,{3 ~ SO(3). IT g is null-homotopic, then ~ can be homotoped in a neighborhood of T ,{3 to restrict to TO/,{3 as the restriction of e. With the preceding understood, remark that a map 9 as above is null homotopic if and only if 9 lifts to a map into S3. The obstruction to finding such a lift is g*a E H 1(TO/,{3; Z/2), where a generates H1(SO(3); Z/2). Now, TO/,{3 is the disjoint union of push-off copies of an embedded torus, (c,o(7110/) x fut(712/3)) n Z. The first homology of this embedded torus is generated by the circles (c,o(711a,) X fut(x2)) n Z and (Xl x fut(712{3)) x Z; here Xl E c,o(7110/) while X2 E 712{3. This fact with Lemma 4.3 insures that g*a is zero. 0 Q
k) Intersections with
L.±"
Reintroduce the function F on W x W which assigns fey) - f(x) to a point (x, y). As remarked in Section 3 of [7], the critical points of F are the points (p, q) where p and q are critical points of f. The descending 4-ball from the point (b 2 , b1 ) intersects Z as an embedded 3-sphere which will be denoted by S(2,1)' (In (3.32) of [7], this 3-sphere is denoted by S(b2,bd-; but such notation is not necessary here.) Likewise, the ascending 4-ball from (b 1 , b2 ) intersects Z as an embedded 3-sphere which will be denoted by S(1,2) (rather than S(bl,b 2)+ as in (3.33) of [7]). The purpose of this subsection is to prove LEMMA 4.7. The intersection numbers of E 1- and of E1+ with S(2,1) add 'Up to zero. The intersection numbers of E 1- and of E1+ with S(1,2) also add 'Up to zero.
Proof. To consider the case of S(2,1). note that the descending ball from (b 2, bt) is Bb 2 + X B b1 -. The intersection numbers of E 1- and of E1+ with S(2,1) (in Z) are minus the respective intersection numbers (in W x W) of E l - and of E1+ with Bb2+ x Bbl _. Consider first the intersection number of E 1- with Bb2+ x Bbt-' There are no intersection points in (fut(Tt) x T 2 ) n Z because the intersection between Bbl- and T2 occurs near f- 1(1/4), while on futeTI),f ~ 3/8. As for (Tl x fut(T2 n Z, note that Bb 2 + has intersection number ml,2 with T l ; one intersection point is in each of the Iml,21 copies of Bb2- which sit in B~l _. Each of these intersection points can be assumed to have a different value of I, but all such values occur near l(b 2 ). Meanwhile, Bbl~ has intersection
»
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
445
number m/ml with fut(T2) n ,-I(f(b2 )). This number is computed using the following facts:
(4.33)
1) The intersection number of Tl with fut(T2) n ,-I(f(b2) is the same as that of Tl with T2· 2) Tl intersects fut(T2) n ,-1 (f(b 2 )) only in the push-off copies of Bbl- in cp(B~/l_).
Thus, Bb2+ x Bbl- has intersection number m· m1,2/m1 with E 1- (so 8(2,1) has intersection number equal to -m· ml,2/ml with El-). Now turn to the intersection number of Bb2+ x Bbl- with E1+. Here, there are no intersections in (fut(T2) x T1 ) n Z because Bb 2 + intersects fut(T2) where , > 7/16, while Bbl- intersects Tl where, is approximately 3/8. On the other hand, Bb2+ has intersection number m2 with T 2 , once in each copy of Bb 2 - that makes up B~2_. Each such intersection takes place near b2 • Meanwhile, the intersection number between Bbl- and fut(T1) n- 1 (b 2 ) is equal to -m· ml,2/(ml . m2). This number is computed using the following facts:
1) Tl has zero intersection number with itself. 2) A push-off copy of Tl can be constructed which intersects T1 (4.34) as a push-off of B~l- intersects fut(Rt) n ,-1(7/16). 3) T2 has m intersections with Tl, one in each of the push-off copies of B b2 - that comprise B~2-.
Thus, B b2 + x Bbl- has intersection number -m ·ml,2/m1 with E1+ (so 8(2,1) has intersection number m· ml,2/ml with E1+). The case for 8(1,2) follows from the preceding computation because 8(1,2) = 9(8(2,1») while 9 interchanges E 1- with E1+. 0 5 The Construction of E±. The previous section began the construction of Ez in the case where W is a cobordism of simple type as described in Definition 2.2. (See (4.1).) This section will finish the construction of Ez for such a cobordism. Indeed, (4.1) is missing only definitions of E±; and this section will construct E± from El± via ambient surgery in Z. The surgical techniques here are those from Sections 7-10 of [7]. a) Constructing E2-: Push-offs and tUbings. Begin with E 1 - of the preceding section. Using the fiducial normal framing at the end of Section 4h, make 2m disjoint, push-9ff copies of E 1 - in addition to the original. Orient the first m copies as the original, and orient the last m copies in reverse. Use E~_ to denote the resulting disjoint union. The boundary of E 1 - is described in (4.5) and (4.6). That is, it is a union of 3-spheres which are push-off copies of (8 3 hl+ or of (8 3 h2_ in (8 3 x 8 3 )bl or in (8 3 x 8 3 )h, respectively. As described at the end of Section 4e, there is an
446
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
arc component v of E 1 _
n D:.z that connects a positively oriented component
8 1 C 8E1 - n (83 x 8 3 h1_ with a positively oriented component 8 2 C 8E1 _ n (83 x 8 3 h2' Each of the first m - 1 push-off copies of E 1 - contains a push-off copy of
8 1. Let {81a}::~01 denote this set of push-offs. Here, 810 is the original 8 1 in
the original copy of E 1 _. Use {82a}::~l to denote the corresponding copies of 8 2 (with 8 20 denoting the original), and let {va,}::~l denote the corresponding copies of v. Note that the components of (8E~_ n (8 3 x 8 3 h1) - {81a } can be paired up so that each pair contains one positively oriented sphere and one negatively oriented sphere. The spheres in each pair should be tubed to each other as described in Section 7b of [7] (see (7.3) in [7]). Note: As m ~ 1, there is at least one pair to tube here. Likewise, the components of (8E~_ n (8 3 x 8 3 h2) - {82a } can be paired so that each pair contains one positively oriented sphere and one negatively oriented sphere. The spheres in each pair should be tubed to each other as described in the same Section 7b of [7]. There is at least one pair to tube here too. Use E 2 - to describe the submanifold (with boundary) of Z that results. By construction, (5.1) Note as well (see Section 7e of [7]) that after a small perturbation, the intersection of E 2 - with D:.z will be transversal, and given by (5.2) where C C int(D:.z) is a disjoint union of embedded circles. One can argue as in Section 7f of [7] that E 2 - has trivial normal bundle in Z with a framing which restricts to each component of 8~_ as the constant normal framing. Meyer-Vietoris (as used in the proof of Assertion 6 of Proposition 7.4 in [7]) shows that H2(E2_) ::::: H2(E~_). Define E2+ 8(E2_) and define E2 as in (4.27) with E2± instead of El±. Define the homorphism , : H 2 (E2- U EL U ER) - t H 2 (Z) from the inclusion into Z, and define " : H 2 (E2 - U Et U ER) - t H 2 (Z - E 2 ) by analogy with (4.28) using the homotopy class of normal frame for E 2 - which is inherited (as in Section 7f of [7]) from the canonical homotopy class of normal frame for E 1 _. Then
=
(5.3)
ker(L)
= ker(,'),
just as in Lemma 4.4. To prove (5.3), note first that (5.3) holds for E~_ since E~_ is the disjoint union of some number of push-off copies of E1_0 Next, remark that E 2 - = EL except near az. Finally, note that the homologies which prove Lemma 4.4 for E 1 - are made away from az.
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
447
As a final comment about E 2 -, remark that the tubing can be done in such a way that E 2- has empty intersection with EL,Ri and it can be done so that the tubing avoids the spheres 8(2,1) and 8(1,2) of Lemma 4.7. In any event, the fundamental class [~_] in H 4 (Z, OZ) will equal [E1 -].
b) Constructing E 3 _: Removing circles. The goal here is to take some number N1 of like oriented, push-off copies of E 2 - and do surgery on the circles in its intersection with t1 z . The goal is to obtain a manifold E 3 - with the following properties: PROPOSITION 5.1. There is an oriented submanifold (with boundary) E 3 - C Z and an integer N ~ 1 with the following properties: 1) The fundamental class [E3-] in H 4 (Z, oZ) is equal to m- 1 • N . [E1-], and, in particular, obeys
2)
The boundary of E 3 - is a submanifold of oZ, given by
oE3-
3)
4) 5)
= (U~=1S1a) U (U~=1S2a),
where each S1a is a push-off copy of (S3 x point) C (S3 x S3hl' while each S2a is a push-off copy of (point xS 3 ) C (S3 x S3h2. E 3 - has empty intersection with Mo x Mo and with M1 x M1. E 3 - has empty intersection with EL and with ER. E 3 - has transversal intersection with t1z and E3 -
n t1z = U~=1Va,
where {va} are all push-off copies of an arc. Furthermore, for each a, Va has one end point on S1a n t1z and the other on S2a n t1z. 6) E 3 - has trivial normal bundle in Z, and this normal bundle has a fiducial frame ( which restricts to each S1a and each S2a as the constant normal frame. 7) E 3 - is obtained from the disjoint union, E~_, of some number N1 of like oriented, pwh-off copies of E 2 - by ambient surgery in Z on embedded circle~ in E~_ n t1z. This surgery naturally identifies H2(E3_i Q) ~ ffiN1H2 (E~_ i Q). 8) Define E3+ 9(E3_) and define E3 as in (4.27) with E 3 ± instead of El±. Define the homorphism t : H 2(E3- U EL U ER) --t H2(Z) from the inclusion into Z, and define t' : H 2(E3- U EL U ER) --t H 2(Z - E 3 ) by analogy with (4.28) using the homotopy class of normal frame for E3from Assertion 6, above. Then ker(t) = ker(t'). 9) The intersection numbers of E 3 - and E 3 + with the sphere 8(1,2) (of Lemma 4.7) sum to zero; and the same is true for the intersection numbers of E 3 - and E3+ with 8(2,1).
=
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
448
Proof. The submanifold E 3 - is constructed by mimicking the proof of Proposition B.1 in [7]. To be brief, the first step is to invoke Propositions 8.3 and 8.7 in [7]. Copy the arguments in Sections Be, Bd and Be of [7] to verify that the assumptions of Propositions B.3 and B.7 can be met with the following choices of A,B,X and 0:
1)
(5.4)
2)
3) 4)
A is the interior of some number NI of like oriented, push-off copies ofE2 _. B = int(~z). X = int(Z). 0 is the compliment in int(Z) of the closure of a regular neighborhood of az u v U EL U ER.
Here, v C ~z n E 1 - is described in Section 5a, above; and it is assumed that 0 does not contain the NI . m push copies of v which are the arc components of An~z. (Note that there is a basis (Le., [T1 ] and [T2D for B's second homology in which the B's intersection form is a 2 x 2 matrix with zero's on the diagonal. A symmetric, bilinear form with this property is even.) In proving Assertion 7, note that the union of the circles in E~_ n ~z is homologically non-trivial because the construction of E 2 _ required at least one pair of tubings near each of (83 x S3hl,2' The prooffor Assertion B of Proposition 5.1 is as follows: The assertion holds with EL replacing E 3 - everywhere since E~_ is a union of push-off copies of ~_. Meanwhile, the surgery which changes E~_ to E 3 - takes place in a regular neighborhood of ~z, and the homologies which prove that ker(t) = ker(t') can be made with support away from ~z. (See the proof of Lemma 4.4.) Assertion 9 of Proposition 5.1 follows from Assertion 1 and Lemrna 4.7. D c) Constructing E4±; straightening EH n E 3 -
•
The intersection of EH with E 3 - can be something of a mess. After small perturbations of E 3 ±, this intersection has the form (5.5)
EH
n E 3 - = rue,
=
where r c Z is the union of r 1 U~=l va with some N - 1 like oriented, push-offs of r 1 into Z - ~z. These push-offs can be assumed as close to ~z as desired. Meanwhile, C C int(Z) - ~z is a disjoint union of embedded circles. By the way, (5.5) can be established using (3.17.4). Argue as in Section 9 in [7] to prove that ambient surgery on a pair, E~_, of like oriented push-offs of E 3 - , with ambient surgery on a pair, E~+, of like oriented push-offs of E3+ will result in submanifolds E4± with the following properties: PROPOSITION 5.2. There are connected, oriented submanifolds (with boundary) E 4 - C Z and EH C Z and an integer N ~ 1 with the following properties: 1) The fundamental classes [E4±J in H4(Z, aZ) equal m- 1 • N . [El±] and furthermore obey
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
8[E4+]
2) Let e : Z
3)
449
= N· [S3]bl_ + N· [S3]b2+.
~ Z denote the switch map. Near 8Z U tl. z ,
The boundary of E4- is a submanifold of 8Z, given by 8E4_ = (U~=ISla) U (U~=lS2a), where each Sla is a push-off copy of (S3 X point) C (S3 X S3)bl' while each S2a is a push-off copy of (point xS 3) C (S3 x S3h2.
4) E4± have empty intersection with Mo x Mo and with Ml x MI. 5) E4± have empty intersection with EL and with ER. 6) E4± have tmnsversal intersection with tl.z, and E4-
n tl.z
= E 4+ n tl.z = U~=l Va,
where {va} are all push-off copies of an arc. Furthermore, for each cr, Va one end point on Sla n tl.z and the other on S2a n tl.z . E4- has tmnsversal intersections with E4+. Furthermore, h~s
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
where r is the union of r l == Ua=INva and some N - 1 like oriented, push-off copies of r 1 in Z - tl. z . E4± have trivial normal bundles in Z, and these normal bundles have frames (± with properties which include: The frames (± restrict to each boundary component as the constant frame. Furthermore, where Assertion 2 holds, (+ = e * ((_). E4± are obtained from the union, E~±, of one or possibly two like oriented, push-off copies of E 3± by ambient surgery in int(Z - tl. z ) on the circles in E~_ n E~+. These surgeries natumlly identify H2 (E4±; Q) ::::: ffiH2(E~±; Q). Define E4 as in (4.27) with E4± instead of E1±. Define the homorphism. t : H2(E4_UE4+UELUER) ~ H 2(Z) from the inclusion into Z, and define £': H2(E4-UEHUELUER) ~ H 2(Z-E 4) by analogy with (4.28) using the homotopy class of normal frame for E 4± from Assertion 7, above. Then ker(t) = ker(t' ). The intersection numbers of E 4- and E4+ with the sphere S(1,2) (of Lemma 4.7) sum to zero; and the same is true for the intersection numbers of E4- and EH with 8(2,1).
The fact that Z is path connected implies that E4± can be constructed to be path connected. See Lemma 8.10 in [7] and its proof. Remark that the last assertion of Proposition 5.2 follows from Assertion 1 and Lemma 4.7. The argument for Assertion 9 proceeds as follows: Since E~± are
450
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
disjoint unions of push-off copies of E3±, Assertion 9 holds if E~± everywhere replace E4±' Now, E4± is constructed by surgery on E~±i and these surgeries can be performed away from the generators of H 2 • Furthermore, the surgeries take place in a regular neighborhood of a surface with boundary or 3-ball in Z, and so can be performed away from the homologies which establish Assertion 9 for E~±. (See the proof of Lemma 404.) d) The meld construction and E±. This section constructs E± from E4± using the meld operation of Section 10 in [7}. In this regard, note that the behavior of E 4 - near 8Z U t1z is described by (10.2-5) in [7] modulo notation. To be precise, there is a regular neighborhood U C Z of 8Z n t1z such that E4- n U is a set {Ya}:=l (with N from Proposition 5.2), where {Ya~2} are disjoint, like oriented push-off copies of Y1 • Meanwhile, Yi is the image of a proper embedding into U of the space in (10.3) of [7]; this being the compliment in the open unit 4-ball of the open balls B± of radius 1/8 and centers (±1/4, 0, 0, 0). Note here that the boundary of B+ is mapped diffeomorphically onto (8 3 )b1+ C (83 x 8 3 h1' and the boundary of B_ is likewise mapped onto (8 3 h2_ C (83 X 8 3 h2' Meanwhile, the arc along the x-axis between (±1/8, 0, 0, 0) is mapped to the arc v C E 4 - n t1 z . The {Ya >2} are described by (lOA) and (10.5) in [7]. The melded space, E_, is then described by (10.8) in [7]. (See also (10.9) and (10.10) in [7].) As for E+, the neighborhood U can be chosen to be invariant under the switch map (4.11) and such that E4+nU = 9(E4_ nUl. With this understood, define E+ n (Z - U) E4+ n (Z - U), and define E+ n U 9(E_ n U). Note that
=
1)
(5.6)
2)
3)
=
[E±] = m- 1 • N . [El±] in H4(Z, 8Zi Z). 8[E_] = N· [8 3 ]b1+ + N· [8 3 ]62_ and 8[E+] = N· [8 3 ]b 1_ + [8 3 ]b2+' H2(E±iCij):::::: H2(E4±iCij).
6 Completing the proof The purpose of this last section is to complete the proof of Theorem 1.3 along the lines that were outlined in Section Ie. Thus, suppose that Mo and MI are compact, oriented 3-manifolds with the rational homology of 8 3 • Assume that Mo and MI are spin cobordant by a cobordism whose intersection form is equivalent to a sum of metabolics (see (1.3)). As descibed in (1.4), one can find such a cobordism which factors as WI UW2 UW3 , where WI and W3 have the rational homology of 8 3 , and where W 2 has a good Morse function with only index 2 critical points. As in Proposition 2.1, the cobordism W 2 can be factored as Uj'=l W 2"j, where each W 2,j is a cobordism of simple type (Definition 2.2) between a pair, F j - l and Fj , of rational homology spheres. Here, Fo = M~ and Fn = M{. Define Z2 == Uj Z 2,i, where each Z2,J C W2,j X W2,j is defined as in Section 2c. The id~ntifi~ation of Fj x Fj C Z2,j with Fj x Fj C Z2,j+1 is left implicit here. Use thIS Z2 ln (1.5)
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
451
Fix base points in each Pj. Then define {Ez N ·} as in (4.1). With this understood, set EZ2 == UjEzN. after making the implicit boundary identifications. Use this EZ2 in (1.6). Step 3 of the outline in Section 1c constructs a closed 2-form Wz on the compliment of Ez which obeys Wz I\wz I\wz = 0 near Ez. The construction of Wz proceeds by first constructing a closed 2-form ~z on the compliment of Ez in a regular neighborhood Nz of E z in Z. The form ~z will be built so that it satisfies Condition 1 of Lemma 4.2 in [7]. Also, f!lz 1\ f!lz = O. The form will then be extended over the compliment of Ez of a neighborhood of az U Ez so that its pull-back to any boundary component M x M - EM is a form which computes 12(M). Here M x M is any of Mo x Mo, Ml X Ml or any (8 3 x 8 3)bli' (83 X 83h2i' The next question is whether the form f!lz so constructed can be extended over Z - Ez. The author does not know when such is the case. However, it is shown below that there is a closed 2-form JJ on N z which obeys JJ 1\ JJ = 0, which vanishes near az, and is such that Wz == f!lz - I' extends over Z - Ez as a closed form. Note that such a form will satisfy the third condition in (1.7). The form I' will vanish near EZI and near Ezs' Furthermore, JJ will be written as JJ = Ej =lnJJ2,j, where 1'2,j has compact support in the interior of Z2,j' With this understood, the construction of 1'2,j can be made independently for each factor Z2,j which comprises Z2.
a) f!lz near Ez and
az.
The construction of the closed 2-form f!lz on the compliment of Ez in a regular neighborhood Nz C Z of Ez U az proceeds by mimicking the constructions in Sections 11a - 11i of [7] which construct Wz near Ez when the cobordism between Mo and Ml has the rational homology of 8 3 • The conditions in Theorem 1.3 that W be spin and that the canonical frame be represented by c in the kernel of the homomorphism tw arise here. The verification of Condition 1 of Lemma 4.2 for Wz proceeds as in Section 11k of [7], and the reader is referred there. (But note Assertion 10 of Proposition 5.2.) b) The obstruction from cobordisms of simple type.
At this point, the proof of Theorem 1.3 must diverge from the proof of Theorem 2.9 in [7] because the restriction homomorphism H2(Z) -+ H2(Ez) will not generally be surjective. (Use real coefficients here and throughout this section.) Thus, the second part of Lemma 4.2 in [7] can not be invoked. This failure of surjectivity obstructs the extension of f!lz to Z - Ez. This extension obstruction will be studied by using the fact that restriction to the Z2,j defines isomorphisms H2(Z) ~ ffijH2(Z2,j) and H2(Ez) ~ ffi j H 2(Ez2 .;). (Meyer-Vietoris proves these assertions.) These direct sum decompositions imply that the obstruction to extending Wz over Z - Ez can be understood by restricting attention to Z2 - EZ2 and even further, by restricting attention to
Z2,j'
More precisely, the obstructions to extending I",lz can be
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
452
understood by restricting attention to the very special case of a cobordism of simple type (as in Definition 2.2). With the preceding understood, agree, for the remainder of Section 11, to restrict attention to a particular cobordism of simple type. Simplify notation by using W now to denote this simple type cobordism. Then, Z c W x W and Ez C Z are defined accordingly. With Z as just redefined, note that the extension obstruction may well exist because rank(H2(Ez» ~ 10 while rank(H2(Z» = 4. Indeed, Lemma 2.3 describes H2(Z)(~ JR4), while Meyer-Vietoris with Proposition 5.2 find
(6.1) H 2(E z ) ~ H
=
H2(~Z) E9
H2(EL) E9 H2(ER) E9 H2(E_) E9 H2(E+).
In fact, the restriction map from Z to Ez maps H2(Z) injectively into H2(EL)E9
H2(ER)' c) Analyzing the obstruction.
Let W be a cobordism of simple type and let Z C W x W and let I: z C Z be defined accordingly. Let N z C Z be a regular neighborhood of I:z. Introduce (6.2)
ii : H2(Z - Ez) ~ H2(Nz - I:z) ii : H2(Nz) ~ H2(Nz - I:z)
and
to denote the pull-back homomorphisms. One can conclude from the MeyerVietoris exact sequence that (6.3) and the purpose of the subsequent arguments is to prove PROPOSITION 6.1. Equation (6.9) can be solved with a closed 2-/orm f3 on N z which obeys f3 A f3 = 0 and which vanishes near az .
=
Remark that the lemma implies that Wz !!lz - iif3 extends over Z - Ez (as a in (6.3)) and it obeys Wz A Wz A Wz = 0 near Ez as required. d) Strategy for the proof of Proposition 6.1.
The proof of Proposition 6.1 starts with the remark that the various framings that were introduced in the construction of Wz can be used to construct a homomorphism (6.4)
with the property that the composition of j with i2 (the dual of ii in (6.2)) gives the identity. Indeed, each of ~z, E L,R and E4± have natural trivializations of their normal bundles. And, these trivializations can be used to push-off the generating cycles for the homology groups in question. (For EL,R, see the proof of Lemma 4.4, and see Assertion 9 of Proposition 5.2 for E4± .) In this regard, note that an application of Meyer-Vietoris shows that the dimension 2 homology
453
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
of Ez can be represented by submanifolds in dz, EL,R and in the smooth parts of E±; and these submanifolds can be assumed to be disjoint from E± n dz and from EL,R n dz. The homomorphism j has the property that (6.5)
(wz,j(·)}
= o.
(This is because j is defined by the same homotopy class of normal framing which is used to define wz.) Put (6.5) aside for the moment to consider the composition (6.6) which will be denoted by t'. (The arrow i 1 in (6.6) is induced by the inclusion.) Define Q C H 2 (Ez) by the exact sequence (6.7)
0 ~ Q ~ H2(Ez) ~ ker(t')* ~ O.
Note that the restriction induced monomorphism H2(Z) ~ H 2(E z ) factors through Q. H the quotient Q/H2(Z) is zero, then it follows from (6.7) that (6.3) can be solved with f3 == o. H the quotient Q/ H2 (Z) is one dimensional, and if a generator can be represented by a form f3 with {3" (3 0, then Proposition 6.1 follows. Thus, the proof of Proposition 6.1 will proceed with a proof that the dimension of Q/ H2 (Z) is one or less. The proof will end by finding a generator (when dim(Q/H 2(Z)) = 1) which is represented in Q by a form with square zero (see (6.10), below). By the way, the following lemma will be the principle tool for finding closed forms with square zero:
=
LEMMA 6.2. Let X be an oriented ..I-manifold, and let ReX be a compact, oriented, embedded sur/ace. Suppose that R has zero self-intersection number. Given an open neighborhood 0 C X of R, there is a closed 2-form J.l. with J.l. " J.l. = 0 which is supported in 0 and which represents the Poincare dual to R in H~omp(X).
Proof. The surface R has trivial normal bundle. Use this fact as in (6.12) of [7] to define a fibration from a neighborhood of R in X to the unit disk in IR2 which sends R to the origin. Use such a map to pull-back from said unit disk a 2-form with compact support in the interior and with total mass equal to one. Set J.l. equal to this pull-back. 0 e) The dilllension of Q / H2 (Z).
Here is the answer to the dimension question: LEMMA
6.3. The dimension of Q / H2 (Z)) is one or zero.
Proof. The inclusion of I:z into Z induces the homomorphism t : H 2 (I:z) --+ Then, the dimension of Q/H2(Z) is equal to the dimension of ker(t)/ ker(t'). H2(Z).
454
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
To prove that ker(t)/ ker(,-/) has dimension 1 or less, consider an integral class u E H 2 (Ez) with t·u = 0, but with t'·u '" O. Since '·U = 0, there is a bounding 3-cycle T C Z. The cycle T is a sum of singular simplices; and these simplices can be chosen to have the following property: Each is a smooth map from the standard 3-simplex into Z which is transversal to each of t:J. z , E L , E R , E4± on the interior of every codimension p = 0,··· ,3 face of the standard simplex. (Thus, the boundary of the standard simplex is mapped into the complimep.t of Ez.) With this understood, it makes sense to speak of the intersection number of T with each of t:J.z, EL, ER, E4±' Note that the intersection number between T and E4± can be assumed to be divisible by the integer N of Proposition 5.2. This can be achieved by replacing u with N . u. Observe now that intersections of T with any of EL, ER, E 4± can be removed by changing T to T', where T' has extra intersections with t:J.z. For example, one can add to T some multiple of [Po x Mo] to remove the intersection points with EL at the expense of adding such points to t:J.z. Likewise, adding to T multiples of [S3]bl_ will remove intersections with E 4- and add intersections with t:J.z. Note that all of T'S intersections with E4- can be transferred to t:J.z because E4- is connected, and because T'S intersection number with t:J.z is assumed'divisible by the integer N from Proposition 5.2. The cases for ER and E4± are analogous. (See, e.g., (9.9a,b) in [7].) It follows from the preceding that ker(t)/ ker(t' ) is at most one-dimensional. This is because any element in this quotient can be represented by a closed 2-cycle which bounds T as above, whose intersections with E z lie in t:J.z only. Given two such elements, a non-trivial linear combination would be represented by a closed 2-cycle which bounds T as above with absolutely no intersections with Ez. Such a linear combination would be zero in ker(t)/ker(t' ). 0
f) ker(t). The final step in the proof of Proposition 6.1 is to consider the possible generators of Q/H2(Z) in the case where this group has dimension l. A generator of this group is represented by a class l E H2(Ez) which annihilates the kernel of t / , but which is non-zero on a class u E H 2 (E z ) which is annihilated by '- but not by ,-'. The analysis of l proceeds by considering various possibilities for ker(£)/ ker(£I). Remark that if this group has dimension 1, then it can be represented in ker(£) by some generator. In H 2(t:J. Z ) ffi H 2(EL) ffi H2(ER) sits a two-dimensional subspace of ker(t). An element in ker(£) n (H2(t:J. Z ) ffi H 2(EL ) ffi H 2(E R )) has the form (6.8)
where u. sits in the summand with the corresponding label. Here, each u. pushes forward to W as the same class Uo E H2(W). Then, two generators of the kernel of tin H2(Llz) ffi H 2(EL) Ell H 2(ER) are given by u as above with Uo = [Tll and with 0"0 = [T2 ].
METABOLIC COBORDISMS
455
The remaining generators of the kernel of " can be taken to have the form 1)
0'+1 - O'R1 and 0'+2 - O'L21 0'-1 - O'L1 and 0"-2 - 0'R2, {A±c}.
2)
(6.9)
3)
Here, 0'±l,2 E H2(E±), while O'L1,2 E H 2(EL) and O"R1,2 E H 2(ER) project to H 2 (W) as multiples of [T1,2], respectively. Meanwhile, {A±c} E H 2(E±) is a finite set of classes, and each is represented by a push-off of some Ta,p:I: as described in (4.23). LEMMA
6.4.
The classes in (6.9) are annihilated by,'.
Proof. This follows from Assertion 9 of Proposition 5.2. With the preceding lemma understood, it follows that a generator of ker(t)/ ker(,') is described by (6.8).
g) If 0'
= 0'lJ. -
O'L - O"R is not annihilated by
t'.
In this case, there exists 0" as above with either 0"0 = [T1] or 0"0 = [T2]' For arguments sake, assume 0'0 = [T1]' Let f3lJ.l E H2(ElJ.) be the pull-back by the map 7rL to W of the Poincare dual to [T2]. Then f3lJ.l pairs non-trivially with O"L and so with 0". Let f3R2 E H2(ER) be the pull-back by 7rR of the Poincare dual to [T1]. Note that f3R2 pairs trivially with 0". It follows that there is c E lR. such that f3' f3lJ. 1 + C • f3R2 annihilates the ker(,,) in H 2 (6.z) E9 H 2(E L ) E9 H 2(ER). This f3' will have trivial pairing with the classes in (6.9.1), and it will have trivial pairing with 0"-1 - O"L1 in (6.9.2), but unless c = 0, it will pair non-trivially with 0"-2 - O"R2 in (6.9.2). However, note that the Poincare dual, f3-2 E H 2(E_), to 0"-1 pairs trivially with 0"-1 and non-trivially with 0"-2. And so, there is a real number c' such that
=
(6.10)
f3
=f3lJ.l + c . f3R2 + c' . f3-2
annihilates all of the classes in (6.9.2). Note that f3 will also annihilate the classes in (6.9.3). By appeal to Lemma 6.2, each of f3lJ.1I f3R2, and f3-2 can be represented by a closed form with square zero and with support away from az. (This is because [Td and [T2] are classes with square zero in W.) Furthermore, Lemma 6.2 insures that these forms can be constructed to have disjoint supports. Thus, f3 will vanish near az and have square zero as required. REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
S. Axelrod & I. M. Singer, Chern-Simons perturbation theory, Proc. XXth DGM Conference (New York, 1991, S. Catto and A. Tocha, eds.), World Scientific, 1992, 3-45. _ _ , Chern-Simones perturbation theory. II, J. Differential Geometry 39 (1994) 173-213.
456
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8]
CLIFFORD HENRY TAUBES
F. Hirzebruch, W. D. Neumann & S. S. Koh, Differentiable manifolds and quadratic forms, Marcell Decker, New York, 1971. M. Kontsevich, Feynman diagrams and low dimensional topology, MaxPlanck-Institute, Bonn, Preprint, 1993. C. C. MacDuffe, The theory of matrices, Springer, Berlin, 1933. J. Milnor, Lectures on the h-cobomism theorem, Notes by L. Siebenmann and J. Sondau, Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1965. C. H. Taubes, Homology cobordisms and the simplest perlurbative ChernSimons 9-manifold invariant, Geometry, Topology and Physics for Raovl Bott, ed. S.T. Yau, International Press, 1995. E. Witten, Quantum field theory and the Jones polynomial, Comm. Math. Phys. 117 (1988) 351-399.